347 files changed, 26162 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/21268-8.txt b/21268-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4942b20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8653 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Search for the Silver City
+       A Tale of Adventure in Yucatan
+
+Author: James Otis
+
+Release Date: May 2, 2007 [EBook #21268]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile
+held firm, etc. See Page 193.]
+
+
+
+
+THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.
+
+A TALE OF ADVENTURE IN YUCATAN.
+
+
+By JAMES OTIS.
+Author of "The Castaways," "A Runaway Brig," "The
+Treasure Finders," etc., etc.
+
+
+ILLUSTRATED.
+
+
+NEW YORK:
+A. L. BURT, PUBLISHER.
+
+Copyright, 1893, by A. L. BURT.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In Mr. E. G. Squier's preface to the translation of the Chevalier Arthur
+Morelet's "Travels in Central America" the following paragraph can be
+found:
+
+"Whoever glances at the map of Central America will observe a vast
+region, lying between Chiapas, Tabasco, Yucatan, and the republic of
+Guatemala, and comprising a considerable part of each of those states,
+which, if not entirely a blank, is only conjecturally filled up with
+mountains, lakes and rivers. It is almost as unknown as the interior of
+Africa itself. We only know that it is traversed by nameless ranges of
+mountains, among which the great river Usumasinta gathers its waters
+from a thousand tributaries, before pouring them, in a mighty flood,
+into the Lagoon of Terminos, and the Gulf of Mexico. We know that it has
+vast plains alternating with forests and savannas; deep valleys where
+tropical nature takes her most luxuriant forms, and high plateaus dark
+with pines, or covered with the delicate tracery of arborescent ferns.
+We know that it conceals broad and beautiful lakes, peopled with fishes
+of new varieties, and studded with islands which supports the crumbling
+yet still imposing remains of aboriginal architecture and superstition.
+And we know, also, that the remnants of the ancient Itzæs, Lacandones,
+Choles, and Manches, those indomitable Indian families who successfully
+resisted the force of the Spanish arms, still find a shelter in its
+fastnesses, where they maintain their independence, and preserve and
+practice the rites and habits of their ancestors as they existed before
+the discovery. Within its depths, far off on some unknown tributary of
+the Usumasinta, the popular tradition of Guatemala and Chiapas places
+that great aboriginal city, with its white walls shining like silver in
+the sun, which the _curé_ of Quiche affirmed to Mr. Stephens he had seen,
+with his own eyes, from the tops of the mountains of Quesaltenango."
+
+In Stephens' "Yucatan," Vol II, page 195, are the following lines:
+
+"He (meaning the padre of Quiche, with whom Mr. Stephens was
+conversing), was then young, and with much labor climbed to the naked
+summit of the Sierra, from which, at a height of ten or twelve thousand
+feet, he looked over an immense plain--and saw at a great distance a
+large city spread over a great space, and with turrets white and
+glittering in the sun. The traditionary account of the Indians of Chajul
+is, that no white man has ever reached this city, that the inhabitants
+speak the Maya language, are aware that a race of strangers has
+conquered the whole country around, and murder any white man who
+attempts to enter their territory. They have no coin or other
+circulating medium; no horses, cattle, mules, or other domestic animals
+except fowls, and the cocks they keep under ground to prevent their
+crowing being heard. One look at that city would be worth ten years of
+an every-day life. If he (the padre) is right, a place is left where
+Indians and an Indian city exist as Cortez and Alvarado found them;
+there are living men who can solve the mystery that hangs over the
+ruined cities of America; who perhaps can go to Copan and read the
+inscriptions on its monuments. No subject more exciting and attractive
+presents itself to my mind, and the deep impression will never be
+effaced."
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+                          PAGE.
+CHAPTER I.
+The Sea Dream.                1
+
+CHAPTER II.
+Under Weigh.                  8
+
+CHAPTER III.
+Nassau.                      19
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+A New Danger.                29
+
+CHAPTER V.
+Fighting the Flames.         39
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+The Last Resort.             49
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+On Shore.                    60
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+Suspense.                    71
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+Across the Country.          81
+
+CHAPTER X.
+A Strange Story.             91
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+The Journey.                101
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+The Silver City.            111
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+In the City.                122
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+The Festival.               132
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+A Retreat.                  142
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+Discovered.                 152
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+A Halt.                     162
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+Cave Life.                  172
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+A Change of Base.           182
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+A Desperate Struggle.       192
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+A Long Halt.                202
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+Jake's Venture.             212
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+A Hurried Departure.        222
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+Jake.                       231
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+On the Range.               241
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+The Pursuit.                251
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+At Bay.                     260
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+The Catastrophe.            270
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+A Fierce Conflict.          280
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+A Welcome Change.           290
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+The Sea.                    299
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+A Happy Surprise.           308
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII.
+Homeward Bound.             318
+
+
+
+
+THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE SEA DREAM.
+
+
+Three years ago last August, it is unnecessary to specify the exact
+date, Teddy Wright was not only a very lonely fellow, but considered
+himself abused by circumstances.
+
+During the previous season he had studied very hard at the military
+school on the Hudson which he often referred to slightingly as "the
+barracks," and as a reward for the flattering reports sent home by his
+teachers, had been promised a long vacation in the Adirondacks with a
+schoolmate who lived in the northern portion of New York state.
+
+Teddy's parents and sisters intended spending the summer at some one of
+the fashionable watering places; but with three long months of "roughing
+it" where game could be found in abundance, he had no desire to
+accompany them.
+
+"Life in the woods knocks staying at a big hotel on the sea-shore,
+where a fellow is obliged to be dressed up all the time," he said when
+one of his sisters expressed surprise at his choice. "We shall regularly
+camp out, and father has given me a doubled-barreled breech-loader, to
+say nothing of his own rod and collection of flies. Jack and I will have
+the jolliest kind of a time while you're moonin' on the hot sands trying
+to think it is fun."
+
+Teddy went to Jack's home, and, to his sorrow and dismay, found that
+young gentleman so ill that there was no hope of his being allowed to
+take the long-contemplated trip.
+
+He remained there, however, until perfectly certain of this unpleasant
+fact, and then returned home to the house which had been left in charge
+of one servant, and, as he expressed it, "just to spite himself,"
+refused to join the remainder of the family.
+
+Of course this was a most foolish proceeding; but Teddy was in that
+frame of mind where a boy of seventeen is prone to foolish deeds, and
+there he stayed in a frame of mind very nearly approaching the sulks,
+until he received a letter from Neal Emery, another schoolmate, whose
+father lived in Bridgeport.
+
+Mr. Emery owned a large factory in that city, and Neal had intended to
+spend his vacation at home where he could enjoy the use of a small
+sloop-rigged yacht his mother had presented him with the year previous.
+
+The letter contained a very pressing invitation for Teddy to visit
+Bridgeport, since his trip to the Adirondacks had been postponed, and
+concluded with the startling announcement:
+
+"Father has just bought the Sea Dream, a beautiful steam yacht of an
+hundred feet in length, and I don't know how many tons. He proposes to
+cruise around three or four weeks while mother is at Bar Harbor, and is
+perfectly willing I should invite you to join us. We will have a jolly
+time, and if nothing prevents I want you to come at once. We are to
+start Wednesday morning."
+
+The letter had been received Monday afternoon, therefore Teddy had but
+little time for preparation.
+
+He first sent a long telegram to his father, repeating the substance of
+what Neal had written, and asked permission to enroll himself on the Sea
+Dream's passenger list.
+
+Not until late in the evening did he receive a favorable reply; but his
+traps, including the gun and fishing tackle, were packed, and on the
+first train Tuesday morning he started, all traces of ill-humor having
+vanished, for a cruise on a steam yacht promised quite as great pleasure
+as had the stay in the woods, with not so much certainty of hard work.
+Neal met him at the depot, and after going to the former's home only
+long enough to leave the baggage, the two set out to view the yacht
+which, in all the bravery of glistening paint and polished metal, lay at
+anchor in the harbor.
+
+Although not an expert in matters pertaining to marine architecture,
+Teddy could appreciate the beauty of the little craft while she swung
+lazily to and fro at her cable as if husbanding strength against the
+time when speed and endurance would be required.
+
+Neal signaled from the pier, two of the crew came ashore in the
+captain's boat, and the boys went on board where, during the remainder
+of the day, they were busy examining and admiring the jaunty little
+craft.
+
+Leading from the main saloon were two state-rooms on either side, and in
+one of these Neal had already stored such of his belongings as he
+intended to take on the cruise.
+
+"This is our room, and now that we are here I wonder why we were so
+foolish as to carry your baggage up to the house. If it was with us we
+would remain on board, for it is very much more pleasant than in the hot
+town."
+
+"There is nothing to prevent our bringing it down," Teddy replied with
+a laugh. "I had certainly rather stay here to-night."
+
+"Come on, and then we shall feel more at home when the cruise begins."
+
+The boys were rowed ashore, and the sailors instructed to remain at the
+pier until their return.
+
+Then a short visit was made to Mr. Emery's office, where Neal explained
+what they proposed to do, and having received permission to occupy the
+quarters slightly in advance of sailing time, Teddy's baggage was soon
+in the small apartment which to both the boys looked so enchanting.
+
+"I wish we were to be gone three years," Teddy said as he threw himself
+on a locker and gazed around.
+
+If he could have known just at that moment how long the cruise would
+really last it is very certain he would not have expressed such a
+desire.
+
+"Next year father says he will start early in the season, take mother
+with us, and not come back until it is time for me to go to school."
+
+"And you must get an invitation for me," Teddy replied, his eyes
+glistening with pleasure at simply contemplating such an excursion.
+
+"There won't be any difficulty about it. He has already promised that if
+nothing happens he will speak to your father."
+
+"And in the meanwhile we've got before us the jolly fact that we're to
+stay on board a month."
+
+"Yes; but there's no good reason why we should remain below where it is
+so warm. Come on deck for awhile, and then we'll have a look at the
+engine-room."
+
+The engineer, Jake Foster, was under the awning aft, and Neal introduced
+his friend, saying as he did so:
+
+"Teddy has never been yachting before, not even in a sailing craft."
+
+Jake, a stout, jolly looking fellow hardly more than twenty-five years
+of age, gazed at the visitor curiously a moment, and then said with a
+hearty laugh:
+
+"He'll have a chance to find out what an acquaintance with the ocean
+means, for I understand that Mr. Emery is going to run well over to the
+Bahamas before he comes back."
+
+"Father has business there which it would be necessary to attend to not
+later than next fall, so intends to make it a portion of the pleasure
+trip."
+
+"Are we likely to have much rough weather?" Teddy asked, realizing for
+the first time that it was more than possible he might be called upon to
+pay Neptune a tribute.
+
+"Not at this time of the year; but its more'n probable the Sea Dream
+will kick up her heels enough to show something of what is meant by a
+life on the ocean wave before she pokes her nose into this port again."
+
+Then the engineer was summoned from below, and the boys remained aft
+recalling to mind all they had studied relative to the Bahama banks.
+
+The stores were on board; everything was in readiness for the start as
+soon as the owner should arrive, and when the steward summoned them to
+supper it seemed as if the voyage had really begun.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+UNDER WEIGH.
+
+
+It was a long while before the boys could close their eyes in slumber on
+this first night aboard the Sea Dream, owing to the novelty of the
+surroundings. It seemed as if Teddy would never cease admiring the snug
+quarters with the guns and fishing rods hung where they could be seen to
+the best advantage, and Neal had very much to say regarding the plans he
+proposed to carry into execution during the cruise.
+
+Despite such enchanting topics of conversation they were not able to
+remain awake all night, and when finally the journey into dreamland was
+made, neither returned to a full realization of the situation until
+quite late in the morning.
+
+Teddy was the first to open his eyes, and in a very few seconds the
+throbbing of the screw, as well as the invigorating draught of cool air
+which came through the open port-hole, told him that the voyage had
+really begun.
+
+"Neal, Neal," he cried, shaking his friend vigorously. "Wake up; I think
+we are at sea."
+
+Neal was on his feet in an instant, and after one glance through the
+tiny window he replied with a laugh:
+
+"There's no question about our being under way; but we sha'n't see the
+sea to-day."
+
+"Why, we are on it now."
+
+"If you have forgotten your geography as soon as this you'll be obliged
+to do some mighty hard studying when we get back to school. The Sea
+Dream must go through the sound before we reach the ocean, and most
+likely we shall make harbor at Martha's Vineyard to-night."
+
+"Of course I knew about the sound; I had forgotten, that's all," and
+Teddy looked just a trifle ashamed at having displayed so much
+ignorance.
+
+Never had the boys made their toilets more quickly. Both were eager to
+be on deck in order to extract the greatest possible amount of pleasure
+out of this first day of the cruise, and when they finally emerged from
+the companion-way an exclamation of surprise and delight burst from
+Teddy's lips.
+
+The yacht was steaming at nearly full speed over waters as placid as a
+pond, and here and there were craft of all kinds darting back and forth
+like active fish.
+
+"I tell you there's nothing in the way of sport to beat sailing," Teddy
+said enthusiastically.
+
+"There are times when it isn't quite as nice as this. When it storms,
+and the yacht dances around so that it is impossible to come on deck you
+will think camping in the Adirondacks is much better."
+
+"I thought vessels always went into a harbor at such times."
+
+"If you are at sea it is necessary to take whatever comes in the way of
+weather, but there is no reason why we should speak of such things now.
+Let's have a look at Jake and his engine before breakfast."
+
+During this first day of the cruise the boys were very busy.
+Considerable time was spent eating three decidedly hearty meals, and
+what with inspecting every portion of the steamer and watching the
+passing vessels, they managed without much trouble to find something in
+the way of amusement until the Sea Dream arrived off Cottage City, where
+Mr. Emery proposed to stop a day or two.
+
+The wind had come up quite strong toward night, and when the little
+craft swung to her anchors some distance from the shore Teddy was
+feeling decidedly disagreeable.
+
+There was not sea enough to trouble the greenest fresh-water sailor that
+ever "caught a crab;" but to poor Teddy, who had never been on the
+water save when crossing from New York to Brooklyn or Jersey City, it
+seemed as if the Sea Dream was very like a hideous nightmare.
+
+She danced lightly on the long swell as if courtesying to the craft in
+her immediate vicinity, and each graceful movement caused Neal's guest
+to fancy his stomach was turning somersaults.
+
+"You are not going below now?" the former said as Teddy staggered toward
+the companion-way.
+
+"I am if it is possible to get there," was the impatient reply.
+
+"But we shall have a chance to see the town. Father is going ashore
+presently."
+
+"In one of those little boats?" and Teddy pointed to the davits where
+four polished tenders hung glistening in the sun like some articles of
+adornment.
+
+"Of course. How else could he get there?"
+
+"That doesn't make any difference to me. This boat is bouncing around
+enough for a fellow to wish he'd never heard of such a thing as a yacht,
+and in one of those egg-shells I'm certain it must be terrible."
+
+"But it isn't. Try not to think of being sick, and come on shore with
+me."
+
+"How can I help not thinking about it when I feel as if I was dying?"
+
+Then, as if unable to prolong the conversation, Teddy ran below, while
+his friend followed more leisurely.
+
+Neal could offer no inducements sufficiently strong to tempt his
+companion out of the berth, and there he remained until next morning
+when, in half a gale of wind, Mr. Emery decided to take a party of
+friends to Nantucket.
+
+Only this was needed to give Teddy a severe attack of seasickness during
+which, when he spoke at all, it was to repeat over and over again his
+intention of going home as soon as the Sea Dream arrived at Cottage
+City.
+
+Probably he would have carried this threat into execution if the
+excursion had not been prolonged; but it was four days before the yacht
+returned to Martha's Vineyard, and by that time he had, as Jake
+expressed it, "found his sea legs."
+
+Now no matter how much the little craft tumbled around he remained
+undisturbed, and the sight of food was no longer disagreeable, but very
+pleasing to him.
+
+Therefore it was that when the Sea Dream left Cottage City for the
+Bahamas, the delightful portion of the cruise, so far as Teddy was
+concerned, had but just begun.
+
+Inasmuch as there was no especial reason why they should arrive at any
+certain time, and the owner wished to remain at sea as long as possible
+while making the voyage, the yacht was run at half speed, thus not only
+saving considerable coal; but unnecessary wear and tear of the
+machinery.
+
+That it could be very warm on the water had never entered the minds of
+the boys; but as they journeyed southward the heat became intense.
+During two days it was almost a perfect calm, the only air stirring
+being that caused by the motion of the steamer, and the cabin seemed
+like an oven. There the thermometer stood at 84 degrees, while in the
+galley it was twenty degrees higher, and in the engine-room it
+frequently rose to 130 degrees.
+
+Neal and Teddy could do little more than lie under the awning aft,
+working hard but unsuccessfully to keep cool by the aid of fans and such
+iced drinks as the steward prepared.
+
+The novelty of yachting had passed away in a measure, and they were
+already counting the days which must elapse before the Sea Dream would
+be in a less torrid climate.
+
+Jake had assured them that when the yacht came to an anchor and the
+fires were drawn it would be much cooler on board, therefore both the
+boys were delighted when Bridge Point at the entrance to the N. E.
+Providence Channel was sighted.
+
+There was a light breeze blowing off the banks, and the yacht was
+running slowly as she passed within a quarter of a mile of the low lying
+land, when suddenly a most disagreeable odor from the shore caused Neal
+to say impatiently:
+
+"If such perfumes as that are common to the Bahamas I had rather endure
+the heat than stay a very long while, no matter how cool it may be when
+we cease steaming."
+
+"What is it?" and Teddy covered his nose with his handkerchief.
+
+"I don't know; but I wish Jake would put her ahead faster, for it is
+absolutely sickening."
+
+His desire for more speed was not gratified. To the surprise of both the
+boys the engine-room gong sounded for the machinery to be stopped, and
+as the headway was checked Mr. Walters, the sailing master, came from
+the wheel-house to where Mr. Emery was sitting.
+
+The boys could not hear the short conversation which followed; but their
+surprise increased as the order was given to lower away one of the port
+boats.
+
+"What are we stopping here for?" Neal inquired of his father.
+
+"Doesn't the odor give you any idea?" Mr. Emery asked with a smile.
+
+"None except that the sooner we get away the more comfortable I shall
+feel."
+
+"When I tell you that we are likely to find as the cause of your
+discomfort something nearly as precious as gold, it may be a trifle more
+bearable."
+
+Both Neal and Teddy looked perplexed, and the latter said laughingly:
+
+"It is strong enough to be worth a good deal; but do you really mean
+what you say, sir?"
+
+"Every word. Mr. Walters thinks he can find ambergris which has been
+washed up on the rocks, and that is quoted at ten dollars per ounce. Now
+you boys have been at school long enough to know exactly why it is so
+valuable."
+
+"I have heard of it as being the base of the finest perfumes," Neal said
+slowly; "but that must surely be a mistake if it smells anything like
+this," and he did violence to his stomach by inhaling a long breath of
+the disagreeably laden air.
+
+"It is true, nevertheless. Ambergris is believed to be the product of a
+sort of ulcer or cancer which has formed in the bowels of a whale. After
+a certain length of time, or because a cure has been wrought by change
+of feeding place, the mass is dislodged. It floats, and is often found
+far out to sea; but more particularly among the cays in the Turks
+islands. It is the foundation of nearly every perfume, and in ancient
+times was used for spicing wine."
+
+During this conversation the boat had been lowered, and, with Mr.
+Walters as steersman, was being pulled toward the land. Now Neal and
+Teddy were sorry they had not accompanied the sailing master; but it was
+too late for regrets, and the odor did not seem to be nearly as
+disagreeable since they knew from what it proceeded.
+
+"Never mind how much the stuff is worth," Teddy said, as he and Neal
+leaned over the rail in company with Jake, who had come on deck to
+ascertain why the yacht had been brought to a standstill, "it isn't a
+nice thing to smell of, and I shall remember this afternoon whenever I
+see perfume."
+
+"It isn't always the most agreeable things which are of the most
+service," Jake replied with an air of wisdom; and then as a loud shout
+was heard from the shore, the boat having reached the land some time
+since, he added, "It's ambergris for a fact, or they wouldn't be makin'
+such a fuss."
+
+Five minutes later the little craft was seen approaching the yacht, and
+each instant the odor became stronger until both the boys were forced to
+cover their organs of smell.
+
+In the bow of the boat was a black mass looking not unlike coke, and
+weighing, as was afterward ascertained, forty ounces.
+
+"I thought I couldn't be mistaken, although I never run across anything
+of the kind but once before," Mr. Walters said triumphantly, as he
+handed the precious substance up to one of the sailors, who took it very
+unwillingly.
+
+"We shall be driven out of the yacht if you try to carry it home," Mr.
+Emery replied, moving aft as far as possible.
+
+"It won't trouble us many hours. We will sell or ship it at Nassau, and
+I reckon all hands can manage to live until we arrive there."
+
+The valuable substance was wrapped carefully in several thicknesses of
+canvas, and placed in the hold where it is not probable any odor from it
+could have been perceptible on deck, although both the boys were quite
+positive the yacht was thoroughly permeated.
+
+After this short delay the Sea Dream continued on her course at a higher
+rate of speed, for now that she was so near land the heat seemed
+unbearable, and when night came Neal and Teddy stretched themselves out
+in the hammocks which had been slung under the after awning, wishing,
+not for a glimpse of Nassau; but that they were off the New England
+coast instead of being so near the tropics.
+
+Then, despite the profuse perspiration, both fell asleep, not to waken
+until the rattling of the cable through the hawse-holes told that they
+were in the harbor.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+NASSAU.
+
+
+A semi-tropical port in midsummer is by no means a pleasant place
+however diversified and picturesque the scenery may be, and when the
+boys awakened from their restless slumber the lassitude which beset them
+told how great an effect the climate could exert.
+
+Even Mr. Emery was disinclined to any severe exertion; but his business
+must be transacted, and, after a breakfast eaten on deck, he ordered the
+boat to be made ready.
+
+"If possible I shall leave to-night," Neal and Teddy heard him say to
+the sailing master, "therefore it will be well to get your ambergris on
+shore before noon."
+
+Neither of the boys cared to see the town at the expense of walking
+around under the blazing sun, and when Mr. Emery was being rowed toward
+the dock-yard they joined Jake who, in the coolest spot under the
+awning, was watching the fishermen near by.
+
+The water was clear as crystal, and of a bright greenish tinge which
+admitted of their seeing very distinctly the tiny fish of silver and
+golden hues as they darted to and fro; the violet and blue medusæ, and
+the cream-colored jelly-fish as big as a watermelon. There were angel
+fish of a bright blue tinge; yellow snappers; black and white sergeant
+majors; pilot fish; puff fish which could inflate their bodies until
+they were round as a ball, or flatten themselves to the shape of a
+griddle cake.
+
+The cow fish attracted the boys' attention more particularly, for it had
+two horns, and its head was shaped exactly like a cow, and when one
+passed with a "calf" as Teddy called it, swimming by her side, both
+agreed that it was well worth suffering so much from the heat to see
+such a sight.
+
+Fish of all colors and sizes swam around the yacht as if examining her
+hull, and the effect of such brilliant hues displayed through the
+crystal-like water was actually startling because of the gorgeousness.
+
+Before they were weary of admiring this aquatic panorama Jake called
+their attention to a fisherman who, in a small canoe, was pursuing his
+vocation in a very odd manner.
+
+In his boat he had a hideous looking sucking fish, around the tail of
+which was tied a long cord with a wooden float at one end. While the
+boys were watching him he dropped the monster overboard, and in an
+instant it darted at a medium-sized Jew fish, attaching itself to the
+latter by means of the sucking valve on the top of its head. Having done
+this he remained motionless, his victim seeming to be literally
+paralyzed, and there was nothing for the boatman to do but pull in on
+the float, disengage his animated fishhook by a dextrous pressure on the
+sucker after both had been drawn aboard, and send the repulsive looking
+servant out again.
+
+Although the Jew fish must have weighed at least a hundred pounds, he
+was landed without difficulty, and Jake gravely assured his companions
+that a sucking fish could "pull up the whole bottom of the ocean
+providin' the rope on his tail was strong enough to stand the strain."
+
+Then the engineer told a story which did not bear quite so hard on the
+imagination since it was absolutely true, and began by saying as he
+pointed toward the little fortification known as Montague fort:
+
+"That place has been the headquarters of at least a dozen pirates, the
+worst of which was called Black Beard, a bloodthirsty villain who sunk
+two vessels right where we are anchored this blessed minute. The
+feller's real name was John Teach, an' that big banyan tree over there
+is where he used to hold what he allowed was court martials.
+
+"He was drunk about three-quarters of the time, an' allers had a great
+spree when there were any prisoners on hand. He an' his men would get
+the poor wretches to the tree, go through all the ceremony of a reg'lar
+trial, an' allers end by stringin' every blessed one of 'em up in such a
+way as to prevent 'em from dyin' quick, when a fire'd be built
+underneath, so's to roast the whole lot.
+
+"They do say he buried all the treasure among the roots of the banyan,
+an' many's the one who has dug for it; but so far as I ever heard, not a
+single piece has been found. While he lived this wasn't a very pleasant
+harbor for them as cared about a livin' to make."
+
+"What became of him finally?" Teddy asked.
+
+"An English man-of-war got hold of him after awhile, an' he was strung
+on the yardarm to dry. If I'd been in command of the vessel he should
+have found out how it felt to be roasted. Say, don't you boys want to go
+over to Potter's cay?"
+
+"What is to be seen there?"
+
+"The sponge yards, an' it's a great sight if you never visited one."
+
+"It is too hot," Neal replied with a very decided shake of the head.
+
+Jake did not urge the matter, for just at that moment the second port
+boat was lowered, and Mr. Walters made ready to go ashore with his
+precious bundle of aromatic ambergris.
+
+Idly the boys watched the perspiring party, pressing handkerchiefs to
+their faces meanwhile, since, despite the wrappings of canvas, the
+valuable mass gave most decided proof of its being in the vicinity, and
+when the boat started for the shore Neal and Teddy clambered into the
+hammocks, for even leaning over the rail was an exertion in the sultry
+atmosphere.
+
+During the middle of the day both the boys slept, for a siesta is as
+necessary as food in hot climates, and when the light breeze of evening
+crept over the waters Mr. Emery came aboard with the welcome
+intelligence that his business had been concluded.
+
+"We will get under way again before midnight," he said as he stepped
+over the rail, and was received by Mr. Walters. "Now that a breeze has
+set in it should be cool enough to permit of the men's working without
+fear of prostration."
+
+"It would use me up to walk fore and aft twice," Neal said in an
+undertone to Teddy; "but it isn't for us to complain of the heat if we
+can get out of this furnace."
+
+Jake was nowhere to be seen. It was as if after his invitation to go on
+shore had been declined he betook himself to some other portion of the
+yacht, where he could perspire without allowing the others to see his
+suffering, and the boys swung to and fro until the hour came when the
+singing of steam told that preparations for departure were being made.
+
+There could be no doubt but that Nassau would be a pleasant place in
+which to spend the winter months; but it was by no means desirable
+during the summer, and when the Sea Dream left the little harbor where
+the water was hardly more than sufficient to float her, both Neal and
+Teddy gave vent to a sigh of relief.
+
+"We are to run south until it is possible to give the banks a clear
+berth, and then stand straight up the coast for home," the former said
+as the yacht glided almost noiselessly over the phosphorescent lighted
+waters down the eastern side of the shoals. "If a good head of steam is
+kept on we should be in a colder latitude very soon."
+
+"We can't get there any too soon to please me," Teddy replied, as he
+waved the palm-leaf fan languidly. "I believe it would be a positive
+comfort to have my nose frost-bitten."
+
+"It isn't possible you will have such comfort as that for some time to
+come; but we may be able to make your teeth chatter in a few days," Neal
+replied laughingly, and then as the breeze caused by the movement of
+the yacht over the water fanned his face, he added sleepily, "Good
+night; I don't believe I shall open my eyes until after sunrise
+to-morrow."
+
+As a matter of fact this prediction was not verified; before evening a
+wind had come out of the sea which caused the yacht to bow before it
+like a reed in a storm, and the hammocks that, a few hours previous, had
+seemed so rest-inviting, were swinging at a rate that threatened to
+throw their occupants to the deck.
+
+"I fancy it is time we went below," Neal said, as he awakened his friend
+by a series of vigorous shakes. "If we stay here half an hour longer it
+will be doubtful whether we're on board or in the water."
+
+The Sea Dream's lee rail was already so near the surface that the green
+waves curled over it now and then, and before the boys could reach the
+cabin they were thoroughly drenched.
+
+It was the greatest possible relief to crawl into the bunk and pull up
+the bed-clothes to defend themselves against the cold wind which came
+through the port-hole, and so delicious was this sense of being chilly
+that they failed to realize the cause of the sudden change in the
+weather, until they heard the sailing master in the cabin reply to Mr.
+Emery's question:
+
+"You are getting your first taste of what is known as a norther; but
+there isn't the slightest danger if we can crawl away from the land, and
+we shall have no trouble in doing that so long as there is a full head
+of steam on."
+
+"What does he mean by a norther?" Teddy asked of Neal, who had shown, by
+rising on his elbow, that he was awake.
+
+"A wind coming from the north, more frequently met in the Gulf of
+Mexico, when the temperature falls very suddenly, as was the case this
+evening, and a furious gale is often the result."
+
+"So long as it holds cold I don't see that we have any cause to
+complain," was the sleepy rejoinder; but before the night came to a
+close he had good reason for changing his mind on the subject.
+
+It was about midnight, as near as the boys could judge without looking
+at a watch, when the yacht was flung on her beam ends with a sudden
+force which threw both out of the berth, and before the port-hole could
+be fastened, flooded the state-room with water.
+
+Teddy might well be excused for the shrill cry of alarm which escaped
+from his lips, for at that moment even an experienced sailor would have
+fancied the little craft had struck upon a reef, more particularly
+since it was known they were in a dangerous locality.
+
+"We are sinking!" he cried frantically as he tried in vain to open the
+door, and Neal was of the same opinion.
+
+After what seemed to be a very long while although in reality it could
+have been but a few seconds, the Sea Dream slowly righted, and then it
+was possible for the boys to gain the cabin.
+
+Here they were met by Mr. Emery, who had just succeeded in leaving his
+own room, and before any conversation could be indulged in the steamer
+began pitching and rolling about in a manner that showed she was not on
+the reef even if the first shock had been the result of striking one.
+
+It was only by holding with all their strength to the immovable articles
+of furniture that they avoided being flung from one end of the cabin to
+the other, as the yacht plunged and tossed, throwing violently to and
+fro everything which had not been securely fastened.
+
+The cabin lamp was burning dimly, and the faint light only served to
+reveal more clearly the general confusion.
+
+Once amid the tumult the boys heard Mr. Emery shout:
+
+"Don't be frightened; if there was any immediate danger Mr. Walters
+would warn us."
+
+"He may not be able to come where we are," Teddy thought; but he
+refrained from giving words to such a dismal foreboding, and in silent
+fear waited for--he knew not what.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+A NEW DANGER.
+
+
+To the frightened boys in the cabin it was as if the night would never
+come to an end, and during every one of those fearful moments they
+believed the yacht was on the point of taking the final plunge.
+
+At four o'clock in the morning the steamer's movements became more
+regular; but not less in violence, and, shortly after, the sailing
+master came below.
+
+"We are laying-to," he said to Mr. Emery. "There is a nasty sea on, and
+I didn't care to take the chances of fighting against it."
+
+"How does she stand it?"
+
+"Like a darling. I was afraid of straining her at first; but when she
+took the butt end of the storm in such a pleasant fashion there was no
+longer any reason to fret about her."
+
+"It didn't seem like such a very pleasant fashion to us," Teddy said to
+Neal, who had succeeded in gaining a chair near his friend.
+
+"It appeared to me as if she kicked pretty hard about it," Neal
+replied, and then Mr. Emery asked:
+
+"What are the weather indications?"
+
+"There is no reason to hope for anything better until the wind blows
+itself out, and according to my way of thinking that won't be within the
+next twenty-four hours. Why don't you people lie down?"
+
+"Because it has been a matter of impossibility to remain in the berths."
+
+"You can do so now without much difficulty. Come, boys, let me help you
+to turn in."
+
+The calm, matter-of-fact way in which Mr. Walters acted caused the boys
+to feel more comfortable in mind, and they made no protest when he
+assisted them to the state-room where there was yet water enough to show
+what had happened.
+
+"Why didn't you call one of the stewards to mop this up?" the sailing
+master asked as he lighted the swinging lamp.
+
+"We haven't seen one since the gale begun," Neal replied with a laugh.
+"I fancy they were as much frightened as Teddy and I."
+
+"It won't take long to turn them out," and Mr. Walters started forward
+in a manner which boded no good for the skulkers.
+
+Neal and Teddy found little difficulty in retaining a recumbent
+position, although the yacht was tossing up and down like a mad thing.
+She no longer gave those sudden lurches which threatened to carry away
+even the short spars, and for the first time since the deluge from the
+port-hole, they began to feel really comfortable in mind.
+
+The steward came in very shortly after Mr. Walters left, and from the
+expression on his face it was evident he had been rated severely for
+neglect of duty.
+
+"It didn't make any difference to us whether the water was washed up or
+not," Neal said in a friendly tone. "The sailing master saw it and asked
+why we hadn't called you."
+
+"He don't allow that a man has any right to sleep," the steward replied
+sulkily. "If he'd been up since five o'clock, he'd want to turn in
+before midnight instead of foolin' around the cabin till it was time to
+begin another day's work."
+
+"Is it possible that you have been sleeping?" Neal asked in surprise.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"I don't see how you could even lie down while the yacht was tumbling
+about in such a furious manner."
+
+"That was none of my business. I didn't ship before the mast,
+consequently it ain't any duty of mine to go prowlin' 'round if the
+wind happened to blow a little."
+
+"If you call this a 'little' I wouldn't like to be on board when you
+thought it was a regular gale," Teddy said with a laugh.
+
+"I've seen the wind blow so hard that a fellow had to lash his hair down
+to keep it from bein' carried away when he went on deck; but that didn't
+stop my wantin' to get a watch below."
+
+With this remark the steward, having finished his work, left the room,
+and the boys were alone once more.
+
+Although they had believed it would be impossible to sleep during a gale
+such as the yacht was now laboring under, the eyes of both were soon
+closed in slumber, not to be opened until late in the morning.
+
+So far as could be told by the motion, there was no diminution in the
+strength of the wind, and they experienced great difficulty in making
+their toilets.
+
+When this task had finally been accomplished, however, Neal said as he
+opened the door after some trouble, owing to the erratic movements of
+the yacht:
+
+"I'm going on deck. It can't be much worse there, and it wouldn't be a
+bad idea to see what the ocean looks like in a gale."
+
+"I'll go too: but don't let's venture out of the companion-way, for the
+waves must be making a clean sweep over the decks."
+
+When the boys entered the cabin no one was to be seen save the surly
+steward who visited them the night previous, and in reply to Neal's
+question he said:
+
+"Your father left word that he wasn't to be called. It wouldn't be much
+use for him to turn out, because we can't set the table in such a
+rumpus."
+
+"What are we to do for breakfast?"
+
+"The same as Mr. Walters did, get a cup of coffee and a hard-tack;
+that'll go way ahead of nothin' if you're very hungry."
+
+"We can go into the galley when we want a bite," Neal replied, and then
+he led the way up the narrow stairs where, through the half-opened
+hatch, it was possible to get a view of the raging waters.
+
+Perhaps it would have been better, so far as their peace of mind was
+concerned, not to have ventured out, for the scene was anything rather
+than reassuring.
+
+Standing there and looking forward the boys could see a huge wall of
+water dead ahead bearing down upon the yacht as if to swamp her, and at
+the moment when it appeared as if the final stroke had come she would
+lurch to leeward, presenting her side to the wave, rising on the
+succeeding one and shivering on its crest as if shaking the spray from
+her shrouds, after which came the downward plunge that caused the boys
+to hold their breath in fear.
+
+The sky, the swiftly flying clouds, and the waves were of a grayish hue
+looking ominous and threatening and the little craft appeared to be but
+a plaything for the angry elements. That she could out-ride the gale
+seemed almost impossible, and Teddy said with a shudder as he descended
+the stairs:
+
+"Don't let's stay where we can see it. I wish I hadn't looked, for, bad
+as matters seem to be down here, it is as nothing compared to being on
+deck."
+
+Neal was of the same opinion, and the two passed through the cabin to
+the engine-room where Jake was keeping vigilant watch over the
+machinery.
+
+"Why, I thought we were hove to," Neal exclaimed in surprise as the
+engineer assisted him and Teddy to a seat by his side.
+
+"So we are; but it is necessary to keep the screw turning, otherwise it
+might not be possible to hold her in the proper position."
+
+"How long have you been on duty?"
+
+"Since I saw you last."
+
+"Haven't you had any sleep?"
+
+"I can bottle up enough when the gale abates; but just now it stands a
+man in hand to have his weather eye open pretty wide, for a bit of
+carelessness would work considerable mischief. I'm going to have
+breakfast, an' if you boys care to join me we'll make it three-handed.
+You're not likely to fare any better in the cabin than here to-day."
+
+The boys accepted the invitation, and with some cold meat and hard-tack
+placed on the locker where it could not slide off, and mugs of steaming
+coffee in their hands, all made a remarkably jolly meal under the
+unfavorable circumstances.
+
+During the remainder of the day Neal and Teddy stayed below, not caring
+for another view of the angry sea, and when night came the gale had so
+far abated that the yacht was sent ahead once more; but owing to the
+force and direction of the wind it was deemed best to continue on a
+southerly course even at the expense of reaching the Caribbean Sea,
+rather than take the chances of putting about.
+
+All this Jake explained when the boys visited him just previous to
+retiring, and he added in conclusion:
+
+"It seems pretty tough to go yet further south; but Mr. Walters is a
+cautious sailin' master, an' when he makes up his mind to a thing you
+can count on its bein' mighty nigh right."
+
+"Will it be possible to get home as soon as father intended if we go so
+far out of the way?" Neal asked.
+
+"If he don't do any cruisin' after he gets up north I reckon it could be
+done; but there's no sense in figgerin' on that till we're off
+Hatteras."
+
+Now that the yacht had proved her seaworthiness by riding safely through
+the storm the boys would have been willing to go almost anywhere in her,
+and the idea that they might have no cruising in a more agreeable
+climate caused a decided feeling of disappointment; but, as Jake had
+said, there was no reason to worry about that while they were so far
+from home, and as if by common consent the subject was not broached
+again.
+
+On the following morning when they went on deck the sun was shining down
+upon the yet angry looking waves; but one of the sailors assured them
+that "the gale had blowed itself out."
+
+"It stands to reason there'd be a heavy sea runnin'; but its settlin'
+down fast, an' by to-morrow there won't be swell enough for comfort."
+
+In this he was correct. Twenty-four hours later the awnings were up, and
+all hands were panting under the blazing heat of a tropical sun.
+
+This sudden change prostrated the boys, and during the next two days
+they fanned themselves, drank iced drinks, and sought in vain for some
+spot where a breath of cool air could be found.
+
+It was the fourth day after the norther. While waiting for dinner to be
+brought on deck (the meals had been served under the awnings since the
+storm, for the cabin was too hot to permit even of their eating there),
+Teddy lay near the after starboard boat lazily wondering why that thin
+curl of blue smoke should come from the planking directly over the
+kitchen, instead of through the pipe as it always had before.
+
+Owing to the fact that there was no unusual disturbance he never fancied
+for a moment anything could be wrong, and remained gazing at it in
+silence so long that Neal asked curiously:
+
+"What do you see that is so very interesting?"
+
+"I was wondering what had happened to the galley pipe."
+
+"How do you know that it isn't all right?"
+
+"I suppose it is; but it looks queer to see that smoke coming up as if
+from the deck."
+
+Neal looked in the direction indicated by Teddy's outstretched finger,
+and seeing the blue curl, which had now grown considerably thicker,
+sprang to his feet very quickly.
+
+Without speaking to his friend he ran forward, Teddy still ignorant
+there was any danger, and in the shortest possible space of time Mr.
+Walters came from the wheel-house in response to Neal's emphatic
+request.
+
+To Teddy it seemed as if but an instant elapsed before the deck was a
+scene of confusion, and as all hands were called for duty he heard one
+of the sailors cry in a tone of alarm:
+
+"Tumble up, boys, the yacht is on fire!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FIGHTING THE FLAMES.
+
+
+It was some moments after the fire was discovered before anything could
+be done toward checking the flames, for the very good reason that the
+exact location remained a mystery until a visit had been paid to the
+hold.
+
+The cook said the galley felt unusually warm; but he paid no particular
+attention to the fact, thinking the weather had grown hotter, and, save
+for the smoke, there were no signs of fire to be seen anywhere until Mr.
+Walters called upon one of the men to raise the hatch which led into the
+eyes of the yacht directly beneath the kitchen.
+
+Instantly this was done a broad sheet of flame burst forth, and had the
+stout covering not been replaced immediately, the little craft would
+have soon been consumed.
+
+Working with all speed, for even the seconds were precious now, the
+hatch was battened down, and a hole large enough to admit of the nozzle
+of the hose, bored just abaft the hatch-way.
+
+While this was being done a portion of the crew had been getting into
+working order the hose used for washing down the decks, and when all was
+ready the real task of extinguishing the flames began.
+
+A steady stream of water was forced into the hold as rapidly as the men
+could work the pumps, and the lower deck examined carefully for the
+slightest aperture which might admit air.
+
+How the fire had started no one knew, nor was any time spent in trying
+to ascertain, for every person had been detailed to some duty.
+
+Neal and Teddy were given the lightest task, which was simply to watch
+the hose at the place where it entered the deck, to make sure the water
+flowed through freely, and the nozzle did not slip out.
+
+Ten minutes after the alarm had been raised all hands were working
+methodically, thanks to the discipline maintained by Mr. Walters, and it
+became a question simply of whether the flames could be stifled or
+drowned.
+
+"Do you think they can save the yacht?" Teddy asked after a short time
+of silence, and Neal, who had not seen the broad sheet of flame which
+leaped from the hatch-way replied confidently:
+
+"Of course. If the hold is filled with water she surely can't burn."
+
+"Are there boats enough to carry us all in case the fire does get the
+best of us?"
+
+"Certainly; but it won't come to anything quite as bad as that."
+
+Before Teddy could ask another question one of the stewards shouted down
+the forward companion-way:
+
+"Mr. Emery says that his son is to come on deck. There is no need of two
+there."
+
+Neal obeyed the summons thinking he was to assist at the pumps; but in
+this he was speedily undeceived.
+
+"Take such things as you are likely to need most from your state-room,
+and stow them in one of the boats aft," his father said when he reported
+for further duty. "Although I don't think we shall be obliged to abandon
+the yacht, it is well to be prepared for any emergency."
+
+This was no time to ask questions, and Neal obeyed at once, observing as
+he entered the cabin that the stewards were collecting food and such
+other things as might be needed in case they were forced to depend upon
+the frail crafts.
+
+This work rather than the evidences of fire in the hold, frightened
+Neal. Until this moment he had not believed there was any possibility
+the steamer could be destroyed while there were so many to assist in
+saving her; but now there was no question as to the fact of their being
+in great danger.
+
+"Unless father and Mr. Walters were convinced that the fire had got
+considerable headway, the boats would not be provisioned so soon," he
+said to himself.
+
+His portion of the work could be performed quickly. He and Teddy had
+brought all their belongings, with the exception of the fowling pieces
+and the fishing rods, aboard in two satchels, and these he packed with
+the utmost expedition. Then, with both weapons, he went on deck, stowed
+all the goods in the after port boat, and returned to his father's
+state-room to see if anything could be done there.
+
+From the disorder it was apparent that the stewards had been in this
+apartment before him; but a fine rifle yet hung on the bulk-head, and in
+the open locker was quite a large amount of ammunition.
+
+"There's no reason why these cartridges shouldn't be taken if we are
+obliged to leave the yacht," he said to himself as he gathered them into
+convenient shape for carrying. "In case we land on a desolate island
+they would be mighty useful."
+
+When he went on deck with his second burden the stewards were putting
+small kegs of water into each boat, and after stowing the ammunition by
+the side of the first articles brought, he looked over the little craft
+to ascertain what his father had thought best to save.
+
+He could find nothing there; but on searching the starboard gig he
+discovered a small quantity of wearing apparel.
+
+"I wonder if that is the craft he intends to go in, or have the clothes
+simply been thrown anywhere."
+
+At that moment Mr. Emery came out of the pilot-house followed by Mr.
+Walters, and Neal ran forward to ask which boat his father intended to
+use in case the abandonment became necessary.
+
+"It makes no particular difference," Mr. Emery replied in answer to
+Neal's question. "We can easily arrange the details later. Go into the
+engine-room and tell Jake to drive her at full speed, and to report if
+the water we are pumping in is likely to rise as high as the furnaces."
+
+Promising himself that he would re-stow the goods on the gig, putting
+his father's with those belonging to himself and Teddy, as soon as this
+message had been delivered, he descended the companion-way after
+glancing rapidly around the horizon.
+
+There was no land to be seen on either hand, and he understood at once
+why the order to keep the yacht going at full speed had been given.
+
+The small boats were by no means stanch enough to be depended on for a
+long cruise unless the present dead calm should continue until they
+could reach land, and every effort was to be made to gain some of the
+islands in the vicinity.
+
+When Neal entered the engine-room he believed for an instant that Jake
+had not heard of the terrible danger which threatened. Work there was
+going on as usual, except, perhaps, that the engineer and his assistants
+were watching the machinery a trifle more carefully than seemed really
+necessary; but when he repeated the message Jake's face grew just a
+shade paler.
+
+"Say to your father that we have got on every pound of steam that can be
+raised, and it will be necessary to slow down presently because the
+bearings are growing warm. The water is already above the fire-room
+floors, and if the pump is worked an hour longer the fires will be
+drowned."
+
+"But you must keep her going, Jake. It would be terrible to take to the
+boats when there was no land in sight."
+
+"I'm bound to do my best; but a man can go only so far. Do you know
+where we are?"
+
+"No."
+
+"What is being done on deck?"
+
+"The sailors are pumping, and the stewards are provisioning the boats."
+
+"Getting ready to abandon the little craft, are they?"
+
+"Father said that was being done in order that we might be prepared for
+any emergency."
+
+"And he's got a pretty clear idea that the flames can't be kept under,
+or else there wouldn't be a thought of such a thing. How's the weather?"
+
+"A dead calm, as it was this morning."
+
+Jake remained silent a few moments as if revolving some plan in his
+mind, and then he said abruptly:
+
+"Neal, if we do have to put off you and Teddy must try to go in the same
+boat with me."
+
+"Unless father makes different arrangements."
+
+"Of course, of course; but if nothin' is said we'll stick together. Go
+back an' say that the Sea Dream shall do her best until the water gets
+above the fire-boxes, an' then my part of the work has been done."
+
+Neal left the engine-room feeling that there was very little chance of
+reaching any port in the yacht, and since there was no reason why he
+should hurry on deck, he went around by the way of the galley where
+Teddy was stationed.
+
+"How are things going on here?" he asked, forcing himself to speak in a
+cheerful tone. "Can you get any idea of the fire?"
+
+"Put your hand on the deck," Teddy replied gravely, his face of a livid
+white although big drops of perspiration were streaming down his cheeks.
+
+Neal obeyed, and immediately drew his hand back with a cry of mingled
+pain and fear.
+
+The planks were already so hot that it seemed as if the flesh must be
+burned.
+
+"Has father been here within a few moments?"
+
+"He has just left."
+
+"Did he say anything?"
+
+"Nothing except that I was to come on deck when it was so hot I couldn't
+stand it any longer. Neal," and now Teddy spoke very earnestly, "you
+laughed when I referred to the possibility that the yacht might be
+destroyed; but I know your father thinks she cannot be saved."
+
+"I believe now that he does; but I didn't when I left you. Everything is
+ready for us to abandon her when nothing more can be done."
+
+"Are we to go in the small boats?" asked Teddy, excitedly.
+
+"It is the only chance we've got; but don't look so frightened," he
+added, as Teddy's face grew yet paler. "It is calm, there's absolutely
+no sea at all running, and we shall be as safe as on board the yacht."
+
+"It will be horrible," Teddy whispered as if to himself, and Neal added:
+
+"I'll tell father what Jake said, and then come straight back to stay
+with you."
+
+"Don't be away long. It seems as if I had been deserted, when there is
+no one here."
+
+Neal could not trust himself to speak. Ascending the companion-way
+rapidly he approached his father who was conversing with Mr. Walters
+near the bow, as if that position had been chosen to prevent the crew
+from hearing what was said.
+
+After repeating the engineer's message he asked:
+
+"Can I go back where Teddy is? I think it frightens him to stay there
+alone."
+
+"I can't say that I wonder very much; it is a very trying situation for
+a boy, especially one who has never been to sea before. Ask Jake if he
+will send a man to relieve him and then you may both come on deck."
+
+To deliver this message and return after one of the firemen took Teddy's
+place at the nozzle, did not occupy five minutes, and the frightened boy
+gave vent to a long sigh of relief when he was in the open air once
+more.
+
+Except for the heat the weather was perfect. The Sea Dream, showing no
+sign of the monster which was gnawing at her vitals, save by the clouds
+of smoke that ascended from the bow, dashed on like the thing of beauty
+she was; but when her flight should be checked there would remain
+nothing but the tiny boats to bear those on board to a place of safety.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE LAST RESORT.
+
+
+Mr. Emery and the sailing master had decided that the yacht should be
+kept at full speed, headed for the nearest land, until the water which
+was being pumped into the hold drowned the fires in the furnaces, when
+recourse must necessarily be had to the boats.
+
+There could no longer be any question but that the entire forward
+portion of the hold was a mass of flames which it would not be possible
+to hold in check very much longer.
+
+By this time all on board understood that the yacht was to be abandoned,
+and, with the exception of those in the engine-room and at the pumps,
+every one gazed as if fascinated at the clouds of smoke arising from
+near the bow. Already were tiny curls coming from between the deck
+planks, and Teddy heard Mr. Walters say in a low tone to Neal's father:
+
+"I am afraid the flames will burst through before the furnaces are
+flooded. It is too late to cut another hole in the deck, and by an hour
+at the latest we must take to the boats."
+
+"Have the crew been told off?"
+
+"I will attend to that now."
+
+Then the sailing master announced to each man the boat to which he was
+assigned, and during the next hour hardly a word was spoken. Teddy and
+Neal conversed now and then in whispers, as if not daring to make a
+noise, and the sailors worked in grim silence.
+
+Nothing save the clank of the pumps and the throbbing of the screw could
+be heard.
+
+When the hour had passed it was no longer possible to force water into
+the hold. The heat was so great that the hose burned as fast as it could
+be pushed through the aperture, and long tongues of flame were appearing
+around the edges of the hatch.
+
+All hands, including the boys, were formed in line, and water sent below
+in buckets for twenty minutes more, when the word was given to slacken
+speed.
+
+The lower deck had burst through, and there was no more than time for
+Jake and his assistants to clamber up the ladders before the flames had
+complete possession of the yacht from the bow to the engine-room
+companion-way.
+
+There was no time to be lost in lowering the boats, and the men were
+forced to leap in regardless of the previous assignment, for once the
+fire burst the bonds which had confined it so long it swept aft with
+almost incredible rapidity.
+
+Teddy and Neal, bewildered by the flames which actually burned their
+flesh as they stood by the rail while the sailors let go the falls, had
+only thought of reaching the craft in which their property was stowed,
+and Jake followed; but as the little tenders were allowed to drop astern
+beyond reach of the intense heat the boys discovered that Mr. Emery was
+not with them.
+
+He had charge of one boat; Mr. Walters commanded another; Jake was held
+responsible for the safety of the third, and the last was handled by the
+mate.
+
+"Shall we come with you, father?" Teddy shouted.
+
+"I don't think it will be advisable to make any change now, and you are
+as safe in one boat as another."
+
+"I'll answer for them," Jake cried cheerily, and the sailing master
+added:
+
+"Jake can handle a small boat better than any one here, therefore you
+need not fear an accident will result through carelessness."
+
+"How am I to steer?" the engineer asked.
+
+"Due west. The boats must remain together, and in each one is a lantern
+to be hung up during the night to lessen the chances of being separated.
+Two men in every craft are to be kept at the oars all the time, and, in
+order to make the work light, they should be relieved hourly. The
+indications are that the weather will hold clear; it is only a couple of
+hundred miles to the Cuban coast, and we are not likely to be cooped up
+in these cockle shells very long."
+
+As he ceased speaking Mr. Walters gave the word for the oarsmen to begin
+the work which it was supposed would be continued without intermission
+until all were in a place of safety, and the boats were pulled about a
+mile from the burning steamer, when, as if by common consent, they were
+brought to a standstill to watch the destruction of the Sea Dream.
+
+The jaunty little craft was moving through the water slowly, enveloped
+in flames from bow to stern, and the boys gazed at her with a feeling of
+sadness which did not arise solely from the fact of their present peril.
+It seemed to them as if she could understand that those who should have
+saved her had fled when her need of assistance was greatest, and she was
+creeping slowly away to die alone.
+
+"The poor thing can't swim much longer," Jake said, as if speaking to
+himself. "The boiler will explode----"
+
+Even as he spoke a black cloud of smoke shot up from amidships, followed
+by a shower of fiery fragments, some of which struck in the immediate
+vicinity of the boats, and then the glare of the conflagration suddenly
+vanished as the Sea Dream sank beneath the waves.
+
+It would have been strange indeed if each member of the little party had
+not experienced a feeling of sorrow and desolation at this moment.
+
+The yacht which, a few hours previous, had appeared so stanch, was no
+longer afloat, and their only hope of reaching land was in the tiny
+boats which could hardly be expected to live in an ordinary sailing
+breeze.
+
+The tears were very near Teddy's and Neal's eyelids, and Jake's voice
+was quite the reverse of steady as he gave the word for the men to
+resume work at the oars.
+
+[Illustration: Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held
+firm, etc. See Page 193.]
+
+Night was close at hand. The sun had already set, and the short-lived
+twilight cast a sinister grayish hue over the waters. Mr. Walters' boat
+had the lantern raised at the bow on the end of an oar where it swung
+gently to and fro, and in a few moments all the others could be
+distinguished by the same signal.
+
+During such time as they had been waiting to witness the end of the Sea
+Dream the little crafts had drifted farther apart, until the one in
+charge of Neal's father was nearly half a mile away, and the sailing
+master could be heard shouting for them to be brought nearer together.
+
+"We shall probably have a breeze to-night," he cried when Jake's boat
+approached within easy hailing distance, "and if it should come you must
+rig up something to serve as a sail, for your only chance of keeping
+afloat will be to run before it. You have a compass, and remember that
+land is to be found to the westward."
+
+"Ay, ay," the engineer replied, as he looked around in vain for some
+sign of the wind, and then he added in a low tone to the boys:
+
+"I allow Mr. Walters is off in his reckonin' this time, for there isn't
+a breath of air stirring now."
+
+"We may get it later," Neal said apprehensively, and Jake muttered to
+himself; but yet so loud that Teddy could hear him:
+
+"It'll be tough on us if it comes out of the wrong quarter."
+
+In ten minutes from the time the word had been given to bring the boats
+into closer order the mantle of night had fully fallen, and the
+location of the other crafts could only be told by the tiny, swaying
+lights, or the hum of voices.
+
+Jake's boat was loaded less deeply than the remainder of the little
+fleet. In addition to himself and the two boys, there were but three
+sailors on board, and the stock of provisions was correspondingly small.
+As a natural consequence she rode higher out of the water, and although
+built on the same model as the others, the engineer insisted she was by
+far the fastest sailing craft.
+
+An hour had not elapsed before it was possible to test her quality in
+this respect.
+
+The breeze which Mr. Walters predicted came up from the east, and as its
+first influence was felt Jake shouted in a tone of relief:
+
+"We're in luck this time, lads. Here's what will shove us along in the
+right direction, an' we can count on striking land without too much
+work. Lash a couple of coats to the oars, an' set them up close by the
+forward thwart; you'll find a chance there to make 'em fast."
+
+This apology for a sail was soon gotten in place, and, small as was the
+surface presented to the wind, the little boat surged ahead, rippling
+the water musically under her bow.
+
+Jake held the rudder lines, the boys sitting either side of him on the
+bottom of the boat where they could stretch out at full length in case
+they felt inclined to sleep, and after they had listened to the swish of
+the sea under the stern for some time Neal asked as he raised his head
+to look over the side:
+
+"Where are the others?"
+
+"Considerable distance astern. I knew this one could show them her
+heels."
+
+"But the orders were that we must not separate," Neal exclaimed in
+alarm.
+
+"That is true; but how can we help ourselves just now? We can't shorten
+sail, because there would be nothing left, and we're bound to run ahead
+of the waves, small as they are, or be swamped."
+
+"But suppose we never see them again?"
+
+"Don't worry about that; we're all headin' in the same direction, an'
+have only got to wait till they overtake us after land is sighted."
+
+Although Jake spoke in a positive tone Teddy and Neal were far from
+feeling comfortable in mind; but, as he had said, nothing different
+could be done, and each tried to hide his fears from the other.
+
+The weight of the wind increased as the night advanced, and by the words
+of caution which the sailors uttered from time to time, the boys knew
+that those who should best understand such matters were anxious
+regarding the outcome of this night run.
+
+Now and then a small quantity of water would dash over the side; but it
+was quickly bailed out, and, as one of the men said, "did more good than
+harm, for it gave them something to do."
+
+Notwithstanding the gravity of the situation, Neal and Teddy fell asleep
+before midnight, therefore they were unconscious of the fight which
+their companions were making for life. It was necessary the frail craft
+should be kept dead before the wind; otherwise she would have been
+swamped by the following waves, which were now running dangerously high,
+and the skill of the helmsman was all that prevented her from
+destruction.
+
+Not for a single moment during the hours of darkness was it safe to
+relax the vigilance, and the constant strain on one's nerves was more
+fatiguing than the real labor.
+
+Just as the day was breaking Neal awoke, and then he aroused Teddy by
+asking Jake:
+
+"Can you see the other boats?"
+
+"Not yet; but some of them may be in sight at sunrise. It isn't possible
+their lights would show up more than a mile off."
+
+"Isn't the sea running very high?" Teddy asked timidly as he attempted
+to stand erect; but Jake grasped him by the shoulder as he said quickly:
+
+"It isn't safe to move around very much. Lie quiet until the wind dies
+away a bit; we've got more'n we want, and the boat must be kept trimmed
+mighty carefully or there'll be trouble."
+
+It was only necessary for the boys to watch their companions in order to
+learn the dangers which beset them, and, clasping each other's hands,
+they waited in anxious suspense for the rising of the sun to learn if
+the remainder of the party was near.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+ON SHORE.
+
+
+When the first rays of the sun appeared above the horizon the sailors
+searched with their eyes in every direction; but neither land nor a
+craft could be seen.
+
+"I knew we were bound to run away from the rest of the party," Jake
+said, keeping his face turned toward the bow, for the slightest
+carelessness might be fatal to all. "If this wind dies out we can lay
+still till they come up, as they're sure to do before long."
+
+"But suppose the other boats have been swamped?" Neal suggested, with a
+choking sob as he realized that he might never see his father again.
+
+"We won't suppose anything of the kind," Jake replied sharply. "There
+are plenty in the crowd who can handle the boats better than this one
+was handled, and if we rode out the night in safety why shouldn't they
+have done the same?"
+
+"The only chance of our not seein' 'em," one of the sailors said
+thoughtfully, "is, that sailin' slower, they may now be near land that
+we passed in the night without knowin' it. There should 'a been a lot of
+keys within fifty miles of where we abandoned the Sea Dream."
+
+"That's very true, matey," and now Jake spoke in his customary cheerful
+tone, "an' we'll soon be makin' some place where there'll be a chance of
+stretchin' our legs. Overhaul the grub, one of you, an' let's have a
+bite; I feel like a man what's been on a thirty hour watch."
+
+"So you have, for that matter. Even if you ain't a sailor man I'd like
+to see him as could handle a little craft any better. With me at the
+helm she'd have gone to the bottom before midnight."
+
+"I won't kick 'cause you praise me," Jake replied with a laugh; "but
+don't lay it on too thick for fear I might get proud."
+
+"I was only tellin' the truth, an' jest what all of us think. When the
+breeze freshened I made up my mind that the voyage was about ended; but
+here we are yet, an' here we're likely to be a spell longer unless we
+strike another norther."
+
+While the man was speaking he had passed aft two cans of preserved meat,
+some hard bread, and a small jar of pickles, after opening the tins with
+his sheath knife, and every one on board made a hearty meal, the boys
+in particular feeling decidedly cheerful when the repast had been eaten.
+
+"The wind is fallin' off a bit, an' I reckon it'll come dead calm by
+noon," Jake said, after refusing to allow one of the seamen to relieve
+him. "We'll all soon have a chance to bottle up sleep."
+
+"How long do you think it ought to be before we sight the land?" Neal
+asked.
+
+"That's jest what I can't say, lad; but 'cordin' to my way of thinkin'
+we was a good bit below the coast of Cuba when the little yacht went
+down. That norther blew us a good way off our course, an' it's possible
+Mr. Walters might have made a mistake in determinin' the position,
+although it ain't exactly the proper thing for an engineer to set up
+agin a first-class sailin' master."
+
+"It won't take long to find out if this breeze holds, an' that's some
+comfort," one of the sailors replied, and then the three men drew lots
+to see which two should take a watch "below."
+
+During the forenoon there was but little change in the condition of
+affairs. The wind decreased until it was nothing more than a good
+sailing breeze; but the expected calm did not come.
+
+The boat reeled off the knots in fine style, despite the poor apology
+for a sail, and the boys were allowed to change their position, which
+they did by sitting on the after thwart.
+
+About twelve o'clock Jake stretched himself out on the bottom for a nap,
+awakening one of the sleepers that the man at the helm might have
+assistance in case he should require it, and the boys alternately dozed
+or searched the horizon in vain for some signs of the other boats.
+
+Those who were hungry ate whenever it pleased them to do so, and there
+was no lack of either food or water. Teddy would have talked with his
+friend regarding the prospects of reaching home within a reasonable
+length of time; but Neal was so anxious about his father that he could
+speak of nothing else.
+
+Toward the close of the day the wind freshened again, and, in obedience
+to his previous orders, Jake was awakened, the man at the helm saying in
+an apologetic tone:
+
+"I can hold on here a good bit longer; but you wanted to know if there
+was any change, an' there is. It looks to me as if we should have more
+of a breeze than we had last night."
+
+"No signs of land yet?"
+
+"No sir; but the Cuban coast, if that's what we're headin' for, is so
+low that we wouldn't be likely to raise it till we got close on."
+
+Jake ate supper before taking his seat at the helm, and then the boys
+were advised to lie down as on the preceding night.
+
+"You'll be comfortable there, and won't stand so much of a chance of
+gettin' wet."
+
+It was evident that Jake wanted to have them out of the way, and both
+obeyed at once, Teddy saying as he stretched himself out on the hard
+boards:
+
+"It seems as if my bones were coming through the skin, and I'm sore all
+over."
+
+"Things are not nearly as bad as they might be, so we musn't complain,"
+Neal replied philosophically; but at the same time it seemed as if he
+could not remain in that position another night.
+
+Even in face of the danger to which they would be exposed, the occupants
+of the boat welcomed the increase in the weight of the wind since it was
+reasonable to suppose that each mile traversed carried them just so much
+nearer the land, and, with the exception of Neal and Teddy, all were in
+good spirits when the darkness of night covered the ocean.
+
+Owing to the absence of exercise the boys did not sleep well, and when
+the unconsciousness of slumber did come upon them for a few moments at a
+time, it brought in its train dreams so distressing that wakefulness
+with the full knowledge of the dangers which encompassed them, was
+preferable.
+
+It seemed as if twenty hours instead of ten had passed when one of the
+men in the bow cried joyfully:
+
+"If I don't see the loom of land now it's because I never saw such a
+sight before."
+
+"Where away?" Jake asked, straining his eyes in the vain effort to
+discern anything amid the gloom.
+
+"Dead ahead as we are running. It must be somethin' more'n a cay, or it
+wouldn't show up so big."
+
+The gray light of approaching dawn was lifting the mantle of night when
+the man spoke, and, ten minutes later, all saw with reasonable
+distinctness the dark cloud which could be nothing less than land.
+
+Now the roar of surf was heard, and Jake said in a troubled tone:
+
+"I don't see how we are to make it after all, unless we plump her
+straight on, an' that's likely to be a dangerous experiment."
+
+"Why not take in the sail, and work the oars; then you can pick a
+landing place?"
+
+"All right, let go the halyards; but instead of furling the canvas you
+can stow it under one of the thwarts."
+
+This order was given and obeyed cheerily, for all were in the best of
+spirits now that the end of the wearisome journey seemed to be so near
+at hand and in a very short time the boat was moving slowly toward the
+shore, rising and falling gently on the heavy swell.
+
+Each moment it was possible to see more distinctly the coast, and when
+they were thirty yards from a shore strewn with jagged blocks of coral,
+Jake shouted:
+
+"Hold on, boys, it would be worse than folly to attempt to run in there
+while the sea is so high."
+
+"Can't you find a better place?" one of the men asked.
+
+"It appears to be the same all along for a mile or so in either
+direction."
+
+"There's more danger of bein' swamped while runnin' up or down the
+coast, than in makin' a try for it here. Let her go in on the swell, an'
+when the water shoals we can jump over to lighten her so she'll strike
+well up on the shore where there'll be no trouble in savin' everything."
+
+"I don't like the idea," Jake replied. "We can't tell what a fellow
+might meet with, an' to be swung agin one of them rocks would be hard
+lines."
+
+The sailors were determined to make the attempt regardless of his
+warnings, and after a few moments he refused to argue longer.
+
+"You ought to know better than I," he said, "an' its no more'n right you
+should have your own way without any fuss; but the boys an' I will stay
+here till she strikes. That is a better plan than goin' over the side
+when you know nothing about the shore, and besides, I can't see the
+advantage of lightenin' her."
+
+"So she'll strike higher up on the beach, of course, otherwise she'd be
+stove before you could say Jack Robinson."
+
+"Do as you please, an' so will I. Shall I steer her in now?"
+
+The sailors kicked off their boots, and began pulling vigorously at the
+oars while Jake said in a low tone to the boys:
+
+"Be ready to jump the minute she strikes; but not before. Look out for
+the rocks, and take care the swell don't drag you back."
+
+The heavy waves were rolling up on the shore with a roar that rendered
+conversation difficult, and as he glanced ahead at the foaming waters in
+which it did not seem possible the little craft could live for a single
+moment, Teddy pressed Neal's hand as if to say good-by.
+
+Neal gave him one quick, hopeful glance; pointed shoreward to intimate
+that they must watch every motion of the boat in order to be prepared
+when the most favorable time arrived, and, following Jake's example
+both arose from the thwart, standing in a stooping posture in order to
+steady themselves by the rail.
+
+Carried on the crest of an enormous wave the tiny craft hangs as if
+poised in mid-air for an instant, and as the vast body of water is
+dashed forward the three sailors leap into the boiling, swirling foam.
+
+Teddy fancied he heard a muffled cry of agony; but just at that moment
+he could think only of saving his own life, and there was no time to so
+much as glance around.
+
+The boat was shot suddenly forward with the water dashing above the
+stern and sides, and Jake shouted:
+
+"Over with you now!"
+
+At the same instant that the boat struck the boys leaped, and during
+several fearful seconds it was doubtful whether they could hold their
+own against the treacherous under-tow.
+
+By clinging to the sides of the craft, and straining every muscle, the
+attempt was successful, and as the wave receded the little tender lay
+across a sharp piece of coral, almost a total wreck.
+
+"Take hold and shove her further up!" Jake shouted. "Work now as you
+never did before, or we shall lose all our stores!"
+
+During the next half minute the three struggled to the utmost of their
+power, and then the fragments of the boat and the goods which had been
+brought from the Sea Dream were high upon the beach beyond reach of the
+next wave, which swept in with a yet louder roar as if enraged at having
+been deprived of its prey.
+
+Not until this had been done was it possible to look around for the
+sailors, and Teddy cried as he gazed seaward without seeing any living
+creature:
+
+"Where are they?"
+
+Jake watched the boiling waters several seconds before he replied
+mournfully:
+
+"It was as I feared. They either struck some of these jagged rocks as
+they leaped from the boat or the under-tow was so strong that it dragged
+them down."
+
+"Do you mean that all three have been drowned?" Neal cried.
+
+"If they were alive we should see them by this time," and Jake ran along
+the shore hoping they might have succeeded in scrambling out at some
+other point.
+
+Teddy and Neal followed him, and when five minutes passed there could be
+no further doubt.
+
+"If they had waited until the boat struck, as we did, there would have
+been little trouble to get ashore; but now we shall never see them
+again."
+
+The boys could hardly realize that three strong men had been taken from
+this world so quickly, and when finally the fact stood out boldly
+without the slightest possibility of mistake, a feeling of deepest
+depression took possession of all.
+
+Teddy threw himself face downward on the sand and gave way to grief,
+while Neal and Jake stood by his side in silence, for this dreadful
+catastrophe seemed to be a warning of their own fate.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+SUSPENSE.
+
+
+How long they remained on the shore in an apathy of despair not one of
+that party ever knew.
+
+Jake was the first to arouse himself, and, understanding that work is
+the best remedy for mental troubles, he said, with a great effort to
+speak cheerily:
+
+"See here, lads, this will never do if we want to get out of the scrape.
+We've got to stay here till the other boats come along, and it is
+necessary to make some preparations for living. The goods must be stowed
+where they won't be destroyed, an' there's plenty to keep us busy for
+the rest of this day."
+
+"When do you think the other boats should arrive?" Neal asked.
+
+Jake realized fully how slight were the chances that either of the
+crafts would come to that exact spot, even if they were all afloat; but
+he had no idea of adding to his companions' grief, therefore he
+replied:
+
+"It may be forty-eight hours. You see some or all of them might have put
+out a sea anchor when it blew so hard, for they carried heavier loads
+than we did, and while layin' still we hummed right along, consequently
+its difficult tellin' when to expect 'em."
+
+"Of course they are bound to land here?"
+
+Jake hesitated only for an instant before he decided that under the
+circumstances a lie was absolutely necessary, and then replied
+positively:
+
+"Of course. Where else would they come?"
+
+"I was afraid there might have been some little difference in the
+steering."
+
+"We all were obliged to keep dead before the wind, therefore ought to
+come out pretty nigh alike."
+
+This reply appeared to satisfy Neal, and he set about cheering Teddy,
+who finally arose to his feet and signified his willingness to do
+whatever Jake should propose as necessary.
+
+The engineer made many suggestions which he would not have thought of
+had he been alone, or in the company of those who did not need such a
+tonic.
+
+All the goods were first carried from the beach to the edge of the thick
+forest a hundred yards away, and over the collection was constructed a
+shelter to protect it from the dew. The fragments of the boat were
+carefully gathered up and deposited in the same place.
+
+Then a quantity of such pieces of dead branches and decaying wood as
+could be found near at hand was stacked close by the beach, to serve as
+a signal in case a vessel or the boats should heave in sight.
+
+When this had been done it was noon, and Jake set about preparing as
+elaborate a meal as their store of provisions would permit, saying as he
+summoned them to the repast:
+
+"Now boys, I want you to fill yourselves up so's to be ready for hard
+work in case anything is to be done when the others get here. Afterwards
+we'll take a snooze, which is the proper thing to do at the middle of
+the day in a hot climate, and then there must be some exploring, for we
+want to find out if we are really on the island of Cuba."
+
+The boys' hunger was very much greater than their grief, and without
+further urging they did full justice to the meal, Teddy saying as he
+helped himself to the third slice of preserved meat:
+
+"It wouldn't be a bad idea for us to hunt a little while for something
+in the shape of a vegetable, or we shall soon run short of provisions."
+
+"It's the very plan I was thinking of. In these woods we should be able
+to find many things that would help out on the bill of fare; but in case
+that can't be done, you boys must turn hunters. It's mighty lucky you
+have your guns and plenty of ammunition."
+
+This last suggestion pleased the boys wonderfully and if Jake had not
+insisted very strongly that they sleep during the hottest portion of the
+day, both would have started into the forest without delay.
+
+After lying down in the shade slumber came to their eyelids quickly, and
+when he was convinced they were across the border of dreamland, Jake
+arose softly, saying to himself as he stole up the shore:
+
+"This goes ahead of any scrape I ever had the bad luck to fall into, an'
+I'd give all I've got to know exactly where we are, for I'm certain it
+ain't Cuba. If two days pass without our sightin' a sail I must fix up
+some story to make the boys eager to tramp across the country. That'll
+be better than stayin' here where, 'cordin' to my idea, there's mighty
+small chance of our finding anybody who can help us."
+
+He walked along the shore fully two miles; but there was no diversity of
+scene. The coast strewn thickly with coral rocks, and backed by a dense
+forest, was all that could be seen either above or below the place where
+they landed.
+
+Then Jake forced his way through the tangled undergrowth, experiencing
+no slight difficulty in so doing, and the vegetation confirmed his
+belief that the little craft had been carried by the wind to some land
+further south than was at first supposed.
+
+On the water not a sail was in sight, and when Jake returned to the
+place where the rude shelter had been put up he was in even a more
+despondent mood than Teddy and Neal had been.
+
+"I s'pose we must wait here a couple of days to satisfy the boys the
+other boats won't come, an' then it's a case of strikin' across the
+country with good chance of wanderin' around until fever or wild animals
+puts an end to it."
+
+His companions were yet asleep, and he lay down beside them in order to
+prevent any suspicion that he had been spying out the land.
+
+Under other circumstances the monotonous roar of the surf would have
+lulled him to rest; but now his anxiety was so great that, despite all
+efforts, his eyes would persist in staying open very wide, and he spent
+the remainder of the siesta trying in vain to decide what was best to
+do.
+
+Not until late in the afternoon did the boys awaken, and then Neal said
+as he sprang to his feet:
+
+"It won't do for us all to sleep again at the same time. If the boats
+came in sight since we've been lying here it is very probable father
+has missed us, for more than likely they would try for a better place to
+land further up or down the coast."
+
+"You needn't worry about that, lad. I've kept honest watch, and not so
+much as the wing of a sea gull has appeared above the horizon."
+
+Teddy, remembering what Jake had said about hunting, began to clean the
+guns, for both had been thoroughly wetted during the landing, and Neal
+walked slowly along as he looked out over the water intently.
+
+Before going very far he saw the engineer's footprints on the sand, and
+shouted excitedly:
+
+"Some one has been here! Perhaps father arrived before we did."
+
+"There's no such good luck," Jake replied. "While you fellows were
+snoozing I went a long bit in that direction."
+
+"Then it's only a waste of time for me to go over the same ground," and
+Neal retraced his steps, adding when he gained Teddy's side, "I'll do my
+share of that work."
+
+"You spoke too late, for I have finished. Now let's see what can be done
+in the way of hunting; a roasted bird will be a big improvement over
+salt meat, and I count on finding plenty of game."
+
+"All right, provided Jake is willing to stay here alone."
+
+"What is to prevent me from joining the party?"
+
+"Someone must remain in case the boats heave in sight," Neal replied in
+a positive tone, and the engineer said carelessly:
+
+"I didn't think of that; but it'll be all right, I'll keep my eyes
+peeled," and he added to himself, "I wish he wasn't so certain about the
+others coming, an' then the disappointment wouldn't be quite so great."
+
+Jake cautioned the boys against going very far from the beach because of
+the danger of getting lost in the forest, and as they disappeared among
+the underbrush he threw himself upon the ground, unable longer to fight
+against the despair which was rapidly overpowering him.
+
+He understood perfectly well how great would be the danger in attempting
+to make their way through the wooded portion of the country at this
+season of the year, when fever germs lurked in every spot where stagnant
+water was to be found, and knew at the same time how extremely difficult
+it might be to find a place offering any more advantages than did the
+narrow strip of sand on which they had been thrown.
+
+"It wouldn't be quite as bad if I knew where we are," he said to
+himself. "It can't be possible that we're on the coast of South America;
+but if that should prove to be the case we'd make a pretty mess of it by
+trying to cross."
+
+Then came the thought that perhaps it would be better to travel up the
+coast, and as to the advisability of this he studied a long while
+without being able to arrive at any satisfactory conclusion.
+
+Two hours were spent in this profitless speculation, and then the boys
+returned, bringing with them two large hoccos, birds looking not unlike
+wild turkeys.
+
+"We shan't starve while such game as this is to be found," Neal cried
+triumphantly. "I believe we might have shot a dozen by staying longer;
+but there was no sense in doing so just for the sake of killing. It will
+be a hard job to eat all this meat before it spoils."
+
+"How far in did you go?" Jake asked, rising to his feet quickly and
+trying to banish from his face the look of dejection, lest his
+companions should suspect how desperate he believed the situation to be.
+
+"Not more than half a mile," Teddy replied.
+
+"What is the general appearance of the country?"
+
+"The undergrowth is very dense in places, and above here, a little to
+the right, we came upon what seems to be a swamp. It was there we found
+these birds, and something else which is not quite so promising."
+
+As he spoke Teddy pulled up his shirt sleeve, and pointed to several
+black specks on his skin.
+
+"They are ticks, or garrapatas, as the Spaniards call them," Jake
+replied, as he opened his pocket knife. "The sooner you get rid of them
+the better, for they will make what is likely to be a bad sore unless a
+cordial invitation to leave is extended."
+
+"Are you going to cut them out?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+"Not exactly; but you won't get rid of the pests without considerable
+pain, for they have the faculty of crawling under the skin mighty fast."
+
+Jake set about the work in a methodical manner, causing Teddy to cry
+aloud very often as the insects were pulled or dug from the flesh.
+
+Then Neal was called upon to undergo the same operation, and not until
+nearly an hour had passed were the hunters free from the painful pests.
+
+It was now nearly sunset, and all hands set about preparing the hoccos
+for roasting, by first plucking the fowls, removing the intestines, and
+sticking them on a sharpened stake in front of the fire.
+
+It was not an entirely satisfactory method of cooking, for while one
+portion was done brown, another would be hardly warmed through; but, as
+Teddy said, "it went a long way ahead of nothing," and all three worked
+industriously, turning the game or piling on the fuel until, about an
+hour after sunset, the task was completed.
+
+By this time the castaways were decidedly hungry, and the half-cooked
+fowls tasted better than had the most elaborate meals on board the Sea
+Dream.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+ACROSS THE COUNTRY.
+
+
+When, supper having been eaten, preparations were made for the night,
+Neal insisted that one of the party should remain on guard during the
+hours of darkness, in order to watch for the boats, and Jake had no
+slight trouble in convincing him that it was not absolutely necessary.
+
+"We couldn't see their lights half a mile away if they have any hoisted,
+which isn't likely, for the oil must be scarce by this time," the
+engineer said, "and, in case we did sight them, what good would it do?
+We should induce them to land here, and we know how dangerous that is
+even in the daytime. I had rather let them pass without knowing where we
+are, than to be the innocent cause of a second disaster."
+
+After considerable discussion Neal was made to understand that no good
+could come of posting sentinels, and the little party lay down on the
+bed of leaves; but, owing to the suspense concerning the fate of the
+others, neither slept very soundly.
+
+It was hardly light enough to see surrounding objects when Jake began to
+prepare breakfast, and as soon as the sun rose Neal and Teddy paced to
+and fro on the beach gazing seaward; but without seeing that for which
+they sought.
+
+For the first time Neal began to despair concerning his father, and
+returning to the camp he said in a voice choked by sobs:
+
+"I don't believe we shall ever see either of them again. The wind has
+held steady since we landed, and they should have been here a long while
+ago. Our boat couldn't have sailed so much faster than theirs that we
+should arrive twenty-four hours in advance."
+
+"Now put out of your mind the idea that we are not to see all hands some
+time," Jake replied quite sharply. "I'm willing to admit that they may
+not strike here, for I might as well own up to the truth, and say the
+chances are against two boats coming so far and hitting the same spot on
+the coast. That doesn't prove, however, that there has been any further
+disaster."
+
+"Then you do believe that they won't come here?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Why haven't you proposed to make some change?"
+
+"I didn't want to say anything until we were certain the boats wouldn't
+heave in sight. I shouldn't advise making a move yet awhile; but since
+you've broached the subject we may as well talk plainly."
+
+"Do you think we are likely to be taken off by a vessel?"
+
+"The fact that none have passed within our line of vision certainly
+shows that such a chance is slim. I have come to the conclusion that we
+are not on the island of Cuba, and it stands us in hand to try for some
+town or sea-port. We might stay here a month, and then have a craft
+heave in sight when the surf run so high as to prevent a boat landing."
+
+"What do you want to do?"
+
+"Strike straight through the woods. There must be people living here
+somewhere, and the sooner we find them the sooner we'll get home."
+
+"Why not follow along the beach?"
+
+"Because, if this is an island, as it surely must be, we could get
+across quicker than around, and, besides, with all these coral rocks the
+beach is not the best sort of a road for traveling, loaded down as we
+shall be."
+
+Neal was silent for a moment, and Teddy took advantage of the
+opportunity to ask:
+
+"When do you think we ought to make a move?"
+
+"My idea is that we should stay here to-day (our supply of water won't
+last much longer), and start early to-morrow morning. That would be time
+enough to prove whether the boats are coming, and give us a chance to
+get the traps into proper shape for carrying."
+
+"You know best what should be done," Neal said, speaking slowly, "and I
+am ready to do as you propose."
+
+"Now that is what I call sensible talk," Jake replied, in a tone of
+satisfaction. "By buckling right down to work, and putting out of our
+minds all unpleasant thoughts, for it don't do any good to moon over
+what can't be changed, we shall soon get out of this scrape."
+
+Neal remained silent. To leave the coast seemed like deserting his
+father, and although he knew Jake's plan should be carried out, it made
+him sad to think of going where it would be no longer possible to see
+the ocean.
+
+Teddy, however, experienced a sense of relief as soon as it was decided
+to enter the forest in search of human beings. To him the place was
+anything rather than agreeable, for he could never rid himself of the
+feeling that the drowned sailors would soon be washed ashore, and during
+the hours of darkness all kinds of queer fancies came into his mind with
+every unusual sound.
+
+He was eager to discuss with Jake the details of the proposed journey,
+and, Neal listening to the conversation but taking no part in it, the
+matter was arranged to the satisfaction of the engineer and Teddy.
+
+The ammunition and such provisions as had been brought ashore, was
+divided into three portions, one being very much heavier than the
+others, and each tied in such shape as would be most convenient for
+carrying.
+
+So much of the game as would not be needed for immediate consumption was
+wrapped in leaves for the travelers to take with them; but that which
+caused Jake the most anxiety was the fact that the supply of water would
+be exhausted before they started.
+
+"It can't be helped," he said ruefully, "and we may be mighty thirsty
+before finding any; but the case would be worse if we staid here, so
+there is no reason why we need worry very much. In that swamp you spoke
+of we shall surely find what thirsty men can drink on a pinch, and I'm
+positive we'll get along all right."
+
+As if eager to convince himself that there was no great danger to be
+apprehended from the journey through the forest, he continued to talk
+about his plans until both the boys were perfectly familiar with all he
+hoped to gain by the attempt; but of his fears not a word was spoken.
+
+At night all retired early in order to be fresh for the morrow's work,
+and when the first faint flush of another day appeared in the eastern
+sky Jake aroused his companions.
+
+"Turn out, boys," he shouted cheerily. "We must make the most of these
+cool hours, for it will be necessary to halt at noon, and we want to get
+through the forest as quickly as possible."
+
+While speaking he was fastening the heaviest package on his back, and
+after a hurried toilet in the sea Neal and Teddy took up their loads.
+
+It was still quite dark under the towering trees when the journey was
+begun; but each moment the gloom grew less, until, when the sun rose it
+was possible to see the way with but little difficulty.
+
+To travel very rapidly was out of the question. In certain places the
+underbrush was so dense that considerable exertion became necessary in
+order to force a passage, and despite all efforts not more than two
+miles an hour could be made.
+
+At the swamp plenty of cool, clear water was found, and with this Jake
+filled the two bottles, all they had in which to carry a supply of the
+precious liquid.
+
+At noon a long halt was made, and when the sun began to decline the
+weary march was resumed.
+
+By no means the least of the travelers' suffering was caused by thorns,
+and to one who has never had any experience of this sort, a description
+of the various spines and needles which project from the strange plants
+in these vast forests would seem exaggerated.
+
+They are of all sizes and shapes, and in many places actually prevent a
+man from making his way through the foliage even though he be armed with
+a machete. Oftentimes it is absolutely necessary to make a long detour
+in order to avoid the painful obstructions, and before half of this
+day's journey was finished all three of the castaways bore bloody
+evidence of what these natural bristles can do.
+
+The siesta was decidedly abridged, for Jake realized the importance of
+concluding the tramp as quickly as possible, and the afternoon was but
+little more than half ended when, to the intense surprise of all, they
+suddenly arrived at a clearing in the very midst of the forest.
+
+After wandering among the luxuriant vegetation the travelers were almost
+startled at seeing an avenue of banana trees which had evidently been
+planted by the hand of man, and, following it up, the little party were
+yet more surprised at seeing a white man swinging idly in a hammock.
+
+Jake advanced as if unable to believe the evidences of his own senses,
+and said hesitatingly:
+
+"We had no intention of intruding, sir; but followed the line of banana
+trees without the slightest idea of finding a gentleman's home."
+
+"Don't apologize," the stranger replied in good English, and springing
+to his feet as if in alarm. "It is true that I am not in the habit of
+receiving callers in this out-of-the-way place; but those of my own race
+are none the less welcome. Will you walk into the house?"
+
+The boys peered through the foliage where, after some difficulty, they
+saw a small cabin, hardly large enough to be called a dwelling, and Jake
+replied quickly:
+
+"We would prefer to remain here. Having walked since sunrise, you can
+fancy that any place in which to rest our legs without fear of coming in
+contact with a scorpion or a snake is grateful."
+
+"I can't promise that you won't be troubled by such visitors; but you
+are welcome to do as you choose."
+
+Jake threw himself on the ground, asking as he did so:
+
+"Can you tell me how near we are to a sea-port? We have just landed
+from a pleasure yacht which was destroyed by fire, and haven't any idea
+where we are."
+
+"You are now in Yucatan, and probably know perfectly well how near to
+the coast, for----"
+
+"In Yucatan?" Jake repeated in surprise.
+
+"Exactly, and not so very far from the famed Silver City of the Chan
+Santa Cruz Indians."
+
+"That last information doesn't seem to be very important so far as we
+are concerned; but it does surprise me to know we are in this section of
+the country, for our captain was quite positive we should strike the
+coast of Cuba."
+
+"Tell me how such a mistake was made."
+
+"That is exactly what I don't know myself; but it won't take long to
+explain why we are here."
+
+Then Jake told the story of the cruise in the Sea Dream, of the
+unaccountable conflagration, and the fatal landing on the coast,
+concluding by saying:
+
+"As a matter of course we are most anxious to reach some place from
+which we can find a steamer or sailing vessel going to the United
+States. Probably you can give us the proper information, and by that
+means get rid of unexpected and, perhaps, unwelcome visitors."
+
+"But I do not wish to get rid of you," the stranger replied quickly. "On
+the contrary I am more than delighted because you were forced to come
+here, since you can render me a very great service."
+
+"I fail to understand how," Jake replied in perplexity.
+
+"You shall soon know, and I fancy you will be decidedly surprised when I
+give you all the details. First, however, allow me to prepare supper,
+and then it will be singular if I do not tell such a story as will cause
+greater astonishment than you ever experienced before."
+
+With these strange words the young man--he did not appear to be more
+than thirty years old--leaped out of the hammock, and disappeared among
+the shrubbery which so nearly concealed the building.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A STRANGE STORY.
+
+
+The meal, which was partaken of heartily by the weary travelers,
+consisted of eggs and fruit, with plenty of freshly cooked tortillas,
+and as Teddy remarked in a low tone when it was absolutely impossible
+for him to eat any more, "it went way ahead of turkeys roasted on a
+stick."
+
+After his guests had finished this very satisfactory repast, the
+stranger proposed that all adjourn to the banana avenue where he slung
+another hammock that both the boys might lie down, gave Jake a cigar of
+home manufacture, lighted one himself, and, lying upon the ground in an
+attitude of absolute repose, said laughingly:
+
+"Now if you wish to hear the story I promised to tell there is nothing
+to prevent."
+
+"I would certainly like to know how it happens that you are living alone
+in this forest," Jake replied.
+
+"Then I will begin in regular story-book style, for when it is ended I
+intend to make a proposition. My name is Byron Cummings, and the last
+home I had previous to the building of this shanty, was in Baltimore,
+Maryland. Two years ago--it may have been longer, for one does not keep
+a very strict record of time in this country--I visited Merida on a
+pleasure trip, and while there heard the story of the Silver City."
+
+"Is that the name of a town, or do you mean that the precious metal is
+so plentiful there?" Teddy interrupted.
+
+"I refer to a city built by the Chan Santa Cruz Indians which has
+received this name because the ornamentation of the houses is of silver,
+and so profuse as to give it the appearance, at a distance, of being a
+collection of silver buildings. Don't laugh until you hear the whole
+story," he added, as a smile of incredulity passed over Jake's face.
+
+"Any one in Merida, and, in fact the English histories, will tell you
+that this wonderful city is in the vast tract of marshy land situated
+between here and Merida, known as the Black Swamp. It is a fact that no
+white man has ever seen it, since the only approach is across the swamp
+on the south side, and the way so closely guarded that a person must
+have special sources of information in order to get through the
+labyrinth of narrow water courses on the banks of which are sentinels
+ready to salute the visitor with a shower of poisoned arrows.
+
+"It cannot be reached from the east because of the rocks, a few samples
+of which you probably saw on the sea coast. As you doubtless know, the
+Indians hereabout have never been conquered by the whites, and the
+interior is as much an unknown land as it was at the time of the
+conquest.
+
+"Certain of the Chan Santa Cruz Indians visit Merida at certain seasons
+of the year, where they sell, or rather, exchange for goods, gold dust
+and massive golden ornaments, valuing the yellow treasure so lightly,
+and bringing such quantities that there can be no doubt they have access
+to an enormous deposit. Silver they use as we do iron, and I myself have
+seen one of these visitors wearing thick beaten bands of it as a
+protection to his legs, probably because of the thorns."
+
+"If they come into the towns I should think some venturesome fellow
+would follow, to learn the secret of the city in the swamp," Jake
+suggested, and it could plainly be seen that he was growing decidedly
+interested.
+
+"That has often been tried; but, so far as I can learn, no one ever
+succeeded. Twice I tracked three villainous looking old fellows to the
+very edge of the marsh, and both times they disappeared so silently and
+completely as to make it seem as if the earth had opened and swallowed
+them. Then, learning of the many who had failed in the same attempt, I
+formed a plan which must give me the victory, although it has required
+much time."
+
+"What is it?" Jake asked breathlessly.
+
+"I resolved to learn the language, and to that end came here with an
+Indian who knows the habits and customs of these people, he having dealt
+with them for many years, and, what is more, has been within sight of
+the famous city. From him I have gained all the information necessary to
+enable me to penetrate the swamp, and now flatter myself that I can
+speak the dialect of the Chan Santa Cruz tribe as perfectly as a
+native."
+
+"Have you remained here two years doing nothing else but studying how to
+reach the village?" Neal asked.
+
+"Very little beside that. We built the hut, planted these trees for a
+lounging place, and now raise chickens and fruit enough to provide us
+with food."
+
+"Where is the man you speak of?"
+
+"He went to Merida three days ago; but will return by the day after
+to-morrow if no accident has befallen him."
+
+"When are you going to make the attempt to get through the swamp?"
+
+"Very soon if you accept my proposition."
+
+"What have we to do with it?" Jake asked in surprise.
+
+"I will explain. Old Poyor and myself are not strong enough numerically
+to make the attempt alone, for in case the secret of our identity should
+be discovered, nothing could save our lives. With you three as an
+addition to the party, and two armed with good weapons, I would not be
+afraid to travel straight through the city. As a matter of fact the only
+real danger is in approaching the place; but I have studied over that
+portion of the business so long that I do not fear a failure if you can
+be prevailed upon to join us."
+
+"That is out of the question," Neal replied decidedly, speaking quickly,
+as if afraid Jake might agree to the scheme. "You know we must get back
+to our own country as soon as possible, for if father is alive he will
+suffer great anxiety concerning us."
+
+"You are right to make haste; but what if I tell you that by going with
+me no time will be lost?"
+
+"How can that be possible?"
+
+"Because if you were in Merida to-day you could not reach Progresso in
+time to take the steamer which left for the United States this morning.
+If you remain here two weeks more, there will then be ample opportunity
+to get passage on the next vessel which starts. I have a time table,
+and you can see by it that I am telling the truth."
+
+As he ceased speaking Cummings arose, walked leisurely to the house, and
+returned with the article in question, which he handed to Neal.
+
+It was only necessary to glance at it in order to learn that his
+statement was a fact, and when Teddy was also convinced, the host
+continued:
+
+"According to the plan I have formed we should be back in less than ten
+days from the time we begin the journey, and if you agree to the scheme
+it should make us all wealthy."
+
+"But you said the old Indian would not return for three days," Jake
+interrupted.
+
+"Very true; but we shall not wait for him to come here. That which he
+will bring is exactly what we want as an outfit, and we can meet him at
+the only entrance to the swamp where, for more than three months, I have
+had a boat hidden in readiness for the attempt."
+
+Then Cummings gave a more detailed account of the wonderful city as he
+had heard it in Merida and from Poyor, and so well did he tell the story
+that in a short time his guests were in the highest state of excitement.
+
+"Now the question is whether you will join me?" he said in conclusion.
+"Having studied the matter so long I feel warranted in saying that it
+is not an unusually dangerous venture, and, if we are successful, the
+amount of wealth we can carry away must be enormous."
+
+"It wouldn't take me long to decide," Jake replied promptly; "but seeing
+that I am in Mr. Emery's employ I couldn't go contrary to his son's
+orders. As a matter of fact I'm not bound in any way; but it seems to be
+the only square thing to do."
+
+"And what is your idea?" Cummings asked as he looked toward Teddy.
+
+"Since we can't start for home immediately, I don't see why we shouldn't
+spend the time in what will be the jolliest kind of an adventure whether
+there is any gold to be gained or not."
+
+The young man then turned to Neal questioningly, and the latter said
+hesitatingly:
+
+"It isn't fair for Jake to make me decide. He should know better than I
+whether we ought to go with you. If it was possible for us to leave the
+country at once there could be no question, for we must return to the
+United States at the earliest opportunity."
+
+"And since that cannot be done you have no objections to joining us in
+the visit to the Silver City?"
+
+"I don't know. You would not go until to-morrow, so we have a chance to
+discuss the matter among ourselves."
+
+"Very true. I've some work to attend to, and while I am away you will be
+able to talk privately."
+
+Then Cummings arose, went toward the house and when he disappeared from
+view Neal said to Jake:
+
+"Now tell me just what you think of going with him; I mean, what you
+think father would say if we could consult him, not what we would like
+to do."
+
+"Well, if you put it in that way," and now Jake spoke as if weighing
+every word, "I can't see why we shouldn't have a little fun, seein's how
+we're bound to stay here longer than he allows is enough to go to this
+Silver City an' back. It would be a mean kind of a man who'd object to
+our havin' enjoyment after all that's happened."
+
+"Then you believe father would approve of our going with Mr. Cummings?"
+
+Jake was not exactly prepared to say "yes," and at the same time he did
+not wish to reply in the negative after his acquiescence in all the host
+had advanced as reasons why they should accompany him, and after a long
+pause Neal added:
+
+"Of course I want to go, for it can't be possible that there is very
+much danger, and I make this proposition: We must sail on the next
+steamer, and if Mr. Cummings is willing we should desert him, no matter
+what may be the condition of affairs when it is time for us to start for
+the coast, then we are warranted in accepting the proposition."
+
+"That is what I call putting the matter in the proper light," Jake
+replied with considerable emphasis. "On this basis no one can possibly
+find any fault, and we may as well tell him that we have decided to go."
+
+"First explain that we must leave Yucatan on the next steamer which
+starts from Progresso."
+
+"I'll do it, and if he is so certain that we shall be out of the Silver
+City in that time there can be no reason for any fault-finding."
+
+"I think Neal has arranged the business as it should be," Teddy said
+approvingly, and from that moment the castaways believed they were
+committed to the scheme.
+
+Half an hour later, when Cummings returned to learn the result of the
+interview, Jake explained upon what grounds the decision had been
+arrived at, and he expressed himself as perfectly satisfied with the
+arrangement.
+
+"If we can't get into the city during the coming week there is no use
+trying," he said, "and I will undertake to see you on board the next
+steamer which sails. Now it only remains to decide upon the details, and
+at sunrise to-morrow we will begin what I have been preparing for,
+during the past two years."
+
+Since the details consisted only in agreeing upon what amount of luggage
+should be taken with them, but little time was spent in discussion, and
+as the boys retired on this night it was with the knowledge that when
+the sun rose again they would start for the Silver City which every
+traveler in Yucatan admitted had an existence.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE JOURNEY.
+
+
+The boys and Jake had no preparations to make for the journey. The goods
+they had brought from the coast was their only property, and could
+readily be carried as during the tramp to this point.
+
+On the contrary, Cummings found many things which it was necessary
+should be done before departure. Whether successful in the attempt to
+reach the marvelous city or not, he could hardly hope to return to the
+hut where all his preparations had been made, and there was much to be
+done.
+
+After ascertaining that his guests were willing to accompany him he made
+arrangements for their comfort during the night, and then, excusing
+himself on the plea of work, was seen no more until the time for
+departure had come.
+
+Of the three castaways Neal was the only one who had any misgivings
+regarding the proposed detour. It seemed to him as if he was in some way
+abandoning his father by embarking in this enterprise, although how
+anything more could be done to aid those who had taken refuge in the
+boats was beyond his comprehension.
+
+This much was clear in his mind, however: He had agreed to aid in the
+attempt, and when Cummings awakened the little party he arose quickly,
+firmly resolved to do everything in his power to reach the city which,
+as yet, he was not thoroughly convinced existed.
+
+It was still dark when the final preparations for the journey were
+begun, and Cummings' impatience was so great that the sun had but just
+shown himself above the horizon when the morning meal had been eaten,
+and their host was urging them to make haste.
+
+"We must be at the rendezvous not later than this afternoon in order to
+avoid the chance of passing Poyor on the way," he said impatiently,
+"therefore the sooner we start the better."
+
+"We are ready," Jake replied, and, after setting the fowls loose,
+Cummings led the way through the underbrush, finding a path where the
+others would not have believed any existed.
+
+As if to prevent the boys from losing their interest in the search for
+the Silver City, their guide continued to add to the story he had
+already told, and during the long march but little else was talked
+about.
+
+Jake who was as excited as a man well could be, for he had no doubt but
+that they could find large quantities of treasure where there would be
+no difficulties in the matter of carrying it away, plied Cummings with
+questions whenever the conversation lagged, and Neal had but little
+opportunity to speculate upon the fate of his father.
+
+Not until late in the night, when to Neal and Teddy it seemed as if they
+could go no further, did the party halt, and during the last hour of the
+march the utmost silence was maintained.
+
+"It is absolutely necessary to avoid detection in case any of the
+Indians may be in the vicinity," Cummings had said, "and we must move as
+stealthily as if we knew positively they were waiting for us."
+
+From that time no one spoke. The guide crept on at a slow pace, his
+every movement copied by the remainder of the party, and on arriving at
+the rendezvous he motioned the others to lie down, whispering as they
+gathered around him:
+
+"We are near the canoe, and it only remains to watch for Poyor, who
+should be here by morning. I'll stand guard while the others sleep."
+
+There was no thought of putting up anything in the shape of a shelter,
+and the boys stretched themselves on the ground in the midst of a thick
+clump of vegetation, Teddy whispering to Neal:
+
+"If it is necessary to take such precautions as these before we are near
+the city, we may expect pretty rough times before arriving at the
+place."
+
+"That's a fact, and I begin to wish we hadn't started. There is no
+positive assurance we shall get through in time to take the next steamer
+for home, and even Cummings himself can't say whether any of us will
+ever come back."
+
+"Do you want to give up the job now?"
+
+"I'd be ashamed to do that, for it would look as if we were afraid; but
+I'm sorry we agreed to the plan;" and Teddy replied heartily:
+
+"So am I."
+
+Jake had nothing to say; but whether his silence was caused by a desire
+to obey Cummings' instructions to avoid making a noise, or by misgivings
+as to the wisdom of the venture, neither of the boys could guess.
+
+Despite the anxiety of the younger members of the party they soon fell
+asleep, owing to excessive fatigue, and did not arouse to consciousness
+until Jake whispered as he shook them vigorously:
+
+"It's time to start. The Indian has come, an' ain't half as bad a
+lookin' man as I counted on seeing."
+
+The boys sprang to their feet, finding themselves face to face with a
+tall, half naked figure which, in the dim light, looked more like a
+statue of bronze than a human being. He stood scrutinizing them keenly
+for fully a minute, and then, as if satisfied with their appearance,
+turned away to walk swiftly along the edge of the swamp until lost to
+view in the darkness.
+
+"Poyor has just arrived," Cummings said by way of explanation; "and
+according to his belief it is well for us to start at once."
+
+"Where has he gone?" Teddy asked.
+
+"After the canoe; it is but a short distance from here."
+
+"Don't you dare to cook breakfast?"
+
+"Certainly not; the light of a fire would be worse, for us, than the
+report of a gun. Until we arrive at the Silver City it will be a case of
+eating cold food, and perhaps we may be obliged to wait even longer than
+that before having anything very elaborate in the way of a meal."
+
+"If we are only certain of coming back again where it is possible to do
+as we please, I won't grumble about what we are obliged to eat," Neal
+said, with a nervous laugh.
+
+"Don't borrow trouble," Cummings replied quickly; but both the boys
+noticed that he no longer spoke in the same confident tone as before the
+journey was begun. "We shall surely get through without difficulty."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the approach of Poyor, who came down
+the water-way in the canoe more like a ghost than a creature of flesh
+and blood, and Jake, whose head had been turned in the other direction,
+could not suppress a slight exclamation of surprise as the Indian
+suddenly appeared by his side.
+
+The canoe which had been brought thus silently was simply the trunk of a
+tree hollowed out, and about fifteen feet in length. It yet rested
+lightly on the water when the entire party and all the traps were on
+board, and the boys noticed with no slight degree of astonishment, that
+one stroke of the paddle was sufficient to send it sharply in either
+direction.
+
+"Now you have a chance to finish your nap," Cummings whispered as,
+kneeling aft, he began to assist Poyor in propelling the craft.
+
+"Don't you want us to help?" Teddy asked.
+
+"No, there will be nothing you can do until we enter the Silver City."
+
+Tired though the boys were it was literally impossible to close their
+eyes in slumber now, and they remained very wide awake watching the
+coming of a new day.
+
+When the sun had risen they could get some slight idea of the country
+through which they were passing; but of what might be a few yards
+beyond no one could say.
+
+The shores of this particular water-way through the swamp were flat,
+covered with reeds and long grass, with here and there dense tangles of
+trees and vines, and the channel was so narrow that only at rare
+intervals could the paddles be used. The Indian and the white man pushed
+the boat from one bend to another, oftentimes finding it difficult to
+pass the sharp curves, and the boys confidently expected this labor
+would be continued during the entire day, therefore their surprise was
+great when, about an hour after sunrise, the little craft was forced
+under a clump of overhanging foliage as if the journey was at an end.
+
+"What is the matter?" Neal asked in a whisper, and Cummings replied in
+the same cautious tone:
+
+"Nothing. It would be in the highest degree dangerous to travel very far
+now that it is light."
+
+"How long are we to stay here?"
+
+"Until the darkness comes again."
+
+"Wouldn't it be safe to go on the bank where we can stretch our legs?"
+
+"We must not leave the boat. It will be only for a few hours, and then
+we shall have plenty of exercise paddling."
+
+Immediately the canoe had been made fast under the mass of vines and
+shrubbery Poyor stretched himself out in the bow as if the task of
+remaining perfectly quiet during an entire day was a very agreeable one,
+and Cummings followed his example.
+
+Jake, who had been sitting amidships, moved toward his friends, and the
+three spent an hour talking of what was now termed by all "a foolish
+venture."
+
+There was nothing left for it, however, but to continue on since they
+were in the swamp, and after a time Neal said petulantly:
+
+"Well make the best of it, and if an opportunity should occur to go to
+Merida there must be no hesitation, whatever Cummings may say."
+
+As if this resolution gave them renewed courage, the boys lay down in
+the most comfortable position possible, after eating a light lunch, and
+until nightfall no sound save that caused by heavy breathing could have
+been heard from the boat.
+
+Then, when darkness came again, Poyor, who had remained almost without
+motion during the entire time of the halt, aroused himself, ate half a
+dozen bananas, and took up the paddle.
+
+The precautions against being discovered by those who might be on the
+watch were now redoubled. Before rounding a bend the Indian waited in a
+listening attitude to assure himself no one was moving in the immediate
+vicinity, and when it became necessary to work the canoe along by aid of
+the foliage the utmost care was exercised to prevent the branches from
+rustling.
+
+As the hours wore on and no attack was made Cummings appeared to be
+highly elated, and Jake's gloomy forebodings were dispelled in the
+thought of the treasure which they might be able to bring away.
+
+Once, about midnight, when they halted a moment for Poyor to
+reconnoiter, Neal whispered to the leader:
+
+"How many nights of this kind of traveling is necessary before we reach
+the city?"
+
+"When we next halt it will be to leave the boat and continue the journey
+on foot. It was the possible difficulties, not the distance, which
+rendered the undertaking formidable."
+
+The Indian returned, stepped into the canoe without speaking, and took
+up the paddle as if to say there was nothing to prevent them from going
+ahead.
+
+From this time until faint streaks of light caused by the approach of
+the sun could be seen in the sky there was no lengthy interruption to
+the advance, and then as the boat was pulled out of the channel into a
+sort of basin or break of the bank which led among the more dense
+portions of the forests, Cummings said to Neal:
+
+"In two hours you shall have a full view of the Silver City, and then
+there can be no doubt as to the truth of what I have told you."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE SILVER CITY.
+
+
+To Neal and Teddy the thought that they were so near the wonderful place
+described by Cummings overshadowed everything else, and the probable
+danger was but a secondary consideration.
+
+Jake was in a perfect fever of excitement, and so great was his desire
+to see the city from which he fully expected to bring away enormous
+amounts of gold that more than once did the leader caution him in an
+impatient tone to remain quiet.
+
+Impassive, apparently unmoved by the fact that the plan which he and his
+white companion had spent so many months in perfecting was about to be
+proven successful, or a failure that might result in the death of all
+concerned, the Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of a
+gigantic cypress tree; but Teddy observed that he was on the alert for
+the slightest unusual sound.
+
+Cummings dealt out some food; but none of the party ate it. Hunger had
+been banished by suspense, anxiety and anticipation.
+
+Gradually the gloom was dispelled, and it became possible to see the
+varied forms of life everywhere around.
+
+The party had halted upon a slight elevation, where they had a limited
+view of that portion of the forest which appeared to be distinct from
+the region of marsh. As the sun arose, and a singularly dazzling light,
+different from anything the boys had ever seen before was reflected on
+the tops of the trees, it seemed as if every branch was laden with birds
+of the most gorgeous plumage flitting here and there like movable jewels
+against a background of green enamel.
+
+Hundreds of monkeys filled the air with an almost incessant chattering
+which drowned all other sounds, and snakes of every color and size
+writhed and wriggled in different directions to greet the grateful heat
+of the sun.
+
+It was a picture most beautiful, and at the same time, because of the
+serpents, terrifying.
+
+Cummings began to make his way up the trunk of the cypress, aided by
+Poyor; but when Jake would have followed, the Indian motioned for him to
+remain with the boys.
+
+[Illustration: The Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of the
+gigantic Cypress tree, etc.]
+
+One glance appeared to be sufficient for the leader of the party, and as
+he descended he whispered to Neal:
+
+"We have made no mistake. The city can be seen plainly. You and your
+companions may gratify your curiosity, for we shall remain here until
+Poyor comes back."
+
+Then turning to the Indian, Cummings whispered a few words, and the
+former glided through the underbrush, being lost to view almost
+immediately.
+
+By assisting each other the three castaways were soon where such a
+marvelous sight was presented that exclamations of surprise and
+admiration burst from their lips; but, fortunately, the chattering of
+the monkeys would have prevented the outcries from being heard had a
+party of Chan Santa Cruz Indians been at the foot of the tree.
+
+Far to the eastward was a long range of low, rocky mountains, and at the
+north and south spurs or cliffs, all enclosing a beautiful valley in the
+center of which was a city of dazzlingly white buildings.
+
+To look at this collection of houses and temples very long at a time was
+almost impossible because of the peculiar glare which the boys had
+mistaken for the sun's rays.
+
+It was caused by the reflection of the god of day on an edifice in the
+center of the city, the dome-like roof of which was covered with a
+burnished metal substance having the appearance of silver.
+
+The adjoining buildings, composed of white stone having a softness as of
+alabaster, threw this peculiar light in every direction, causing the
+city to stand out amid the green foliage like a huge incandescent mass.
+
+Each house stood in a square by itself, and, judging from the area of
+the city one might have estimated the population at about fifteen
+thousand. The streets were laid out with the utmost precision, and
+composed of what appeared to be fine white sand, while at every
+intersection were monuments of grotesque figures or animals.
+
+At regular intervals were enormous white columns capped with the
+glistening metal, the same as displayed on the dome of the principal
+building and on many of the houses.
+
+After taking in this wonderful picture as a whole the boys gazed at the
+most prominent objects in turn, the central edifice occupying the
+greater share of attention.
+
+That this was a place of worship seemed reasonable to suppose because of
+the crowds of people entering or departing from the opening formed by
+lofty pillars of shimmering metal, and also because of the tiny threads
+of smoke which arose from several apertures in the roof as if from altar
+fires. To confirm the beholders in this belief the faint sound of sweet
+music arose in the air, and instantly the throngs in the streets
+prostrated themselves in adoration of some one of the statues.
+
+The citizens were dressed in flowing garments of white, and all seemed
+intent on worship which was prolonged until after the spectators left
+the tree.
+
+One singular fact was noted by Teddy, and he called Neal's attention to
+it.
+
+Neither on the surrounding hills nor in the city could a single animal
+of any kind be seen. It was as if even the birds from the forest so
+shaped their course as to avoid flying over the dazzling wonderful city
+which was shut out from the rest of the world by the swamp wherein fever
+lurked in its most horrible form.
+
+How long the boys and Jake gazed at this marvelous picture neither of
+them could ever say. They took no heed of the passage of time, and when
+Cummings called softly that it would be well to come down in order to
+gain a little rest before Poyor returned, Teddy noticed with surprise
+that the sun was high in the heavens.
+
+"Well, do you believe now that the Silver City really has an existence?"
+the leader asked when the three stood by his side.
+
+"After that anything seems possible," Neal replied with a sigh as if
+weary of gazing at so much magnificence.
+
+"Save some adjectives expressive of admiration until we are in the city,
+when I fancy you will see very much that is more curious."
+
+"The people don't appear to be so terribly ferocious," Teddy said, "and
+yet you think they would kill us all if our presence was discovered."
+
+"I am positive of it. In a white man they see only one of that race
+which has worked them so much injury, making ruins of many cities, and
+oppressing the rightful owners of the country."
+
+"If that is the case how are we to get in there?" Neal asked.
+
+"Poyor has a plan which I think will be successful; wait until he
+returns, and if the conditions are favorable to the attempt you shall
+soon know."
+
+"But suppose he stays away until a party of Indians take it into their
+heads to come in this direction?"
+
+"There is little danger of our being discovered unless it has been
+suspected we have crossed the swamp, which is hardly probable. Very few
+of the inhabitants ever venture out, and there is no reason why they
+should come to this exact spot. Lie down now, Poyor will be with us by
+nightfall."
+
+It was a simple matter to follow the first portion of this advice; but
+decidedly difficult to close their eyes in slumber after what had been
+seen.
+
+Teddy and Neal, who threw themselves on the ground side by side, could
+not keep their thoughts from the wonderful city, and when both Jake and
+Cummings were apparently wrapped in slumber the former whispered:
+
+"Do you think now that we were foolish to come?"
+
+"No, because it isn't so far in the swamp but that we can get out in a
+short time if anything happens, and a glimpse of that city would repay a
+fellow for considerable trouble."
+
+"But suppose the Indians get hold of us?"
+
+"That is something I reckon Cummings can take care of. If he has made
+such elaborate preparations for entering, when it is so near where he
+was living we can be pretty certain there will be no very grave
+mistake."
+
+"Even if we succeed in reaching the city I can't understand how it will
+be possible to carry away much gold."
+
+"Nor I; but yet you know a small package is valuable, and five persons
+could lug a great deal."
+
+"Do you fancy he brought us simply to carry the treasure for him?"
+
+"He said we would all share alike, so our services wouldn't be of much
+advantage to him, more particularly since he and the Indian could bring
+away a heavier load than all three of us."
+
+In this manner, speculating upon the benefits which might accrue to them
+rather than regarding the great danger to which the entire party was
+exposed, the boys passed the time until late in the afternoon, and then
+Poyor approached so softly that he stood in their midst before any one
+had heard even a rustling among the leaves.
+
+On seeing the man Cummings sprang up eagerly, asked a question in the
+Indian dialect, and the reply was given at great length, Poyor using
+more gestures than the boys had ever fancied were at his command.
+
+That his report was in the highest degree interesting to Cummings there
+could be no doubt, for the latter listened intently, interrupting him
+only to ask some question, and not until nearly half an hour had passed
+was any explanation made to the others.
+
+Then Cummings said with a slight show of triumph:
+
+"Poyor has just come from the city, and there is no suspicion that we
+have passed the line of sentinels."
+
+"If he did that what is to prevent us from doing the same?" Jake asked
+as the leader paused for an instant.
+
+"Nothing except our skins are white, and he can readily pass himself off
+for a Chan Santa Cruz. He speaks the language, resembles them in
+features, and could make his way around the town with but little
+trouble; but on that point no great amount of time need be spent. Here
+is the plan which I wish to carry into effect: Poyor has found a vacant
+building on the outskirts of the place which he has bargained for,
+representing himself as one of the sentinels recently released from duty
+on the eastern side. In that character no person will be likely to
+wonder why he is without acquaintances, for the watchmen often remain
+away from the city one or two years, entering only when it is necessary
+to procure provisions."
+
+"Is he to go on alone?" Jake asked.
+
+"Certainly not. At a late hour to-night we will accompany him, and all
+our hopes of success depend upon gaining this building without being
+discovered."
+
+"How long are we to stay there?"
+
+"A week if necessary."
+
+"A week!" Teddy and Neal cried in concert.
+
+"Yes, and I hope we shall be able to remain concealed in the house
+during that time, otherwise it may go hard with us."
+
+"But what do you expect to do shut up in a building, for of course we
+must keep out of sight?" and Jake's face expressed the utmost surprise
+and apprehension.
+
+"That is exactly what you shall learn when we arrive there. Since I have
+proven that the Silver City really has an existence, the least that can
+be done is to aid in carrying out my programme without too much
+discussion."
+
+"You won't have any reason to complain because I don't obey orders,"
+Jake replied quickly.
+
+"Then I will soon show you what we expect to do providing our plans work
+without a hitch during the next ten hours. Let's get these traps into a
+more convenient shape for carrying, in order that we may be ready for
+the last stage of our journey when Poyor gives the word."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+IN THE CITY.
+
+
+The boys and Jake were decidedly perplexed and not a little worried in
+regard to the outline of work as given by Cummings. They failed to
+understand how it could be to their advantage to go into the city if it
+should be necessary to remain hidden all the time, or in what way they
+would derive any benefit from the visit.
+
+Although the leader of the party knew from the expression of their faces
+that they were dissatisfied with the general outlook, he did not
+volunteer any information, thinking, perhaps, that it was unnecessary to
+do so since they were where it was impossible to withdraw from the
+enterprise.
+
+Neither Teddy nor Neal believed the party would be exposed to any
+extraordinary danger. The only idea in their minds was as to whether it
+would be possible for them to get out of the swamp in time to take the
+next steamer which left Progresso for the United States, and both
+believed it would be a great misfortune to miss the first opportunity of
+reaching home.
+
+"We can stand it for one week," Neal said in a whisper: "but what I am
+afraid of is that it won't be possible to leave the city at the end of
+that time," and Teddy replied in the same cautious tones:
+
+"It is for us to see that such a contingency does not arise. Jake will
+do as we say, and if Cummings refuses to leave at a date sufficiently
+early for us to reach Progresso, we must force him to act as has been
+promised."
+
+"What shall we do in case he refuses?"
+
+"We are three out of a party of five, and should be able to arrange
+matters to our own liking."
+
+Neal was perfectly contented with such a view of the case, and he felt
+well satisfied that nothing could prevent them from doing as they
+wished; but unfortunately, he failed to take into consideration the very
+important fact that while it might be a simple matter to enter the city,
+they could not be certain of leaving it at will.
+
+"We can do as we please by standing firm to our determination of going
+away in time to take passage on the steamer," he said; "therefore we'll
+see the adventure through to that point, and if Cummings fails in his
+purpose of bringing away a large amount of gold we will have had such an
+experience as can be talked about when we get home."
+
+As for Jake, a glimpse of the glistening walls of the city had literally
+intoxicated him, and his one and only desire was to reach that point
+where he could satisfy himself by the sense of touch as well as sight.
+
+As the time drew near for the final move in the bold scheme Cummings
+became greatly agitated. It was as if all the blood had left his face,
+and his eyes were open wide and staring as he gazed into vacancy.
+
+"Are you sick?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+The young man shook his head.
+
+"I suppose I'm acting like a fool; but can't prevent my nerves from
+getting the best of me just at this time. After laboring two years for
+one thing, and then being so near a successful completion of the work,
+is enough to make any fellow excited."
+
+Teddy was on the point of saying he fancied that fear of the ultimate
+result might have some share in this alleged nervous attack; but,
+fortunately, he checked himself in time, and turned to watch Poyor who
+was hiding the boat beneath an ingeniously constructed screen of leaves.
+
+Night came slowly; the twittering of the birds and the chattering of the
+monkeys was hushed. Among the dense underbrush the darkness was
+intense, yet the Indian remained motionless in a listening attitude.
+
+Amid profound silence the moments passed until to the boys it seemed as
+if it must have been midnight when Cummings whispered:
+
+"It is time. Poyor shall lead the way, and I will bring up the rear."
+
+Walking in single file, and keeping firm hold of each other's garments
+lest they should be separated, the little party began the last stage of
+the journey.
+
+The Indian went forward as if familiar with all the surroundings, and
+when half an hour had passed he halted only long enough to point ahead
+where, through the foliage, could be seen the city, its buildings
+gleaming ghostly white in the starlight.
+
+The decisive moment had arrived.
+
+If they should be seen by a single person the alarm would be given, for
+the clothing as well as the skin of all the party, save Poyor, would
+proclaim the fact that these newcomers belonged to the hated race, and
+the end could not be long delayed.
+
+Assuring himself that there was no one in sight, Poyor quickened his
+pace, leading the way toward a small building on the outskirts of the
+town, and ten minutes later, the strangers were inside the dwelling;
+but although successful in the undertaking, were virtually prisoners.
+
+The house was very small as compared with the majority of those seen by
+the boys when they gazed from a distance, and had evidently been
+unoccupied a long while.
+
+The one room which comprised the entire lower floor was destitute of
+anything in the way of furniture, and the sides, ceiling and floor were
+formed of the same soft-looking white stone which appeared to be the
+only building material in the city.
+
+Poyor did not give his companions much time in which to inspect this
+portion of the building. With an impatient gesture to the boys who were
+gazing around them in evident disappointment, he led the way up a narrow
+flight of stairs to a sort of attic hardly more than six feet high, and
+with only two narrow slits in the wall to serve as windows.
+
+Here five hammocks had been slung, and on one of them the Indian threw
+himself without a word of rejoicing or comment upon the ease and safety
+with which they had entered the city.
+
+"Now what is to be done?" Neal asked as Cummings started toward the
+stairway.
+
+"I wish to bar the lower door, for it would be exceedingly inconvenient
+if we should have callers."
+
+"It strikes me that there will be very little chance to get gold if we
+are to stay shut up here."
+
+"That's just what has been puzzlin' me ever since I saw the place," Jake
+added. "We're not even in the city, only on the edge, and so far as
+seein' what's goin' on is concerned, the big tree in the swamp would
+have been a better place."
+
+"You may find that we are too near the heart of the town," Cummings
+replied with a grimace. "To-morrow, after Poyor has looked around some,
+we will decide on a plan. You had better go to sleep while there is a
+chance, for no one can say when we may be obliged to beat a hasty
+retreat."
+
+The boys followed this advice for the simple reason that there was
+nothing else to be done. Teddy had looked through the narrow slit in the
+wall; but without being able to see anything of interest, and in this
+city which may have been, and probably was standing when Columbus
+discovered America, the three who had been literally thrown upon the
+coast of Yucatan lay down to sleep.
+
+Owing to the strangeness of their surroundings, and the knowledge of the
+danger which threatened, no one gave himself up to very profound
+slumber.
+
+The silence was so perfect as to be almost oppressive, until half an
+hour before sunrise, when a low strain of sweetest music arose on the
+air, gradually swelling in volume, and finally ending in a wild burst
+which caused Poyor to spring to his feet.
+
+"What is the matter?" Teddy asked, and Cummings replied carelessly:
+
+"Nothing in particular. That music is the summons to prayer, and now is
+the time when the Indian can go through the streets with less danger of
+being discovered."
+
+In another instant Jake and the boys were at the apertures which served
+as windows; but some time elapsed before they could see anything owing
+to the gloom. Then, as day dissipated the darkness, they distinguished
+throngs of white robed figures hurrying from every quarter toward some
+common point, which was probably the temple with its dome of silver.
+
+It was an odd sight to see so many people moving rapidly, but without
+noise, while neither cart nor animal of any kind accompanied them. Here
+and there were men carrying burdens on their backs by aid of a strap
+passed around the forehead, and many women and children literally loaded
+down with flowers.
+
+"I don't see any great show of gold or silver," Teddy said, after gazing
+at the scene some time in silence. "No one appears to wear anything like
+jewelry."
+
+"That may be because such metal is too common here," Jake replied. "What
+bothers me is to make out why Cummings and the Indian are so afraid of
+being discovered. These people don't look as if they'd kill a fly unless
+he made a noise, an' that's what they seem to be scared of."
+
+"Don't make a mistake," Cummings whispered, as he overheard the last
+portion of the conversation. "If it was known that a white man had
+succeeded in entering the city our lives would be taken within the next
+hour."
+
+"You may believe all that; but I'll hold to it that they're the most
+peaceable lot I ever saw, until somethin' comes up to prove the
+contrary," and Jake went toward the street door with Poyor, regardless
+of whether he was seen by the passers-by or not until the Indian said
+sharply:
+
+"Go back; I do not wish to die."
+
+"If you're frightened of course I'll get out of the way," Jake replied
+half angrily; "but before we leave this town I'll show you how much
+reason there is for being afraid."
+
+"And in ten minutes from that time you will cease to live," Poyor
+replied gravely, as he left the building, closing the door carefully
+behind him.
+
+"It will be well to remember what he has said," Cummings added sharply
+as he approached the engineer to bar the door. "These people are
+peaceable until the time comes when religion and all the traditions of
+their race tell that a long remembered wrong should be avenged, and then
+no class can be more implacable. I would not show my face outside of
+this door for as much gold as can be found in Yucatan."
+
+This remark silenced Jake, but he was by no means convinced of its
+truthfulness, as could be told by his whispered remark to Neal:
+
+"They know we will have a chance to lug off a pile of money, an' to
+prevent us from wantin' too much, try to prove that we must stay out of
+sight so's they can get the cream of the bargain."
+
+"Don't do anything foolish," Teddy replied earnestly. "Cummings would
+not have asked us to come with him unless there had been good reason for
+wanting assistance, and it is not possible he has made any mistake
+regarding the nature of the people."
+
+Jake had nothing more to say; but it could readily be seen that he
+believed his own ideas on the subject were correct, and at this moment
+something occurred which demanded his entire attention.
+
+Poyor had but just left the building, and a crowd was gathering in front
+of the door, causing Cummings to say with every sign of fear:
+
+"We shall soon have a chance of learning what these people will do in
+event of finding a white man in the city, for it looks as if we were
+discovered."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE FESTIVAL.
+
+
+It can well be imagined with what anxiety the party in the building
+looked through the narrow apertures at the crowd below.
+
+Even Jake began to fancy he had made a mistake in regard to their
+peaceful dispositions, and Teddy noticed that he examined very carefully
+all the weapons.
+
+Those on the outside were armed chiefly with bows and arrows; but a few
+carried a sort of spear with a tip which looked not unlike glass, and
+Neal whispered to Cummings:
+
+"If they have got nothing but arrows we ought to be able to hold a large
+number in check with our guns."
+
+"Don't make the mistake of despising their weapons, for every one is
+covered with a poison so deadly that a single scratch would be more
+dangerous than a wound from a bullet."
+
+"Do you think they have learned that we are here?"
+
+"I can't explain in any other way the motive for the gathering; but none
+of them appear to be paying very much attention to the building."
+
+As a matter of fact, although there were four to five hundred directly
+in front of the house, hardly one of them glanced toward the openings
+through which the little party were gazing; but the majority appeared to
+be having a most sociable time.
+
+As the moments passed without any evidence that an attack was to be made
+the voluntary prisoners began to grow more comfortable in mind, and
+again Jake proposed that such people were neither able nor inclined to
+inflict much injury upon any one.
+
+Suddenly there was a great commotion among the crowd; the men shouted
+and waved their weapons, danced about in the most grotesque fashion and
+from afar off could be heard the sound of music.
+
+Five minutes later the cause of this sudden change of demeanor became
+apparent.
+
+Down the street from the direction of the forest came several hundred
+women decorated with the most beautiful flowers, and carrying huge
+bouquets or wreaths. They trooped along without any attempt at marching
+in regular order: but on arriving in front of the men they halted
+suddenly in response to sharp strokes on a gong or tongueless bell which
+one of them held high in the air.
+
+The men were now on one side of the street and the women on the other,
+and in this order they stood when twenty persons of both sexes, carrying
+on a broad flower-covered platform a repulsive looking figure apparently
+composed of gold, marched between the ranks and halted.
+
+Instantly every one sank down with bowed head as if in adoration, and
+the invisible music, accompanied by the peals of sweet-toned bells,
+filled the air with melody.
+
+"We were frightened too soon," Cummings said with a sigh of relief. "It
+is a festival of some sort, and this happens to be the place where it is
+to be welcomed to the city. It would be most unfortunate if Poyor should
+take it into his head to come back just at this time."
+
+"He could see the crowd before getting very near and would know enough
+to stay at a distance," Neal replied. "I'd like to know what that statue
+represents."
+
+The golden figure was certainly very odd. Its body was in shape not
+unlike a panther's; but the tail was short, and stuck straight in the
+air. The head might have been formed to represent a monkey, although
+the ears were very long, and the whole was covered with carving to
+represent scales.
+
+"How much do you suppose it weighs?" Teddy asked of Jake, and the
+latter, who had also been trying to compute its value, replied:
+
+"Not an ounce less than a hundred pounds. What a prize that would be if
+we could carry it away!"
+
+"There are many of the same kind in the city." Cummings added, "and we
+should be able to get off with some before a week is ended."
+
+"Then that is the plan you have formed?" Neal said interrogatively.
+
+"Exactly. Poyor is to examine all the statues near by, and decide upon
+such as we can pull down some night, after which it will only be a
+question of reaching our boat. I have no fear of being able to get
+through the swamp providing we have a start of five or six hours."
+
+While this conversation was being carried on the people outside remained
+in the same devout attitude; but just as Cummings ceased speaking there
+was a change in the affairs.
+
+The music grew louder, and the bells were rung more rapidly, and the
+devotees sprang to their feet with shouts and songs, the women throwing
+flowers on the platform until the hideous god was nearly hidden from
+view.
+
+When the tongueless bell was struck three times the crowd gathered
+around the image bearers, and all started toward what the white men
+believed was the temple, chanting in perfect harmony with the music.
+
+The worshipers were soon lost to view; but their voices could be heard
+for ten or fifteen minutes, after which clouds of smoke, probably caused
+by burning incense, arose from the silver-domed building.
+
+"If Poyor is wise he will come now," Cummings said, as he looked
+anxiously out. "The people are so intent upon the worship, or
+installation of a new god, whichever it may be, that he can get into the
+house without being seen."
+
+But there were no signs of the Indian. Strain their eyes as they might
+he did not appear.
+
+The sounds of music died away. The smoke ceased to arise from the
+temple, and the people began to walk the streets intent upon their
+business or pleasure.
+
+"It is strange he is so imprudent," Cummings muttered half to himself.
+"Now the only safe way is to wait until night, if indeed he is yet at
+liberty."
+
+"Do you think anything has happened to him?" Neal asked.
+
+"Of course I can't even guess; but it is very strange he has waited so
+long."
+
+More than that Cummings would not say: but both the boys could plainly
+see he was very anxious, and all grew greatly distressed in mind as the
+hours wore on.
+
+Noon came, and once more the streets were nearly deserted, for the
+inhabitants of the city were indulging in a siesta.
+
+Now Cummings stationed himself at the window, peering out eagerly; but
+all in vain.
+
+Slowly the moments passed. The boys tried to eat; but the terrible
+suspense had spoiled all appetite for food, more especially since it was
+not particularly inviting, and after swallowing a few crumbs Teddy said:
+
+"It's no use, I can't even force it down. Why did we come here, knowing
+at least a portion of the danger?"
+
+"'Cause we were fools," Jake replied philosophically; "but that is no
+reason why we shouldn't have as near to a square meal as is possible,"
+and he began to devour another tortilla.
+
+"We won't despair yet," Cummings said, as he left his post at the window
+and joined the little group in the further corner of the room, "Poyor is
+cautious in the extreme, and may believe it isn't safe to enter the
+house in the daytime under any circumstances."
+
+"Did he say when he would come back?"
+
+"No; it was understood he should return at the first favorable
+opportunity."
+
+"Could you find the way to the boat if we never saw him again?" Teddy
+asked.
+
+"Yes, although we might have some trouble in doing so."
+
+Then another long interval of silence came upon the little party, during
+which each one listened intently for the slightest sound which might
+betoken a visitor.
+
+Finally Jake fell asleep, and so loud was his snoring that it seemed as
+if he must be heard from the street, therefore the boys pinched him when
+there was too great a volume of sound, and at the same time wished they
+could enjoy the same happy unconsciousness of the situation.
+
+Cummings alternately paced to and fro, and stood by the narrow aperture
+overlooking the street, until nightfall, when the citizens walked up and
+down singing or chatting.
+
+It was as if every one was perfectly happy, and this condition of
+affairs caused Cummings to feel less despondent.
+
+"Look," he said to Neal and Teddy, "if Poyor had been discovered the
+people would show some signs of excitement. We have no reason to fear
+yet awhile."
+
+The argument was certainly a good one, and the boys' courage revived
+wonderfully. They made a reasonably hearty supper of tortillas, and when
+the promenaders began to disappear, thus telling that the hour for
+retiring was near at hand, Cummings went downstairs and unbolted the
+door.
+
+Now every second appeared like a minute, and when it seemed as if the
+night must be well nigh spent a slight sound was heard from below.
+
+Jake would have rushed to the stair-case to welcome the Indian; but
+Cummings restrained him. It was not certain who the visitor might be,
+and with bated breath all listened until a low voice said:
+
+"It is Poyor."
+
+The remark was commonplace in the extreme; but no combination of words
+sounded more sweetly to the boys, and they rushed forward to clasp the
+Indian by the hand.
+
+In the dim light it was not possible to see him very clearly; but from
+the imperfect view all understood that something serious had happened.
+He was panting as if just having concluded a long race, and the flowing
+white garments he had put on before leaving in order to resemble the
+inhabitants of the city, were torn and stained with mud.
+
+Cummings spoke to him in the Indian dialect, and he replied gravely,
+the first words causing the white man to utter an exclamation of dismay.
+
+"What is the matter? What has happened?" Teddy asked; but Cummings made
+no reply until Poyor had spoken at considerable length, and then he
+said:
+
+"The worst possible misfortune has befallen us. Our boat has been
+discovered and brought into the city. It is believed we are hiding in
+the swamp, and a number of men are searching there for us."
+
+"Why didn't he come straight back to tell us?" Jake asked angrily. "If
+these people are so fierce as you pretend, it is time we were making our
+escape."
+
+"To have approached this place in the daytime would have been in the
+highest degree dangerous, and, besides, he had a good deal of work to
+do."
+
+"Such as what?"
+
+"It was necessary we should know exactly the strength and whereabouts of
+the searching party. That he has discovered."
+
+"And how much good will it do us while we are shut up in here?"
+
+"Do not cast reproaches in the time of trouble," Cummings replied
+gravely. "We must work together to extricate ourselves from the danger
+into which I have persuaded you to come."
+
+Jake was silenced, and Poyor continued to tell his story, but still
+speaking in his own language.
+
+The boys fancied he was proposing some plan which did not meet with
+Cummings' approbation, for the latter spoke vehemently at times.
+
+While this was going on Teddy whispered to Neal:
+
+"It begins to look as if the sailors who were drowned in the surf were
+more fortunate than the rest of us. They died quickly, and we shall
+probably find out what it means to be tortured."
+
+"Don't speak of such horrible things, Teddy. We are not captured yet,
+and there is no sense in looking trouble in the face."
+
+"It can't be helped sometimes. I've had enough of adventures, and if we
+do live to escape from this place all the gold in the world wouldn't
+tempt me to get into another such scrape."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+A RETREAT.
+
+
+Cummings and Poyor talked together fully half an hour before the former
+volunteered any further information to his white companions, and then he
+said:
+
+"It would be useless for me to disguise the truth in any particular, for
+it is important all should know the absolute facts of the situation. In
+laying my plans for this expedition the only contingency for which I did
+not prepare, was exactly what has happened. I never believed there were
+so many sentinels in the swamp that the boat would be discovered, and
+when we came through without seeing a single one, I felt perfectly safe
+on that score."
+
+"Isn't it possible the Indians will think it is a craft belonging to
+some of their own people?" Neal asked.
+
+"There is no hope of that. She is entirely different in build, and you
+must remember that we left a number of things on board. Those who found
+her came directly to the city, and orders have been given by the chief
+men that the swamp be searched thoroughly. There is no longer any
+possibility that we could go through without being discovered."
+
+"Then we've got no chance of escaping," Jake cried passionately, and
+Cummings replied calmly:
+
+"Who says we haven't? the coast line, where no one would think of
+looking for an enemy, is still open, and what prevents us from trying to
+make our way in that direction?"
+
+"Then you have given up all hope of carrying away any treasure?"
+
+"Under the circumstances I shall be well pleased if we succeed in
+getting away alive. We are now in a position where nothing save escape
+must be thought of, and I am the one who has placed you three in such a
+dangerous situation. Shut your eyes to the fact that so much treasure
+might be gained, and bend all your energies to leaving this section of
+the country. As compared with life gold amounts to very little."
+
+"Then we are to say that the attempt has been a failure," Jake added in
+a tone of reproach.
+
+"Yes, and I take upon myself all the blame. You have spent but little
+time on the enterprise, while to it I have devoted not less than two
+years, therefore you can get some idea of the extent of my
+disappointment as compared with yours."
+
+"We recognize that fully," Neal replied, "and understand that you
+believed the expedition would be successful; but since it has proven to
+be a failure let us decide upon the proper course to be pursued rather
+than spend our time reproaching each other."
+
+"You are talking like a sensible fellow," Cummings said approvingly.
+"Here is the situation in a nut-shell, and Poyor understands English
+sufficiently to follow us in all we say. To go back by the way we came
+is now impossible, and yet we must leave the city before a house to
+house search is made, as I am convinced will be the case when it is
+shown that there are no strangers in the swamp. The only open course is
+toward the east, over the mountains, and the journey can be accomplished
+if we hang together. I am willing to acknowledge that I have led you on
+an unsuccessful search, although that may be of little satisfaction, and
+now my only aim is to release you from the dangers which beset us all."
+
+"We understand that perfectly," Teddy said quickly, "therefore there is
+no reason why the matter should be discussed. We took the same chances
+that you and Poyor did, consequently our interests are identical. Show
+us how to get out of here, and the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may keep all
+their gold and silver so far as I am concerned."
+
+"But how are we to be paid for the time spent?" Jake asked fretfully.
+
+"By saving your own life, which is now in great danger," Neal replied.
+"Give up all idea of making yourself rich by the venture, and think only
+of how we can best get away."
+
+"That is something for Cummings to fix," Jake replied in a sulky tone.
+"I came here for gold, and if that can't be had let those who put up the
+job help us out of the scrape."
+
+"I have already taken upon myself all the blame of the failure, and
+admitted that it came about through an oversight of mine," Cummings said
+sternly. "Now if you will listen to my plan I believe we can get out of
+here alive, which is the one important thing just at this time when
+everything has gone against us."
+
+"What do you propose to do?" Neal asked, with a glance at Jake which
+should have silenced him.
+
+"Strike for the sea-shore. Poyor believes it is yet possible to leave
+the city on the eastern side without danger of meeting the sentinels,
+the majority of whom have been withdrawn to aid in searching the swamp,
+and by moving quickly we can at least be out of this hornets' nest
+before sunrise."
+
+"You are the best judge; we will follow your directions," Teddy said,
+speaking more calmly than one would have fancied was possible in view
+of all the danger. "Tell us what you think is best and we will agree to
+it, for now Neal and I have but one desire, which is to leave the Silver
+City in the shortest possible space of time. We can be of but little
+assistance in case of a regular fight, and according to my way of
+thinking, your greatest mistake has been in accepting such useless
+companions."
+
+"I am perfectly satisfied that so far as you are concerned I have not
+made any error. With twenty well-armed men I should not try to maintain
+my position, for to hold out against an attack would be impossible, and
+the only question now is whether we can escape. Having been here once I
+will come again, and at some time in the future you shall hear that I
+succeeded in bringing away treasure from this same wonderful city."
+
+Then Cummings held a short conversation with Poyor, and when it was
+concluded turned toward Neal and Teddy, as if disdaining to submit any
+plans to Jake, and said:
+
+"My first idea was to make an effort to return by the same way we came;
+but the Indian has persuaded me to the contrary. Are you willing to do
+as we think best?"
+
+"You are as eager to save your own lives as we are ours," Neal replied,
+"and since you are familiar with this country it would be foolish for us
+to offer any advice. Do whatever in the opinion of both is best, and we
+will obey orders."
+
+"Our scheme necessitates an immediate move, for, as yet, no attempt has
+been made to learn if there are any strangers in the city."
+
+"Then you propose to go without making any effort to carry away gold?"
+Jake asked.
+
+"Exactly. The journey has been a failure, through my carelessness as I
+said before, and to load ourselves down with treasure when a long march
+is before us, would be the height of folly."
+
+Jake remained silent, and Neal said:
+
+"Don't waste any more time talking. Let us start at once."
+
+Cummings spoke with Poyor, and the latter replied with the air of one
+who considers himself vanquished, after which the former said:
+
+"We may need all this food. Make it up into bundles, and we will start
+at once. The journey before us is a long and a dangerous one: but, as I
+believe, it is the only way of escape left open."
+
+The boys set about making the small amount of baggage into five parcels
+while Cummings and the Indian were still discussing some point, and when
+the conversation was concluded the former said:
+
+"We will start for the sea coast. There is no immediate hurry, for there
+is yet at least six hours before the inhabitants will be stirring."
+
+"There must be sentinels on the east as well as the west side," Teddy
+suggested.
+
+"True; but if the information brought by Poyor be correct, there will
+not be as strict a watch kept. The Indian believes we should try to
+force a passage through the swamp, fighting in case of a necessity; but
+I prefer that course where the least danger is to be met, even though
+the distance be greater."
+
+Neither Neal nor Teddy cared to discuss the matter: they knew that
+Cummings was the best judge in such a case, and were well content to
+follow his leadership; but Jake did not trust him so implicitly.
+
+"Before we leave here I want to know your plans," he said. "My life as
+well as yours and the others, is in danger, and it is no more than right
+that I have at least a faint idea of what is to be done."
+
+"You are quite right," Cummings replied mildly. "It is my purpose to
+travel toward the east as far as the sea-shore, and from there make our
+way to my hut. So far as I can see it is the only practicable course."
+
+"What does the Indian say?"
+
+"He thinks we can go through the swamp even if we have no boat: but, in
+my opinion, the danger of contracting the fever is too great."
+
+Jake had the appearance of a man who is about to make some protest, and
+Neal whispered to him:
+
+"In such a case as this it is our duty to accept Cummings' view of the
+matter. Do not delay now when we all know that every moment is
+precious."
+
+"Have it your own way, I won't say another word," the engineer replied
+impatiently; "but I think we have followed this man blindly as long as
+we should."
+
+Neal paid no attention to the latter portion of this remark, but said as
+he turned toward the leader:
+
+"It is all right; we are ready."
+
+"Then follow me, and remember that our lives may pay the forfeit if a
+single incautious word is spoken."
+
+Thus speaking he took up one of the packages, looked once more to the
+cartridges in his gun, and started down the stairs, the boys and Jake
+following, while Poyor brought up the rear.
+
+At the outer door he hesitated an instant, much as if to persuade
+himself that it was absolutely necessary to flee from this city to enter
+which he had spent so many days in making preparations, and then,
+throwing it open, he led the way into the deserted streets.
+
+"Our safest plan is to go straight across, rather than try to circle
+around the outskirts where we may meet with sentinels," he said,
+motioning for Poyor to lead the way. "At present no one suspects that we
+are here, consequently the guard will not be particularly on the alert."
+
+"Do as you think best," Neal replied, and then, falling back by the side
+of Teddy, he whispered:
+
+"If it hadn't been for me you wouldn't have gotten into this scrape; in
+case anything happens try not to believe it was my fault."
+
+"There is no possible chance that you can be to blame," Teddy replied
+warmly. "Any one would have accepted the invitation to go yachting, and
+this last part of the cruise is only the result of an accident with
+which you had nothing to do."
+
+Jake did not open his mouth; he acted as if Cummings had done him a
+personal injury in proposing such a trip, and the fact that they were
+obliged to leave without making any effort to carry away the vast amount
+of treasure which he knew to be in the city unguarded, aroused his anger
+in a most unreasonable degree.
+
+Poyor took the lead and conducted the party directly past the enormous
+temple with its ornamentation of silver which shone in the pale rays of
+the moon until the entire structure appeared to be a solid mass of the
+precious metal, and the marvelous sight was too much for Jake, who,
+coming to a sudden halt, said doggedly:
+
+"It may be all right for you boys with rich fathers to turn your backs
+on so much wealth; but I'm goin' to have some part of this treasure, or
+give the Indians a fair chance to kill me."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+DISCOVERED.
+
+
+Cummings was bringing up the rear during this march across the city, and
+when Jake halted he naturally thought it was in obedience to some signal
+made by Poyor, therefore he remained silent until hearing Neal say
+imploringly:
+
+"Go on, Jake. Don't stop now when we have a chance of getting away in
+safety, for what is gold in comparison with life?"
+
+"Have you halted with any idea that it may be possible to carry anything
+off with us?" Cummings asked, speaking in a whisper, and Jake replied in
+the same cautious tone:
+
+"That's the size of it. You brought us here with the promise that we
+could make ourselves rich, and when the first little thing goes wrong
+you run. Now I will do as I please."
+
+"It is nothing less than suicide. We have before us a journey so long
+and difficult that however small a burden you may have to carry, it will
+seem all too heavy."
+
+By this time Poyor turned back to learn the cause of the halt, and when
+it was explained he said gravely:
+
+"Each instant we stand here brings death so much nearer. Even at this
+moment watchful eyes may be upon us, and once we are discovered flight
+will be almost impossible."
+
+The little party stood directly in front of what was evidently the main
+entrance to the temple. It was formed of twenty slender shafts of white
+stone which in the moonlight looked translucent, and each column upheld
+a grotesque figure composed of what appeared to be silver.
+
+"I am goin' to have one of them images, no matter what happens," Jake
+said doggedly. "I don't care how much of a tramp there is before us, and
+the more the thing weighs the better I'll be pleased, for it's the first
+chance I ever had to make myself rich."
+
+"But think of us," Teddy whispered. "We all run the risk of being killed
+because of what you propose to do."
+
+"There's no need of your waitin' here. Go on, an' I'll take care of
+myself. I ain't such a chump as not to be able to find my way out."
+
+"It must be as he says. We can wait no longer," Poyor said peremptorily.
+"Better one should die than all," and, seizing Neal by the shoulder, he
+literally dragged him away.
+
+Cummings did the same by Teddy, and as the boys were thus forced from
+the place they saw Jake trying to make his way up one of the smooth
+shafts.
+
+"It is cruel to leave him when you know he will be killed," Neal said as
+he struggled in vain to release himself from the Indian's grasp.
+
+"He knows the danger, and will not come. We must care for ourselves. Now
+remain quiet; there has been too much noise and too long a delay."
+
+Poyor was walking at a pace so rapid that the boys were forced to run;
+but before they reached the next intersecting street a loud crash was
+heard from the direction of the temple, and Cummings whispered:
+
+"He has toppled over one of the columns, and discovery is now certain.
+He has insured our destruction as well as his own."
+
+The words had hardly been uttered when shouts were heard from different
+portions of the city, and, as if he had sprung from the ground, a man
+appeared directly in their path.
+
+A second's delay would have been fatal. Poyor, releasing his hold of
+Neal, dashed forward with the agility of a cat, and springing upon the
+stranger bore him to the ground.
+
+There was a short, sharp struggle which lasted while one might possibly
+have counted ten, and then the man lay motionless while Poyor, grasping
+Neal by the arm once more, darted on down the street.
+
+Now it seemed as if the entire city had been aroused. On every hand
+could be heard shouts as if of command and cries of surprise and anger.
+The sound of footsteps in the rear told that the pursuit had already
+begun, and it was a race for life with the odds fearfully against the
+fugitives.
+
+"You must run now as you never did before," Cummings said sharply to
+Teddy. "There can be no thought of fatigue until we reach some shelter
+where it will be possible to make a stand."
+
+"I can hold out as long as Neal; but neither of us are a match for
+Poyor."
+
+"He could run all day."
+
+Two moments later, when they were nearing a broad street which Cummings
+fancied led to the woods on the eastern side of the city, Poyor
+slackened his pace to say:
+
+"There is one close behind who must be stopped. Will you do it, or shall
+I?"
+
+"Help Teddy along, while I try it."
+
+As the Indian took Teddy by the arm, thus having a boy on either side of
+him, Cummings unslung the rifle which had been strapped over his
+shoulder, and, wheeling suddenly, raised it at a man who was not more
+than forty yards in the rear.
+
+"Don't shoot! It's me!" a familiar voice cried, and as Cummings turned
+to resume the flight he muttered to himself:
+
+"It's a pity they haven't caught you. But for your folly we could have
+passed through the city unobserved."
+
+Jake no longer believed the Chan Santa Cruz Indians to be such a
+peaceable race. When, as Cummings had suspected, the shaft he was trying
+to climb toppled over, he was able to escape injury by leaping to one
+side, and immediately made an effort to detach the statue which was
+cemented firmly to the stone.
+
+It seemed to him that he had but just begun the task when two men rushed
+from the interior of the temple. Fortunately for him they were unarmed
+or his term of life would have expired at that moment; but as it was one
+of them seized a fragment of the stone as he turned to run, and threw it
+with such accuracy of aim that Jake's cheek was cut from the eye to the
+chin as smoothly as if done with a razor.
+
+With the blood streaming down his face Jake ran for dear life in the
+direction taken by the remainder of the party, and now fully realizing
+the danger he had brought upon them.
+
+"I deserve to be killed," he said to himself, "and if that Poyor don't
+try to even up things with me for this night's job it'll be because he's
+a better Indian than I ever gave him credit for."
+
+When the remainder of the party reached the end of the broad street with
+the welcome shelter of the forest not more than half a mile away, Jake
+was ten or twelve yards in the rear, and three times that distance
+behind him were a dozen men who appeared to be gaining each instant.
+
+Again Poyor spoke to Cummings, and again the latter stopped suddenly and
+wheeled about: but this time there was no warning shout to prevent the
+rifle from being discharged.
+
+There was a loud report, a cry of pain from one of the pursuers, and all
+halted for an instant to aid their wounded companion.
+
+When Cummings turned to continue the flight Jake was by his side, saying
+as they ran:
+
+"If it comes to close quarters I'll drop behind, and make as long a
+fight as I can, which will give the rest a chance to gain on the crowd."
+
+"They would surely kill you. There could be no hope in a hand to hand
+struggle."
+
+"I know that, and it will be no more than I deserve. If I hadn't been
+such a fool you would have got through without turning a hair."
+
+This confession and the proposition to sacrifice himself had the effect
+of dissipating Cummings' anger, and he said decidedly:
+
+"We will stick together and take even chances. No matter what has been
+done one shall not be sacrificed to save the rest unless I, who brought
+you here, am that one."
+
+To carry on any extended conversation and at the same time continue the
+pace was out of the question, and during the next five minutes not a
+word was spoken.
+
+Now there were two dozen pursuers, and the boys had become so nearly
+exhausted that Teddy felt positive that he could not keep on his feet
+long enough to reach the forest.
+
+Poyor, seeing that both the boys had nearly run their race, shouted in
+his own language a few words to Cummings, clasped his panting companions
+by the waist, and, although thus burdened, soon drew away from both the
+white men.
+
+Nearer and nearer come the pursuers.
+
+Once more Cummings halts, discharges his rifle, and then presses
+forward.
+
+Poyor gains the shelter while the others are a hundred yards away, and
+allowing the boys to drop to the ground, he unslings Neal's gun, stands
+at the very edge of the cover where he fires two shots just in time to
+save the remainder of the party.
+
+"We must not stop here," he says as Cummings comes to a halt by his
+side. "Help the boys, and leave me here long enough to hold them in
+check until you have put considerable distance between the crowd and
+yourselves."
+
+Cummings waited only until he had given the Indian his own rifle and
+some cartridges, for it was a more effective weapon than Neal's, and
+then he and Jake did as directed.
+
+Traveling in as nearly a straight line as possible they marched rapidly,
+while behind them could be heard shot after shot, telling that Poyor was
+doing his duty.
+
+"If he can keep that up long enough we shall give them the slip after
+all," Jake said, speaking with difficulty as he gasped for breath.
+
+"There are others to be met. Between here and the coast is a line of
+sentinels who may be more vigilant than those in the swamp."
+
+Now that the pace was slower, and because of the assistance rendered,
+Neal and Teddy were able to make their way unaided, and the former said
+as he pushed Cummings from him:
+
+"I am all right now. You have as much as you can do to take care of
+yourself, and it is not fair to half carry me as you and Poyor have been
+doing."
+
+"It hasn't been such a very hard job; but I'm perfectly willing to give
+it up if you are feeling better."
+
+"We are both in fair condition," Teddy replied, and being relieved of
+the burdens the men were able to travel more rapidly.
+
+During the next ten minutes not a word was spoken, and then Cummings
+said as he halted:
+
+"We'll take a little rest, for I am nearly blown."
+
+All threw themselves on the ground where they lay panting until,
+recovering somewhat, Jake asked:
+
+"How is Poyor to find us in this thicket? He can't follow a trail in the
+darkness."
+
+"He will succeed in doing so as---- Say, are you wounded?"
+
+"One of those fellows cut my cheek open with a rock; but beyond the pain
+I don't reckon there's been any great damage done."
+
+"You are fortunate that it was not inflicted by an arrow or spear. Let
+me try to bandage it, for the loss of blood will tell upon you if we
+continue this gait very long."
+
+With strips torn from Jake's shirt the wound was bound up in an awkward
+fashion, and Cummings said as he finished the work:
+
+"When Poyor comes he will gather a certain leaf which has healing
+properties, and in a short time all the pain will go away; but I fancy
+you'll carry that scar to your grave."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+A HALT.
+
+
+Jake professed to have but little care how long the scar might remain on
+his face providing the wound healed, and they succeeded in escaping from
+the Chan Santa Cruz Indians.
+
+"Nothing that can happen to us during the journey to Merida would be
+half as bad as to fall into their hands," he said with a shudder, "and
+what surprises me most is that I should have thought they were peaceably
+inclined."
+
+"But that is exactly what they are until it comes to dealing with a
+white man," Cummings replied. "You must remember all that the
+people--the natives I mean--have suffered since America was discovered.
+The barbarous treatment they received from the Spaniards is told from
+father to son, and it is a portion of their religious training to work
+all the injury possible to the whites. Read of what the invaders did to
+satisfy their thirst for gold, and then you can no longer wonder why
+these people, the only ones who have kept their city free from the
+conqueror, are so implacable. Remember that Yucatan was once covered
+with populous cities, the ruins of which show even at this late date how
+magnificent they were, how splendid beyond comparison with the one we
+have seen, and you ask yourselves why these Indians do not rise and
+massacre all of the hated color that can be found."
+
+"But you also came hoping to take away their treasure," Neal said,
+smiling at Cummings' vehemence.
+
+"That is true, therefore I have no word of blame when they attempt to
+kill me; but, as a matter of course, I try to save my life even though I
+am to them nothing more than a common robber. In my own eyes, however,
+the case seems different. To procure such goods as I most desired, would
+probably be, by the aid of Poyor, to solve that which scholars have
+studied for so long in vain--the origin of the Aztecs and Toltecs, for I
+believe the Chan Santa Cruz belong to the latter race, and keep fresh
+all their histories and traditions."
+
+"And now that you have failed it would be better to go home with us,"
+Teddy said.
+
+"This attempt has failed; but I shall try again and again until I
+succeed, providing we get out of this scrape alive, which is by no means
+certain, for we have a long and perilous journey before us."
+
+"Which we are not likely to make unless Poyor comes back," Neal added
+grimly. "It surely seems as if he should be here by this time. I haven't
+heard the report of his rifle for a long while."
+
+"Most likely we are too far away for the sound to reach us. We will wait
+half an hour longer, and then I will go back to see if anything has
+happened."
+
+Cummings had hardly ceased speaking before the Indian appeared in their
+midst, having come so softly that no one heard him until he stood before
+them.
+
+"It is not a good watch you keep," he said to Cummings, speaking in
+English.
+
+"We cannot guard against such an approach as yours. Where are the
+enemy?"
+
+"I left them at the edge of the forest. Knowing how we are armed they do
+not dare to follow very close; but when the sun rises a hundred will be
+at our heels."
+
+"Shall we go on now, or will you rest awhile?"
+
+"I am ready. We have no time to lose."
+
+Cummings rose to his feet, the others following his example, and the
+Indian started forward without delay.
+
+"How far are we from the sea-shore?" Cummings asked as the march began.
+
+"More miles than we shall travel for many days. By sunrise every
+sentinel will know we are here, and it will be impossible to break
+through their lines."
+
+"Then how are we to get home?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+"He probably hopes to find some place where we can stay in hiding for
+awhile. In this section of the country there are many large caverns in
+which streams of water are invariably found, thus causing the belief
+that a subterranean river flows from the valley to the sea. If we stop
+at one of them until it is decided we have succeeded in escaping, you
+will not be able to take the steamer as intended."
+
+"But we may have to stay two or three weeks."
+
+"Better that than to be captured," Cummings replied, and then he
+relapsed into silence.
+
+During the next two hours the little party pressed steadily forward,
+making their way with difficulty through the tangled foliage, and then
+Neal was forced to ask for another halt.
+
+"I must rest awhile," he said. "My feet are sore, and it seems
+impossible to take another step."
+
+Poyor halted, was about to seat himself, and then, as if suddenly
+remembering something, he said:
+
+"Wait here. I will soon be back."
+
+The white members of the party were too tired even to talk. Throwing
+themselves upon the ground they enjoyed the luxury of rest, and,
+convinced there was no danger to be apprehended from the enemy until
+daylight, Neal and Teddy gave themselves up to the embrace of slumber.
+
+An hour passed before the apparently tireless Poyor returned, and he
+awakened the sleepers by saying:
+
+"I have found that for which I sought. Come with me, and repose until
+labor will seem a pleasure."
+
+"What is it? A cave?" Neal asked sleepily.
+
+"More than that. An underground house where we can live in safety,
+unless the retreat should be discovered."
+
+It was a great exertion to get into traveling trim; but all hands did it
+after a time, and Poyor led the way, although he had probably been there
+but once before, as if following a familiar path.
+
+After about half an hour's rapid walking the Indian halted at an opening
+in the hillside hardly more than large enough for one to go through on
+his hands and knees, and motioned for the others to enter.
+
+Cummings led the way, and while he was doing so Teddy asked Poyor:
+
+"Have you been here often before?"
+
+"This is the first time."
+
+"How could you see a small hole like that while it is so dark?"
+
+"On the line of these caves the earth is always damp. When we halted
+last I could feel that we were on the underground water course, and it
+was only necessary to follow it up. Here we shall find both food and
+drink."
+
+"I don't understand where the food comes in unless we are to live on
+bats," Neal said laughingly, as he in turn entered the aperture.
+
+By the time Teddy was inside Cummings had lighted a branch of what is
+mistakenly called fat wood, and, using this for a torch, it was possible
+to have a reasonably good view of the temporary home.
+
+The boys found themselves standing in an enormous chamber, from which
+led several galleries or smaller rooms, lined with the same soft white
+stone seen in the buildings of the Silver City, and at the further end
+was a narrow stream rising apparently from the solid rock, crossing the
+cavern to the opposite side where it disappeared.
+
+To describe the beauty of this marble chamber fashioned by nature would
+be impossible. Neal and Teddy had but just begun to realize its
+magnificence when they were startled by the whirring of wings and a
+clucking noise such as is made by a barn-yard fowl, and an instant later
+Poyor had knocked over with a piece of rock what looked very much like a
+chicken.
+
+"It is a toh," Cummings said, as he took the prize from the Indian. "At
+the city from which we came so unceremoniously these birds are kept as
+hens, and their eggs are most delicious."
+
+"But how did this one happen to be in here, I wonder?" Teddy muttered.
+
+"The species are found nowhere else but in the caverns. Probably there
+are several hundred here."
+
+Before the torch had burned out the boys had time to examine the odd
+chicken. It was about as large as a bantam, had soft, silky plumage, and
+a tail composed of two feathers which were nothing more than stems up to
+the very tips, where were tassel-like appendages.
+
+"Now if the enemy does not track us here we can live pretty comfortably
+for a few days; but I hope we shan't be obliged to stay any longer.
+Poyor will destroy our trail as soon as it is light, and if they should
+come I fancy we can tire them out, for one man can hold this place
+against a hundred."
+
+"I am going to drink my fill of that water," Jake said, as he groped his
+way toward the rear of the chamber. "It seems as if I hadn't had all I
+needed since we started on this trip."
+
+"Be careful," Cummings shouted quickly. "Don't venture near the stream
+until I get another torch."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"Because in some of these caverns alligators are found, and it is never
+safe to drink from the running water without first making sure that
+there are no saurian guards about."
+
+Cummings went to the entrance for more wood, and when he returned the
+Indian was with him.
+
+"This will cure the wound on your face," the latter said to Jake as he
+held out a branch covered with small, glossy green leaves. "Take off the
+cloth that I may see it."
+
+While Jake obeyed, Cummings was kindling a fresh torch, and as the light
+fell upon the engineer's cheek both the boys uttered exclamations of
+surprise.
+
+It was certainly a terrible looking wound, the dried blood causing it to
+appear even larger than it really was; but Poyor set about dressing it
+with the utmost indifference, perhaps because he thought Jake deserved
+it for having been so stubborn and criminally foolish.
+
+The Indian chewed the leaves to a pulp, and then spread them thickly on
+the wound, after which Cummings replaced the cloth, and Jake declared
+that the pain had subsided instantly.
+
+"I must remember the name of that plant if it can be found in a dried
+state at home," he said, "and there are many times when such a poultice
+would come in mighty handy."
+
+"He has only bound on leaves from a shrub called guaco; but you needn't
+try to remember the name, for they are efficacious only while green. Now
+that the surgeon's duties have been performed we will get some water,
+and then set about cooking breakfast. Poyor, bring in plenty of wood,
+and then try to find another toh."
+
+At the swiftly running stream nothing resembling an alligator was seen,
+and the white members of the party enjoyed to the utmost copious
+draughts of the ice-cold liquid.
+
+Meanwhile the Indian was rapidly obeying Cummings' orders. He built a
+fire near the water, and by the light which the white stones reflected
+in every direction, had but little difficulty in knocking over three
+more of what Teddy persisted in calling "chickens."
+
+Leaving the cave again he soon returned with a lot of clay which he
+pasted over the tohs without removing the feathers or intestines, and
+thus prepared one would have supposed they were nothing more than so
+many balls of mud.
+
+These he put into the fire, piled the wood over and around them, and
+then sat down to wait for the fruits of his labor.
+
+The boys fell asleep before the fowls were cooked: but after a little
+more than an hour Cummings awakened them to get their share of the
+feast.
+
+The now thoroughly baked clay was broken open, and it was found that the
+feathers and skin of the birds had adhered to the covering, leaving the
+white flesh temptingly exposed.
+
+Among the small amount of stores there was salt sufficient for several
+days' consumption, therefore they were not without seasoning for the
+meat, and Jake, Neal and Teddy were quite positive they had never eaten
+anything half so delicious as this odd chicken baked in a most singular
+manner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+CAVE LIFE.
+
+
+When the meal was ended it was nearly daylight and Cummings said as he
+stretched himself out close by the entrance:
+
+"It is necessary that the strictest kind of a watch should be kept every
+moment of the time from now on. I'll take the first trick, Jake shall be
+awakened next, and Poyor, who has done the most work, comes last."
+
+"But what are Teddy and I to do?" Neal asked in surprise. "We are as
+well able to stand guard as any one else."
+
+"I allowed that it would be at least twenty-four hours before you were
+in condition for anything," Cummings replied with a laugh.
+
+"That is where you made a big mistake," Teddy added. "We insist on doing
+our full share."
+
+"Very well, if Poyor is asleep when Jake goes off duty one of you shall
+be called."
+
+It was arranged that they should sleep near the entrance where the
+sentinel could awaken them if necessary, without making a noise, and
+after the weapons were examined once more to make certain they were in
+good working order, all save Cummings made a business of going to sleep.
+
+The Indian did not give any one an opportunity of awakening him. At the
+expiration of an hour, just as Cummings was thinking it time to call
+Jake, he arose and peered cautiously out through the opening.
+
+"Why did you get up so soon?" Cummings asked. "You need rest, and there
+is nothing to prevent your sleeping until noon if you feel so disposed."
+
+"There is much work to be done," he replied gravely. "When the sun rises
+I must examine the trail to make sure it is not too plain."
+
+"It will be another hour before daylight."
+
+"By sitting here I shall be ready to go as soon as it is light."
+
+"I do not think you are giving me the true reason," and Cummings ignited
+a match that he might see the Indian's face.
+
+"You must not do that," he said quickly, as he clasped his hand over the
+tiny flame. "It is unwise so near the entrance."
+
+"You believe then that we are in considerable danger?"
+
+"We shall be until we are outside the Chan Santa Cruz country."
+
+"That is not all you can say. I wish to know exactly your opinion of the
+situation."
+
+"You shall know; but it is not well to explain to the others. Our
+enemies will find us I think, and we may be forced to fight to the end,
+for they will not give up the chase until after many days."
+
+"Do you think it would be unsafe to push on again now we have had rest
+and food?"
+
+"By this time the sentinels know what happened last night, and the
+forest is full of enemies. A poisoned arrow can be sent in the daytime,
+while he who shoots it remains concealed. Before noon we would all be
+dead."
+
+Cummings was silent for a moment, and then he asked in a low tone:
+
+"How far do you think we are from the sea-shore?"
+
+"The distance is not great; but the way so difficult that the journey
+could not be ended in less than five days."
+
+"Then it seems that we are in a tight place whatever course is pursued."
+
+"We can fight longer here than where the trees conceal our foes," was
+the grave reply, and then Poyor crept through the opening into the
+gloomy forest where wild animals and wilder human beings lurked to
+destroy.
+
+After this conversation Cummings was in no mood for sleep, and he
+refrained from awakening Jake.
+
+Seated where he could hear the slightest sound from the outside, he
+reflected upon all the dangers of the situation, and reproached himself
+for having led the boys and the engineer into such peril.
+
+"I would have been culpable if no one but Poyor had accompanied me," he
+said to himself, "and now I am directly responsible for the lives of
+those who but for me, would at this moment be safe in Merida."
+
+There was nothing to be gained by scolding one's self, and he strove
+with very poor success to put such thoughts from his mind until the sun
+rose, partially lighting up the gloomy recesses of the forest, and
+sending tiny rays of light through the narrow aperture.
+
+The three sleepers breathed regularly and noisily; but the sentinel
+disturbed them not.
+
+The minutes passed slowly until two hours had elapsed, and then a slight
+rustling of leaves near the entrance caused Cummings to seize the rifle
+more firmly and peer out.
+
+It was Poyor returning, and he appeared weary like one who has run a
+long race.
+
+"Have you seen anything?" Cummings asked anxiously.
+
+"There were four Indians about a mile south from here. They came from
+the city last night, and are searching. It was possible to hear them
+talk. The sentinels near the coast have been doubled in number, and
+there is little hope we could pass them."
+
+"It is barely possible they may not find this cave; the entrance is
+small, and almost hidden by the brushes."
+
+"Yet I found it in the night."
+
+"True," Cummings replied gloomily, and as he said nothing more Poyor
+went to the stream to quench his thirst.
+
+While passing by Jake he accidentally brushed the latter's arm with his
+foot, and the engineer was on his feet in an instant, staring around
+stupidly as if believing the enemy was upon him.
+
+"Why didn't you call me to stand my watch?" he asked in a loud tone, and
+Poyor, darting back to his side whispered:
+
+"It is not safe to make any noise. Do not so much as speak aloud."
+
+By this time the boys were aroused, and when the Indian had cautioned
+them in turn all three went to where Cummings was seated.
+
+"Are we going to move, or have you concluded to stay here?" Neal asked.
+
+"We shall be obliged to make this our headquarters for a few days. Poyor
+has seen people from the city in the immediate vicinity, consequently it
+is advisable to keep under cover."
+
+"Do you think we will be able to leave in a week?" Teddy asked
+anxiously, and Cummings replied evasively:
+
+"I hope so."
+
+To Jake, who did not feel so eager to reach home by the next steamer
+that left Progresso, the prospect of remaining in the cave several days
+was agreeable rather than otherwise, and he asked:
+
+"Are we to cook any breakfast this morning?"
+
+"No, because the smoke might be seen. To-night there will be no such
+danger, and the light can be screened from view, therefore it is a case
+of getting along with a cold bite until then. Sleep as much as possible
+in order that you may be ready to do your share of the watching, and
+remember that perfect silence is absolutely necessary."
+
+Then Cummings intimated that the conversation should cease, by turning
+his attention to what might be happening outside, and the three went
+toward the opposite end of the cavern where the Indian had thrown
+himself down for a nap.
+
+Here, after discussing what little they knew regarding the situation,
+they ate a few totopostes, a thin, dry tortilla which will remain sweet
+many days, and then gave themselves up to slumber once more.
+
+To sleep when one does not feel the necessity of such rest is, however,
+not an easy matter to be arranged, and after two or three short naps the
+boys found it impossible to woo the drowsy god.
+
+They walked around the cavern, arousing flocks of tohs; but, owing to
+the dim light, finding nothing worthy of attention, and then they went
+to the entrance where Cummings refused to hold any conversation with
+them because of the possibility that some of the enemy might be lurking
+outside, where it was possible to hear the sound of their voices.
+
+In this restless manner the day was spent, and when night came again
+Poyor ventured out once more.
+
+By this time Cummings felt the necessity of gaining a little rest, and
+he proposed that Neal and Teddy take their turn at standing watch.
+
+"It will not be so tedious if you remain here together," he said, "and
+we will give Jake a job later in the night."
+
+It was really a relief to the boys to have something to occupy their
+time, and as they took his place at the entrance he lay down near at
+hand where they could awaken him without difficulty in case it should
+become necessary.
+
+To repeat all the unimportant incidents of the night would be tedious.
+When Poyor returned from his first trip outside he built a fire near the
+stream, shielded the flame by a screen of boughs that the light might
+not be reflected from the entrance, and then, with the air of one who is
+accustomed to such work, set about catching "chickens" enough to make a
+hearty meal.
+
+Dishing these up in clay he roasted them as before, and Cummings was
+awakened to share in the appetizing meal.
+
+Then the Indian went out again, while Jake was standing watch, and an
+hour later (it was then about two o'clock in the morning), he returned,
+and roused Cummings, saying in his native tongue as he did so:
+
+"Five miles from here is a smaller cave. The sentinels have just
+finished searching it. They will be here in the morning. I have thought
+we might slip past them, by exercising great caution, and it would be
+just so much nearer the coast."
+
+"Do you believe it should be done?" Cummings asked, as he sprang to his
+feet.
+
+"It can do no harm, providing we are not discovered during the march
+through the forest, and we may possibly be able to throw them off the
+scent."
+
+"Then we will start at once. Under such desperate circumstances nothing
+should be neglected which might be of benefit. How much food have we got
+on hand?"
+
+"All that will be needed. It is not difficult to procure provisions in
+this forest."
+
+It surely seemed as if they might better their condition very materially
+by making this change, and, in view of all things, it was the proper
+manoeuvre since by remaining there was no doubt the party would be
+discovered, when a regular siege must necessarily be the result.
+
+There was yet a considerable amount of the roasted tohs on hand. This
+was wrapped in leaves with the remainder of the provisions, and all the
+luggage made up in three packages, for it had been decided that the boys
+should not be called upon to carry any burden.
+
+"It may be that we shall be obliged to move quickly," Poyor said, "and
+it is best they have nothing but their guns."
+
+When everything was in readiness for the start the Indian went outside
+once more to reconnoiter, and on his return the final preparations were
+made.
+
+He, Cummings and Jake fastened the bundles to their backs; Neal and
+Teddy were cautioned to take plenty of cartridges from the general
+store, and then, Poyor leading the way, they emerged from the cave.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+A CHANGE OF BASE.
+
+
+Although the boys did not know the full extent of the danger, they could
+understand something of the anxiety felt by both Cummings and Poyor when
+the shelter of the cave had been left behind.
+
+The latter moved with the utmost caution, taking half a dozen steps and
+then stopping to listen; halting whenever the foliage rustled more than
+he fancied was usual and otherwise acting as if believing the enemy had
+completely surrounded them.
+
+Under such circumstances the advance was necessarily slow, and at least
+an hour was consumed in traveling less than a mile.
+
+Teddy was on the point of protesting against such excessive precaution
+when the sound of voices caused all the party to crouch low among the
+bushes, hiding themselves in the foliage just as four Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians came to a halt not more than twenty feet away.
+
+It was not difficult to distinguish the form of each one even amid the
+gloom, and from their manoeuvers Teddy and Neal were confident that
+they had halted for the remainder of the night.
+
+It would have been impossible to hold any conversation, however guarded,
+without the certainty of being heard while these men were so near, and
+the fugitives remained motionless, hardly daring to breathe, until it
+seemed as if some change of position must be made regardless of the
+consequences.
+
+Each one with the possible exception of Poyor, was so cramped as to be
+in great pain: but all knew that the slightest unusual noise among the
+foliage would have attracted attention.
+
+Of course Cummings' party was more than a match for the Indians; but in
+addition to his disinclination to begin a fight, was the chance that
+there might be others in the immediate vicinity who would join in the
+battle, thus reducing the odds which appeared to be in favor of the
+white men.
+
+It was in the highest degree important, also, that they remain hidden,
+for once the Indians got a glimpse of the party it would be a simple
+matter to track them to the next hiding place.
+
+There was another and a very weighty reason why both Cummings and Poyor
+wished to avoid an encounter in the forest, even though their weapons
+were much superior to those carried by the Chan Santa Cruz so far as
+rapid work was concerned. Unless struck in some vital part, the chances
+are in favor of recovery from a bullet wound; but let the skin be
+punctured ever so slightly by arrows poisoned with the venom of the
+snake known as the nahuyaca and death is certain to follow.
+
+With all this in mind it is little wonder that the fugitives suffered
+considerable pain before making any attempt to change positions, and
+that they would be forced to remain exactly where the halt had been
+made, until morning, seemed positive.
+
+Poyor was well content to stay there as long as the men carried on a
+conversation, for he was thus enabled to get some valuable information
+concerning their proposed movements, and not a word escaped him.
+
+Three hours elapsed before the pursuers gave any sign of leaving the
+place, and then a peculiar sound as of a night bird calling to its mate,
+caused them to start to their feet.
+
+It was evidently a signal from another party of pursuers, for these men
+answered it by a similar cry, and it was repeated several times by those
+in the distance.
+
+A moment later the Indians had started, and as they disappeared Neal
+whispered to Teddy:
+
+"I never realized before how much comfort there is in the ability to
+move whenever a fellow feels so disposed."
+
+"If I'd been obliged to keep still ten minutes longer I believe my legs
+would have dropped off," Teddy replied with a sigh of relief.
+
+There was no time to say anything more; Poyor had begun the advance, and
+the little party moved slowly and silently through the gloomy forest
+until the Indian halted in front of an opening slightly larger than the
+one leading to the cave they had just left.
+
+Jake did not wait to be told that the journey had come to an end; but at
+once crawled through, followed by Cummings with the materials for making
+a torch, and in a few moments the boys were also inside.
+
+Poyor did not accompany them; he wanted to assure himself that they had
+not been discovered, and proposed to stand guard among the trees until
+this had been accomplished.
+
+The cavern was not more than half as large as the one first visited; but
+was formed of the same peculiar stone. Here also was a stream across one
+corner, the bottom of which sloped gently up to the shore of fine white
+sand, and, so far as could be ascertained, it did not afford a home for
+disagreeable monsters in the shape of alligators.
+
+There was plenty of evidence near the entrance to show that in addition
+to searching the cave the Indians had made a long halt. Fragments of
+totopostes were scattered around, and a small pile of fine shavings told
+where one of them had repaired an arrow.
+
+The only objection which could be found in this new refuge was that it
+had not been taken possession of by tohs. Cummings searched everywhere
+in vain for the "chickens," and the troubled look on his face spoke
+plainly of his disappointment in failing to find a supply of food close
+at hand.
+
+"If we should be discovered and besieged it will be a case of short
+rations," he said as the little party returned to the opening to wait
+for Poyor.
+
+"Don't you suppose there are fish in the stream?" Teddy asked.
+
+"I never heard that there were; but even if it was stocked with them we
+should be none the better off since there are neither hooks nor lines
+here."
+
+"Neal and I have got plenty of both, so what's to hinder our finding
+out? A fresh fish wouldn't taste badly."
+
+"Very well. I'll stay here on guard, and----"
+
+He was interrupted by the arrival of Poyor, who had crept through the
+short passage without making sufficient sound to be heard by those who
+were supposed to be watching, and, speaking in English, he said to
+Cummings:
+
+"I do not think there is any one near here, and now I wish to go further
+on to learn where the next line of sentinels is posted. We may be able
+to change our quarters again, and if every move takes us nearer the
+coast we shall be gaining just so much every time. You must keep a
+better watch, however, for if I can surprise you, so can others."
+
+"I will take it upon myself to see that no one else is able to do the
+same thing," Cummings replied with a laugh. "When you are outside in the
+vicinity I always feel secure; for the best Chan Santa Cruz that ever
+lived couldn't pass without your knowledge. Did you hear anything of
+importance while we were hiding so near that party?"
+
+"From what they said it is positive fully a hundred men have been sent
+from the city to search for us, and with the sentinels there must be
+double that number between here and the coast."
+
+"It would seem as if with so many they ought to run us to the ground
+finally," Cummings said musingly. "Where were those fellows going?"
+
+"They had been following the wet track examining the caves, and began
+near the range of hills which forms the east boundary of their country.
+One of the party believed we had doubled back in order to cross the
+swamp, and if we can remain hidden it may not be long before all the
+searchers will be sent in that direction."
+
+"Did they make any talk about what would be done with us in case they
+run us down?" Jake asked.
+
+"All are to be taken to the city alive, if possible, and it is not hard
+to say what would be our fate there."
+
+"What do they do with their captives?" Jake continued, as if this not
+very cheerful subject fascinated him.
+
+"A white man would be sacrificed in the temple before the gods, and the
+death stroke would not be delivered until much torture had been
+inflicted."
+
+"Don't talk of such horrible things," Teddy interrupted nervously. "It
+can do us no good to learn all the terrible particulars. I want to keep
+my mind on the one idea of escape."
+
+"That is where you are right," Cummings replied approvingly. "We shall
+be worth any number of dead men for some time to come, and won't discuss
+even the possibility of capture. When are you going to start, Poyor?"
+
+"When I have bound more guaco leaves on this man's wound," was the
+answer, and now the boys noticed that he had brought a fresh supply of
+the wonderful shrub.
+
+After preparing it as before the bandage was removed, and by the light
+of a splinter of fat wood which Cummings fired with a match, it could be
+seen that the edges of the gash had already united.
+
+"To-morrow there will be no reason for keeping it tied up."
+
+"That is to say, the wound will be healed, and you'll have a souvenir of
+the Silver City which can never be lost," Cummings added.
+
+"I won't complain, for I came out of the scrape much better than I
+deserved," the engineer replied with a laugh.
+
+Poyor was now ready to go on the scout, and he delayed only long enough
+to say:
+
+"There must be no talking while I am away, for one who speaks cannot
+listen, and if the enemy should come here again his approach will be
+like that of a serpent."
+
+"You shan't have any cause to complain," Cummings replied, and an
+instant later the Indian had left the cave.
+
+Teddy now thought the time had come when he should settle the question
+of whether there were any fish in the stream, and after gaining
+Cummings' permission to make the attempt he and Neal brought out the
+lines and flies which had been saved from the wreck of the Sea Dream.
+
+"We shall need bait," he whispered. "If there were a million fish there
+they couldn't see a fly in the dark, and, besides, if this river runs
+underground entirely not one of them knows anything about insects."
+
+"A piece of roasted toh will be the very best we could have," and Neal
+soon brought out some of the toughest portions of the remnants left from
+the last meal.
+
+Cummings would not listen to their proposition that a fire be lighted,
+therefore it was necessary to work in the dark, and they experienced
+considerable difficulty in beginning the task.
+
+Then, while Jake sat near by deeply interested in the experiment, the
+boys moved their lines to and fro, forced to wade quite a distance into
+the water, and ten minutes passed before there was any sign that their
+efforts would be rewarded by success.
+
+"I've got a bite," Teddy whispered excitedly. "By the way he pulled it
+must have been a big fel---- Hello, he's taken hook and all!"
+
+"Tie on another quick while I try to catch him," and Neal ventured
+further into the water, throwing the line as far as possible toward the
+other side.
+
+The thought came into Jake's mind that, while no alligators had been
+seen when they first entered it was by no means certain one or more
+would not follow down the course of the stream, and he was on the point
+of warning Neal not to venture too far from the edge of the shore, when
+there was a mighty splash, a cry of fear and pain from the fisherman,
+and the engineer shouted regardless of the fact that the enemy might be
+close at hand:
+
+"Help! An alligator has got Neal!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+A DESPERATE STRUGGLE.
+
+
+There was no necessity for the outcry. The splashing of the water told
+Cummings what had happened even before Jake had time to shout, and he
+started forward at full speed, carrying with him the materials for
+torches.
+
+When Jake and Teddy were in a condition to understand anything, for the
+sudden attack had bewildered them to a certain extent, Neal was lying
+face downward upon the sand, and being slowly dragged backward.
+
+The alligator had evidently snapped at his leg, and, missing his aim,
+had caught the boy's trousers rather than the flesh. Instead of
+releasing his hold for a better grip, he was trying to drag Neal into
+deeper water, and once there the struggle would have been quickly ended.
+
+Neal had dug his hands into the sand, straining every muscle to prevent
+being pulled into the stream; but despite all efforts the monster was
+rapidly getting the best of him.
+
+Cummings lost no time after arriving on the scene of action. The boys'
+cries had guided him to the exact spot, and he waited only long enough
+to kindle a blaze before joining in the fight.
+
+"Teddy, go back to the entrance, get one of the guns, and be sure that
+no one comes through, for we are likely to make so much noise here that
+if any of the enemy are in the vicinity we shall be discovered. Jake,
+you are to hold the torch, and take good care that it burns brightly."
+
+Cummings was armed with nothing but his hunting knife and by this time
+the alligator had dragged fully half of Neal's body into the water.
+There seemed to be but little hope that the boy could be rescued before
+serious injury had been inflicted.
+
+Pulling off his coat and belt Cummings leaped boldly on the back of the
+saurian monster, burying the blade of his knife in the alligator's eye
+at the same time, and then ensued a most terrific struggle.
+
+Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, and put
+forth every effort to sink in the deeper water to dislodge the more
+formidable antagonist who was striking beneath the surface with his
+weapon in the hope of hitting some vulnerable spot.
+
+Jake stood on the bank holding the torch high above his head to prevent
+it from being extinguished by the showers which were sent up by the
+lashing of the monster's tail, and powerless to aid in the fight for
+life.
+
+Slowly but surely Neal was being pulled from the shore. With only the
+sand to clutch he could retard, not check the saurian's movements, and
+work as he might, it seemed impossible for Cummings to strike a fatal
+blow.
+
+"Drop your torch and seize the boy by the arms," the latter shouted as
+he saw that the battle was going against him. "At this rate I shall soon
+be where it will be out of the question to prolong the struggle."
+
+Jake did as he was commanded, and in the darkness the remainder of the
+terrible fight was waged.
+
+The engineer pulled until to Neal it seemed as if his arms would be torn
+from their sockets, and the alligator retained his hold as he struggled
+to throw off Cummings.
+
+The noise of the combat sounded almost deafening to Teddy, who was doing
+his best to listen for any unusual disturbance among the foliage
+outside, and he felt confident that if the enemy was anywhere in the
+vicinity the secret of their hiding place would soon be discovered.
+
+The struggle lasted only five minutes; but Neal would have said an hour
+had passed since he was first seized, and then Cummings won the victory
+by slipping from the alligator's back regardless of the rapidly moving
+tail, and stabbing him under the fore leg.
+
+Even then it appeared as if the victory was to be purchased at a great
+cost, for, in order to avoid being killed by the monster's dying
+struggles, Cummings was forced to release his hold, and the current
+carried him rapidly toward the channel formed by the waters through the
+rock.
+
+"Light the torch!" he shouted, putting forth all his strength in order
+to breast the tide. "I'm in the middle of the stream, and likely to be
+carried through the wall."
+
+Jake had pulled Neal high up out of the water the instant the
+alligator's hold was released, and at this appeal he dropped him
+suddenly, groping around for the bundle of wood so hurriedly cast aside.
+
+It was several seconds before he could find it, and then much valuable
+time was lost in trying to ignite the fuel made damp by the spray which
+had been thrown up. It seemed to him that never had he been so clumsy,
+and the anxiety to move quickly only served to retard his efforts.
+
+Finally, after what to Teddy appeared to be a very long while, the fat
+wood was ignited, and then it could be seen that Cummings was in a most
+dangerous position. He was not more than six feet from the aperture
+through which the water raced with redoubled force because the opening
+was several inches lower than the surface, and swam as if nearly
+exhausted.
+
+Jake was the only one who could render any assistance just at this
+moment, and he proved to be equal to the occasion.
+
+Seizing one of the guns he waded into the water to his waist, and
+succeeded in extending the weapon sufficiently for Cummings to grasp the
+end of the barrel.
+
+"Hold on for grim death; I've got to drop the torch!" he shouted,
+suiting the action to the words, and Teddy could see no more because the
+light was suddenly extinguished.
+
+Now the sentinel forgot that the enemy might creep upon them and running
+forward he cried:
+
+"Don't give in, Jake; I'll help you."
+
+Before he could reach the stream the work was accomplished. Jake pulled
+Cummings on the bank by the side of Neal, and proceeded to relight the
+torch, a difficult matter since the matches in his pocket had been
+spoiled by the action of the water.
+
+In this last work Teddy was able to render some assistance, and the
+flame had but just sprung up from the wood when Cummings said hurriedly:
+
+"Extinguish that light. If we haven't advertised our whereabouts to the
+Indians already there is no reason for taking foolish risks. We'll
+attend to matters here, Teddy, and you get back to the entrance."
+
+This command was obeyed at once, and the sentinel heard only a faint
+sound from the direction of the stream until his companions rejoined
+him, none the worse for the battle except in the respect of being
+decidedly wet.
+
+"Have you heard anything suspicious?" Cummings asked anxiously.
+
+"Not the slightest noise. If there had been any Indians in the vicinity
+they would surely have made an attempt to enter when all hands was
+raising such an uproar."
+
+Cummings crept through the short tunnel and investigated in the
+immediate vicinity of the opening before he could believe they had been
+so fortunate, and when he returned Jake said:
+
+"I thought you wouldn't find anything. If those imps had had the
+slightest inkling of where we are it wouldn't have been necessary to
+wait so long as this before the fact was made known."
+
+"It was better to be sure. Poyor was so careful to caution us about a
+noise that I was afraid he knew some of them were lurking near by. It is
+all right, however, and we can congratulate ourselves on a fortunate
+escape from more than one danger."
+
+The weather was so warm that no one felt any serious effects from the
+involuntary bath. A portion of the wet clothing was taken off and hung
+on the guns set in the sand as stakes, to dry, and since their fears
+regarding the proximity of the Indians had been partially set at rest by
+Cummings' survey, there was a general disposition to talk of something
+foreign to the struggle through which they had just passed.
+
+"You have said very much about the poisoned arrows which the Chan Santa
+Cruz Indians use," Neal began, "and I would like to know how they manage
+to render them so deadly."
+
+"It is by no means a difficult matter, and as Poyor's people use very
+nearly the same method of increasing the death-dealing power of their
+weapons, I can describe the process exactly," Cummings replied, speaking
+in a whisper, regardless of the Indian's remark that "he who talks
+cannot listen." "You have heard me say many times that the nahuyaca is
+the most venomous of serpents, and instead of being content with a
+single bite, as is the case with snakes in general, he strikes many
+times with almost incredible rapidity. When the Indians wish to prepare
+the poison for their arrows or spears they first get the liver of a
+tapir, or some other animal as large, and then hunt for the species of
+serpent I have spoken of. Once found he is pinned to the ground with a
+forked stick in such a manner that he can use his head freely; but yet
+be unable to escape, and the liver, fastened to a long pole, is held
+where he can strike at it.
+
+"When the snake refuses longer to bite he is killed, and the liver
+placed where it will decompose without any of the moisture being lost.
+You can imagine what a mixture it is when thus prepared, and in it the
+weapons are dipped.
+
+"It is said that the venom retains its deadly properties for many weeks,
+and, in fact, I know of a native who came very near losing his life by
+being scratched with an old arrow that must have been poisoned nearly a
+year previous."
+
+"I should think they might make a mistake when shooting game, and use a
+doctored arrow rather than one of the ordinary kind," Teddy said.
+
+"That could only result from sheer carelessness. The point of a poisoned
+weapon is covered with a reddish brown substance which cannot be
+mistaken, and, for greater security, the feathers used for the tip are
+invariably green. A Central American Indian never takes a green shafted
+arrow, nor a spear on which is painted a band of the same color, when he
+goes out to procure food."
+
+"Then if we happen to meet these fellows who are hunting for us, we are
+likely to come out second best even though they have only bows with
+which to shoot," Jake suggested grimly, and, evading a direct answer,
+Cummings replied:
+
+"We will hope that we shan't get near enough to let any such thing as
+that trouble us."
+
+Then the conversation gradually ceased. Neal and Teddy, after learning
+that Cummings intended to remain on watch until Poyor returned, lay down
+together, where for at least the hundredth time they discussed the
+chances of reaching home within a reasonable number of days, and,
+hopeful though both tried to appear, neither could bring himself to set
+any definite day for the end of the dangerous journey which might never
+be finished.
+
+"There is so much certain," Neal said decidedly after a short pause,
+"once we get out of this section of the country we'll go to the nearest
+sea-port and wait there for a steamer or a vessel, without ever setting
+our feet outside the town. There'll be no more delays if we get clear of
+this scrape."
+
+"You can count me in on that, and now I'm going to sleep. It seems as if
+a week had passed since we started from the last cavern."
+
+Jake had already taken advantage of the opportunity to indulge in
+slumber, and soon Cummings was the only one on the alert; anxiety kept
+his eyes very wide open, for he believed Poyor should have returned some
+time before.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+A LONG HALT.
+
+
+When the morning dawned Poyor was still absent and Cummings' anxiety had
+become intense.
+
+It hardly seemed possible the Indian would go very far from the cave of
+his own free will, and that he had been captured by the enemy appeared
+more than probable.
+
+Neither Jake nor the boys awakened until after the sun had risen, and,
+as a matter of course, the first inquiry of each was concerning the man
+upon whom all depended so entirely.
+
+Before Cummings could give words to the fears which had haunted him
+during the night the entrance to the cave was darkened, and Teddy cried
+joyfully:
+
+"Here he is, and I hope we are to make another move pretty soon, for
+after last night's adventure this isn't the most pleasant place I ever
+saw in which to spend any length of time."
+
+It could easily be seen from the Indian's general appearance that he
+brought no bad news, and without waiting to be questioned he went
+toward the stream to quench his thirst.
+
+A sharp cry from both the boys caused him to halt very suddenly, and
+when Cummings told the story of the adventure with the alligator he
+said:
+
+"You should not have made such an attempt except when a fire was
+burning, and even then to wade into the water was wrong. I will get what
+can be used for both drinking and fishing."
+
+Again he left the cave, returning ten minutes later with what looked
+like a slender bamboo, save that there were no joints in it. Through the
+middle of the pole, running the entire length, was a small hole hardly
+larger than is to be found in a reed, and with this while standing five
+or six feet from the stream he drank at leisure, keeping his eyes fixed
+upon the surface of the water to guard against an attack.
+
+Having thus quenched his thirst he returned to where Cummings was on
+guard and told the story of his wanderings.
+
+He had followed straight along the line of moisture, finding cave after
+cave but none of them as well adapted to their purpose as was this one,
+and had seen none of the enemy until five or six miles had been
+traversed, when a strong cordon of sentinels was discovered.
+
+The men were stationed not more than twenty feet apart, and, as nearly
+as he could judge, had been ordered to remain and prevent the fugitives
+from leaving the country by way of the coast. From what he already knew
+concerning the people, he understood the number of men on duty at this
+particular point had been largely increased, therefore the natural
+inference was that there were two distinct bodies engaged in trying to
+capture the white men. One whose duty it was to guard the boarder so
+thoroughly that it would be impossible to escape, while the other
+scoured the forest and swamp.
+
+"We must stay here several days," he said in conclusion. "After a time
+the men will grow careless, and then we may be able to make our way
+through the lines; but now it is impossible."
+
+Until this moment Neal and Teddy had hoped there might yet be a chance
+for them to reach Progresso in time to take passage on the steamer as
+first agreed upon; but now they were in despair. Poyor spoke so
+positively that there could be no doubt the journey to the coast would
+be a long one, in case they ever succeeded in making it, and the
+thoughts of the loved ones at home who were probably mourning them as
+dead caused them to be more gloomy than on the night of the flight, when
+it did not seem possible any of the party would escape alive.
+
+Cummings, who had no care as to when he reached the coast, and Jake, to
+whom time was no particular object, received the news calmly. A week
+more or less made but little difference to them, and after a short pause
+Cummings said:
+
+"If you will stay on guard, Jake, I'll find out if it is possible to
+catch any fish. The food supply is an important matter which should be
+settled at once, for we must not depend upon what can be gotten in the
+forest, since no one can say how soon we may be besieged."
+
+Poyor lay down to sleep as if perfectly indifferent to the experiment,
+and the boys followed Cummings. To watch him fish was better than
+remaining quiet thinking over their troubles.
+
+The reflection of the sun from the outside had so far dispelled the
+gloom that it was possible to distinguish surrounding objects with
+reasonable distinctness, and Cummings stood by the bank of the stream as
+he tied one end of Teddy's line to the pole Poyor had used for drinking
+purposes, while, with the last remaining fragments of roasted toh, began
+the work.
+
+In the most perfect silence the boys watched him for ten minutes, and
+Teddy said:
+
+"I guess you'll have to give it up as a bad job. There's nothing but
+alligators in the stream, and what they most want is another chance to
+get hold of Neal's trousers."
+
+"It was lucky for me that they didn't get hold of my ankle as well. I
+don't understand how I escaped so easily, for----"
+
+"Here's the first one," Cummings said triumphantly, as he swung on shore
+a fish weighing about three pounds. "If we find many such there won't be
+any danger of suffering from hunger."
+
+The boys seized the flapping evidence of Cummings' skill as an angler,
+and hurried to the entrance in order to examine it more closely.
+
+In shape it was similar to a brook trout; but instead of being spotted
+had black scales as large as one's thumb nail, and not until it had been
+scrutinized carefully was anything seen to betoken the presence of
+organs of sight. Then Jake pointed out two slight depressions near the
+end of the upper jaw, which were protected and nearly covered by a
+cartilaginous substance extending entirely across the head something
+after the fashion of a hood.
+
+"I don't wonder he had to try a long while before catching this fellow,"
+Teddy said with a laugh. "A fish that has such poor apologies for eyes
+can't be expected to see bait very quickly."
+
+"It isn't likely they can see anything, and if these small specks are
+eyes they've probably only been put on as ornaments."
+
+At this point Jake, regardless of the fact that he should have been
+listening intently at the aperture, began what was evidently about to be
+a long dissertation on the subject of a fish being able to smell while
+in the water, and to prevent him from neglecting his duties as sentinel,
+the boys went back to the stream, arriving there just as Cummings landed
+a second prize.
+
+At the end of an hour four fish, aggregating in weight not less than ten
+pounds, were on the bank, and it was decided that no more should be
+caught.
+
+"We've got food enough to last us during twenty-four hours," Cummings
+said, "and it would be a waste of time to fish any longer."
+
+"When are we to cook them?" Teddy asked.
+
+"That is a job which must be left for Poyor. He can do it better than
+either of us, and, since there are none of the enemy in the immediate
+vicinity, I fancy we may count on having these for the next meal."
+
+Then Cummings took his turn at sleeping, after impressing on the minds
+of the boys and Jake that a strict watch should be kept by all
+regardless of the news brought by the Indian, and during the two hours
+which followed before there was any change in the condition of affairs,
+little else was done save to discuss the situation.
+
+They talked of the loved ones at home; of the probable whereabouts of
+those who had left the burning yacht in their company, and of the
+chances that they would soon reach the coast, until Jake changed the
+subject by saying abruptly:
+
+"We'll soon be blind if the Indian don't find a hidin' place where the
+sunlight penetrates once in awhile. I begin to feel a good deal like a
+bat already, an' have a big mind to slip out for a walk."
+
+"Don't so much as think of it," Teddy cried in alarm. "It isn't certain
+that the enemy are not close by, and the risk is too great."
+
+"I can't see it in that light," Jake replied in his old obstinate
+manner. "Perhaps Poyor has had more experience in these woods than I
+have; but I'll bet considerable that I can get around as well as he
+does."
+
+"Do you remember what happened the last time you believed Cummings and
+Poyor were mistaken or ignorant?" Neal asked meaningly.
+
+"What has that got to do with my going where I can use my eyes a bit?"
+
+"Very much, considering the fact that Cummings thinks it is dangerous
+even for him to venture out. You are safe so long as the Indians do not
+get a glimpse of you, and it would be endangering the lives of all hands
+if you tried such a foolish experiment that can be of no especial
+benefit in case it is made successfully."
+
+Jake did not reply; but from his manner Neal believed he intended to
+leave the cave at the first favorable opportunity, and resolved to keep
+a close watch upon him.
+
+Nothing more was said on the subject because at this moment Poyor arose,
+and going to the stream for a drink of water, saw the fish on the bank.
+
+"Hungry?" he asked, coming toward the entrance.
+
+"I wouldn't object to something warm," Teddy replied with a laugh; "but
+I suppose it isn't safe to build a fire till after dark."
+
+"We can have one now," the Indian said, as he began to crawl through the
+passage.
+
+"There," Jake said triumphantly, as Poyor disappeared, "you can see how
+much danger there would be in our taking a stroll. Yesterday he wouldn't
+let a fellow whisper, and now we're to cook as if such a tribe as the
+Chan Santa Cruz had never existed."
+
+"That doesn't make the slightest difference so far as we are concerned.
+He could go in safety where you'd be certain to get into trouble."
+
+Again the engineer was silenced but not convinced and Neal's fears that
+some dangerously foolish move might be made by him, were increased.
+
+When Poyor returned he brought with him a small quantity of wood, more
+mud, and a bundle of green leaves.
+
+At the further end of the cave he built a fire; encased the fish as he
+previously had the "chickens," piled the embers over them, and then, in
+the canteen brought by Cummings, he steeped the leaves.
+
+Breakfast or dinner, whichever it might be called was ready in half an
+hour, and when Poyor set the repast before them, where all could be on
+the alert while eating, Teddy exclaimed:
+
+"Those leaves must have been from a tea plant; it seems quite like being
+on the yacht again to smell that."
+
+"You'll be disappointed when you taste of the beverage," Cummings, who
+had just been awakened by the Indian, said, as he approached his
+companions. "He has made an infusion of pimientillo leaves, a drink of
+which the natives of Yucatan are very fond."
+
+Teddy was pleased rather than otherwise with the flavor, which was as of
+tea mixed with cloves, and drank so much that Poyor was forced to brew
+another canteen full in order to satisfy his own desires.
+
+The fish were pronounced delicious, and although Cummings thought he had
+caught considerably more than could be consumed in one meal, there was
+very little left when the hunger of all had been appeased.
+
+It was now nearly noon, when every native of the country believes a
+siesta is necessary, however important business he may have on hand, and
+Poyor stretched himself once more out on the sand, Cummings advising the
+boys and Jake to do the same thing.
+
+"I slept so long that I couldn't close my eyes now if I tried, so you
+had better take advantage of the opportunity."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+JAKE'S VENTURE.
+
+
+The boys followed Cummings' advice; but owing to the fact that they had
+taken no exercise the slumber was neither prolonged nor refreshing.
+
+When they awakened Poyor and Jake were yet asleep, and they went softly
+to where Cummings was keeping most vigilant watch.
+
+"Had enough of it?" he asked with a smile.
+
+"Yes: we are not feeling so comfortable in mind that we can sleep at
+will, and just now a little goes a great way," Neal replied.
+
+"Don't make the mistake of dwelling upon your troubles. By putting them
+from your mind you are in better condition to meet what may come, and
+besides, fretting never did mend matters."
+
+"I'll admit that the advice is good; but it is not every one who can
+follow it."
+
+"Why not? Have you tried by looking for something else with which to
+occupy your attention?"
+
+"Shut up here as we are it would be pretty hard work to think of
+anything except our own situation."
+
+"I'm not so certain of that. Suppose we try by speaking of the country
+on whose shores you were cast by the waves?"
+
+"It was formerly an independent republic; but now forms one of the
+Mexican states," Teddy replied promptly.
+
+"I'll admit that to be true; but it is a small fund of information for a
+schoolboy to have regarding a country which was probably the most
+powerful on the hemisphere hundreds of years before Columbus crossed the
+ocean. Here have been found the ruins of forty-four large cities; the
+remains of enormous artificial lakes, paved roads, and, in fact, all the
+evidences of a high state of civilization which existed before Europe
+could boast of the slightest form of government."
+
+"You may be certain that I shall study about it with more interest in
+case we are so fortunate as to be able to go to school again," Teddy
+replied. "Tell us about the people who lived here when it was so great."
+
+"I wish I could," Cummings said with a sigh. "If it had been possible
+for us to have taken from the Silver City any records, or sculptured
+figures, or plates of a historical nature, I might have succeeded in
+solving that which the student can speak of only as a mystery. Before
+the Conquest it was known as Maya--that is to say, the territory now
+called Yucatan, and the Chan Santa Cruz yet speak the Maya language. It
+is only certain that for many centuries there was here an important
+feudal monarchy, which doubtless arose after the Toltec overthrow of the
+very ancient kingdom of Xibalba."
+
+"Cortez was the first white man to come into this country," Neal said
+half questioningly.
+
+"Not by any manner of means. In the year 1502 Ferdinand Columbus, driven
+by adverse currents out of his southerly course, sighted a group of
+islands off Honduras, and captured a huge canoe, which is described as
+having been as wide as a galley and eighty feet long, formed of the
+trunk of a single tree. In the middle was an awning of palm leaves, not
+unlike those of Venetian gondolas, under which were the women, children
+and goods. The canoe was propelled by twenty-five Indians who wore
+cotton coverlets and tunics without sleeves, dyed various colors and
+curiously worked. The women wrapped themselves in large mantles of
+similar material.
+
+"The men wore long swords, with channels each side of the blade, edged
+with sharp flints that cut the body as well as steel. They had copper
+hatchets for chopping wood, belts of the same material, and crucibles
+in which to melt it. For provisions they carried roots and grain, a sort
+of wine made from maize, and great quantities of almonds. This is a
+fragment of the history of Yucatan, simply a suggestion of what can be
+found by study, and some day when you have nothing to do, ask Poyor to
+tell you of his people's traditions."
+
+Cummings had succeeded in interesting the boys despite Neal's assertion
+that it would be impossible to think of anything but their own
+condition, and Teddy asked, hoping to hear more about the country:
+
+"How large is Yucatan?"
+
+"I question if even the officials know. It is set down as containing
+76,560 square kilometres, with 302,315 inhabitants; but the last figures
+can be only guess-work, since regarding the unconquerable tribes of the
+interior, such as we are now trying to escape from, all is conjecture."
+
+This concluded the conversation so far as Cummings was concerned, for
+Poyor had awakened and joined the party, and there was very much to be
+discussed with him relative to what move should be made, when a
+sufficient time had elapsed.
+
+In order that the boys might understand all which was said, the two men
+spoke only in English, and when the consultation was brought to a close
+the former had a very clear idea of the condition of affairs.
+
+"It is safe to venture out in search of food," Poyor said, when Cummings
+intimated by his silence that there was no further topic which he wished
+to discuss, "and I will go for a short time."
+
+"Why not take one of the boys with you?" the leader of the expedition
+asked. "It is dull work for them here, and a little exercise will be
+beneficial."
+
+"Not yet," the Indian replied quickly. "Too broad a trail would surely
+attract the attention of the enemy, and we must not run such a risk."
+
+"Very well, we will do a little fishing in order to have something
+hearty for supper in case you are not successful."
+
+Then the Indian went cautiously out through the narrow passage, and he
+had but just disappeared when Jake awakened.
+
+"What's goin' on?" he asked with a yawn. "Has Poyor left us again?"
+
+"He thought it might be possible to get some game near by, and proposes
+to make the attempt," Cummings replied carelessly. "Now that you are
+awake stand watch awhile, for the boys and I are going to catch a few
+more fish."
+
+Jake seated himself by the entrance, and Cummings led the way to the
+stream, never fancying for a single moment that the sentinel might
+desert his post.
+
+The second effort to draw food from the water was more successful than
+the first. Cummings had hardly dropped the line before the bait was
+seized, and he landed a fairly good sized fish, after which he proposed
+that Teddy should try his hand at the work.
+
+"I don't want to monopolize all the fun," he said laughingly, "therefore
+you boys had better take turns until we get enough for supper. To-night
+we'll ask Poyor to cut another pole, and then both can enjoy the sport
+at the same time."
+
+The fish were smaller than those previously taken and half an hour
+elapsed before there were enough on the shore to make up what Cummings
+believed was sufficient for a hearty meal.
+
+Then the three walked slowly toward the entrance to relieve Jake; but,
+to the surprise of all, he was not there.
+
+"It is my fault," Neal cried while Cummings was looking around in the
+belief that the sentinel had gone to another portion of the cave and
+would soon be back. "I knew from what was said this forenoon that he had
+an idea of venturing out, and made up my mind to watch him closely; but
+the history lesson and the fishing caused me to forget it entirely."
+
+"Do you mean that he has had an idea of leaving us?" Cummings asked in
+astonishment.
+
+"No; he simply proposed to take a walk. He thinks it is as safe for him
+as for Poyor."
+
+"But I, who surely understand the woods better than he, would not dare
+to attempt it."
+
+"You know what he has done."
+
+"If he does not lose his own life ours may be sacrificed," Cummings said
+passionately. "The Indian can go through the undergrowth without leaving
+any sign of his passage: but for Jake to do so is simply to set up a
+guide-board by which the enemy can find us."
+
+"I should have told you at once," Neal said in self reproach.
+
+"You are not to be blamed in the slightest; but if I could get my hands
+on him at this moment he would regret most sincerely ever having such a
+thought in his head."
+
+"What will be the result?" Teddy asked in distress.
+
+"If he succeeds in finding his way back, which I doubt very much, we
+will be forced to make a change regardless of the consequences, and if
+he is captured it becomes a case of our putting the greatest possible
+distance between this cave and ourselves," Cummings replied bitterly.
+
+"I might go out and try to find him," Neal suggested, and his companion
+put an end to any such idea by saying impatiently:
+
+"Your efforts to aid him would only result in making our own position
+just so much the worse. We must wait until Poyor comes back, and learn
+what he has to say in regard to the affair."
+
+"But it seems cruel to let him run into danger without saying a word."
+
+"It is not half as bad as it is for him to jeopardize all our lives. He
+did the same thing once before, and the consequence was that instead of
+making back tracks to my shanty, as could easily have been done, we are
+forced to skulk around two or three weeks with no certainty of escaping
+even at the end of that time."
+
+Both Neal and Teddy understood that it would be useless to say anything
+more in Jake's favor, and as a matter of fact, they felt quite as bitter
+toward him as did Cummings, for it was not difficult to see what might
+be the result of his foolish excursion.
+
+In silence the little party waited until the Indian returned bringing
+the carcass of a tapir, a small quantity of alligator pears, and two
+so-called cabbages cut from palm trees.
+
+"It is not difficult to get all the food that may be needed provided we
+can keep the fact of our being here a secret," he said in a tone which
+showed how greatly he was pleased by his success.
+
+"And that we shall not be able to do many hours longer except by some
+piece of rare good luck," Cummings said bitterly. "Jake went out a long
+while ago, and is now, I presume, roaming around in order to give the
+enemy an opportunity of looking at him."
+
+"Went out?" the Indian repeated in surprise. "Do you mean that he has
+left the cave?"
+
+"That is exactly the size of it."
+
+"Why did he do such a foolish thing?"
+
+"Because he was too much of a baby or an idiot to stay in hiding until
+the danger had passed. He claimed that exercise was necessary."
+
+"He will get all he needs," Poyor said half to himself, as he allowed
+the supply of provisions to fall unheeded from his hands. "We also must
+leave this place."
+
+"Do you mean that we should go at once?" Cummings asked as if he had
+been expecting such a remark.
+
+"When the night has come we will start, and with but little hope of
+breaking through the line of sentinels."
+
+"Are we not to wait for Jake?" Neal interrupted.
+
+"If he does not return before we are ready there will be little chance
+of ever seeing him again," was the grim reply as Poyor paced to and fro,
+evidently so disturbed that it was impossible for him to remain in one
+position.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+A HURRIED DEPARTURE.
+
+
+Neal and Teddy were in a state of the most painful suspense from the
+moment Poyor returned until the time for their departure arrived.
+
+The one hope was that Jake would succeed in finding his way back, for
+the thought that he might be captured was terrible, and they sat near
+the entrance listening intently to every sound.
+
+"You're bound to be disappointed if you count on hearing him," Cummings
+said bitterly.
+
+"But there is a chance that the Indians are some distance from here,"
+Teddy replied. "Poyor didn't find any until he reached the line of
+sentinels."
+
+"I am not saying that he is necessarily captured yet; but it would be
+little short of a miracle if he found his way back after going any
+distance from this cave. I wouldn't dare to make the attempt."
+
+"But are we to go away without trying to find the poor fellow?" Neal
+asked in a tone of distress.
+
+"It would be useless to search, and we are now in too much danger to
+waste any time," Cummings said sternly. "Our one chance of escape was
+to give the enemy the idea that we had succeeded in getting out of the
+country, and he has destroyed it. Now this portion of the forest will be
+filled with Indians, and in twenty-four hours from the moment he or his
+trail is seen, we shall be discovered. We cannot aid him, and I doubt
+whether I would be willing to do so if it was possible, for a man of
+average common sense who will act as he has done deserves punishment."
+
+The boys made no reply. Each instant their companion's anger against
+Jake increased, and it was not well to rouse him by further
+conversation.
+
+Near the bank of the stream Poyor had built a fire and was cooking a
+portion of the tapir and the fish, for in the hurried flight which was
+soon to be begun there might not be an opportunity to prepare food.
+
+The Indian had unpacked the bundles in order to discard everything not
+absolutely necessary, and was tying each compactly when the boys
+approached.
+
+"Why are you making only three packages?" Neal asked. "Teddy and I want
+to do our full share of the work, and it isn't right for you and
+Cummings to lug everything."
+
+"You will be forced to do more than an equal share because that which
+Jake carried must now be divided between us," Poyor replied grimly. "The
+fourth load is to be made up of the provisions."
+
+"Are you going straight for the coast, and try to force your way through
+the line of sentinels?"
+
+"That cannot be done. We must now ascend the mountain range on the north
+of the forest."
+
+"But by so doing the journey will be made much longer, won't it?"
+
+"Very much."
+
+"Then why not try to fight through?"
+
+"Because it is impossible. Not one of us would live to see the ocean."
+
+There was not much comfort to be derived from such a conversation, and
+again the boys went to the entrance where Cummings was examining
+carefully all the weapons.
+
+"You must carry plenty of cartridges where they can be gotten at
+quickly," he said, as they came up. "It is impossible to say what may
+happen, and no precaution should be neglected. The guns are in good
+order, and with them we may succeed in holding the enemy at such a
+distance that their arrows cannot be used."
+
+"We have filled our pockets," Neal replied, and throwing himself upon
+the ground, he watched Cummings and Poyor at their work.
+
+Ten minutes later the Indian came to the entrance and said as he began
+to crawl through the narrow passage:
+
+"I will make one effort to find him who has caused us so much trouble."
+
+"Don't spend any time on such a fool," Cummings cried fiercely. "He knew
+the danger, and if he chooses to run into it, jeopardizing our lives at
+the same moment, nothing too bad can happen to him."
+
+"He may be near at hand. I will make a search," Poyor replied as he rose
+to his feet on the outside, and Neal whispered to Teddy:
+
+"If Jake can be found matters won't seem quite so hard, for it will be
+terrible to think of him wandering around until captured, and we running
+away from him."
+
+Teddy nodded his head; but did not dare trust himself to speak. He had
+been thinking of home until the tears were so very near his eyelids that
+he feared they would overflow.
+
+During the next half hour not a word was spoken by either of the little
+party, and then Poyor returned alone.
+
+There was no necessity of questioning him, and Neal covered his face
+with his hands to hide the distress he knew must be pictured there, for
+there was no longer any hope the engineer would accompany them on their
+rapid and most dangerous flight. By this time the meat was cooked, and
+the Indian brought a generous supply to the entrance; but no one had any
+particular desire for food.
+
+"You must take some," Cummings said, when Neal and Teddy turned away.
+"We may not have an opportunity to eat again for many hours, and it is
+necessary to be prepared for a long tramp."
+
+The boys managed to swallow a small quantity after considerable effort,
+when the final preparations were made, and by the time they were
+completed the sun had set.
+
+Night had not fully settled down when Poyor gave the signal for the
+start, and one by one the fugitives crept from the cave, pushing their
+bundles before them, since the passage was not sufficiently large to
+admit of their walking upright.
+
+"Strap the pack on firmly," Cummings said in a whisper, when they were
+in the open air. "We may be obliged to run, in which case there must be
+no chance of losing our baggage. You boys follow Poyor, and I will bring
+up the rear."
+
+The Indian was waiting for them to get into proper marching order, and
+instantly this had been done he started at a rapid pace.
+
+As they left the cave it seemed to Neal and Teddy that Jake had really
+been abandoned, and, regardless of what he had done, they felt that it
+was cruel to hurry away so soon.
+
+"It could have done no harm to wait until morning," Neal said in a
+whisper, when they halted a short distance from the starting point while
+Poyor went ahead to reconnoiter.
+
+"And by that time we might have found ourselves besieged. It would have
+been a delay of twenty-four hours, for all our traveling must be done in
+the night," Cummings replied. "We have taken the only course he left
+open to us, and we won't discuss the matter any more."
+
+The march was resumed after a short delay, and not until two hours had
+passed did the Indian so much as slacken his pace.
+
+They had arrived where the forest is less dense; but the undergrowth
+more tangled, and Poyor signified by gestures that the boys would be
+allowed a short time of rest.
+
+Teddy was about to ask if he could take off the pack, for the cords were
+cutting into his flesh in a painful manner; but the Indian checked him
+with a quick motion of the hand.
+
+The party were now near where it was supposed a line of sentinels was
+stationed, and, holding his finger to his lips, Cummings gave them to
+understand that the utmost silence must be preserved.
+
+Again Poyor went forward alone, and the tired boys sat with their backs
+against a tree thinking only of Jake and his possible fate.
+
+The silence was so profound as to be almost alarming. Here and there
+amid the foliage could be seen countless fire-flies; but not even the
+rustling of the leaves broke the stillness, and it did not require any
+very great stretch of the imagination to fancy that the enemy were
+lurking close at hand awaiting an opportunity to spring upon them.
+
+Once a rat-like tuza ran past within a few inches of Teddy's feet, and
+as the boy leaped up in affright, fancying the vengeful Indians had
+discovered him, it was with difficulty he repressed a cry of alarm.
+
+With so many horrible things to think of it was a decided relief when
+Poyor came gliding noiselessly back to announce that the journey could
+be continued, and once more the little party picked their way over
+fallen and decaying timber, or through thickets where thorns tore both
+clothing and flesh.
+
+After a time they reached ascending ground, showing that they were on
+the foot hills of the range, and the advance became more laborious,
+until, shortly before sunrise, Neal declared that he could go no
+farther.
+
+"We must stop," he whispered to Poyor. "I have held out as long as
+possible, and could not keep on half a mile more if the enemy were in
+close pursuit."
+
+The Indian nodded his head to signify that the halt should be made, and
+a few moments later he turned aside into a small ravine or cut on the
+side of the hill.
+
+Here he threw down his burden, and the boys followed the example, paying
+no attention to the advantages or disadvantages of the spot as a refuge
+during the day which was so near at hand.
+
+Lying at full length on the ground, heeding not that deadly reptiles
+might be close at hand, Neal and Teddy fell asleep almost immediately,
+and Poyor proposed that Cummings should also seek repose.
+
+"I will watch," he said, "and when the sun rises we can decide whether
+it is safe to stay here."
+
+Although the white man was weary he would not admit that the Indian
+could bear more fatigue, and insisted on keeping awake until it was
+learned if they should be warranted in remaining.
+
+In perfect silence the two stood guard over the sleeping boys, and when
+the morning came the important question was soon settled.
+
+The place of refuge to which chance had brought them was admirable both
+for purposes of defense and for hiding. It was a deep, narrow cut
+extending thirty feet into what appeared to be a mass of sandstone, and
+at the entrance was not more than ten feet wide, while over the top the
+foliage grew so luxuriantly as to completely conceal them from the view
+of any one who might be above.
+
+In front the trees were small, and it was possible to see forty or fifty
+yards down the side of the hill, therefore the enemy could not approach
+unobserved save from the top.
+
+"It is good," Poyor said approvingly. "We can remain here until night."
+
+"But why have we not met the sentinels which you believe to be so
+numerous?"
+
+"They are further on. At the end of the next march we shall be in their
+midst."
+
+"And then comes the most difficult portion of our journey. But we won't
+search for trouble," Cummings added after a short pause. "Let us have
+breakfast, and then one shall stand guard while the others sleep."
+
+Poyor unpacked the provisions, awakened Neal and Teddy, and with a view
+before them which, under other circumstances, would have called forth
+expressions of the most lively admiration, the little party made a
+hearty meal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+JAKE.
+
+
+It was only natural that on awakening Neal and Teddy should first think
+of the engineer and his possible fate; but the other two members of the
+party were so incensed against him that neither cared to speak on the
+subject.
+
+They asked concerning their location, and were told all that Cummings
+and Poyor knew, and when the very satisfactory meal was brought to a
+close the former said as if inviting a discussion:
+
+"We have sufficient food to last us three days if there is no game
+picked up on the way; but our supply of water threatens to run short
+very soon unless we can manage to refill the canteens. Are we likely to
+find a stream among these hills, Poyor?"
+
+"When we descend into the valley there will be no lack of plenty to
+drink; but on beginning the ascent of the mountains we must be careful
+not to use too much."
+
+"How long shall we probably be on the range providing every thing works
+smoothly?"
+
+"Three days--perhaps four."
+
+"But we can only carry water enough for two days at the best."
+
+"Then each one must take but half as much as he needs."
+
+"Of course that would settle the matter; but it is going to be pretty
+tough to travel in heat without all we want to drink."
+
+"Better that than to fall into the hands of the Chan Santa Cruz," Poyor
+replied gravely.
+
+"I am willing to admit it; but at the same time I believe we can hit
+upon some plan of carrying all that may be needed."
+
+"We may find the water pitchers in the forest, and by means of them
+replenish the supply."
+
+"That is figuring upon a possibility, and we are by no means certain of
+getting what we want."
+
+"There is plenty of time to think the matter over, for, unless we are
+discovered, it will be necessary to stay here until night. Will you
+sleep now?"
+
+"You need rest more than I," Cummings replied. "Lie down while I stand
+guard."
+
+The Indian did not hesitate; it made very little difference who remained
+on watch providing the utmost vigilance was maintained, and he
+stretched himself on the ground at the farther end of the ravine where
+he could be sheltered from the rays of the sun.
+
+The boys seated themselves by Cummings' side where the best view of the
+surrounding country could be had; but the latter was in no mood for
+further conversation, and the three remained silent for an hour or more,
+when Teddy asked:
+
+"How long before you intend to call Poyor?"
+
+"There is plenty of time," Cummings replied carelessly. "We have all day
+before us, and when I am tired he shall take his turn."
+
+"Why can't we do something? If you lie down now it will be gaining just
+so much more sleep, and surely both of us can keep watch as well as
+either you or he."
+
+"That is a good idea, and I'll take advantage of the offer. Call me if
+you see the slightest thing suspicious, or hear any sound not made by
+the birds. I don't fancy we shall be troubled; but at the same time no
+one knows what may happen."
+
+"We'll take good care; you shall be told if anything larger than a rat
+comes in view," Teddy replied, "so don't lose time that might be spent
+in sleep."
+
+Cummings followed this advice at once, and in a few moments his heavy
+breathing told that he had crossed over into slumberland.
+
+During the next hour nothing was seen or heard by the sentinels, who sat
+just within the shadow cast by the rock gazing intently down the hill,
+and then Teddy whispered excitedly as he pointed to a clump of bushes
+near where the trees were thickest:
+
+"Look in that direction. Can't you see the foliage is moving to and fro
+more than should be the case on a calm day like this?"
+
+Neal followed with his eyes Teddy's finger, and after a close scrutiny
+said:
+
+"I see what you mean: but there is probably some animal among the
+bushes. At all events we shan't be a great while finding out, and it
+isn't well to call Cummings until we are positive something is wrong."
+
+During five minutes the boys watched intently, and then there could be
+no question but that the leader should be awakened. They had seen a man,
+or at least a portion of one, as the foliage was parted gently to admit
+of his looking out, and Neal said as he raised his gun:
+
+"Call Cummings. I won't fire until he gives the word unless that fellow
+comes too near."
+
+Believing that they were about to be attacked, Teddy shook the leader of
+the party vigorously as he whispered:
+
+"They've found out where we are, and one is just getting ready to make a
+rush."
+
+This information was well calculated to arouse Poyor as well as the
+white man, and they ran with all speed toward the entrance to the ravine
+where Neal was making ready to shoot.
+
+"He has shown himself twice since Teddy went to call you," the boy said,
+"and I know exactly where to fire if you believe it ought to be done."
+
+"Do you think he knows we are here?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied:
+
+"He has been looking out from among the bushes as if suspicious that
+there was something wrong in this quarter; but I don't fancy he has seen
+us."
+
+"Then do not fire. It is of the greatest importance that we should
+remain concealed, and to discharge a weapon now would only be to bring
+down a crowd upon us. Get back to the farther end of the ravine while
+Poyor and I find out what is going on."
+
+The boys did as they were bidden, taking their station where it was
+possible to see all the men were doing, and after ten minutes both were
+surprised by hearing Cummings say in a tone of relief:
+
+"It is only that idiot, and he evidently mistakes us for enemies. The
+best thing we can do is to let him stay where he is, for then he can't
+get us into another scrape."
+
+"It's Jake!" Teddy cried. "I thought that arm didn't look like an
+Indian's!"
+
+"It will be worse than wicked if Cummings don't let him know who we are.
+Of course he's hunting for us, and we _must_ call to him."
+
+As Neal spoke he stepped forward, and was about to cry out when Cummings
+prevented him.
+
+"Let the fool alone," the latter said. "If he joins us we shall never be
+able to pass the sentinels."
+
+"You can't mean to let him wander off by himself."
+
+"Better that than give him another chance to bring the enemy down upon
+us."
+
+"But I won't allow it," Neal cried angrily. "It is true he has been
+worse than foolish twice----"
+
+"And the third time he'll succeed in bringing all hands up with a sharp
+turn. We are where very little is needed to put us in the power of the
+enemy, and we cannot afford to take such chances as he appears to
+delight in."
+
+"Then Teddy and I will leave you, and run all the risk with him, which
+is nothing more than fair, considering the fact that he is one of our
+party."
+
+From the look on Cummings' face it was evident he intended to make an
+angry reply; but before he could speak Poyor said:
+
+"The boys are right. It is not good to desert a friend, no matter what
+he has done."
+
+"Very well," Cummings said impatiently. "Call him in, and during the
+remainder of this journey, if we live to finish it, I will see that he
+does not have a chance to work any more mischief."
+
+Neal did not delay. Stepping out from the ravine he shouted:
+
+"Jake! Jake, come in here!"
+
+Although the engineer was so far away the cry of mingled surprise and
+joy which burst from his lips could be heard distinctly, and in the
+shortest possible space of time he was in the ravine shaking the boys'
+hands vigorously.
+
+"What are you up to here?" he asked. "Looking for me?"
+
+"Indeed we were doing nothing of the kind," Cummings said angrily.
+"After you so kindly did all you could to tell the Indians where we had
+located it was necessary to make a quick move, and if I had had my way
+you would never have known how near we were."
+
+"I don't suppose it will do any good to say that I am sorry?" Jake
+suggested meekly.
+
+"Not a bit, for this is the second time you have done all the mischief
+possible. By this last performance it has been necessary to take a
+course nearly three times as long as the one we intended to travel, and
+no one can say what you won't do before we are out of the scrape."
+
+"I pledge my word to obey orders. The experience I have had during the
+past twenty-four hours has taught me that I can't afford to take any
+more chances while we are in this heathenish country."
+
+"It is a grave question whether we shall be able to get clear, and now
+that you have come we must make another change, running all the risks of
+traveling in the daytime, for the enemy can follow up on your trail as
+readily as if you had set sign-boards all the way."
+
+Jake understood that it would do no good to make any reply while
+Cummings was in such a rage, and he very wisely retreated to the further
+end of the ravine where he whispered to Teddy:
+
+"Can't you give me a bite to eat? I'm just about starved."
+
+"Haven't you had anything since leaving the cave?"
+
+"Not a mouthful, and only one drink of water."
+
+"Where have you been?"
+
+"Walkin' all the time. When I went away it was only with the intention
+of travelin' a short distance. It didn't seem as if I had gone a
+quarter of a mile before I turned to go back, an' I've been tryin' to
+get there ever since."
+
+"Didn't you sleep any last night?"
+
+"Not a wink. I wanted to; but some kind of a big animal came prowlin'
+around the tree I'd chosen as my sleepin' apartment, and after that I
+couldn't so much as shut my eyes without takin' the chances of fallin'
+off the branch."
+
+"Did you meet any one?"
+
+"No."
+
+"But how came you over here so far?"
+
+"It seems as if I'd had time to go across the whole country since I saw
+you last. Say, give me some water and a mouthful of anything that's
+eatable, an' then I'll get a little sleep before tacklin' Cummings
+again. I suppose its a case of goin' way down on my marrow bones before
+he'll forget what I've done."
+
+"I fancy you are right in that respect," Teddy said gravely, as he
+overhauled the stores to procure the food, "and he can't be blamed, for
+you have put us in a very bad position without even the poor excuse of
+having tried to benefit the party."
+
+"From this out I won't so much as yip," Jake replied earnestly, as he
+made a vigorous attack on the roast tapir. "Getting lost in such a
+forest as this is enough to make a fellow's hair turn white."
+
+"If it will prevent you from playing the fool any more I shall be
+satisfied," Cummings, who had come up unperceived, said emphatically.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+ON THE RANGE.
+
+
+Although it was nearly noon, the time when the natives of Yucatan
+believe a siesta is absolutely necessary, Cummings insisted that the
+flight should be continued without further delay.
+
+"It would not be surprising if the Chan Santa Cruz sentinels had seen
+that idiotic Jake, and followed him in order to learn where we were
+hiding," he said when Neal asked why they had left the ravine during the
+hottest portion of the day. "If the Indians should besiege us here, it
+would only be a few hours before surrender must be made, because of lack
+of water, therefore we can render our position no worse, and may succeed
+in bettering it by going now."
+
+Poyor evidently looked at the matter in the same light, for he made no
+protest; but began at once to prepare for the tramp.
+
+Jake, after eating a hearty meal, had stretched out at the further end
+of the hiding place, and was just giving himself up to the luxury of
+slumber when Teddy aroused him by saying:
+
+"Come, what are you lying here for? We are ready to start, and there's a
+good deal of satisfaction in knowing that this time you'll have to carry
+your share of the load."
+
+"But I've got to have a nap first. Just think how long it's been since
+I've had a chance to close my eyes."
+
+"You'll have to wait awhile. Both Cummings and Poyor believe it is
+absolutely necessary for us to make a quick move, and if you're not
+ready they will go away alone."
+
+Jake began to protest; but Teddy cut him short by saying:
+
+"It won't do any good to kick. They are angry because we were forced to
+leave the cave, and won't spend much time coaxing."
+
+"Hurry along," Cummings shouted impatiently. "We must be well up on the
+range before sunset."
+
+These words spoken in an imperative tone caused Jake to spring to his
+feet very nimbly, and as he neared the entrance Poyor pushed one of the
+packages toward him as he said:
+
+"We carried all last night, and it would be only right to give you a
+double load."
+
+"I'd have to take it if you did," Jake replied; but as if to prevent any
+different distribution of the burdens, he tied this one on quickly,
+saying when it was fastened firmly to his back, "Now I'm ready to tramp
+as long as you do; but it would have suited me better if I'd had time
+for a nap."
+
+"It will serve you right if you don't get a chance to sleep for a week,"
+Cummings replied sharply. "Go on, Poyor leads the way as before, and see
+to it that you keep close at his heels."
+
+The fugitives soon learned that however difficult it might be to travel
+through the tangled underbrush of the forest, it was as nothing compared
+to clambering over the ledges of green or white rock which formed the
+base of the range.
+
+Here there was nothing to shield them from the fervent rays of the sun,
+and so intense was the heat that it seemed as if they were walking over
+the top of a furnace.
+
+The only relief from the excessive warmth was when they came upon a deep
+fissure in the rocks where was a pool of water, with the most gorgeous
+flowers around the margin. Everywhere else the soil was sandy, covered
+in places with pebbles and burning gravel. In front of them were the
+mountains, bare and sterile, on which the least experienced of the party
+knew no drop of water could be found.
+
+As a matter of course both Cummings and Poyor kept strict watch over
+the surrounding country lest the enemy should be creeping upon them
+unawares; but when, late in the afternoon, a short halt was called,
+nothing suspicious had been seen.
+
+"I don't understand how you could have wandered around twenty-four hours
+without being discovered by some of the sentinels," Cummings said to
+Jake, when they were reclining on the side of the mountain in the shadow
+cast by an overhanging rock, where a full view of the valley beneath
+could be had.
+
+"Perhaps they have given over lookin' for us," the engineer suggested.
+
+"There's no chance of that. Every square foot of the country will be
+searched, and sooner or later they'll come across our trail."
+
+"How long will it take us to get over the range?" Neal asked.
+
+"It is impossible to say: but we must keep moving nearly all the time,
+for the small amount of water we have with us now is the last that'll be
+seen until we are on the other side."
+
+"I feel as if I could drink the entire supply, and then want more,"
+Teddy said, the knowledge that they were cut off from all means of
+adding to the store making him thirsty.
+
+"I reckon every one in the party feels much the same way," Cummings
+replied grimly. "If it was possible to find a stream now and then the
+journey across the range would not be such a dangerous one."
+
+With the exception of the suggestion he made when they first halted,
+Jake did not join in the conversation. His eyes had closed in slumber
+almost instantly after lying down, and during half an hour he was
+allowed to sleep uninterruptedly.
+
+Then Poyor awakened him, and the weary march was resumed, the advance
+becoming more difficult each moment as they climbed higher up on the
+range.
+
+About two hours before nightfall the sun was hidden from view by dense
+masses of dark clouds, and the boys hailed with joy this relief from the
+burning heat.
+
+"If we could only have it like this all the time!" Neal exclaimed.
+
+"Better the sun than the clouds," Cummings said in a tone of anxiety,
+and Poyor increased his pace, no longer searching with his eyes for the
+enemy; but casting quick glances from side to side as if hunting for
+some particular object.
+
+A south wind came up, and the boys were trudging along right merrily,
+despite their fatigue, when it was as if a solid sheet of water
+descended upon them.
+
+There had been no warning drops to give notice of the coming storm; but
+the rain literally fell in torrents, drenching the fugitives at the
+first downpour.
+
+It was now impossible to see twenty feet in either direction. The
+driving rain and the white clouds which completely enveloped the
+mountain shut out everything from view.
+
+The enemy might have crept close upon them without being aware of the
+fact.
+
+There was no place in which to shelter themselves, and the boys had a
+thorough illustration of what a tropical rain-storm may be during the
+time Poyor was hunting for such a place as would serve to shield them
+from the flood.
+
+Not until half an hour had passed did they make a halt, and then the
+Indian led them under an overhanging ledge, in front of which was a
+sheer descent of eighty feet or more to the valley beneath.
+
+"Here we can wait until the worst of the gale has blown over," he said,
+as he threw down his burden and prepared to enjoy a long rest. "It is
+not likely we shall be able to move to-night, and there is no fear the
+enemy will come upon us while the storm rages."
+
+"We shall at least be where the canteens can be filled," Cummings
+replied in a tone of content, "and by gaining a fresh supply of water
+the journey will be robbed of half its dangers, consequently a wetting
+is of but little consequence."
+
+To have seen the mountain at this moment one would hardly have thought
+that the party could have suffered from thirst. Every crevice of the
+rocks was now a stream, and by reaching out in a dozen different
+directions a quantity of the precious liquid could be obtained.
+
+The only thing to cause alarm was the fact that this storm was but the
+beginning of the summer season, during which rain might be expected each
+day, and thus the danger of fever while crossing the low lands would be
+greatly increased.
+
+"The sentinels will certainly keep under cover during such weather as
+this," Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "and we may be able to
+get over the range without a hand to hand fight, as I had anticipated."
+
+Under such climatic conditions the meat would not keep sweet many hours,
+and Poyor set the entire stock before his companions, saying as he did
+so:
+
+"What cannot be eaten must be thrown away, therefore he is fortunate who
+can now swallow enough to prevent the pangs of hunger from being felt
+during the next forty-eight hours."
+
+"But we certainly won't be forced to stay here that length of time,"
+Neal replied. "It can't rain all the day and night."
+
+"It is safe to count on a long storm," Cummings added. "This is the
+beginning of the bad season, and there will be a certain amount of water
+fall each day."
+
+"Did you take the fact into consideration when you made ready to visit
+the Silver City?" Neal asked.
+
+"Of course, and if there had been nothing to prevent the carrying out of
+my plans we would have been clear of the swamp by this time, or so near
+the edge that but a few hours traveling must have taken us through."
+
+It was worse than useless to talk of what might have been, and the
+little party settled down to make themselves as comfortable as possible
+under the circumstances.
+
+Overhead the rock sheltered them from the rain; but now that every
+crevice had been turned into a stream it was difficult to protect one's
+self from the innumerable tiny crevices through which the water was
+pouring, and each member of the party lay down in turn only to find
+himself literally flooded out before it was possible to gain any rest.
+
+The night had come, and the air, so warm a few hours previous, was
+uncomfortably cold.
+
+Jake proposed that a fire be built, providing he could find a sufficient
+quantity of dry wood; but both Cummings and Poyor decided against it in
+a very emphatic manner.
+
+"Although we have been traveling for the past six or eight hours where
+any one in the valley might see us, we are not so insane as to build a
+beacon here that our pursuers may be guided to this halting place."
+
+Cummings spoke in a petulant tone, and fearing that he might add
+something regarding the fact that if Jake had behaved himself all would
+now be in the cave, Teddy hastened to say:
+
+"If we can't build a fire why not spend the time walking, for it will be
+impossible to sleep with this rain beating down upon us?"
+
+"It would take a better man than Poyor to lead the way in the darkness
+and storm. Here we must stay, at least until morning, and then unless
+the rain has ceased falling, it will be a case of going hungry awhile."
+
+Finding that there was to be no change in the condition of affairs, Jake
+had crawled into the further end of the shelter where, with the water
+dripping down upon him he was trying his best to sleep, and Neal curled
+up beside him.
+
+Poyor, regardless of the weather, remained just outside the rock as if
+on guard, while Cummings, a few paces behind him, sat upon a fragment of
+stone listening intently, and Teddy wisely concluded to find a resting
+place somewhere, for he was so weary that repose seemed absolutely
+necessary, more especially since there could be no doubt but that the
+journey would be continued immediately the storm cleared away.
+
+Selecting a spot where some portion of his body could be kept dry, he
+lay down, and, regardless of all discomforts was soon oblivious to
+everything around him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+THE PURSUIT.
+
+
+During this night of discomforts the boys and Jake succeeded in gaining
+more rest than one would have thought possible under the circumstances.
+
+The temperature had fallen so much that, in comparison with the heat of
+the day, it was positively cold; but by lying close together and
+covering themselves with half a dozen enormous leaves from a vine which
+encircled the rock, they managed to pass the long hours without positive
+pain.
+
+Whenever Neal, who awakened very often, opened his eyes he saw Cummings
+and Poyor standing near at hand like statues, and the natural
+supposition was that they did not seek repose even to the slight extent
+of sitting down.
+
+Once he called to the white man, proposing to do his share of the
+watching; but the offer was positively declined.
+
+"I could not rest even if I should lie down," he replied in a whisper.
+"There are too many chances that the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may creep
+upon us under cover of this mist, and both Poyor and myself are needed.
+Sleep if you can, so that we may be prepared for a hard tramp
+to-morrow."
+
+As it proved, however, these excessive precautions were useless. The
+rain continued to fall steadily and in great volume until daybreak, and
+then all hands prepared for another tramp, for each one was so
+completely drenched that a little water more or less could not make much
+difference.
+
+The breakfast was by no means a hearty one. The moisture had spoiled the
+roast tapir, and even the remaining totopostes were so damp as to be
+decidedly unpleasant to the sight as well as the taste.
+
+Jake shut his eyes and ate a small quantity: but neither Neal nor Teddy
+could force the food down, and, in view of the fact that there was
+little likelihood of finding any game on the summit of the mountain, it
+seemed reasonably certain they would be forced to fast a long while.
+
+The burdens, soaked with water, had increased in weight very materially,
+and again Poyor overhauled them in order to throw away yet more of the
+load.
+
+All the fishing tackle, two extra suits of clothes belonging to the
+boys, the spoiled provisions and, in fact, nearly everything except the
+ammunition and weapons, was left behind when the ascent of the mountain
+was continued.
+
+It was not yet time for the sun to rise; but the gray light of coming
+day served to show the way, and Poyor strode on in advance at a pace
+which would have soon winded the boys had Cummings not ordered him to
+proceed more slowly.
+
+"We must keep on without a halt until noon," he said, "and it would be
+bad policy to use a portion of the party up before the journey has
+fairly begun."
+
+Even at the best pace possible the progress was by no means rapid, owing
+to the obstructions in the path. Here it was necessary to make a long
+detour that an overhanging ledge might be avoided, and there they were
+literally forced to scramble among boulders of every size at imminent
+risk of breaking limbs or being precipitated to the valley below.
+
+Before half an hour had passed the rain ceased falling as rapidly as it
+had begun, and as the sun appeared the clouds at the foot of the
+mountain were dispersed.
+
+Poyor halted and turned to look toward the valley.
+
+Almost at the same instant a loud shout was heard and Cummings uttered
+an exclamation of dismay, as a party of at least a hundred Indians burst
+into view about a mile below.
+
+"They halted rather than run the risk of passing us during the storm,"
+he said half to himself. "Inasmuch as the slowest of that crowd can
+travel two yards to our one we are likely to be overhauled in a very
+short time."
+
+"It is the end," Poyor said gravely. "There is little chance of escape,
+and none of running from them."
+
+"Do you propose that we shall stand and fight?" Cummings asked.
+
+"There is nothing else to be done."
+
+"But we have no show against them."
+
+"As much as to run."
+
+"Here in the open they can soon surround us."
+
+"We will be able to throw up a line of these rocks before they get here,
+and because it is in the open we can hold them back a few hours."
+
+There was plenty of material near at hand with which to make a shelter
+sufficient to protect them from the poisoned arrows, and after a few
+seconds' hesitation Cummings saw that Poyor's plan was the only one
+which could be carried into execution.
+
+"Set to work lively, boys," he shouted, as he began to throw up the
+smaller boulders in a circle. "Everything depends on our getting a fort
+ready before they come within shooting distance."
+
+There was no necessity of urging the boys or Jake to labor
+industriously. They could see the enemy and hear their yells of triumph
+at having tracked the game so successfully, therefore not a second was
+wasted.
+
+It seemed as if Poyor had the strength of a dozen men in his arms. He
+lifted huge boulders which the remainder of the party together could
+hardly have moved from their resting place; flung the smaller ones
+around as if they were nothing more than pebbles, and when the circle
+had been raised four feet high, set about digging away the sand from the
+center in order to increase the depth.
+
+The preparations were not yet completed when the foremost of the
+pursuers came in view from beneath a ledge about forty yards away, and
+he said to Cummings:
+
+"Three guns are enough to hold them back while Jake and I finish the
+work here. Do not hesitate to shoot, for they will stop at nothing when
+the time comes that we can hold out no longer."
+
+"Teddy, you sit there," Cummings said, as he pointed to an aperture in
+the wall which had been left as a loop-hole. "Neal, you're stationed
+next to him, and I'll hold this place. Now work lively, and pick off
+every one of those yelling villains that comes within range."
+
+He discharged both barrels of his weapon in rapid succession as he
+ceased speaking, and the two leaders disappeared immediately; but
+whether they had been hit by the leaden messengers, or only frightened,
+no one could say.
+
+Teddy raised his gun as a third man pressed forward, and, as he
+afterward confessed, closed his eyes while pulling the trigger, for to
+fire deliberately at a human being was something inexpressibly terrible.
+
+Even if he did not hit the mark the bullet must have gone so near the
+man as to frighten him, for when Neal discharged his weapon at a fourth
+Indian the entire party beat a retreat, disappearing behind the ledge.
+
+"They can't send an arrow from that distance with any accuracy of aim,"
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "therefore we may count on
+keeping them back until night, at all events."
+
+"And then what?" Teddy asked with a shudder.
+
+"That is something we won't talk about yet awhile," was the grave reply.
+"We've got at least twelve hours before us, providing they don't catch
+us napping, and at such a time as this it is a much longer lease of life
+than I expected."
+
+Teddy and Neal looked at each other in silence. The situation must
+indeed be desperate if Cummings could count on remaining at liberty only
+one day, and then----
+
+In fancy Teddy could see them led back to the Silver City as prisoners.
+He almost heard the strains of music while they were marched into the
+temple amid the slender, silver-tipped columns, with the throng of
+people following to witness the torture and final stroke which should
+relieve them from suffering.
+
+"What is the matter?" Neal whispered. "You have turned as white as a
+ghost."
+
+"I was thinking of what will happen when those murderers get us in their
+power."
+
+"Don't do anything of the kind; it is too terrible. I will die here
+fighting rather than be taken prisoner."
+
+"And is that all the hope we have left?"
+
+"To be killed here? Perhaps not; but it is far preferable to the torture
+Poyor and Cummings say is sure to be our portion in case of capture."
+
+Neal's face was also pale; but there was a certain look of determination
+about it which told he had made up his mind for the worst, and would
+struggle manfully to the end.
+
+Jake on the contrary, was nearly paralyzed with fear. He understood now
+if never before all the trouble he had brought upon his companions,
+first by making their presence in the city known, and, lastly, by
+betraying the whereabouts of the party when he ventured out of the
+cave. That the Indians would not be turned from their purpose he
+realized fully, and there could be no mistaking the desperate condition
+in which he had placed all hands.
+
+He was supposed to be aiding Poyor; but, as a matter of fact he could do
+little more than look out over the fortifications, fearing each moment
+that the enemy would make a sudden dash.
+
+The particular thought in the minds of all was as to what might be done
+in the way of replenishing the larder, for now the siege had really
+begun the question of how food could be procured was a serious matter,
+more especially since no one had eaten what would be worthy the name of
+breakfast.
+
+Neither Cummings nor Poyor feared a direct assault. In their opinion it
+was only a question of holding the enemy in check, and to this alone did
+they pay any attention.
+
+Cummings watched over the line of rocks, and at the slightest show of a
+living target discharged his weapon; but, so far as could be
+ascertained, without inflicting any injury upon those who were ready to
+deal out death at the first opportunity.
+
+"It is only a question of holding back until the night comes, when they
+can ascend the mountain, and, being above us, be able to shoot us down
+without exposing themselves," Teddy said as he sat by the aperture
+watching for a sight of the enemy.
+
+"We will wait until sunset before we give up entirely," Neal replied, in
+a tone that showed he had lost all hope. "Then, unless Poyor can devise
+some plan for escape, we shall have to stand a hand to hand fight which
+can result in but one way."
+
+"You admit that we can't escape?" Teddy replied interrogatively. "Five
+against a hundred won't be able to stand very long."
+
+"We can at least hold our own a few hours, and when the end comes we
+will be found fighting."
+
+This was poor consolation for a fellow who hoped his friend might see
+some better way out of the difficulty, and Teddy settled back to watch
+for an opportunity to discharge his weapon with effect; but feeling that
+it was vain labor so far as the ultimate result was concerned.
+
+During the forenoon, while every crevice in the rocks was running with
+water, Poyor filled the canteens, and when this work was done he
+insisted that Jake should continue to aid him in lowering the level
+behind the line of rocks; but the engineer was, to use his own words,
+"completely played out," and the necessary work was neglected until he
+could gain a certain amount of rest, which, under the circumstances,
+every other number of the party was willing to forego for a time.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+AT BAY.
+
+
+When the Indian had scraped the sand away to the solid rock, thereby
+deepening the enclosure at least twelve inches, he ceased work, and,
+seating himself by Cummings' side, prepared to do his share of the
+watching.
+
+By this time the assailants had become convinced that it was useless to
+expose themselves to the murderous fire which could not be returned with
+any possibility of injuring the white men, and they remained under
+cover.
+
+"I believe we might sneak away from them," Neal said, after looking
+fifteen or twenty minutes at the ledge beneath which the enemy had taken
+refuge, without seeing so much as a man's head. "They think we will
+shoot them down, and might keep under cover while we were escaping."
+
+"Then you believe they do not know what we are about?" Cummings asked
+grimly.
+
+"How can it be possible if no one comes out to reconnoiter?"
+
+"Look down the valley."
+
+Following with their eyes the direction of Cummings' outstretched finger
+the boys saw a party of Indians far down the mountain side out of range,
+traveling rapidly in the opposite direction.
+
+"They are running away!" Teddy cried gleefully. "Our guns were too much
+for them."
+
+"Do you believe there are as many in that crowd as we saw coming up the
+mountain?"
+
+Teddy gazed again, and this time the look of joy and relief faded from
+his face.
+
+"No," he replied slowly, "only about half as many."
+
+"And the remainder are under the ledge ready to come out at the first
+good opportunity."
+
+"But what are those fellows doing?"
+
+"Going out of range where every movement we make can be seen without
+risk of being shot at, and when the night comes they will circle around
+us."
+
+That this supposition was correct could be seen a few moments later when
+the party halted in full view, and disposed of themselves in such places
+as the bushes afforded any shade from the sun's hot rays.
+
+"They are taking things mighty easy," Neal said after a long pause,
+during which he watched the enemy intently.
+
+"What is to prevent?" Cummings replied. "Time is of no especial object
+to them providing we can be captured finally, and just now we are
+situated very much like rats in a trap."
+
+"I wonder what would be the result if one of us should show himself?"
+Teddy said musingly.
+
+"You shall soon see. Poyor, walk a short distance up the mountain, and
+let the boys learn how well we are watched."
+
+The Indian did as he was requested, and had hardly left the
+fortification when those in the valley made a series of signals to the
+men above, and instantly Cummings had another opportunity to empty his
+weapon at a living target as several men sprang out from beneath the
+ledge.
+
+"Now you have some slight idea of what the result would be if we should
+attempt to run away," he said while re-loading the gun.
+
+"But what is to be gained by staying here if you are certain we shall be
+surrounded? Wouldn't it be better to have the fight out when it is
+possible to see what we are doing?"
+
+"Yes, decidedly; but I prefer to wait longer. While there's life there's
+hope, and before sunset something may happen to give us the advantage."
+
+Poyor came back leisurely, and as he re-entered the circle of rocks
+those in the valley settled down contentedly once more.
+
+During this conversation Jake had been sleeping soundly; but now the sun
+shone full upon him, and the heat was so great that he was forced to
+change his position, saying as he did so:
+
+"In a couple of hours more we shall be roasted to a turn."
+
+"That isn't the worst that may befall us," Cummings replied, evidently
+pleased at an opportunity to increase the engineer's fears.
+
+"But it seems as if we might make a try for some game. I'm very nearly
+starved."
+
+"You are at liberty to do as you please, because it is not possible to
+work us any further injury. According to your belief the Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians are such peaceable fellows that they might allow you to hunt in
+the valley awhile."
+
+"What's the use of roughing into me now? I know I've made a fool of
+myself twice; but I'm in the same hole with the rest."
+
+"That doesn't make our situation any the more bearable, and when we
+think how it was brought about it is only natural to feel sore. Even now
+you insist on taking rest when the others are working."
+
+"But I traveled steadily for twenty-four hours, and haven't had half as
+much sleep as the remainder of the party."
+
+"What about last night?"
+
+Jake made no reply. He considered himself abused because Cummings
+persisted in talking about what had been done, when he believed the
+matter should be dropped after the fault was acknowledged.
+
+Another hour passed. The sun was directly overhead, and the heat seemed
+excessive. There was no longer any shadow cast by the rocks, and the
+sand was so hot as to be painful to the touch.
+
+"There is no reason why you boys should remain on guard," Cummings
+finally said. "The Indians will not make a move before afternoon, and it
+is equally certain we shall not get a chance to shoot at those under the
+ledge."
+
+"We may as well sit here, for no fellow could sleep in this oven," Teddy
+replied; but Poyor showed what might be done, by lying down near the
+front wall and closing his eyes.
+
+At the end of two hours there was no further change in the condition of
+affairs. Poyor continued to sleep, the boys and Cummings remained on
+guard, and Jake sat leaning his head against the rocks while the
+perspiration ran down his face in tiny streams.
+
+Then, as on the previous evening, the clouds began to gather, and
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction as he gazed toward the sky:
+
+"There's evidently no danger that we shall suffer from thirst, for
+another storm is coming up, and while it lasts we may see some chance of
+giving those fellows the slip."
+
+"But you didn't dare to travel last night when it was raining," Teddy
+said.
+
+"Very true; but that was at a time when we were not positive the enemy
+were so near. Now they are close at our heels we shall be warranted in
+running many risks which, twenty-four hours ago, would have been most
+imprudent."
+
+In a very short time the sun was hidden from view; a cooling wind blew
+across the mountain, and every member of the sad visaged party
+experienced a wonderful sense of relief.
+
+Poyor arose to his feet like one refreshed, and Jake bestirred himself
+sufficiently to propose that he relieve Neal or Teddy a short while.
+
+"You can sleep now that the sun doesn't shine," he said, "and I promise
+to keep strict watch."
+
+After some hesitation Teddy accepted the offer while he paced to and fro
+to rest his cramped and aching limbs, and Poyor consulted with Cummings
+relative to an attempt at flight when the storm should come.
+
+His idea was that they could not be any worse off by making one effort
+to reach the summit of the range, even if the desired result was not
+attained, and after considerable discussion the white man agreed to the
+plan.
+
+"It is barely possible that we may get on all right, and the situation
+is so desperate that almost any change must be for the better," he said.
+"We will wait half an hour or so, and then start if the enemy have made
+no move meanwhile."
+
+The threatened storm was not long delayed.
+
+In less than an hour it was upon them in all its fury, and Cummings said
+sharply as he pressed nearer the front of the fortification:
+
+"Now we need all the eyes in the party. Keep a sharp watch, and fire at
+the first moving thing you see."
+
+On this occasion thunder and lightning accompanied the wind and rain,
+and by the glare of the flashes it was possible to see as if at
+noon-day.
+
+Never before had the boys witnessed such a terrible tempest. The entire
+heavens seemed ablaze at times, and the peals which echoed and re-echoed
+from one point to another appeared to shake the mountain.
+
+The wind was so powerful that even Poyor could not stand against it, and
+Cummings said in a tone of deepest disappointment:
+
+"Unless we choose to venture into the valley again flight is out of the
+question. We must stay here and take what the Indians care to give us
+when the storm clears away."
+
+He had hardly ceased speaking when a flash of lightning nearly blinded
+them; the earth shook most decidedly before the thunder peal came, and
+then it was as if all nature was in convulsion.
+
+The rocks forming the fortification were precipitated down the mountain;
+the little party were hurled violently forward, and then intense
+darkness and the most profound silence ensued.
+
+Teddy reached out his hand to touch Neal; but the latter was not near
+him.
+
+"Neal! Neal!" he shouted again and again, and several moments elapsed
+before he heard, as if far away, an answering cry.
+
+"Where are you, Teddy?"
+
+"Here, on the side of the hill. Come this way."
+
+"I can't. I'm nearly buried in the sand."
+
+From the direction of the voice Teddy knew his friend had been thrown
+quite a distance down the hill, and he cried:
+
+"Keep on shouting so I can find you."
+
+"Don't move! Wait for another flash of lightning!"
+
+It was Cummings who had spoken, and an instant later Jake was heard
+begging for help.
+
+[Illustration: The little party were hurled violently forward, and then
+intense darkness ensued.]
+
+"All the rocks of the fort must be on top of me. Will somebody help pull
+them away."
+
+The rain was yet falling in torrents: but the electrical disturbance had
+ceased entirely.
+
+That something terrible had occurred all knew; but what it was no one
+could say.
+
+When Jake implored some one to aid him the second time, Poyor cried:
+
+"Let each remain motionless. I will find the engineer. The earth has
+opened here, and I am on the brink of a chasm."
+
+This order was obeyed, and the boys knew by the sound of the Indian's
+voice that he was making his way toward Jake.
+
+At the end of ten minutes he shouted:
+
+"There has been no harm done here. We will come to you."
+
+The boys spoke from time to time to guide him, regardless of the fact
+that they might also be calling the enemy, and after what seemed to be a
+very long while the party were re-united at the spot where Neal was, as
+he had said, nearly buried in the sand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+THE CATASTROPHE.
+
+
+To extricate Neal from his disagreeable position was a long, but not a
+difficult operation.
+
+It appeared as if the earth Poyor had dug up from the middle of the
+fortification was all heaped above him in such a manner that he could do
+nothing in his own behalf, and it was only necessary to dig this away.
+
+"What could have happened to upset things so thoroughly?" he asked,
+staggering to his feet, and being obliged to sit down very suddenly lest
+the wind should blow him down.
+
+"As near as I can guess there has been a land slide," Cummings replied.
+"I believe it began at the ledge under which the Indians were hidden,
+and how far it extends no one can so much as guess until it is possible
+to get a view of the country."
+
+"Are you not afraid of an attack?" Teddy asked.
+
+"Not while this storm is raging. Stand up for a moment, and then you can
+see whether those fellows would make much headway trying to reach us."
+
+The wind was blowing furiously, and the rain falling in great volume.
+Now and then the little party cowering close together for mutual
+protection, would be struck by a perfect shower of pebbles and wet sand
+with such force that, had they been in a standing position, all would
+have been overthrown, and it really required considerable exertion to
+remain in one spot.
+
+The ammunition, or rather, the greater portion of it, had been left near
+the front wall of the fort, and the chances were that it was destroyed
+by the water or scattered beyond finding.
+
+Teddy was the first to think of this misfortune, and he said in a tone
+of despair:
+
+"There's little hope now that we can hold the enemy in check even for an
+hour, in case they should make an attack, for I don't believe we have
+twenty cartridges left."
+
+"And but two guns, for I lost mine when I was blown down the side of the
+mountain," Neal added.
+
+"Don't make the mistake of searching for trouble," Cummings interrupted.
+"It is sufficient to know that we are alive and uninjured. The Indians
+will not bother us for some time."
+
+Not until considerably past midnight did the rain cease falling; but the
+wind storm still continued, and Poyor said, speaking for the first time
+since the party were united:
+
+"It will not be possible to leave here until sunrise. Those who can
+sleep should try to do so, for we may have a hard day's work before us
+to-morrow."
+
+"I should as soon think of sleeping during a battle," Teddy replied with
+a shudder. "The suspense is worse than actual danger."
+
+"What can you be afraid of just now?" Jake asked.
+
+"At this particular moment, nothing: but I feel positive that when the
+sun rises we shall find ourselves surrounded by the Indians."
+
+This was not a pleasant subject of conversation, and it was dropped as
+if by mutual consent.
+
+The wind seemed icy cold, and the fugitives nestled closer together for
+protection against the blast, counting the slowly passing moments until
+heralds of the coming dawn appeared in the sky.
+
+Before it was sufficiently light to distinguish surrounding objects the
+wind lulled, and, standing erect each looked anxiously down the side of
+the mountain, waiting impatiently for the rising of the sun.
+
+As the misty clouds which veiled the top of the range drifted away, an
+exclamation of astonishment burst from the lips of all.
+
+Where, a few hours previous, had been a band of men eager to capture or
+slay the white strangers, was now only a yawning chasm.
+
+Beginning at the ledge of rocks it appeared as if a giant hand had rent
+the side of the mountain apart, throwing the huge mass of earth into the
+valley, uprooting or crushing trees, and making desolate for many
+hundred yards what had been a perfect garden of trees, flowers and
+shrubs.
+
+"Why, there must have been an earthquake!" Jake exclaimed when the first
+burst of astonishment passed away.
+
+"Hardly as bad as that," Cummings replied. "I fancy the lightning struck
+the ledge, and then a regular land slide followed."
+
+"Do you suppose the Indians are buried under that pile of earth and
+rocks?"
+
+"Unless they understood what damage might be done by such storms they
+must be, and it stands us in hand to get away from this spot before
+others can arrive."
+
+"It is terrible to think of so many being killed," Teddy said
+mournfully, and Jake asked sharply:
+
+"Are you sorry we've got a chance for escape?"
+
+"Certainly not; but no matter who they were, one can't help feeling
+shocked at such a catastrophe."
+
+"It is not well for us to stay here," Poyor said before any reply could
+be made. "While looking at what we believe to be the grave of the Chan
+Santa Cruz army, they may be climbing the mountain to cut us off."
+
+"You are right, Poyor. Boys, look around for the ammunition and Neal's
+gun, and whether we find anything or not we must be on our journey in
+five minutes."
+
+Cummings led in the search, which resulted in nothing, for even the
+boulders which formed the fort were hidden from view by the sand and
+gravel, and then Poyor advanced on the way upward once more.
+
+Although it seemed certain the enemy had been destroyed the Indian did
+not neglect any precaution. He traveled further in advance than usual
+and from time to time cast searching glances toward the valley where, in
+all probability, so many lay dead.
+
+Now every member of the party were suffering for food. It was thirty-six
+hours since they had satisfied their hunger, and during the greater
+portion of this time a large amount of labor had been performed.
+
+"I believe I could eat an iguana, and that's the most disagreeable
+looking reptile I've ever seen," Teddy whispered to Neal, and the latter
+replied gravely:
+
+"It doesn't seem right to complain about being hungry after escaping
+from such a terrible situation; but at the same time I'm willing to
+confess that almost anything would taste mighty good just now."
+
+The travelers were nearing the summit of the mountain where not so much
+as a blade of grass could be seen, and there was nothing for it but to
+endure hunger, as they were forced to, the heat, which, as the day
+advanced, seemed almost insupportable.
+
+It was about noon when the little party stood on the highest point of
+land, and, looking over a long stretch of valley and plain covered with
+verdure of the deepest green, saw the blue waters of the Caribbean sea,
+the crests of the waves sparkling in the sunlight like jewels set in
+sapphire-colored enamel.
+
+Never had the ocean seemed so beautiful and friendly as now, after the
+long, dangerous tramp, and the boys forgot all privations and
+discomforts as they gazed at the broad expanse of water.
+
+"If the Sea Dream was afloat and anchored off there how quickly we could
+get home," Teddy cried.
+
+"Even allowing that nothing happens to prevent our traveling ten hours a
+day, it will be a week before you can stand on the shore of the sea,"
+Cummings replied, glancing backward as if regretting that he was about
+to descend the range which would separate him from the wonders and
+wealth of the Silver City.
+
+"At least, we have nothing more to fear from the Indians, and there is
+now good reason to believe we shall get home at some time, which is more
+than either of us could have said truthfully last night."
+
+"We can't have that satisfaction," and Cummings turned to resume the
+march. "The Chan Santa Cruz frequently go to the coast, and there are
+plenty living near by who may try to make matters disagreeable for us.
+But we must not stand here speculating; it is necessary to gain the
+forest below before finding anything for supper, and I'm free to confess
+that either fish or meat will be very acceptable."
+
+The thought of food caused all to forget their fatigue, and the descent
+was begun, the progress being as easy and rapid as it had previously
+been slow and difficult.
+
+The afternoon was not more than half spent when they reached the fringe
+of bushes marking the forest line, and an hour later the little party
+were shielded from the rays of the sun by the wide spreading branches
+of enormous trees.
+
+Now the advance was more of a hunting excursion than the ending of a
+day's journey, and each member of the band searched among the foliage
+for something eatable.
+
+Poyor was the one who finally succeeded in replenishing the larder, and
+he did it in a right royal manner.
+
+While Neal and Teddy were looking for a bird which the latter declared
+he had caught a glimpse of among the leaves, the Indian started off at
+full speed, returning in a short time with two armadilloes.
+
+"Good for you!" Cummings shouted joyfully. "We'll have a first-class
+supper now, with plenty to spare for breakfast. How did you manage to
+get both?"
+
+"An Indian is a better hunter than the white man," Poyor said with a
+smile as he set about building a fire.
+
+"Do you intend to eat those horrid looking things?" Teddy asked in
+surprise.
+
+"Indeed I do, and after you get a taste of the old fellow's flesh,
+roasted in his own shell, you'll say it goes ahead of everything except
+a morsel of fat from the back of Mr. Armadillo."
+
+A small spring bubbled out of the ground beneath a huge logwood tree,
+giving rise to what would probably be a large stream by the time it
+reached the coast, and here it was proposed to spend the night.
+
+To protect themselves from possible visits from wild beasts Cummings set
+about collecting fuel for camp-fires, and in this work the others
+assisted while the Indian played the part of cook.
+
+While his game was being roasted Poyor searched the forest in the
+immediate vicinity, and succeeded in finding a quantity of yellowish
+green fruit which Cummings explained to his companions were mangoes.
+
+"I thought it was necessary to cultivate mangoes," Teddy said in
+surprise.
+
+"Not here, although it was originally introduced from India; but it took
+so kindly to the soil that one finds the fruit even in the heart of the
+primitive forest. Except for the odor of turpentine, I think it the most
+pleasing of all that nature has bestowed."
+
+Just at that moment the boys were more interested in what Poyor was
+doing than regarding the fruits of Yucatan, and instantly he pulled the
+first armadillo from the fire they were ready to be served.
+
+During ten minutes after receiving his share of the meat on a broad
+leaf, every member of the party ate ravenously, and then Jake said with
+a sigh of content, as he helped himself to another generous portion:
+
+"I declare it is almost worth while going without grub in order to know
+how good it tastes."
+
+"I'd rather eat less at a time, and have my meals more regularly," Teddy
+said with a laugh, as he made an attack upon a pile of mangoes.
+
+Then Cummings began to discuss with Poyor the best course to pursue
+while journeying to the coast, and the others listened in silence, for
+upon the decision arrived at might depend all their chances of ever
+reaching home again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+A FIERCE CONFLICT.
+
+
+That Poyor believed the more serious danger was over, the boys
+understood from the fact that camp-fires were to be kept burning during
+the night, something which would never have been allowed had he feared
+an attack from the Chan Santa Cruz.
+
+Then again, the Indian no longer refused to converse lest the duty of
+the sentinel should be neglected; but talked readily and at considerable
+length with Cummings regarding the course to be pursued.
+
+He also indulged in the luxury of a smoke, something he had not done
+since leaving the white man's hut, and, taking their cue from him, the
+remainder of the party gave themselves up to absolute repose both of
+body and mind, therefore because of these reasons if for no other, this
+particular halting place was afterward remembered as the most pleasant
+they knew during the long, fruitless journey.
+
+When Cummings and Poyor finally decided upon the line of march for the
+following day, the twilight was rapidly deepening into the gloom of
+night, and the latter lighted the fires, thus making a circle of flame
+completely around the party.
+
+"Is it really necessary to have such a blaze, or are you indulging in it
+simply because it has been so long since we dared allow our whereabouts
+to be known?" Teddy asked, as he sat with his chin on his knees gazing
+at the burning wood.
+
+"We are guarding against brute enemies. It is said that jaguars are
+plenty in this section, and there can be no question but snakes abound.
+These embers, which require only labor to keep alive, will do very much
+toward saving our small stock of ammunition."
+
+Jake did not appear disposed to join in any conversation since dinner.
+He had thrown himself on the ground near the foot of a gigantic tree,
+and, from the expression on his face, Neal fancied he was regretting
+that they had not succeeded in bringing away any treasure from the
+Silver City.
+
+"What are you thinking of?" he asked.
+
+"Only figgerin' out what a 'royal excursion this would 'a been if I'd
+got that image I tried so hard for."
+
+"If you had succeeded in carrying it outside the city we should not be
+here now," Cummings said gravely. "With that lump of silver added to
+our load I fancy we would be prisoners at this moment if they allowed
+us to live so long."
+
+"I reckoned you'd take the disappointment harder, after spendin' so much
+time gettin' ready for the trip."
+
+"Of what use would it be for me to complain? In view of all that has
+happened we have been remarkably fortunate in getting away alive, and
+consequently there is very much to be thankful for."
+
+"Do you think that if I'd obeyed orders right up to the handle anything
+more could have been done?"
+
+"Not in the matter of carrying away treasure, for all hope fled the
+moment our boat was discovered. You simply caused us additional
+hardships, and have put an end to my visiting the place again for many
+months."
+
+"What?" Teddy cried in surprise. "Are you still thinking of entering the
+city again?"
+
+"I am, most certainly. It shall be my life work to discover the history
+of these people, and tell to the world the meaning of the inscriptions
+on the monuments of Copan. This failure has simply been a misfortune,
+not anything which will prevent my continuing the labor."
+
+"Do you count on asking others to go with you?"
+
+"No," Cummings replied, with a meaning glance toward Jake. "If I ever
+succeed the honor will be divided among Poyor and myself alone."
+
+Then, as on the day when he first broached the subject, he reviewed all
+that is known to the white race concerning the buried cities of Central
+America and of the descendants of that mighty race of people whose once
+high state of civilization cannot be questioned. When he concluded Jake
+indulged in but one remark before composing himself for slumber:
+
+"It don't make any difference to me whether the inscriptions can ever be
+read or not; but a fellow feels sore to think that he had a chance of
+scoopin' in enough to set himself up in great shape, an' was prevented
+when the precious metal was under his very fingers."
+
+"Have you any particular reason for going to Progresso?" Neal asked
+after a pause.
+
+"I have most decidedly. Since getting you in a scrape which nearly cost
+your lives, it is only right I should see you homeward bound."
+
+"Couldn't we find our way alone?"
+
+"That would be impossible even for me. Poyor is the only guide, and when
+he has done his work you sail on the steamer, while he and I return to
+the little hut, there to wait for another opportunity of getting inside
+the Silver City."
+
+After this Cummings appeared disinclined to talk any more, and the boys
+lay down near Jake for the slumber which both needed so badly.
+
+Although their eyelids were heavy with sleep, it was not possible to
+lose consciousness immediately. Now their safety was in a measure
+assured, the thoughts of Cummings' great disappointment, and the lost
+opportunity of making themselves famous, came to mind more forcibly than
+ever before, causing both to remain awake after all save Poyor were
+breathing heavily.
+
+"This won't do," Teddy said half to himself. "The mysteries of the
+Silver City are not to be solved by us, and the sooner we go to sleep
+the better condition we shall be in for to-morrow's tramp."
+
+Before Neal could reply the Indian stole softly toward them and
+whispered:
+
+"If you would see the father of serpents, sit up and look toward the
+spring; but make no noise."
+
+The boys did as they were directed and could distinguish by the glare of
+the camp-fires the largest snake either had ever seen.
+
+It was a boa, moving lazily toward the water course as if conscious that
+its own wonderful strength was sufficient to enable it to cope
+successfully with all enemies.
+
+Before it was possible to form any estimate as to the serpent's size
+another stranger appeared on the scene, causing Poyor to raise his gun
+ready to shoot.
+
+This visitor was a jaguar, who had evidently come out for a drink, and
+the unusual light prevented him from seeing the boa. He moved warily
+forward, ready to meet an attack, and probably trying to make up his
+mind whether or not this was a favorable opportunity to get a
+particularly good supper, when the boa darted upon him.
+
+Taken by surprise from the rear, the snake had one complete turn around
+the animal's body before there was any show of resistance, and then
+ensued a most thrilling conflict.
+
+The boys could see that the boa's tail was fastened firmly around a
+tree, thus giving him a purchase such as the jaguar would have
+difficulty in overcoming.
+
+Using both claws and teeth the animal defended himself bravely for ten
+minutes, and then it could be seen that the rapidly tightening folds of
+the serpent were hampering his movements. He no longer struggled so
+desperately; but uttered shrill cries of alarm which were responded to
+from a distance.
+
+"His mate is coming," Poyor whispered. "Now we shall see a royal
+battle."
+
+It was as he had said. A few moments later another jaguar appeared, and
+the boys could understand that the boa was making haste to crush the
+first victim before meeting the second enemy.
+
+It was possible to see the muscles of the serpents' tail stand out as
+the pressure was increased, and then could be plainly heard the breaking
+bones while the victim uttered wild screams of agony.
+
+The female jaguar had but just come into view when her mate was killed,
+and she darted at the serpent with a yell of rage which was answered by
+an angry hiss.
+
+Whether the boa was taken at a disadvantage in the beginning of the
+fight, or had become so weary with its previous exertions as to render
+it incapable of putting forth all its powers could not be told; but
+certain it is that the second battle was short.
+
+The beast caught it by the neck at the third attempt, and the lashing of
+the monster's tail told that he was beaten.
+
+"He killed one jaguar easily; but this last beast will soon finish him,"
+Teddy whispered, and almost before the words had been uttered the battle
+was virtually at an end.
+
+Having relinquished its hold of the tree, and unable to encircle the
+animal's body with its deadly folds, the boa's strength was useless, and
+from that time on only the snarling of the jaguar and the threshing of
+the serpent could be heard until the fight came to an end.
+
+"What are you going to do?" Neal asked as Poyor raised his weapon when
+the silence told that the conflict had been decided in favor of the
+weaker party.
+
+"Kill the beast. There are too many of her kind already, and I shall be
+doing a favor to those who come after us by reducing the number."
+
+"Don't shoot; she has proved her right to live, if the theory of the
+survival of the fittest be correct, and after such a battle it would be
+cowardly to kill her."
+
+"If, on the morrow, you should find yourself suddenly seized by her,
+there would not be so much pity in your heart," Poyor replied, and
+before Neal could make any reply the animal had vanished in the thicket.
+
+"There is no longer any question of what should be done," the Indian
+said regretfully, after a pause, as he lowered his weapon. "There is a
+fine skin for those who care to save it."
+
+"It can lay there for all I care," Teddy replied with a laugh. "Fur in
+this kind of weather isn't pleasant even to think of. Perhaps in the
+morning Cummings will fancy it worth his while to carry the hide away."
+
+"The ants will have devoured it before the sun rises, and since it has
+no value for you it is well to go to sleep. One of the white men can
+call you when it is time to stand your share of the watch."
+
+"Is guard to be kept all night?"
+
+"It would be unsafe for all to sleep. If the jaguars had not met the
+serpent what would have been the result to those whose eyes were closed
+in slumber?"
+
+"There is no necessity of saying anything more," Neal replied with a
+laugh. "We will be ready when our turn comes."
+
+Then, as soon as they could compose themselves sufficiently, the boys
+surrendered to the demand of slumber, and Cummings must have stood their
+watch himself, since they were not awakened until another day had come.
+
+Breakfast was already cooked. On a number of gigantic leaves the Indian
+had spread such food as he could procure: Mangoes without stint; a
+roasted bird shaped not unlike a goose, and several small, white cones
+which tasted like radishes.
+
+Except for such articles as bread or vegetables, it was a meal which
+would have tempted an epicure and to it all hands did full justice.
+
+When their hunger had been satisfied, Cummings said as he shouldered one
+of the two remaining guns and took up a greater portion of the
+cartridges:
+
+"It is time we were moving. We can travel reasonably slow, in order that
+no one may become exhausted; but not an hour must be lost. The way
+before us is long, even after we reach the sea-shore, and each day
+wasted is just so much delay in reaching our destination."
+
+"Now that we are really homeward bound you will have no reason to
+complain because our powers of endurance are too slight," Neal replied,
+as he took up the remaining weapon, and the march was immediately
+begun.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+A WELCOME CHANGE.
+
+
+While they were on the mountain where no shade could be found the boys
+thought that it would be a wonderful relief to gain the shelter of the
+forest; but after traveling an hour they realized that the heat was
+nearly as great in one place as another.
+
+Among the trees the rays of the sun did not beat directly down upon
+them; but to balance this every breath of wind was shut out, and the
+atmosphere seemed stifling.
+
+The perspiration rolled from their faces in streams, and so great was
+the humidity that it seemed as if it would be a positive relief to be in
+the sunlight.
+
+"I reckon you've got a better opinion of mountain travel by this time,"
+Cummings said laughingly, as Neal involuntarily halted. "In such a
+climate the shade of the trees is a positive discomfort."
+
+"We can stand it," Teddy replied bravely. "Every step takes us just so
+much nearer the coast, and one glimpse of the sea will repay us for all
+our exertions."
+
+It seemed as if even Poyor was affected by the heat. He no longer strode
+forward at such a rapid pace; but lagged from time to time as badly as
+either member of the party.
+
+Cummings urged first one and then another on until about eleven o'clock
+in the forenoon, and then he said, coming to a full stop by the side of
+the stream they had been following:
+
+"We can now afford to indulge in a siesta, and shall probably travel all
+the better for frequent halts. Later in the day one of us will do a
+little hunting, and the march need not come to an end until it is no
+longer light enough for us to see the way."
+
+To this very welcome proposition no one had any objections to offer, and
+in the shortest possible space of time only the sentinel, which on this
+occasion proved to be Teddy, was left awake.
+
+It was dull work sitting there listening to the droning of the insects;
+but no member of the party could have kept watch more conscientiously
+than did he, and when it seemed impossible to hold his eyes open any
+longer he paced to and fro to prevent them from closing.
+
+With the exception of the usual noises of the forest, it was as if all
+nature slumbered, and he had just begun to think that standing watch was
+a useless precaution when an unusual rustling among the foliage caused
+him to start in surprise.
+
+His first thought was that the Chan Santa Cruz had followed them over
+the range; but an instant later this was shown to be a mistake, as four
+copper-colored men, bearing no resemblance to the inhabitants of the
+Silver City, however, passed through the forest a short distance away
+without apparently being aware of the proximity of the white party.
+
+To arouse Poyor was but the work of an instant, for it was only
+necessary to touch him gently on the shoulder when he sprang to his
+feet.
+
+"There are some men over there," Teddy whispered as he pointed in the
+direction taken by the strangers.
+
+The Indian started through the underbrush as noiselessly as a serpent,
+and as he disappeared the boy awakened Cummings.
+
+"Were they armed?" the latter asked, after the short story had been
+told.
+
+"I didn't notice. My only idea was to arouse you and Poyor, and there
+wasn't much time for an examination."
+
+"It can't be that they have followed us over the range," Cummings said,
+half to himself, as he seized his weapon and made sure it was loaded.
+"It won't do any harm to be prepared, therefore you had best get the
+others on their feet; we may have to trust to our legs."
+
+It was not an easy matter to awaken the remainder of the party without
+causing an outcry; but by first covering the mouth of each with his hand
+Teddy finally succeeded, and then stood on the alert with them as
+Cummings made his way in the direction taken by Poyor to assist in the
+investigation.
+
+One, two, three minutes of suspense followed, and then came a cry which
+set all their fears at rest. It was the salutation of friends, and an
+instant later Cummings shouted:
+
+"Do not fear; we have found acquaintances."
+
+"It is time something of the kind was discovered," Jake said in a tone
+of relief. "I was beginning to think we should never meet one again."
+
+"They looked like Indians," Teddy said doubtfully, and Neal added:
+
+"I fancy we can take Cummings' word for it. Here they are, and it will
+soon be possible to know why they were so foolish as to come into this
+part of the country where wild beasts are not the least of the dangers
+to be encountered."
+
+The strangers appeared, escorted by Poyor and the white man, and the
+latter said as they came into the opening selected as a halting place:
+
+"These are acquaintances of ours from Merida, who have visited this
+section of the country in search of bird skins, which find a ready sale
+among your people. They have a canoe, and report that a dozen miles
+below here the stream widens until it can be navigated by reasonably
+large crafts."
+
+"Since we haven't so much as the smallest kind of a boat I can't see how
+that information will be of any use to us," Neal replied laughingly.
+
+"It won't take long for me to explain. I propose to hire them to carry
+us to the sea-shore, and thus save just so much labor of traveling on
+foot."
+
+"Is their canoe large enough?"
+
+"It will carry a dozen."
+
+"Then our troubles are indeed over," Teddy cried joyously; but Cummings
+dampened his ardor somewhat when he added:
+
+"There will then remain the journey around the coast, and with such a
+load it would not be safe to put to sea in their craft. But let us enjoy
+the blessings which come to us," he added, on observing how quickly his
+companions' countenances fell. "Half a loaf is decidedly better than no
+bread at all, and when a tramp of six days can be set aside we have good
+cause to feel pleased."
+
+The strangers had not waited to be welcomed by the other members of the
+party. Without stopping to be invited they began preparations for
+cooking on rather an extensive scale, using the contents of their well
+filled game bags, and the savory odor which soon arose brought Jake to a
+full realization of the good fortune that had come to them.
+
+"With those fellows to hunt the game it will be a regular feast from
+here to the coast," he said approvingly, "and I think this is the first
+piece of good luck we've had since leaving the Sea Dream."
+
+The newcomers could not speak the English language, consequently all the
+conversation on the part of the fugitives was carried on by Cummings and
+Poyor; but these two interpreted such portions as they thought might be
+of interest to the boys.
+
+From the middle of what is known as the "dry season" until the period of
+almost incessant rains is well advanced, these hunters spend their time
+on one or another of the streams leading from the coast, and they
+consider themselves well paid when a year's work nets each an hundred
+dollars.
+
+"That is really a large amount of money to them," Cummings explained
+when Neal suggested that hunting was not a very profitable employment.
+"One quarter of the sum will serve to purchase the absolute necessities
+of life in a country where fruit can be had for the labor of gathering,
+and in ten years they can well afford to retire from business, or become
+landed proprietors by leasing logwood cuttings, sub-letting the land to
+those who will pay fifteen cents a hundred pounds for all that can be
+gathered."
+
+The strangers were quite as satisfactory cooks as Poyor, and when the
+dinner had been spread on the leaves each member of Cummings' party was
+ready to do it full justice.
+
+After the meal a short time was spent by the men in smoking, and at
+about four o'clock in the afternoon the journey was resumed.
+
+Feeling secure because of numbers, and the reports made by the newcomers
+that there was no one in the immediate vicinity the boys were allowed to
+follow their own inclinations as to the line of march, and each strayed
+here or there as he pleased until the coming of night forced them to
+keep together because of the danger to be apprehended from wild animals.
+
+It was late in the evening when they arrived at the hunters' camp; but
+Cummings did not propose to remain there even for one night.
+
+He insisted that they could travel by water as well during the hours of
+darkness, while it would be no more labor for one to guide the canoe,
+allowing her to drift with the current, than to stand watch.
+
+The strangers used every argument to induce him to defer the beginning
+of the journey until morning; but he was determined, and after some
+controversy the men made the canoe ready.
+
+Neal, Teddy and Jake were stationed amidships, where thanks to the
+generous size of the craft, they could stretch out at full length
+whenever the fancy seized them. Poyor was seated in the bow, Cummings on
+the stern thwart, and the owners of the boat where they could use the
+paddles to advantage.
+
+Of this first night's journeying the boys knew very little. The stream
+was narrow, and lined on either bank with trees so that at times even
+the heavens were obscured by foliage, therefore they could perceive
+nothing save the dark wall on either side.
+
+From the movements of the helmsman it was possible to understand when
+the canoe was rounding a bend, or being pulled from the bank; but that
+was all, and, weary of watching without being able to see anything, the
+boys soon gave themselves up to slumber.
+
+When they awakened the little craft was moored to the bank at a point
+where the stream formed a basin; a fire was burning brightly, and over
+it Poyor bent in a suggestive attitude.
+
+"Well, this is the kind of traveling that suits me," Teddy cried,
+springing to his feet and arousing his companions. "While we were
+sleeping the boat drifted steadily on, and, at this rate, when we arrive
+at the coast all hands ought to be in good condition for a long tramp."
+
+"Where's Cummings?" Neal asked, as he in turn arose from the bottom of
+the canoe.
+
+"Gone for game," the Indian replied.
+
+"Oh, we're not to have breakfast until it is shot," he added laughingly.
+
+"It makes no difference what they find, for there are twenty fat fish
+roasting in the coals, and you may eat at any time."
+
+"Is there a chance of meeting with an alligator or a crocodile in this
+stream?"
+
+"Not here."
+
+"Then I'm going to have a bath," and Neal began to undress, Teddy and
+Jake quickly following his example.
+
+During half an hour they had most glorious sport swimming, and then the
+return of the hunters literally laden down with game warned them that it
+was time to prepare for the morning meal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+THE SEA.
+
+
+After breakfast the voyage was resumed.
+
+The owners of the canoe urged that the party remain in camp until the
+following day, in order as they said, that all hands might be the better
+fitted for the journey; but Cummings decided against such delay in a
+very emphatic manner.
+
+"It is of the greatest importance to these boys that we reach the coast
+at the earliest possible moment," he said, "and there is no good reason
+for halting any longer than is necessary for the purpose of cooking.
+With such a large crew each one can get all the rest he needs, and yet
+not be obliged to do a great amount of labor."
+
+Very unwillingly the Indians took their seats in the boat, and during
+the day the boys saw very much to interest them.
+
+Among the trees were monkeys in regular droves, and the more mischievous
+appeared to think it great sport to follow the craft and pelt the
+occupants with fruit.
+
+Next to these long tailed brutes, black squirrels were the most
+numerous, and had the party been on a hunting excursion it would have
+been possible to load the canoe to the water's edge with this species of
+game.
+
+Now and then a sleek jaguar showed himself. Again a drove of peccaries
+peered out from among the underbrush, and more than once Cummings was
+forced to exert all his authority to prevent the Indians from stopping
+to bag an incautious tapir which had come to the stream for water.
+
+The animals seen on this day's journey were few, however, as compared
+with the birds.
+
+There were times when it seemed as if the channel was literally blocked
+with them, and as the boat advanced they dived under the surface or flew
+with harsh, discordant cries past the travelers' heads.
+
+There were tantales with hard, crooked beaks, white heron, the
+spoon-bill with pink plumage, long necked flamingoes with flaming wings,
+cranes on their stilt-like legs, and teal and ducks in greatest variety.
+
+Only once did Cummings allow any shooting to be done, and then it was to
+bring down a jacana that the boys might see the long spur, sharp as
+steel, which nature has placed under the wing, thus rendering him a
+formidable antagonist even to the boa.
+
+For the noon-day meal there was plenty of provisions left from
+breakfast, and while the canoe was being borne along by the current at
+the rate of three or four miles per hour, the little party regaled
+themselves with meat or fruit as fancy dictated.
+
+When the sun was within an hour of sinking behind the trees the word to
+halt was given, and that they had covered a long distance since morning
+could be told from the alligators and the turtles which were so numerous
+as to often render navigation dangerous.
+
+"You will indulge in no more baths this side of Progresso," Cummings
+said, as the boys leaped ashore just as the long snout of an alligator
+appeared at the very edge of the water, its owner waiting in the hope
+that by falling overboard some of the boatmen would provide him with a
+supper. "The presence of these fellows shows that we are nearing the
+coast, and if they will give us half a chance you shall know the taste
+of fresh water turtle, which is much finer than that of their cousins
+from the sea."
+
+It would have been a very agile alligator who could have stopped Poyor
+in his search for a toothsome morsel, and in a short time two, known as
+hicoteas, were roasting in the midst of a roaring fire.
+
+"While a fellow is traveling in this manner he can't complain of the
+bill of fare," Jake said, in a tone of most perfect content, as he
+helped himself to another portion of the turtle. "With a different kind
+of food at each meal, and all of the primest quality, we ought to grow
+fat."
+
+"More especially since you are not obliged to exert yourself in the
+slightest," Teddy added with a laugh.
+
+"There's a good deal in that also, though I never refuse to do my share
+of the work."
+
+"Except when you feel very tired."
+
+"Well a man must take care of himself, and there are times when it
+becomes absolutely necessary to rest. Say, if we had some of those
+silver images here it wouldn't be a very hard job to carry them, eh?"
+
+"Now don't get back to that subject," Neal said impatiently. "If you are
+so eager to have two or three stop here with Cummings, and make one of
+the party when he tries the venture again."
+
+Jake did not appear inclined to trust his precious body in such a
+dangerous place again, and, the command to go on board the canoe having
+been given, the conversation was brought to an abrupt close.
+
+All night the little craft drifted with the current, more than once
+striking with considerable force the back of a sleeping alligator, and
+neither the boys nor Jake were called upon to stand watch.
+
+Neal offered to do his share of the work; but Cummings would not listen
+to the proposition.
+
+"With six men on board the time of duty for each one is short, and we
+have an opportunity to get more sleep than is really needed. Besides,
+you are not sufficiently acquainted with such sailing to be a very
+valuable assistant at the helm."
+
+When the boys awakened on the second morning the character of their
+surroundings had changed entirely. Instead of being on a narrow,
+swiftly-running stream, they were in a broad lagoon with innumerable
+water-ways leading in every direction, and it had become necessary to
+use the paddles.
+
+"Where are we?" Neal asked in surprise.
+
+"Within less than a day's journey from the sea," Cummings replied. "The
+stream led into this lagoon, and if these Indians know the true course,
+as they claim to do, we shall start direct for Progresso in the morning,
+in good condition for a long tramp."
+
+A short stop was made at a spot where a few trees broke the monotony of
+the scene, and here a second meal of turtle was prepared, Cummings
+saying as the boys began the repast:
+
+"Our water supply is now limited, for that by which we are surrounded
+is brackish if not absolutely salt. I intend to take the greater portion
+of what the men have on board, when we start up the coast, and every
+drop will be needed before the journey is finally ended."
+
+"When did they take it on board?" Teddy asked in surprise, as he learned
+by examination that all the gourds had been filled.
+
+"While you were asleep."
+
+"We can't carry one of these big things."
+
+"By tying a rope of vines around the necks of two I guarantee to get
+along without much trouble, for they will grow lighter every hour."
+
+"Will the journey be a hard one?"
+
+"You mean up the coast? Yes, it will, and what is bound to make it
+particularly bad is the glare of the sun as reflected from the water."
+
+"It can't be any worse than climbing the range, knowing the Indians were
+close behind," Teddy said with evident satisfaction.
+
+"You are right, my boy, and we shall have the pleasure of knowing that
+each step taken is one the less, without any fear of being obliged to
+double back in order to escape enemies."
+
+During nearly the entire day the boys strained their eyes trying to get
+a glimpse of the sea; but not until late in the afternoon was this
+possible.
+
+Then, as the canoe rounded a point, the vast expanse of water lay spread
+out before them, and was greeted with three rousing cheers.
+
+"It begins to look now as if there was some chance of our getting home,"
+Teddy cried excitedly. "We are at least where a vessel can be signaled
+in case anything should prevent us from walking and----"
+
+"Don't flatter yourself that we shall see many sailing crafts within
+hailing distance," Cummings interrupted. "At this point the water is so
+shallow that only the smallest boats venture inshore."
+
+"Never mind, we can see the ocean while tramping along, and know that
+somewhere on it is the steamer which will carry us home."
+
+When the voyage was resumed all hands worked at the paddles, for it was
+quite important, according to Cummings' belief, that they should get out
+of the lagoon before sunset, and the canoe sped on, dashing the spray in
+the air with her bow as if rejoicing that the journey was so nearly
+ended.
+
+There were yet two hours of daylight remaining when the party reached
+the mouth of the narrow channel they had been threading, and to the left
+was the coast, piled high with rocks.
+
+Only through the inlet leading to the lagoon could a landing be effected
+from a vessel, and it was at this point that the hunters had been set
+ashore by the craft on which they had come from Progresso.
+
+There was yet a small supply of provisions on the canoe, and these the
+Indians willingly shared with their passengers. The water gourds were
+divided between the two parties, and, having been paid a good price for
+their labor, by Cummings, the four men departed, not wishing to spend
+the night where fever lurked.
+
+"We don't particularly need rest," Cummings said, when the fugitives
+from the Silver City were alone again; "but it would be foolish to begin
+the last portion of our journey so late at night. We'll carry our
+belongings up the shore a bit, and then camp."
+
+The crooked necks of the water gourds afforded a good handle by which to
+carry them, and, each taking a portion of their sadly depleted outfit,
+the little party followed the leader about a hundred yards from the
+place at which they had landed, to where the huge rocks gave promise of
+a partial shelter.
+
+Now the time had come when both food and water must be husbanded with
+care, and instead of setting out the entire amount for each to
+thoroughly satisfy himself, Cummings divided so much as he thought would
+be sufficient for the meal, giving every one an equal share.
+
+"It is to be short rations for awhile," he said cheerfully. "That will
+be better than to fill ourselves up now, and suffer afterward."
+
+No one could take any exception to this very reasonable precaution, and
+the meal was eaten in the merriest possible fashion.
+
+Then there was nothing to do but wait until morning, when the march was
+to be resumed, and Neal and Teddy occupied their time speculating as to
+what the loved ones at home were doing just at that particular moment.
+
+It was not a remarkably pleasant thing to do, considering how great a
+distance separated them, and when they grew weary of thus making
+themselves mentally uncomfortable, Teddy asked:
+
+"How long do you suppose it will take us to reach Progresso?"
+
+"I hope to be there in about a week."
+
+"And you feel positive there is no chance of hailing a vessel?"
+
+"Just a chance: nothing more. The possibilities are so slight that it
+wouldn't pay to spend any time waiting for a craft to heave in sight."
+
+"What would you do if one should come along to-morrow morning?"
+
+"Try to attract the attention of those on board, of course; but there'll
+be no such good fortune as that, so the best thing we can do is to lie
+down now, for we have a hard day's work before us."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+
+A HAPPY SURPRISE.
+
+
+The monotonous roar of the surf should have lulled the boys to sleep
+very shortly after they lay down on the sand where a number of boulders
+formed a partial shelter; but instead of doing so it appeared to have
+the opposite effect.
+
+For a long while after Cummings and Jake were wrapped in slumber they
+talked of the journey which lay before them, and speculated with heavy
+hearts as to the fate of those who had left the burning yacht in their
+company.
+
+This was a topic of conversation seldom brought up since the day they
+first saw the Silver City, because their peril had been so great as to
+overshadow everything else. Now, however, when it seemed as if they were
+very near home, the fear that but one boat of the four had lived to
+reach the land came to both with painful intensity, and fully half the
+night was spent in trying to persuade themselves that it was well with
+the remainder of the Sea Dream's crew.
+
+When they did finally sink into slumber Poyor was sitting bolt upright
+with his back against a huge block of coral-like rock, looking out over
+the water, and in the morning when Neal opened his eyes the Indian was
+in the same position.
+
+"Have you seen a vessel?" the boy asked.
+
+"There is one," was the calm reply, and Neal sprang to his feet in the
+greatest excitement to see a small, schooner-rigged craft with all sail
+set moving slowly through the water on a parallel line with the coast,
+about three miles away.
+
+In another instant he had awakened the remainder of the party by
+shouting vigorously, as if believing it possible that those on board
+could hear his voice.
+
+"What's the matter?" Cummings asked: but before the question could be
+answered he also saw the craft.
+
+"It looks as if she was bound in our direction, and we had better try to
+attract attention; but you'll never do it by shouting, my boy."
+
+"What shall we do?"
+
+"Build a fire, of course," Jake replied. "They have got plenty of time
+to send a boat ashore, for it is nearly calm, and in another hour there
+won't be so much as a breath of wind."
+
+Before he had ceased speaking Neal and Teddy were running back toward
+the line of trees for wood, and in a short time a cloud of smoke was
+ascending from the shore at the very edge of the water.
+
+While the others continued to bring fuel Poyor sprinkled the flames with
+a bough wet in the sea in order to prevent them from burning too freely,
+and there was no interruption in the work until a flag was raised on the
+schooner's main-mast to signify that the signal would be answered.
+
+"We're in great luck," Cummings said, as he seated himself on one of the
+boulders, for it was no longer necessary to keep the fire burning. "No
+matter where she is bound I don't fancy we shall have much trouble in
+persuading them to put into Progresso, and the tramp up the shore which
+all have been dreading can be avoided."
+
+As a matter of course the entire party were in the best of spirits, and
+to Neal and Teddy the little craft had a particularly friendly look.
+
+The schooner had been headed for the shore when the smoke first began to
+ascend; but the wind was so light that she hardly moved through the
+water, and, after a few moments, the watchers could see that a boat was
+being lowered.
+
+"That dashes some of my hopes," Cummings said with a laugh.
+
+"What do you mean?" Neal asked.
+
+"I thought there might be just a chance that she hailed from Progresso,
+and we should have no trouble in persuading them to do as we wished."
+
+"Why do you think that isn't the case?"
+
+"Because you couldn't find a crew of natives who would willingly row so
+far; the majority would wait for a breeze a week before voluntarily
+performing so much labor."
+
+The boys watched the boat as she approached slowly, and when she neared
+the shore both they and Jake started in surprise, scrutinized her more
+intently, and then looking at each other as if in fear.
+
+"What is the matter?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied slowly:
+
+"The man who is steering resembles Mr. Walters, the sailing master of
+the Sea Dream, that is all."
+
+"It _is_ him!" Teddy cried excitedly. "I am certain of it now; but how
+did he get here in that schooner?"
+
+As a matter of course the question could not be answered by his
+companions, and all waited with the liveliest signs of impatience until
+the gentleman was within hailing distance, and then Neal shouted:
+
+"Is that really you, Mr. Walters?"
+
+"To the best of my knowledge it is," was the laughing reply. "Are you
+all well?"
+
+"In first-class condition. Where is father?"
+
+"On board the schooner. I will give the signal to let him know the crew
+of the yacht have all been saved."
+
+As he spoke he discharged a revolver, and the waving of the flag told
+that the good news was understood.
+
+"Not all, Mr. Walters, the three sailors in our boat were drowned while
+trying to land on this coast."
+
+"It is too late now to rectify the mistake. I hoped when I saw so many
+that there had been no disaster."
+
+By this time the little craft had been rowed around the point of the
+lagoon where it was possible to effect a landing without danger of being
+swamped, and the sailing master leaped ashore to welcome by hearty
+handshakes those whom he had feared were dead.
+
+Cummings and Poyor were introduced, and then Neal asked:
+
+"Where did you get the schooner?"
+
+"Chartered her to hunt for you; but Mr. Emery shall tell the story. Will
+you come aboard now?"
+
+"You are to go with us," Neal said, turning quickly toward Cummings.
+
+"I hardly know what to do. It would probably be wisest for Poyor and I
+to begin the homeward march since there is no longer any necessity of
+going to Progresso."
+
+"But you must see my father. Time is not so precious just now but that
+you can afford to spend another day in our company."
+
+"It shall be as you say," Cummings replied laughingly. "I hesitated only
+because the sooner our long tramp comes to an end the more comfortable I
+shall feel in mind."
+
+Jake and Teddy had already clambered into the boat; the others followed,
+and the little craft, loaded down nearly to the water's edge, was rowed
+out toward the schooner.
+
+It is not necessary to make any attempt at trying to describe the
+reception the castaways met with from the remainder of the yacht's crew,
+nor the manner in which Poyor and Cummings were welcomed.
+
+After the heartiest greetings had been exchanged Mr. Emery and the
+sailing master asked for an account of the landing and subsequent
+wanderings, and it is safe to say that they were treated to a wilder
+story than they had ever dreamed of hearing.
+
+Mr. Walters was at first disposed to look upon it as a "yarn;" but the
+souvenir which Jake carried on his face was evidence that could not be
+doubted, and Cummings soon convinced the skeptical sailing master that
+the Chan Santa Cruz really had an existence.
+
+"That is an adventure I would like to have," he finally said in a tone
+of enthusiasm. "I can't understand why it shouldn't be possible to hit
+upon some hiding place within half a mile of the city, and on a stormy
+night, for instance, lug away precious metal enough to make ourselves
+rich."
+
+"That and more can be done if one has patience and discretion."
+
+"Now we're where there's little doubt about gettin' home you may rap at
+me as often as you please," Jake said with a hearty laugh. "I admit
+having acted like a fool; but so long as nothing serious came of it,
+except the cut on my own cheek, it isn't a hanging matter."
+
+"I haven't a relative in this world," Mr. Walters continued, "and now
+the Sea Dream has gone down would be obliged to look around for a job,
+therefore if you'll accept me as a comrade I'll stay here instead of
+going back to the states."
+
+"Do you really mean to enter upon such a wild venture?" Mr. Emery asked
+in surprise.
+
+"Most certainly. What is to prevent?"
+
+"Nothing that I know of; but it seems little less than suicide to go
+there after the Indians have been so thoroughly aroused."
+
+"We shall not make the attempt for several months, perhaps a year,"
+Cummings added.
+
+"Where would you propose to stop? Here?"
+
+"How far do you intend to go in this schooner?"
+
+"To the nearest port where we can find a steamer bound for the United
+States."
+
+"That is Progresso, and if you have no objections Poyor and I will
+accompany you there. We need some supplies from Merida, and if Mr.
+Walters is of the same mind when we arrive I shall be more than pleased
+to have him go with us."
+
+"The vessel is at your disposal. We will land you at any point, and I
+yet have sufficient money with me to pay Walters' wages and make him a
+slight advance if he needs it."
+
+"Very little will be required if he joins Poyor and myself. The cost of
+living in this country is small, for nature provides bountifully."
+
+The captain of the schooner, a full-blooded negro, was told to head his
+craft for Progresso as soon as the wind should spring up again, and then
+Mr. Emery asked many questions concerning the city the boys had seen,
+while their answers only made the sailing master more eager to remain
+with Cummings.
+
+"This is hardly fair," Neal finally said. "All the time we have been
+telling you of our adventures, and not one word have we heard regarding
+your movements. I would like to know where the three boats we out-sailed
+went to on the night after leaving the yacht, and where this schooner
+was found?"
+
+"It is not a long story," Mr. Emery replied. "When you disappeared in
+the darkness we continued on the same course, and succeeded in keeping
+the three boats well together. At sunrise your craft was not in sight.
+We held on all that day and the next, finally arriving at Cozumel where
+we stayed three days in the hope you would appear. Then this schooner
+touched at the island, and I chartered her to search for you. We have
+been cruising up and down the coast ever since, for it seemed positive
+your boat reached the land in this immediate vicinity."
+
+"How long would you have stayed here?"
+
+"Not many days more, for we had begun to believe you were picked up by a
+vessel. Knowing Jake could handle a small craft better, perhaps than any
+other member of the crew, and also that she was the most seaworthy of
+the four tenders, it did not seem reasonable she had foundered while the
+others went through in safety."
+
+"Then we came out just in time."
+
+"Yes, for I had no idea you could be so far up this way, and we should
+have left the locality as soon as the wind would permit."
+
+Jake wanted to ask the sailing master how it happened that he had made
+such a mistake in his reckoning; but it was a delicate question, and he
+thought it best to wait until Mr. Walters had left them, when Neal's
+father could probably give the desired explanation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII.
+
+HOMEWARD BOUND.
+
+
+One can readily fancy what a feeling of perfect content had come over
+the boys after finding themselves once more with nearly all the crew of
+the Sea Dream.
+
+There was no longer anything to cause anxiety; the vengeful Indians had
+been left far behind, and the fear of an attack was among the things of
+the past.
+
+"I used to think it would be mighty nice to go into some such place as
+we have just left," Neal said to Teddy, while the two were sitting under
+the awning aft, some distance from their companions; "but now we know
+what the reality is like, I've had enough."
+
+"I suppose our story would sound pretty fair if it was put into a book;
+but whoever wrote it couldn't be all the time telling about how hungry
+and tired we were, how the mosquitoes and flies nearly ate us up, how
+thoroughly we were frightened the greater portion of the time, nor how
+disagreeable it is to be where there's precious little chance for a
+fellow to keep clean."
+
+"That is why adventures seem so nice when you read about them, for all
+the trifling things which serve to make a person uncomfortable in both
+body and mind are omitted."
+
+"Yes," Teddy said very emphatically, "one day would be enough for any
+fellow I know, and the idea of going where there is likely to be plenty
+of chance for adventure will never again have any fascination for me."
+
+In this strain the boys talked until dinner was served on deck, which
+was not a particularly well cooked meal, after which the conversation
+became general.
+
+The re-united party spoke chiefly of Mr. Walters' determination to
+remain with Cummings, and while listening to it Jake forgot all else
+save the wonderful sights he had seen in the famous city.
+
+"I have a good mind to stay with you," he finally said. "The idea that I
+have been where silver could be had for the labor of carrying it away,
+and didn't get any, makes me angry with myself. Now that Mr. Walters has
+concluded to try his hand at it I believe I'll do the same thing."
+
+Poyor looked up quickly, shook his head very decidedly, and Cummings
+said emphatically:
+
+"Then it will be necessary for you to go alone; I've been there once
+with you, and it was only by the rarest good fortune that we succeeded
+in coming away alive, therefore I'm not disposed to try the same
+dangerous experiment again."
+
+"I suppose you think I would make a fool of myself once more?"
+
+"I am positive of it. When your opinion chanced to be at variance with
+ours you would go straight on without giving the slightest heed to the
+consequences. It is best for you to stay with the boys."
+
+Jake had nothing more to say; but later in the day he told Neal and
+Teddy privately that he believed he would venture into the swamp alone.
+
+"I could do it as well as Poyor can. They want to make out that it is a
+very dangerous venture."
+
+"You thought the same on the night when that beautiful scar was
+presented, and also when you wandered away from the cave, unable to find
+your way back," Neal replied with a laugh.
+
+Then Jake had a desperate fit of the sulks from which he did not recover
+until the schooner was standing up the coast under the influence of the
+strong night breeze.
+
+The voyage to Progresso from this time on occupied but a few hours. The
+clumsy looking vessel proved to be a good sailor, and on the following
+afternoon she had dropped anchor in the harbor, twenty-four hours before
+the next steamer was advertised to leave.
+
+There was yet plenty of chance to bid good-by to those who intended to
+remain behind, and the last moments were spent together rather than
+visit the quaint town, for no one could say whether they would meet
+again.
+
+Jake made no further preparation to join the treasure seekers, and Neal
+felt positive that if they had allowed him to make one of the party his
+courage would have failed him at the last minute.
+
+Not until a late hour in the night was there any attempt to break up the
+gathering. Each felt a certain repugnance to so doing, and if Mr. Emery
+had not finally insisted on retiring all might have remained under the
+awning until morning.
+
+"It is good-by as well as good-night," Cummings said as he arose. "We do
+not care to stay here very long for fear some of the Chan Santa Cruz may
+recognize us, and by daybreak I propose to be on our way to Merida, from
+which point we shall return to the hut where we first saw the
+castaways."
+
+"We can at least count on hearing from you," Mr. Emery said. "The boys
+will be eager to learn how your venture succeeded."
+
+"It is not convenient to post a letter where a journey of fifty miles on
+foot is necessary to reach a mailing place; but you shall hear from us
+at the first favorable opportunity."
+
+With Jake, Cummings and Poyor spent but little time; neither had any
+especial love for him after all that had happened; but with the boys the
+Indian was almost affectionate.
+
+"If the gods will listen to Poyor's prayer your lives shall be free from
+clouds," he said gravely, and laying his hands on their heads he went
+through a certain ceremony as if blessing them, after which he did not
+speak again.
+
+If good wishes were of any avail both Walters and Cummings should have
+succeeded in their attempt to carry away treasure from the Silver City;
+but whether they have yet been able to do so neither Neal nor Teddy
+know, for not a word has been heard from them since that parting in the
+harbor at Progresso.
+
+The trip home was as uneventful as is usually the case when one travels
+on a steam vessel, and at about the time when the Sea Dream should have
+arrived the castaways landed in New York before the news of the yacht's
+destruction had been learned.
+
+As a consequence neither Teddy's parents nor Neal's mother had been
+anxious concerning them, and the home coming was a very tame affair, as
+compared with what both had been through.
+
+Even at this late day the boys are speculating as to whether the white
+men and the Indian ever succeeded in their desires, and both believe the
+news will soon come that Cummings has been able to read the inscriptions
+on the monuments at Copan by the aid of his researches in the Silver
+City.
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21268-8.txt or 21268-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/6/21268/
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/21268-8.zip b/21268-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4133e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-8.zip
diff --git a/21268-h.zip b/21268-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96a3599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h.zip
diff --git a/21268-h/21268-h.htm b/21268-h/21268-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc0d0eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/21268-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8840 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+    .trc {text-indent: 80px;}
+    .trr {text-align: right; text-indent: 80px;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+    .figcenter img {border: 2px solid black;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Search for the Silver City
+       A Tale of Adventure in Yucatan
+
+Author: James Otis
+
+Release Date: May 2, 2007 [EBook #21268]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+<div class="center">
+<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="379" height="600" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;">
+<img src="images/reptile.png" width="362" height="600" alt="Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, etc." title="" />
+<span class="caption">Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, etc. See page <a href="#page193">193</a>.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h1>THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.</h1>
+
+<h3 style="margin-top: 30px; margin-bottom: 60px;">A TALE OF ADVENTURE IN YUCATAN.</h3>
+
+
+<h2>By JAMES OTIS.</h2>
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 30px; margin-bottom: 60px;"><em>Author of "The Castaways," "A Runaway Brig," "The
+Treasure Finders," etc., etc.</em></p>
+
+
+<p class="center">ILLUSTRATED.</p>
+
+<div class="center" style="margin-top: 40px; margin-bottom: 40px;">
+<img src="images/tp.png" width="200" height="104" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<p class="center">NEW YORK:<br/>
+A. L. BURT, PUBLISHER.</p>
+
+<p class="center">Copyright, 1893, by A. L. BURT.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="INTRODUCTION" id="INTRODUCTION"></a>INTRODUCTION.</h2>
+
+
+<p>In Mr. E. G. Squier's preface to the translation of the Chevalier Arthur
+Morelet's "Travels in Central America" the following paragraph can be
+found:</p>
+
+<p>"Whoever glances at the map of Central America will observe a vast
+region, lying between Chiapas, Tabasco, Yucatan, and the republic of
+Guatemala, and comprising a considerable part of each of those states,
+which, if not entirely a blank, is only conjecturally filled up with
+mountains, lakes and rivers. It is almost as unknown as the interior of
+Africa itself. We only know that it is traversed by nameless ranges of
+mountains, among which the great river Usumasinta gathers its waters
+from a thousand tributaries, before pouring them, in a mighty flood,
+into the Lagoon of Terminos, and the Gulf of Mexico. We know that it has
+vast plains alternating with forests and savannas; deep valleys where
+tropical nature takes her most luxuriant forms, and high plateaus dark
+with pines, or covered with the delicate tracery of arborescent ferns.
+We know that it conceals broad and beautiful lakes, peopled with fishes
+of new varieties, and studded with islands which supports the crumbling
+yet still imposing remains of aboriginal architecture and superstition.
+And we know, also, that the remnants of the ancient Itz&aelig;s, Lacandones,
+Choles, and Manches, those indomitable Indian families who successfully
+resisted the force of the Spanish arms, still find a shelter in its
+fastnesses, where they maintain their independence, and preserve and
+practice the rites and habits of their ancestors as they existed before
+the discovery. Within its depths, far off on some unknown tributary of
+the Usumasinta, the popular tradition of Guatemala and Chiapas places
+that great aboriginal city, with its white walls shining like silver in
+the sun, which the <em>cur&eacute;</em> of Quiche affirmed to Mr. Stephens he had seen,
+with his own eyes, from the tops of the mountains of Quesaltenango."</p>
+
+<p>In Stephens' "Yucatan," Vol II, page 195, are the following lines:</p>
+
+<p>"He (meaning the padre of Quiche, with whom Mr. Stephens was
+conversing), was then young, and with much labor climbed to the naked
+summit of the Sierra, from which, at a height of ten or twelve thousand
+feet, he looked over an immense plain&mdash;and saw at a great distance a
+large city spread over a great space, and with turrets white and
+glittering in the sun. The traditionary account of the Indians of Chajul
+is, that no white man has ever reached this city, that the inhabitants
+speak the Maya language, are aware that a race of strangers has
+conquered the whole country around, and murder any white man who
+attempts to enter their territory. They have no coin or other
+circulating medium; no horses, cattle, mules, or other domestic animals
+except fowls, and the cocks they keep under ground to prevent their
+crowing being heard. One look at that city would be worth ten years of
+an every-day life. If he (the padre) is right, a place is left where
+Indians and an Indian city exist as Cortez and Alvarado found them;
+there are living men who can solve the mystery that hangs over the
+ruined cities of America; who perhaps can go to Copan and read the
+inscriptions on its monuments. No subject more exciting and attractive
+presents itself to my mind, and the deep impression will never be
+effaced."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<h2><a name="CONTENTS" id="CONTENTS"></a>CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+<table summary="table of contents">
+<tr>
+<th colspan="3" class="trr">PAGE.</th>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Sea Dream.</td>
+<td class="trr">1</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Under Weigh.</td>
+<td class="trr">8</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Nassau.</td>
+<td class="trr">19</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A New Danger.</td>
+<td class="trr">29</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Fighting the Flames.</td>
+<td class="trr">39</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Last Resort.</td>
+<td class="trr">49</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">On Shore.</td>
+<td class="trr">60</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Suspense.</td>
+<td class="trr">71</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Across the Country.</td>
+<td class="trr">81</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Strange Story.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">91</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Journey.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">101</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Silver City.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">111</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">In the City.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">122</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Festival.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">132</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Retreat.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">142</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Discovered.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">152</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Halt.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">162</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Cave Life.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">172</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Change of Base.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">182</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Desperate Struggle.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">192</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Long Halt.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">202</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Jake's Venture.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">212</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Hurried Departure.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">222</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV">CHAPTER XXIV.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Jake.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">231</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV">CHAPTER XXV.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">On the Range.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">241</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI">CHAPTER XXVI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Pursuit.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">251</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII">CHAPTER XXVII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">At Bay.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">260</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII">CHAPTER XXVIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Catastrophe.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">270</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX">CHAPTER XXIX.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Fierce Conflict.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">280</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX">CHAPTER XXX.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Welcome Change.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">290</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI">CHAPTER XXXI.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">The Sea.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">299</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII">CHAPTER XXXII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">A Happy Surprise.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">308</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIII">CHAPTER XXXIII.</a></td>
+<td class="trc">Homeward Bound.</td>
+<td style="text-align: right;">318</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="THE_SEARCH_FOR_THE_SILVER_CITY" id="THE_SEARCH_FOR_THE_SILVER_CITY"></a>THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.</h2>
+
+
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE SEA DREAM.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Three years ago last August, it is unnecessary to specify the exact
+date, Teddy Wright was not only a very lonely fellow, but considered
+himself abused by circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>During the previous season he had studied very hard at the military
+school on the Hudson which he often referred to slightingly as "the
+barracks," and as a reward for the flattering reports sent home by his
+teachers, had been promised a long vacation in the Adirondacks with a
+schoolmate who lived in the northern portion of New York state.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy's parents and sisters intended spending the summer at some one of
+the fashionable watering places; but with three long months of "roughing
+it" where game could be found in abundance, he had no desire to
+accompany them.</p>
+
+<p>"Life in the woods knocks staying at a big hotel on the sea-shore,
+where a fellow is obliged to be dressed up all the time," he said when
+one of his sisters expressed surprise at his choice. "We shall regularly
+camp out, and father has given me a doubled-barreled breech-loader, to
+say nothing of his own rod and collection of flies. Jack and I will have
+the jolliest kind of a time while you're moonin' on the hot sands trying
+to think it is fun."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy went to Jack's home, and, to his sorrow and dismay, found that
+young gentleman so ill that there was no hope of his being allowed to
+take the long-contemplated trip.</p>
+
+<p>He remained there, however, until perfectly certain of this unpleasant
+fact, and then returned home to the house which had been left in charge
+of one servant, and, as he expressed it, "just to spite himself,"
+refused to join the remainder of the family.</p>
+
+<p>Of course this was a most foolish proceeding; but Teddy was in that
+frame of mind where a boy of seventeen is prone to foolish deeds, and
+there he stayed in a frame of mind very nearly approaching the sulks,
+until he received a letter from Neal Emery, another schoolmate, whose
+father lived in Bridgeport.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Emery owned a large factory in that city, and Neal had intended to
+spend his vacation at home where he could enjoy the use of a small
+sloop-rigged yacht his mother had presented him with the year previous.</p>
+
+<p>The letter contained a very pressing invitation for Teddy to visit
+Bridgeport, since his trip to the Adirondacks had been postponed, and
+concluded with the startling announcement:</p>
+
+<p>"Father has just bought the Sea Dream, a beautiful steam yacht of an
+hundred feet in length, and I don't know how many tons. He proposes to
+cruise around three or four weeks while mother is at Bar Harbor, and is
+perfectly willing I should invite you to join us. We will have a jolly
+time, and if nothing prevents I want you to come at once. We are to
+start Wednesday morning."</p>
+
+<p>The letter had been received Monday afternoon, therefore Teddy had but
+little time for preparation.</p>
+
+<p>He first sent a long telegram to his father, repeating the substance of
+what Neal had written, and asked permission to enroll himself on the Sea
+Dream's passenger list.</p>
+
+<p>Not until late in the evening did he receive a favorable reply; but his
+traps, including the gun and fishing tackle, were packed, and on the
+first train Tuesday morning he started, all traces of ill-humor having
+vanished, for a cruise on a steam yacht promised quite as great pleasure
+as had the stay in the woods, with not so much certainty of hard work.
+Neal met him at the depot, and after going to the former's home only
+long enough to leave the baggage, the two set out to view the yacht
+which, in all the bravery of glistening paint and polished metal, lay at
+anchor in the harbor.</p>
+
+<p>Although not an expert in matters pertaining to marine architecture,
+Teddy could appreciate the beauty of the little craft while she swung
+lazily to and fro at her cable as if husbanding strength against the
+time when speed and endurance would be required.</p>
+
+<p>Neal signaled from the pier, two of the crew came ashore in the
+captain's boat, and the boys went on board where, during the remainder
+of the day, they were busy examining and admiring the jaunty little
+craft.</p>
+
+<p>Leading from the main saloon were two state-rooms on either side, and in
+one of these Neal had already stored such of his belongings as he
+intended to take on the cruise.</p>
+
+<p>"This is our room, and now that we are here I wonder why we were so
+foolish as to carry your baggage up to the house. If it was with us we
+would remain on board, for it is very much more pleasant than in the hot
+town."</p>
+
+<p>"There is nothing to prevent our bringing it down," Teddy replied with
+a laugh. "I had certainly rather stay here to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"Come on, and then we shall feel more at home when the cruise begins."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were rowed ashore, and the sailors instructed to remain at the
+pier until their return.</p>
+
+<p>Then a short visit was made to Mr. Emery's office, where Neal explained
+what they proposed to do, and having received permission to occupy the
+quarters slightly in advance of sailing time, Teddy's baggage was soon
+in the small apartment which to both the boys looked so enchanting.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish we were to be gone three years," Teddy said as he threw himself
+on a locker and gazed around.</p>
+
+<p>If he could have known just at that moment how long the cruise would
+really last it is very certain he would not have expressed such a
+desire.</p>
+
+<p>"Next year father says he will start early in the season, take mother
+with us, and not come back until it is time for me to go to school."</p>
+
+<p>"And you must get an invitation for me," Teddy replied, his eyes
+glistening with pleasure at simply contemplating such an excursion.</p>
+
+<p>"There won't be any difficulty about it. He has already promised that if
+nothing happens he will speak to your father."</p>
+
+<p>"And in the meanwhile we've got before us the jolly fact that we're to
+stay on board a month."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but there's no good reason why we should remain below where it is
+so warm. Come on deck for awhile, and then we'll have a look at the
+engine-room."</p>
+
+<p>The engineer, Jake Foster, was under the awning aft, and Neal introduced
+his friend, saying as he did so:</p>
+
+<p>"Teddy has never been yachting before, not even in a sailing craft."</p>
+
+<p>Jake, a stout, jolly looking fellow hardly more than twenty-five years
+of age, gazed at the visitor curiously a moment, and then said with a
+hearty laugh:</p>
+
+<p>"He'll have a chance to find out what an acquaintance with the ocean
+means, for I understand that Mr. Emery is going to run well over to the
+Bahamas before he comes back."</p>
+
+<p>"Father has business there which it would be necessary to attend to not
+later than next fall, so intends to make it a portion of the pleasure
+trip."</p>
+
+<p>"Are we likely to have much rough weather?" Teddy asked, realizing for
+the first time that it was more than possible he might be called upon to
+pay Neptune a tribute.</p>
+
+<p>"Not at this time of the year; but its more'n probable the Sea Dream
+will kick up her heels enough to show something of what is meant by a
+life on the ocean wave before she pokes her nose into this port again."</p>
+
+<p>Then the engineer was summoned from below, and the boys remained aft
+recalling to mind all they had studied relative to the Bahama banks.</p>
+
+<p>The stores were on board; everything was in readiness for the start as
+soon as the owner should arrive, and when the steward summoned them to
+supper it seemed as if the voyage had really begun.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h3>
+
+<h4>UNDER WEIGH.</h4>
+
+<p>It was a long while before the boys could close their eyes in slumber on
+this first night aboard the Sea Dream, owing to the novelty of the
+surroundings. It seemed as if Teddy would never cease admiring the snug
+quarters with the guns and fishing rods hung where they could be seen to
+the best advantage, and Neal had very much to say regarding the plans he
+proposed to carry into execution during the cruise.</p>
+
+<p>Despite such enchanting topics of conversation they were not able to
+remain awake all night, and when finally the journey into dreamland was
+made, neither returned to a full realization of the situation until
+quite late in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was the first to open his eyes, and in a very few seconds the
+throbbing of the screw, as well as the invigorating draught of cool air
+which came through the open port-hole, told him that the voyage had
+really begun.</p>
+
+<p>"Neal, Neal," he cried, shaking his friend vigorously. "Wake up; I think
+we are at sea."</p>
+
+<p>Neal was on his feet in an instant, and after one glance through the
+tiny window he replied with a laugh:</p>
+
+<p>"There's no question about our being under way; but we sha'n't see the
+sea to-day."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we are on it now."</p>
+
+<p>"If you have forgotten your geography as soon as this you'll be obliged
+to do some mighty hard studying when we get back to school. The Sea
+Dream must go through the sound before we reach the ocean, and most
+likely we shall make harbor at Martha's Vineyard to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course I knew about the sound; I had forgotten, that's all," and
+Teddy looked just a trifle ashamed at having displayed so much
+ignorance.</p>
+
+<p>Never had the boys made their toilets more quickly. Both were eager to
+be on deck in order to extract the greatest possible amount of pleasure
+out of this first day of the cruise, and when they finally emerged from
+the companion-way an exclamation of surprise and delight burst from
+Teddy's lips.</p>
+
+<p>The yacht was steaming at nearly full speed over waters as placid as a
+pond, and here and there were craft of all kinds darting back and forth
+like active fish.</p>
+
+<p>"I tell you there's nothing in the way of sport to beat sailing," Teddy
+said enthusiastically.</p>
+
+<p>"There are times when it isn't quite as nice as this. When it storms,
+and the yacht dances around so that it is impossible to come on deck you
+will think camping in the Adirondacks is much better."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought vessels always went into a harbor at such times."</p>
+
+<p>"If you are at sea it is necessary to take whatever comes in the way of
+weather, but there is no reason why we should speak of such things now.
+Let's have a look at Jake and his engine before breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>During this first day of the cruise the boys were very busy.
+Considerable time was spent eating three decidedly hearty meals, and
+what with inspecting every portion of the steamer and watching the
+passing vessels, they managed without much trouble to find something in
+the way of amusement until the Sea Dream arrived off Cottage City, where
+Mr. Emery proposed to stop a day or two.</p>
+
+<p>The wind had come up quite strong toward night, and when the little
+craft swung to her anchors some distance from the shore Teddy was
+feeling decidedly disagreeable.</p>
+
+<p>There was not sea enough to trouble the greenest fresh-water sailor that
+ever "caught a crab;" but to poor Teddy, who had never been on the
+water save when crossing from New York to Brooklyn or Jersey City, it
+seemed as if the Sea Dream was very like a hideous nightmare.</p>
+
+<p>She danced lightly on the long swell as if courtesying to the craft in
+her immediate vicinity, and each graceful movement caused Neal's guest
+to fancy his stomach was turning somersaults.</p>
+
+<p>"You are not going below now?" the former said as Teddy staggered toward
+the companion-way.</p>
+
+<p>"I am if it is possible to get there," was the impatient reply.</p>
+
+<p>"But we shall have a chance to see the town. Father is going ashore
+presently."</p>
+
+<p>"In one of those little boats?" and Teddy pointed to the davits where
+four polished tenders hung glistening in the sun like some articles of
+adornment.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course. How else could he get there?"</p>
+
+<p>"That doesn't make any difference to me. This boat is bouncing around
+enough for a fellow to wish he'd never heard of such a thing as a yacht,
+and in one of those egg-shells I'm certain it must be terrible."</p>
+
+<p>"But it isn't. Try not to think of being sick, and come on shore with
+me."</p>
+
+<p>"How can I help not thinking about it when I feel as if I was dying?"</p>
+
+<p>Then, as if unable to prolong the conversation, Teddy ran below, while
+his friend followed more leisurely.</p>
+
+<p>Neal could offer no inducements sufficiently strong to tempt his
+companion out of the berth, and there he remained until next morning
+when, in half a gale of wind, Mr. Emery decided to take a party of
+friends to Nantucket.</p>
+
+<p>Only this was needed to give Teddy a severe attack of seasickness during
+which, when he spoke at all, it was to repeat over and over again his
+intention of going home as soon as the Sea Dream arrived at Cottage
+City.</p>
+
+<p>Probably he would have carried this threat into execution if the
+excursion had not been prolonged; but it was four days before the yacht
+returned to Martha's Vineyard, and by that time he had, as Jake
+expressed it, "found his sea legs."</p>
+
+<p>Now no matter how much the little craft tumbled around he remained
+undisturbed, and the sight of food was no longer disagreeable, but very
+pleasing to him.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore it was that when the Sea Dream left Cottage City for the
+Bahamas, the delightful portion of the cruise, so far as Teddy was
+concerned, had but just begun.</p>
+
+<p>Inasmuch as there was no especial reason why they should arrive at any
+certain time, and the owner wished to remain at sea as long as possible
+while making the voyage, the yacht was run at half speed, thus not only
+saving considerable coal; but unnecessary wear and tear of the
+machinery.</p>
+
+<p>That it could be very warm on the water had never entered the minds of
+the boys; but as they journeyed southward the heat became intense.
+During two days it was almost a perfect calm, the only air stirring
+being that caused by the motion of the steamer, and the cabin seemed
+like an oven. There the thermometer stood at 84 degrees, while in the
+galley it was twenty degrees higher, and in the engine-room it
+frequently rose to 130 degrees.</p>
+
+<p>Neal and Teddy could do little more than lie under the awning aft,
+working hard but unsuccessfully to keep cool by the aid of fans and such
+iced drinks as the steward prepared.</p>
+
+<p>The novelty of yachting had passed away in a measure, and they were
+already counting the days which must elapse before the Sea Dream would
+be in a less torrid climate.</p>
+
+<p>Jake had assured them that when the yacht came to an anchor and the
+fires were drawn it would be much cooler on board, therefore both the
+boys were delighted when Bridge Point at the entrance to the N. E.
+Providence Channel was sighted.</p>
+
+<p>There was a light breeze blowing off the banks, and the yacht was
+running slowly as she passed within a quarter of a mile of the low lying
+land, when suddenly a most disagreeable odor from the shore caused Neal
+to say impatiently:</p>
+
+<p>"If such perfumes as that are common to the Bahamas I had rather endure
+the heat than stay a very long while, no matter how cool it may be when
+we cease steaming."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" and Teddy covered his nose with his handkerchief.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know; but I wish Jake would put her ahead faster, for it is
+absolutely sickening."</p>
+
+<p>His desire for more speed was not gratified. To the surprise of both the
+boys the engine-room gong sounded for the machinery to be stopped, and
+as the headway was checked Mr. Walters, the sailing master, came from
+the wheel-house to where Mr. Emery was sitting.</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not hear the short conversation which followed; but their
+surprise increased as the order was given to lower away one of the port
+boats.</p>
+
+<p>"What are we stopping here for?" Neal inquired of his father.</p>
+
+<p>"Doesn't the odor give you any idea?" Mr. Emery asked with a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"None except that the sooner we get away the more comfortable I shall
+feel."</p>
+
+<p>"When I tell you that we are likely to find as the cause of your
+discomfort something nearly as precious as gold, it may be a trifle more
+bearable."</p>
+
+<p>Both Neal and Teddy looked perplexed, and the latter said laughingly:</p>
+
+<p>"It is strong enough to be worth a good deal; but do you really mean
+what you say, sir?"</p>
+
+<p>"Every word. Mr. Walters thinks he can find ambergris which has been
+washed up on the rocks, and that is quoted at ten dollars per ounce. Now
+you boys have been at school long enough to know exactly why it is so
+valuable."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard of it as being the base of the finest perfumes," Neal said
+slowly; "but that must surely be a mistake if it smells anything like
+this," and he did violence to his stomach by inhaling a long breath of
+the disagreeably laden air.</p>
+
+<p>"It is true, nevertheless. Ambergris is believed to be the product of a
+sort of ulcer or cancer which has formed in the bowels of a whale. After
+a certain length of time, or because a cure has been wrought by change
+of feeding place, the mass is dislodged. It floats, and is often found
+far out to sea; but more particularly among the cays in the Turks
+islands. It is the foundation of nearly every perfume, and in ancient
+times was used for spicing wine."</p>
+
+<p>During this conversation the boat had been lowered, and, with Mr.
+Walters as steersman, was being pulled toward the land. Now Neal and
+Teddy were sorry they had not accompanied the sailing master; but it was
+too late for regrets, and the odor did not seem to be nearly as
+disagreeable since they knew from what it proceeded.</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind how much the stuff is worth," Teddy said, as he and Neal
+leaned over the rail in company with Jake, who had come on deck to
+ascertain why the yacht had been brought to a standstill, "it isn't a
+nice thing to smell of, and I shall remember this afternoon whenever I
+see perfume."</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't always the most agreeable things which are of the most
+service," Jake replied with an air of wisdom; and then as a loud shout
+was heard from the shore, the boat having reached the land some time
+since, he added, "It's ambergris for a fact, or they wouldn't be makin'
+such a fuss."</p>
+
+<p>Five minutes later the little craft was seen approaching the yacht, and
+each instant the odor became stronger until both the boys were forced to
+cover their organs of smell.</p>
+
+<p>In the bow of the boat was a black mass looking not unlike coke, and
+weighing, as was afterward ascertained, forty ounces.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought I couldn't be mistaken, although I never run across anything
+of the kind but once before," Mr. Walters said triumphantly, as he
+handed the precious substance up to one of the sailors, who took it very
+unwillingly.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall be driven out of the yacht if you try to carry it home," Mr.
+Emery replied, moving aft as far as possible.</p>
+
+<p>"It won't trouble us many hours. We will sell or ship it at Nassau, and
+I reckon all hands can manage to live until we arrive there."</p>
+
+<p>The valuable substance was wrapped carefully in several thicknesses of
+canvas, and placed in the hold where it is not probable any odor from it
+could have been perceptible on deck, although both the boys were quite
+positive the yacht was thoroughly permeated.</p>
+
+<p>After this short delay the Sea Dream continued on her course at a higher
+rate of speed, for now that she was so near land the heat seemed
+unbearable, and when night came Neal and Teddy stretched themselves out
+in the hammocks which had been slung under the after awning, wishing,
+not for a glimpse of Nassau; but that they were off the New England
+coast instead of being so near the tropics.</p>
+
+<p>Then, despite the profuse perspiration, both fell asleep, not to waken
+until the rattling of the cable through the hawse-holes told that they
+were in the harbor.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h3>
+
+<h4>NASSAU.</h4>
+
+
+<p>A semi-tropical port in midsummer is by no means a pleasant place
+however diversified and picturesque the scenery may be, and when the
+boys awakened from their restless slumber the lassitude which beset them
+told how great an effect the climate could exert.</p>
+
+<p>Even Mr. Emery was disinclined to any severe exertion; but his business
+must be transacted, and, after a breakfast eaten on deck, he ordered the
+boat to be made ready.</p>
+
+<p>"If possible I shall leave to-night," Neal and Teddy heard him say to
+the sailing master, "therefore it will be well to get your ambergris on
+shore before noon."</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the boys cared to see the town at the expense of walking
+around under the blazing sun, and when Mr. Emery was being rowed toward
+the dock-yard they joined Jake who, in the coolest spot under the
+awning, was watching the fishermen near by.</p>
+
+<p>The water was clear as crystal, and of a bright greenish tinge which
+admitted of their seeing very distinctly the tiny fish of silver and
+golden hues as they darted to and fro; the violet and blue medus&aelig;, and
+the cream-colored jelly-fish as big as a watermelon. There were angel
+fish of a bright blue tinge; yellow snappers; black and white sergeant
+majors; pilot fish; puff fish which could inflate their bodies until
+they were round as a ball, or flatten themselves to the shape of a
+griddle cake.</p>
+
+<p>The cow fish attracted the boys' attention more particularly, for it had
+two horns, and its head was shaped exactly like a cow, and when one
+passed with a "calf" as Teddy called it, swimming by her side, both
+agreed that it was well worth suffering so much from the heat to see
+such a sight.</p>
+
+<p>Fish of all colors and sizes swam around the yacht as if examining her
+hull, and the effect of such brilliant hues displayed through the
+crystal-like water was actually startling because of the gorgeousness.</p>
+
+<p>Before they were weary of admiring this aquatic panorama Jake called
+their attention to a fisherman who, in a small canoe, was pursuing his
+vocation in a very odd manner.</p>
+
+<p>In his boat he had a hideous looking sucking fish, around the tail of
+which was tied a long cord with a wooden float at one end. While the
+boys were watching him he dropped the monster overboard, and in an
+instant it darted at a medium-sized Jew fish, attaching itself to the
+latter by means of the sucking valve on the top of its head. Having done
+this he remained motionless, his victim seeming to be literally
+paralyzed, and there was nothing for the boatman to do but pull in on
+the float, disengage his animated fishhook by a dextrous pressure on the
+sucker after both had been drawn aboard, and send the repulsive looking
+servant out again.</p>
+
+<p>Although the Jew fish must have weighed at least a hundred pounds, he
+was landed without difficulty, and Jake gravely assured his companions
+that a sucking fish could "pull up the whole bottom of the ocean
+providin' the rope on his tail was strong enough to stand the strain."</p>
+
+<p>Then the engineer told a story which did not bear quite so hard on the
+imagination since it was absolutely true, and began by saying as he
+pointed toward the little fortification known as Montague fort:</p>
+
+<p>"That place has been the headquarters of at least a dozen pirates, the
+worst of which was called Black Beard, a bloodthirsty villain who sunk
+two vessels right where we are anchored this blessed minute. The
+feller's real name was John Teach, an' that big banyan tree over there
+is where he used to hold what he allowed was court martials.</p>
+
+<p>"He was drunk about three-quarters of the time, an' allers had a great
+spree when there were any prisoners on hand. He an' his men would get
+the poor wretches to the tree, go through all the ceremony of a reg'lar
+trial, an' allers end by stringin' every blessed one of 'em up in such a
+way as to prevent 'em from dyin' quick, when a fire'd be built
+underneath, so's to roast the whole lot.</p>
+
+<p>"They do say he buried all the treasure among the roots of the banyan,
+an' many's the one who has dug for it; but so far as I ever heard, not a
+single piece has been found. While he lived this wasn't a very pleasant
+harbor for them as cared about a livin' to make."</p>
+
+<p>"What became of him finally?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"An English man-of-war got hold of him after awhile, an' he was strung
+on the yardarm to dry. If I'd been in command of the vessel he should
+have found out how it felt to be roasted. Say, don't you boys want to go
+over to Potter's cay?"</p>
+
+<p>"What is to be seen there?"</p>
+
+<p>"The sponge yards, an' it's a great sight if you never visited one."</p>
+
+<p>"It is too hot," Neal replied with a very decided shake of the head.</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not urge the matter, for just at that moment the second port
+boat was lowered, and Mr. Walters made ready to go ashore with his
+precious bundle of aromatic ambergris.</p>
+
+<p>Idly the boys watched the perspiring party, pressing handkerchiefs to
+their faces meanwhile, since, despite the wrappings of canvas, the
+valuable mass gave most decided proof of its being in the vicinity, and
+when the boat started for the shore Neal and Teddy clambered into the
+hammocks, for even leaning over the rail was an exertion in the sultry
+atmosphere.</p>
+
+<p>During the middle of the day both the boys slept, for a siesta is as
+necessary as food in hot climates, and when the light breeze of evening
+crept over the waters Mr. Emery came aboard with the welcome
+intelligence that his business had been concluded.</p>
+
+<p>"We will get under way again before midnight," he said as he stepped
+over the rail, and was received by Mr. Walters. "Now that a breeze has
+set in it should be cool enough to permit of the men's working without
+fear of prostration."</p>
+
+<p>"It would use me up to walk fore and aft twice," Neal said in an
+undertone to Teddy; "but it isn't for us to complain of the heat if we
+can get out of this furnace."</p>
+
+<p>Jake was nowhere to be seen. It was as if after his invitation to go on
+shore had been declined he betook himself to some other portion of the
+yacht, where he could perspire without allowing the others to see his
+suffering, and the boys swung to and fro until the hour came when the
+singing of steam told that preparations for departure were being made.</p>
+
+<p>There could be no doubt but that Nassau would be a pleasant place in
+which to spend the winter months; but it was by no means desirable
+during the summer, and when the Sea Dream left the little harbor where
+the water was hardly more than sufficient to float her, both Neal and
+Teddy gave vent to a sigh of relief.</p>
+
+<p>"We are to run south until it is possible to give the banks a clear
+berth, and then stand straight up the coast for home," the former said
+as the yacht glided almost noiselessly over the phosphorescent lighted
+waters down the eastern side of the shoals. "If a good head of steam is
+kept on we should be in a colder latitude very soon."</p>
+
+<p>"We can't get there any too soon to please me," Teddy replied, as he
+waved the palm-leaf fan languidly. "I believe it would be a positive
+comfort to have my nose frost-bitten."</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't possible you will have such comfort as that for some time to
+come; but we may be able to make your teeth chatter in a few days," Neal
+replied laughingly, and then as the breeze caused by the movement of
+the yacht over the water fanned his face, he added sleepily, "Good
+night; I don't believe I shall open my eyes until after sunrise
+to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>As a matter of fact this prediction was not verified; before evening a
+wind had come out of the sea which caused the yacht to bow before it
+like a reed in a storm, and the hammocks that, a few hours previous, had
+seemed so rest-inviting, were swinging at a rate that threatened to
+throw their occupants to the deck.</p>
+
+<p>"I fancy it is time we went below," Neal said, as he awakened his friend
+by a series of vigorous shakes. "If we stay here half an hour longer it
+will be doubtful whether we're on board or in the water."</p>
+
+<p>The Sea Dream's lee rail was already so near the surface that the green
+waves curled over it now and then, and before the boys could reach the
+cabin they were thoroughly drenched.</p>
+
+<p>It was the greatest possible relief to crawl into the bunk and pull up
+the bed-clothes to defend themselves against the cold wind which came
+through the port-hole, and so delicious was this sense of being chilly
+that they failed to realize the cause of the sudden change in the
+weather, until they heard the sailing master in the cabin reply to Mr.
+Emery's question:</p>
+
+<p>"You are getting your first taste of what is known as a norther; but
+there isn't the slightest danger if we can crawl away from the land, and
+we shall have no trouble in doing that so long as there is a full head
+of steam on."</p>
+
+<p>"What does he mean by a norther?" Teddy asked of Neal, who had shown, by
+rising on his elbow, that he was awake.</p>
+
+<p>"A wind coming from the north, more frequently met in the Gulf of
+Mexico, when the temperature falls very suddenly, as was the case this
+evening, and a furious gale is often the result."</p>
+
+<p>"So long as it holds cold I don't see that we have any cause to
+complain," was the sleepy rejoinder; but before the night came to a
+close he had good reason for changing his mind on the subject.</p>
+
+<p>It was about midnight, as near as the boys could judge without looking
+at a watch, when the yacht was flung on her beam ends with a sudden
+force which threw both out of the berth, and before the port-hole could
+be fastened, flooded the state-room with water.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy might well be excused for the shrill cry of alarm which escaped
+from his lips, for at that moment even an experienced sailor would have
+fancied the little craft had struck upon a reef, more particularly
+since it was known they were in a dangerous locality.</p>
+
+<p>"We are sinking!" he cried frantically as he tried in vain to open the
+door, and Neal was of the same opinion.</p>
+
+<p>After what seemed to be a very long while although in reality it could
+have been but a few seconds, the Sea Dream slowly righted, and then it
+was possible for the boys to gain the cabin.</p>
+
+<p>Here they were met by Mr. Emery, who had just succeeded in leaving his
+own room, and before any conversation could be indulged in the steamer
+began pitching and rolling about in a manner that showed she was not on
+the reef even if the first shock had been the result of striking one.</p>
+
+<p>It was only by holding with all their strength to the immovable articles
+of furniture that they avoided being flung from one end of the cabin to
+the other, as the yacht plunged and tossed, throwing violently to and
+fro everything which had not been securely fastened.</p>
+
+<p>The cabin lamp was burning dimly, and the faint light only served to
+reveal more clearly the general confusion.</p>
+
+<p>Once amid the tumult the boys heard Mr. Emery shout:</p>
+
+<p>"Don't be frightened; if there was any immediate danger Mr. Walters
+would warn us."</p>
+
+<p>"He may not be able to come where we are," Teddy thought; but he
+refrained from giving words to such a dismal foreboding, and in silent
+fear waited for&mdash;he knew not what.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h3>
+
+<h4>A NEW DANGER.</h4>
+
+
+<p>To the frightened boys in the cabin it was as if the night would never
+come to an end, and during every one of those fearful moments they
+believed the yacht was on the point of taking the final plunge.</p>
+
+<p>At four o'clock in the morning the steamer's movements became more
+regular; but not less in violence, and, shortly after, the sailing
+master came below.</p>
+
+<p>"We are laying-to," he said to Mr. Emery. "There is a nasty sea on, and
+I didn't care to take the chances of fighting against it."</p>
+
+<p>"How does she stand it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Like a darling. I was afraid of straining her at first; but when she
+took the butt end of the storm in such a pleasant fashion there was no
+longer any reason to fret about her."</p>
+
+<p>"It didn't seem like such a very pleasant fashion to us," Teddy said to
+Neal, who had succeeded in gaining a chair near his friend.</p>
+
+<p>"It appeared to me as if she kicked pretty hard about it," Neal
+replied, and then Mr. Emery asked:</p>
+
+<p>"What are the weather indications?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is no reason to hope for anything better until the wind blows
+itself out, and according to my way of thinking that won't be within the
+next twenty-four hours. Why don't you people lie down?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because it has been a matter of impossibility to remain in the berths."</p>
+
+<p>"You can do so now without much difficulty. Come, boys, let me help you
+to turn in."</p>
+
+<p>The calm, matter-of-fact way in which Mr. Walters acted caused the boys
+to feel more comfortable in mind, and they made no protest when he
+assisted them to the state-room where there was yet water enough to show
+what had happened.</p>
+
+<p>"Why didn't you call one of the stewards to mop this up?" the sailing
+master asked as he lighted the swinging lamp.</p>
+
+<p>"We haven't seen one since the gale begun," Neal replied with a laugh.
+"I fancy they were as much frightened as Teddy and I."</p>
+
+<p>"It won't take long to turn them out," and Mr. Walters started forward
+in a manner which boded no good for the skulkers.</p>
+
+<p>Neal and Teddy found little difficulty in retaining a recumbent
+position, although the yacht was tossing up and down like a mad thing.
+She no longer gave those sudden lurches which threatened to carry away
+even the short spars, and for the first time since the deluge from the
+port-hole, they began to feel really comfortable in mind.</p>
+
+<p>The steward came in very shortly after Mr. Walters left, and from the
+expression on his face it was evident he had been rated severely for
+neglect of duty.</p>
+
+<p>"It didn't make any difference to us whether the water was washed up or
+not," Neal said in a friendly tone. "The sailing master saw it and asked
+why we hadn't called you."</p>
+
+<p>"He don't allow that a man has any right to sleep," the steward replied
+sulkily. "If he'd been up since five o'clock, he'd want to turn in
+before midnight instead of foolin' around the cabin till it was time to
+begin another day's work."</p>
+
+<p>"Is it possible that you have been sleeping?" Neal asked in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see how you could even lie down while the yacht was tumbling
+about in such a furious manner."</p>
+
+<p>"That was none of my business. I didn't ship before the mast,
+consequently it ain't any duty of mine to go prowlin' 'round if the
+wind happened to blow a little."</p>
+
+<p>"If you call this a 'little' I wouldn't like to be on board when you
+thought it was a regular gale," Teddy said with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"I've seen the wind blow so hard that a fellow had to lash his hair down
+to keep it from bein' carried away when he went on deck; but that didn't
+stop my wantin' to get a watch below."</p>
+
+<p>With this remark the steward, having finished his work, left the room,
+and the boys were alone once more.</p>
+
+<p>Although they had believed it would be impossible to sleep during a gale
+such as the yacht was now laboring under, the eyes of both were soon
+closed in slumber, not to be opened until late in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>So far as could be told by the motion, there was no diminution in the
+strength of the wind, and they experienced great difficulty in making
+their toilets.</p>
+
+<p>When this task had finally been accomplished, however, Neal said as he
+opened the door after some trouble, owing to the erratic movements of
+the yacht:</p>
+
+<p>"I'm going on deck. It can't be much worse there, and it wouldn't be a
+bad idea to see what the ocean looks like in a gale."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll go too: but don't let's venture out of the companion-way, for the
+waves must be making a clean sweep over the decks."</p>
+
+<p>When the boys entered the cabin no one was to be seen save the surly
+steward who visited them the night previous, and in reply to Neal's
+question he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Your father left word that he wasn't to be called. It wouldn't be much
+use for him to turn out, because we can't set the table in such a
+rumpus."</p>
+
+<p>"What are we to do for breakfast?"</p>
+
+<p>"The same as Mr. Walters did, get a cup of coffee and a hard-tack;
+that'll go way ahead of nothin' if you're very hungry."</p>
+
+<p>"We can go into the galley when we want a bite," Neal replied, and then
+he led the way up the narrow stairs where, through the half-opened
+hatch, it was possible to get a view of the raging waters.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps it would have been better, so far as their peace of mind was
+concerned, not to have ventured out, for the scene was anything rather
+than reassuring.</p>
+
+<p>Standing there and looking forward the boys could see a huge wall of
+water dead ahead bearing down upon the yacht as if to swamp her, and at
+the moment when it appeared as if the final stroke had come she would
+lurch to leeward, presenting her side to the wave, rising on the
+succeeding one and shivering on its crest as if shaking the spray from
+her shrouds, after which came the downward plunge that caused the boys
+to hold their breath in fear.</p>
+
+<p>The sky, the swiftly flying clouds, and the waves were of a grayish hue
+looking ominous and threatening and the little craft appeared to be but
+a plaything for the angry elements. That she could out-ride the gale
+seemed almost impossible, and Teddy said with a shudder as he descended
+the stairs:</p>
+
+<p>"Don't let's stay where we can see it. I wish I hadn't looked, for, bad
+as matters seem to be down here, it is as nothing compared to being on
+deck."</p>
+
+<p>Neal was of the same opinion, and the two passed through the cabin to
+the engine-room where Jake was keeping vigilant watch over the
+machinery.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, I thought we were hove to," Neal exclaimed in surprise as the
+engineer assisted him and Teddy to a seat by his side.</p>
+
+<p>"So we are; but it is necessary to keep the screw turning, otherwise it
+might not be possible to hold her in the proper position."</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been on duty?"</p>
+
+<p>"Since I saw you last."</p>
+
+<p>"Haven't you had any sleep?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can bottle up enough when the gale abates; but just now it stands a
+man in hand to have his weather eye open pretty wide, for a bit of
+carelessness would work considerable mischief. I'm going to have
+breakfast, an' if you boys care to join me we'll make it three-handed.
+You're not likely to fare any better in the cabin than here to-day."</p>
+
+<p>The boys accepted the invitation, and with some cold meat and hard-tack
+placed on the locker where it could not slide off, and mugs of steaming
+coffee in their hands, all made a remarkably jolly meal under the
+unfavorable circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>During the remainder of the day Neal and Teddy stayed below, not caring
+for another view of the angry sea, and when night came the gale had so
+far abated that the yacht was sent ahead once more; but owing to the
+force and direction of the wind it was deemed best to continue on a
+southerly course even at the expense of reaching the Caribbean Sea,
+rather than take the chances of putting about.</p>
+
+<p>All this Jake explained when the boys visited him just previous to
+retiring, and he added in conclusion:</p>
+
+<p>"It seems pretty tough to go yet further south; but Mr. Walters is a
+cautious sailin' master, an' when he makes up his mind to a thing you
+can count on its bein' mighty nigh right."</p>
+
+<p>"Will it be possible to get home as soon as father intended if we go so
+far out of the way?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"If he don't do any cruisin' after he gets up north I reckon it could be
+done; but there's no sense in figgerin' on that till we're off
+Hatteras."</p>
+
+<p>Now that the yacht had proved her seaworthiness by riding safely through
+the storm the boys would have been willing to go almost anywhere in her,
+and the idea that they might have no cruising in a more agreeable
+climate caused a decided feeling of disappointment; but, as Jake had
+said, there was no reason to worry about that while they were so far
+from home, and as if by common consent the subject was not broached
+again.</p>
+
+<p>On the following morning when they went on deck the sun was shining down
+upon the yet angry looking waves; but one of the sailors assured them
+that "the gale had blowed itself out."</p>
+
+<p>"It stands to reason there'd be a heavy sea runnin'; but its settlin'
+down fast, an' by to-morrow there won't be swell enough for comfort."</p>
+
+<p>In this he was correct. Twenty-four hours later the awnings were up, and
+all hands were panting under the blazing heat of a tropical sun.</p>
+
+<p>This sudden change prostrated the boys, and during the next two days
+they fanned themselves, drank iced drinks, and sought in vain for some
+spot where a breath of cool air could be found.</p>
+
+<p>It was the fourth day after the norther. While waiting for dinner to be
+brought on deck (the meals had been served under the awnings since the
+storm, for the cabin was too hot to permit even of their eating there),
+Teddy lay near the after starboard boat lazily wondering why that thin
+curl of blue smoke should come from the planking directly over the
+kitchen, instead of through the pipe as it always had before.</p>
+
+<p>Owing to the fact that there was no unusual disturbance he never fancied
+for a moment anything could be wrong, and remained gazing at it in
+silence so long that Neal asked curiously:</p>
+
+<p>"What do you see that is so very interesting?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was wondering what had happened to the galley pipe."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know that it isn't all right?"</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose it is; but it looks queer to see that smoke coming up as if
+from the deck."</p>
+
+<p>Neal looked in the direction indicated by Teddy's outstretched finger,
+and seeing the blue curl, which had now grown considerably thicker,
+sprang to his feet very quickly.</p>
+
+<p>Without speaking to his friend he ran forward, Teddy still ignorant
+there was any danger, and in the shortest possible space of time Mr.
+Walters came from the wheel-house in response to Neal's emphatic
+request.</p>
+
+<p>To Teddy it seemed as if but an instant elapsed before the deck was a
+scene of confusion, and as all hands were called for duty he heard one
+of the sailors cry in a tone of alarm:</p>
+
+<p>"Tumble up, boys, the yacht is on fire!"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h3>
+
+<h4>FIGHTING THE FLAMES.</h4>
+
+
+<p>It was some moments after the fire was discovered before anything could
+be done toward checking the flames, for the very good reason that the
+exact location remained a mystery until a visit had been paid to the
+hold.</p>
+
+<p>The cook said the galley felt unusually warm; but he paid no particular
+attention to the fact, thinking the weather had grown hotter, and, save
+for the smoke, there were no signs of fire to be seen anywhere until Mr.
+Walters called upon one of the men to raise the hatch which led into the
+eyes of the yacht directly beneath the kitchen.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly this was done a broad sheet of flame burst forth, and had the
+stout covering not been replaced immediately, the little craft would
+have soon been consumed.</p>
+
+<p>Working with all speed, for even the seconds were precious now, the
+hatch was battened down, and a hole large enough to admit of the nozzle
+of the hose, bored just abaft the hatch-way.</p>
+
+<p>While this was being done a portion of the crew had been getting into
+working order the hose used for washing down the decks, and when all was
+ready the real task of extinguishing the flames began.</p>
+
+<p>A steady stream of water was forced into the hold as rapidly as the men
+could work the pumps, and the lower deck examined carefully for the
+slightest aperture which might admit air.</p>
+
+<p>How the fire had started no one knew, nor was any time spent in trying
+to ascertain, for every person had been detailed to some duty.</p>
+
+<p>Neal and Teddy were given the lightest task, which was simply to watch
+the hose at the place where it entered the deck, to make sure the water
+flowed through freely, and the nozzle did not slip out.</p>
+
+<p>Ten minutes after the alarm had been raised all hands were working
+methodically, thanks to the discipline maintained by Mr. Walters, and it
+became a question simply of whether the flames could be stifled or
+drowned.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they can save the yacht?" Teddy asked after a short time
+of silence, and Neal, who had not seen the broad sheet of flame which
+leaped from the hatch-way replied confidently:</p>
+
+<p>"Of course. If the hold is filled with water she surely can't burn."</p>
+
+<p>"Are there boats enough to carry us all in case the fire does get the
+best of us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly; but it won't come to anything quite as bad as that."</p>
+
+<p>Before Teddy could ask another question one of the stewards shouted down
+the forward companion-way:</p>
+
+<p>"Mr. Emery says that his son is to come on deck. There is no need of two
+there."</p>
+
+<p>Neal obeyed the summons thinking he was to assist at the pumps; but in
+this he was speedily undeceived.</p>
+
+<p>"Take such things as you are likely to need most from your state-room,
+and stow them in one of the boats aft," his father said when he reported
+for further duty. "Although I don't think we shall be obliged to abandon
+the yacht, it is well to be prepared for any emergency."</p>
+
+<p>This was no time to ask questions, and Neal obeyed at once, observing as
+he entered the cabin that the stewards were collecting food and such
+other things as might be needed in case they were forced to depend upon
+the frail crafts.</p>
+
+<p>This work rather than the evidences of fire in the hold, frightened
+Neal. Until this moment he had not believed there was any possibility
+the steamer could be destroyed while there were so many to assist in
+saving her; but now there was no question as to the fact of their being
+in great danger.</p>
+
+<p>"Unless father and Mr. Walters were convinced that the fire had got
+considerable headway, the boats would not be provisioned so soon," he
+said to himself.</p>
+
+<p>His portion of the work could be performed quickly. He and Teddy had
+brought all their belongings, with the exception of the fowling pieces
+and the fishing rods, aboard in two satchels, and these he packed with
+the utmost expedition. Then, with both weapons, he went on deck, stowed
+all the goods in the after port boat, and returned to his father's
+state-room to see if anything could be done there.</p>
+
+<p>From the disorder it was apparent that the stewards had been in this
+apartment before him; but a fine rifle yet hung on the bulk-head, and in
+the open locker was quite a large amount of ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no reason why these cartridges shouldn't be taken if we are
+obliged to leave the yacht," he said to himself as he gathered them into
+convenient shape for carrying. "In case we land on a desolate island
+they would be mighty useful."</p>
+
+<p>When he went on deck with his second burden the stewards were putting
+small kegs of water into each boat, and after stowing the ammunition by
+the side of the first articles brought, he looked over the little craft
+to ascertain what his father had thought best to save.</p>
+
+<p>He could find nothing there; but on searching the starboard gig he
+discovered a small quantity of wearing apparel.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if that is the craft he intends to go in, or have the clothes
+simply been thrown anywhere."</p>
+
+<p>At that moment Mr. Emery came out of the pilot-house followed by Mr.
+Walters, and Neal ran forward to ask which boat his father intended to
+use in case the abandonment became necessary.</p>
+
+<p>"It makes no particular difference," Mr. Emery replied in answer to
+Neal's question. "We can easily arrange the details later. Go into the
+engine-room and tell Jake to drive her at full speed, and to report if
+the water we are pumping in is likely to rise as high as the furnaces."</p>
+
+<p>Promising himself that he would re-stow the goods on the gig, putting
+his father's with those belonging to himself and Teddy, as soon as this
+message had been delivered, he descended the companion-way after
+glancing rapidly around the horizon.</p>
+
+<p>There was no land to be seen on either hand, and he understood at once
+why the order to keep the yacht going at full speed had been given.</p>
+
+<p>The small boats were by no means stanch enough to be depended on for a
+long cruise unless the present dead calm should continue until they
+could reach land, and every effort was to be made to gain some of the
+islands in the vicinity.</p>
+
+<p>When Neal entered the engine-room he believed for an instant that Jake
+had not heard of the terrible danger which threatened. Work there was
+going on as usual, except, perhaps, that the engineer and his assistants
+were watching the machinery a trifle more carefully than seemed really
+necessary; but when he repeated the message Jake's face grew just a
+shade paler.</p>
+
+<p>"Say to your father that we have got on every pound of steam that can be
+raised, and it will be necessary to slow down presently because the
+bearings are growing warm. The water is already above the fire-room
+floors, and if the pump is worked an hour longer the fires will be
+drowned."</p>
+
+<p>"But you must keep her going, Jake. It would be terrible to take to the
+boats when there was no land in sight."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm bound to do my best; but a man can go only so far. Do you know
+where we are?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"What is being done on deck?"</p>
+
+<p>"The sailors are pumping, and the stewards are provisioning the boats."</p>
+
+<p>"Getting ready to abandon the little craft, are they?"</p>
+
+<p>"Father said that was being done in order that we might be prepared for
+any emergency."</p>
+
+<p>"And he's got a pretty clear idea that the flames can't be kept under,
+or else there wouldn't be a thought of such a thing. How's the weather?"</p>
+
+<p>"A dead calm, as it was this morning."</p>
+
+<p>Jake remained silent a few moments as if revolving some plan in his
+mind, and then he said abruptly:</p>
+
+<p>"Neal, if we do have to put off you and Teddy must try to go in the same
+boat with me."</p>
+
+<p>"Unless father makes different arrangements."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, of course; but if nothin' is said we'll stick together. Go
+back an' say that the Sea Dream shall do her best until the water gets
+above the fire-boxes, an' then my part of the work has been done."</p>
+
+<p>Neal left the engine-room feeling that there was very little chance of
+reaching any port in the yacht, and since there was no reason why he
+should hurry on deck, he went around by the way of the galley where
+Teddy was stationed.</p>
+
+<p>"How are things going on here?" he asked, forcing himself to speak in a
+cheerful tone. "Can you get any idea of the fire?"</p>
+
+<p>"Put your hand on the deck," Teddy replied gravely, his face of a livid
+white although big drops of perspiration were streaming down his cheeks.</p>
+
+<p>Neal obeyed, and immediately drew his hand back with a cry of mingled
+pain and fear.</p>
+
+<p>The planks were already so hot that it seemed as if the flesh must be
+burned.</p>
+
+<p>"Has father been here within a few moments?"</p>
+
+<p>"He has just left."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he say anything?"</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing except that I was to come on deck when it was so hot I couldn't
+stand it any longer. Neal," and now Teddy spoke very earnestly, "you
+laughed when I referred to the possibility that the yacht might be
+destroyed; but I know your father thinks she cannot be saved."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe now that he does; but I didn't when I left you. Everything is
+ready for us to abandon her when nothing more can be done."</p>
+
+<p>"Are we to go in the small boats?" asked Teddy, excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the only chance we've got; but don't look so frightened," he
+added, as Teddy's face grew yet paler. "It is calm, there's absolutely
+no sea at all running, and we shall be as safe as on board the yacht."</p>
+
+<p>"It will be horrible," Teddy whispered as if to himself, and Neal added:</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell father what Jake said, and then come straight back to stay
+with you."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't be away long. It seems as if I had been deserted, when there is
+no one here."</p>
+
+<p>Neal could not trust himself to speak. Ascending the companion-way
+rapidly he approached his father who was conversing with Mr. Walters
+near the bow, as if that position had been chosen to prevent the crew
+from hearing what was said.</p>
+
+<p>After repeating the engineer's message he asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Can I go back where Teddy is? I think it frightens him to stay there
+alone."</p>
+
+<p>"I can't say that I wonder very much; it is a very trying situation for
+a boy, especially one who has never been to sea before. Ask Jake if he
+will send a man to relieve him and then you may both come on deck."</p>
+
+<p>To deliver this message and return after one of the firemen took Teddy's
+place at the nozzle, did not occupy five minutes, and the frightened boy
+gave vent to a long sigh of relief when he was in the open air once
+more.</p>
+
+<p>Except for the heat the weather was perfect. The Sea Dream, showing no
+sign of the monster which was gnawing at her vitals, save by the clouds
+of smoke that ascended from the bow, dashed on like the thing of beauty
+she was; but when her flight should be checked there would remain
+nothing but the tiny boats to bear those on board to a place of safety.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE LAST RESORT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Mr. Emery and the sailing master had decided that the yacht should be
+kept at full speed, headed for the nearest land, until the water which
+was being pumped into the hold drowned the fires in the furnaces, when
+recourse must necessarily be had to the boats.</p>
+
+<p>There could no longer be any question but that the entire forward
+portion of the hold was a mass of flames which it would not be possible
+to hold in check very much longer.</p>
+
+<p>By this time all on board understood that the yacht was to be abandoned,
+and, with the exception of those in the engine-room and at the pumps,
+every one gazed as if fascinated at the clouds of smoke arising from
+near the bow. Already were tiny curls coming from between the deck
+planks, and Teddy heard Mr. Walters say in a low tone to Neal's father:</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid the flames will burst through before the furnaces are
+flooded. It is too late to cut another hole in the deck, and by an hour
+at the latest we must take to the boats."</p>
+
+<p>"Have the crew been told off?"</p>
+
+<p>"I will attend to that now."</p>
+
+<p>Then the sailing master announced to each man the boat to which he was
+assigned, and during the next hour hardly a word was spoken. Teddy and
+Neal conversed now and then in whispers, as if not daring to make a
+noise, and the sailors worked in grim silence.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing save the clank of the pumps and the throbbing of the screw could
+be heard.</p>
+
+<p>When the hour had passed it was no longer possible to force water into
+the hold. The heat was so great that the hose burned as fast as it could
+be pushed through the aperture, and long tongues of flame were appearing
+around the edges of the hatch.</p>
+
+<p>All hands, including the boys, were formed in line, and water sent below
+in buckets for twenty minutes more, when the word was given to slacken
+speed.</p>
+
+<p>The lower deck had burst through, and there was no more than time for
+Jake and his assistants to clamber up the ladders before the flames had
+complete possession of the yacht from the bow to the engine-room
+companion-way.</p>
+
+<p>There was no time to be lost in lowering the boats, and the men were
+forced to leap in regardless of the previous assignment, for once the
+fire burst the bonds which had confined it so long it swept aft with
+almost incredible rapidity.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy and Neal, bewildered by the flames which actually burned their
+flesh as they stood by the rail while the sailors let go the falls, had
+only thought of reaching the craft in which their property was stowed,
+and Jake followed; but as the little tenders were allowed to drop astern
+beyond reach of the intense heat the boys discovered that Mr. Emery was
+not with them.</p>
+
+<p>He had charge of one boat; Mr. Walters commanded another; Jake was held
+responsible for the safety of the third, and the last was handled by the
+mate.</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we come with you, father?" Teddy shouted.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think it will be advisable to make any change now, and you are
+as safe in one boat as another."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll answer for them," Jake cried cheerily, and the sailing master
+added:</p>
+
+<p>"Jake can handle a small boat better than any one here, therefore you
+need not fear an accident will result through carelessness."</p>
+
+<p>"How am I to steer?" the engineer asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Due west. The boats must remain together, and in each one is a lantern
+to be hung up during the night to lessen the chances of being separated.
+Two men in every craft are to be kept at the oars all the time, and, in
+order to make the work light, they should be relieved hourly. The
+indications are that the weather will hold clear; it is only a couple of
+hundred miles to the Cuban coast, and we are not likely to be cooped up
+in these cockle shells very long."</p>
+
+<p>As he ceased speaking Mr. Walters gave the word for the oarsmen to begin
+the work which it was supposed would be continued without intermission
+until all were in a place of safety, and the boats were pulled about a
+mile from the burning steamer, when, as if by common consent, they were
+brought to a standstill to watch the destruction of the Sea Dream.</p>
+
+<p>The jaunty little craft was moving through the water slowly, enveloped
+in flames from bow to stern, and the boys gazed at her with a feeling of
+sadness which did not arise solely from the fact of their present peril.
+It seemed to them as if she could understand that those who should have
+saved her had fled when her need of assistance was greatest, and she was
+creeping slowly away to die alone.</p>
+
+<p>"The poor thing can't swim much longer," Jake said, as if speaking to
+himself. "The boiler will explode&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Even as he spoke a black cloud of smoke shot up from amidships, followed
+by a shower of fiery fragments, some of which struck in the immediate
+vicinity of the boats, and then the glare of the conflagration suddenly
+vanished as the Sea Dream sank beneath the waves.</p>
+
+<p>It would have been strange indeed if each member of the little party had
+not experienced a feeling of sorrow and desolation at this moment.</p>
+
+<p>The yacht which, a few hours previous, had appeared so stanch, was no
+longer afloat, and their only hope of reaching land was in the tiny
+boats which could hardly be expected to live in an ordinary sailing
+breeze.</p>
+
+<p>The tears were very near Teddy's and Neal's eyelids, and Jake's voice
+was quite the reverse of steady as he gave the word for the men to
+resume work at the oars.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;">
+<img src="images/reptile.png" width="362" height="600" alt="Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, etc." title="" />
+<span class="caption">Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, etc. See page <a href="#page193">193</a>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Night was close at hand. The sun had already set, and the short-lived
+twilight cast a sinister grayish hue over the waters. Mr. Walters' boat
+had the lantern raised at the bow on the end of an oar where it swung
+gently to and fro, and in a few moments all the others could be
+distinguished by the same signal.</p>
+
+<p>During such time as they had been waiting to witness the end of the Sea
+Dream the little crafts had drifted farther apart, until the one in
+charge of Neal's father was nearly half a mile away, and the sailing
+master could be heard shouting for them to be brought nearer together.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall probably have a breeze to-night," he cried when Jake's boat
+approached within easy hailing distance, "and if it should come you must
+rig up something to serve as a sail, for your only chance of keeping
+afloat will be to run before it. You have a compass, and remember that
+land is to be found to the westward."</p>
+
+<p>"Ay, ay," the engineer replied, as he looked around in vain for some
+sign of the wind, and then he added in a low tone to the boys:</p>
+
+<p>"I allow Mr. Walters is off in his reckonin' this time, for there isn't
+a breath of air stirring now."</p>
+
+<p>"We may get it later," Neal said apprehensively, and Jake muttered to
+himself; but yet so loud that Teddy could hear him:</p>
+
+<p>"It'll be tough on us if it comes out of the wrong quarter."</p>
+
+<p>In ten minutes from the time the word had been given to bring the boats
+into closer order the mantle of night had fully fallen, and the
+location of the other crafts could only be told by the tiny, swaying
+lights, or the hum of voices.</p>
+
+<p>Jake's boat was loaded less deeply than the remainder of the little
+fleet. In addition to himself and the two boys, there were but three
+sailors on board, and the stock of provisions was correspondingly small.
+As a natural consequence she rode higher out of the water, and although
+built on the same model as the others, the engineer insisted she was by
+far the fastest sailing craft.</p>
+
+<p>An hour had not elapsed before it was possible to test her quality in
+this respect.</p>
+
+<p>The breeze which Mr. Walters predicted came up from the east, and as its
+first influence was felt Jake shouted in a tone of relief:</p>
+
+<p>"We're in luck this time, lads. Here's what will shove us along in the
+right direction, an' we can count on striking land without too much
+work. Lash a couple of coats to the oars, an' set them up close by the
+forward thwart; you'll find a chance there to make 'em fast."</p>
+
+<p>This apology for a sail was soon gotten in place, and, small as was the
+surface presented to the wind, the little boat surged ahead, rippling
+the water musically under her bow.</p>
+
+<p>Jake held the rudder lines, the boys sitting either side of him on the
+bottom of the boat where they could stretch out at full length in case
+they felt inclined to sleep, and after they had listened to the swish of
+the sea under the stern for some time Neal asked as he raised his head
+to look over the side:</p>
+
+<p>"Where are the others?"</p>
+
+<p>"Considerable distance astern. I knew this one could show them her
+heels."</p>
+
+<p>"But the orders were that we must not separate," Neal exclaimed in
+alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"That is true; but how can we help ourselves just now? We can't shorten
+sail, because there would be nothing left, and we're bound to run ahead
+of the waves, small as they are, or be swamped."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose we never see them again?"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't worry about that; we're all headin' in the same direction, an'
+have only got to wait till they overtake us after land is sighted."</p>
+
+<p>Although Jake spoke in a positive tone Teddy and Neal were far from
+feeling comfortable in mind; but, as he had said, nothing different
+could be done, and each tried to hide his fears from the other.</p>
+
+<p>The weight of the wind increased as the night advanced, and by the words
+of caution which the sailors uttered from time to time, the boys knew
+that those who should best understand such matters were anxious
+regarding the outcome of this night run.</p>
+
+<p>Now and then a small quantity of water would dash over the side; but it
+was quickly bailed out, and, as one of the men said, "did more good than
+harm, for it gave them something to do."</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the gravity of the situation, Neal and Teddy fell asleep
+before midnight, therefore they were unconscious of the fight which
+their companions were making for life. It was necessary the frail craft
+should be kept dead before the wind; otherwise she would have been
+swamped by the following waves, which were now running dangerously high,
+and the skill of the helmsman was all that prevented her from
+destruction.</p>
+
+<p>Not for a single moment during the hours of darkness was it safe to
+relax the vigilance, and the constant strain on one's nerves was more
+fatiguing than the real labor.</p>
+
+<p>Just as the day was breaking Neal awoke, and then he aroused Teddy by
+asking Jake:</p>
+
+<p>"Can you see the other boats?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not yet; but some of them may be in sight at sunrise. It isn't possible
+their lights would show up more than a mile off."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't the sea running very high?" Teddy asked timidly as he attempted
+to stand erect; but Jake grasped him by the shoulder as he said quickly:</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't safe to move around very much. Lie quiet until the wind dies
+away a bit; we've got more'n we want, and the boat must be kept trimmed
+mighty carefully or there'll be trouble."</p>
+
+<p>It was only necessary for the boys to watch their companions in order to
+learn the dangers which beset them, and, clasping each other's hands,
+they waited in anxious suspense for the rising of the sun to learn if
+the remainder of the party was near.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h3>
+
+<h4>ON SHORE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When the first rays of the sun appeared above the horizon the sailors
+searched with their eyes in every direction; but neither land nor a
+craft could be seen.</p>
+
+<p>"I knew we were bound to run away from the rest of the party," Jake
+said, keeping his face turned toward the bow, for the slightest
+carelessness might be fatal to all. "If this wind dies out we can lay
+still till they come up, as they're sure to do before long."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose the other boats have been swamped?" Neal suggested, with a
+choking sob as he realized that he might never see his father again.</p>
+
+<p>"We won't suppose anything of the kind," Jake replied sharply. "There
+are plenty in the crowd who can handle the boats better than this one
+was handled, and if we rode out the night in safety why shouldn't they
+have done the same?"</p>
+
+<p>"The only chance of our not seein' 'em," one of the sailors said
+thoughtfully, "is, that sailin' slower, they may now be near land that
+we passed in the night without knowin' it. There should 'a been a lot of
+keys within fifty miles of where we abandoned the Sea Dream."</p>
+
+<p>"That's very true, matey," and now Jake spoke in his customary cheerful
+tone, "an' we'll soon be makin' some place where there'll be a chance of
+stretchin' our legs. Overhaul the grub, one of you, an' let's have a
+bite; I feel like a man what's been on a thirty hour watch."</p>
+
+<p>"So you have, for that matter. Even if you ain't a sailor man I'd like
+to see him as could handle a little craft any better. With me at the
+helm she'd have gone to the bottom before midnight."</p>
+
+<p>"I won't kick 'cause you praise me," Jake replied with a laugh; "but
+don't lay it on too thick for fear I might get proud."</p>
+
+<p>"I was only tellin' the truth, an' jest what all of us think. When the
+breeze freshened I made up my mind that the voyage was about ended; but
+here we are yet, an' here we're likely to be a spell longer unless we
+strike another norther."</p>
+
+<p>While the man was speaking he had passed aft two cans of preserved meat,
+some hard bread, and a small jar of pickles, after opening the tins with
+his sheath knife, and every one on board made a hearty meal, the boys
+in particular feeling decidedly cheerful when the repast had been eaten.</p>
+
+<p>"The wind is fallin' off a bit, an' I reckon it'll come dead calm by
+noon," Jake said, after refusing to allow one of the seamen to relieve
+him. "We'll all soon have a chance to bottle up sleep."</p>
+
+<p>"How long do you think it ought to be before we sight the land?" Neal
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"That's jest what I can't say, lad; but 'cordin' to my way of thinkin'
+we was a good bit below the coast of Cuba when the little yacht went
+down. That norther blew us a good way off our course, an' it's possible
+Mr. Walters might have made a mistake in determinin' the position,
+although it ain't exactly the proper thing for an engineer to set up
+agin a first-class sailin' master."</p>
+
+<p>"It won't take long to find out if this breeze holds, an' that's some
+comfort," one of the sailors replied, and then the three men drew lots
+to see which two should take a watch "below."</p>
+
+<p>During the forenoon there was but little change in the condition of
+affairs. The wind decreased until it was nothing more than a good
+sailing breeze; but the expected calm did not come.</p>
+
+<p>The boat reeled off the knots in fine style, despite the poor apology
+for a sail, and the boys were allowed to change their position, which
+they did by sitting on the after thwart.</p>
+
+<p>About twelve o'clock Jake stretched himself out on the bottom for a nap,
+awakening one of the sleepers that the man at the helm might have
+assistance in case he should require it, and the boys alternately dozed
+or searched the horizon in vain for some signs of the other boats.</p>
+
+<p>Those who were hungry ate whenever it pleased them to do so, and there
+was no lack of either food or water. Teddy would have talked with his
+friend regarding the prospects of reaching home within a reasonable
+length of time; but Neal was so anxious about his father that he could
+speak of nothing else.</p>
+
+<p>Toward the close of the day the wind freshened again, and, in obedience
+to his previous orders, Jake was awakened, the man at the helm saying in
+an apologetic tone:</p>
+
+<p>"I can hold on here a good bit longer; but you wanted to know if there
+was any change, an' there is. It looks to me as if we should have more
+of a breeze than we had last night."</p>
+
+<p>"No signs of land yet?"</p>
+
+<p>"No sir; but the Cuban coast, if that's what we're headin' for, is so
+low that we wouldn't be likely to raise it till we got close on."</p>
+
+<p>Jake ate supper before taking his seat at the helm, and then the boys
+were advised to lie down as on the preceding night.</p>
+
+<p>"You'll be comfortable there, and won't stand so much of a chance of
+gettin' wet."</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that Jake wanted to have them out of the way, and both
+obeyed at once, Teddy saying as he stretched himself out on the hard
+boards:</p>
+
+<p>"It seems as if my bones were coming through the skin, and I'm sore all
+over."</p>
+
+<p>"Things are not nearly as bad as they might be, so we musn't complain,"
+Neal replied philosophically; but at the same time it seemed as if he
+could not remain in that position another night.</p>
+
+<p>Even in face of the danger to which they would be exposed, the occupants
+of the boat welcomed the increase in the weight of the wind since it was
+reasonable to suppose that each mile traversed carried them just so much
+nearer the land, and, with the exception of Neal and Teddy, all were in
+good spirits when the darkness of night covered the ocean.</p>
+
+<p>Owing to the absence of exercise the boys did not sleep well, and when
+the unconsciousness of slumber did come upon them for a few moments at a
+time, it brought in its train dreams so distressing that wakefulness
+with the full knowledge of the dangers which encompassed them, was
+preferable.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed as if twenty hours instead of ten had passed when one of the
+men in the bow cried joyfully:</p>
+
+<p>"If I don't see the loom of land now it's because I never saw such a
+sight before."</p>
+
+<p>"Where away?" Jake asked, straining his eyes in the vain effort to
+discern anything amid the gloom.</p>
+
+<p>"Dead ahead as we are running. It must be somethin' more'n a cay, or it
+wouldn't show up so big."</p>
+
+<p>The gray light of approaching dawn was lifting the mantle of night when
+the man spoke, and, ten minutes later, all saw with reasonable
+distinctness the dark cloud which could be nothing less than land.</p>
+
+<p>Now the roar of surf was heard, and Jake said in a troubled tone:</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see how we are to make it after all, unless we plump her
+straight on, an' that's likely to be a dangerous experiment."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not take in the sail, and work the oars; then you can pick a
+landing place?"</p>
+
+<p>"All right, let go the halyards; but instead of furling the canvas you
+can stow it under one of the thwarts."</p>
+
+<p>This order was given and obeyed cheerily, for all were in the best of
+spirits now that the end of the wearisome journey seemed to be so near
+at hand and in a very short time the boat was moving slowly toward the
+shore, rising and falling gently on the heavy swell.</p>
+
+<p>Each moment it was possible to see more distinctly the coast, and when
+they were thirty yards from a shore strewn with jagged blocks of coral,
+Jake shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on, boys, it would be worse than folly to attempt to run in there
+while the sea is so high."</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you find a better place?" one of the men asked.</p>
+
+<p>"It appears to be the same all along for a mile or so in either
+direction."</p>
+
+<p>"There's more danger of bein' swamped while runnin' up or down the
+coast, than in makin' a try for it here. Let her go in on the swell, an'
+when the water shoals we can jump over to lighten her so she'll strike
+well up on the shore where there'll be no trouble in savin' everything."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't like the idea," Jake replied. "We can't tell what a fellow
+might meet with, an' to be swung agin one of them rocks would be hard
+lines."</p>
+
+<p>The sailors were determined to make the attempt regardless of his
+warnings, and after a few moments he refused to argue longer.</p>
+
+<p>"You ought to know better than I," he said, "an' its no more'n right you
+should have your own way without any fuss; but the boys an' I will stay
+here till she strikes. That is a better plan than goin' over the side
+when you know nothing about the shore, and besides, I can't see the
+advantage of lightenin' her."</p>
+
+<p>"So she'll strike higher up on the beach, of course, otherwise she'd be
+stove before you could say Jack Robinson."</p>
+
+<p>"Do as you please, an' so will I. Shall I steer her in now?"</p>
+
+<p>The sailors kicked off their boots, and began pulling vigorously at the
+oars while Jake said in a low tone to the boys:</p>
+
+<p>"Be ready to jump the minute she strikes; but not before. Look out for
+the rocks, and take care the swell don't drag you back."</p>
+
+<p>The heavy waves were rolling up on the shore with a roar that rendered
+conversation difficult, and as he glanced ahead at the foaming waters in
+which it did not seem possible the little craft could live for a single
+moment, Teddy pressed Neal's hand as if to say good-by.</p>
+
+<p>Neal gave him one quick, hopeful glance; pointed shoreward to intimate
+that they must watch every motion of the boat in order to be prepared
+when the most favorable time arrived, and, following Jake's example
+both arose from the thwart, standing in a stooping posture in order to
+steady themselves by the rail.</p>
+
+<p>Carried on the crest of an enormous wave the tiny craft hangs as if
+poised in mid-air for an instant, and as the vast body of water is
+dashed forward the three sailors leap into the boiling, swirling foam.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy fancied he heard a muffled cry of agony; but just at that moment
+he could think only of saving his own life, and there was no time to so
+much as glance around.</p>
+
+<p>The boat was shot suddenly forward with the water dashing above the
+stern and sides, and Jake shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"Over with you now!"</p>
+
+<p>At the same instant that the boat struck the boys leaped, and during
+several fearful seconds it was doubtful whether they could hold their
+own against the treacherous under-tow.</p>
+
+<p>By clinging to the sides of the craft, and straining every muscle, the
+attempt was successful, and as the wave receded the little tender lay
+across a sharp piece of coral, almost a total wreck.</p>
+
+<p>"Take hold and shove her further up!" Jake shouted. "Work now as you
+never did before, or we shall lose all our stores!"</p>
+
+<p>During the next half minute the three struggled to the utmost of their
+power, and then the fragments of the boat and the goods which had been
+brought from the Sea Dream were high upon the beach beyond reach of the
+next wave, which swept in with a yet louder roar as if enraged at having
+been deprived of its prey.</p>
+
+<p>Not until this had been done was it possible to look around for the
+sailors, and Teddy cried as he gazed seaward without seeing any living
+creature:</p>
+
+<p>"Where are they?"</p>
+
+<p>Jake watched the boiling waters several seconds before he replied
+mournfully:</p>
+
+<p>"It was as I feared. They either struck some of these jagged rocks as
+they leaped from the boat or the under-tow was so strong that it dragged
+them down."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that all three have been drowned?" Neal cried.</p>
+
+<p>"If they were alive we should see them by this time," and Jake ran along
+the shore hoping they might have succeeded in scrambling out at some
+other point.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy and Neal followed him, and when five minutes passed there could be
+no further doubt.</p>
+
+<p>"If they had waited until the boat struck, as we did, there would have
+been little trouble to get ashore; but now we shall never see them
+again."</p>
+
+<p>The boys could hardly realize that three strong men had been taken from
+this world so quickly, and when finally the fact stood out boldly
+without the slightest possibility of mistake, a feeling of deepest
+depression took possession of all.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy threw himself face downward on the sand and gave way to grief,
+while Neal and Jake stood by his side in silence, for this dreadful
+catastrophe seemed to be a warning of their own fate.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>SUSPENSE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>How long they remained on the shore in an apathy of despair not one of
+that party ever knew.</p>
+
+<p>Jake was the first to arouse himself, and, understanding that work is
+the best remedy for mental troubles, he said, with a great effort to
+speak cheerily:</p>
+
+<p>"See here, lads, this will never do if we want to get out of the scrape.
+We've got to stay here till the other boats come along, and it is
+necessary to make some preparations for living. The goods must be stowed
+where they won't be destroyed, an' there's plenty to keep us busy for
+the rest of this day."</p>
+
+<p>"When do you think the other boats should arrive?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>Jake realized fully how slight were the chances that either of the
+crafts would come to that exact spot, even if they were all afloat; but
+he had no idea of adding to his companions' grief, therefore he
+replied:</p>
+
+<p>"It may be forty-eight hours. You see some or all of them might have put
+out a sea anchor when it blew so hard, for they carried heavier loads
+than we did, and while layin' still we hummed right along, consequently
+its difficult tellin' when to expect 'em."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course they are bound to land here?"</p>
+
+<p>Jake hesitated only for an instant before he decided that under the
+circumstances a lie was absolutely necessary, and then replied
+positively:</p>
+
+<p>"Of course. Where else would they come?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was afraid there might have been some little difference in the
+steering."</p>
+
+<p>"We all were obliged to keep dead before the wind, therefore ought to
+come out pretty nigh alike."</p>
+
+<p>This reply appeared to satisfy Neal, and he set about cheering Teddy,
+who finally arose to his feet and signified his willingness to do
+whatever Jake should propose as necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The engineer made many suggestions which he would not have thought of
+had he been alone, or in the company of those who did not need such a
+tonic.</p>
+
+<p>All the goods were first carried from the beach to the edge of the thick
+forest a hundred yards away, and over the collection was constructed a
+shelter to protect it from the dew. The fragments of the boat were
+carefully gathered up and deposited in the same place.</p>
+
+<p>Then a quantity of such pieces of dead branches and decaying wood as
+could be found near at hand was stacked close by the beach, to serve as
+a signal in case a vessel or the boats should heave in sight.</p>
+
+<p>When this had been done it was noon, and Jake set about preparing as
+elaborate a meal as their store of provisions would permit, saying as he
+summoned them to the repast:</p>
+
+<p>"Now boys, I want you to fill yourselves up so's to be ready for hard
+work in case anything is to be done when the others get here. Afterwards
+we'll take a snooze, which is the proper thing to do at the middle of
+the day in a hot climate, and then there must be some exploring, for we
+want to find out if we are really on the island of Cuba."</p>
+
+<p>The boys' hunger was very much greater than their grief, and without
+further urging they did full justice to the meal, Teddy saying as he
+helped himself to the third slice of preserved meat:</p>
+
+<p>"It wouldn't be a bad idea for us to hunt a little while for something
+in the shape of a vegetable, or we shall soon run short of provisions."</p>
+
+<p>"It's the very plan I was thinking of. In these woods we should be able
+to find many things that would help out on the bill of fare; but in case
+that can't be done, you boys must turn hunters. It's mighty lucky you
+have your guns and plenty of ammunition."</p>
+
+<p>This last suggestion pleased the boys wonderfully and if Jake had not
+insisted very strongly that they sleep during the hottest portion of the
+day, both would have started into the forest without delay.</p>
+
+<p>After lying down in the shade slumber came to their eyelids quickly, and
+when he was convinced they were across the border of dreamland, Jake
+arose softly, saying to himself as he stole up the shore:</p>
+
+<p>"This goes ahead of any scrape I ever had the bad luck to fall into, an'
+I'd give all I've got to know exactly where we are, for I'm certain it
+ain't Cuba. If two days pass without our sightin' a sail I must fix up
+some story to make the boys eager to tramp across the country. That'll
+be better than stayin' here where, 'cordin' to my idea, there's mighty
+small chance of our finding anybody who can help us."</p>
+
+<p>He walked along the shore fully two miles; but there was no diversity of
+scene. The coast strewn thickly with coral rocks, and backed by a dense
+forest, was all that could be seen either above or below the place where
+they landed.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jake forced his way through the tangled undergrowth, experiencing
+no slight difficulty in so doing, and the vegetation confirmed his
+belief that the little craft had been carried by the wind to some land
+further south than was at first supposed.</p>
+
+<p>On the water not a sail was in sight, and when Jake returned to the
+place where the rude shelter had been put up he was in even a more
+despondent mood than Teddy and Neal had been.</p>
+
+<p>"I s'pose we must wait here a couple of days to satisfy the boys the
+other boats won't come, an' then it's a case of strikin' across the
+country with good chance of wanderin' around until fever or wild animals
+puts an end to it."</p>
+
+<p>His companions were yet asleep, and he lay down beside them in order to
+prevent any suspicion that he had been spying out the land.</p>
+
+<p>Under other circumstances the monotonous roar of the surf would have
+lulled him to rest; but now his anxiety was so great that, despite all
+efforts, his eyes would persist in staying open very wide, and he spent
+the remainder of the siesta trying in vain to decide what was best to
+do.</p>
+
+<p>Not until late in the afternoon did the boys awaken, and then Neal said
+as he sprang to his feet:</p>
+
+<p>"It won't do for us all to sleep again at the same time. If the boats
+came in sight since we've been lying here it is very probable father
+has missed us, for more than likely they would try for a better place to
+land further up or down the coast."</p>
+
+<p>"You needn't worry about that, lad. I've kept honest watch, and not so
+much as the wing of a sea gull has appeared above the horizon."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy, remembering what Jake had said about hunting, began to clean the
+guns, for both had been thoroughly wetted during the landing, and Neal
+walked slowly along as he looked out over the water intently.</p>
+
+<p>Before going very far he saw the engineer's footprints on the sand, and
+shouted excitedly:</p>
+
+<p>"Some one has been here! Perhaps father arrived before we did."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no such good luck," Jake replied. "While you fellows were
+snoozing I went a long bit in that direction."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it's only a waste of time for me to go over the same ground," and
+Neal retraced his steps, adding when he gained Teddy's side, "I'll do my
+share of that work."</p>
+
+<p>"You spoke too late, for I have finished. Now let's see what can be done
+in the way of hunting; a roasted bird will be a big improvement over
+salt meat, and I count on finding plenty of game."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, provided Jake is willing to stay here alone."</p>
+
+<p>"What is to prevent me from joining the party?"</p>
+
+<p>"Someone must remain in case the boats heave in sight," Neal replied in
+a positive tone, and the engineer said carelessly:</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't think of that; but it'll be all right, I'll keep my eyes
+peeled," and he added to himself, "I wish he wasn't so certain about the
+others coming, an' then the disappointment wouldn't be quite so great."</p>
+
+<p>Jake cautioned the boys against going very far from the beach because of
+the danger of getting lost in the forest, and as they disappeared among
+the underbrush he threw himself upon the ground, unable longer to fight
+against the despair which was rapidly overpowering him.</p>
+
+<p>He understood perfectly well how great would be the danger in attempting
+to make their way through the wooded portion of the country at this
+season of the year, when fever germs lurked in every spot where stagnant
+water was to be found, and knew at the same time how extremely difficult
+it might be to find a place offering any more advantages than did the
+narrow strip of sand on which they had been thrown.</p>
+
+<p>"It wouldn't be quite as bad if I knew where we are," he said to
+himself. "It can't be possible that we're on the coast of South America;
+but if that should prove to be the case we'd make a pretty mess of it by
+trying to cross."</p>
+
+<p>Then came the thought that perhaps it would be better to travel up the
+coast, and as to the advisability of this he studied a long while
+without being able to arrive at any satisfactory conclusion.</p>
+
+<p>Two hours were spent in this profitless speculation, and then the boys
+returned, bringing with them two large hoccos, birds looking not unlike
+wild turkeys.</p>
+
+<p>"We shan't starve while such game as this is to be found," Neal cried
+triumphantly. "I believe we might have shot a dozen by staying longer;
+but there was no sense in doing so just for the sake of killing. It will
+be a hard job to eat all this meat before it spoils."</p>
+
+<p>"How far in did you go?" Jake asked, rising to his feet quickly and
+trying to banish from his face the look of dejection, lest his
+companions should suspect how desperate he believed the situation to be.</p>
+
+<p>"Not more than half a mile," Teddy replied.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the general appearance of the country?"</p>
+
+<p>"The undergrowth is very dense in places, and above here, a little to
+the right, we came upon what seems to be a swamp. It was there we found
+these birds, and something else which is not quite so promising."</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke Teddy pulled up his shirt sleeve, and pointed to several
+black specks on his skin.</p>
+
+<p>"They are ticks, or garrapatas, as the Spaniards call them," Jake
+replied, as he opened his pocket knife. "The sooner you get rid of them
+the better, for they will make what is likely to be a bad sore unless a
+cordial invitation to leave is extended."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you going to cut them out?" Teddy asked in alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"Not exactly; but you won't get rid of the pests without considerable
+pain, for they have the faculty of crawling under the skin mighty fast."</p>
+
+<p>Jake set about the work in a methodical manner, causing Teddy to cry
+aloud very often as the insects were pulled or dug from the flesh.</p>
+
+<p>Then Neal was called upon to undergo the same operation, and not until
+nearly an hour had passed were the hunters free from the painful pests.</p>
+
+<p>It was now nearly sunset, and all hands set about preparing the hoccos
+for roasting, by first plucking the fowls, removing the intestines, and
+sticking them on a sharpened stake in front of the fire.</p>
+
+<p>It was not an entirely satisfactory method of cooking, for while one
+portion was done brown, another would be hardly warmed through; but, as
+Teddy said, "it went a long way ahead of nothing," and all three worked
+industriously, turning the game or piling on the fuel until, about an
+hour after sunset, the task was completed.</p>
+
+<p>By this time the castaways were decidedly hungry, and the half-cooked
+fowls tasted better than had the most elaborate meals on board the Sea
+Dream.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h3>
+
+<h4>ACROSS THE COUNTRY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When, supper having been eaten, preparations were made for the night,
+Neal insisted that one of the party should remain on guard during the
+hours of darkness, in order to watch for the boats, and Jake had no
+slight trouble in convincing him that it was not absolutely necessary.</p>
+
+<p>"We couldn't see their lights half a mile away if they have any hoisted,
+which isn't likely, for the oil must be scarce by this time," the
+engineer said, "and, in case we did sight them, what good would it do?
+We should induce them to land here, and we know how dangerous that is
+even in the daytime. I had rather let them pass without knowing where we
+are, than to be the innocent cause of a second disaster."</p>
+
+<p>After considerable discussion Neal was made to understand that no good
+could come of posting sentinels, and the little party lay down on the
+bed of leaves; but, owing to the suspense concerning the fate of the
+others, neither slept very soundly.</p>
+
+<p>It was hardly light enough to see surrounding objects when Jake began to
+prepare breakfast, and as soon as the sun rose Neal and Teddy paced to
+and fro on the beach gazing seaward; but without seeing that for which
+they sought.</p>
+
+<p>For the first time Neal began to despair concerning his father, and
+returning to the camp he said in a voice choked by sobs:</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe we shall ever see either of them again. The wind has
+held steady since we landed, and they should have been here a long while
+ago. Our boat couldn't have sailed so much faster than theirs that we
+should arrive twenty-four hours in advance."</p>
+
+<p>"Now put out of your mind the idea that we are not to see all hands some
+time," Jake replied quite sharply. "I'm willing to admit that they may
+not strike here, for I might as well own up to the truth, and say the
+chances are against two boats coming so far and hitting the same spot on
+the coast. That doesn't prove, however, that there has been any further
+disaster."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you do believe that they won't come here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Why haven't you proposed to make some change?"</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't want to say anything until we were certain the boats wouldn't
+heave in sight. I shouldn't advise making a move yet awhile; but since
+you've broached the subject we may as well talk plainly."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we are likely to be taken off by a vessel?"</p>
+
+<p>"The fact that none have passed within our line of vision certainly
+shows that such a chance is slim. I have come to the conclusion that we
+are not on the island of Cuba, and it stands us in hand to try for some
+town or sea-port. We might stay here a month, and then have a craft
+heave in sight when the surf run so high as to prevent a boat landing."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you want to do?"</p>
+
+<p>"Strike straight through the woods. There must be people living here
+somewhere, and the sooner we find them the sooner we'll get home."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not follow along the beach?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because, if this is an island, as it surely must be, we could get
+across quicker than around, and, besides, with all these coral rocks the
+beach is not the best sort of a road for traveling, loaded down as we
+shall be."</p>
+
+<p>Neal was silent for a moment, and Teddy took advantage of the
+opportunity to ask:</p>
+
+<p>"When do you think we ought to make a move?"</p>
+
+<p>"My idea is that we should stay here to-day (our supply of water won't
+last much longer), and start early to-morrow morning. That would be time
+enough to prove whether the boats are coming, and give us a chance to
+get the traps into proper shape for carrying."</p>
+
+<p>"You know best what should be done," Neal said, speaking slowly, "and I
+am ready to do as you propose."</p>
+
+<p>"Now that is what I call sensible talk," Jake replied, in a tone of
+satisfaction. "By buckling right down to work, and putting out of our
+minds all unpleasant thoughts, for it don't do any good to moon over
+what can't be changed, we shall soon get out of this scrape."</p>
+
+<p>Neal remained silent. To leave the coast seemed like deserting his
+father, and although he knew Jake's plan should be carried out, it made
+him sad to think of going where it would be no longer possible to see
+the ocean.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy, however, experienced a sense of relief as soon as it was decided
+to enter the forest in search of human beings. To him the place was
+anything rather than agreeable, for he could never rid himself of the
+feeling that the drowned sailors would soon be washed ashore, and during
+the hours of darkness all kinds of queer fancies came into his mind with
+every unusual sound.</p>
+
+<p>He was eager to discuss with Jake the details of the proposed journey,
+and, Neal listening to the conversation but taking no part in it, the
+matter was arranged to the satisfaction of the engineer and Teddy.</p>
+
+<p>The ammunition and such provisions as had been brought ashore, was
+divided into three portions, one being very much heavier than the
+others, and each tied in such shape as would be most convenient for
+carrying.</p>
+
+<p>So much of the game as would not be needed for immediate consumption was
+wrapped in leaves for the travelers to take with them; but that which
+caused Jake the most anxiety was the fact that the supply of water would
+be exhausted before they started.</p>
+
+<p>"It can't be helped," he said ruefully, "and we may be mighty thirsty
+before finding any; but the case would be worse if we staid here, so
+there is no reason why we need worry very much. In that swamp you spoke
+of we shall surely find what thirsty men can drink on a pinch, and I'm
+positive we'll get along all right."</p>
+
+<p>As if eager to convince himself that there was no great danger to be
+apprehended from the journey through the forest, he continued to talk
+about his plans until both the boys were perfectly familiar with all he
+hoped to gain by the attempt; but of his fears not a word was spoken.</p>
+
+<p>At night all retired early in order to be fresh for the morrow's work,
+and when the first faint flush of another day appeared in the eastern
+sky Jake aroused his companions.</p>
+
+<p>"Turn out, boys," he shouted cheerily. "We must make the most of these
+cool hours, for it will be necessary to halt at noon, and we want to get
+through the forest as quickly as possible."</p>
+
+<p>While speaking he was fastening the heaviest package on his back, and
+after a hurried toilet in the sea Neal and Teddy took up their loads.</p>
+
+<p>It was still quite dark under the towering trees when the journey was
+begun; but each moment the gloom grew less, until, when the sun rose it
+was possible to see the way with but little difficulty.</p>
+
+<p>To travel very rapidly was out of the question. In certain places the
+underbrush was so dense that considerable exertion became necessary in
+order to force a passage, and despite all efforts not more than two
+miles an hour could be made.</p>
+
+<p>At the swamp plenty of cool, clear water was found, and with this Jake
+filled the two bottles, all they had in which to carry a supply of the
+precious liquid.</p>
+
+<p>At noon a long halt was made, and when the sun began to decline the
+weary march was resumed.</p>
+
+<p>By no means the least of the travelers' suffering was caused by thorns,
+and to one who has never had any experience of this sort, a description
+of the various spines and needles which project from the strange plants
+in these vast forests would seem exaggerated.</p>
+
+<p>They are of all sizes and shapes, and in many places actually prevent a
+man from making his way through the foliage even though he be armed with
+a machete. Oftentimes it is absolutely necessary to make a long detour
+in order to avoid the painful obstructions, and before half of this
+day's journey was finished all three of the castaways bore bloody
+evidence of what these natural bristles can do.</p>
+
+<p>The siesta was decidedly abridged, for Jake realized the importance of
+concluding the tramp as quickly as possible, and the afternoon was but
+little more than half ended when, to the intense surprise of all, they
+suddenly arrived at a clearing in the very midst of the forest.</p>
+
+<p>After wandering among the luxuriant vegetation the travelers were almost
+startled at seeing an avenue of banana trees which had evidently been
+planted by the hand of man, and, following it up, the little party were
+yet more surprised at seeing a white man swinging idly in a hammock.</p>
+
+<p>Jake advanced as if unable to believe the evidences of his own senses,
+and said hesitatingly:</p>
+
+<p>"We had no intention of intruding, sir; but followed the line of banana
+trees without the slightest idea of finding a gentleman's home."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't apologize," the stranger replied in good English, and springing
+to his feet as if in alarm. "It is true that I am not in the habit of
+receiving callers in this out-of-the-way place; but those of my own race
+are none the less welcome. Will you walk into the house?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys peered through the foliage where, after some difficulty, they
+saw a small cabin, hardly large enough to be called a dwelling, and Jake
+replied quickly:</p>
+
+<p>"We would prefer to remain here. Having walked since sunrise, you can
+fancy that any place in which to rest our legs without fear of coming in
+contact with a scorpion or a snake is grateful."</p>
+
+<p>"I can't promise that you won't be troubled by such visitors; but you
+are welcome to do as you choose."</p>
+
+<p>Jake threw himself on the ground, asking as he did so:</p>
+
+<p>"Can you tell me how near we are to a sea-port? We have just landed
+from a pleasure yacht which was destroyed by fire, and haven't any idea
+where we are."</p>
+
+<p>"You are now in Yucatan, and probably know perfectly well how near to
+the coast, for&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"In Yucatan?" Jake repeated in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly, and not so very far from the famed Silver City of the Chan
+Santa Cruz Indians."</p>
+
+<p>"That last information doesn't seem to be very important so far as we
+are concerned; but it does surprise me to know we are in this section of
+the country, for our captain was quite positive we should strike the
+coast of Cuba."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell me how such a mistake was made."</p>
+
+<p>"That is exactly what I don't know myself; but it won't take long to
+explain why we are here."</p>
+
+<p>Then Jake told the story of the cruise in the Sea Dream, of the
+unaccountable conflagration, and the fatal landing on the coast,
+concluding by saying:</p>
+
+<p>"As a matter of course we are most anxious to reach some place from
+which we can find a steamer or sailing vessel going to the United
+States. Probably you can give us the proper information, and by that
+means get rid of unexpected and, perhaps, unwelcome visitors."</p>
+
+<p>"But I do not wish to get rid of you," the stranger replied quickly. "On
+the contrary I am more than delighted because you were forced to come
+here, since you can render me a very great service."</p>
+
+<p>"I fail to understand how," Jake replied in perplexity.</p>
+
+<p>"You shall soon know, and I fancy you will be decidedly surprised when I
+give you all the details. First, however, allow me to prepare supper,
+and then it will be singular if I do not tell such a story as will cause
+greater astonishment than you ever experienced before."</p>
+
+<p>With these strange words the young man&mdash;he did not appear to be more
+than thirty years old&mdash;leaped out of the hammock, and disappeared among
+the shrubbery which so nearly concealed the building.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h3>
+
+<h4>A STRANGE STORY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The meal, which was partaken of heartily by the weary travelers,
+consisted of eggs and fruit, with plenty of freshly cooked tortillas,
+and as Teddy remarked in a low tone when it was absolutely impossible
+for him to eat any more, "it went way ahead of turkeys roasted on a
+stick."</p>
+
+<p>After his guests had finished this very satisfactory repast, the
+stranger proposed that all adjourn to the banana avenue where he slung
+another hammock that both the boys might lie down, gave Jake a cigar of
+home manufacture, lighted one himself, and, lying upon the ground in an
+attitude of absolute repose, said laughingly:</p>
+
+<p>"Now if you wish to hear the story I promised to tell there is nothing
+to prevent."</p>
+
+<p>"I would certainly like to know how it happens that you are living alone
+in this forest," Jake replied.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will begin in regular story-book style, for when it is ended I
+intend to make a proposition. My name is Byron Cummings, and the last
+home I had previous to the building of this shanty, was in Baltimore,
+Maryland. Two years ago&mdash;it may have been longer, for one does not keep
+a very strict record of time in this country&mdash;I visited Merida on a
+pleasure trip, and while there heard the story of the Silver City."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that the name of a town, or do you mean that the precious metal is
+so plentiful there?" Teddy interrupted.</p>
+
+<p>"I refer to a city built by the Chan Santa Cruz Indians which has
+received this name because the ornamentation of the houses is of silver,
+and so profuse as to give it the appearance, at a distance, of being a
+collection of silver buildings. Don't laugh until you hear the whole
+story," he added, as a smile of incredulity passed over Jake's face.</p>
+
+<p>"Any one in Merida, and, in fact the English histories, will tell you
+that this wonderful city is in the vast tract of marshy land situated
+between here and Merida, known as the Black Swamp. It is a fact that no
+white man has ever seen it, since the only approach is across the swamp
+on the south side, and the way so closely guarded that a person must
+have special sources of information in order to get through the
+labyrinth of narrow water courses on the banks of which are sentinels
+ready to salute the visitor with a shower of poisoned arrows.</p>
+
+<p>"It cannot be reached from the east because of the rocks, a few samples
+of which you probably saw on the sea coast. As you doubtless know, the
+Indians hereabout have never been conquered by the whites, and the
+interior is as much an unknown land as it was at the time of the
+conquest.</p>
+
+<p>"Certain of the Chan Santa Cruz Indians visit Merida at certain seasons
+of the year, where they sell, or rather, exchange for goods, gold dust
+and massive golden ornaments, valuing the yellow treasure so lightly,
+and bringing such quantities that there can be no doubt they have access
+to an enormous deposit. Silver they use as we do iron, and I myself have
+seen one of these visitors wearing thick beaten bands of it as a
+protection to his legs, probably because of the thorns."</p>
+
+<p>"If they come into the towns I should think some venturesome fellow
+would follow, to learn the secret of the city in the swamp," Jake
+suggested, and it could plainly be seen that he was growing decidedly
+interested.</p>
+
+<p>"That has often been tried; but, so far as I can learn, no one ever
+succeeded. Twice I tracked three villainous looking old fellows to the
+very edge of the marsh, and both times they disappeared so silently and
+completely as to make it seem as if the earth had opened and swallowed
+them. Then, learning of the many who had failed in the same attempt, I
+formed a plan which must give me the victory, although it has required
+much time."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" Jake asked breathlessly.</p>
+
+<p>"I resolved to learn the language, and to that end came here with an
+Indian who knows the habits and customs of these people, he having dealt
+with them for many years, and, what is more, has been within sight of
+the famous city. From him I have gained all the information necessary to
+enable me to penetrate the swamp, and now flatter myself that I can
+speak the dialect of the Chan Santa Cruz tribe as perfectly as a
+native."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you remained here two years doing nothing else but studying how to
+reach the village?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Very little beside that. We built the hut, planted these trees for a
+lounging place, and now raise chickens and fruit enough to provide us
+with food."</p>
+
+<p>"Where is the man you speak of?"</p>
+
+<p>"He went to Merida three days ago; but will return by the day after
+to-morrow if no accident has befallen him."</p>
+
+<p>"When are you going to make the attempt to get through the swamp?"</p>
+
+<p>"Very soon if you accept my proposition."</p>
+
+<p>"What have we to do with it?" Jake asked in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"I will explain. Old Poyor and myself are not strong enough numerically
+to make the attempt alone, for in case the secret of our identity should
+be discovered, nothing could save our lives. With you three as an
+addition to the party, and two armed with good weapons, I would not be
+afraid to travel straight through the city. As a matter of fact the only
+real danger is in approaching the place; but I have studied over that
+portion of the business so long that I do not fear a failure if you can
+be prevailed upon to join us."</p>
+
+<p>"That is out of the question," Neal replied decidedly, speaking quickly,
+as if afraid Jake might agree to the scheme. "You know we must get back
+to our own country as soon as possible, for if father is alive he will
+suffer great anxiety concerning us."</p>
+
+<p>"You are right to make haste; but what if I tell you that by going with
+me no time will be lost?"</p>
+
+<p>"How can that be possible?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because if you were in Merida to-day you could not reach Progresso in
+time to take the steamer which left for the United States this morning.
+If you remain here two weeks more, there will then be ample opportunity
+to get passage on the next vessel which starts. I have a time table,
+and you can see by it that I am telling the truth."</p>
+
+<p>As he ceased speaking Cummings arose, walked leisurely to the house, and
+returned with the article in question, which he handed to Neal.</p>
+
+<p>It was only necessary to glance at it in order to learn that his
+statement was a fact, and when Teddy was also convinced, the host
+continued:</p>
+
+<p>"According to the plan I have formed we should be back in less than ten
+days from the time we begin the journey, and if you agree to the scheme
+it should make us all wealthy."</p>
+
+<p>"But you said the old Indian would not return for three days," Jake
+interrupted.</p>
+
+<p>"Very true; but we shall not wait for him to come here. That which he
+will bring is exactly what we want as an outfit, and we can meet him at
+the only entrance to the swamp where, for more than three months, I have
+had a boat hidden in readiness for the attempt."</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings gave a more detailed account of the wonderful city as he
+had heard it in Merida and from Poyor, and so well did he tell the story
+that in a short time his guests were in the highest state of excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Now the question is whether you will join me?" he said in conclusion.
+"Having studied the matter so long I feel warranted in saying that it
+is not an unusually dangerous venture, and, if we are successful, the
+amount of wealth we can carry away must be enormous."</p>
+
+<p>"It wouldn't take me long to decide," Jake replied promptly; "but seeing
+that I am in Mr. Emery's employ I couldn't go contrary to his son's
+orders. As a matter of fact I'm not bound in any way; but it seems to be
+the only square thing to do."</p>
+
+<p>"And what is your idea?" Cummings asked as he looked toward Teddy.</p>
+
+<p>"Since we can't start for home immediately, I don't see why we shouldn't
+spend the time in what will be the jolliest kind of an adventure whether
+there is any gold to be gained or not."</p>
+
+<p>The young man then turned to Neal questioningly, and the latter said
+hesitatingly:</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't fair for Jake to make me decide. He should know better than I
+whether we ought to go with you. If it was possible for us to leave the
+country at once there could be no question, for we must return to the
+United States at the earliest opportunity."</p>
+
+<p>"And since that cannot be done you have no objections to joining us in
+the visit to the Silver City?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know. You would not go until to-morrow, so we have a chance to
+discuss the matter among ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>"Very true. I've some work to attend to, and while I am away you will be
+able to talk privately."</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings arose, went toward the house and when he disappeared from
+view Neal said to Jake:</p>
+
+<p>"Now tell me just what you think of going with him; I mean, what you
+think father would say if we could consult him, not what we would like
+to do."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if you put it in that way," and now Jake spoke as if weighing
+every word, "I can't see why we shouldn't have a little fun, seein's how
+we're bound to stay here longer than he allows is enough to go to this
+Silver City an' back. It would be a mean kind of a man who'd object to
+our havin' enjoyment after all that's happened."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you believe father would approve of our going with Mr. Cummings?"</p>
+
+<p>Jake was not exactly prepared to say "yes," and at the same time he did
+not wish to reply in the negative after his acquiescence in all the host
+had advanced as reasons why they should accompany him, and after a long
+pause Neal added:</p>
+
+<p>"Of course I want to go, for it can't be possible that there is very
+much danger, and I make this proposition: We must sail on the next
+steamer, and if Mr. Cummings is willing we should desert him, no matter
+what may be the condition of affairs when it is time for us to start for
+the coast, then we are warranted in accepting the proposition."</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I call putting the matter in the proper light," Jake
+replied with considerable emphasis. "On this basis no one can possibly
+find any fault, and we may as well tell him that we have decided to go."</p>
+
+<p>"First explain that we must leave Yucatan on the next steamer which
+starts from Progresso."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll do it, and if he is so certain that we shall be out of the Silver
+City in that time there can be no reason for any fault-finding."</p>
+
+<p>"I think Neal has arranged the business as it should be," Teddy said
+approvingly, and from that moment the castaways believed they were
+committed to the scheme.</p>
+
+<p>Half an hour later, when Cummings returned to learn the result of the
+interview, Jake explained upon what grounds the decision had been
+arrived at, and he expressed himself as perfectly satisfied with the
+arrangement.</p>
+
+<p>"If we can't get into the city during the coming week there is no use
+trying," he said, "and I will undertake to see you on board the next
+steamer which sails. Now it only remains to decide upon the details, and
+at sunrise to-morrow we will begin what I have been preparing for,
+during the past two years."</p>
+
+<p>Since the details consisted only in agreeing upon what amount of luggage
+should be taken with them, but little time was spent in discussion, and
+as the boys retired on this night it was with the knowledge that when
+the sun rose again they would start for the Silver City which every
+traveler in Yucatan admitted had an existence.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE JOURNEY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The boys and Jake had no preparations to make for the journey. The goods
+they had brought from the coast was their only property, and could
+readily be carried as during the tramp to this point.</p>
+
+<p>On the contrary, Cummings found many things which it was necessary
+should be done before departure. Whether successful in the attempt to
+reach the marvelous city or not, he could hardly hope to return to the
+hut where all his preparations had been made, and there was much to be
+done.</p>
+
+<p>After ascertaining that his guests were willing to accompany him he made
+arrangements for their comfort during the night, and then, excusing
+himself on the plea of work, was seen no more until the time for
+departure had come.</p>
+
+<p>Of the three castaways Neal was the only one who had any misgivings
+regarding the proposed detour. It seemed to him as if he was in some way
+abandoning his father by embarking in this enterprise, although how
+anything more could be done to aid those who had taken refuge in the
+boats was beyond his comprehension.</p>
+
+<p>This much was clear in his mind, however: He had agreed to aid in the
+attempt, and when Cummings awakened the little party he arose quickly,
+firmly resolved to do everything in his power to reach the city which,
+as yet, he was not thoroughly convinced existed.</p>
+
+<p>It was still dark when the final preparations for the journey were
+begun, and Cummings' impatience was so great that the sun had but just
+shown himself above the horizon when the morning meal had been eaten,
+and their host was urging them to make haste.</p>
+
+<p>"We must be at the rendezvous not later than this afternoon in order to
+avoid the chance of passing Poyor on the way," he said impatiently,
+"therefore the sooner we start the better."</p>
+
+<p>"We are ready," Jake replied, and, after setting the fowls loose,
+Cummings led the way through the underbrush, finding a path where the
+others would not have believed any existed.</p>
+
+<p>As if to prevent the boys from losing their interest in the search for
+the Silver City, their guide continued to add to the story he had
+already told, and during the long march but little else was talked
+about.</p>
+
+<p>Jake who was as excited as a man well could be, for he had no doubt but
+that they could find large quantities of treasure where there would be
+no difficulties in the matter of carrying it away, plied Cummings with
+questions whenever the conversation lagged, and Neal had but little
+opportunity to speculate upon the fate of his father.</p>
+
+<p>Not until late in the night, when to Neal and Teddy it seemed as if they
+could go no further, did the party halt, and during the last hour of the
+march the utmost silence was maintained.</p>
+
+<p>"It is absolutely necessary to avoid detection in case any of the
+Indians may be in the vicinity," Cummings had said, "and we must move as
+stealthily as if we knew positively they were waiting for us."</p>
+
+<p>From that time no one spoke. The guide crept on at a slow pace, his
+every movement copied by the remainder of the party, and on arriving at
+the rendezvous he motioned the others to lie down, whispering as they
+gathered around him:</p>
+
+<p>"We are near the canoe, and it only remains to watch for Poyor, who
+should be here by morning. I'll stand guard while the others sleep."</p>
+
+<p>There was no thought of putting up anything in the shape of a shelter,
+and the boys stretched themselves on the ground in the midst of a thick
+clump of vegetation, Teddy whispering to Neal:</p>
+
+<p>"If it is necessary to take such precautions as these before we are near
+the city, we may expect pretty rough times before arriving at the
+place."</p>
+
+<p>"That's a fact, and I begin to wish we hadn't started. There is no
+positive assurance we shall get through in time to take the next steamer
+for home, and even Cummings himself can't say whether any of us will
+ever come back."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you want to give up the job now?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'd be ashamed to do that, for it would look as if we were afraid; but
+I'm sorry we agreed to the plan;" and Teddy replied heartily:</p>
+
+<p>"So am I."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had nothing to say; but whether his silence was caused by a desire
+to obey Cummings' instructions to avoid making a noise, or by misgivings
+as to the wisdom of the venture, neither of the boys could guess.</p>
+
+<p>Despite the anxiety of the younger members of the party they soon fell
+asleep, owing to excessive fatigue, and did not arouse to consciousness
+until Jake whispered as he shook them vigorously:</p>
+
+<p>"It's time to start. The Indian has come, an' ain't half as bad a
+lookin' man as I counted on seeing."</p>
+
+<p>The boys sprang to their feet, finding themselves face to face with a
+tall, half naked figure which, in the dim light, looked more like a
+statue of bronze than a human being. He stood scrutinizing them keenly
+for fully a minute, and then, as if satisfied with their appearance,
+turned away to walk swiftly along the edge of the swamp until lost to
+view in the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"Poyor has just arrived," Cummings said by way of explanation; "and
+according to his belief it is well for us to start at once."</p>
+
+<p>"Where has he gone?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"After the canoe; it is but a short distance from here."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you dare to cook breakfast?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly not; the light of a fire would be worse, for us, than the
+report of a gun. Until we arrive at the Silver City it will be a case of
+eating cold food, and perhaps we may be obliged to wait even longer than
+that before having anything very elaborate in the way of a meal."</p>
+
+<p>"If we are only certain of coming back again where it is possible to do
+as we please, I won't grumble about what we are obliged to eat," Neal
+said, with a nervous laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't borrow trouble," Cummings replied quickly; but both the boys
+noticed that he no longer spoke in the same confident tone as before the
+journey was begun. "We shall surely get through without difficulty."</p>
+
+<p>The conversation was interrupted by the approach of Poyor, who came down
+the water-way in the canoe more like a ghost than a creature of flesh
+and blood, and Jake, whose head had been turned in the other direction,
+could not suppress a slight exclamation of surprise as the Indian
+suddenly appeared by his side.</p>
+
+<p>The canoe which had been brought thus silently was simply the trunk of a
+tree hollowed out, and about fifteen feet in length. It yet rested
+lightly on the water when the entire party and all the traps were on
+board, and the boys noticed with no slight degree of astonishment, that
+one stroke of the paddle was sufficient to send it sharply in either
+direction.</p>
+
+<p>"Now you have a chance to finish your nap," Cummings whispered as,
+kneeling aft, he began to assist Poyor in propelling the craft.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you want us to help?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"No, there will be nothing you can do until we enter the Silver City."</p>
+
+<p>Tired though the boys were it was literally impossible to close their
+eyes in slumber now, and they remained very wide awake watching the
+coming of a new day.</p>
+
+<p>When the sun had risen they could get some slight idea of the country
+through which they were passing; but of what might be a few yards
+beyond no one could say.</p>
+
+<p>The shores of this particular water-way through the swamp were flat,
+covered with reeds and long grass, with here and there dense tangles of
+trees and vines, and the channel was so narrow that only at rare
+intervals could the paddles be used. The Indian and the white man pushed
+the boat from one bend to another, oftentimes finding it difficult to
+pass the sharp curves, and the boys confidently expected this labor
+would be continued during the entire day, therefore their surprise was
+great when, about an hour after sunrise, the little craft was forced
+under a clump of overhanging foliage as if the journey was at an end.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?" Neal asked in a whisper, and Cummings replied in
+the same cautious tone:</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing. It would be in the highest degree dangerous to travel very far
+now that it is light."</p>
+
+<p>"How long are we to stay here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Until the darkness comes again."</p>
+
+<p>"Wouldn't it be safe to go on the bank where we can stretch our legs?"</p>
+
+<p>"We must not leave the boat. It will be only for a few hours, and then
+we shall have plenty of exercise paddling."</p>
+
+<p>Immediately the canoe had been made fast under the mass of vines and
+shrubbery Poyor stretched himself out in the bow as if the task of
+remaining perfectly quiet during an entire day was a very agreeable one,
+and Cummings followed his example.</p>
+
+<p>Jake, who had been sitting amidships, moved toward his friends, and the
+three spent an hour talking of what was now termed by all "a foolish
+venture."</p>
+
+<p>There was nothing left for it, however, but to continue on since they
+were in the swamp, and after a time Neal said petulantly:</p>
+
+<p>"Well make the best of it, and if an opportunity should occur to go to
+Merida there must be no hesitation, whatever Cummings may say."</p>
+
+<p>As if this resolution gave them renewed courage, the boys lay down in
+the most comfortable position possible, after eating a light lunch, and
+until nightfall no sound save that caused by heavy breathing could have
+been heard from the boat.</p>
+
+<p>Then, when darkness came again, Poyor, who had remained almost without
+motion during the entire time of the halt, aroused himself, ate half a
+dozen bananas, and took up the paddle.</p>
+
+<p>The precautions against being discovered by those who might be on the
+watch were now redoubled. Before rounding a bend the Indian waited in a
+listening attitude to assure himself no one was moving in the immediate
+vicinity, and when it became necessary to work the canoe along by aid of
+the foliage the utmost care was exercised to prevent the branches from
+rustling.</p>
+
+<p>As the hours wore on and no attack was made Cummings appeared to be
+highly elated, and Jake's gloomy forebodings were dispelled in the
+thought of the treasure which they might be able to bring away.</p>
+
+<p>Once, about midnight, when they halted a moment for Poyor to
+reconnoiter, Neal whispered to the leader:</p>
+
+<p>"How many nights of this kind of traveling is necessary before we reach
+the city?"</p>
+
+<p>"When we next halt it will be to leave the boat and continue the journey
+on foot. It was the possible difficulties, not the distance, which
+rendered the undertaking formidable."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian returned, stepped into the canoe without speaking, and took
+up the paddle as if to say there was nothing to prevent them from going
+ahead.</p>
+
+<p>From this time until faint streaks of light caused by the approach of
+the sun could be seen in the sky there was no lengthy interruption to
+the advance, and then as the boat was pulled out of the channel into a
+sort of basin or break of the bank which led among the more dense
+portions of the forests, Cummings said to Neal:</p>
+
+<p>"In two hours you shall have a full view of the Silver City, and then
+there can be no doubt as to the truth of what I have told you."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE SILVER CITY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>To Neal and Teddy the thought that they were so near the wonderful place
+described by Cummings overshadowed everything else, and the probable
+danger was but a secondary consideration.</p>
+
+<p>Jake was in a perfect fever of excitement, and so great was his desire
+to see the city from which he fully expected to bring away enormous
+amounts of gold that more than once did the leader caution him in an
+impatient tone to remain quiet.</p>
+
+<p>Impassive, apparently unmoved by the fact that the plan which he and his
+white companion had spent so many months in perfecting was about to be
+proven successful, or a failure that might result in the death of all
+concerned, <a name="page113" id="page113"></a>the Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of a
+gigantic cypress tree; but Teddy observed that he was on the alert for
+the slightest unusual sound.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings dealt out some food; but none of the party ate it. Hunger had
+been banished by suspense, anxiety and anticipation.</p>
+
+<p>Gradually the gloom was dispelled, and it became possible to see the
+varied forms of life everywhere around.</p>
+
+<p>The party had halted upon a slight elevation, where they had a limited
+view of that portion of the forest which appeared to be distinct from
+the region of marsh. As the sun arose, and a singularly dazzling light,
+different from anything the boys had ever seen before was reflected on
+the tops of the trees, it seemed as if every branch was laden with birds
+of the most gorgeous plumage flitting here and there like movable jewels
+against a background of green enamel.</p>
+
+<p>Hundreds of monkeys filled the air with an almost incessant chattering
+which drowned all other sounds, and snakes of every color and size
+writhed and wriggled in different directions to greet the grateful heat
+of the sun.</p>
+
+<p>It was a picture most beautiful, and at the same time, because of the
+serpents, terrifying.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings began to make his way up the trunk of the cypress, aided by
+Poyor; but when Jake would have followed, the Indian motioned for him to
+remain with the boys.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 357px;">
+<img src="images/indian.png" width="357" height="600" alt="The Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of the gigantic Cypress tree, etc." title="" />
+<span class="caption">The Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of the gigantic Cypress tree, etc. See page <a href="#page113">113</a>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>One glance appeared to be sufficient for the leader of the party, and as
+he descended he whispered to Neal:</p>
+
+<p>"We have made no mistake. The city can be seen plainly. You and your
+companions may gratify your curiosity, for we shall remain here until
+Poyor comes back."</p>
+
+<p>Then turning to the Indian, Cummings whispered a few words, and the
+former glided through the underbrush, being lost to view almost
+immediately.</p>
+
+<p>By assisting each other the three castaways were soon where such a
+marvelous sight was presented that exclamations of surprise and
+admiration burst from their lips; but, fortunately, the chattering of
+the monkeys would have prevented the outcries from being heard had a
+party of Chan Santa Cruz Indians been at the foot of the tree.</p>
+
+<p>Far to the eastward was a long range of low, rocky mountains, and at the
+north and south spurs or cliffs, all enclosing a beautiful valley in the
+center of which was a city of dazzlingly white buildings.</p>
+
+<p>To look at this collection of houses and temples very long at a time was
+almost impossible because of the peculiar glare which the boys had
+mistaken for the sun's rays.</p>
+
+<p>It was caused by the reflection of the god of day on an edifice in the
+center of the city, the dome-like roof of which was covered with a
+burnished metal substance having the appearance of silver.</p>
+
+<p>The adjoining buildings, composed of white stone having a softness as of
+alabaster, threw this peculiar light in every direction, causing the
+city to stand out amid the green foliage like a huge incandescent mass.</p>
+
+<p>Each house stood in a square by itself, and, judging from the area of
+the city one might have estimated the population at about fifteen
+thousand. The streets were laid out with the utmost precision, and
+composed of what appeared to be fine white sand, while at every
+intersection were monuments of grotesque figures or animals.</p>
+
+<p>At regular intervals were enormous white columns capped with the
+glistening metal, the same as displayed on the dome of the principal
+building and on many of the houses.</p>
+
+<p>After taking in this wonderful picture as a whole the boys gazed at the
+most prominent objects in turn, the central edifice occupying the
+greater share of attention.</p>
+
+<p>That this was a place of worship seemed reasonable to suppose because of
+the crowds of people entering or departing from the opening formed by
+lofty pillars of shimmering metal, and also because of the tiny threads
+of smoke which arose from several apertures in the roof as if from altar
+fires. To confirm the beholders in this belief the faint sound of sweet
+music arose in the air, and instantly the throngs in the streets
+prostrated themselves in adoration of some one of the statues.</p>
+
+<p>The citizens were dressed in flowing garments of white, and all seemed
+intent on worship which was prolonged until after the spectators left
+the tree.</p>
+
+<p>One singular fact was noted by Teddy, and he called Neal's attention to
+it.</p>
+
+<p>Neither on the surrounding hills nor in the city could a single animal
+of any kind be seen. It was as if even the birds from the forest so
+shaped their course as to avoid flying over the dazzling wonderful city
+which was shut out from the rest of the world by the swamp wherein fever
+lurked in its most horrible form.</p>
+
+<p>How long the boys and Jake gazed at this marvelous picture neither of
+them could ever say. They took no heed of the passage of time, and when
+Cummings called softly that it would be well to come down in order to
+gain a little rest before Poyor returned, Teddy noticed with surprise
+that the sun was high in the heavens.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, do you believe now that the Silver City really has an existence?"
+the leader asked when the three stood by his side.</p>
+
+<p>"After that anything seems possible," Neal replied with a sigh as if
+weary of gazing at so much magnificence.</p>
+
+<p>"Save some adjectives expressive of admiration until we are in the city,
+when I fancy you will see very much that is more curious."</p>
+
+<p>"The people don't appear to be so terribly ferocious," Teddy said, "and
+yet you think they would kill us all if our presence was discovered."</p>
+
+<p>"I am positive of it. In a white man they see only one of that race
+which has worked them so much injury, making ruins of many cities, and
+oppressing the rightful owners of the country."</p>
+
+<p>"If that is the case how are we to get in there?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Poyor has a plan which I think will be successful; wait until he
+returns, and if the conditions are favorable to the attempt you shall
+soon know."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose he stays away until a party of Indians take it into their
+heads to come in this direction?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is little danger of our being discovered unless it has been
+suspected we have crossed the swamp, which is hardly probable. Very few
+of the inhabitants ever venture out, and there is no reason why they
+should come to this exact spot. Lie down now, Poyor will be with us by
+nightfall."</p>
+
+<p>It was a simple matter to follow the first portion of this advice; but
+decidedly difficult to close their eyes in slumber after what had been
+seen.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy and Neal, who threw themselves on the ground side by side, could
+not keep their thoughts from the wonderful city, and when both Jake and
+Cummings were apparently wrapped in slumber the former whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think now that we were foolish to come?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, because it isn't so far in the swamp but that we can get out in a
+short time if anything happens, and a glimpse of that city would repay a
+fellow for considerable trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose the Indians get hold of us?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is something I reckon Cummings can take care of. If he has made
+such elaborate preparations for entering, when it is so near where he
+was living we can be pretty certain there will be no very grave
+mistake."</p>
+
+<p>"Even if we succeed in reaching the city I can't understand how it will
+be possible to carry away much gold."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I; but yet you know a small package is valuable, and five persons
+could lug a great deal."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you fancy he brought us simply to carry the treasure for him?"</p>
+
+<p>"He said we would all share alike, so our services wouldn't be of much
+advantage to him, more particularly since he and the Indian could bring
+away a heavier load than all three of us."</p>
+
+<p>In this manner, speculating upon the benefits which might accrue to them
+rather than regarding the great danger to which the entire party was
+exposed, the boys passed the time until late in the afternoon, and then
+Poyor approached so softly that he stood in their midst before any one
+had heard even a rustling among the leaves.</p>
+
+<p>On seeing the man Cummings sprang up eagerly, asked a question in the
+Indian dialect, and the reply was given at great length, Poyor using
+more gestures than the boys had ever fancied were at his command.</p>
+
+<p>That his report was in the highest degree interesting to Cummings there
+could be no doubt, for the latter listened intently, interrupting him
+only to ask some question, and not until nearly half an hour had passed
+was any explanation made to the others.</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings said with a slight show of triumph:</p>
+
+<p>"Poyor has just come from the city, and there is no suspicion that we
+have passed the line of sentinels."</p>
+
+<p>"If he did that what is to prevent us from doing the same?" Jake asked
+as the leader paused for an instant.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing except our skins are white, and he can readily pass himself off
+for a Chan Santa Cruz. He speaks the language, resembles them in
+features, and could make his way around the town with but little
+trouble; but on that point no great amount of time need be spent. Here
+is the plan which I wish to carry into effect: Poyor has found a vacant
+building on the outskirts of the place which he has bargained for,
+representing himself as one of the sentinels recently released from duty
+on the eastern side. In that character no person will be likely to
+wonder why he is without acquaintances, for the watchmen often remain
+away from the city one or two years, entering only when it is necessary
+to procure provisions."</p>
+
+<p>"Is he to go on alone?" Jake asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly not. At a late hour to-night we will accompany him, and all
+our hopes of success depend upon gaining this building without being
+discovered."</p>
+
+<p>"How long are we to stay there?"</p>
+
+<p>"A week if necessary."</p>
+
+<p>"A week!" Teddy and Neal cried in concert.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and I hope we shall be able to remain concealed in the house
+during that time, otherwise it may go hard with us."</p>
+
+<p>"But what do you expect to do shut up in a building, for of course we
+must keep out of sight?" and Jake's face expressed the utmost surprise
+and apprehension.</p>
+
+<p>"That is exactly what you shall learn when we arrive there. Since I have
+proven that the Silver City really has an existence, the least that can
+be done is to aid in carrying out my programme without too much
+discussion."</p>
+
+<p>"You won't have any reason to complain because I don't obey orders,"
+Jake replied quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will soon show you what we expect to do providing our plans work
+without a hitch during the next ten hours. Let's get these traps into a
+more convenient shape for carrying, in order that we may be ready for
+the last stage of our journey when Poyor gives the word."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>IN THE CITY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The boys and Jake were decidedly perplexed and not a little worried in
+regard to the outline of work as given by Cummings. They failed to
+understand how it could be to their advantage to go into the city if it
+should be necessary to remain hidden all the time, or in what way they
+would derive any benefit from the visit.</p>
+
+<p>Although the leader of the party knew from the expression of their faces
+that they were dissatisfied with the general outlook, he did not
+volunteer any information, thinking, perhaps, that it was unnecessary to
+do so since they were where it was impossible to withdraw from the
+enterprise.</p>
+
+<p>Neither Teddy nor Neal believed the party would be exposed to any
+extraordinary danger. The only idea in their minds was as to whether it
+would be possible for them to get out of the swamp in time to take the
+next steamer which left Progresso for the United States, and both
+believed it would be a great misfortune to miss the first opportunity of
+reaching home.</p>
+
+<p>"We can stand it for one week," Neal said in a whisper: "but what I am
+afraid of is that it won't be possible to leave the city at the end of
+that time," and Teddy replied in the same cautious tones:</p>
+
+<p>"It is for us to see that such a contingency does not arise. Jake will
+do as we say, and if Cummings refuses to leave at a date sufficiently
+early for us to reach Progresso, we must force him to act as has been
+promised."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall we do in case he refuses?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are three out of a party of five, and should be able to arrange
+matters to our own liking."</p>
+
+<p>Neal was perfectly contented with such a view of the case, and he felt
+well satisfied that nothing could prevent them from doing as they
+wished; but unfortunately, he failed to take into consideration the very
+important fact that while it might be a simple matter to enter the city,
+they could not be certain of leaving it at will.</p>
+
+<p>"We can do as we please by standing firm to our determination of going
+away in time to take passage on the steamer," he said; "therefore we'll
+see the adventure through to that point, and if Cummings fails in his
+purpose of bringing away a large amount of gold we will have had such an
+experience as can be talked about when we get home."</p>
+
+<p>As for Jake, a glimpse of the glistening walls of the city had literally
+intoxicated him, and his one and only desire was to reach that point
+where he could satisfy himself by the sense of touch as well as sight.</p>
+
+<p>As the time drew near for the final move in the bold scheme Cummings
+became greatly agitated. It was as if all the blood had left his face,
+and his eyes were open wide and staring as he gazed into vacancy.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sick?" Teddy asked in alarm.</p>
+
+<p>The young man shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose I'm acting like a fool; but can't prevent my nerves from
+getting the best of me just at this time. After laboring two years for
+one thing, and then being so near a successful completion of the work,
+is enough to make any fellow excited."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was on the point of saying he fancied that fear of the ultimate
+result might have some share in this alleged nervous attack; but,
+fortunately, he checked himself in time, and turned to watch Poyor who
+was hiding the boat beneath an ingeniously constructed screen of leaves.</p>
+
+<p>Night came slowly; the twittering of the birds and the chattering of the
+monkeys was hushed. Among the dense underbrush the darkness was
+intense, yet the Indian remained motionless in a listening attitude.</p>
+
+<p>Amid profound silence the moments passed until to the boys it seemed as
+if it must have been midnight when Cummings whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"It is time. Poyor shall lead the way, and I will bring up the rear."</p>
+
+<p>Walking in single file, and keeping firm hold of each other's garments
+lest they should be separated, the little party began the last stage of
+the journey.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian went forward as if familiar with all the surroundings, and
+when half an hour had passed he halted only long enough to point ahead
+where, through the foliage, could be seen the city, its buildings
+gleaming ghostly white in the starlight.</p>
+
+<p>The decisive moment had arrived.</p>
+
+<p>If they should be seen by a single person the alarm would be given, for
+the clothing as well as the skin of all the party, save Poyor, would
+proclaim the fact that these newcomers belonged to the hated race, and
+the end could not be long delayed.</p>
+
+<p>Assuring himself that there was no one in sight, Poyor quickened his
+pace, leading the way toward a small building on the outskirts of the
+town, and ten minutes later, the strangers were inside the dwelling;
+but although successful in the undertaking, were virtually prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>The house was very small as compared with the majority of those seen by
+the boys when they gazed from a distance, and had evidently been
+unoccupied a long while.</p>
+
+<p>The one room which comprised the entire lower floor was destitute of
+anything in the way of furniture, and the sides, ceiling and floor were
+formed of the same soft-looking white stone which appeared to be the
+only building material in the city.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor did not give his companions much time in which to inspect this
+portion of the building. With an impatient gesture to the boys who were
+gazing around them in evident disappointment, he led the way up a narrow
+flight of stairs to a sort of attic hardly more than six feet high, and
+with only two narrow slits in the wall to serve as windows.</p>
+
+<p>Here five hammocks had been slung, and on one of them the Indian threw
+himself without a word of rejoicing or comment upon the ease and safety
+with which they had entered the city.</p>
+
+<p>"Now what is to be done?" Neal asked as Cummings started toward the
+stairway.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish to bar the lower door, for it would be exceedingly inconvenient
+if we should have callers."</p>
+
+<p>"It strikes me that there will be very little chance to get gold if we
+are to stay shut up here."</p>
+
+<p>"That's just what has been puzzlin' me ever since I saw the place," Jake
+added. "We're not even in the city, only on the edge, and so far as
+seein' what's goin' on is concerned, the big tree in the swamp would
+have been a better place."</p>
+
+<p>"You may find that we are too near the heart of the town," Cummings
+replied with a grimace. "To-morrow, after Poyor has looked around some,
+we will decide on a plan. You had better go to sleep while there is a
+chance, for no one can say when we may be obliged to beat a hasty
+retreat."</p>
+
+<p>The boys followed this advice for the simple reason that there was
+nothing else to be done. Teddy had looked through the narrow slit in the
+wall; but without being able to see anything of interest, and in this
+city which may have been, and probably was standing when Columbus
+discovered America, the three who had been literally thrown upon the
+coast of Yucatan lay down to sleep.</p>
+
+<p>Owing to the strangeness of their surroundings, and the knowledge of the
+danger which threatened, no one gave himself up to very profound
+slumber.</p>
+
+<p>The silence was so perfect as to be almost oppressive, until half an
+hour before sunrise, when a low strain of sweetest music arose on the
+air, gradually swelling in volume, and finally ending in a wild burst
+which caused Poyor to spring to his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?" Teddy asked, and Cummings replied carelessly:</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing in particular. That music is the summons to prayer, and now is
+the time when the Indian can go through the streets with less danger of
+being discovered."</p>
+
+<p>In another instant Jake and the boys were at the apertures which served
+as windows; but some time elapsed before they could see anything owing
+to the gloom. Then, as day dissipated the darkness, they distinguished
+throngs of white robed figures hurrying from every quarter toward some
+common point, which was probably the temple with its dome of silver.</p>
+
+<p>It was an odd sight to see so many people moving rapidly, but without
+noise, while neither cart nor animal of any kind accompanied them. Here
+and there were men carrying burdens on their backs by aid of a strap
+passed around the forehead, and many women and children literally loaded
+down with flowers.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see any great show of gold or silver," Teddy said, after gazing
+at the scene some time in silence. "No one appears to wear anything like
+jewelry."</p>
+
+<p>"That may be because such metal is too common here," Jake replied. "What
+bothers me is to make out why Cummings and the Indian are so afraid of
+being discovered. These people don't look as if they'd kill a fly unless
+he made a noise, an' that's what they seem to be scared of."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't make a mistake," Cummings whispered, as he overheard the last
+portion of the conversation. "If it was known that a white man had
+succeeded in entering the city our lives would be taken within the next
+hour."</p>
+
+<p>"You may believe all that; but I'll hold to it that they're the most
+peaceable lot I ever saw, until somethin' comes up to prove the
+contrary," and Jake went toward the street door with Poyor, regardless
+of whether he was seen by the passers-by or not until the Indian said
+sharply:</p>
+
+<p>"Go back; I do not wish to die."</p>
+
+<p>"If you're frightened of course I'll get out of the way," Jake replied
+half angrily; "but before we leave this town I'll show you how much
+reason there is for being afraid."</p>
+
+<p>"And in ten minutes from that time you will cease to live," Poyor
+replied gravely, as he left the building, closing the door carefully
+behind him.</p>
+
+<p>"It will be well to remember what he has said," Cummings added sharply
+as he approached the engineer to bar the door. "These people are
+peaceable until the time comes when religion and all the traditions of
+their race tell that a long remembered wrong should be avenged, and then
+no class can be more implacable. I would not show my face outside of
+this door for as much gold as can be found in Yucatan."</p>
+
+<p>This remark silenced Jake, but he was by no means convinced of its
+truthfulness, as could be told by his whispered remark to Neal:</p>
+
+<p>"They know we will have a chance to lug off a pile of money, an' to
+prevent us from wantin' too much, try to prove that we must stay out of
+sight so's they can get the cream of the bargain."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't do anything foolish," Teddy replied earnestly. "Cummings would
+not have asked us to come with him unless there had been good reason for
+wanting assistance, and it is not possible he has made any mistake
+regarding the nature of the people."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had nothing more to say; but it could readily be seen that he
+believed his own ideas on the subject were correct, and at this moment
+something occurred which demanded his entire attention.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor had but just left the building, and a crowd was gathering in front
+of the door, causing Cummings to say with every sign of fear:</p>
+
+<p>"We shall soon have a chance of learning what these people will do in
+event of finding a white man in the city, for it looks as if we were
+discovered."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE FESTIVAL.</h4>
+
+
+<p>It can well be imagined with what anxiety the party in the building
+looked through the narrow apertures at the crowd below.</p>
+
+<p>Even Jake began to fancy he had made a mistake in regard to their
+peaceful dispositions, and Teddy noticed that he examined very carefully
+all the weapons.</p>
+
+<p>Those on the outside were armed chiefly with bows and arrows; but a few
+carried a sort of spear with a tip which looked not unlike glass, and
+Neal whispered to Cummings:</p>
+
+<p>"If they have got nothing but arrows we ought to be able to hold a large
+number in check with our guns."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't make the mistake of despising their weapons, for every one is
+covered with a poison so deadly that a single scratch would be more
+dangerous than a wound from a bullet."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they have learned that we are here?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can't explain in any other way the motive for the gathering; but none
+of them appear to be paying very much attention to the building."</p>
+
+<p>As a matter of fact, although there were four to five hundred directly
+in front of the house, hardly one of them glanced toward the openings
+through which the little party were gazing; but the majority appeared to
+be having a most sociable time.</p>
+
+<p>As the moments passed without any evidence that an attack was to be made
+the voluntary prisoners began to grow more comfortable in mind, and
+again Jake proposed that such people were neither able nor inclined to
+inflict much injury upon any one.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly there was a great commotion among the crowd; the men shouted
+and waved their weapons, danced about in the most grotesque fashion and
+from afar off could be heard the sound of music.</p>
+
+<p>Five minutes later the cause of this sudden change of demeanor became
+apparent.</p>
+
+<p>Down the street from the direction of the forest came several hundred
+women decorated with the most beautiful flowers, and carrying huge
+bouquets or wreaths. They trooped along without any attempt at marching
+in regular order: but on arriving in front of the men they halted
+suddenly in response to sharp strokes on a gong or tongueless bell which
+one of them held high in the air.</p>
+
+<p>The men were now on one side of the street and the women on the other,
+and in this order they stood when twenty persons of both sexes, carrying
+on a broad flower-covered platform a repulsive looking figure apparently
+composed of gold, marched between the ranks and halted.</p>
+
+<p>Instantly every one sank down with bowed head as if in adoration, and
+the invisible music, accompanied by the peals of sweet-toned bells,
+filled the air with melody.</p>
+
+<p>"We were frightened too soon," Cummings said with a sigh of relief. "It
+is a festival of some sort, and this happens to be the place where it is
+to be welcomed to the city. It would be most unfortunate if Poyor should
+take it into his head to come back just at this time."</p>
+
+<p>"He could see the crowd before getting very near and would know enough
+to stay at a distance," Neal replied. "I'd like to know what that statue
+represents."</p>
+
+<p>The golden figure was certainly very odd. Its body was in shape not
+unlike a panther's; but the tail was short, and stuck straight in the
+air. The head might have been formed to represent a monkey, although
+the ears were very long, and the whole was covered with carving to
+represent scales.</p>
+
+<p>"How much do you suppose it weighs?" Teddy asked of Jake, and the
+latter, who had also been trying to compute its value, replied:</p>
+
+<p>"Not an ounce less than a hundred pounds. What a prize that would be if
+we could carry it away!"</p>
+
+<p>"There are many of the same kind in the city." Cummings added, "and we
+should be able to get off with some before a week is ended."</p>
+
+<p>"Then that is the plan you have formed?" Neal said interrogatively.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly. Poyor is to examine all the statues near by, and decide upon
+such as we can pull down some night, after which it will only be a
+question of reaching our boat. I have no fear of being able to get
+through the swamp providing we have a start of five or six hours."</p>
+
+<p>While this conversation was being carried on the people outside remained
+in the same devout attitude; but just as Cummings ceased speaking there
+was a change in the affairs.</p>
+
+<p>The music grew louder, and the bells were rung more rapidly, and the
+devotees sprang to their feet with shouts and songs, the women throwing
+flowers on the platform until the hideous god was nearly hidden from
+view.</p>
+
+<p>When the tongueless bell was struck three times the crowd gathered
+around the image bearers, and all started toward what the white men
+believed was the temple, chanting in perfect harmony with the music.</p>
+
+<p>The worshipers were soon lost to view; but their voices could be heard
+for ten or fifteen minutes, after which clouds of smoke, probably caused
+by burning incense, arose from the silver-domed building.</p>
+
+<p>"If Poyor is wise he will come now," Cummings said, as he looked
+anxiously out. "The people are so intent upon the worship, or
+installation of a new god, whichever it may be, that he can get into the
+house without being seen."</p>
+
+<p>But there were no signs of the Indian. Strain their eyes as they might
+he did not appear.</p>
+
+<p>The sounds of music died away. The smoke ceased to arise from the
+temple, and the people began to walk the streets intent upon their
+business or pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>"It is strange he is so imprudent," Cummings muttered half to himself.
+"Now the only safe way is to wait until night, if indeed he is yet at
+liberty."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think anything has happened to him?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course I can't even guess; but it is very strange he has waited so
+long."</p>
+
+<p>More than that Cummings would not say: but both the boys could plainly
+see he was very anxious, and all grew greatly distressed in mind as the
+hours wore on.</p>
+
+<p>Noon came, and once more the streets were nearly deserted, for the
+inhabitants of the city were indulging in a siesta.</p>
+
+<p>Now Cummings stationed himself at the window, peering out eagerly; but
+all in vain.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly the moments passed. The boys tried to eat; but the terrible
+suspense had spoiled all appetite for food, more especially since it was
+not particularly inviting, and after swallowing a few crumbs Teddy said:</p>
+
+<p>"It's no use, I can't even force it down. Why did we come here, knowing
+at least a portion of the danger?"</p>
+
+<p>"'Cause we were fools," Jake replied philosophically; "but that is no
+reason why we shouldn't have as near to a square meal as is possible,"
+and he began to devour another tortilla.</p>
+
+<p>"We won't despair yet," Cummings said, as he left his post at the window
+and joined the little group in the further corner of the room, "Poyor is
+cautious in the extreme, and may believe it isn't safe to enter the
+house in the daytime under any circumstances."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he say when he would come back?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; it was understood he should return at the first favorable
+opportunity."</p>
+
+<p>"Could you find the way to the boat if we never saw him again?" Teddy
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, although we might have some trouble in doing so."</p>
+
+<p>Then another long interval of silence came upon the little party, during
+which each one listened intently for the slightest sound which might
+betoken a visitor.</p>
+
+<p>Finally Jake fell asleep, and so loud was his snoring that it seemed as
+if he must be heard from the street, therefore the boys pinched him when
+there was too great a volume of sound, and at the same time wished they
+could enjoy the same happy unconsciousness of the situation.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings alternately paced to and fro, and stood by the narrow aperture
+overlooking the street, until nightfall, when the citizens walked up and
+down singing or chatting.</p>
+
+<p>It was as if every one was perfectly happy, and this condition of
+affairs caused Cummings to feel less despondent.</p>
+
+<p>"Look," he said to Neal and Teddy, "if Poyor had been discovered the
+people would show some signs of excitement. We have no reason to fear
+yet awhile."</p>
+
+<p>The argument was certainly a good one, and the boys' courage revived
+wonderfully. They made a reasonably hearty supper of tortillas, and when
+the promenaders began to disappear, thus telling that the hour for
+retiring was near at hand, Cummings went downstairs and unbolted the
+door.</p>
+
+<p>Now every second appeared like a minute, and when it seemed as if the
+night must be well nigh spent a slight sound was heard from below.</p>
+
+<p>Jake would have rushed to the stair-case to welcome the Indian; but
+Cummings restrained him. It was not certain who the visitor might be,
+and with bated breath all listened until a low voice said:</p>
+
+<p>"It is Poyor."</p>
+
+<p>The remark was commonplace in the extreme; but no combination of words
+sounded more sweetly to the boys, and they rushed forward to clasp the
+Indian by the hand.</p>
+
+<p>In the dim light it was not possible to see him very clearly; but from
+the imperfect view all understood that something serious had happened.
+He was panting as if just having concluded a long race, and the flowing
+white garments he had put on before leaving in order to resemble the
+inhabitants of the city, were torn and stained with mud.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings spoke to him in the Indian dialect, and he replied gravely,
+the first words causing the white man to utter an exclamation of dismay.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter? What has happened?" Teddy asked; but Cummings made
+no reply until Poyor had spoken at considerable length, and then he
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"The worst possible misfortune has befallen us. Our boat has been
+discovered and brought into the city. It is believed we are hiding in
+the swamp, and a number of men are searching there for us."</p>
+
+<p>"Why didn't he come straight back to tell us?" Jake asked angrily. "If
+these people are so fierce as you pretend, it is time we were making our
+escape."</p>
+
+<p>"To have approached this place in the daytime would have been in the
+highest degree dangerous, and, besides, he had a good deal of work to
+do."</p>
+
+<p>"Such as what?"</p>
+
+<p>"It was necessary we should know exactly the strength and whereabouts of
+the searching party. That he has discovered."</p>
+
+<p>"And how much good will it do us while we are shut up in here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do not cast reproaches in the time of trouble," Cummings replied
+gravely. "We must work together to extricate ourselves from the danger
+into which I have persuaded you to come."</p>
+
+<p>Jake was silenced, and Poyor continued to tell his story, but still
+speaking in his own language.</p>
+
+<p>The boys fancied he was proposing some plan which did not meet with
+Cummings' approbation, for the latter spoke vehemently at times.</p>
+
+<p>While this was going on Teddy whispered to Neal:</p>
+
+<p>"It begins to look as if the sailors who were drowned in the surf were
+more fortunate than the rest of us. They died quickly, and we shall
+probably find out what it means to be tortured."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't speak of such horrible things, Teddy. We are not captured yet,
+and there is no sense in looking trouble in the face."</p>
+
+<p>"It can't be helped sometimes. I've had enough of adventures, and if we
+do live to escape from this place all the gold in the world wouldn't
+tempt me to get into another such scrape."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h3>
+
+<h4>A RETREAT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Cummings and Poyor talked together fully half an hour before the former
+volunteered any further information to his white companions, and then he
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"It would be useless for me to disguise the truth in any particular, for
+it is important all should know the absolute facts of the situation. In
+laying my plans for this expedition the only contingency for which I did
+not prepare, was exactly what has happened. I never believed there were
+so many sentinels in the swamp that the boat would be discovered, and
+when we came through without seeing a single one, I felt perfectly safe
+on that score."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't it possible the Indians will think it is a craft belonging to
+some of their own people?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"There is no hope of that. She is entirely different in build, and you
+must remember that we left a number of things on board. Those who found
+her came directly to the city, and orders have been given by the chief
+men that the swamp be searched thoroughly. There is no longer any
+possibility that we could go through without being discovered."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we've got no chance of escaping," Jake cried passionately, and
+Cummings replied calmly:</p>
+
+<p>"Who says we haven't? the coast line, where no one would think of
+looking for an enemy, is still open, and what prevents us from trying to
+make our way in that direction?"</p>
+
+<p>"Then you have given up all hope of carrying away any treasure?"</p>
+
+<p>"Under the circumstances I shall be well pleased if we succeed in
+getting away alive. We are now in a position where nothing save escape
+must be thought of, and I am the one who has placed you three in such a
+dangerous situation. Shut your eyes to the fact that so much treasure
+might be gained, and bend all your energies to leaving this section of
+the country. As compared with life gold amounts to very little."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we are to say that the attempt has been a failure," Jake added in
+a tone of reproach.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and I take upon myself all the blame. You have spent but little
+time on the enterprise, while to it I have devoted not less than two
+years, therefore you can get some idea of the extent of my
+disappointment as compared with yours."</p>
+
+<p>"We recognize that fully," Neal replied, "and understand that you
+believed the expedition would be successful; but since it has proven to
+be a failure let us decide upon the proper course to be pursued rather
+than spend our time reproaching each other."</p>
+
+<p>"You are talking like a sensible fellow," Cummings said approvingly.
+"Here is the situation in a nut-shell, and Poyor understands English
+sufficiently to follow us in all we say. To go back by the way we came
+is now impossible, and yet we must leave the city before a house to
+house search is made, as I am convinced will be the case when it is
+shown that there are no strangers in the swamp. The only open course is
+toward the east, over the mountains, and the journey can be accomplished
+if we hang together. I am willing to acknowledge that I have led you on
+an unsuccessful search, although that may be of little satisfaction, and
+now my only aim is to release you from the dangers which beset us all."</p>
+
+<p>"We understand that perfectly," Teddy said quickly, "therefore there is
+no reason why the matter should be discussed. We took the same chances
+that you and Poyor did, consequently our interests are identical. Show
+us how to get out of here, and the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may keep all
+their gold and silver so far as I am concerned."</p>
+
+<p>"But how are we to be paid for the time spent?" Jake asked fretfully.</p>
+
+<p>"By saving your own life, which is now in great danger," Neal replied.
+"Give up all idea of making yourself rich by the venture, and think only
+of how we can best get away."</p>
+
+<p>"That is something for Cummings to fix," Jake replied in a sulky tone.
+"I came here for gold, and if that can't be had let those who put up the
+job help us out of the scrape."</p>
+
+<p>"I have already taken upon myself all the blame of the failure, and
+admitted that it came about through an oversight of mine," Cummings said
+sternly. "Now if you will listen to my plan I believe we can get out of
+here alive, which is the one important thing just at this time when
+everything has gone against us."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you propose to do?" Neal asked, with a glance at Jake which
+should have silenced him.</p>
+
+<p>"Strike for the sea-shore. Poyor believes it is yet possible to leave
+the city on the eastern side without danger of meeting the sentinels,
+the majority of whom have been withdrawn to aid in searching the swamp,
+and by moving quickly we can at least be out of this hornets' nest
+before sunrise."</p>
+
+<p>"You are the best judge; we will follow your directions," Teddy said,
+speaking more calmly than one would have fancied was possible in view
+of all the danger. "Tell us what you think is best and we will agree to
+it, for now Neal and I have but one desire, which is to leave the Silver
+City in the shortest possible space of time. We can be of but little
+assistance in case of a regular fight, and according to my way of
+thinking, your greatest mistake has been in accepting such useless
+companions."</p>
+
+<p>"I am perfectly satisfied that so far as you are concerned I have not
+made any error. With twenty well-armed men I should not try to maintain
+my position, for to hold out against an attack would be impossible, and
+the only question now is whether we can escape. Having been here once I
+will come again, and at some time in the future you shall hear that I
+succeeded in bringing away treasure from this same wonderful city."</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings held a short conversation with Poyor, and when it was
+concluded turned toward Neal and Teddy, as if disdaining to submit any
+plans to Jake, and said:</p>
+
+<p>"My first idea was to make an effort to return by the same way we came;
+but the Indian has persuaded me to the contrary. Are you willing to do
+as we think best?"</p>
+
+<p>"You are as eager to save your own lives as we are ours," Neal replied,
+"and since you are familiar with this country it would be foolish for us
+to offer any advice. Do whatever in the opinion of both is best, and we
+will obey orders."</p>
+
+<p>"Our scheme necessitates an immediate move, for, as yet, no attempt has
+been made to learn if there are any strangers in the city."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you propose to go without making any effort to carry away gold?"
+Jake asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly. The journey has been a failure, through my carelessness as I
+said before, and to load ourselves down with treasure when a long march
+is before us, would be the height of folly."</p>
+
+<p>Jake remained silent, and Neal said:</p>
+
+<p>"Don't waste any more time talking. Let us start at once."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings spoke with Poyor, and the latter replied with the air of one
+who considers himself vanquished, after which the former said:</p>
+
+<p>"We may need all this food. Make it up into bundles, and we will start
+at once. The journey before us is a long and a dangerous one: but, as I
+believe, it is the only way of escape left open."</p>
+
+<p>The boys set about making the small amount of baggage into five parcels
+while Cummings and the Indian were still discussing some point, and when
+the conversation was concluded the former said:</p>
+
+<p>"We will start for the sea coast. There is no immediate hurry, for there
+is yet at least six hours before the inhabitants will be stirring."</p>
+
+<p>"There must be sentinels on the east as well as the west side," Teddy
+suggested.</p>
+
+<p>"True; but if the information brought by Poyor be correct, there will
+not be as strict a watch kept. The Indian believes we should try to
+force a passage through the swamp, fighting in case of a necessity; but
+I prefer that course where the least danger is to be met, even though
+the distance be greater."</p>
+
+<p>Neither Neal nor Teddy cared to discuss the matter: they knew that
+Cummings was the best judge in such a case, and were well content to
+follow his leadership; but Jake did not trust him so implicitly.</p>
+
+<p>"Before we leave here I want to know your plans," he said. "My life as
+well as yours and the others, is in danger, and it is no more than right
+that I have at least a faint idea of what is to be done."</p>
+
+<p>"You are quite right," Cummings replied mildly. "It is my purpose to
+travel toward the east as far as the sea-shore, and from there make our
+way to my hut. So far as I can see it is the only practicable course."</p>
+
+<p>"What does the Indian say?"</p>
+
+<p>"He thinks we can go through the swamp even if we have no boat: but, in
+my opinion, the danger of contracting the fever is too great."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had the appearance of a man who is about to make some protest, and
+Neal whispered to him:</p>
+
+<p>"In such a case as this it is our duty to accept Cummings' view of the
+matter. Do not delay now when we all know that every moment is
+precious."</p>
+
+<p>"Have it your own way, I won't say another word," the engineer replied
+impatiently; "but I think we have followed this man blindly as long as
+we should."</p>
+
+<p>Neal paid no attention to the latter portion of this remark, but said as
+he turned toward the leader:</p>
+
+<p>"It is all right; we are ready."</p>
+
+<p>"Then follow me, and remember that our lives may pay the forfeit if a
+single incautious word is spoken."</p>
+
+<p>Thus speaking he took up one of the packages, looked once more to the
+cartridges in his gun, and started down the stairs, the boys and Jake
+following, while Poyor brought up the rear.</p>
+
+<p>At the outer door he hesitated an instant, much as if to persuade
+himself that it was absolutely necessary to flee from this city to enter
+which he had spent so many days in making preparations, and then,
+throwing it open, he led the way into the deserted streets.</p>
+
+<p>"Our safest plan is to go straight across, rather than try to circle
+around the outskirts where we may meet with sentinels," he said,
+motioning for Poyor to lead the way. "At present no one suspects that we
+are here, consequently the guard will not be particularly on the alert."</p>
+
+<p>"Do as you think best," Neal replied, and then, falling back by the side
+of Teddy, he whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"If it hadn't been for me you wouldn't have gotten into this scrape; in
+case anything happens try not to believe it was my fault."</p>
+
+<p>"There is no possible chance that you can be to blame," Teddy replied
+warmly. "Any one would have accepted the invitation to go yachting, and
+this last part of the cruise is only the result of an accident with
+which you had nothing to do."</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not open his mouth; he acted as if Cummings had done him a
+personal injury in proposing such a trip, and the fact that they were
+obliged to leave without making any effort to carry away the vast amount
+of treasure which he knew to be in the city unguarded, aroused his anger
+in a most unreasonable degree.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor took the lead and conducted the party directly past the enormous
+temple with its ornamentation of silver which shone in the pale rays of
+the moon until the entire structure appeared to be a solid mass of the
+precious metal, and the marvelous sight was too much for Jake, who,
+coming to a sudden halt, said doggedly:</p>
+
+<p>"It may be all right for you boys with rich fathers to turn your backs
+on so much wealth; but I'm goin' to have some part of this treasure, or
+give the Indians a fair chance to kill me."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h3>
+
+<h4>DISCOVERED.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Cummings was bringing up the rear during this march across the city, and
+when Jake halted he naturally thought it was in obedience to some signal
+made by Poyor, therefore he remained silent until hearing Neal say
+imploringly:</p>
+
+<p>"Go on, Jake. Don't stop now when we have a chance of getting away in
+safety, for what is gold in comparison with life?"</p>
+
+<p>"Have you halted with any idea that it may be possible to carry anything
+off with us?" Cummings asked, speaking in a whisper, and Jake replied in
+the same cautious tone:</p>
+
+<p>"That's the size of it. You brought us here with the promise that we
+could make ourselves rich, and when the first little thing goes wrong
+you run. Now I will do as I please."</p>
+
+<p>"It is nothing less than suicide. We have before us a journey so long
+and difficult that however small a burden you may have to carry, it will
+seem all too heavy."</p>
+
+<p>By this time Poyor turned back to learn the cause of the halt, and when
+it was explained he said gravely:</p>
+
+<p>"Each instant we stand here brings death so much nearer. Even at this
+moment watchful eyes may be upon us, and once we are discovered flight
+will be almost impossible."</p>
+
+<p>The little party stood directly in front of what was evidently the main
+entrance to the temple. It was formed of twenty slender shafts of white
+stone which in the moonlight looked translucent, and each column upheld
+a grotesque figure composed of what appeared to be silver.</p>
+
+<p>"I am goin' to have one of them images, no matter what happens," Jake
+said doggedly. "I don't care how much of a tramp there is before us, and
+the more the thing weighs the better I'll be pleased, for it's the first
+chance I ever had to make myself rich."</p>
+
+<p>"But think of us," Teddy whispered. "We all run the risk of being killed
+because of what you propose to do."</p>
+
+<p>"There's no need of your waitin' here. Go on, an' I'll take care of
+myself. I ain't such a chump as not to be able to find my way out."</p>
+
+<p>"It must be as he says. We can wait no longer," Poyor said peremptorily.
+"Better one should die than all," and, seizing Neal by the shoulder, he
+literally dragged him away.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings did the same by Teddy, and as the boys were thus forced from
+the place they saw Jake trying to make his way up one of the smooth
+shafts.</p>
+
+<p>"It is cruel to leave him when you know he will be killed," Neal said as
+he struggled in vain to release himself from the Indian's grasp.</p>
+
+<p>"He knows the danger, and will not come. We must care for ourselves. Now
+remain quiet; there has been too much noise and too long a delay."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor was walking at a pace so rapid that the boys were forced to run;
+but before they reached the next intersecting street a loud crash was
+heard from the direction of the temple, and Cummings whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"He has toppled over one of the columns, and discovery is now certain.
+He has insured our destruction as well as his own."</p>
+
+<p>The words had hardly been uttered when shouts were heard from different
+portions of the city, and, as if he had sprung from the ground, a man
+appeared directly in their path.</p>
+
+<p>A second's delay would have been fatal. Poyor, releasing his hold of
+Neal, dashed forward with the agility of a cat, and springing upon the
+stranger bore him to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>There was a short, sharp struggle which lasted while one might possibly
+have counted ten, and then the man lay motionless while Poyor, grasping
+Neal by the arm once more, darted on down the street.</p>
+
+<p>Now it seemed as if the entire city had been aroused. On every hand
+could be heard shouts as if of command and cries of surprise and anger.
+The sound of footsteps in the rear told that the pursuit had already
+begun, and it was a race for life with the odds fearfully against the
+fugitives.</p>
+
+<p>"You must run now as you never did before," Cummings said sharply to
+Teddy. "There can be no thought of fatigue until we reach some shelter
+where it will be possible to make a stand."</p>
+
+<p>"I can hold out as long as Neal; but neither of us are a match for
+Poyor."</p>
+
+<p>"He could run all day."</p>
+
+<p>Two moments later, when they were nearing a broad street which Cummings
+fancied led to the woods on the eastern side of the city, Poyor
+slackened his pace to say:</p>
+
+<p>"There is one close behind who must be stopped. Will you do it, or shall
+I?"</p>
+
+<p>"Help Teddy along, while I try it."</p>
+
+<p>As the Indian took Teddy by the arm, thus having a boy on either side of
+him, Cummings unslung the rifle which had been strapped over his
+shoulder, and, wheeling suddenly, raised it at a man who was not more
+than forty yards in the rear.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't shoot! It's me!" a familiar voice cried, and as Cummings turned
+to resume the flight he muttered to himself:</p>
+
+<p>"It's a pity they haven't caught you. But for your folly we could have
+passed through the city unobserved."</p>
+
+<p>Jake no longer believed the Chan Santa Cruz Indians to be such a
+peaceable race. When, as Cummings had suspected, the shaft he was trying
+to climb toppled over, he was able to escape injury by leaping to one
+side, and immediately made an effort to detach the statue which was
+cemented firmly to the stone.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed to him that he had but just begun the task when two men rushed
+from the interior of the temple. Fortunately for him they were unarmed
+or his term of life would have expired at that moment; but as it was one
+of them seized a fragment of the stone as he turned to run, and threw it
+with such accuracy of aim that Jake's cheek was cut from the eye to the
+chin as smoothly as if done with a razor.</p>
+
+<p>With the blood streaming down his face Jake ran for dear life in the
+direction taken by the remainder of the party, and now fully realizing
+the danger he had brought upon them.</p>
+
+<p>"I deserve to be killed," he said to himself, "and if that Poyor don't
+try to even up things with me for this night's job it'll be because he's
+a better Indian than I ever gave him credit for."</p>
+
+<p>When the remainder of the party reached the end of the broad street with
+the welcome shelter of the forest not more than half a mile away, Jake
+was ten or twelve yards in the rear, and three times that distance
+behind him were a dozen men who appeared to be gaining each instant.</p>
+
+<p>Again Poyor spoke to Cummings, and again the latter stopped suddenly and
+wheeled about: but this time there was no warning shout to prevent the
+rifle from being discharged.</p>
+
+<p>There was a loud report, a cry of pain from one of the pursuers, and all
+halted for an instant to aid their wounded companion.</p>
+
+<p>When Cummings turned to continue the flight Jake was by his side, saying
+as they ran:</p>
+
+<p>"If it comes to close quarters I'll drop behind, and make as long a
+fight as I can, which will give the rest a chance to gain on the crowd."</p>
+
+<p>"They would surely kill you. There could be no hope in a hand to hand
+struggle."</p>
+
+<p>"I know that, and it will be no more than I deserve. If I hadn't been
+such a fool you would have got through without turning a hair."</p>
+
+<p>This confession and the proposition to sacrifice himself had the effect
+of dissipating Cummings' anger, and he said decidedly:</p>
+
+<p>"We will stick together and take even chances. No matter what has been
+done one shall not be sacrificed to save the rest unless I, who brought
+you here, am that one."</p>
+
+<p>To carry on any extended conversation and at the same time continue the
+pace was out of the question, and during the next five minutes not a
+word was spoken.</p>
+
+<p>Now there were two dozen pursuers, and the boys had become so nearly
+exhausted that Teddy felt positive that he could not keep on his feet
+long enough to reach the forest.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor, seeing that both the boys had nearly run their race, shouted in
+his own language a few words to Cummings, clasped his panting companions
+by the waist, and, although thus burdened, soon drew away from both the
+white men.</p>
+
+<p>Nearer and nearer come the pursuers.</p>
+
+<p>Once more Cummings halts, discharges his rifle, and then presses
+forward.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor gains the shelter while the others are a hundred yards away, and
+allowing the boys to drop to the ground, he unslings Neal's gun, stands
+at the very edge of the cover where he fires two shots just in time to
+save the remainder of the party.</p>
+
+<p>"We must not stop here," he says as Cummings comes to a halt by his
+side. "Help the boys, and leave me here long enough to hold them in
+check until you have put considerable distance between the crowd and
+yourselves."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings waited only until he had given the Indian his own rifle and
+some cartridges, for it was a more effective weapon than Neal's, and
+then he and Jake did as directed.</p>
+
+<p>Traveling in as nearly a straight line as possible they marched rapidly,
+while behind them could be heard shot after shot, telling that Poyor was
+doing his duty.</p>
+
+<p>"If he can keep that up long enough we shall give them the slip after
+all," Jake said, speaking with difficulty as he gasped for breath.</p>
+
+<p>"There are others to be met. Between here and the coast is a line of
+sentinels who may be more vigilant than those in the swamp."</p>
+
+<p>Now that the pace was slower, and because of the assistance rendered,
+Neal and Teddy were able to make their way unaided, and the former said
+as he pushed Cummings from him:</p>
+
+<p>"I am all right now. You have as much as you can do to take care of
+yourself, and it is not fair to half carry me as you and Poyor have been
+doing."</p>
+
+<p>"It hasn't been such a very hard job; but I'm perfectly willing to give
+it up if you are feeling better."</p>
+
+<p>"We are both in fair condition," Teddy replied, and being relieved of
+the burdens the men were able to travel more rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>During the next ten minutes not a word was spoken, and then Cummings
+said as he halted:</p>
+
+<p>"We'll take a little rest, for I am nearly blown."</p>
+
+<p>All threw themselves on the ground where they lay panting until,
+recovering somewhat, Jake asked:</p>
+
+<p>"How is Poyor to find us in this thicket? He can't follow a trail in the
+darkness."</p>
+
+<p>"He will succeed in doing so as&mdash;&mdash; Say, are you wounded?"</p>
+
+<p>"One of those fellows cut my cheek open with a rock; but beyond the pain
+I don't reckon there's been any great damage done."</p>
+
+<p>"You are fortunate that it was not inflicted by an arrow or spear. Let
+me try to bandage it, for the loss of blood will tell upon you if we
+continue this gait very long."</p>
+
+<p>With strips torn from Jake's shirt the wound was bound up in an awkward
+fashion, and Cummings said as he finished the work:</p>
+
+<p>"When Poyor comes he will gather a certain leaf which has healing
+properties, and in a short time all the pain will go away; but I fancy
+you'll carry that scar to your grave."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h3>
+
+<h4>A HALT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Jake professed to have but little care how long the scar might remain on
+his face providing the wound healed, and they succeeded in escaping from
+the Chan Santa Cruz Indians.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing that can happen to us during the journey to Merida would be
+half as bad as to fall into their hands," he said with a shudder, "and
+what surprises me most is that I should have thought they were peaceably
+inclined."</p>
+
+<p>"But that is exactly what they are until it comes to dealing with a
+white man," Cummings replied. "You must remember all that the
+people&mdash;the natives I mean&mdash;have suffered since America was discovered.
+The barbarous treatment they received from the Spaniards is told from
+father to son, and it is a portion of their religious training to work
+all the injury possible to the whites. Read of what the invaders did to
+satisfy their thirst for gold, and then you can no longer wonder why
+these people, the only ones who have kept their city free from the
+conqueror, are so implacable. Remember that Yucatan was once covered
+with populous cities, the ruins of which show even at this late date how
+magnificent they were, how splendid beyond comparison with the one we
+have seen, and you ask yourselves why these Indians do not rise and
+massacre all of the hated color that can be found."</p>
+
+<p>"But you also came hoping to take away their treasure," Neal said,
+smiling at Cummings' vehemence.</p>
+
+<p>"That is true, therefore I have no word of blame when they attempt to
+kill me; but, as a matter of course, I try to save my life even though I
+am to them nothing more than a common robber. In my own eyes, however,
+the case seems different. To procure such goods as I most desired, would
+probably be, by the aid of Poyor, to solve that which scholars have
+studied for so long in vain&mdash;the origin of the Aztecs and Toltecs, for I
+believe the Chan Santa Cruz belong to the latter race, and keep fresh
+all their histories and traditions."</p>
+
+<p>"And now that you have failed it would be better to go home with us,"
+Teddy said.</p>
+
+<p>"This attempt has failed; but I shall try again and again until I
+succeed, providing we get out of this scrape alive, which is by no means
+certain, for we have a long and perilous journey before us."</p>
+
+<p>"Which we are not likely to make unless Poyor comes back," Neal added
+grimly. "It surely seems as if he should be here by this time. I haven't
+heard the report of his rifle for a long while."</p>
+
+<p>"Most likely we are too far away for the sound to reach us. We will wait
+half an hour longer, and then I will go back to see if anything has
+happened."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings had hardly ceased speaking before the Indian appeared in their
+midst, having come so softly that no one heard him until he stood before
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not a good watch you keep," he said to Cummings, speaking in
+English.</p>
+
+<p>"We cannot guard against such an approach as yours. Where are the
+enemy?"</p>
+
+<p>"I left them at the edge of the forest. Knowing how we are armed they do
+not dare to follow very close; but when the sun rises a hundred will be
+at our heels."</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we go on now, or will you rest awhile?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am ready. We have no time to lose."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings rose to his feet, the others following his example, and the
+Indian started forward without delay.</p>
+
+<p>"How far are we from the sea-shore?" Cummings asked as the march began.</p>
+
+<p>"More miles than we shall travel for many days. By sunrise every
+sentinel will know we are here, and it will be impossible to break
+through their lines."</p>
+
+<p>"Then how are we to get home?" Teddy asked in alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"He probably hopes to find some place where we can stay in hiding for
+awhile. In this section of the country there are many large caverns in
+which streams of water are invariably found, thus causing the belief
+that a subterranean river flows from the valley to the sea. If we stop
+at one of them until it is decided we have succeeded in escaping, you
+will not be able to take the steamer as intended."</p>
+
+<p>"But we may have to stay two or three weeks."</p>
+
+<p>"Better that than to be captured," Cummings replied, and then he
+relapsed into silence.</p>
+
+<p>During the next two hours the little party pressed steadily forward,
+making their way with difficulty through the tangled foliage, and then
+Neal was forced to ask for another halt.</p>
+
+<p>"I must rest awhile," he said. "My feet are sore, and it seems
+impossible to take another step."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor halted, was about to seat himself, and then, as if suddenly
+remembering something, he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Wait here. I will soon be back."</p>
+
+<p>The white members of the party were too tired even to talk. Throwing
+themselves upon the ground they enjoyed the luxury of rest, and,
+convinced there was no danger to be apprehended from the enemy until
+daylight, Neal and Teddy gave themselves up to the embrace of slumber.</p>
+
+<p>An hour passed before the apparently tireless Poyor returned, and he
+awakened the sleepers by saying:</p>
+
+<p>"I have found that for which I sought. Come with me, and repose until
+labor will seem a pleasure."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it? A cave?" Neal asked sleepily.</p>
+
+<p>"More than that. An underground house where we can live in safety,
+unless the retreat should be discovered."</p>
+
+<p>It was a great exertion to get into traveling trim; but all hands did it
+after a time, and Poyor led the way, although he had probably been there
+but once before, as if following a familiar path.</p>
+
+<p>After about half an hour's rapid walking the Indian halted at an opening
+in the hillside hardly more than large enough for one to go through on
+his hands and knees, and motioned for the others to enter.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings led the way, and while he was doing so Teddy asked Poyor:</p>
+
+<p>"Have you been here often before?"</p>
+
+<p>"This is the first time."</p>
+
+<p>"How could you see a small hole like that while it is so dark?"</p>
+
+<p>"On the line of these caves the earth is always damp. When we halted
+last I could feel that we were on the underground water course, and it
+was only necessary to follow it up. Here we shall find both food and
+drink."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't understand where the food comes in unless we are to live on
+bats," Neal said laughingly, as he in turn entered the aperture.</p>
+
+<p>By the time Teddy was inside Cummings had lighted a branch of what is
+mistakenly called fat wood, and, using this for a torch, it was possible
+to have a reasonably good view of the temporary home.</p>
+
+<p>The boys found themselves standing in an enormous chamber, from which
+led several galleries or smaller rooms, lined with the same soft white
+stone seen in the buildings of the Silver City, and at the further end
+was a narrow stream rising apparently from the solid rock, crossing the
+cavern to the opposite side where it disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>To describe the beauty of this marble chamber fashioned by nature would
+be impossible. Neal and Teddy had but just begun to realize its
+magnificence when they were startled by the whirring of wings and a
+clucking noise such as is made by a barn-yard fowl, and an instant later
+Poyor had knocked over with a piece of rock what looked very much like a
+chicken.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a toh," Cummings said, as he took the prize from the Indian. "At
+the city from which we came so unceremoniously these birds are kept as
+hens, and their eggs are most delicious."</p>
+
+<p>"But how did this one happen to be in here, I wonder?" Teddy muttered.</p>
+
+<p>"The species are found nowhere else but in the caverns. Probably there
+are several hundred here."</p>
+
+<p>Before the torch had burned out the boys had time to examine the odd
+chicken. It was about as large as a bantam, had soft, silky plumage, and
+a tail composed of two feathers which were nothing more than stems up to
+the very tips, where were tassel-like appendages.</p>
+
+<p>"Now if the enemy does not track us here we can live pretty comfortably
+for a few days; but I hope we shan't be obliged to stay any longer.
+Poyor will destroy our trail as soon as it is light, and if they should
+come I fancy we can tire them out, for one man can hold this place
+against a hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to drink my fill of that water," Jake said, as he groped his
+way toward the rear of the chamber. "It seems as if I hadn't had all I
+needed since we started on this trip."</p>
+
+<p>"Be careful," Cummings shouted quickly. "Don't venture near the stream
+until I get another torch."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because in some of these caverns alligators are found, and it is never
+safe to drink from the running water without first making sure that
+there are no saurian guards about."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings went to the entrance for more wood, and when he returned the
+Indian was with him.</p>
+
+<p>"This will cure the wound on your face," the latter said to Jake as he
+held out a branch covered with small, glossy green leaves. "Take off the
+cloth that I may see it."</p>
+
+<p>While Jake obeyed, Cummings was kindling a fresh torch, and as the light
+fell upon the engineer's cheek both the boys uttered exclamations of
+surprise.</p>
+
+<p>It was certainly a terrible looking wound, the dried blood causing it to
+appear even larger than it really was; but Poyor set about dressing it
+with the utmost indifference, perhaps because he thought Jake deserved
+it for having been so stubborn and criminally foolish.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian chewed the leaves to a pulp, and then spread them thickly on
+the wound, after which Cummings replaced the cloth, and Jake declared
+that the pain had subsided instantly.</p>
+
+<p>"I must remember the name of that plant if it can be found in a dried
+state at home," he said, "and there are many times when such a poultice
+would come in mighty handy."</p>
+
+<p>"He has only bound on leaves from a shrub called guaco; but you needn't
+try to remember the name, for they are efficacious only while green. Now
+that the surgeon's duties have been performed we will get some water,
+and then set about cooking breakfast. Poyor, bring in plenty of wood,
+and then try to find another toh."</p>
+
+<p>At the swiftly running stream nothing resembling an alligator was seen,
+and the white members of the party enjoyed to the utmost copious
+draughts of the ice-cold liquid.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the Indian was rapidly obeying Cummings' orders. He built a
+fire near the water, and by the light which the white stones reflected
+in every direction, had but little difficulty in knocking over three
+more of what Teddy persisted in calling "chickens."</p>
+
+<p>Leaving the cave again he soon returned with a lot of clay which he
+pasted over the tohs without removing the feathers or intestines, and
+thus prepared one would have supposed they were nothing more than so
+many balls of mud.</p>
+
+<p>These he put into the fire, piled the wood over and around them, and
+then sat down to wait for the fruits of his labor.</p>
+
+<p>The boys fell asleep before the fowls were cooked: but after a little
+more than an hour Cummings awakened them to get their share of the
+feast.</p>
+
+<p>The now thoroughly baked clay was broken open, and it was found that the
+feathers and skin of the birds had adhered to the covering, leaving the
+white flesh temptingly exposed.</p>
+
+<p>Among the small amount of stores there was salt sufficient for several
+days' consumption, therefore they were not without seasoning for the
+meat, and Jake, Neal and Teddy were quite positive they had never eaten
+anything half so delicious as this odd chicken baked in a most singular
+manner.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>CAVE LIFE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When the meal was ended it was nearly daylight and Cummings said as he
+stretched himself out close by the entrance:</p>
+
+<p>"It is necessary that the strictest kind of a watch should be kept every
+moment of the time from now on. I'll take the first trick, Jake shall be
+awakened next, and Poyor, who has done the most work, comes last."</p>
+
+<p>"But what are Teddy and I to do?" Neal asked in surprise. "We are as
+well able to stand guard as any one else."</p>
+
+<p>"I allowed that it would be at least twenty-four hours before you were
+in condition for anything," Cummings replied with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"That is where you made a big mistake," Teddy added. "We insist on doing
+our full share."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well, if Poyor is asleep when Jake goes off duty one of you shall
+be called."</p>
+
+<p>It was arranged that they should sleep near the entrance where the
+sentinel could awaken them if necessary, without making a noise, and
+after the weapons were examined once more to make certain they were in
+good working order, all save Cummings made a business of going to sleep.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian did not give any one an opportunity of awakening him. At the
+expiration of an hour, just as Cummings was thinking it time to call
+Jake, he arose and peered cautiously out through the opening.</p>
+
+<p>"Why did you get up so soon?" Cummings asked. "You need rest, and there
+is nothing to prevent your sleeping until noon if you feel so disposed."</p>
+
+<p>"There is much work to be done," he replied gravely. "When the sun rises
+I must examine the trail to make sure it is not too plain."</p>
+
+<p>"It will be another hour before daylight."</p>
+
+<p>"By sitting here I shall be ready to go as soon as it is light."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think you are giving me the true reason," and Cummings ignited
+a match that he might see the Indian's face.</p>
+
+<p>"You must not do that," he said quickly, as he clasped his hand over the
+tiny flame. "It is unwise so near the entrance."</p>
+
+<p>"You believe then that we are in considerable danger?"</p>
+
+<p>"We shall be until we are outside the Chan Santa Cruz country."</p>
+
+<p>"That is not all you can say. I wish to know exactly your opinion of the
+situation."</p>
+
+<p>"You shall know; but it is not well to explain to the others. Our
+enemies will find us I think, and we may be forced to fight to the end,
+for they will not give up the chase until after many days."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think it would be unsafe to push on again now we have had rest
+and food?"</p>
+
+<p>"By this time the sentinels know what happened last night, and the
+forest is full of enemies. A poisoned arrow can be sent in the daytime,
+while he who shoots it remains concealed. Before noon we would all be
+dead."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings was silent for a moment, and then he asked in a low tone:</p>
+
+<p>"How far do you think we are from the sea-shore?"</p>
+
+<p>"The distance is not great; but the way so difficult that the journey
+could not be ended in less than five days."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it seems that we are in a tight place whatever course is pursued."</p>
+
+<p>"We can fight longer here than where the trees conceal our foes," was
+the grave reply, and then Poyor crept through the opening into the
+gloomy forest where wild animals and wilder human beings lurked to
+destroy.</p>
+
+<p>After this conversation Cummings was in no mood for sleep, and he
+refrained from awakening Jake.</p>
+
+<p>Seated where he could hear the slightest sound from the outside, he
+reflected upon all the dangers of the situation, and reproached himself
+for having led the boys and the engineer into such peril.</p>
+
+<p>"I would have been culpable if no one but Poyor had accompanied me," he
+said to himself, "and now I am directly responsible for the lives of
+those who but for me, would at this moment be safe in Merida."</p>
+
+<p>There was nothing to be gained by scolding one's self, and he strove
+with very poor success to put such thoughts from his mind until the sun
+rose, partially lighting up the gloomy recesses of the forest, and
+sending tiny rays of light through the narrow aperture.</p>
+
+<p>The three sleepers breathed regularly and noisily; but the sentinel
+disturbed them not.</p>
+
+<p>The minutes passed slowly until two hours had elapsed, and then a slight
+rustling of leaves near the entrance caused Cummings to seize the rifle
+more firmly and peer out.</p>
+
+<p>It was Poyor returning, and he appeared weary like one who has run a
+long race.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you seen anything?" Cummings asked anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"There were four Indians about a mile south from here. They came from
+the city last night, and are searching. It was possible to hear them
+talk. The sentinels near the coast have been doubled in number, and
+there is little hope we could pass them."</p>
+
+<p>"It is barely possible they may not find this cave; the entrance is
+small, and almost hidden by the brushes."</p>
+
+<p>"Yet I found it in the night."</p>
+
+<p>"True," Cummings replied gloomily, and as he said nothing more Poyor
+went to the stream to quench his thirst.</p>
+
+<p>While passing by Jake he accidentally brushed the latter's arm with his
+foot, and the engineer was on his feet in an instant, staring around
+stupidly as if believing the enemy was upon him.</p>
+
+<p>"Why didn't you call me to stand my watch?" he asked in a loud tone, and
+Poyor, darting back to his side whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"It is not safe to make any noise. Do not so much as speak aloud."</p>
+
+<p>By this time the boys were aroused, and when the Indian had cautioned
+them in turn all three went to where Cummings was seated.</p>
+
+<p>"Are we going to move, or have you concluded to stay here?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall be obliged to make this our headquarters for a few days. Poyor
+has seen people from the city in the immediate vicinity, consequently it
+is advisable to keep under cover."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we will be able to leave in a week?" Teddy asked
+anxiously, and Cummings replied evasively:</p>
+
+<p>"I hope so."</p>
+
+<p>To Jake, who did not feel so eager to reach home by the next steamer
+that left Progresso, the prospect of remaining in the cave several days
+was agreeable rather than otherwise, and he asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Are we to cook any breakfast this morning?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, because the smoke might be seen. To-night there will be no such
+danger, and the light can be screened from view, therefore it is a case
+of getting along with a cold bite until then. Sleep as much as possible
+in order that you may be ready to do your share of the watching, and
+remember that perfect silence is absolutely necessary."</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings intimated that the conversation should cease, by turning
+his attention to what might be happening outside, and the three went
+toward the opposite end of the cavern where the Indian had thrown
+himself down for a nap.</p>
+
+<p>Here, after discussing what little they knew regarding the situation,
+they ate a few totopostes, a thin, dry tortilla which will remain sweet
+many days, and then gave themselves up to slumber once more.</p>
+
+<p>To sleep when one does not feel the necessity of such rest is, however,
+not an easy matter to be arranged, and after two or three short naps the
+boys found it impossible to woo the drowsy god.</p>
+
+<p>They walked around the cavern, arousing flocks of tohs; but, owing to
+the dim light, finding nothing worthy of attention, and then they went
+to the entrance where Cummings refused to hold any conversation with
+them because of the possibility that some of the enemy might be lurking
+outside, where it was possible to hear the sound of their voices.</p>
+
+<p>In this restless manner the day was spent, and when night came again
+Poyor ventured out once more.</p>
+
+<p>By this time Cummings felt the necessity of gaining a little rest, and
+he proposed that Neal and Teddy take their turn at standing watch.</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be so tedious if you remain here together," he said, "and
+we will give Jake a job later in the night."</p>
+
+<p>It was really a relief to the boys to have something to occupy their
+time, and as they took his place at the entrance he lay down near at
+hand where they could awaken him without difficulty in case it should
+become necessary.</p>
+
+<p>To repeat all the unimportant incidents of the night would be tedious.
+When Poyor returned from his first trip outside he built a fire near the
+stream, shielded the flame by a screen of boughs that the light might
+not be reflected from the entrance, and then, with the air of one who is
+accustomed to such work, set about catching "chickens" enough to make a
+hearty meal.</p>
+
+<p>Dishing these up in clay he roasted them as before, and Cummings was
+awakened to share in the appetizing meal.</p>
+
+<p>Then the Indian went out again, while Jake was standing watch, and an
+hour later (it was then about two o'clock in the morning), he returned,
+and roused Cummings, saying in his native tongue as he did so:</p>
+
+<p>"Five miles from here is a smaller cave. The sentinels have just
+finished searching it. They will be here in the morning. I have thought
+we might slip past them, by exercising great caution, and it would be
+just so much nearer the coast."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe it should be done?" Cummings asked, as he sprang to his
+feet.</p>
+
+<p>"It can do no harm, providing we are not discovered during the march
+through the forest, and we may possibly be able to throw them off the
+scent."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we will start at once. Under such desperate circumstances nothing
+should be neglected which might be of benefit. How much food have we got
+on hand?"</p>
+
+<p>"All that will be needed. It is not difficult to procure provisions in
+this forest."</p>
+
+<p>It surely seemed as if they might better their condition very materially
+by making this change, and, in view of all things, it was the proper
+man&oelig;uvre since by remaining there was no doubt the party would be
+discovered, when a regular siege must necessarily be the result.</p>
+
+<p>There was yet a considerable amount of the roasted tohs on hand. This
+was wrapped in leaves with the remainder of the provisions, and all the
+luggage made up in three packages, for it had been decided that the boys
+should not be called upon to carry any burden.</p>
+
+<p>"It may be that we shall be obliged to move quickly," Poyor said, "and
+it is best they have nothing but their guns."</p>
+
+<p>When everything was in readiness for the start the Indian went outside
+once more to reconnoiter, and on his return the final preparations were
+made.</p>
+
+<p>He, Cummings and Jake fastened the bundles to their backs; Neal and
+Teddy were cautioned to take plenty of cartridges from the general
+store, and then, Poyor leading the way, they emerged from the cave.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h3>
+
+<h4>A CHANGE OF BASE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Although the boys did not know the full extent of the danger, they could
+understand something of the anxiety felt by both Cummings and Poyor when
+the shelter of the cave had been left behind.</p>
+
+<p>The latter moved with the utmost caution, taking half a dozen steps and
+then stopping to listen; halting whenever the foliage rustled more than
+he fancied was usual and otherwise acting as if believing the enemy had
+completely surrounded them.</p>
+
+<p>Under such circumstances the advance was necessarily slow, and at least
+an hour was consumed in traveling less than a mile.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was on the point of protesting against such excessive precaution
+when the sound of voices caused all the party to crouch low among the
+bushes, hiding themselves in the foliage just as four Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians came to a halt not more than twenty feet away.</p>
+
+<p>It was not difficult to distinguish the form of each one even amid the
+gloom, and from their man&oelig;uvers Teddy and Neal were confident that
+they had halted for the remainder of the night.</p>
+
+<p>It would have been impossible to hold any conversation, however guarded,
+without the certainty of being heard while these men were so near, and
+the fugitives remained motionless, hardly daring to breathe, until it
+seemed as if some change of position must be made regardless of the
+consequences.</p>
+
+<p>Each one with the possible exception of Poyor, was so cramped as to be
+in great pain: but all knew that the slightest unusual noise among the
+foliage would have attracted attention.</p>
+
+<p>Of course Cummings' party was more than a match for the Indians; but in
+addition to his disinclination to begin a fight, was the chance that
+there might be others in the immediate vicinity who would join in the
+battle, thus reducing the odds which appeared to be in favor of the
+white men.</p>
+
+<p>It was in the highest degree important, also, that they remain hidden,
+for once the Indians got a glimpse of the party it would be a simple
+matter to track them to the next hiding place.</p>
+
+<p>There was another and a very weighty reason why both Cummings and Poyor
+wished to avoid an encounter in the forest, even though their weapons
+were much superior to those carried by the Chan Santa Cruz so far as
+rapid work was concerned. Unless struck in some vital part, the chances
+are in favor of recovery from a bullet wound; but let the skin be
+punctured ever so slightly by arrows poisoned with the venom of the
+snake known as the nahuyaca and death is certain to follow.</p>
+
+<p>With all this in mind it is little wonder that the fugitives suffered
+considerable pain before making any attempt to change positions, and
+that they would be forced to remain exactly where the halt had been
+made, until morning, seemed positive.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor was well content to stay there as long as the men carried on a
+conversation, for he was thus enabled to get some valuable information
+concerning their proposed movements, and not a word escaped him.</p>
+
+<p>Three hours elapsed before the pursuers gave any sign of leaving the
+place, and then a peculiar sound as of a night bird calling to its mate,
+caused them to start to their feet.</p>
+
+<p>It was evidently a signal from another party of pursuers, for these men
+answered it by a similar cry, and it was repeated several times by those
+in the distance.</p>
+
+<p>A moment later the Indians had started, and as they disappeared Neal
+whispered to Teddy:</p>
+
+<p>"I never realized before how much comfort there is in the ability to
+move whenever a fellow feels so disposed."</p>
+
+<p>"If I'd been obliged to keep still ten minutes longer I believe my legs
+would have dropped off," Teddy replied with a sigh of relief.</p>
+
+<p>There was no time to say anything more; Poyor had begun the advance, and
+the little party moved slowly and silently through the gloomy forest
+until the Indian halted in front of an opening slightly larger than the
+one leading to the cave they had just left.</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not wait to be told that the journey had come to an end; but at
+once crawled through, followed by Cummings with the materials for making
+a torch, and in a few moments the boys were also inside.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor did not accompany them; he wanted to assure himself that they had
+not been discovered, and proposed to stand guard among the trees until
+this had been accomplished.</p>
+
+<p>The cavern was not more than half as large as the one first visited; but
+was formed of the same peculiar stone. Here also was a stream across one
+corner, the bottom of which sloped gently up to the shore of fine white
+sand, and, so far as could be ascertained, it did not afford a home for
+disagreeable monsters in the shape of alligators.</p>
+
+<p>There was plenty of evidence near the entrance to show that in addition
+to searching the cave the Indians had made a long halt. Fragments of
+totopostes were scattered around, and a small pile of fine shavings told
+where one of them had repaired an arrow.</p>
+
+<p>The only objection which could be found in this new refuge was that it
+had not been taken possession of by tohs. Cummings searched everywhere
+in vain for the "chickens," and the troubled look on his face spoke
+plainly of his disappointment in failing to find a supply of food close
+at hand.</p>
+
+<p>"If we should be discovered and besieged it will be a case of short
+rations," he said as the little party returned to the opening to wait
+for Poyor.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you suppose there are fish in the stream?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"I never heard that there were; but even if it was stocked with them we
+should be none the better off since there are neither hooks nor lines
+here."</p>
+
+<p>"Neal and I have got plenty of both, so what's to hinder our finding
+out? A fresh fish wouldn't taste badly."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well. I'll stay here on guard, and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>He was interrupted by the arrival of Poyor, who had crept through the
+short passage without making sufficient sound to be heard by those who
+were supposed to be watching, and, speaking in English, he said to
+Cummings:</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think there is any one near here, and now I wish to go further
+on to learn where the next line of sentinels is posted. We may be able
+to change our quarters again, and if every move takes us nearer the
+coast we shall be gaining just so much every time. You must keep a
+better watch, however, for if I can surprise you, so can others."</p>
+
+<p>"I will take it upon myself to see that no one else is able to do the
+same thing," Cummings replied with a laugh. "When you are outside in the
+vicinity I always feel secure; for the best Chan Santa Cruz that ever
+lived couldn't pass without your knowledge. Did you hear anything of
+importance while we were hiding so near that party?"</p>
+
+<p>"From what they said it is positive fully a hundred men have been sent
+from the city to search for us, and with the sentinels there must be
+double that number between here and the coast."</p>
+
+<p>"It would seem as if with so many they ought to run us to the ground
+finally," Cummings said musingly. "Where were those fellows going?"</p>
+
+<p>"They had been following the wet track examining the caves, and began
+near the range of hills which forms the east boundary of their country.
+One of the party believed we had doubled back in order to cross the
+swamp, and if we can remain hidden it may not be long before all the
+searchers will be sent in that direction."</p>
+
+<p>"Did they make any talk about what would be done with us in case they
+run us down?" Jake asked.</p>
+
+<p>"All are to be taken to the city alive, if possible, and it is not hard
+to say what would be our fate there."</p>
+
+<p>"What do they do with their captives?" Jake continued, as if this not
+very cheerful subject fascinated him.</p>
+
+<p>"A white man would be sacrificed in the temple before the gods, and the
+death stroke would not be delivered until much torture had been
+inflicted."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't talk of such horrible things," Teddy interrupted nervously. "It
+can do us no good to learn all the terrible particulars. I want to keep
+my mind on the one idea of escape."</p>
+
+<p>"That is where you are right," Cummings replied approvingly. "We shall
+be worth any number of dead men for some time to come, and won't discuss
+even the possibility of capture. When are you going to start, Poyor?"</p>
+
+<p>"When I have bound more guaco leaves on this man's wound," was the
+answer, and now the boys noticed that he had brought a fresh supply of
+the wonderful shrub.</p>
+
+<p>After preparing it as before the bandage was removed, and by the light
+of a splinter of fat wood which Cummings fired with a match, it could be
+seen that the edges of the gash had already united.</p>
+
+<p>"To-morrow there will be no reason for keeping it tied up."</p>
+
+<p>"That is to say, the wound will be healed, and you'll have a souvenir of
+the Silver City which can never be lost," Cummings added.</p>
+
+<p>"I won't complain, for I came out of the scrape much better than I
+deserved," the engineer replied with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor was now ready to go on the scout, and he delayed only long enough
+to say:</p>
+
+<p>"There must be no talking while I am away, for one who speaks cannot
+listen, and if the enemy should come here again his approach will be
+like that of a serpent."</p>
+
+<p>"You shan't have any cause to complain," Cummings replied, and an
+instant later the Indian had left the cave.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy now thought the time had come when he should settle the question
+of whether there were any fish in the stream, and after gaining
+Cummings' permission to make the attempt he and Neal brought out the
+lines and flies which had been saved from the wreck of the Sea Dream.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall need bait," he whispered. "If there were a million fish there
+they couldn't see a fly in the dark, and, besides, if this river runs
+underground entirely not one of them knows anything about insects."</p>
+
+<p>"A piece of roasted toh will be the very best we could have," and Neal
+soon brought out some of the toughest portions of the remnants left from
+the last meal.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings would not listen to their proposition that a fire be lighted,
+therefore it was necessary to work in the dark, and they experienced
+considerable difficulty in beginning the task.</p>
+
+<p>Then, while Jake sat near by deeply interested in the experiment, the
+boys moved their lines to and fro, forced to wade quite a distance into
+the water, and ten minutes passed before there was any sign that their
+efforts would be rewarded by success.</p>
+
+<p>"I've got a bite," Teddy whispered excitedly. "By the way he pulled it
+must have been a big fel&mdash;&mdash; Hello, he's taken hook and all!"</p>
+
+<p>"Tie on another quick while I try to catch him," and Neal ventured
+further into the water, throwing the line as far as possible toward the
+other side.</p>
+
+<p>The thought came into Jake's mind that, while no alligators had been
+seen when they first entered it was by no means certain one or more
+would not follow down the course of the stream, and he was on the point
+of warning Neal not to venture too far from the edge of the shore, when
+there was a mighty splash, a cry of fear and pain from the fisherman,
+and the engineer shouted regardless of the fact that the enemy might be
+close at hand:</p>
+
+<p>"Help! An alligator has got Neal!"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h3>
+
+<h4>A DESPERATE STRUGGLE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>There was no necessity for the outcry. The splashing of the water told
+Cummings what had happened even before Jake had time to shout, and he
+started forward at full speed, carrying with him the materials for
+torches.</p>
+
+<p>When Jake and Teddy were in a condition to understand anything, for the
+sudden attack had bewildered them to a certain extent, Neal was lying
+face downward upon the sand, and being slowly dragged backward.</p>
+
+<p>The alligator had evidently snapped at his leg, and, missing his aim,
+had caught the boy's trousers rather than the flesh. Instead of
+releasing his hold for a better grip, he was trying to drag Neal into
+deeper water, and once there the struggle would have been quickly ended.</p>
+
+<p>Neal had dug his hands into the sand, straining every muscle to prevent
+being pulled into the stream; but despite all efforts the monster was
+rapidly getting the best of him.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings lost no time after arriving on the scene of action. The boys'
+cries had guided him to the exact spot, and he waited only long enough
+to kindle a blaze before joining in the fight.</p>
+
+<p>"Teddy, go back to the entrance, get one of the guns, and be sure that
+no one comes through, for we are likely to make so much noise here that
+if any of the enemy are in the vicinity we shall be discovered. Jake,
+you are to hold the torch, and take good care that it burns brightly."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings was armed with nothing but his hunting knife and by this time
+the alligator had dragged fully half of Neal's body into the water.
+There seemed to be but little hope that the boy could be rescued before
+serious injury had been inflicted.</p>
+
+<p>Pulling off his coat and belt Cummings leaped boldly on the back of the
+saurian monster, burying the blade of his knife in the alligator's eye
+at the same time, and then ensued a most terrific struggle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="page193"></a>Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, and put
+forth every effort to sink in the deeper water to dislodge the more
+formidable antagonist who was striking beneath the surface with his
+weapon in the hope of hitting some vulnerable spot.</p>
+
+<p>Jake stood on the bank holding the torch high above his head to prevent
+it from being extinguished by the showers which were sent up by the
+lashing of the monster's tail, and powerless to aid in the fight for
+life.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly but surely Neal was being pulled from the shore. With only the
+sand to clutch he could retard, not check the saurian's movements, and
+work as he might, it seemed impossible for Cummings to strike a fatal
+blow.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop your torch and seize the boy by the arms," the latter shouted as
+he saw that the battle was going against him. "At this rate I shall soon
+be where it will be out of the question to prolong the struggle."</p>
+
+<p>Jake did as he was commanded, and in the darkness the remainder of the
+terrible fight was waged.</p>
+
+<p>The engineer pulled until to Neal it seemed as if his arms would be torn
+from their sockets, and the alligator retained his hold as he struggled
+to throw off Cummings.</p>
+
+<p>The noise of the combat sounded almost deafening to Teddy, who was doing
+his best to listen for any unusual disturbance among the foliage
+outside, and he felt confident that if the enemy was anywhere in the
+vicinity the secret of their hiding place would soon be discovered.</p>
+
+<p>The struggle lasted only five minutes; but Neal would have said an hour
+had passed since he was first seized, and then Cummings won the victory
+by slipping from the alligator's back regardless of the rapidly moving
+tail, and stabbing him under the fore leg.</p>
+
+<p>Even then it appeared as if the victory was to be purchased at a great
+cost, for, in order to avoid being killed by the monster's dying
+struggles, Cummings was forced to release his hold, and the current
+carried him rapidly toward the channel formed by the waters through the
+rock.</p>
+
+<p>"Light the torch!" he shouted, putting forth all his strength in order
+to breast the tide. "I'm in the middle of the stream, and likely to be
+carried through the wall."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had pulled Neal high up out of the water the instant the
+alligator's hold was released, and at this appeal he dropped him
+suddenly, groping around for the bundle of wood so hurriedly cast aside.</p>
+
+<p>It was several seconds before he could find it, and then much valuable
+time was lost in trying to ignite the fuel made damp by the spray which
+had been thrown up. It seemed to him that never had he been so clumsy,
+and the anxiety to move quickly only served to retard his efforts.</p>
+
+<p>Finally, after what to Teddy appeared to be a very long while, the fat
+wood was ignited, and then it could be seen that Cummings was in a most
+dangerous position. He was not more than six feet from the aperture
+through which the water raced with redoubled force because the opening
+was several inches lower than the surface, and swam as if nearly
+exhausted.</p>
+
+<p>Jake was the only one who could render any assistance just at this
+moment, and he proved to be equal to the occasion.</p>
+
+<p>Seizing one of the guns he waded into the water to his waist, and
+succeeded in extending the weapon sufficiently for Cummings to grasp the
+end of the barrel.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on for grim death; I've got to drop the torch!" he shouted,
+suiting the action to the words, and Teddy could see no more because the
+light was suddenly extinguished.</p>
+
+<p>Now the sentinel forgot that the enemy might creep upon them and running
+forward he cried:</p>
+
+<p>"Don't give in, Jake; I'll help you."</p>
+
+<p>Before he could reach the stream the work was accomplished. Jake pulled
+Cummings on the bank by the side of Neal, and proceeded to relight the
+torch, a difficult matter since the matches in his pocket had been
+spoiled by the action of the water.</p>
+
+<p>In this last work Teddy was able to render some assistance, and the
+flame had but just sprung up from the wood when Cummings said hurriedly:</p>
+
+<p>"Extinguish that light. If we haven't advertised our whereabouts to the
+Indians already there is no reason for taking foolish risks. We'll
+attend to matters here, Teddy, and you get back to the entrance."</p>
+
+<p>This command was obeyed at once, and the sentinel heard only a faint
+sound from the direction of the stream until his companions rejoined
+him, none the worse for the battle except in the respect of being
+decidedly wet.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you heard anything suspicious?" Cummings asked anxiously.</p>
+
+<p>"Not the slightest noise. If there had been any Indians in the vicinity
+they would surely have made an attempt to enter when all hands was
+raising such an uproar."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings crept through the short tunnel and investigated in the
+immediate vicinity of the opening before he could believe they had been
+so fortunate, and when he returned Jake said:</p>
+
+<p>"I thought you wouldn't find anything. If those imps had had the
+slightest inkling of where we are it wouldn't have been necessary to
+wait so long as this before the fact was made known."</p>
+
+<p>"It was better to be sure. Poyor was so careful to caution us about a
+noise that I was afraid he knew some of them were lurking near by. It is
+all right, however, and we can congratulate ourselves on a fortunate
+escape from more than one danger."</p>
+
+<p>The weather was so warm that no one felt any serious effects from the
+involuntary bath. A portion of the wet clothing was taken off and hung
+on the guns set in the sand as stakes, to dry, and since their fears
+regarding the proximity of the Indians had been partially set at rest by
+Cummings' survey, there was a general disposition to talk of something
+foreign to the struggle through which they had just passed.</p>
+
+<p>"You have said very much about the poisoned arrows which the Chan Santa
+Cruz Indians use," Neal began, "and I would like to know how they manage
+to render them so deadly."</p>
+
+<p>"It is by no means a difficult matter, and as Poyor's people use very
+nearly the same method of increasing the death-dealing power of their
+weapons, I can describe the process exactly," Cummings replied, speaking
+in a whisper, regardless of the Indian's remark that "he who talks
+cannot listen." "You have heard me say many times that the nahuyaca is
+the most venomous of serpents, and instead of being content with a
+single bite, as is the case with snakes in general, he strikes many
+times with almost incredible rapidity. When the Indians wish to prepare
+the poison for their arrows or spears they first get the liver of a
+tapir, or some other animal as large, and then hunt for the species of
+serpent I have spoken of. Once found he is pinned to the ground with a
+forked stick in such a manner that he can use his head freely; but yet
+be unable to escape, and the liver, fastened to a long pole, is held
+where he can strike at it.</p>
+
+<p>"When the snake refuses longer to bite he is killed, and the liver
+placed where it will decompose without any of the moisture being lost.
+You can imagine what a mixture it is when thus prepared, and in it the
+weapons are dipped.</p>
+
+<p>"It is said that the venom retains its deadly properties for many weeks,
+and, in fact, I know of a native who came very near losing his life by
+being scratched with an old arrow that must have been poisoned nearly a
+year previous."</p>
+
+<p>"I should think they might make a mistake when shooting game, and use a
+doctored arrow rather than one of the ordinary kind," Teddy said.</p>
+
+<p>"That could only result from sheer carelessness. The point of a poisoned
+weapon is covered with a reddish brown substance which cannot be
+mistaken, and, for greater security, the feathers used for the tip are
+invariably green. A Central American Indian never takes a green shafted
+arrow, nor a spear on which is painted a band of the same color, when he
+goes out to procure food."</p>
+
+<p>"Then if we happen to meet these fellows who are hunting for us, we are
+likely to come out second best even though they have only bows with
+which to shoot," Jake suggested grimly, and, evading a direct answer,
+Cummings replied:</p>
+
+<p>"We will hope that we shan't get near enough to let any such thing as
+that trouble us."</p>
+
+<p>Then the conversation gradually ceased. Neal and Teddy, after learning
+that Cummings intended to remain on watch until Poyor returned, lay down
+together, where for at least the hundredth time they discussed the
+chances of reaching home within a reasonable number of days, and,
+hopeful though both tried to appear, neither could bring himself to set
+any definite day for the end of the dangerous journey which might never
+be finished.</p>
+
+<p>"There is so much certain," Neal said decidedly after a short pause,
+"once we get out of this section of the country we'll go to the nearest
+sea-port and wait there for a steamer or a vessel, without ever setting
+our feet outside the town. There'll be no more delays if we get clear of
+this scrape."</p>
+
+<p>"You can count me in on that, and now I'm going to sleep. It seems as if
+a week had passed since we started from the last cavern."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had already taken advantage of the opportunity to indulge in
+slumber, and soon Cummings was the only one on the alert; anxiety kept
+his eyes very wide open, for he believed Poyor should have returned some
+time before.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h3>
+
+<h4>A LONG HALT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When the morning dawned Poyor was still absent and Cummings' anxiety had
+become intense.</p>
+
+<p>It hardly seemed possible the Indian would go very far from the cave of
+his own free will, and that he had been captured by the enemy appeared
+more than probable.</p>
+
+<p>Neither Jake nor the boys awakened until after the sun had risen, and,
+as a matter of course, the first inquiry of each was concerning the man
+upon whom all depended so entirely.</p>
+
+<p>Before Cummings could give words to the fears which had haunted him
+during the night the entrance to the cave was darkened, and Teddy cried
+joyfully:</p>
+
+<p>"Here he is, and I hope we are to make another move pretty soon, for
+after last night's adventure this isn't the most pleasant place I ever
+saw in which to spend any length of time."</p>
+
+<p>It could easily be seen from the Indian's general appearance that he
+brought no bad news, and without waiting to be questioned he went
+toward the stream to quench his thirst.</p>
+
+<p>A sharp cry from both the boys caused him to halt very suddenly, and
+when Cummings told the story of the adventure with the alligator he
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"You should not have made such an attempt except when a fire was
+burning, and even then to wade into the water was wrong. I will get what
+can be used for both drinking and fishing."</p>
+
+<p>Again he left the cave, returning ten minutes later with what looked
+like a slender bamboo, save that there were no joints in it. Through the
+middle of the pole, running the entire length, was a small hole hardly
+larger than is to be found in a reed, and with this while standing five
+or six feet from the stream he drank at leisure, keeping his eyes fixed
+upon the surface of the water to guard against an attack.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus quenched his thirst he returned to where Cummings was on
+guard and told the story of his wanderings.</p>
+
+<p>He had followed straight along the line of moisture, finding cave after
+cave but none of them as well adapted to their purpose as was this one,
+and had seen none of the enemy until five or six miles had been
+traversed, when a strong cordon of sentinels was discovered.</p>
+
+<p>The men were stationed not more than twenty feet apart, and, as nearly
+as he could judge, had been ordered to remain and prevent the fugitives
+from leaving the country by way of the coast. From what he already knew
+concerning the people, he understood the number of men on duty at this
+particular point had been largely increased, therefore the natural
+inference was that there were two distinct bodies engaged in trying to
+capture the white men. One whose duty it was to guard the boarder so
+thoroughly that it would be impossible to escape, while the other
+scoured the forest and swamp.</p>
+
+<p>"We must stay here several days," he said in conclusion. "After a time
+the men will grow careless, and then we may be able to make our way
+through the lines; but now it is impossible."</p>
+
+<p>Until this moment Neal and Teddy had hoped there might yet be a chance
+for them to reach Progresso in time to take passage on the steamer as
+first agreed upon; but now they were in despair. Poyor spoke so
+positively that there could be no doubt the journey to the coast would
+be a long one, in case they ever succeeded in making it, and the
+thoughts of the loved ones at home who were probably mourning them as
+dead caused them to be more gloomy than on the night of the flight, when
+it did not seem possible any of the party would escape alive.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings, who had no care as to when he reached the coast, and Jake, to
+whom time was no particular object, received the news calmly. A week
+more or less made but little difference to them, and after a short pause
+Cummings said:</p>
+
+<p>"If you will stay on guard, Jake, I'll find out if it is possible to
+catch any fish. The food supply is an important matter which should be
+settled at once, for we must not depend upon what can be gotten in the
+forest, since no one can say how soon we may be besieged."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor lay down to sleep as if perfectly indifferent to the experiment,
+and the boys followed Cummings. To watch him fish was better than
+remaining quiet thinking over their troubles.</p>
+
+<p>The reflection of the sun from the outside had so far dispelled the
+gloom that it was possible to distinguish surrounding objects with
+reasonable distinctness, and Cummings stood by the bank of the stream as
+he tied one end of Teddy's line to the pole Poyor had used for drinking
+purposes, while, with the last remaining fragments of roasted toh, began
+the work.</p>
+
+<p>In the most perfect silence the boys watched him for ten minutes, and
+Teddy said:</p>
+
+<p>"I guess you'll have to give it up as a bad job. There's nothing but
+alligators in the stream, and what they most want is another chance to
+get hold of Neal's trousers."</p>
+
+<p>"It was lucky for me that they didn't get hold of my ankle as well. I
+don't understand how I escaped so easily, for&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Here's the first one," Cummings said triumphantly, as he swung on shore
+a fish weighing about three pounds. "If we find many such there won't be
+any danger of suffering from hunger."</p>
+
+<p>The boys seized the flapping evidence of Cummings' skill as an angler,
+and hurried to the entrance in order to examine it more closely.</p>
+
+<p>In shape it was similar to a brook trout; but instead of being spotted
+had black scales as large as one's thumb nail, and not until it had been
+scrutinized carefully was anything seen to betoken the presence of
+organs of sight. Then Jake pointed out two slight depressions near the
+end of the upper jaw, which were protected and nearly covered by a
+cartilaginous substance extending entirely across the head something
+after the fashion of a hood.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't wonder he had to try a long while before catching this fellow,"
+Teddy said with a laugh. "A fish that has such poor apologies for eyes
+can't be expected to see bait very quickly."</p>
+
+<p>"It isn't likely they can see anything, and if these small specks are
+eyes they've probably only been put on as ornaments."</p>
+
+<p>At this point Jake, regardless of the fact that he should have been
+listening intently at the aperture, began what was evidently about to be
+a long dissertation on the subject of a fish being able to smell while
+in the water, and to prevent him from neglecting his duties as sentinel,
+the boys went back to the stream, arriving there just as Cummings landed
+a second prize.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of an hour four fish, aggregating in weight not less than ten
+pounds, were on the bank, and it was decided that no more should be
+caught.</p>
+
+<p>"We've got food enough to last us during twenty-four hours," Cummings
+said, "and it would be a waste of time to fish any longer."</p>
+
+<p>"When are we to cook them?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a job which must be left for Poyor. He can do it better than
+either of us, and, since there are none of the enemy in the immediate
+vicinity, I fancy we may count on having these for the next meal."</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings took his turn at sleeping, after impressing on the minds
+of the boys and Jake that a strict watch should be kept by all
+regardless of the news brought by the Indian, and during the two hours
+which followed before there was any change in the condition of affairs,
+little else was done save to discuss the situation.</p>
+
+<p>They talked of the loved ones at home; of the probable whereabouts of
+those who had left the burning yacht in their company, and of the
+chances that they would soon reach the coast, until Jake changed the
+subject by saying abruptly:</p>
+
+<p>"We'll soon be blind if the Indian don't find a hidin' place where the
+sunlight penetrates once in awhile. I begin to feel a good deal like a
+bat already, an' have a big mind to slip out for a walk."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't so much as think of it," Teddy cried in alarm. "It isn't certain
+that the enemy are not close by, and the risk is too great."</p>
+
+<p>"I can't see it in that light," Jake replied in his old obstinate
+manner. "Perhaps Poyor has had more experience in these woods than I
+have; but I'll bet considerable that I can get around as well as he
+does."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you remember what happened the last time you believed Cummings and
+Poyor were mistaken or ignorant?" Neal asked meaningly.</p>
+
+<p>"What has that got to do with my going where I can use my eyes a bit?"</p>
+
+<p>"Very much, considering the fact that Cummings thinks it is dangerous
+even for him to venture out. You are safe so long as the Indians do not
+get a glimpse of you, and it would be endangering the lives of all hands
+if you tried such a foolish experiment that can be of no especial
+benefit in case it is made successfully."</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not reply; but from his manner Neal believed he intended to
+leave the cave at the first favorable opportunity, and resolved to keep
+a close watch upon him.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing more was said on the subject because at this moment Poyor arose,
+and going to the stream for a drink of water, saw the fish on the bank.</p>
+
+<p>"Hungry?" he asked, coming toward the entrance.</p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't object to something warm," Teddy replied with a laugh; "but
+I suppose it isn't safe to build a fire till after dark."</p>
+
+<p>"We can have one now," the Indian said, as he began to crawl through the
+passage.</p>
+
+<p>"There," Jake said triumphantly, as Poyor disappeared, "you can see how
+much danger there would be in our taking a stroll. Yesterday he wouldn't
+let a fellow whisper, and now we're to cook as if such a tribe as the
+Chan Santa Cruz had never existed."</p>
+
+<p>"That doesn't make the slightest difference so far as we are concerned.
+He could go in safety where you'd be certain to get into trouble."</p>
+
+<p>Again the engineer was silenced but not convinced and Neal's fears that
+some dangerously foolish move might be made by him, were increased.</p>
+
+<p>When Poyor returned he brought with him a small quantity of wood, more
+mud, and a bundle of green leaves.</p>
+
+<p>At the further end of the cave he built a fire; encased the fish as he
+previously had the "chickens," piled the embers over them, and then, in
+the canteen brought by Cummings, he steeped the leaves.</p>
+
+<p>Breakfast or dinner, whichever it might be called was ready in half an
+hour, and when Poyor set the repast before them, where all could be on
+the alert while eating, Teddy exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"Those leaves must have been from a tea plant; it seems quite like being
+on the yacht again to smell that."</p>
+
+<p>"You'll be disappointed when you taste of the beverage," Cummings, who
+had just been awakened by the Indian, said, as he approached his
+companions. "He has made an infusion of pimientillo leaves, a drink of
+which the natives of Yucatan are very fond."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was pleased rather than otherwise with the flavor, which was as of
+tea mixed with cloves, and drank so much that Poyor was forced to brew
+another canteen full in order to satisfy his own desires.</p>
+
+<p>The fish were pronounced delicious, and although Cummings thought he had
+caught considerably more than could be consumed in one meal, there was
+very little left when the hunger of all had been appeased.</p>
+
+<p>It was now nearly noon, when every native of the country believes a
+siesta is necessary, however important business he may have on hand, and
+Poyor stretched himself once more out on the sand, Cummings advising the
+boys and Jake to do the same thing.</p>
+
+<p>"I slept so long that I couldn't close my eyes now if I tried, so you
+had better take advantage of the opportunity."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h3>
+
+<h4>JAKE'S VENTURE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The boys followed Cummings' advice; but owing to the fact that they had
+taken no exercise the slumber was neither prolonged nor refreshing.</p>
+
+<p>When they awakened Poyor and Jake were yet asleep, and they went softly
+to where Cummings was keeping most vigilant watch.</p>
+
+<p>"Had enough of it?" he asked with a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes: we are not feeling so comfortable in mind that we can sleep at
+will, and just now a little goes a great way," Neal replied.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't make the mistake of dwelling upon your troubles. By putting them
+from your mind you are in better condition to meet what may come, and
+besides, fretting never did mend matters."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll admit that the advice is good; but it is not every one who can
+follow it."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not? Have you tried by looking for something else with which to
+occupy your attention?"</p>
+
+<p>"Shut up here as we are it would be pretty hard work to think of
+anything except our own situation."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not so certain of that. Suppose we try by speaking of the country
+on whose shores you were cast by the waves?"</p>
+
+<p>"It was formerly an independent republic; but now forms one of the
+Mexican states," Teddy replied promptly.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll admit that to be true; but it is a small fund of information for a
+schoolboy to have regarding a country which was probably the most
+powerful on the hemisphere hundreds of years before Columbus crossed the
+ocean. Here have been found the ruins of forty-four large cities; the
+remains of enormous artificial lakes, paved roads, and, in fact, all the
+evidences of a high state of civilization which existed before Europe
+could boast of the slightest form of government."</p>
+
+<p>"You may be certain that I shall study about it with more interest in
+case we are so fortunate as to be able to go to school again," Teddy
+replied. "Tell us about the people who lived here when it was so great."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I could," Cummings said with a sigh. "If it had been possible
+for us to have taken from the Silver City any records, or sculptured
+figures, or plates of a historical nature, I might have succeeded in
+solving that which the student can speak of only as a mystery. Before
+the Conquest it was known as Maya&mdash;that is to say, the territory now
+called Yucatan, and the Chan Santa Cruz yet speak the Maya language. It
+is only certain that for many centuries there was here an important
+feudal monarchy, which doubtless arose after the Toltec overthrow of the
+very ancient kingdom of Xibalba."</p>
+
+<p>"Cortez was the first white man to come into this country," Neal said
+half questioningly.</p>
+
+<p>"Not by any manner of means. In the year 1502 Ferdinand Columbus, driven
+by adverse currents out of his southerly course, sighted a group of
+islands off Honduras, and captured a huge canoe, which is described as
+having been as wide as a galley and eighty feet long, formed of the
+trunk of a single tree. In the middle was an awning of palm leaves, not
+unlike those of Venetian gondolas, under which were the women, children
+and goods. The canoe was propelled by twenty-five Indians who wore
+cotton coverlets and tunics without sleeves, dyed various colors and
+curiously worked. The women wrapped themselves in large mantles of
+similar material.</p>
+
+<p>"The men wore long swords, with channels each side of the blade, edged
+with sharp flints that cut the body as well as steel. They had copper
+hatchets for chopping wood, belts of the same material, and crucibles
+in which to melt it. For provisions they carried roots and grain, a sort
+of wine made from maize, and great quantities of almonds. This is a
+fragment of the history of Yucatan, simply a suggestion of what can be
+found by study, and some day when you have nothing to do, ask Poyor to
+tell you of his people's traditions."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings had succeeded in interesting the boys despite Neal's assertion
+that it would be impossible to think of anything but their own
+condition, and Teddy asked, hoping to hear more about the country:</p>
+
+<p>"How large is Yucatan?"</p>
+
+<p>"I question if even the officials know. It is set down as containing
+76,560 square kilometres, with 302,315 inhabitants; but the last figures
+can be only guess-work, since regarding the unconquerable tribes of the
+interior, such as we are now trying to escape from, all is conjecture."</p>
+
+<p>This concluded the conversation so far as Cummings was concerned, for
+Poyor had awakened and joined the party, and there was very much to be
+discussed with him relative to what move should be made, when a
+sufficient time had elapsed.</p>
+
+<p>In order that the boys might understand all which was said, the two men
+spoke only in English, and when the consultation was brought to a close
+the former had a very clear idea of the condition of affairs.</p>
+
+<p>"It is safe to venture out in search of food," Poyor said, when Cummings
+intimated by his silence that there was no further topic which he wished
+to discuss, "and I will go for a short time."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not take one of the boys with you?" the leader of the expedition
+asked. "It is dull work for them here, and a little exercise will be
+beneficial."</p>
+
+<p>"Not yet," the Indian replied quickly. "Too broad a trail would surely
+attract the attention of the enemy, and we must not run such a risk."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well, we will do a little fishing in order to have something
+hearty for supper in case you are not successful."</p>
+
+<p>Then the Indian went cautiously out through the narrow passage, and he
+had but just disappeared when Jake awakened.</p>
+
+<p>"What's goin' on?" he asked with a yawn. "Has Poyor left us again?"</p>
+
+<p>"He thought it might be possible to get some game near by, and proposes
+to make the attempt," Cummings replied carelessly. "Now that you are
+awake stand watch awhile, for the boys and I are going to catch a few
+more fish."</p>
+
+<p>Jake seated himself by the entrance, and Cummings led the way to the
+stream, never fancying for a single moment that the sentinel might
+desert his post.</p>
+
+<p>The second effort to draw food from the water was more successful than
+the first. Cummings had hardly dropped the line before the bait was
+seized, and he landed a fairly good sized fish, after which he proposed
+that Teddy should try his hand at the work.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't want to monopolize all the fun," he said laughingly, "therefore
+you boys had better take turns until we get enough for supper. To-night
+we'll ask Poyor to cut another pole, and then both can enjoy the sport
+at the same time."</p>
+
+<p>The fish were smaller than those previously taken and half an hour
+elapsed before there were enough on the shore to make up what Cummings
+believed was sufficient for a hearty meal.</p>
+
+<p>Then the three walked slowly toward the entrance to relieve Jake; but,
+to the surprise of all, he was not there.</p>
+
+<p>"It is my fault," Neal cried while Cummings was looking around in the
+belief that the sentinel had gone to another portion of the cave and
+would soon be back. "I knew from what was said this forenoon that he had
+an idea of venturing out, and made up my mind to watch him closely; but
+the history lesson and the fishing caused me to forget it entirely."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that he has had an idea of leaving us?" Cummings asked in
+astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"No; he simply proposed to take a walk. He thinks it is as safe for him
+as for Poyor."</p>
+
+<p>"But I, who surely understand the woods better than he, would not dare
+to attempt it."</p>
+
+<p>"You know what he has done."</p>
+
+<p>"If he does not lose his own life ours may be sacrificed," Cummings said
+passionately. "The Indian can go through the undergrowth without leaving
+any sign of his passage: but for Jake to do so is simply to set up a
+guide-board by which the enemy can find us."</p>
+
+<p>"I should have told you at once," Neal said in self reproach.</p>
+
+<p>"You are not to be blamed in the slightest; but if I could get my hands
+on him at this moment he would regret most sincerely ever having such a
+thought in his head."</p>
+
+<p>"What will be the result?" Teddy asked in distress.</p>
+
+<p>"If he succeeds in finding his way back, which I doubt very much, we
+will be forced to make a change regardless of the consequences, and if
+he is captured it becomes a case of our putting the greatest possible
+distance between this cave and ourselves," Cummings replied bitterly.</p>
+
+<p>"I might go out and try to find him," Neal suggested, and his companion
+put an end to any such idea by saying impatiently:</p>
+
+<p>"Your efforts to aid him would only result in making our own position
+just so much the worse. We must wait until Poyor comes back, and learn
+what he has to say in regard to the affair."</p>
+
+<p>"But it seems cruel to let him run into danger without saying a word."</p>
+
+<p>"It is not half as bad as it is for him to jeopardize all our lives. He
+did the same thing once before, and the consequence was that instead of
+making back tracks to my shanty, as could easily have been done, we are
+forced to skulk around two or three weeks with no certainty of escaping
+even at the end of that time."</p>
+
+<p>Both Neal and Teddy understood that it would be useless to say anything
+more in Jake's favor, and as a matter of fact, they felt quite as bitter
+toward him as did Cummings, for it was not difficult to see what might
+be the result of his foolish excursion.</p>
+
+<p>In silence the little party waited until the Indian returned bringing
+the carcass of a tapir, a small quantity of alligator pears, and two
+so-called cabbages cut from palm trees.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not difficult to get all the food that may be needed provided we
+can keep the fact of our being here a secret," he said in a tone which
+showed how greatly he was pleased by his success.</p>
+
+<p>"And that we shall not be able to do many hours longer except by some
+piece of rare good luck," Cummings said bitterly. "Jake went out a long
+while ago, and is now, I presume, roaming around in order to give the
+enemy an opportunity of looking at him."</p>
+
+<p>"Went out?" the Indian repeated in surprise. "Do you mean that he has
+left the cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is exactly the size of it."</p>
+
+<p>"Why did he do such a foolish thing?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because he was too much of a baby or an idiot to stay in hiding until
+the danger had passed. He claimed that exercise was necessary."</p>
+
+<p>"He will get all he needs," Poyor said half to himself, as he allowed
+the supply of provisions to fall unheeded from his hands. "We also must
+leave this place."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that we should go at once?" Cummings asked as if he had
+been expecting such a remark.</p>
+
+<p>"When the night has come we will start, and with but little hope of
+breaking through the line of sentinels."</p>
+
+<p>"Are we not to wait for Jake?" Neal interrupted.</p>
+
+<p>"If he does not return before we are ready there will be little chance
+of ever seeing him again," was the grim reply as Poyor paced to and fro,
+evidently so disturbed that it was impossible for him to remain in one
+position.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>A HURRIED DEPARTURE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Neal and Teddy were in a state of the most painful suspense from the
+moment Poyor returned until the time for their departure arrived.</p>
+
+<p>The one hope was that Jake would succeed in finding his way back, for
+the thought that he might be captured was terrible, and they sat near
+the entrance listening intently to every sound.</p>
+
+<p>"You're bound to be disappointed if you count on hearing him," Cummings
+said bitterly.</p>
+
+<p>"But there is a chance that the Indians are some distance from here,"
+Teddy replied. "Poyor didn't find any until he reached the line of
+sentinels."</p>
+
+<p>"I am not saying that he is necessarily captured yet; but it would be
+little short of a miracle if he found his way back after going any
+distance from this cave. I wouldn't dare to make the attempt."</p>
+
+<p>"But are we to go away without trying to find the poor fellow?" Neal
+asked in a tone of distress.</p>
+
+<p>"It would be useless to search, and we are now in too much danger to
+waste any time," Cummings said sternly. "Our one chance of escape was
+to give the enemy the idea that we had succeeded in getting out of the
+country, and he has destroyed it. Now this portion of the forest will be
+filled with Indians, and in twenty-four hours from the moment he or his
+trail is seen, we shall be discovered. We cannot aid him, and I doubt
+whether I would be willing to do so if it was possible, for a man of
+average common sense who will act as he has done deserves punishment."</p>
+
+<p>The boys made no reply. Each instant their companion's anger against
+Jake increased, and it was not well to rouse him by further
+conversation.</p>
+
+<p>Near the bank of the stream Poyor had built a fire and was cooking a
+portion of the tapir and the fish, for in the hurried flight which was
+soon to be begun there might not be an opportunity to prepare food.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian had unpacked the bundles in order to discard everything not
+absolutely necessary, and was tying each compactly when the boys
+approached.</p>
+
+<p>"Why are you making only three packages?" Neal asked. "Teddy and I want
+to do our full share of the work, and it isn't right for you and
+Cummings to lug everything."</p>
+
+<p>"You will be forced to do more than an equal share because that which
+Jake carried must now be divided between us," Poyor replied grimly. "The
+fourth load is to be made up of the provisions."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you going straight for the coast, and try to force your way through
+the line of sentinels?"</p>
+
+<p>"That cannot be done. We must now ascend the mountain range on the north
+of the forest."</p>
+
+<p>"But by so doing the journey will be made much longer, won't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Very much."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why not try to fight through?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because it is impossible. Not one of us would live to see the ocean."</p>
+
+<p>There was not much comfort to be derived from such a conversation, and
+again the boys went to the entrance where Cummings was examining
+carefully all the weapons.</p>
+
+<p>"You must carry plenty of cartridges where they can be gotten at
+quickly," he said, as they came up. "It is impossible to say what may
+happen, and no precaution should be neglected. The guns are in good
+order, and with them we may succeed in holding the enemy at such a
+distance that their arrows cannot be used."</p>
+
+<p>"We have filled our pockets," Neal replied, and throwing himself upon
+the ground, he watched Cummings and Poyor at their work.</p>
+
+<p>Ten minutes later the Indian came to the entrance and said as he began
+to crawl through the narrow passage:</p>
+
+<p>"I will make one effort to find him who has caused us so much trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't spend any time on such a fool," Cummings cried fiercely. "He knew
+the danger, and if he chooses to run into it, jeopardizing our lives at
+the same moment, nothing too bad can happen to him."</p>
+
+<p>"He may be near at hand. I will make a search," Poyor replied as he rose
+to his feet on the outside, and Neal whispered to Teddy:</p>
+
+<p>"If Jake can be found matters won't seem quite so hard, for it will be
+terrible to think of him wandering around until captured, and we running
+away from him."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy nodded his head; but did not dare trust himself to speak. He had
+been thinking of home until the tears were so very near his eyelids that
+he feared they would overflow.</p>
+
+<p>During the next half hour not a word was spoken by either of the little
+party, and then Poyor returned alone.</p>
+
+<p>There was no necessity of questioning him, and Neal covered his face
+with his hands to hide the distress he knew must be pictured there, for
+there was no longer any hope the engineer would accompany them on their
+rapid and most dangerous flight. By this time the meat was cooked, and
+the Indian brought a generous supply to the entrance; but no one had any
+particular desire for food.</p>
+
+<p>"You must take some," Cummings said, when Neal and Teddy turned away.
+"We may not have an opportunity to eat again for many hours, and it is
+necessary to be prepared for a long tramp."</p>
+
+<p>The boys managed to swallow a small quantity after considerable effort,
+when the final preparations were made, and by the time they were
+completed the sun had set.</p>
+
+<p>Night had not fully settled down when Poyor gave the signal for the
+start, and one by one the fugitives crept from the cave, pushing their
+bundles before them, since the passage was not sufficiently large to
+admit of their walking upright.</p>
+
+<p>"Strap the pack on firmly," Cummings said in a whisper, when they were
+in the open air. "We may be obliged to run, in which case there must be
+no chance of losing our baggage. You boys follow Poyor, and I will bring
+up the rear."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian was waiting for them to get into proper marching order, and
+instantly this had been done he started at a rapid pace.</p>
+
+<p>As they left the cave it seemed to Neal and Teddy that Jake had really
+been abandoned, and, regardless of what he had done, they felt that it
+was cruel to hurry away so soon.</p>
+
+<p>"It could have done no harm to wait until morning," Neal said in a
+whisper, when they halted a short distance from the starting point while
+Poyor went ahead to reconnoiter.</p>
+
+<p>"And by that time we might have found ourselves besieged. It would have
+been a delay of twenty-four hours, for all our traveling must be done in
+the night," Cummings replied. "We have taken the only course he left
+open to us, and we won't discuss the matter any more."</p>
+
+<p>The march was resumed after a short delay, and not until two hours had
+passed did the Indian so much as slacken his pace.</p>
+
+<p>They had arrived where the forest is less dense; but the undergrowth
+more tangled, and Poyor signified by gestures that the boys would be
+allowed a short time of rest.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was about to ask if he could take off the pack, for the cords were
+cutting into his flesh in a painful manner; but the Indian checked him
+with a quick motion of the hand.</p>
+
+<p>The party were now near where it was supposed a line of sentinels was
+stationed, and, holding his finger to his lips, Cummings gave them to
+understand that the utmost silence must be preserved.</p>
+
+<p>Again Poyor went forward alone, and the tired boys sat with their backs
+against a tree thinking only of Jake and his possible fate.</p>
+
+<p>The silence was so profound as to be almost alarming. Here and there
+amid the foliage could be seen countless fire-flies; but not even the
+rustling of the leaves broke the stillness, and it did not require any
+very great stretch of the imagination to fancy that the enemy were
+lurking close at hand awaiting an opportunity to spring upon them.</p>
+
+<p>Once a rat-like tuza ran past within a few inches of Teddy's feet, and
+as the boy leaped up in affright, fancying the vengeful Indians had
+discovered him, it was with difficulty he repressed a cry of alarm.</p>
+
+<p>With so many horrible things to think of it was a decided relief when
+Poyor came gliding noiselessly back to announce that the journey could
+be continued, and once more the little party picked their way over
+fallen and decaying timber, or through thickets where thorns tore both
+clothing and flesh.</p>
+
+<p>After a time they reached ascending ground, showing that they were on
+the foot hills of the range, and the advance became more laborious,
+until, shortly before sunrise, Neal declared that he could go no
+farther.</p>
+
+<p>"We must stop," he whispered to Poyor. "I have held out as long as
+possible, and could not keep on half a mile more if the enemy were in
+close pursuit."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian nodded his head to signify that the halt should be made, and
+a few moments later he turned aside into a small ravine or cut on the
+side of the hill.</p>
+
+<p>Here he threw down his burden, and the boys followed the example, paying
+no attention to the advantages or disadvantages of the spot as a refuge
+during the day which was so near at hand.</p>
+
+<p>Lying at full length on the ground, heeding not that deadly reptiles
+might be close at hand, Neal and Teddy fell asleep almost immediately,
+and Poyor proposed that Cummings should also seek repose.</p>
+
+<p>"I will watch," he said, "and when the sun rises we can decide whether
+it is safe to stay here."</p>
+
+<p>Although the white man was weary he would not admit that the Indian
+could bear more fatigue, and insisted on keeping awake until it was
+learned if they should be warranted in remaining.</p>
+
+<p>In perfect silence the two stood guard over the sleeping boys, and when
+the morning came the important question was soon settled.</p>
+
+<p>The place of refuge to which chance had brought them was admirable both
+for purposes of defense and for hiding. It was a deep, narrow cut
+extending thirty feet into what appeared to be a mass of sandstone, and
+at the entrance was not more than ten feet wide, while over the top the
+foliage grew so luxuriantly as to completely conceal them from the view
+of any one who might be above.</p>
+
+<p>In front the trees were small, and it was possible to see forty or fifty
+yards down the side of the hill, therefore the enemy could not approach
+unobserved save from the top.</p>
+
+<p>"It is good," Poyor said approvingly. "We can remain here until night."</p>
+
+<p>"But why have we not met the sentinels which you believe to be so
+numerous?"</p>
+
+<p>"They are further on. At the end of the next march we shall be in their
+midst."</p>
+
+<p>"And then comes the most difficult portion of our journey. But we won't
+search for trouble," Cummings added after a short pause. "Let us have
+breakfast, and then one shall stand guard while the others sleep."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor unpacked the provisions, awakened Neal and Teddy, and with a view
+before them which, under other circumstances, would have called forth
+expressions of the most lively admiration, the little party made a
+hearty meal.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h3>
+
+<h4>JAKE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>It was only natural that on awakening Neal and Teddy should first think
+of the engineer and his possible fate; but the other two members of the
+party were so incensed against him that neither cared to speak on the
+subject.</p>
+
+<p>They asked concerning their location, and were told all that Cummings
+and Poyor knew, and when the very satisfactory meal was brought to a
+close the former said as if inviting a discussion:</p>
+
+<p>"We have sufficient food to last us three days if there is no game
+picked up on the way; but our supply of water threatens to run short
+very soon unless we can manage to refill the canteens. Are we likely to
+find a stream among these hills, Poyor?"</p>
+
+<p>"When we descend into the valley there will be no lack of plenty to
+drink; but on beginning the ascent of the mountains we must be careful
+not to use too much."</p>
+
+<p>"How long shall we probably be on the range providing every thing works
+smoothly?"</p>
+
+<p>"Three days&mdash;perhaps four."</p>
+
+<p>"But we can only carry water enough for two days at the best."</p>
+
+<p>"Then each one must take but half as much as he needs."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course that would settle the matter; but it is going to be pretty
+tough to travel in heat without all we want to drink."</p>
+
+<p>"Better that than to fall into the hands of the Chan Santa Cruz," Poyor
+replied gravely.</p>
+
+<p>"I am willing to admit it; but at the same time I believe we can hit
+upon some plan of carrying all that may be needed."</p>
+
+<p>"We may find the water pitchers in the forest, and by means of them
+replenish the supply."</p>
+
+<p>"That is figuring upon a possibility, and we are by no means certain of
+getting what we want."</p>
+
+<p>"There is plenty of time to think the matter over, for, unless we are
+discovered, it will be necessary to stay here until night. Will you
+sleep now?"</p>
+
+<p>"You need rest more than I," Cummings replied. "Lie down while I stand
+guard."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian did not hesitate; it made very little difference who remained
+on watch providing the utmost vigilance was maintained, and he
+stretched himself on the ground at the farther end of the ravine where
+he could be sheltered from the rays of the sun.</p>
+
+<p>The boys seated themselves by Cummings' side where the best view of the
+surrounding country could be had; but the latter was in no mood for
+further conversation, and the three remained silent for an hour or more,
+when Teddy asked:</p>
+
+<p>"How long before you intend to call Poyor?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is plenty of time," Cummings replied carelessly. "We have all day
+before us, and when I am tired he shall take his turn."</p>
+
+<p>"Why can't we do something? If you lie down now it will be gaining just
+so much more sleep, and surely both of us can keep watch as well as
+either you or he."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a good idea, and I'll take advantage of the offer. Call me if
+you see the slightest thing suspicious, or hear any sound not made by
+the birds. I don't fancy we shall be troubled; but at the same time no
+one knows what may happen."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll take good care; you shall be told if anything larger than a rat
+comes in view," Teddy replied, "so don't lose time that might be spent
+in sleep."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings followed this advice at once, and in a few moments his heavy
+breathing told that he had crossed over into slumberland.</p>
+
+<p>During the next hour nothing was seen or heard by the sentinels, who sat
+just within the shadow cast by the rock gazing intently down the hill,
+and then Teddy whispered excitedly as he pointed to a clump of bushes
+near where the trees were thickest:</p>
+
+<p>"Look in that direction. Can't you see the foliage is moving to and fro
+more than should be the case on a calm day like this?"</p>
+
+<p>Neal followed with his eyes Teddy's finger, and after a close scrutiny
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"I see what you mean: but there is probably some animal among the
+bushes. At all events we shan't be a great while finding out, and it
+isn't well to call Cummings until we are positive something is wrong."</p>
+
+<p>During five minutes the boys watched intently, and then there could be
+no question but that the leader should be awakened. They had seen a man,
+or at least a portion of one, as the foliage was parted gently to admit
+of his looking out, and Neal said as he raised his gun:</p>
+
+<p>"Call Cummings. I won't fire until he gives the word unless that fellow
+comes too near."</p>
+
+<p>Believing that they were about to be attacked, Teddy shook the leader of
+the party vigorously as he whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"They've found out where we are, and one is just getting ready to make a
+rush."</p>
+
+<p>This information was well calculated to arouse Poyor as well as the
+white man, and they ran with all speed toward the entrance to the ravine
+where Neal was making ready to shoot.</p>
+
+<p>"He has shown himself twice since Teddy went to call you," the boy said,
+"and I know exactly where to fire if you believe it ought to be done."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think he knows we are here?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied:</p>
+
+<p>"He has been looking out from among the bushes as if suspicious that
+there was something wrong in this quarter; but I don't fancy he has seen
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"Then do not fire. It is of the greatest importance that we should
+remain concealed, and to discharge a weapon now would only be to bring
+down a crowd upon us. Get back to the farther end of the ravine while
+Poyor and I find out what is going on."</p>
+
+<p>The boys did as they were bidden, taking their station where it was
+possible to see all the men were doing, and after ten minutes both were
+surprised by hearing Cummings say in a tone of relief:</p>
+
+<p>"It is only that idiot, and he evidently mistakes us for enemies. The
+best thing we can do is to let him stay where he is, for then he can't
+get us into another scrape."</p>
+
+<p>"It's Jake!" Teddy cried. "I thought that arm didn't look like an
+Indian's!"</p>
+
+<p>"It will be worse than wicked if Cummings don't let him know who we are.
+Of course he's hunting for us, and we <em>must</em> call to him."</p>
+
+<p>As Neal spoke he stepped forward, and was about to cry out when Cummings
+prevented him.</p>
+
+<p>"Let the fool alone," the latter said. "If he joins us we shall never be
+able to pass the sentinels."</p>
+
+<p>"You can't mean to let him wander off by himself."</p>
+
+<p>"Better that than give him another chance to bring the enemy down upon
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"But I won't allow it," Neal cried angrily. "It is true he has been
+worse than foolish twice&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"And the third time he'll succeed in bringing all hands up with a sharp
+turn. We are where very little is needed to put us in the power of the
+enemy, and we cannot afford to take such chances as he appears to
+delight in."</p>
+
+<p>"Then Teddy and I will leave you, and run all the risk with him, which
+is nothing more than fair, considering the fact that he is one of our
+party."</p>
+
+<p>From the look on Cummings' face it was evident he intended to make an
+angry reply; but before he could speak Poyor said:</p>
+
+<p>"The boys are right. It is not good to desert a friend, no matter what
+he has done."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," Cummings said impatiently. "Call him in, and during the
+remainder of this journey, if we live to finish it, I will see that he
+does not have a chance to work any more mischief."</p>
+
+<p>Neal did not delay. Stepping out from the ravine he shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"Jake! Jake, come in here!"</p>
+
+<p>Although the engineer was so far away the cry of mingled surprise and
+joy which burst from his lips could be heard distinctly, and in the
+shortest possible space of time he was in the ravine shaking the boys'
+hands vigorously.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you up to here?" he asked. "Looking for me?"</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed we were doing nothing of the kind," Cummings said angrily.
+"After you so kindly did all you could to tell the Indians where we had
+located it was necessary to make a quick move, and if I had had my way
+you would never have known how near we were."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't suppose it will do any good to say that I am sorry?" Jake
+suggested meekly.</p>
+
+<p>"Not a bit, for this is the second time you have done all the mischief
+possible. By this last performance it has been necessary to take a
+course nearly three times as long as the one we intended to travel, and
+no one can say what you won't do before we are out of the scrape."</p>
+
+<p>"I pledge my word to obey orders. The experience I have had during the
+past twenty-four hours has taught me that I can't afford to take any
+more chances while we are in this heathenish country."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a grave question whether we shall be able to get clear, and now
+that you have come we must make another change, running all the risks of
+traveling in the daytime, for the enemy can follow up on your trail as
+readily as if you had set sign-boards all the way."</p>
+
+<p>Jake understood that it would do no good to make any reply while
+Cummings was in such a rage, and he very wisely retreated to the further
+end of the ravine where he whispered to Teddy:</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you give me a bite to eat? I'm just about starved."</p>
+
+<p>"Haven't you had anything since leaving the cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not a mouthful, and only one drink of water."</p>
+
+<p>"Where have you been?"</p>
+
+<p>"Walkin' all the time. When I went away it was only with the intention
+of travelin' a short distance. It didn't seem as if I had gone a
+quarter of a mile before I turned to go back, an' I've been tryin' to
+get there ever since."</p>
+
+<p>"Didn't you sleep any last night?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not a wink. I wanted to; but some kind of a big animal came prowlin'
+around the tree I'd chosen as my sleepin' apartment, and after that I
+couldn't so much as shut my eyes without takin' the chances of fallin'
+off the branch."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you meet any one?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"But how came you over here so far?"</p>
+
+<p>"It seems as if I'd had time to go across the whole country since I saw
+you last. Say, give me some water and a mouthful of anything that's
+eatable, an' then I'll get a little sleep before tacklin' Cummings
+again. I suppose its a case of goin' way down on my marrow bones before
+he'll forget what I've done."</p>
+
+<p>"I fancy you are right in that respect," Teddy said gravely, as he
+overhauled the stores to procure the food, "and he can't be blamed, for
+you have put us in a very bad position without even the poor excuse of
+having tried to benefit the party."</p>
+
+<p>"From this out I won't so much as yip," Jake replied earnestly, as he
+made a vigorous attack on the roast tapir. "Getting lost in such a
+forest as this is enough to make a fellow's hair turn white."</p>
+
+<p>"If it will prevent you from playing the fool any more I shall be
+satisfied," Cummings, who had come up unperceived, said emphatically.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXV" id="CHAPTER_XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h3>
+
+<h4>ON THE RANGE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Although it was nearly noon, the time when the natives of Yucatan
+believe a siesta is absolutely necessary, Cummings insisted that the
+flight should be continued without further delay.</p>
+
+<p>"It would not be surprising if the Chan Santa Cruz sentinels had seen
+that idiotic Jake, and followed him in order to learn where we were
+hiding," he said when Neal asked why they had left the ravine during the
+hottest portion of the day. "If the Indians should besiege us here, it
+would only be a few hours before surrender must be made, because of lack
+of water, therefore we can render our position no worse, and may succeed
+in bettering it by going now."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor evidently looked at the matter in the same light, for he made no
+protest; but began at once to prepare for the tramp.</p>
+
+<p>Jake, after eating a hearty meal, had stretched out at the further end
+of the hiding place, and was just giving himself up to the luxury of
+slumber when Teddy aroused him by saying:</p>
+
+<p>"Come, what are you lying here for? We are ready to start, and there's a
+good deal of satisfaction in knowing that this time you'll have to carry
+your share of the load."</p>
+
+<p>"But I've got to have a nap first. Just think how long it's been since
+I've had a chance to close my eyes."</p>
+
+<p>"You'll have to wait awhile. Both Cummings and Poyor believe it is
+absolutely necessary for us to make a quick move, and if you're not
+ready they will go away alone."</p>
+
+<p>Jake began to protest; but Teddy cut him short by saying:</p>
+
+<p>"It won't do any good to kick. They are angry because we were forced to
+leave the cave, and won't spend much time coaxing."</p>
+
+<p>"Hurry along," Cummings shouted impatiently. "We must be well up on the
+range before sunset."</p>
+
+<p>These words spoken in an imperative tone caused Jake to spring to his
+feet very nimbly, and as he neared the entrance Poyor pushed one of the
+packages toward him as he said:</p>
+
+<p>"We carried all last night, and it would be only right to give you a
+double load."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd have to take it if you did," Jake replied; but as if to prevent any
+different distribution of the burdens, he tied this one on quickly,
+saying when it was fastened firmly to his back, "Now I'm ready to tramp
+as long as you do; but it would have suited me better if I'd had time
+for a nap."</p>
+
+<p>"It will serve you right if you don't get a chance to sleep for a week,"
+Cummings replied sharply. "Go on, Poyor leads the way as before, and see
+to it that you keep close at his heels."</p>
+
+<p>The fugitives soon learned that however difficult it might be to travel
+through the tangled underbrush of the forest, it was as nothing compared
+to clambering over the ledges of green or white rock which formed the
+base of the range.</p>
+
+<p>Here there was nothing to shield them from the fervent rays of the sun,
+and so intense was the heat that it seemed as if they were walking over
+the top of a furnace.</p>
+
+<p>The only relief from the excessive warmth was when they came upon a deep
+fissure in the rocks where was a pool of water, with the most gorgeous
+flowers around the margin. Everywhere else the soil was sandy, covered
+in places with pebbles and burning gravel. In front of them were the
+mountains, bare and sterile, on which the least experienced of the party
+knew no drop of water could be found.</p>
+
+<p>As a matter of course both Cummings and Poyor kept strict watch over
+the surrounding country lest the enemy should be creeping upon them
+unawares; but when, late in the afternoon, a short halt was called,
+nothing suspicious had been seen.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't understand how you could have wandered around twenty-four hours
+without being discovered by some of the sentinels," Cummings said to
+Jake, when they were reclining on the side of the mountain in the shadow
+cast by an overhanging rock, where a full view of the valley beneath
+could be had.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps they have given over lookin' for us," the engineer suggested.</p>
+
+<p>"There's no chance of that. Every square foot of the country will be
+searched, and sooner or later they'll come across our trail."</p>
+
+<p>"How long will it take us to get over the range?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"It is impossible to say: but we must keep moving nearly all the time,
+for the small amount of water we have with us now is the last that'll be
+seen until we are on the other side."</p>
+
+<p>"I feel as if I could drink the entire supply, and then want more,"
+Teddy said, the knowledge that they were cut off from all means of
+adding to the store making him thirsty.</p>
+
+<p>"I reckon every one in the party feels much the same way," Cummings
+replied grimly. "If it was possible to find a stream now and then the
+journey across the range would not be such a dangerous one."</p>
+
+<p>With the exception of the suggestion he made when they first halted,
+Jake did not join in the conversation. His eyes had closed in slumber
+almost instantly after lying down, and during half an hour he was
+allowed to sleep uninterruptedly.</p>
+
+<p>Then Poyor awakened him, and the weary march was resumed, the advance
+becoming more difficult each moment as they climbed higher up on the
+range.</p>
+
+<p>About two hours before nightfall the sun was hidden from view by dense
+masses of dark clouds, and the boys hailed with joy this relief from the
+burning heat.</p>
+
+<p>"If we could only have it like this all the time!" Neal exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>"Better the sun than the clouds," Cummings said in a tone of anxiety,
+and Poyor increased his pace, no longer searching with his eyes for the
+enemy; but casting quick glances from side to side as if hunting for
+some particular object.</p>
+
+<p>A south wind came up, and the boys were trudging along right merrily,
+despite their fatigue, when it was as if a solid sheet of water
+descended upon them.</p>
+
+<p>There had been no warning drops to give notice of the coming storm; but
+the rain literally fell in torrents, drenching the fugitives at the
+first downpour.</p>
+
+<p>It was now impossible to see twenty feet in either direction. The
+driving rain and the white clouds which completely enveloped the
+mountain shut out everything from view.</p>
+
+<p>The enemy might have crept close upon them without being aware of the
+fact.</p>
+
+<p>There was no place in which to shelter themselves, and the boys had a
+thorough illustration of what a tropical rain-storm may be during the
+time Poyor was hunting for such a place as would serve to shield them
+from the flood.</p>
+
+<p>Not until half an hour had passed did they make a halt, and then the
+Indian led them under an overhanging ledge, in front of which was a
+sheer descent of eighty feet or more to the valley beneath.</p>
+
+<p>"Here we can wait until the worst of the gale has blown over," he said,
+as he threw down his burden and prepared to enjoy a long rest. "It is
+not likely we shall be able to move to-night, and there is no fear the
+enemy will come upon us while the storm rages."</p>
+
+<p>"We shall at least be where the canteens can be filled," Cummings
+replied in a tone of content, "and by gaining a fresh supply of water
+the journey will be robbed of half its dangers, consequently a wetting
+is of but little consequence."</p>
+
+<p>To have seen the mountain at this moment one would hardly have thought
+that the party could have suffered from thirst. Every crevice of the
+rocks was now a stream, and by reaching out in a dozen different
+directions a quantity of the precious liquid could be obtained.</p>
+
+<p>The only thing to cause alarm was the fact that this storm was but the
+beginning of the summer season, during which rain might be expected each
+day, and thus the danger of fever while crossing the low lands would be
+greatly increased.</p>
+
+<p>"The sentinels will certainly keep under cover during such weather as
+this," Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "and we may be able to
+get over the range without a hand to hand fight, as I had anticipated."</p>
+
+<p>Under such climatic conditions the meat would not keep sweet many hours,
+and Poyor set the entire stock before his companions, saying as he did
+so:</p>
+
+<p>"What cannot be eaten must be thrown away, therefore he is fortunate who
+can now swallow enough to prevent the pangs of hunger from being felt
+during the next forty-eight hours."</p>
+
+<p>"But we certainly won't be forced to stay here that length of time,"
+Neal replied. "It can't rain all the day and night."</p>
+
+<p>"It is safe to count on a long storm," Cummings added. "This is the
+beginning of the bad season, and there will be a certain amount of water
+fall each day."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you take the fact into consideration when you made ready to visit
+the Silver City?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, and if there had been nothing to prevent the carrying out of
+my plans we would have been clear of the swamp by this time, or so near
+the edge that but a few hours traveling must have taken us through."</p>
+
+<p>It was worse than useless to talk of what might have been, and the
+little party settled down to make themselves as comfortable as possible
+under the circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>Overhead the rock sheltered them from the rain; but now that every
+crevice had been turned into a stream it was difficult to protect one's
+self from the innumerable tiny crevices through which the water was
+pouring, and each member of the party lay down in turn only to find
+himself literally flooded out before it was possible to gain any rest.</p>
+
+<p>The night had come, and the air, so warm a few hours previous, was
+uncomfortably cold.</p>
+
+<p>Jake proposed that a fire be built, providing he could find a sufficient
+quantity of dry wood; but both Cummings and Poyor decided against it in
+a very emphatic manner.</p>
+
+<p>"Although we have been traveling for the past six or eight hours where
+any one in the valley might see us, we are not so insane as to build a
+beacon here that our pursuers may be guided to this halting place."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings spoke in a petulant tone, and fearing that he might add
+something regarding the fact that if Jake had behaved himself all would
+now be in the cave, Teddy hastened to say:</p>
+
+<p>"If we can't build a fire why not spend the time walking, for it will be
+impossible to sleep with this rain beating down upon us?"</p>
+
+<p>"It would take a better man than Poyor to lead the way in the darkness
+and storm. Here we must stay, at least until morning, and then unless
+the rain has ceased falling, it will be a case of going hungry awhile."</p>
+
+<p>Finding that there was to be no change in the condition of affairs, Jake
+had crawled into the further end of the shelter where, with the water
+dripping down upon him he was trying his best to sleep, and Neal curled
+up beside him.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor, regardless of the weather, remained just outside the rock as if
+on guard, while Cummings, a few paces behind him, sat upon a fragment of
+stone listening intently, and Teddy wisely concluded to find a resting
+place somewhere, for he was so weary that repose seemed absolutely
+necessary, more especially since there could be no doubt but that the
+journey would be continued immediately the storm cleared away.</p>
+
+<p>Selecting a spot where some portion of his body could be kept dry, he
+lay down, and, regardless of all discomforts was soon oblivious to
+everything around him.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE PURSUIT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>During this night of discomforts the boys and Jake succeeded in gaining
+more rest than one would have thought possible under the circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>The temperature had fallen so much that, in comparison with the heat of
+the day, it was positively cold; but by lying close together and
+covering themselves with half a dozen enormous leaves from a vine which
+encircled the rock, they managed to pass the long hours without positive
+pain.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever Neal, who awakened very often, opened his eyes he saw Cummings
+and Poyor standing near at hand like statues, and the natural
+supposition was that they did not seek repose even to the slight extent
+of sitting down.</p>
+
+<p>Once he called to the white man, proposing to do his share of the
+watching; but the offer was positively declined.</p>
+
+<p>"I could not rest even if I should lie down," he replied in a whisper.
+"There are too many chances that the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may creep
+upon us under cover of this mist, and both Poyor and myself are needed.
+Sleep if you can, so that we may be prepared for a hard tramp
+to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>As it proved, however, these excessive precautions were useless. The
+rain continued to fall steadily and in great volume until daybreak, and
+then all hands prepared for another tramp, for each one was so
+completely drenched that a little water more or less could not make much
+difference.</p>
+
+<p>The breakfast was by no means a hearty one. The moisture had spoiled the
+roast tapir, and even the remaining totopostes were so damp as to be
+decidedly unpleasant to the sight as well as the taste.</p>
+
+<p>Jake shut his eyes and ate a small quantity: but neither Neal nor Teddy
+could force the food down, and, in view of the fact that there was
+little likelihood of finding any game on the summit of the mountain, it
+seemed reasonably certain they would be forced to fast a long while.</p>
+
+<p>The burdens, soaked with water, had increased in weight very materially,
+and again Poyor overhauled them in order to throw away yet more of the
+load.</p>
+
+<p>All the fishing tackle, two extra suits of clothes belonging to the
+boys, the spoiled provisions and, in fact, nearly everything except the
+ammunition and weapons, was left behind when the ascent of the mountain
+was continued.</p>
+
+<p>It was not yet time for the sun to rise; but the gray light of coming
+day served to show the way, and Poyor strode on in advance at a pace
+which would have soon winded the boys had Cummings not ordered him to
+proceed more slowly.</p>
+
+<p>"We must keep on without a halt until noon," he said, "and it would be
+bad policy to use a portion of the party up before the journey has
+fairly begun."</p>
+
+<p>Even at the best pace possible the progress was by no means rapid, owing
+to the obstructions in the path. Here it was necessary to make a long
+detour that an overhanging ledge might be avoided, and there they were
+literally forced to scramble among boulders of every size at imminent
+risk of breaking limbs or being precipitated to the valley below.</p>
+
+<p>Before half an hour had passed the rain ceased falling as rapidly as it
+had begun, and as the sun appeared the clouds at the foot of the
+mountain were dispersed.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor halted and turned to look toward the valley.</p>
+
+<p>Almost at the same instant a loud shout was heard and Cummings uttered
+an exclamation of dismay, as a party of at least a hundred Indians burst
+into view about a mile below.</p>
+
+<p>"They halted rather than run the risk of passing us during the storm,"
+he said half to himself. "Inasmuch as the slowest of that crowd can
+travel two yards to our one we are likely to be overhauled in a very
+short time."</p>
+
+<p>"It is the end," Poyor said gravely. "There is little chance of escape,
+and none of running from them."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you propose that we shall stand and fight?" Cummings asked.</p>
+
+<p>"There is nothing else to be done."</p>
+
+<p>"But we have no show against them."</p>
+
+<p>"As much as to run."</p>
+
+<p>"Here in the open they can soon surround us."</p>
+
+<p>"We will be able to throw up a line of these rocks before they get here,
+and because it is in the open we can hold them back a few hours."</p>
+
+<p>There was plenty of material near at hand with which to make a shelter
+sufficient to protect them from the poisoned arrows, and after a few
+seconds' hesitation Cummings saw that Poyor's plan was the only one
+which could be carried into execution.</p>
+
+<p>"Set to work lively, boys," he shouted, as he began to throw up the
+smaller boulders in a circle. "Everything depends on our getting a fort
+ready before they come within shooting distance."</p>
+
+<p>There was no necessity of urging the boys or Jake to labor
+industriously. They could see the enemy and hear their yells of triumph
+at having tracked the game so successfully, therefore not a second was
+wasted.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed as if Poyor had the strength of a dozen men in his arms. He
+lifted huge boulders which the remainder of the party together could
+hardly have moved from their resting place; flung the smaller ones
+around as if they were nothing more than pebbles, and when the circle
+had been raised four feet high, set about digging away the sand from the
+center in order to increase the depth.</p>
+
+<p>The preparations were not yet completed when the foremost of the
+pursuers came in view from beneath a ledge about forty yards away, and
+he said to Cummings:</p>
+
+<p>"Three guns are enough to hold them back while Jake and I finish the
+work here. Do not hesitate to shoot, for they will stop at nothing when
+the time comes that we can hold out no longer."</p>
+
+<p>"Teddy, you sit there," Cummings said, as he pointed to an aperture in
+the wall which had been left as a loop-hole. "Neal, you're stationed
+next to him, and I'll hold this place. Now work lively, and pick off
+every one of those yelling villains that comes within range."</p>
+
+<p>He discharged both barrels of his weapon in rapid succession as he
+ceased speaking, and the two leaders disappeared immediately; but
+whether they had been hit by the leaden messengers, or only frightened,
+no one could say.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy raised his gun as a third man pressed forward, and, as he
+afterward confessed, closed his eyes while pulling the trigger, for to
+fire deliberately at a human being was something inexpressibly terrible.</p>
+
+<p>Even if he did not hit the mark the bullet must have gone so near the
+man as to frighten him, for when Neal discharged his weapon at a fourth
+Indian the entire party beat a retreat, disappearing behind the ledge.</p>
+
+<p>"They can't send an arrow from that distance with any accuracy of aim,"
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "therefore we may count on
+keeping them back until night, at all events."</p>
+
+<p>"And then what?" Teddy asked with a shudder.</p>
+
+<p>"That is something we won't talk about yet awhile," was the grave reply.
+"We've got at least twelve hours before us, providing they don't catch
+us napping, and at such a time as this it is a much longer lease of life
+than I expected."</p>
+
+<p>Teddy and Neal looked at each other in silence. The situation must
+indeed be desperate if Cummings could count on remaining at liberty only
+one day, and then&mdash;&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>In fancy Teddy could see them led back to the Silver City as prisoners.
+He almost heard the strains of music while they were marched into the
+temple amid the slender, silver-tipped columns, with the throng of
+people following to witness the torture and final stroke which should
+relieve them from suffering.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?" Neal whispered. "You have turned as white as a
+ghost."</p>
+
+<p>"I was thinking of what will happen when those murderers get us in their
+power."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't do anything of the kind; it is too terrible. I will die here
+fighting rather than be taken prisoner."</p>
+
+<p>"And is that all the hope we have left?"</p>
+
+<p>"To be killed here? Perhaps not; but it is far preferable to the torture
+Poyor and Cummings say is sure to be our portion in case of capture."</p>
+
+<p>Neal's face was also pale; but there was a certain look of determination
+about it which told he had made up his mind for the worst, and would
+struggle manfully to the end.</p>
+
+<p>Jake on the contrary, was nearly paralyzed with fear. He understood now
+if never before all the trouble he had brought upon his companions,
+first by making their presence in the city known, and, lastly, by
+betraying the whereabouts of the party when he ventured out of the
+cave. That the Indians would not be turned from their purpose he
+realized fully, and there could be no mistaking the desperate condition
+in which he had placed all hands.</p>
+
+<p>He was supposed to be aiding Poyor; but, as a matter of fact he could do
+little more than look out over the fortifications, fearing each moment
+that the enemy would make a sudden dash.</p>
+
+<p>The particular thought in the minds of all was as to what might be done
+in the way of replenishing the larder, for now the siege had really
+begun the question of how food could be procured was a serious matter,
+more especially since no one had eaten what would be worthy the name of
+breakfast.</p>
+
+<p>Neither Cummings nor Poyor feared a direct assault. In their opinion it
+was only a question of holding the enemy in check, and to this alone did
+they pay any attention.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings watched over the line of rocks, and at the slightest show of a
+living target discharged his weapon; but, so far as could be
+ascertained, without inflicting any injury upon those who were ready to
+deal out death at the first opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>"It is only a question of holding back until the night comes, when they
+can ascend the mountain, and, being above us, be able to shoot us down
+without exposing themselves," Teddy said as he sat by the aperture
+watching for a sight of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>"We will wait until sunset before we give up entirely," Neal replied, in
+a tone that showed he had lost all hope. "Then, unless Poyor can devise
+some plan for escape, we shall have to stand a hand to hand fight which
+can result in but one way."</p>
+
+<p>"You admit that we can't escape?" Teddy replied interrogatively. "Five
+against a hundred won't be able to stand very long."</p>
+
+<p>"We can at least hold our own a few hours, and when the end comes we
+will be found fighting."</p>
+
+<p>This was poor consolation for a fellow who hoped his friend might see
+some better way out of the difficulty, and Teddy settled back to watch
+for an opportunity to discharge his weapon with effect; but feeling that
+it was vain labor so far as the ultimate result was concerned.</p>
+
+<p>During the forenoon, while every crevice in the rocks was running with
+water, Poyor filled the canteens, and when this work was done he
+insisted that Jake should continue to aid him in lowering the level
+behind the line of rocks; but the engineer was, to use his own words,
+"completely played out," and the necessary work was neglected until he
+could gain a certain amount of rest, which, under the circumstances,
+every other number of the party was willing to forego for a time.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h3>
+
+<h4>AT BAY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When the Indian had scraped the sand away to the solid rock, thereby
+deepening the enclosure at least twelve inches, he ceased work, and,
+seating himself by Cummings' side, prepared to do his share of the
+watching.</p>
+
+<p>By this time the assailants had become convinced that it was useless to
+expose themselves to the murderous fire which could not be returned with
+any possibility of injuring the white men, and they remained under
+cover.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe we might sneak away from them," Neal said, after looking
+fifteen or twenty minutes at the ledge beneath which the enemy had taken
+refuge, without seeing so much as a man's head. "They think we will
+shoot them down, and might keep under cover while we were escaping."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you believe they do not know what we are about?" Cummings asked
+grimly.</p>
+
+<p>"How can it be possible if no one comes out to reconnoiter?"</p>
+
+<p>"Look down the valley."</p>
+
+<p>Following with their eyes the direction of Cummings' outstretched finger
+the boys saw a party of Indians far down the mountain side out of range,
+traveling rapidly in the opposite direction.</p>
+
+<p>"They are running away!" Teddy cried gleefully. "Our guns were too much
+for them."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe there are as many in that crowd as we saw coming up the
+mountain?"</p>
+
+<p>Teddy gazed again, and this time the look of joy and relief faded from
+his face.</p>
+
+<p>"No," he replied slowly, "only about half as many."</p>
+
+<p>"And the remainder are under the ledge ready to come out at the first
+good opportunity."</p>
+
+<p>"But what are those fellows doing?"</p>
+
+<p>"Going out of range where every movement we make can be seen without
+risk of being shot at, and when the night comes they will circle around
+us."</p>
+
+<p>That this supposition was correct could be seen a few moments later when
+the party halted in full view, and disposed of themselves in such places
+as the bushes afforded any shade from the sun's hot rays.</p>
+
+<p>"They are taking things mighty easy," Neal said after a long pause,
+during which he watched the enemy intently.</p>
+
+<p>"What is to prevent?" Cummings replied. "Time is of no especial object
+to them providing we can be captured finally, and just now we are
+situated very much like rats in a trap."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what would be the result if one of us should show himself?"
+Teddy said musingly.</p>
+
+<p>"You shall soon see. Poyor, walk a short distance up the mountain, and
+let the boys learn how well we are watched."</p>
+
+<p>The Indian did as he was requested, and had hardly left the
+fortification when those in the valley made a series of signals to the
+men above, and instantly Cummings had another opportunity to empty his
+weapon at a living target as several men sprang out from beneath the
+ledge.</p>
+
+<p>"Now you have some slight idea of what the result would be if we should
+attempt to run away," he said while re-loading the gun.</p>
+
+<p>"But what is to be gained by staying here if you are certain we shall be
+surrounded? Wouldn't it be better to have the fight out when it is
+possible to see what we are doing?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, decidedly; but I prefer to wait longer. While there's life there's
+hope, and before sunset something may happen to give us the advantage."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor came back leisurely, and as he re-entered the circle of rocks
+those in the valley settled down contentedly once more.</p>
+
+<p>During this conversation Jake had been sleeping soundly; but now the sun
+shone full upon him, and the heat was so great that he was forced to
+change his position, saying as he did so:</p>
+
+<p>"In a couple of hours more we shall be roasted to a turn."</p>
+
+<p>"That isn't the worst that may befall us," Cummings replied, evidently
+pleased at an opportunity to increase the engineer's fears.</p>
+
+<p>"But it seems as if we might make a try for some game. I'm very nearly
+starved."</p>
+
+<p>"You are at liberty to do as you please, because it is not possible to
+work us any further injury. According to your belief the Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians are such peaceable fellows that they might allow you to hunt in
+the valley awhile."</p>
+
+<p>"What's the use of roughing into me now? I know I've made a fool of
+myself twice; but I'm in the same hole with the rest."</p>
+
+<p>"That doesn't make our situation any the more bearable, and when we
+think how it was brought about it is only natural to feel sore. Even now
+you insist on taking rest when the others are working."</p>
+
+<p>"But I traveled steadily for twenty-four hours, and haven't had half as
+much sleep as the remainder of the party."</p>
+
+<p>"What about last night?"</p>
+
+<p>Jake made no reply. He considered himself abused because Cummings
+persisted in talking about what had been done, when he believed the
+matter should be dropped after the fault was acknowledged.</p>
+
+<p>Another hour passed. The sun was directly overhead, and the heat seemed
+excessive. There was no longer any shadow cast by the rocks, and the
+sand was so hot as to be painful to the touch.</p>
+
+<p>"There is no reason why you boys should remain on guard," Cummings
+finally said. "The Indians will not make a move before afternoon, and it
+is equally certain we shall not get a chance to shoot at those under the
+ledge."</p>
+
+<p>"We may as well sit here, for no fellow could sleep in this oven," Teddy
+replied; but Poyor showed what might be done, by lying down near the
+front wall and closing his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of two hours there was no further change in the condition of
+affairs. Poyor continued to sleep, the boys and Cummings remained on
+guard, and Jake sat leaning his head against the rocks while the
+perspiration ran down his face in tiny streams.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as on the previous evening, the clouds began to gather, and
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction as he gazed toward the sky:</p>
+
+<p>"There's evidently no danger that we shall suffer from thirst, for
+another storm is coming up, and while it lasts we may see some chance of
+giving those fellows the slip."</p>
+
+<p>"But you didn't dare to travel last night when it was raining," Teddy
+said.</p>
+
+<p>"Very true; but that was at a time when we were not positive the enemy
+were so near. Now they are close at our heels we shall be warranted in
+running many risks which, twenty-four hours ago, would have been most
+imprudent."</p>
+
+<p>In a very short time the sun was hidden from view; a cooling wind blew
+across the mountain, and every member of the sad visaged party
+experienced a wonderful sense of relief.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor arose to his feet like one refreshed, and Jake bestirred himself
+sufficiently to propose that he relieve Neal or Teddy a short while.</p>
+
+<p>"You can sleep now that the sun doesn't shine," he said, "and I promise
+to keep strict watch."</p>
+
+<p>After some hesitation Teddy accepted the offer while he paced to and fro
+to rest his cramped and aching limbs, and Poyor consulted with Cummings
+relative to an attempt at flight when the storm should come.</p>
+
+<p>His idea was that they could not be any worse off by making one effort
+to reach the summit of the range, even if the desired result was not
+attained, and after considerable discussion the white man agreed to the
+plan.</p>
+
+<p>"It is barely possible that we may get on all right, and the situation
+is so desperate that almost any change must be for the better," he said.
+"We will wait half an hour or so, and then start if the enemy have made
+no move meanwhile."</p>
+
+<p>The threatened storm was not long delayed.</p>
+
+<p>In less than an hour it was upon them in all its fury, and Cummings said
+sharply as he pressed nearer the front of the fortification:</p>
+
+<p>"Now we need all the eyes in the party. Keep a sharp watch, and fire at
+the first moving thing you see."</p>
+
+<p>On this occasion thunder and lightning accompanied the wind and rain,
+and by the glare of the flashes it was possible to see as if at
+noon-day.</p>
+
+<p>Never before had the boys witnessed such a terrible tempest. The entire
+heavens seemed ablaze at times, and the peals which echoed and re-echoed
+from one point to another appeared to shake the mountain.</p>
+
+<p>The wind was so powerful that even Poyor could not stand against it, and
+Cummings said in a tone of deepest disappointment:</p>
+
+<p>"Unless we choose to venture into the valley again flight is out of the
+question. We must stay here and take what the Indians care to give us
+when the storm clears away."</p>
+
+<p>He had hardly ceased speaking when a flash of lightning nearly blinded
+them; the earth shook most decidedly before the thunder peal came, and
+then it was as if all nature was in convulsion.</p>
+
+<p>The rocks forming the fortification were precipitated down the mountain;
+<a name="page268" id="page268"></a>the little party were hurled violently forward, and then intense
+darkness and the most profound silence ensued.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy reached out his hand to touch Neal; but the latter was not near
+him.</p>
+
+<p>"Neal! Neal!" he shouted again and again, and several moments elapsed
+before he heard, as if far away, an answering cry.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are you, Teddy?"</p>
+
+<p>"Here, on the side of the hill. Come this way."</p>
+
+<p>"I can't. I'm nearly buried in the sand."</p>
+
+<p>From the direction of the voice Teddy knew his friend had been thrown
+quite a distance down the hill, and he cried:</p>
+
+<p>"Keep on shouting so I can find you."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't move! Wait for another flash of lightning!"</p>
+
+<p>It was Cummings who had spoken, and an instant later Jake was heard
+begging for help.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 356px;">
+<img src="images/darkness.png" width="356" height="600" alt="The little party were hurled violently forward, and then intense darkness ensued." title="" />
+<span class="caption">The little party were hurled violently forward, and then
+intense darkness ensued. See page <a href="#page268">268</a>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"All the rocks of the fort must be on top of me. Will somebody help pull
+them away."</p>
+
+<p>The rain was yet falling in torrents: but the electrical disturbance had
+ceased entirely.</p>
+
+<p>That something terrible had occurred all knew; but what it was no one
+could say.</p>
+
+<p>When Jake implored some one to aid him the second time, Poyor cried:</p>
+
+<p>"Let each remain motionless. I will find the engineer. The earth has
+opened here, and I am on the brink of a chasm."</p>
+
+<p>This order was obeyed, and the boys knew by the sound of the Indian's
+voice that he was making his way toward Jake.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of ten minutes he shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"There has been no harm done here. We will come to you."</p>
+
+<p>The boys spoke from time to time to guide him, regardless of the fact
+that they might also be calling the enemy, and after what seemed to be a
+very long while the party were re-united at the spot where Neal was, as
+he had said, nearly buried in the sand.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE CATASTROPHE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>To extricate Neal from his disagreeable position was a long, but not a
+difficult operation.</p>
+
+<p>It appeared as if the earth Poyor had dug up from the middle of the
+fortification was all heaped above him in such a manner that he could do
+nothing in his own behalf, and it was only necessary to dig this away.</p>
+
+<p>"What could have happened to upset things so thoroughly?" he asked,
+staggering to his feet, and being obliged to sit down very suddenly lest
+the wind should blow him down.</p>
+
+<p>"As near as I can guess there has been a land slide," Cummings replied.
+"I believe it began at the ledge under which the Indians were hidden,
+and how far it extends no one can so much as guess until it is possible
+to get a view of the country."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you not afraid of an attack?" Teddy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Not while this storm is raging. Stand up for a moment, and then you can
+see whether those fellows would make much headway trying to reach us."</p>
+
+<p>The wind was blowing furiously, and the rain falling in great volume.
+Now and then the little party cowering close together for mutual
+protection, would be struck by a perfect shower of pebbles and wet sand
+with such force that, had they been in a standing position, all would
+have been overthrown, and it really required considerable exertion to
+remain in one spot.</p>
+
+<p>The ammunition, or rather, the greater portion of it, had been left near
+the front wall of the fort, and the chances were that it was destroyed
+by the water or scattered beyond finding.</p>
+
+<p>Teddy was the first to think of this misfortune, and he said in a tone
+of despair:</p>
+
+<p>"There's little hope now that we can hold the enemy in check even for an
+hour, in case they should make an attack, for I don't believe we have
+twenty cartridges left."</p>
+
+<p>"And but two guns, for I lost mine when I was blown down the side of the
+mountain," Neal added.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't make the mistake of searching for trouble," Cummings interrupted.
+"It is sufficient to know that we are alive and uninjured. The Indians
+will not bother us for some time."</p>
+
+<p>Not until considerably past midnight did the rain cease falling; but the
+wind storm still continued, and Poyor said, speaking for the first time
+since the party were united:</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be possible to leave here until sunrise. Those who can
+sleep should try to do so, for we may have a hard day's work before us
+to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>"I should as soon think of sleeping during a battle," Teddy replied with
+a shudder. "The suspense is worse than actual danger."</p>
+
+<p>"What can you be afraid of just now?" Jake asked.</p>
+
+<p>"At this particular moment, nothing: but I feel positive that when the
+sun rises we shall find ourselves surrounded by the Indians."</p>
+
+<p>This was not a pleasant subject of conversation, and it was dropped as
+if by mutual consent.</p>
+
+<p>The wind seemed icy cold, and the fugitives nestled closer together for
+protection against the blast, counting the slowly passing moments until
+heralds of the coming dawn appeared in the sky.</p>
+
+<p>Before it was sufficiently light to distinguish surrounding objects the
+wind lulled, and, standing erect each looked anxiously down the side of
+the mountain, waiting impatiently for the rising of the sun.</p>
+
+<p>As the misty clouds which veiled the top of the range drifted away, an
+exclamation of astonishment burst from the lips of all.</p>
+
+<p>Where, a few hours previous, had been a band of men eager to capture or
+slay the white strangers, was now only a yawning chasm.</p>
+
+<p>Beginning at the ledge of rocks it appeared as if a giant hand had rent
+the side of the mountain apart, throwing the huge mass of earth into the
+valley, uprooting or crushing trees, and making desolate for many
+hundred yards what had been a perfect garden of trees, flowers and
+shrubs.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, there must have been an earthquake!" Jake exclaimed when the first
+burst of astonishment passed away.</p>
+
+<p>"Hardly as bad as that," Cummings replied. "I fancy the lightning struck
+the ledge, and then a regular land slide followed."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose the Indians are buried under that pile of earth and
+rocks?"</p>
+
+<p>"Unless they understood what damage might be done by such storms they
+must be, and it stands us in hand to get away from this spot before
+others can arrive."</p>
+
+<p>"It is terrible to think of so many being killed," Teddy said
+mournfully, and Jake asked sharply:</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sorry we've got a chance for escape?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly not; but no matter who they were, one can't help feeling
+shocked at such a catastrophe."</p>
+
+<p>"It is not well for us to stay here," Poyor said before any reply could
+be made. "While looking at what we believe to be the grave of the Chan
+Santa Cruz army, they may be climbing the mountain to cut us off."</p>
+
+<p>"You are right, Poyor. Boys, look around for the ammunition and Neal's
+gun, and whether we find anything or not we must be on our journey in
+five minutes."</p>
+
+<p>Cummings led in the search, which resulted in nothing, for even the
+boulders which formed the fort were hidden from view by the sand and
+gravel, and then Poyor advanced on the way upward once more.</p>
+
+<p>Although it seemed certain the enemy had been destroyed the Indian did
+not neglect any precaution. He traveled further in advance than usual
+and from time to time cast searching glances toward the valley where, in
+all probability, so many lay dead.</p>
+
+<p>Now every member of the party were suffering for food. It was thirty-six
+hours since they had satisfied their hunger, and during the greater
+portion of this time a large amount of labor had been performed.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe I could eat an iguana, and that's the most disagreeable
+looking reptile I've ever seen," Teddy whispered to Neal, and the latter
+replied gravely:</p>
+
+<p>"It doesn't seem right to complain about being hungry after escaping
+from such a terrible situation; but at the same time I'm willing to
+confess that almost anything would taste mighty good just now."</p>
+
+<p>The travelers were nearing the summit of the mountain where not so much
+as a blade of grass could be seen, and there was nothing for it but to
+endure hunger, as they were forced to, the heat, which, as the day
+advanced, seemed almost insupportable.</p>
+
+<p>It was about noon when the little party stood on the highest point of
+land, and, looking over a long stretch of valley and plain covered with
+verdure of the deepest green, saw the blue waters of the Caribbean sea,
+the crests of the waves sparkling in the sunlight like jewels set in
+sapphire-colored enamel.</p>
+
+<p>Never had the ocean seemed so beautiful and friendly as now, after the
+long, dangerous tramp, and the boys forgot all privations and
+discomforts as they gazed at the broad expanse of water.</p>
+
+<p>"If the Sea Dream was afloat and anchored off there how quickly we could
+get home," Teddy cried.</p>
+
+<p>"Even allowing that nothing happens to prevent our traveling ten hours a
+day, it will be a week before you can stand on the shore of the sea,"
+Cummings replied, glancing backward as if regretting that he was about
+to descend the range which would separate him from the wonders and
+wealth of the Silver City.</p>
+
+<p>"At least, we have nothing more to fear from the Indians, and there is
+now good reason to believe we shall get home at some time, which is more
+than either of us could have said truthfully last night."</p>
+
+<p>"We can't have that satisfaction," and Cummings turned to resume the
+march. "The Chan Santa Cruz frequently go to the coast, and there are
+plenty living near by who may try to make matters disagreeable for us.
+But we must not stand here speculating; it is necessary to gain the
+forest below before finding anything for supper, and I'm free to confess
+that either fish or meat will be very acceptable."</p>
+
+<p>The thought of food caused all to forget their fatigue, and the descent
+was begun, the progress being as easy and rapid as it had previously
+been slow and difficult.</p>
+
+<p>The afternoon was not more than half spent when they reached the fringe
+of bushes marking the forest line, and an hour later the little party
+were shielded from the rays of the sun by the wide spreading branches
+of enormous trees.</p>
+
+<p>Now the advance was more of a hunting excursion than the ending of a
+day's journey, and each member of the band searched among the foliage
+for something eatable.</p>
+
+<p>Poyor was the one who finally succeeded in replenishing the larder, and
+he did it in a right royal manner.</p>
+
+<p>While Neal and Teddy were looking for a bird which the latter declared
+he had caught a glimpse of among the leaves, the Indian started off at
+full speed, returning in a short time with two armadilloes.</p>
+
+<p>"Good for you!" Cummings shouted joyfully. "We'll have a first-class
+supper now, with plenty to spare for breakfast. How did you manage to
+get both?"</p>
+
+<p>"An Indian is a better hunter than the white man," Poyor said with a
+smile as he set about building a fire.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you intend to eat those horrid looking things?" Teddy asked in
+surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed I do, and after you get a taste of the old fellow's flesh,
+roasted in his own shell, you'll say it goes ahead of everything except
+a morsel of fat from the back of Mr. Armadillo."</p>
+
+<p>A small spring bubbled out of the ground beneath a huge logwood tree,
+giving rise to what would probably be a large stream by the time it
+reached the coast, and here it was proposed to spend the night.</p>
+
+<p>To protect themselves from possible visits from wild beasts Cummings set
+about collecting fuel for camp-fires, and in this work the others
+assisted while the Indian played the part of cook.</p>
+
+<p>While his game was being roasted Poyor searched the forest in the
+immediate vicinity, and succeeded in finding a quantity of yellowish
+green fruit which Cummings explained to his companions were mangoes.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought it was necessary to cultivate mangoes," Teddy said in
+surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Not here, although it was originally introduced from India; but it took
+so kindly to the soil that one finds the fruit even in the heart of the
+primitive forest. Except for the odor of turpentine, I think it the most
+pleasing of all that nature has bestowed."</p>
+
+<p>Just at that moment the boys were more interested in what Poyor was
+doing than regarding the fruits of Yucatan, and instantly he pulled the
+first armadillo from the fire they were ready to be served.</p>
+
+<p>During ten minutes after receiving his share of the meat on a broad
+leaf, every member of the party ate ravenously, and then Jake said with
+a sigh of content, as he helped himself to another generous portion:</p>
+
+<p>"I declare it is almost worth while going without grub in order to know
+how good it tastes."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd rather eat less at a time, and have my meals more regularly," Teddy
+said with a laugh, as he made an attack upon a pile of mangoes.</p>
+
+<p>Then Cummings began to discuss with Poyor the best course to pursue
+while journeying to the coast, and the others listened in silence, for
+upon the decision arrived at might depend all their chances of ever
+reaching home again.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h3>
+
+<h4>A FIERCE CONFLICT.</h4>
+
+
+<p>That Poyor believed the more serious danger was over, the boys
+understood from the fact that camp-fires were to be kept burning during
+the night, something which would never have been allowed had he feared
+an attack from the Chan Santa Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>Then again, the Indian no longer refused to converse lest the duty of
+the sentinel should be neglected; but talked readily and at considerable
+length with Cummings regarding the course to be pursued.</p>
+
+<p>He also indulged in the luxury of a smoke, something he had not done
+since leaving the white man's hut, and, taking their cue from him, the
+remainder of the party gave themselves up to absolute repose both of
+body and mind, therefore because of these reasons if for no other, this
+particular halting place was afterward remembered as the most pleasant
+they knew during the long, fruitless journey.</p>
+
+<p>When Cummings and Poyor finally decided upon the line of march for the
+following day, the twilight was rapidly deepening into the gloom of
+night, and the latter lighted the fires, thus making a circle of flame
+completely around the party.</p>
+
+<p>"Is it really necessary to have such a blaze, or are you indulging in it
+simply because it has been so long since we dared allow our whereabouts
+to be known?" Teddy asked, as he sat with his chin on his knees gazing
+at the burning wood.</p>
+
+<p>"We are guarding against brute enemies. It is said that jaguars are
+plenty in this section, and there can be no question but snakes abound.
+These embers, which require only labor to keep alive, will do very much
+toward saving our small stock of ammunition."</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not appear disposed to join in any conversation since dinner.
+He had thrown himself on the ground near the foot of a gigantic tree,
+and, from the expression on his face, Neal fancied he was regretting
+that they had not succeeded in bringing away any treasure from the
+Silver City.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you thinking of?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Only figgerin' out what a 'royal excursion this would 'a been if I'd
+got that image I tried so hard for."</p>
+
+<p>"If you had succeeded in carrying it outside the city we should not be
+here now," Cummings said gravely. "With that lump of silver added to
+our load I fancy we would be prisoners at this moment if they allowed
+us to live so long."</p>
+
+<p>"I reckoned you'd take the disappointment harder, after spendin' so much
+time gettin' ready for the trip."</p>
+
+<p>"Of what use would it be for me to complain? In view of all that has
+happened we have been remarkably fortunate in getting away alive, and
+consequently there is very much to be thankful for."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think that if I'd obeyed orders right up to the handle anything
+more could have been done?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not in the matter of carrying away treasure, for all hope fled the
+moment our boat was discovered. You simply caused us additional
+hardships, and have put an end to my visiting the place again for many
+months."</p>
+
+<p>"What?" Teddy cried in surprise. "Are you still thinking of entering the
+city again?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am, most certainly. It shall be my life work to discover the history
+of these people, and tell to the world the meaning of the inscriptions
+on the monuments of Copan. This failure has simply been a misfortune,
+not anything which will prevent my continuing the labor."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you count on asking others to go with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," Cummings replied, with a meaning glance toward Jake. "If I ever
+succeed the honor will be divided among Poyor and myself alone."</p>
+
+<p>Then, as on the day when he first broached the subject, he reviewed all
+that is known to the white race concerning the buried cities of Central
+America and of the descendants of that mighty race of people whose once
+high state of civilization cannot be questioned. When he concluded Jake
+indulged in but one remark before composing himself for slumber:</p>
+
+<p>"It don't make any difference to me whether the inscriptions can ever be
+read or not; but a fellow feels sore to think that he had a chance of
+scoopin' in enough to set himself up in great shape, an' was prevented
+when the precious metal was under his very fingers."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you any particular reason for going to Progresso?" Neal asked
+after a pause.</p>
+
+<p>"I have most decidedly. Since getting you in a scrape which nearly cost
+your lives, it is only right I should see you homeward bound."</p>
+
+<p>"Couldn't we find our way alone?"</p>
+
+<p>"That would be impossible even for me. Poyor is the only guide, and when
+he has done his work you sail on the steamer, while he and I return to
+the little hut, there to wait for another opportunity of getting inside
+the Silver City."</p>
+
+<p>After this Cummings appeared disinclined to talk any more, and the boys
+lay down near Jake for the slumber which both needed so badly.</p>
+
+<p>Although their eyelids were heavy with sleep, it was not possible to
+lose consciousness immediately. Now their safety was in a measure
+assured, the thoughts of Cummings' great disappointment, and the lost
+opportunity of making themselves famous, came to mind more forcibly than
+ever before, causing both to remain awake after all save Poyor were
+breathing heavily.</p>
+
+<p>"This won't do," Teddy said half to himself. "The mysteries of the
+Silver City are not to be solved by us, and the sooner we go to sleep
+the better condition we shall be in for to-morrow's tramp."</p>
+
+<p>Before Neal could reply the Indian stole softly toward them and
+whispered:</p>
+
+<p>"If you would see the father of serpents, sit up and look toward the
+spring; but make no noise."</p>
+
+<p>The boys did as they were directed and could distinguish by the glare of
+the camp-fires the largest snake either had ever seen.</p>
+
+<p>It was a boa, moving lazily toward the water course as if conscious that
+its own wonderful strength was sufficient to enable it to cope
+successfully with all enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Before it was possible to form any estimate as to the serpent's size
+another stranger appeared on the scene, causing Poyor to raise his gun
+ready to shoot.</p>
+
+<p>This visitor was a jaguar, who had evidently come out for a drink, and
+the unusual light prevented him from seeing the boa. He moved warily
+forward, ready to meet an attack, and probably trying to make up his
+mind whether or not this was a favorable opportunity to get a
+particularly good supper, when the boa darted upon him.</p>
+
+<p>Taken by surprise from the rear, the snake had one complete turn around
+the animal's body before there was any show of resistance, and then
+ensued a most thrilling conflict.</p>
+
+<p>The boys could see that the boa's tail was fastened firmly around a
+tree, thus giving him a purchase such as the jaguar would have
+difficulty in overcoming.</p>
+
+<p>Using both claws and teeth the animal defended himself bravely for ten
+minutes, and then it could be seen that the rapidly tightening folds of
+the serpent were hampering his movements. He no longer struggled so
+desperately; but uttered shrill cries of alarm which were responded to
+from a distance.</p>
+
+<p>"His mate is coming," Poyor whispered. "Now we shall see a royal
+battle."</p>
+
+<p>It was as he had said. A few moments later another jaguar appeared, and
+the boys could understand that the boa was making haste to crush the
+first victim before meeting the second enemy.</p>
+
+<p>It was possible to see the muscles of the serpents' tail stand out as
+the pressure was increased, and then could be plainly heard the breaking
+bones while the victim uttered wild screams of agony.</p>
+
+<p>The female jaguar had but just come into view when her mate was killed,
+and she darted at the serpent with a yell of rage which was answered by
+an angry hiss.</p>
+
+<p>Whether the boa was taken at a disadvantage in the beginning of the
+fight, or had become so weary with its previous exertions as to render
+it incapable of putting forth all its powers could not be told; but
+certain it is that the second battle was short.</p>
+
+<p>The beast caught it by the neck at the third attempt, and the lashing of
+the monster's tail told that he was beaten.</p>
+
+<p>"He killed one jaguar easily; but this last beast will soon finish him,"
+Teddy whispered, and almost before the words had been uttered the battle
+was virtually at an end.</p>
+
+<p>Having relinquished its hold of the tree, and unable to encircle the
+animal's body with its deadly folds, the boa's strength was useless, and
+from that time on only the snarling of the jaguar and the threshing of
+the serpent could be heard until the fight came to an end.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to do?" Neal asked as Poyor raised his weapon when
+the silence told that the conflict had been decided in favor of the
+weaker party.</p>
+
+<p>"Kill the beast. There are too many of her kind already, and I shall be
+doing a favor to those who come after us by reducing the number."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't shoot; she has proved her right to live, if the theory of the
+survival of the fittest be correct, and after such a battle it would be
+cowardly to kill her."</p>
+
+<p>"If, on the morrow, you should find yourself suddenly seized by her,
+there would not be so much pity in your heart," Poyor replied, and
+before Neal could make any reply the animal had vanished in the thicket.</p>
+
+<p>"There is no longer any question of what should be done," the Indian
+said regretfully, after a pause, as he lowered his weapon. "There is a
+fine skin for those who care to save it."</p>
+
+<p>"It can lay there for all I care," Teddy replied with a laugh. "Fur in
+this kind of weather isn't pleasant even to think of. Perhaps in the
+morning Cummings will fancy it worth his while to carry the hide away."</p>
+
+<p>"The ants will have devoured it before the sun rises, and since it has
+no value for you it is well to go to sleep. One of the white men can
+call you when it is time to stand your share of the watch."</p>
+
+<p>"Is guard to be kept all night?"</p>
+
+<p>"It would be unsafe for all to sleep. If the jaguars had not met the
+serpent what would have been the result to those whose eyes were closed
+in slumber?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is no necessity of saying anything more," Neal replied with a
+laugh. "We will be ready when our turn comes."</p>
+
+<p>Then, as soon as they could compose themselves sufficiently, the boys
+surrendered to the demand of slumber, and Cummings must have stood their
+watch himself, since they were not awakened until another day had come.</p>
+
+<p>Breakfast was already cooked. On a number of gigantic leaves the Indian
+had spread such food as he could procure: Mangoes without stint; a
+roasted bird shaped not unlike a goose, and several small, white cones
+which tasted like radishes.</p>
+
+<p>Except for such articles as bread or vegetables, it was a meal which
+would have tempted an epicure and to it all hands did full justice.</p>
+
+<p>When their hunger had been satisfied, Cummings said as he shouldered one
+of the two remaining guns and took up a greater portion of the
+cartridges:</p>
+
+<p>"It is time we were moving. We can travel reasonably slow, in order that
+no one may become exhausted; but not an hour must be lost. The way
+before us is long, even after we reach the sea-shore, and each day
+wasted is just so much delay in reaching our destination."</p>
+
+<p>"Now that we are really homeward bound you will have no reason to
+complain because our powers of endurance are too slight," Neal replied,
+as he took up the remaining weapon, and the march was immediately
+begun.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXX" id="CHAPTER_XXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX.</h3>
+
+<h4>A WELCOME CHANGE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>While they were on the mountain where no shade could be found the boys
+thought that it would be a wonderful relief to gain the shelter of the
+forest; but after traveling an hour they realized that the heat was
+nearly as great in one place as another.</p>
+
+<p>Among the trees the rays of the sun did not beat directly down upon
+them; but to balance this every breath of wind was shut out, and the
+atmosphere seemed stifling.</p>
+
+<p>The perspiration rolled from their faces in streams, and so great was
+the humidity that it seemed as if it would be a positive relief to be in
+the sunlight.</p>
+
+<p>"I reckon you've got a better opinion of mountain travel by this time,"
+Cummings said laughingly, as Neal involuntarily halted. "In such a
+climate the shade of the trees is a positive discomfort."</p>
+
+<p>"We can stand it," Teddy replied bravely. "Every step takes us just so
+much nearer the coast, and one glimpse of the sea will repay us for all
+our exertions."</p>
+
+<p>It seemed as if even Poyor was affected by the heat. He no longer strode
+forward at such a rapid pace; but lagged from time to time as badly as
+either member of the party.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings urged first one and then another on until about eleven o'clock
+in the forenoon, and then he said, coming to a full stop by the side of
+the stream they had been following:</p>
+
+<p>"We can now afford to indulge in a siesta, and shall probably travel all
+the better for frequent halts. Later in the day one of us will do a
+little hunting, and the march need not come to an end until it is no
+longer light enough for us to see the way."</p>
+
+<p>To this very welcome proposition no one had any objections to offer, and
+in the shortest possible space of time only the sentinel, which on this
+occasion proved to be Teddy, was left awake.</p>
+
+<p>It was dull work sitting there listening to the droning of the insects;
+but no member of the party could have kept watch more conscientiously
+than did he, and when it seemed impossible to hold his eyes open any
+longer he paced to and fro to prevent them from closing.</p>
+
+<p>With the exception of the usual noises of the forest, it was as if all
+nature slumbered, and he had just begun to think that standing watch was
+a useless precaution when an unusual rustling among the foliage caused
+him to start in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>His first thought was that the Chan Santa Cruz had followed them over
+the range; but an instant later this was shown to be a mistake, as four
+copper-colored men, bearing no resemblance to the inhabitants of the
+Silver City, however, passed through the forest a short distance away
+without apparently being aware of the proximity of the white party.</p>
+
+<p>To arouse Poyor was but the work of an instant, for it was only
+necessary to touch him gently on the shoulder when he sprang to his
+feet.</p>
+
+<p>"There are some men over there," Teddy whispered as he pointed in the
+direction taken by the strangers.</p>
+
+<p>The Indian started through the underbrush as noiselessly as a serpent,
+and as he disappeared the boy awakened Cummings.</p>
+
+<p>"Were they armed?" the latter asked, after the short story had been
+told.</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't notice. My only idea was to arouse you and Poyor, and there
+wasn't much time for an examination."</p>
+
+<p>"It can't be that they have followed us over the range," Cummings said,
+half to himself, as he seized his weapon and made sure it was loaded.
+"It won't do any harm to be prepared, therefore you had best get the
+others on their feet; we may have to trust to our legs."</p>
+
+<p>It was not an easy matter to awaken the remainder of the party without
+causing an outcry; but by first covering the mouth of each with his hand
+Teddy finally succeeded, and then stood on the alert with them as
+Cummings made his way in the direction taken by Poyor to assist in the
+investigation.</p>
+
+<p>One, two, three minutes of suspense followed, and then came a cry which
+set all their fears at rest. It was the salutation of friends, and an
+instant later Cummings shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"Do not fear; we have found acquaintances."</p>
+
+<p>"It is time something of the kind was discovered," Jake said in a tone
+of relief. "I was beginning to think we should never meet one again."</p>
+
+<p>"They looked like Indians," Teddy said doubtfully, and Neal added:</p>
+
+<p>"I fancy we can take Cummings' word for it. Here they are, and it will
+soon be possible to know why they were so foolish as to come into this
+part of the country where wild beasts are not the least of the dangers
+to be encountered."</p>
+
+<p>The strangers appeared, escorted by Poyor and the white man, and the
+latter said as they came into the opening selected as a halting place:</p>
+
+<p>"These are acquaintances of ours from Merida, who have visited this
+section of the country in search of bird skins, which find a ready sale
+among your people. They have a canoe, and report that a dozen miles
+below here the stream widens until it can be navigated by reasonably
+large crafts."</p>
+
+<p>"Since we haven't so much as the smallest kind of a boat I can't see how
+that information will be of any use to us," Neal replied laughingly.</p>
+
+<p>"It won't take long for me to explain. I propose to hire them to carry
+us to the sea-shore, and thus save just so much labor of traveling on
+foot."</p>
+
+<p>"Is their canoe large enough?"</p>
+
+<p>"It will carry a dozen."</p>
+
+<p>"Then our troubles are indeed over," Teddy cried joyously; but Cummings
+dampened his ardor somewhat when he added:</p>
+
+<p>"There will then remain the journey around the coast, and with such a
+load it would not be safe to put to sea in their craft. But let us enjoy
+the blessings which come to us," he added, on observing how quickly his
+companions' countenances fell. "Half a loaf is decidedly better than no
+bread at all, and when a tramp of six days can be set aside we have good
+cause to feel pleased."</p>
+
+<p>The strangers had not waited to be welcomed by the other members of the
+party. Without stopping to be invited they began preparations for
+cooking on rather an extensive scale, using the contents of their well
+filled game bags, and the savory odor which soon arose brought Jake to a
+full realization of the good fortune that had come to them.</p>
+
+<p>"With those fellows to hunt the game it will be a regular feast from
+here to the coast," he said approvingly, "and I think this is the first
+piece of good luck we've had since leaving the Sea Dream."</p>
+
+<p>The newcomers could not speak the English language, consequently all the
+conversation on the part of the fugitives was carried on by Cummings and
+Poyor; but these two interpreted such portions as they thought might be
+of interest to the boys.</p>
+
+<p>From the middle of what is known as the "dry season" until the period of
+almost incessant rains is well advanced, these hunters spend their time
+on one or another of the streams leading from the coast, and they
+consider themselves well paid when a year's work nets each an hundred
+dollars.</p>
+
+<p>"That is really a large amount of money to them," Cummings explained
+when Neal suggested that hunting was not a very profitable employment.
+"One quarter of the sum will serve to purchase the absolute necessities
+of life in a country where fruit can be had for the labor of gathering,
+and in ten years they can well afford to retire from business, or become
+landed proprietors by leasing logwood cuttings, sub-letting the land to
+those who will pay fifteen cents a hundred pounds for all that can be
+gathered."</p>
+
+<p>The strangers were quite as satisfactory cooks as Poyor, and when the
+dinner had been spread on the leaves each member of Cummings' party was
+ready to do it full justice.</p>
+
+<p>After the meal a short time was spent by the men in smoking, and at
+about four o'clock in the afternoon the journey was resumed.</p>
+
+<p>Feeling secure because of numbers, and the reports made by the newcomers
+that there was no one in the immediate vicinity the boys were allowed to
+follow their own inclinations as to the line of march, and each strayed
+here or there as he pleased until the coming of night forced them to
+keep together because of the danger to be apprehended from wild animals.</p>
+
+<p>It was late in the evening when they arrived at the hunters' camp; but
+Cummings did not propose to remain there even for one night.</p>
+
+<p>He insisted that they could travel by water as well during the hours of
+darkness, while it would be no more labor for one to guide the canoe,
+allowing her to drift with the current, than to stand watch.</p>
+
+<p>The strangers used every argument to induce him to defer the beginning
+of the journey until morning; but he was determined, and after some
+controversy the men made the canoe ready.</p>
+
+<p>Neal, Teddy and Jake were stationed amidships, where thanks to the
+generous size of the craft, they could stretch out at full length
+whenever the fancy seized them. Poyor was seated in the bow, Cummings on
+the stern thwart, and the owners of the boat where they could use the
+paddles to advantage.</p>
+
+<p>Of this first night's journeying the boys knew very little. The stream
+was narrow, and lined on either bank with trees so that at times even
+the heavens were obscured by foliage, therefore they could perceive
+nothing save the dark wall on either side.</p>
+
+<p>From the movements of the helmsman it was possible to understand when
+the canoe was rounding a bend, or being pulled from the bank; but that
+was all, and, weary of watching without being able to see anything, the
+boys soon gave themselves up to slumber.</p>
+
+<p>When they awakened the little craft was moored to the bank at a point
+where the stream formed a basin; a fire was burning brightly, and over
+it Poyor bent in a suggestive attitude.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, this is the kind of traveling that suits me," Teddy cried,
+springing to his feet and arousing his companions. "While we were
+sleeping the boat drifted steadily on, and, at this rate, when we arrive
+at the coast all hands ought to be in good condition for a long tramp."</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Cummings?" Neal asked, as he in turn arose from the bottom of
+the canoe.</p>
+
+<p>"Gone for game," the Indian replied.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we're not to have breakfast until it is shot," he added laughingly.</p>
+
+<p>"It makes no difference what they find, for there are twenty fat fish
+roasting in the coals, and you may eat at any time."</p>
+
+<p>"Is there a chance of meeting with an alligator or a crocodile in this
+stream?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not here."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I'm going to have a bath," and Neal began to undress, Teddy and
+Jake quickly following his example.</p>
+
+<p>During half an hour they had most glorious sport swimming, and then the
+return of the hunters literally laden down with game warned them that it
+was time to prepare for the morning meal.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXXI" id="CHAPTER_XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE SEA.</h4>
+
+
+<p>After breakfast the voyage was resumed.</p>
+
+<p>The owners of the canoe urged that the party remain in camp until the
+following day, in order as they said, that all hands might be the better
+fitted for the journey; but Cummings decided against such delay in a
+very emphatic manner.</p>
+
+<p>"It is of the greatest importance to these boys that we reach the coast
+at the earliest possible moment," he said, "and there is no good reason
+for halting any longer than is necessary for the purpose of cooking.
+With such a large crew each one can get all the rest he needs, and yet
+not be obliged to do a great amount of labor."</p>
+
+<p>Very unwillingly the Indians took their seats in the boat, and during
+the day the boys saw very much to interest them.</p>
+
+<p>Among the trees were monkeys in regular droves, and the more mischievous
+appeared to think it great sport to follow the craft and pelt the
+occupants with fruit.</p>
+
+<p>Next to these long tailed brutes, black squirrels were the most
+numerous, and had the party been on a hunting excursion it would have
+been possible to load the canoe to the water's edge with this species of
+game.</p>
+
+<p>Now and then a sleek jaguar showed himself. Again a drove of peccaries
+peered out from among the underbrush, and more than once Cummings was
+forced to exert all his authority to prevent the Indians from stopping
+to bag an incautious tapir which had come to the stream for water.</p>
+
+<p>The animals seen on this day's journey were few, however, as compared
+with the birds.</p>
+
+<p>There were times when it seemed as if the channel was literally blocked
+with them, and as the boat advanced they dived under the surface or flew
+with harsh, discordant cries past the travelers' heads.</p>
+
+<p>There were tantales with hard, crooked beaks, white heron, the
+spoon-bill with pink plumage, long necked flamingoes with flaming wings,
+cranes on their stilt-like legs, and teal and ducks in greatest variety.</p>
+
+<p>Only once did Cummings allow any shooting to be done, and then it was to
+bring down a jacana that the boys might see the long spur, sharp as
+steel, which nature has placed under the wing, thus rendering him a
+formidable antagonist even to the boa.</p>
+
+<p>For the noon-day meal there was plenty of provisions left from
+breakfast, and while the canoe was being borne along by the current at
+the rate of three or four miles per hour, the little party regaled
+themselves with meat or fruit as fancy dictated.</p>
+
+<p>When the sun was within an hour of sinking behind the trees the word to
+halt was given, and that they had covered a long distance since morning
+could be told from the alligators and the turtles which were so numerous
+as to often render navigation dangerous.</p>
+
+<p>"You will indulge in no more baths this side of Progresso," Cummings
+said, as the boys leaped ashore just as the long snout of an alligator
+appeared at the very edge of the water, its owner waiting in the hope
+that by falling overboard some of the boatmen would provide him with a
+supper. "The presence of these fellows shows that we are nearing the
+coast, and if they will give us half a chance you shall know the taste
+of fresh water turtle, which is much finer than that of their cousins
+from the sea."</p>
+
+<p>It would have been a very agile alligator who could have stopped Poyor
+in his search for a toothsome morsel, and in a short time two, known as
+hicoteas, were roasting in the midst of a roaring fire.</p>
+
+<p>"While a fellow is traveling in this manner he can't complain of the
+bill of fare," Jake said, in a tone of most perfect content, as he
+helped himself to another portion of the turtle. "With a different kind
+of food at each meal, and all of the primest quality, we ought to grow
+fat."</p>
+
+<p>"More especially since you are not obliged to exert yourself in the
+slightest," Teddy added with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"There's a good deal in that also, though I never refuse to do my share
+of the work."</p>
+
+<p>"Except when you feel very tired."</p>
+
+<p>"Well a man must take care of himself, and there are times when it
+becomes absolutely necessary to rest. Say, if we had some of those
+silver images here it wouldn't be a very hard job to carry them, eh?"</p>
+
+<p>"Now don't get back to that subject," Neal said impatiently. "If you are
+so eager to have two or three stop here with Cummings, and make one of
+the party when he tries the venture again."</p>
+
+<p>Jake did not appear inclined to trust his precious body in such a
+dangerous place again, and, the command to go on board the canoe having
+been given, the conversation was brought to an abrupt close.</p>
+
+<p>All night the little craft drifted with the current, more than once
+striking with considerable force the back of a sleeping alligator, and
+neither the boys nor Jake were called upon to stand watch.</p>
+
+<p>Neal offered to do his share of the work; but Cummings would not listen
+to the proposition.</p>
+
+<p>"With six men on board the time of duty for each one is short, and we
+have an opportunity to get more sleep than is really needed. Besides,
+you are not sufficiently acquainted with such sailing to be a very
+valuable assistant at the helm."</p>
+
+<p>When the boys awakened on the second morning the character of their
+surroundings had changed entirely. Instead of being on a narrow,
+swiftly-running stream, they were in a broad lagoon with innumerable
+water-ways leading in every direction, and it had become necessary to
+use the paddles.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are we?" Neal asked in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Within less than a day's journey from the sea," Cummings replied. "The
+stream led into this lagoon, and if these Indians know the true course,
+as they claim to do, we shall start direct for Progresso in the morning,
+in good condition for a long tramp."</p>
+
+<p>A short stop was made at a spot where a few trees broke the monotony of
+the scene, and here a second meal of turtle was prepared, Cummings
+saying as the boys began the repast:</p>
+
+<p>"Our water supply is now limited, for that by which we are surrounded
+is brackish if not absolutely salt. I intend to take the greater portion
+of what the men have on board, when we start up the coast, and every
+drop will be needed before the journey is finally ended."</p>
+
+<p>"When did they take it on board?" Teddy asked in surprise, as he learned
+by examination that all the gourds had been filled.</p>
+
+<p>"While you were asleep."</p>
+
+<p>"We can't carry one of these big things."</p>
+
+<p>"By tying a rope of vines around the necks of two I guarantee to get
+along without much trouble, for they will grow lighter every hour."</p>
+
+<p>"Will the journey be a hard one?"</p>
+
+<p>"You mean up the coast? Yes, it will, and what is bound to make it
+particularly bad is the glare of the sun as reflected from the water."</p>
+
+<p>"It can't be any worse than climbing the range, knowing the Indians were
+close behind," Teddy said with evident satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>"You are right, my boy, and we shall have the pleasure of knowing that
+each step taken is one the less, without any fear of being obliged to
+double back in order to escape enemies."</p>
+
+<p>During nearly the entire day the boys strained their eyes trying to get
+a glimpse of the sea; but not until late in the afternoon was this
+possible.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as the canoe rounded a point, the vast expanse of water lay spread
+out before them, and was greeted with three rousing cheers.</p>
+
+<p>"It begins to look now as if there was some chance of our getting home,"
+Teddy cried excitedly. "We are at least where a vessel can be signaled
+in case anything should prevent us from walking and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't flatter yourself that we shall see many sailing crafts within
+hailing distance," Cummings interrupted. "At this point the water is so
+shallow that only the smallest boats venture inshore."</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind, we can see the ocean while tramping along, and know that
+somewhere on it is the steamer which will carry us home."</p>
+
+<p>When the voyage was resumed all hands worked at the paddles, for it was
+quite important, according to Cummings' belief, that they should get out
+of the lagoon before sunset, and the canoe sped on, dashing the spray in
+the air with her bow as if rejoicing that the journey was so nearly
+ended.</p>
+
+<p>There were yet two hours of daylight remaining when the party reached
+the mouth of the narrow channel they had been threading, and to the left
+was the coast, piled high with rocks.</p>
+
+<p>Only through the inlet leading to the lagoon could a landing be effected
+from a vessel, and it was at this point that the hunters had been set
+ashore by the craft on which they had come from Progresso.</p>
+
+<p>There was yet a small supply of provisions on the canoe, and these the
+Indians willingly shared with their passengers. The water gourds were
+divided between the two parties, and, having been paid a good price for
+their labor, by Cummings, the four men departed, not wishing to spend
+the night where fever lurked.</p>
+
+<p>"We don't particularly need rest," Cummings said, when the fugitives
+from the Silver City were alone again; "but it would be foolish to begin
+the last portion of our journey so late at night. We'll carry our
+belongings up the shore a bit, and then camp."</p>
+
+<p>The crooked necks of the water gourds afforded a good handle by which to
+carry them, and, each taking a portion of their sadly depleted outfit,
+the little party followed the leader about a hundred yards from the
+place at which they had landed, to where the huge rocks gave promise of
+a partial shelter.</p>
+
+<p>Now the time had come when both food and water must be husbanded with
+care, and instead of setting out the entire amount for each to
+thoroughly satisfy himself, Cummings divided so much as he thought would
+be sufficient for the meal, giving every one an equal share.</p>
+
+<p>"It is to be short rations for awhile," he said cheerfully. "That will
+be better than to fill ourselves up now, and suffer afterward."</p>
+
+<p>No one could take any exception to this very reasonable precaution, and
+the meal was eaten in the merriest possible fashion.</p>
+
+<p>Then there was nothing to do but wait until morning, when the march was
+to be resumed, and Neal and Teddy occupied their time speculating as to
+what the loved ones at home were doing just at that particular moment.</p>
+
+<p>It was not a remarkably pleasant thing to do, considering how great a
+distance separated them, and when they grew weary of thus making
+themselves mentally uncomfortable, Teddy asked:</p>
+
+<p>"How long do you suppose it will take us to reach Progresso?"</p>
+
+<p>"I hope to be there in about a week."</p>
+
+<p>"And you feel positive there is no chance of hailing a vessel?"</p>
+
+<p>"Just a chance: nothing more. The possibilities are so slight that it
+wouldn't pay to spend any time waiting for a craft to heave in sight."</p>
+
+<p>"What would you do if one should come along to-morrow morning?"</p>
+
+<p>"Try to attract the attention of those on board, of course; but there'll
+be no such good fortune as that, so the best thing we can do is to lie
+down now, for we have a hard day's work before us."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXXII" id="CHAPTER_XXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.</h3>
+
+<h4>A HAPPY SURPRISE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The monotonous roar of the surf should have lulled the boys to sleep
+very shortly after they lay down on the sand where a number of boulders
+formed a partial shelter; but instead of doing so it appeared to have
+the opposite effect.</p>
+
+<p>For a long while after Cummings and Jake were wrapped in slumber they
+talked of the journey which lay before them, and speculated with heavy
+hearts as to the fate of those who had left the burning yacht in their
+company.</p>
+
+<p>This was a topic of conversation seldom brought up since the day they
+first saw the Silver City, because their peril had been so great as to
+overshadow everything else. Now, however, when it seemed as if they were
+very near home, the fear that but one boat of the four had lived to
+reach the land came to both with painful intensity, and fully half the
+night was spent in trying to persuade themselves that it was well with
+the remainder of the Sea Dream's crew.</p>
+
+<p>When they did finally sink into slumber Poyor was sitting bolt upright
+with his back against a huge block of coral-like rock, looking out over
+the water, and in the morning when Neal opened his eyes the Indian was
+in the same position.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you seen a vessel?" the boy asked.</p>
+
+<p>"There is one," was the calm reply, and Neal sprang to his feet in the
+greatest excitement to see a small, schooner-rigged craft with all sail
+set moving slowly through the water on a parallel line with the coast,
+about three miles away.</p>
+
+<p>In another instant he had awakened the remainder of the party by
+shouting vigorously, as if believing it possible that those on board
+could hear his voice.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" Cummings asked: but before the question could be
+answered he also saw the craft.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks as if she was bound in our direction, and we had better try to
+attract attention; but you'll never do it by shouting, my boy."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall we do?"</p>
+
+<p>"Build a fire, of course," Jake replied. "They have got plenty of time
+to send a boat ashore, for it is nearly calm, and in another hour there
+won't be so much as a breath of wind."</p>
+
+<p>Before he had ceased speaking Neal and Teddy were running back toward
+the line of trees for wood, and in a short time a cloud of smoke was
+ascending from the shore at the very edge of the water.</p>
+
+<p>While the others continued to bring fuel Poyor sprinkled the flames with
+a bough wet in the sea in order to prevent them from burning too freely,
+and there was no interruption in the work until a flag was raised on the
+schooner's main-mast to signify that the signal would be answered.</p>
+
+<p>"We're in great luck," Cummings said, as he seated himself on one of the
+boulders, for it was no longer necessary to keep the fire burning. "No
+matter where she is bound I don't fancy we shall have much trouble in
+persuading them to put into Progresso, and the tramp up the shore which
+all have been dreading can be avoided."</p>
+
+<p>As a matter of course the entire party were in the best of spirits, and
+to Neal and Teddy the little craft had a particularly friendly look.</p>
+
+<p>The schooner had been headed for the shore when the smoke first began to
+ascend; but the wind was so light that she hardly moved through the
+water, and, after a few moments, the watchers could see that a boat was
+being lowered.</p>
+
+<p>"That dashes some of my hopes," Cummings said with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" Neal asked.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought there might be just a chance that she hailed from Progresso,
+and we should have no trouble in persuading them to do as we wished."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you think that isn't the case?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because you couldn't find a crew of natives who would willingly row so
+far; the majority would wait for a breeze a week before voluntarily
+performing so much labor."</p>
+
+<p>The boys watched the boat as she approached slowly, and when she neared
+the shore both they and Jake started in surprise, scrutinized her more
+intently, and then looking at each other as if in fear.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied slowly:</p>
+
+<p>"The man who is steering resembles Mr. Walters, the sailing master of
+the Sea Dream, that is all."</p>
+
+<p>"It <em>is</em> him!" Teddy cried excitedly. "I am certain of it now; but how
+did he get here in that schooner?"</p>
+
+<p>As a matter of course the question could not be answered by his
+companions, and all waited with the liveliest signs of impatience until
+the gentleman was within hailing distance, and then Neal shouted:</p>
+
+<p>"Is that really you, Mr. Walters?"</p>
+
+<p>"To the best of my knowledge it is," was the laughing reply. "Are you
+all well?"</p>
+
+<p>"In first-class condition. Where is father?"</p>
+
+<p>"On board the schooner. I will give the signal to let him know the crew
+of the yacht have all been saved."</p>
+
+<p>As he spoke he discharged a revolver, and the waving of the flag told
+that the good news was understood.</p>
+
+<p>"Not all, Mr. Walters, the three sailors in our boat were drowned while
+trying to land on this coast."</p>
+
+<p>"It is too late now to rectify the mistake. I hoped when I saw so many
+that there had been no disaster."</p>
+
+<p>By this time the little craft had been rowed around the point of the
+lagoon where it was possible to effect a landing without danger of being
+swamped, and the sailing master leaped ashore to welcome by hearty
+handshakes those whom he had feared were dead.</p>
+
+<p>Cummings and Poyor were introduced, and then Neal asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you get the schooner?"</p>
+
+<p>"Chartered her to hunt for you; but Mr. Emery shall tell the story. Will
+you come aboard now?"</p>
+
+<p>"You are to go with us," Neal said, turning quickly toward Cummings.</p>
+
+<p>"I hardly know what to do. It would probably be wisest for Poyor and I
+to begin the homeward march since there is no longer any necessity of
+going to Progresso."</p>
+
+<p>"But you must see my father. Time is not so precious just now but that
+you can afford to spend another day in our company."</p>
+
+<p>"It shall be as you say," Cummings replied laughingly. "I hesitated only
+because the sooner our long tramp comes to an end the more comfortable I
+shall feel in mind."</p>
+
+<p>Jake and Teddy had already clambered into the boat; the others followed,
+and the little craft, loaded down nearly to the water's edge, was rowed
+out toward the schooner.</p>
+
+<p>It is not necessary to make any attempt at trying to describe the
+reception the castaways met with from the remainder of the yacht's crew,
+nor the manner in which Poyor and Cummings were welcomed.</p>
+
+<p>After the heartiest greetings had been exchanged Mr. Emery and the
+sailing master asked for an account of the landing and subsequent
+wanderings, and it is safe to say that they were treated to a wilder
+story than they had ever dreamed of hearing.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Walters was at first disposed to look upon it as a "yarn;" but the
+souvenir which Jake carried on his face was evidence that could not be
+doubted, and Cummings soon convinced the skeptical sailing master that
+the Chan Santa Cruz really had an existence.</p>
+
+<p>"That is an adventure I would like to have," he finally said in a tone
+of enthusiasm. "I can't understand why it shouldn't be possible to hit
+upon some hiding place within half a mile of the city, and on a stormy
+night, for instance, lug away precious metal enough to make ourselves
+rich."</p>
+
+<p>"That and more can be done if one has patience and discretion."</p>
+
+<p>"Now we're where there's little doubt about gettin' home you may rap at
+me as often as you please," Jake said with a hearty laugh. "I admit
+having acted like a fool; but so long as nothing serious came of it,
+except the cut on my own cheek, it isn't a hanging matter."</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't a relative in this world," Mr. Walters continued, "and now
+the Sea Dream has gone down would be obliged to look around for a job,
+therefore if you'll accept me as a comrade I'll stay here instead of
+going back to the states."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you really mean to enter upon such a wild venture?" Mr. Emery asked
+in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Most certainly. What is to prevent?"</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing that I know of; but it seems little less than suicide to go
+there after the Indians have been so thoroughly aroused."</p>
+
+<p>"We shall not make the attempt for several months, perhaps a year,"
+Cummings added.</p>
+
+<p>"Where would you propose to stop? Here?"</p>
+
+<p>"How far do you intend to go in this schooner?"</p>
+
+<p>"To the nearest port where we can find a steamer bound for the United
+States."</p>
+
+<p>"That is Progresso, and if you have no objections Poyor and I will
+accompany you there. We need some supplies from Merida, and if Mr.
+Walters is of the same mind when we arrive I shall be more than pleased
+to have him go with us."</p>
+
+<p>"The vessel is at your disposal. We will land you at any point, and I
+yet have sufficient money with me to pay Walters' wages and make him a
+slight advance if he needs it."</p>
+
+<p>"Very little will be required if he joins Poyor and myself. The cost of
+living in this country is small, for nature provides bountifully."</p>
+
+<p>The captain of the schooner, a full-blooded negro, was told to head his
+craft for Progresso as soon as the wind should spring up again, and then
+Mr. Emery asked many questions concerning the city the boys had seen,
+while their answers only made the sailing master more eager to remain
+with Cummings.</p>
+
+<p>"This is hardly fair," Neal finally said. "All the time we have been
+telling you of our adventures, and not one word have we heard regarding
+your movements. I would like to know where the three boats we out-sailed
+went to on the night after leaving the yacht, and where this schooner
+was found?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is not a long story," Mr. Emery replied. "When you disappeared in
+the darkness we continued on the same course, and succeeded in keeping
+the three boats well together. At sunrise your craft was not in sight.
+We held on all that day and the next, finally arriving at Cozumel where
+we stayed three days in the hope you would appear. Then this schooner
+touched at the island, and I chartered her to search for you. We have
+been cruising up and down the coast ever since, for it seemed positive
+your boat reached the land in this immediate vicinity."</p>
+
+<p>"How long would you have stayed here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not many days more, for we had begun to believe you were picked up by a
+vessel. Knowing Jake could handle a small craft better, perhaps than any
+other member of the crew, and also that she was the most seaworthy of
+the four tenders, it did not seem reasonable she had foundered while the
+others went through in safety."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we came out just in time."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, for I had no idea you could be so far up this way, and we should
+have left the locality as soon as the wind would permit."</p>
+
+<p>Jake wanted to ask the sailing master how it happened that he had made
+such a mistake in his reckoning; but it was a delicate question, and he
+thought it best to wait until Mr. Walters had left them, when Neal's
+father could probably give the desired explanation.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>HOMEWARD BOUND.</h4>
+
+
+<p>One can readily fancy what a feeling of perfect content had come over
+the boys after finding themselves once more with nearly all the crew of
+the Sea Dream.</p>
+
+<p>There was no longer anything to cause anxiety; the vengeful Indians had
+been left far behind, and the fear of an attack was among the things of
+the past.</p>
+
+<p>"I used to think it would be mighty nice to go into some such place as
+we have just left," Neal said to Teddy, while the two were sitting under
+the awning aft, some distance from their companions; "but now we know
+what the reality is like, I've had enough."</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose our story would sound pretty fair if it was put into a book;
+but whoever wrote it couldn't be all the time telling about how hungry
+and tired we were, how the mosquitoes and flies nearly ate us up, how
+thoroughly we were frightened the greater portion of the time, nor how
+disagreeable it is to be where there's precious little chance for a
+fellow to keep clean."</p>
+
+<p>"That is why adventures seem so nice when you read about them, for all
+the trifling things which serve to make a person uncomfortable in both
+body and mind are omitted."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," Teddy said very emphatically, "one day would be enough for any
+fellow I know, and the idea of going where there is likely to be plenty
+of chance for adventure will never again have any fascination for me."</p>
+
+<p>In this strain the boys talked until dinner was served on deck, which
+was not a particularly well cooked meal, after which the conversation
+became general.</p>
+
+<p>The re-united party spoke chiefly of Mr. Walters' determination to
+remain with Cummings, and while listening to it Jake forgot all else
+save the wonderful sights he had seen in the famous city.</p>
+
+<p>"I have a good mind to stay with you," he finally said. "The idea that I
+have been where silver could be had for the labor of carrying it away,
+and didn't get any, makes me angry with myself. Now that Mr. Walters has
+concluded to try his hand at it I believe I'll do the same thing."</p>
+
+<p>Poyor looked up quickly, shook his head very decidedly, and Cummings
+said emphatically:</p>
+
+<p>"Then it will be necessary for you to go alone; I've been there once
+with you, and it was only by the rarest good fortune that we succeeded
+in coming away alive, therefore I'm not disposed to try the same
+dangerous experiment again."</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose you think I would make a fool of myself once more?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am positive of it. When your opinion chanced to be at variance with
+ours you would go straight on without giving the slightest heed to the
+consequences. It is best for you to stay with the boys."</p>
+
+<p>Jake had nothing more to say; but later in the day he told Neal and
+Teddy privately that he believed he would venture into the swamp alone.</p>
+
+<p>"I could do it as well as Poyor can. They want to make out that it is a
+very dangerous venture."</p>
+
+<p>"You thought the same on the night when that beautiful scar was
+presented, and also when you wandered away from the cave, unable to find
+your way back," Neal replied with a laugh.</p>
+
+<p>Then Jake had a desperate fit of the sulks from which he did not recover
+until the schooner was standing up the coast under the influence of the
+strong night breeze.</p>
+
+<p>The voyage to Progresso from this time on occupied but a few hours. The
+clumsy looking vessel proved to be a good sailor, and on the following
+afternoon she had dropped anchor in the harbor, twenty-four hours before
+the next steamer was advertised to leave.</p>
+
+<p>There was yet plenty of chance to bid good-by to those who intended to
+remain behind, and the last moments were spent together rather than
+visit the quaint town, for no one could say whether they would meet
+again.</p>
+
+<p>Jake made no further preparation to join the treasure seekers, and Neal
+felt positive that if they had allowed him to make one of the party his
+courage would have failed him at the last minute.</p>
+
+<p>Not until a late hour in the night was there any attempt to break up the
+gathering. Each felt a certain repugnance to so doing, and if Mr. Emery
+had not finally insisted on retiring all might have remained under the
+awning until morning.</p>
+
+<p>"It is good-by as well as good-night," Cummings said as he arose. "We do
+not care to stay here very long for fear some of the Chan Santa Cruz may
+recognize us, and by daybreak I propose to be on our way to Merida, from
+which point we shall return to the hut where we first saw the
+castaways."</p>
+
+<p>"We can at least count on hearing from you," Mr. Emery said. "The boys
+will be eager to learn how your venture succeeded."</p>
+
+<p>"It is not convenient to post a letter where a journey of fifty miles on
+foot is necessary to reach a mailing place; but you shall hear from us
+at the first favorable opportunity."</p>
+
+<p>With Jake, Cummings and Poyor spent but little time; neither had any
+especial love for him after all that had happened; but with the boys the
+Indian was almost affectionate.</p>
+
+<p>"If the gods will listen to Poyor's prayer your lives shall be free from
+clouds," he said gravely, and laying his hands on their heads he went
+through a certain ceremony as if blessing them, after which he did not
+speak again.</p>
+
+<p>If good wishes were of any avail both Walters and Cummings should have
+succeeded in their attempt to carry away treasure from the Silver City;
+but whether they have yet been able to do so neither Neal nor Teddy
+know, for not a word has been heard from them since that parting in the
+harbor at Progresso.</p>
+
+<p>The trip home was as uneventful as is usually the case when one travels
+on a steam vessel, and at about the time when the Sea Dream should have
+arrived the castaways landed in New York before the news of the yacht's
+destruction had been learned.</p>
+
+<p>As a consequence neither Teddy's parents nor Neal's mother had been
+anxious concerning them, and the home coming was a very tame affair, as
+compared with what both had been through.</p>
+
+<p>Even at this late day the boys are speculating as to whether the white
+men and the Indian ever succeeded in their desires, and both believe the
+news will soon come that Cummings has been able to read the inscriptions
+on the monuments at Copan by the aid of his researches in the Silver
+City.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center"><strong>THE END.</strong></p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21268-h.htm or 21268-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/6/21268/
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/21268-h/images/cover.jpg b/21268-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec1557a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/images/cover.jpg
diff --git a/21268-h/images/darkness.png b/21268-h/images/darkness.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..033c73f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/images/darkness.png
diff --git a/21268-h/images/indian.png b/21268-h/images/indian.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cd6737
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/images/indian.png
diff --git a/21268-h/images/reptile.png b/21268-h/images/reptile.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a15b35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/images/reptile.png
diff --git a/21268-h/images/tp.png b/21268-h/images/tp.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93cbd39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-h/images/tp.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/c001.jpg b/21268-page-images/c001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afb8e18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/c001.jpg
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f001.jpg b/21268-page-images/f001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4ce85f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f001.jpg
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f002.png b/21268-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91210d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f003.png b/21268-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34518b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f004.png b/21268-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a56b0ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f005.png b/21268-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..500c0f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f006.png b/21268-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f69d2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f007.png b/21268-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb61fdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f008.png b/21268-page-images/f008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37fea43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f008.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/f009.png b/21268-page-images/f009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..304cda4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/f009.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p001.png b/21268-page-images/p001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfb7f53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p001.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p002.png b/21268-page-images/p002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a972c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p002.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p003.png b/21268-page-images/p003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8f6473
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p003.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p004.png b/21268-page-images/p004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fc8795
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p004.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p005.png b/21268-page-images/p005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8087f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p005.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p006.png b/21268-page-images/p006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56740e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p006.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p007.png b/21268-page-images/p007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ca3518
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p007.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p008.png b/21268-page-images/p008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dea96a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p008.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p009.png b/21268-page-images/p009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e51ea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p009.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p010.png b/21268-page-images/p010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6e4467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p010.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p011.png b/21268-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cbbe77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p012.png b/21268-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf38271
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p013.png b/21268-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58fe9d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p014.png b/21268-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..647f077
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p015.png b/21268-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9777ed3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p016.png b/21268-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..625da9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p017.png b/21268-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04a3943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p018.png b/21268-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84b6789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p019.png b/21268-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23216d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p020.png b/21268-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3d7b08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p021.png b/21268-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6873ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p022.png b/21268-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d388b90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p023.png b/21268-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9eb95f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p024.png b/21268-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a7d368
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p025.png b/21268-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..334013d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p026.png b/21268-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..edcd817
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p027.png b/21268-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03923c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p028.png b/21268-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e0989a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p029.png b/21268-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..baa5a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p030.png b/21268-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a697ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p031.png b/21268-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cee723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p032.png b/21268-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f92f98d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p033.png b/21268-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1eb4c3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p034.png b/21268-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f76d800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p035.png b/21268-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3670a22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p036.png b/21268-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..346041d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p037.png b/21268-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7eb6e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p038.png b/21268-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57d7b01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p039.png b/21268-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e037a15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p040.png b/21268-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c91a7f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p041.png b/21268-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7596320
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p042.png b/21268-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd2e100
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p043.png b/21268-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e79784
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p044.png b/21268-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50ff51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p045.png b/21268-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d04884f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p046.png b/21268-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74b598b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p047.png b/21268-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55747d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p048.png b/21268-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..087d51c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p049.png b/21268-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5390870
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p050.png b/21268-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..469a255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p051.png b/21268-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5aa698
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p052.png b/21268-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d31379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p053.png b/21268-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee3a719
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p054.jpg b/21268-page-images/p054.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4ce85f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p054.jpg
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p055.png b/21268-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea86260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p056.png b/21268-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45b5782
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p057.png b/21268-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1ca6a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p058.png b/21268-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91b4d39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p059.png b/21268-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..116e848
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p060.png b/21268-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..465c74c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p061.png b/21268-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7fc249
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p062.png b/21268-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b36c083
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p063.png b/21268-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd07880
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p064.png b/21268-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cebe82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p065.png b/21268-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..680ebb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p066.png b/21268-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8cf218
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p067.png b/21268-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0cd662
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p068.png b/21268-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0182e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p069.png b/21268-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98a4a17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p070.png b/21268-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea5e910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p071.png b/21268-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28dcb4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p072.png b/21268-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8eab19c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p073.png b/21268-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13402f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p074.png b/21268-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c18a43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p075.png b/21268-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32bb9f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p076.png b/21268-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8b19c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p077.png b/21268-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..839dcc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p078.png b/21268-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61d816d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p079.png b/21268-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8657de7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p080.png b/21268-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..464f004
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p081.png b/21268-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5db004
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p082.png b/21268-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a4116c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p083.png b/21268-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f196613
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p084.png b/21268-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b99f90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p085.png b/21268-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9498475
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p086.png b/21268-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4dda32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p087.png b/21268-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3fd12e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p088.png b/21268-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e9827
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p089.png b/21268-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e2e4be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p090.png b/21268-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86fe34e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p091.png b/21268-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86e819e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p092.png b/21268-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4811f20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p093.png b/21268-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84d8751
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p094.png b/21268-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca24e7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p095.png b/21268-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19f8072
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p096.png b/21268-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f64f410
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p097.png b/21268-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39b4286
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p098.png b/21268-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8145ab9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p099.png b/21268-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e15a60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p100.png b/21268-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac99f90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p101.png b/21268-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53515b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p102.png b/21268-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0402877
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p103.png b/21268-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4810ca2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p104.png b/21268-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61731a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p105.png b/21268-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f66a97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p106.png b/21268-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0aae57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p107.png b/21268-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2586600
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p108.png b/21268-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01e67e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p109.png b/21268-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad6c50e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p110.png b/21268-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c590dd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p111.png b/21268-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..409355d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p112.png b/21268-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca7b0f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p113.jpg b/21268-page-images/p113.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf06c9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p113.jpg
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p114.png b/21268-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d78cb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p115.png b/21268-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5fc555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p116.png b/21268-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e10299b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p117.png b/21268-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa9ea28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p118.png b/21268-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..048e344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p119.png b/21268-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6f3f8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p120.png b/21268-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3743361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p121.png b/21268-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..246780a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p122.png b/21268-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1778506
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p123.png b/21268-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a038ef4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p124.png b/21268-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50e4c6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p125.png b/21268-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e80cff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p126.png b/21268-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71fee71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p127.png b/21268-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b9d159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p128.png b/21268-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02984fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p129.png b/21268-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0d9b22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p130.png b/21268-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c69923b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p131.png b/21268-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c3982c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p132.png b/21268-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0895ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p133.png b/21268-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e234233
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p134.png b/21268-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d332e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p135.png b/21268-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6a614b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p136.png b/21268-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0510ba4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p137.png b/21268-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..752cee9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p138.png b/21268-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a123def
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p139.png b/21268-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a16ea5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p140.png b/21268-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..459c137
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p141.png b/21268-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94d811c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p142.png b/21268-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2aad2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p143.png b/21268-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0fca7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p144.png b/21268-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb89fb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p145.png b/21268-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c8c38a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p146.png b/21268-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7b212f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p147.png b/21268-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb46da6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p148.png b/21268-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..805c514
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p149.png b/21268-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba63722
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p150.png b/21268-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf554c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p151.png b/21268-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54d3fd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p152.png b/21268-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4b05ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p153.png b/21268-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d2f227
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p154.png b/21268-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4d17c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p155.png b/21268-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6123ac4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p156.png b/21268-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7697293
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p157.png b/21268-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01798a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p158.png b/21268-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e575946
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p159.png b/21268-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81cb582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p160.png b/21268-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf92844
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p161.png b/21268-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..053922c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p162.png b/21268-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5455538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p163.png b/21268-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c47d06c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p164.png b/21268-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dd9aec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p165.png b/21268-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1438f65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p166.png b/21268-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fdff4bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p167.png b/21268-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c9111d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p168.png b/21268-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1902a6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p169.png b/21268-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..843dc7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p170.png b/21268-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c3b0b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p171.png b/21268-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34eada4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p172.png b/21268-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1861744
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p173.png b/21268-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..474ef11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p174.png b/21268-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8a26c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p175.png b/21268-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3ddb1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p176.png b/21268-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51cf825
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p177.png b/21268-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcdb176
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p178.png b/21268-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f06321
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p179.png b/21268-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da9c62e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p180.png b/21268-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc5756a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p181.png b/21268-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df8e535
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p182.png b/21268-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02935b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p183.png b/21268-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d7f642
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p184.png b/21268-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a121814
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p185.png b/21268-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19d9e39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p186.png b/21268-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af0ba9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p187.png b/21268-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e46bc88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p188.png b/21268-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e0d366
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p189.png b/21268-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..424f5d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p190.png b/21268-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7951626
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p191.png b/21268-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d58553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p192.png b/21268-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d49fe28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p193.png b/21268-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe437fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p194.png b/21268-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41ee3a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p195.png b/21268-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8093bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p196.png b/21268-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64af2d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p197.png b/21268-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08f22a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p198.png b/21268-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58bff74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p199.png b/21268-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7bc109
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p200.png b/21268-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bcdc02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p201.png b/21268-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b108e6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p202.png b/21268-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d21d9f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p203.png b/21268-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9be17bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p204.png b/21268-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fc2908
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p205.png b/21268-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd1ca2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p206.png b/21268-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f46f92c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p207.png b/21268-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21013a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p208.png b/21268-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f62012
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p209.png b/21268-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67b8b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p210.png b/21268-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e091b76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p211.png b/21268-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d49f75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p212.png b/21268-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d2977c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p213.png b/21268-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7126f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p214.png b/21268-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c871954
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p215.png b/21268-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5372226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p216.png b/21268-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b334f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p217.png b/21268-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47aff5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p218.png b/21268-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0dec675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p219.png b/21268-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed06aeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p220.png b/21268-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cb8507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p221.png b/21268-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd216b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p222.png b/21268-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7eb1978
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p223.png b/21268-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c25c492
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p224.png b/21268-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04c2b4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p225.png b/21268-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c2b875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p226.png b/21268-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..efbdea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p227.png b/21268-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eeabdfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p228.png b/21268-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef3ff41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p229.png b/21268-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..027a0ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p230.png b/21268-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1d4e8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p231.png b/21268-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..198dfa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p232.png b/21268-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df474b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p233.png b/21268-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea6d5f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p234.png b/21268-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..975d1fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p235.png b/21268-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6c9a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p236.png b/21268-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fcfb48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p237.png b/21268-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a642f5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p238.png b/21268-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1dfe74d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p239.png b/21268-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..717da53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p240.png b/21268-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3081d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p241.png b/21268-page-images/p241.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f355c3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p241.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p242.png b/21268-page-images/p242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3275551
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p242.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p243.png b/21268-page-images/p243.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..150e76b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p243.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p244.png b/21268-page-images/p244.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e26b993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p244.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p245.png b/21268-page-images/p245.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be5d689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p245.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p246.png b/21268-page-images/p246.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d3089a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p246.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p247.png b/21268-page-images/p247.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41e2b5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p247.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p248.png b/21268-page-images/p248.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d744f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p248.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p249.png b/21268-page-images/p249.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c100c2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p249.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p250.png b/21268-page-images/p250.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f164c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p250.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p251.png b/21268-page-images/p251.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa3a4f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p251.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p252.png b/21268-page-images/p252.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c9c0c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p252.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p253.png b/21268-page-images/p253.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12b3ab7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p253.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p254.png b/21268-page-images/p254.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90dfc7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p254.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p255.png b/21268-page-images/p255.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..449bfc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p255.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p256.png b/21268-page-images/p256.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d09b8fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p256.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p257.png b/21268-page-images/p257.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b934fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p257.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p258.png b/21268-page-images/p258.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8591ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p258.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p259.png b/21268-page-images/p259.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c52c403
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p259.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p260.png b/21268-page-images/p260.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..084a599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p260.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p261.png b/21268-page-images/p261.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..368743f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p261.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p262.png b/21268-page-images/p262.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..120c3ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p262.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p263.png b/21268-page-images/p263.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb9c254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p263.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p264.png b/21268-page-images/p264.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5fb8652
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p264.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p265.png b/21268-page-images/p265.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ed0614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p265.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p266.png b/21268-page-images/p266.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20651d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p266.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p267.png b/21268-page-images/p267.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5731935
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p267.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p268.jpg b/21268-page-images/p268.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e98b12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p268.jpg
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p269.png b/21268-page-images/p269.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11df30b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p269.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p270.png b/21268-page-images/p270.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4747fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p270.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p271.png b/21268-page-images/p271.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01baa5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p271.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p272.png b/21268-page-images/p272.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d84d24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p272.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p273.png b/21268-page-images/p273.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..712e429
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p273.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p274.png b/21268-page-images/p274.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aceb1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p274.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p275.png b/21268-page-images/p275.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b0082a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p275.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p276.png b/21268-page-images/p276.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3408fea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p276.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p277.png b/21268-page-images/p277.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41d65c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p277.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p278.png b/21268-page-images/p278.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a24fb70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p278.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p279.png b/21268-page-images/p279.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..370344a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p279.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p280.png b/21268-page-images/p280.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdcbad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p280.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p281.png b/21268-page-images/p281.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1950942
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p281.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p282.png b/21268-page-images/p282.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..effeb6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p282.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p283.png b/21268-page-images/p283.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8a71d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p283.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p284.png b/21268-page-images/p284.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e495792
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p284.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p285.png b/21268-page-images/p285.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7c20e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p285.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p286.png b/21268-page-images/p286.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f50104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p286.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p287.png b/21268-page-images/p287.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71eec68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p287.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p288.png b/21268-page-images/p288.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed8665b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p288.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p289.png b/21268-page-images/p289.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a93d9d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p289.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p290.png b/21268-page-images/p290.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0c2107
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p290.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p291.png b/21268-page-images/p291.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe9bfd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p291.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p292.png b/21268-page-images/p292.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15b0752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p292.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p293.png b/21268-page-images/p293.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fa7288
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p293.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p294.png b/21268-page-images/p294.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..837f137
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p294.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p295.png b/21268-page-images/p295.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3272992
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p295.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p296.png b/21268-page-images/p296.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a04f92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p296.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p297.png b/21268-page-images/p297.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4520d3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p297.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p298.png b/21268-page-images/p298.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3bb41b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p298.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p299.png b/21268-page-images/p299.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5a6695
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p299.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p300.png b/21268-page-images/p300.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23bbdfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p300.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p301.png b/21268-page-images/p301.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1042585
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p301.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p302.png b/21268-page-images/p302.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..614d8d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p302.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p303.png b/21268-page-images/p303.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc3b6cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p303.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p304.png b/21268-page-images/p304.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75217ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p304.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p305.png b/21268-page-images/p305.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1da0b6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p305.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p306.png b/21268-page-images/p306.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d8da38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p306.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p307.png b/21268-page-images/p307.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cad093c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p307.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p308.png b/21268-page-images/p308.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8360287
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p308.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p309.png b/21268-page-images/p309.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c572070
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p309.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p310.png b/21268-page-images/p310.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38fe603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p310.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p311.png b/21268-page-images/p311.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae211c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p311.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p312.png b/21268-page-images/p312.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d66a35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p312.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p313.png b/21268-page-images/p313.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5caaa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p313.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p314.png b/21268-page-images/p314.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc55e1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p314.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p315.png b/21268-page-images/p315.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7e3899
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p315.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p316.png b/21268-page-images/p316.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d7fc1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p316.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p317.png b/21268-page-images/p317.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5c2f36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p317.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p318.png b/21268-page-images/p318.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1009b40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p318.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p319.png b/21268-page-images/p319.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29266c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p319.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p320.png b/21268-page-images/p320.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6e4e98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p320.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p321.png b/21268-page-images/p321.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcc2b1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p321.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p322.png b/21268-page-images/p322.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f92b6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p322.png
diff --git a/21268-page-images/p323.png b/21268-page-images/p323.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..670e8f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268-page-images/p323.png
diff --git a/21268.txt b/21268.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99d8d41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8653 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Search for the Silver City
+       A Tale of Adventure in Yucatan
+
+Author: James Otis
+
+Release Date: May 2, 2007 [EBook #21268]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile
+held firm, etc. See Page 193.]
+
+
+
+
+THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.
+
+A TALE OF ADVENTURE IN YUCATAN.
+
+
+By JAMES OTIS.
+Author of "The Castaways," "A Runaway Brig," "The
+Treasure Finders," etc., etc.
+
+
+ILLUSTRATED.
+
+
+NEW YORK:
+A. L. BURT, PUBLISHER.
+
+Copyright, 1893, by A. L. BURT.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In Mr. E. G. Squier's preface to the translation of the Chevalier Arthur
+Morelet's "Travels in Central America" the following paragraph can be
+found:
+
+"Whoever glances at the map of Central America will observe a vast
+region, lying between Chiapas, Tabasco, Yucatan, and the republic of
+Guatemala, and comprising a considerable part of each of those states,
+which, if not entirely a blank, is only conjecturally filled up with
+mountains, lakes and rivers. It is almost as unknown as the interior of
+Africa itself. We only know that it is traversed by nameless ranges of
+mountains, among which the great river Usumasinta gathers its waters
+from a thousand tributaries, before pouring them, in a mighty flood,
+into the Lagoon of Terminos, and the Gulf of Mexico. We know that it has
+vast plains alternating with forests and savannas; deep valleys where
+tropical nature takes her most luxuriant forms, and high plateaus dark
+with pines, or covered with the delicate tracery of arborescent ferns.
+We know that it conceals broad and beautiful lakes, peopled with fishes
+of new varieties, and studded with islands which supports the crumbling
+yet still imposing remains of aboriginal architecture and superstition.
+And we know, also, that the remnants of the ancient Itzaes, Lacandones,
+Choles, and Manches, those indomitable Indian families who successfully
+resisted the force of the Spanish arms, still find a shelter in its
+fastnesses, where they maintain their independence, and preserve and
+practice the rites and habits of their ancestors as they existed before
+the discovery. Within its depths, far off on some unknown tributary of
+the Usumasinta, the popular tradition of Guatemala and Chiapas places
+that great aboriginal city, with its white walls shining like silver in
+the sun, which the _cure_ of Quiche affirmed to Mr. Stephens he had seen,
+with his own eyes, from the tops of the mountains of Quesaltenango."
+
+In Stephens' "Yucatan," Vol II, page 195, are the following lines:
+
+"He (meaning the padre of Quiche, with whom Mr. Stephens was
+conversing), was then young, and with much labor climbed to the naked
+summit of the Sierra, from which, at a height of ten or twelve thousand
+feet, he looked over an immense plain--and saw at a great distance a
+large city spread over a great space, and with turrets white and
+glittering in the sun. The traditionary account of the Indians of Chajul
+is, that no white man has ever reached this city, that the inhabitants
+speak the Maya language, are aware that a race of strangers has
+conquered the whole country around, and murder any white man who
+attempts to enter their territory. They have no coin or other
+circulating medium; no horses, cattle, mules, or other domestic animals
+except fowls, and the cocks they keep under ground to prevent their
+crowing being heard. One look at that city would be worth ten years of
+an every-day life. If he (the padre) is right, a place is left where
+Indians and an Indian city exist as Cortez and Alvarado found them;
+there are living men who can solve the mystery that hangs over the
+ruined cities of America; who perhaps can go to Copan and read the
+inscriptions on its monuments. No subject more exciting and attractive
+presents itself to my mind, and the deep impression will never be
+effaced."
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+                          PAGE.
+CHAPTER I.
+The Sea Dream.                1
+
+CHAPTER II.
+Under Weigh.                  8
+
+CHAPTER III.
+Nassau.                      19
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+A New Danger.                29
+
+CHAPTER V.
+Fighting the Flames.         39
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+The Last Resort.             49
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+On Shore.                    60
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+Suspense.                    71
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+Across the Country.          81
+
+CHAPTER X.
+A Strange Story.             91
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+The Journey.                101
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+The Silver City.            111
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+In the City.                122
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+The Festival.               132
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+A Retreat.                  142
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+Discovered.                 152
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+A Halt.                     162
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+Cave Life.                  172
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+A Change of Base.           182
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+A Desperate Struggle.       192
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+A Long Halt.                202
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+Jake's Venture.             212
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+A Hurried Departure.        222
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+Jake.                       231
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+On the Range.               241
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+The Pursuit.                251
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+At Bay.                     260
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+The Catastrophe.            270
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+A Fierce Conflict.          280
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+A Welcome Change.           290
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+The Sea.                    299
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+A Happy Surprise.           308
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII.
+Homeward Bound.             318
+
+
+
+
+THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE SEA DREAM.
+
+
+Three years ago last August, it is unnecessary to specify the exact
+date, Teddy Wright was not only a very lonely fellow, but considered
+himself abused by circumstances.
+
+During the previous season he had studied very hard at the military
+school on the Hudson which he often referred to slightingly as "the
+barracks," and as a reward for the flattering reports sent home by his
+teachers, had been promised a long vacation in the Adirondacks with a
+schoolmate who lived in the northern portion of New York state.
+
+Teddy's parents and sisters intended spending the summer at some one of
+the fashionable watering places; but with three long months of "roughing
+it" where game could be found in abundance, he had no desire to
+accompany them.
+
+"Life in the woods knocks staying at a big hotel on the sea-shore,
+where a fellow is obliged to be dressed up all the time," he said when
+one of his sisters expressed surprise at his choice. "We shall regularly
+camp out, and father has given me a doubled-barreled breech-loader, to
+say nothing of his own rod and collection of flies. Jack and I will have
+the jolliest kind of a time while you're moonin' on the hot sands trying
+to think it is fun."
+
+Teddy went to Jack's home, and, to his sorrow and dismay, found that
+young gentleman so ill that there was no hope of his being allowed to
+take the long-contemplated trip.
+
+He remained there, however, until perfectly certain of this unpleasant
+fact, and then returned home to the house which had been left in charge
+of one servant, and, as he expressed it, "just to spite himself,"
+refused to join the remainder of the family.
+
+Of course this was a most foolish proceeding; but Teddy was in that
+frame of mind where a boy of seventeen is prone to foolish deeds, and
+there he stayed in a frame of mind very nearly approaching the sulks,
+until he received a letter from Neal Emery, another schoolmate, whose
+father lived in Bridgeport.
+
+Mr. Emery owned a large factory in that city, and Neal had intended to
+spend his vacation at home where he could enjoy the use of a small
+sloop-rigged yacht his mother had presented him with the year previous.
+
+The letter contained a very pressing invitation for Teddy to visit
+Bridgeport, since his trip to the Adirondacks had been postponed, and
+concluded with the startling announcement:
+
+"Father has just bought the Sea Dream, a beautiful steam yacht of an
+hundred feet in length, and I don't know how many tons. He proposes to
+cruise around three or four weeks while mother is at Bar Harbor, and is
+perfectly willing I should invite you to join us. We will have a jolly
+time, and if nothing prevents I want you to come at once. We are to
+start Wednesday morning."
+
+The letter had been received Monday afternoon, therefore Teddy had but
+little time for preparation.
+
+He first sent a long telegram to his father, repeating the substance of
+what Neal had written, and asked permission to enroll himself on the Sea
+Dream's passenger list.
+
+Not until late in the evening did he receive a favorable reply; but his
+traps, including the gun and fishing tackle, were packed, and on the
+first train Tuesday morning he started, all traces of ill-humor having
+vanished, for a cruise on a steam yacht promised quite as great pleasure
+as had the stay in the woods, with not so much certainty of hard work.
+Neal met him at the depot, and after going to the former's home only
+long enough to leave the baggage, the two set out to view the yacht
+which, in all the bravery of glistening paint and polished metal, lay at
+anchor in the harbor.
+
+Although not an expert in matters pertaining to marine architecture,
+Teddy could appreciate the beauty of the little craft while she swung
+lazily to and fro at her cable as if husbanding strength against the
+time when speed and endurance would be required.
+
+Neal signaled from the pier, two of the crew came ashore in the
+captain's boat, and the boys went on board where, during the remainder
+of the day, they were busy examining and admiring the jaunty little
+craft.
+
+Leading from the main saloon were two state-rooms on either side, and in
+one of these Neal had already stored such of his belongings as he
+intended to take on the cruise.
+
+"This is our room, and now that we are here I wonder why we were so
+foolish as to carry your baggage up to the house. If it was with us we
+would remain on board, for it is very much more pleasant than in the hot
+town."
+
+"There is nothing to prevent our bringing it down," Teddy replied with
+a laugh. "I had certainly rather stay here to-night."
+
+"Come on, and then we shall feel more at home when the cruise begins."
+
+The boys were rowed ashore, and the sailors instructed to remain at the
+pier until their return.
+
+Then a short visit was made to Mr. Emery's office, where Neal explained
+what they proposed to do, and having received permission to occupy the
+quarters slightly in advance of sailing time, Teddy's baggage was soon
+in the small apartment which to both the boys looked so enchanting.
+
+"I wish we were to be gone three years," Teddy said as he threw himself
+on a locker and gazed around.
+
+If he could have known just at that moment how long the cruise would
+really last it is very certain he would not have expressed such a
+desire.
+
+"Next year father says he will start early in the season, take mother
+with us, and not come back until it is time for me to go to school."
+
+"And you must get an invitation for me," Teddy replied, his eyes
+glistening with pleasure at simply contemplating such an excursion.
+
+"There won't be any difficulty about it. He has already promised that if
+nothing happens he will speak to your father."
+
+"And in the meanwhile we've got before us the jolly fact that we're to
+stay on board a month."
+
+"Yes; but there's no good reason why we should remain below where it is
+so warm. Come on deck for awhile, and then we'll have a look at the
+engine-room."
+
+The engineer, Jake Foster, was under the awning aft, and Neal introduced
+his friend, saying as he did so:
+
+"Teddy has never been yachting before, not even in a sailing craft."
+
+Jake, a stout, jolly looking fellow hardly more than twenty-five years
+of age, gazed at the visitor curiously a moment, and then said with a
+hearty laugh:
+
+"He'll have a chance to find out what an acquaintance with the ocean
+means, for I understand that Mr. Emery is going to run well over to the
+Bahamas before he comes back."
+
+"Father has business there which it would be necessary to attend to not
+later than next fall, so intends to make it a portion of the pleasure
+trip."
+
+"Are we likely to have much rough weather?" Teddy asked, realizing for
+the first time that it was more than possible he might be called upon to
+pay Neptune a tribute.
+
+"Not at this time of the year; but its more'n probable the Sea Dream
+will kick up her heels enough to show something of what is meant by a
+life on the ocean wave before she pokes her nose into this port again."
+
+Then the engineer was summoned from below, and the boys remained aft
+recalling to mind all they had studied relative to the Bahama banks.
+
+The stores were on board; everything was in readiness for the start as
+soon as the owner should arrive, and when the steward summoned them to
+supper it seemed as if the voyage had really begun.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+UNDER WEIGH.
+
+
+It was a long while before the boys could close their eyes in slumber on
+this first night aboard the Sea Dream, owing to the novelty of the
+surroundings. It seemed as if Teddy would never cease admiring the snug
+quarters with the guns and fishing rods hung where they could be seen to
+the best advantage, and Neal had very much to say regarding the plans he
+proposed to carry into execution during the cruise.
+
+Despite such enchanting topics of conversation they were not able to
+remain awake all night, and when finally the journey into dreamland was
+made, neither returned to a full realization of the situation until
+quite late in the morning.
+
+Teddy was the first to open his eyes, and in a very few seconds the
+throbbing of the screw, as well as the invigorating draught of cool air
+which came through the open port-hole, told him that the voyage had
+really begun.
+
+"Neal, Neal," he cried, shaking his friend vigorously. "Wake up; I think
+we are at sea."
+
+Neal was on his feet in an instant, and after one glance through the
+tiny window he replied with a laugh:
+
+"There's no question about our being under way; but we sha'n't see the
+sea to-day."
+
+"Why, we are on it now."
+
+"If you have forgotten your geography as soon as this you'll be obliged
+to do some mighty hard studying when we get back to school. The Sea
+Dream must go through the sound before we reach the ocean, and most
+likely we shall make harbor at Martha's Vineyard to-night."
+
+"Of course I knew about the sound; I had forgotten, that's all," and
+Teddy looked just a trifle ashamed at having displayed so much
+ignorance.
+
+Never had the boys made their toilets more quickly. Both were eager to
+be on deck in order to extract the greatest possible amount of pleasure
+out of this first day of the cruise, and when they finally emerged from
+the companion-way an exclamation of surprise and delight burst from
+Teddy's lips.
+
+The yacht was steaming at nearly full speed over waters as placid as a
+pond, and here and there were craft of all kinds darting back and forth
+like active fish.
+
+"I tell you there's nothing in the way of sport to beat sailing," Teddy
+said enthusiastically.
+
+"There are times when it isn't quite as nice as this. When it storms,
+and the yacht dances around so that it is impossible to come on deck you
+will think camping in the Adirondacks is much better."
+
+"I thought vessels always went into a harbor at such times."
+
+"If you are at sea it is necessary to take whatever comes in the way of
+weather, but there is no reason why we should speak of such things now.
+Let's have a look at Jake and his engine before breakfast."
+
+During this first day of the cruise the boys were very busy.
+Considerable time was spent eating three decidedly hearty meals, and
+what with inspecting every portion of the steamer and watching the
+passing vessels, they managed without much trouble to find something in
+the way of amusement until the Sea Dream arrived off Cottage City, where
+Mr. Emery proposed to stop a day or two.
+
+The wind had come up quite strong toward night, and when the little
+craft swung to her anchors some distance from the shore Teddy was
+feeling decidedly disagreeable.
+
+There was not sea enough to trouble the greenest fresh-water sailor that
+ever "caught a crab;" but to poor Teddy, who had never been on the
+water save when crossing from New York to Brooklyn or Jersey City, it
+seemed as if the Sea Dream was very like a hideous nightmare.
+
+She danced lightly on the long swell as if courtesying to the craft in
+her immediate vicinity, and each graceful movement caused Neal's guest
+to fancy his stomach was turning somersaults.
+
+"You are not going below now?" the former said as Teddy staggered toward
+the companion-way.
+
+"I am if it is possible to get there," was the impatient reply.
+
+"But we shall have a chance to see the town. Father is going ashore
+presently."
+
+"In one of those little boats?" and Teddy pointed to the davits where
+four polished tenders hung glistening in the sun like some articles of
+adornment.
+
+"Of course. How else could he get there?"
+
+"That doesn't make any difference to me. This boat is bouncing around
+enough for a fellow to wish he'd never heard of such a thing as a yacht,
+and in one of those egg-shells I'm certain it must be terrible."
+
+"But it isn't. Try not to think of being sick, and come on shore with
+me."
+
+"How can I help not thinking about it when I feel as if I was dying?"
+
+Then, as if unable to prolong the conversation, Teddy ran below, while
+his friend followed more leisurely.
+
+Neal could offer no inducements sufficiently strong to tempt his
+companion out of the berth, and there he remained until next morning
+when, in half a gale of wind, Mr. Emery decided to take a party of
+friends to Nantucket.
+
+Only this was needed to give Teddy a severe attack of seasickness during
+which, when he spoke at all, it was to repeat over and over again his
+intention of going home as soon as the Sea Dream arrived at Cottage
+City.
+
+Probably he would have carried this threat into execution if the
+excursion had not been prolonged; but it was four days before the yacht
+returned to Martha's Vineyard, and by that time he had, as Jake
+expressed it, "found his sea legs."
+
+Now no matter how much the little craft tumbled around he remained
+undisturbed, and the sight of food was no longer disagreeable, but very
+pleasing to him.
+
+Therefore it was that when the Sea Dream left Cottage City for the
+Bahamas, the delightful portion of the cruise, so far as Teddy was
+concerned, had but just begun.
+
+Inasmuch as there was no especial reason why they should arrive at any
+certain time, and the owner wished to remain at sea as long as possible
+while making the voyage, the yacht was run at half speed, thus not only
+saving considerable coal; but unnecessary wear and tear of the
+machinery.
+
+That it could be very warm on the water had never entered the minds of
+the boys; but as they journeyed southward the heat became intense.
+During two days it was almost a perfect calm, the only air stirring
+being that caused by the motion of the steamer, and the cabin seemed
+like an oven. There the thermometer stood at 84 degrees, while in the
+galley it was twenty degrees higher, and in the engine-room it
+frequently rose to 130 degrees.
+
+Neal and Teddy could do little more than lie under the awning aft,
+working hard but unsuccessfully to keep cool by the aid of fans and such
+iced drinks as the steward prepared.
+
+The novelty of yachting had passed away in a measure, and they were
+already counting the days which must elapse before the Sea Dream would
+be in a less torrid climate.
+
+Jake had assured them that when the yacht came to an anchor and the
+fires were drawn it would be much cooler on board, therefore both the
+boys were delighted when Bridge Point at the entrance to the N. E.
+Providence Channel was sighted.
+
+There was a light breeze blowing off the banks, and the yacht was
+running slowly as she passed within a quarter of a mile of the low lying
+land, when suddenly a most disagreeable odor from the shore caused Neal
+to say impatiently:
+
+"If such perfumes as that are common to the Bahamas I had rather endure
+the heat than stay a very long while, no matter how cool it may be when
+we cease steaming."
+
+"What is it?" and Teddy covered his nose with his handkerchief.
+
+"I don't know; but I wish Jake would put her ahead faster, for it is
+absolutely sickening."
+
+His desire for more speed was not gratified. To the surprise of both the
+boys the engine-room gong sounded for the machinery to be stopped, and
+as the headway was checked Mr. Walters, the sailing master, came from
+the wheel-house to where Mr. Emery was sitting.
+
+The boys could not hear the short conversation which followed; but their
+surprise increased as the order was given to lower away one of the port
+boats.
+
+"What are we stopping here for?" Neal inquired of his father.
+
+"Doesn't the odor give you any idea?" Mr. Emery asked with a smile.
+
+"None except that the sooner we get away the more comfortable I shall
+feel."
+
+"When I tell you that we are likely to find as the cause of your
+discomfort something nearly as precious as gold, it may be a trifle more
+bearable."
+
+Both Neal and Teddy looked perplexed, and the latter said laughingly:
+
+"It is strong enough to be worth a good deal; but do you really mean
+what you say, sir?"
+
+"Every word. Mr. Walters thinks he can find ambergris which has been
+washed up on the rocks, and that is quoted at ten dollars per ounce. Now
+you boys have been at school long enough to know exactly why it is so
+valuable."
+
+"I have heard of it as being the base of the finest perfumes," Neal said
+slowly; "but that must surely be a mistake if it smells anything like
+this," and he did violence to his stomach by inhaling a long breath of
+the disagreeably laden air.
+
+"It is true, nevertheless. Ambergris is believed to be the product of a
+sort of ulcer or cancer which has formed in the bowels of a whale. After
+a certain length of time, or because a cure has been wrought by change
+of feeding place, the mass is dislodged. It floats, and is often found
+far out to sea; but more particularly among the cays in the Turks
+islands. It is the foundation of nearly every perfume, and in ancient
+times was used for spicing wine."
+
+During this conversation the boat had been lowered, and, with Mr.
+Walters as steersman, was being pulled toward the land. Now Neal and
+Teddy were sorry they had not accompanied the sailing master; but it was
+too late for regrets, and the odor did not seem to be nearly as
+disagreeable since they knew from what it proceeded.
+
+"Never mind how much the stuff is worth," Teddy said, as he and Neal
+leaned over the rail in company with Jake, who had come on deck to
+ascertain why the yacht had been brought to a standstill, "it isn't a
+nice thing to smell of, and I shall remember this afternoon whenever I
+see perfume."
+
+"It isn't always the most agreeable things which are of the most
+service," Jake replied with an air of wisdom; and then as a loud shout
+was heard from the shore, the boat having reached the land some time
+since, he added, "It's ambergris for a fact, or they wouldn't be makin'
+such a fuss."
+
+Five minutes later the little craft was seen approaching the yacht, and
+each instant the odor became stronger until both the boys were forced to
+cover their organs of smell.
+
+In the bow of the boat was a black mass looking not unlike coke, and
+weighing, as was afterward ascertained, forty ounces.
+
+"I thought I couldn't be mistaken, although I never run across anything
+of the kind but once before," Mr. Walters said triumphantly, as he
+handed the precious substance up to one of the sailors, who took it very
+unwillingly.
+
+"We shall be driven out of the yacht if you try to carry it home," Mr.
+Emery replied, moving aft as far as possible.
+
+"It won't trouble us many hours. We will sell or ship it at Nassau, and
+I reckon all hands can manage to live until we arrive there."
+
+The valuable substance was wrapped carefully in several thicknesses of
+canvas, and placed in the hold where it is not probable any odor from it
+could have been perceptible on deck, although both the boys were quite
+positive the yacht was thoroughly permeated.
+
+After this short delay the Sea Dream continued on her course at a higher
+rate of speed, for now that she was so near land the heat seemed
+unbearable, and when night came Neal and Teddy stretched themselves out
+in the hammocks which had been slung under the after awning, wishing,
+not for a glimpse of Nassau; but that they were off the New England
+coast instead of being so near the tropics.
+
+Then, despite the profuse perspiration, both fell asleep, not to waken
+until the rattling of the cable through the hawse-holes told that they
+were in the harbor.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+NASSAU.
+
+
+A semi-tropical port in midsummer is by no means a pleasant place
+however diversified and picturesque the scenery may be, and when the
+boys awakened from their restless slumber the lassitude which beset them
+told how great an effect the climate could exert.
+
+Even Mr. Emery was disinclined to any severe exertion; but his business
+must be transacted, and, after a breakfast eaten on deck, he ordered the
+boat to be made ready.
+
+"If possible I shall leave to-night," Neal and Teddy heard him say to
+the sailing master, "therefore it will be well to get your ambergris on
+shore before noon."
+
+Neither of the boys cared to see the town at the expense of walking
+around under the blazing sun, and when Mr. Emery was being rowed toward
+the dock-yard they joined Jake who, in the coolest spot under the
+awning, was watching the fishermen near by.
+
+The water was clear as crystal, and of a bright greenish tinge which
+admitted of their seeing very distinctly the tiny fish of silver and
+golden hues as they darted to and fro; the violet and blue medusae, and
+the cream-colored jelly-fish as big as a watermelon. There were angel
+fish of a bright blue tinge; yellow snappers; black and white sergeant
+majors; pilot fish; puff fish which could inflate their bodies until
+they were round as a ball, or flatten themselves to the shape of a
+griddle cake.
+
+The cow fish attracted the boys' attention more particularly, for it had
+two horns, and its head was shaped exactly like a cow, and when one
+passed with a "calf" as Teddy called it, swimming by her side, both
+agreed that it was well worth suffering so much from the heat to see
+such a sight.
+
+Fish of all colors and sizes swam around the yacht as if examining her
+hull, and the effect of such brilliant hues displayed through the
+crystal-like water was actually startling because of the gorgeousness.
+
+Before they were weary of admiring this aquatic panorama Jake called
+their attention to a fisherman who, in a small canoe, was pursuing his
+vocation in a very odd manner.
+
+In his boat he had a hideous looking sucking fish, around the tail of
+which was tied a long cord with a wooden float at one end. While the
+boys were watching him he dropped the monster overboard, and in an
+instant it darted at a medium-sized Jew fish, attaching itself to the
+latter by means of the sucking valve on the top of its head. Having done
+this he remained motionless, his victim seeming to be literally
+paralyzed, and there was nothing for the boatman to do but pull in on
+the float, disengage his animated fishhook by a dextrous pressure on the
+sucker after both had been drawn aboard, and send the repulsive looking
+servant out again.
+
+Although the Jew fish must have weighed at least a hundred pounds, he
+was landed without difficulty, and Jake gravely assured his companions
+that a sucking fish could "pull up the whole bottom of the ocean
+providin' the rope on his tail was strong enough to stand the strain."
+
+Then the engineer told a story which did not bear quite so hard on the
+imagination since it was absolutely true, and began by saying as he
+pointed toward the little fortification known as Montague fort:
+
+"That place has been the headquarters of at least a dozen pirates, the
+worst of which was called Black Beard, a bloodthirsty villain who sunk
+two vessels right where we are anchored this blessed minute. The
+feller's real name was John Teach, an' that big banyan tree over there
+is where he used to hold what he allowed was court martials.
+
+"He was drunk about three-quarters of the time, an' allers had a great
+spree when there were any prisoners on hand. He an' his men would get
+the poor wretches to the tree, go through all the ceremony of a reg'lar
+trial, an' allers end by stringin' every blessed one of 'em up in such a
+way as to prevent 'em from dyin' quick, when a fire'd be built
+underneath, so's to roast the whole lot.
+
+"They do say he buried all the treasure among the roots of the banyan,
+an' many's the one who has dug for it; but so far as I ever heard, not a
+single piece has been found. While he lived this wasn't a very pleasant
+harbor for them as cared about a livin' to make."
+
+"What became of him finally?" Teddy asked.
+
+"An English man-of-war got hold of him after awhile, an' he was strung
+on the yardarm to dry. If I'd been in command of the vessel he should
+have found out how it felt to be roasted. Say, don't you boys want to go
+over to Potter's cay?"
+
+"What is to be seen there?"
+
+"The sponge yards, an' it's a great sight if you never visited one."
+
+"It is too hot," Neal replied with a very decided shake of the head.
+
+Jake did not urge the matter, for just at that moment the second port
+boat was lowered, and Mr. Walters made ready to go ashore with his
+precious bundle of aromatic ambergris.
+
+Idly the boys watched the perspiring party, pressing handkerchiefs to
+their faces meanwhile, since, despite the wrappings of canvas, the
+valuable mass gave most decided proof of its being in the vicinity, and
+when the boat started for the shore Neal and Teddy clambered into the
+hammocks, for even leaning over the rail was an exertion in the sultry
+atmosphere.
+
+During the middle of the day both the boys slept, for a siesta is as
+necessary as food in hot climates, and when the light breeze of evening
+crept over the waters Mr. Emery came aboard with the welcome
+intelligence that his business had been concluded.
+
+"We will get under way again before midnight," he said as he stepped
+over the rail, and was received by Mr. Walters. "Now that a breeze has
+set in it should be cool enough to permit of the men's working without
+fear of prostration."
+
+"It would use me up to walk fore and aft twice," Neal said in an
+undertone to Teddy; "but it isn't for us to complain of the heat if we
+can get out of this furnace."
+
+Jake was nowhere to be seen. It was as if after his invitation to go on
+shore had been declined he betook himself to some other portion of the
+yacht, where he could perspire without allowing the others to see his
+suffering, and the boys swung to and fro until the hour came when the
+singing of steam told that preparations for departure were being made.
+
+There could be no doubt but that Nassau would be a pleasant place in
+which to spend the winter months; but it was by no means desirable
+during the summer, and when the Sea Dream left the little harbor where
+the water was hardly more than sufficient to float her, both Neal and
+Teddy gave vent to a sigh of relief.
+
+"We are to run south until it is possible to give the banks a clear
+berth, and then stand straight up the coast for home," the former said
+as the yacht glided almost noiselessly over the phosphorescent lighted
+waters down the eastern side of the shoals. "If a good head of steam is
+kept on we should be in a colder latitude very soon."
+
+"We can't get there any too soon to please me," Teddy replied, as he
+waved the palm-leaf fan languidly. "I believe it would be a positive
+comfort to have my nose frost-bitten."
+
+"It isn't possible you will have such comfort as that for some time to
+come; but we may be able to make your teeth chatter in a few days," Neal
+replied laughingly, and then as the breeze caused by the movement of
+the yacht over the water fanned his face, he added sleepily, "Good
+night; I don't believe I shall open my eyes until after sunrise
+to-morrow."
+
+As a matter of fact this prediction was not verified; before evening a
+wind had come out of the sea which caused the yacht to bow before it
+like a reed in a storm, and the hammocks that, a few hours previous, had
+seemed so rest-inviting, were swinging at a rate that threatened to
+throw their occupants to the deck.
+
+"I fancy it is time we went below," Neal said, as he awakened his friend
+by a series of vigorous shakes. "If we stay here half an hour longer it
+will be doubtful whether we're on board or in the water."
+
+The Sea Dream's lee rail was already so near the surface that the green
+waves curled over it now and then, and before the boys could reach the
+cabin they were thoroughly drenched.
+
+It was the greatest possible relief to crawl into the bunk and pull up
+the bed-clothes to defend themselves against the cold wind which came
+through the port-hole, and so delicious was this sense of being chilly
+that they failed to realize the cause of the sudden change in the
+weather, until they heard the sailing master in the cabin reply to Mr.
+Emery's question:
+
+"You are getting your first taste of what is known as a norther; but
+there isn't the slightest danger if we can crawl away from the land, and
+we shall have no trouble in doing that so long as there is a full head
+of steam on."
+
+"What does he mean by a norther?" Teddy asked of Neal, who had shown, by
+rising on his elbow, that he was awake.
+
+"A wind coming from the north, more frequently met in the Gulf of
+Mexico, when the temperature falls very suddenly, as was the case this
+evening, and a furious gale is often the result."
+
+"So long as it holds cold I don't see that we have any cause to
+complain," was the sleepy rejoinder; but before the night came to a
+close he had good reason for changing his mind on the subject.
+
+It was about midnight, as near as the boys could judge without looking
+at a watch, when the yacht was flung on her beam ends with a sudden
+force which threw both out of the berth, and before the port-hole could
+be fastened, flooded the state-room with water.
+
+Teddy might well be excused for the shrill cry of alarm which escaped
+from his lips, for at that moment even an experienced sailor would have
+fancied the little craft had struck upon a reef, more particularly
+since it was known they were in a dangerous locality.
+
+"We are sinking!" he cried frantically as he tried in vain to open the
+door, and Neal was of the same opinion.
+
+After what seemed to be a very long while although in reality it could
+have been but a few seconds, the Sea Dream slowly righted, and then it
+was possible for the boys to gain the cabin.
+
+Here they were met by Mr. Emery, who had just succeeded in leaving his
+own room, and before any conversation could be indulged in the steamer
+began pitching and rolling about in a manner that showed she was not on
+the reef even if the first shock had been the result of striking one.
+
+It was only by holding with all their strength to the immovable articles
+of furniture that they avoided being flung from one end of the cabin to
+the other, as the yacht plunged and tossed, throwing violently to and
+fro everything which had not been securely fastened.
+
+The cabin lamp was burning dimly, and the faint light only served to
+reveal more clearly the general confusion.
+
+Once amid the tumult the boys heard Mr. Emery shout:
+
+"Don't be frightened; if there was any immediate danger Mr. Walters
+would warn us."
+
+"He may not be able to come where we are," Teddy thought; but he
+refrained from giving words to such a dismal foreboding, and in silent
+fear waited for--he knew not what.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+A NEW DANGER.
+
+
+To the frightened boys in the cabin it was as if the night would never
+come to an end, and during every one of those fearful moments they
+believed the yacht was on the point of taking the final plunge.
+
+At four o'clock in the morning the steamer's movements became more
+regular; but not less in violence, and, shortly after, the sailing
+master came below.
+
+"We are laying-to," he said to Mr. Emery. "There is a nasty sea on, and
+I didn't care to take the chances of fighting against it."
+
+"How does she stand it?"
+
+"Like a darling. I was afraid of straining her at first; but when she
+took the butt end of the storm in such a pleasant fashion there was no
+longer any reason to fret about her."
+
+"It didn't seem like such a very pleasant fashion to us," Teddy said to
+Neal, who had succeeded in gaining a chair near his friend.
+
+"It appeared to me as if she kicked pretty hard about it," Neal
+replied, and then Mr. Emery asked:
+
+"What are the weather indications?"
+
+"There is no reason to hope for anything better until the wind blows
+itself out, and according to my way of thinking that won't be within the
+next twenty-four hours. Why don't you people lie down?"
+
+"Because it has been a matter of impossibility to remain in the berths."
+
+"You can do so now without much difficulty. Come, boys, let me help you
+to turn in."
+
+The calm, matter-of-fact way in which Mr. Walters acted caused the boys
+to feel more comfortable in mind, and they made no protest when he
+assisted them to the state-room where there was yet water enough to show
+what had happened.
+
+"Why didn't you call one of the stewards to mop this up?" the sailing
+master asked as he lighted the swinging lamp.
+
+"We haven't seen one since the gale begun," Neal replied with a laugh.
+"I fancy they were as much frightened as Teddy and I."
+
+"It won't take long to turn them out," and Mr. Walters started forward
+in a manner which boded no good for the skulkers.
+
+Neal and Teddy found little difficulty in retaining a recumbent
+position, although the yacht was tossing up and down like a mad thing.
+She no longer gave those sudden lurches which threatened to carry away
+even the short spars, and for the first time since the deluge from the
+port-hole, they began to feel really comfortable in mind.
+
+The steward came in very shortly after Mr. Walters left, and from the
+expression on his face it was evident he had been rated severely for
+neglect of duty.
+
+"It didn't make any difference to us whether the water was washed up or
+not," Neal said in a friendly tone. "The sailing master saw it and asked
+why we hadn't called you."
+
+"He don't allow that a man has any right to sleep," the steward replied
+sulkily. "If he'd been up since five o'clock, he'd want to turn in
+before midnight instead of foolin' around the cabin till it was time to
+begin another day's work."
+
+"Is it possible that you have been sleeping?" Neal asked in surprise.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"I don't see how you could even lie down while the yacht was tumbling
+about in such a furious manner."
+
+"That was none of my business. I didn't ship before the mast,
+consequently it ain't any duty of mine to go prowlin' 'round if the
+wind happened to blow a little."
+
+"If you call this a 'little' I wouldn't like to be on board when you
+thought it was a regular gale," Teddy said with a laugh.
+
+"I've seen the wind blow so hard that a fellow had to lash his hair down
+to keep it from bein' carried away when he went on deck; but that didn't
+stop my wantin' to get a watch below."
+
+With this remark the steward, having finished his work, left the room,
+and the boys were alone once more.
+
+Although they had believed it would be impossible to sleep during a gale
+such as the yacht was now laboring under, the eyes of both were soon
+closed in slumber, not to be opened until late in the morning.
+
+So far as could be told by the motion, there was no diminution in the
+strength of the wind, and they experienced great difficulty in making
+their toilets.
+
+When this task had finally been accomplished, however, Neal said as he
+opened the door after some trouble, owing to the erratic movements of
+the yacht:
+
+"I'm going on deck. It can't be much worse there, and it wouldn't be a
+bad idea to see what the ocean looks like in a gale."
+
+"I'll go too: but don't let's venture out of the companion-way, for the
+waves must be making a clean sweep over the decks."
+
+When the boys entered the cabin no one was to be seen save the surly
+steward who visited them the night previous, and in reply to Neal's
+question he said:
+
+"Your father left word that he wasn't to be called. It wouldn't be much
+use for him to turn out, because we can't set the table in such a
+rumpus."
+
+"What are we to do for breakfast?"
+
+"The same as Mr. Walters did, get a cup of coffee and a hard-tack;
+that'll go way ahead of nothin' if you're very hungry."
+
+"We can go into the galley when we want a bite," Neal replied, and then
+he led the way up the narrow stairs where, through the half-opened
+hatch, it was possible to get a view of the raging waters.
+
+Perhaps it would have been better, so far as their peace of mind was
+concerned, not to have ventured out, for the scene was anything rather
+than reassuring.
+
+Standing there and looking forward the boys could see a huge wall of
+water dead ahead bearing down upon the yacht as if to swamp her, and at
+the moment when it appeared as if the final stroke had come she would
+lurch to leeward, presenting her side to the wave, rising on the
+succeeding one and shivering on its crest as if shaking the spray from
+her shrouds, after which came the downward plunge that caused the boys
+to hold their breath in fear.
+
+The sky, the swiftly flying clouds, and the waves were of a grayish hue
+looking ominous and threatening and the little craft appeared to be but
+a plaything for the angry elements. That she could out-ride the gale
+seemed almost impossible, and Teddy said with a shudder as he descended
+the stairs:
+
+"Don't let's stay where we can see it. I wish I hadn't looked, for, bad
+as matters seem to be down here, it is as nothing compared to being on
+deck."
+
+Neal was of the same opinion, and the two passed through the cabin to
+the engine-room where Jake was keeping vigilant watch over the
+machinery.
+
+"Why, I thought we were hove to," Neal exclaimed in surprise as the
+engineer assisted him and Teddy to a seat by his side.
+
+"So we are; but it is necessary to keep the screw turning, otherwise it
+might not be possible to hold her in the proper position."
+
+"How long have you been on duty?"
+
+"Since I saw you last."
+
+"Haven't you had any sleep?"
+
+"I can bottle up enough when the gale abates; but just now it stands a
+man in hand to have his weather eye open pretty wide, for a bit of
+carelessness would work considerable mischief. I'm going to have
+breakfast, an' if you boys care to join me we'll make it three-handed.
+You're not likely to fare any better in the cabin than here to-day."
+
+The boys accepted the invitation, and with some cold meat and hard-tack
+placed on the locker where it could not slide off, and mugs of steaming
+coffee in their hands, all made a remarkably jolly meal under the
+unfavorable circumstances.
+
+During the remainder of the day Neal and Teddy stayed below, not caring
+for another view of the angry sea, and when night came the gale had so
+far abated that the yacht was sent ahead once more; but owing to the
+force and direction of the wind it was deemed best to continue on a
+southerly course even at the expense of reaching the Caribbean Sea,
+rather than take the chances of putting about.
+
+All this Jake explained when the boys visited him just previous to
+retiring, and he added in conclusion:
+
+"It seems pretty tough to go yet further south; but Mr. Walters is a
+cautious sailin' master, an' when he makes up his mind to a thing you
+can count on its bein' mighty nigh right."
+
+"Will it be possible to get home as soon as father intended if we go so
+far out of the way?" Neal asked.
+
+"If he don't do any cruisin' after he gets up north I reckon it could be
+done; but there's no sense in figgerin' on that till we're off
+Hatteras."
+
+Now that the yacht had proved her seaworthiness by riding safely through
+the storm the boys would have been willing to go almost anywhere in her,
+and the idea that they might have no cruising in a more agreeable
+climate caused a decided feeling of disappointment; but, as Jake had
+said, there was no reason to worry about that while they were so far
+from home, and as if by common consent the subject was not broached
+again.
+
+On the following morning when they went on deck the sun was shining down
+upon the yet angry looking waves; but one of the sailors assured them
+that "the gale had blowed itself out."
+
+"It stands to reason there'd be a heavy sea runnin'; but its settlin'
+down fast, an' by to-morrow there won't be swell enough for comfort."
+
+In this he was correct. Twenty-four hours later the awnings were up, and
+all hands were panting under the blazing heat of a tropical sun.
+
+This sudden change prostrated the boys, and during the next two days
+they fanned themselves, drank iced drinks, and sought in vain for some
+spot where a breath of cool air could be found.
+
+It was the fourth day after the norther. While waiting for dinner to be
+brought on deck (the meals had been served under the awnings since the
+storm, for the cabin was too hot to permit even of their eating there),
+Teddy lay near the after starboard boat lazily wondering why that thin
+curl of blue smoke should come from the planking directly over the
+kitchen, instead of through the pipe as it always had before.
+
+Owing to the fact that there was no unusual disturbance he never fancied
+for a moment anything could be wrong, and remained gazing at it in
+silence so long that Neal asked curiously:
+
+"What do you see that is so very interesting?"
+
+"I was wondering what had happened to the galley pipe."
+
+"How do you know that it isn't all right?"
+
+"I suppose it is; but it looks queer to see that smoke coming up as if
+from the deck."
+
+Neal looked in the direction indicated by Teddy's outstretched finger,
+and seeing the blue curl, which had now grown considerably thicker,
+sprang to his feet very quickly.
+
+Without speaking to his friend he ran forward, Teddy still ignorant
+there was any danger, and in the shortest possible space of time Mr.
+Walters came from the wheel-house in response to Neal's emphatic
+request.
+
+To Teddy it seemed as if but an instant elapsed before the deck was a
+scene of confusion, and as all hands were called for duty he heard one
+of the sailors cry in a tone of alarm:
+
+"Tumble up, boys, the yacht is on fire!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FIGHTING THE FLAMES.
+
+
+It was some moments after the fire was discovered before anything could
+be done toward checking the flames, for the very good reason that the
+exact location remained a mystery until a visit had been paid to the
+hold.
+
+The cook said the galley felt unusually warm; but he paid no particular
+attention to the fact, thinking the weather had grown hotter, and, save
+for the smoke, there were no signs of fire to be seen anywhere until Mr.
+Walters called upon one of the men to raise the hatch which led into the
+eyes of the yacht directly beneath the kitchen.
+
+Instantly this was done a broad sheet of flame burst forth, and had the
+stout covering not been replaced immediately, the little craft would
+have soon been consumed.
+
+Working with all speed, for even the seconds were precious now, the
+hatch was battened down, and a hole large enough to admit of the nozzle
+of the hose, bored just abaft the hatch-way.
+
+While this was being done a portion of the crew had been getting into
+working order the hose used for washing down the decks, and when all was
+ready the real task of extinguishing the flames began.
+
+A steady stream of water was forced into the hold as rapidly as the men
+could work the pumps, and the lower deck examined carefully for the
+slightest aperture which might admit air.
+
+How the fire had started no one knew, nor was any time spent in trying
+to ascertain, for every person had been detailed to some duty.
+
+Neal and Teddy were given the lightest task, which was simply to watch
+the hose at the place where it entered the deck, to make sure the water
+flowed through freely, and the nozzle did not slip out.
+
+Ten minutes after the alarm had been raised all hands were working
+methodically, thanks to the discipline maintained by Mr. Walters, and it
+became a question simply of whether the flames could be stifled or
+drowned.
+
+"Do you think they can save the yacht?" Teddy asked after a short time
+of silence, and Neal, who had not seen the broad sheet of flame which
+leaped from the hatch-way replied confidently:
+
+"Of course. If the hold is filled with water she surely can't burn."
+
+"Are there boats enough to carry us all in case the fire does get the
+best of us?"
+
+"Certainly; but it won't come to anything quite as bad as that."
+
+Before Teddy could ask another question one of the stewards shouted down
+the forward companion-way:
+
+"Mr. Emery says that his son is to come on deck. There is no need of two
+there."
+
+Neal obeyed the summons thinking he was to assist at the pumps; but in
+this he was speedily undeceived.
+
+"Take such things as you are likely to need most from your state-room,
+and stow them in one of the boats aft," his father said when he reported
+for further duty. "Although I don't think we shall be obliged to abandon
+the yacht, it is well to be prepared for any emergency."
+
+This was no time to ask questions, and Neal obeyed at once, observing as
+he entered the cabin that the stewards were collecting food and such
+other things as might be needed in case they were forced to depend upon
+the frail crafts.
+
+This work rather than the evidences of fire in the hold, frightened
+Neal. Until this moment he had not believed there was any possibility
+the steamer could be destroyed while there were so many to assist in
+saving her; but now there was no question as to the fact of their being
+in great danger.
+
+"Unless father and Mr. Walters were convinced that the fire had got
+considerable headway, the boats would not be provisioned so soon," he
+said to himself.
+
+His portion of the work could be performed quickly. He and Teddy had
+brought all their belongings, with the exception of the fowling pieces
+and the fishing rods, aboard in two satchels, and these he packed with
+the utmost expedition. Then, with both weapons, he went on deck, stowed
+all the goods in the after port boat, and returned to his father's
+state-room to see if anything could be done there.
+
+From the disorder it was apparent that the stewards had been in this
+apartment before him; but a fine rifle yet hung on the bulk-head, and in
+the open locker was quite a large amount of ammunition.
+
+"There's no reason why these cartridges shouldn't be taken if we are
+obliged to leave the yacht," he said to himself as he gathered them into
+convenient shape for carrying. "In case we land on a desolate island
+they would be mighty useful."
+
+When he went on deck with his second burden the stewards were putting
+small kegs of water into each boat, and after stowing the ammunition by
+the side of the first articles brought, he looked over the little craft
+to ascertain what his father had thought best to save.
+
+He could find nothing there; but on searching the starboard gig he
+discovered a small quantity of wearing apparel.
+
+"I wonder if that is the craft he intends to go in, or have the clothes
+simply been thrown anywhere."
+
+At that moment Mr. Emery came out of the pilot-house followed by Mr.
+Walters, and Neal ran forward to ask which boat his father intended to
+use in case the abandonment became necessary.
+
+"It makes no particular difference," Mr. Emery replied in answer to
+Neal's question. "We can easily arrange the details later. Go into the
+engine-room and tell Jake to drive her at full speed, and to report if
+the water we are pumping in is likely to rise as high as the furnaces."
+
+Promising himself that he would re-stow the goods on the gig, putting
+his father's with those belonging to himself and Teddy, as soon as this
+message had been delivered, he descended the companion-way after
+glancing rapidly around the horizon.
+
+There was no land to be seen on either hand, and he understood at once
+why the order to keep the yacht going at full speed had been given.
+
+The small boats were by no means stanch enough to be depended on for a
+long cruise unless the present dead calm should continue until they
+could reach land, and every effort was to be made to gain some of the
+islands in the vicinity.
+
+When Neal entered the engine-room he believed for an instant that Jake
+had not heard of the terrible danger which threatened. Work there was
+going on as usual, except, perhaps, that the engineer and his assistants
+were watching the machinery a trifle more carefully than seemed really
+necessary; but when he repeated the message Jake's face grew just a
+shade paler.
+
+"Say to your father that we have got on every pound of steam that can be
+raised, and it will be necessary to slow down presently because the
+bearings are growing warm. The water is already above the fire-room
+floors, and if the pump is worked an hour longer the fires will be
+drowned."
+
+"But you must keep her going, Jake. It would be terrible to take to the
+boats when there was no land in sight."
+
+"I'm bound to do my best; but a man can go only so far. Do you know
+where we are?"
+
+"No."
+
+"What is being done on deck?"
+
+"The sailors are pumping, and the stewards are provisioning the boats."
+
+"Getting ready to abandon the little craft, are they?"
+
+"Father said that was being done in order that we might be prepared for
+any emergency."
+
+"And he's got a pretty clear idea that the flames can't be kept under,
+or else there wouldn't be a thought of such a thing. How's the weather?"
+
+"A dead calm, as it was this morning."
+
+Jake remained silent a few moments as if revolving some plan in his
+mind, and then he said abruptly:
+
+"Neal, if we do have to put off you and Teddy must try to go in the same
+boat with me."
+
+"Unless father makes different arrangements."
+
+"Of course, of course; but if nothin' is said we'll stick together. Go
+back an' say that the Sea Dream shall do her best until the water gets
+above the fire-boxes, an' then my part of the work has been done."
+
+Neal left the engine-room feeling that there was very little chance of
+reaching any port in the yacht, and since there was no reason why he
+should hurry on deck, he went around by the way of the galley where
+Teddy was stationed.
+
+"How are things going on here?" he asked, forcing himself to speak in a
+cheerful tone. "Can you get any idea of the fire?"
+
+"Put your hand on the deck," Teddy replied gravely, his face of a livid
+white although big drops of perspiration were streaming down his cheeks.
+
+Neal obeyed, and immediately drew his hand back with a cry of mingled
+pain and fear.
+
+The planks were already so hot that it seemed as if the flesh must be
+burned.
+
+"Has father been here within a few moments?"
+
+"He has just left."
+
+"Did he say anything?"
+
+"Nothing except that I was to come on deck when it was so hot I couldn't
+stand it any longer. Neal," and now Teddy spoke very earnestly, "you
+laughed when I referred to the possibility that the yacht might be
+destroyed; but I know your father thinks she cannot be saved."
+
+"I believe now that he does; but I didn't when I left you. Everything is
+ready for us to abandon her when nothing more can be done."
+
+"Are we to go in the small boats?" asked Teddy, excitedly.
+
+"It is the only chance we've got; but don't look so frightened," he
+added, as Teddy's face grew yet paler. "It is calm, there's absolutely
+no sea at all running, and we shall be as safe as on board the yacht."
+
+"It will be horrible," Teddy whispered as if to himself, and Neal added:
+
+"I'll tell father what Jake said, and then come straight back to stay
+with you."
+
+"Don't be away long. It seems as if I had been deserted, when there is
+no one here."
+
+Neal could not trust himself to speak. Ascending the companion-way
+rapidly he approached his father who was conversing with Mr. Walters
+near the bow, as if that position had been chosen to prevent the crew
+from hearing what was said.
+
+After repeating the engineer's message he asked:
+
+"Can I go back where Teddy is? I think it frightens him to stay there
+alone."
+
+"I can't say that I wonder very much; it is a very trying situation for
+a boy, especially one who has never been to sea before. Ask Jake if he
+will send a man to relieve him and then you may both come on deck."
+
+To deliver this message and return after one of the firemen took Teddy's
+place at the nozzle, did not occupy five minutes, and the frightened boy
+gave vent to a long sigh of relief when he was in the open air once
+more.
+
+Except for the heat the weather was perfect. The Sea Dream, showing no
+sign of the monster which was gnawing at her vitals, save by the clouds
+of smoke that ascended from the bow, dashed on like the thing of beauty
+she was; but when her flight should be checked there would remain
+nothing but the tiny boats to bear those on board to a place of safety.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE LAST RESORT.
+
+
+Mr. Emery and the sailing master had decided that the yacht should be
+kept at full speed, headed for the nearest land, until the water which
+was being pumped into the hold drowned the fires in the furnaces, when
+recourse must necessarily be had to the boats.
+
+There could no longer be any question but that the entire forward
+portion of the hold was a mass of flames which it would not be possible
+to hold in check very much longer.
+
+By this time all on board understood that the yacht was to be abandoned,
+and, with the exception of those in the engine-room and at the pumps,
+every one gazed as if fascinated at the clouds of smoke arising from
+near the bow. Already were tiny curls coming from between the deck
+planks, and Teddy heard Mr. Walters say in a low tone to Neal's father:
+
+"I am afraid the flames will burst through before the furnaces are
+flooded. It is too late to cut another hole in the deck, and by an hour
+at the latest we must take to the boats."
+
+"Have the crew been told off?"
+
+"I will attend to that now."
+
+Then the sailing master announced to each man the boat to which he was
+assigned, and during the next hour hardly a word was spoken. Teddy and
+Neal conversed now and then in whispers, as if not daring to make a
+noise, and the sailors worked in grim silence.
+
+Nothing save the clank of the pumps and the throbbing of the screw could
+be heard.
+
+When the hour had passed it was no longer possible to force water into
+the hold. The heat was so great that the hose burned as fast as it could
+be pushed through the aperture, and long tongues of flame were appearing
+around the edges of the hatch.
+
+All hands, including the boys, were formed in line, and water sent below
+in buckets for twenty minutes more, when the word was given to slacken
+speed.
+
+The lower deck had burst through, and there was no more than time for
+Jake and his assistants to clamber up the ladders before the flames had
+complete possession of the yacht from the bow to the engine-room
+companion-way.
+
+There was no time to be lost in lowering the boats, and the men were
+forced to leap in regardless of the previous assignment, for once the
+fire burst the bonds which had confined it so long it swept aft with
+almost incredible rapidity.
+
+Teddy and Neal, bewildered by the flames which actually burned their
+flesh as they stood by the rail while the sailors let go the falls, had
+only thought of reaching the craft in which their property was stowed,
+and Jake followed; but as the little tenders were allowed to drop astern
+beyond reach of the intense heat the boys discovered that Mr. Emery was
+not with them.
+
+He had charge of one boat; Mr. Walters commanded another; Jake was held
+responsible for the safety of the third, and the last was handled by the
+mate.
+
+"Shall we come with you, father?" Teddy shouted.
+
+"I don't think it will be advisable to make any change now, and you are
+as safe in one boat as another."
+
+"I'll answer for them," Jake cried cheerily, and the sailing master
+added:
+
+"Jake can handle a small boat better than any one here, therefore you
+need not fear an accident will result through carelessness."
+
+"How am I to steer?" the engineer asked.
+
+"Due west. The boats must remain together, and in each one is a lantern
+to be hung up during the night to lessen the chances of being separated.
+Two men in every craft are to be kept at the oars all the time, and, in
+order to make the work light, they should be relieved hourly. The
+indications are that the weather will hold clear; it is only a couple of
+hundred miles to the Cuban coast, and we are not likely to be cooped up
+in these cockle shells very long."
+
+As he ceased speaking Mr. Walters gave the word for the oarsmen to begin
+the work which it was supposed would be continued without intermission
+until all were in a place of safety, and the boats were pulled about a
+mile from the burning steamer, when, as if by common consent, they were
+brought to a standstill to watch the destruction of the Sea Dream.
+
+The jaunty little craft was moving through the water slowly, enveloped
+in flames from bow to stern, and the boys gazed at her with a feeling of
+sadness which did not arise solely from the fact of their present peril.
+It seemed to them as if she could understand that those who should have
+saved her had fled when her need of assistance was greatest, and she was
+creeping slowly away to die alone.
+
+"The poor thing can't swim much longer," Jake said, as if speaking to
+himself. "The boiler will explode----"
+
+Even as he spoke a black cloud of smoke shot up from amidships, followed
+by a shower of fiery fragments, some of which struck in the immediate
+vicinity of the boats, and then the glare of the conflagration suddenly
+vanished as the Sea Dream sank beneath the waves.
+
+It would have been strange indeed if each member of the little party had
+not experienced a feeling of sorrow and desolation at this moment.
+
+The yacht which, a few hours previous, had appeared so stanch, was no
+longer afloat, and their only hope of reaching land was in the tiny
+boats which could hardly be expected to live in an ordinary sailing
+breeze.
+
+The tears were very near Teddy's and Neal's eyelids, and Jake's voice
+was quite the reverse of steady as he gave the word for the men to
+resume work at the oars.
+
+[Illustration: Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held
+firm, etc. See Page 193.]
+
+Night was close at hand. The sun had already set, and the short-lived
+twilight cast a sinister grayish hue over the waters. Mr. Walters' boat
+had the lantern raised at the bow on the end of an oar where it swung
+gently to and fro, and in a few moments all the others could be
+distinguished by the same signal.
+
+During such time as they had been waiting to witness the end of the Sea
+Dream the little crafts had drifted farther apart, until the one in
+charge of Neal's father was nearly half a mile away, and the sailing
+master could be heard shouting for them to be brought nearer together.
+
+"We shall probably have a breeze to-night," he cried when Jake's boat
+approached within easy hailing distance, "and if it should come you must
+rig up something to serve as a sail, for your only chance of keeping
+afloat will be to run before it. You have a compass, and remember that
+land is to be found to the westward."
+
+"Ay, ay," the engineer replied, as he looked around in vain for some
+sign of the wind, and then he added in a low tone to the boys:
+
+"I allow Mr. Walters is off in his reckonin' this time, for there isn't
+a breath of air stirring now."
+
+"We may get it later," Neal said apprehensively, and Jake muttered to
+himself; but yet so loud that Teddy could hear him:
+
+"It'll be tough on us if it comes out of the wrong quarter."
+
+In ten minutes from the time the word had been given to bring the boats
+into closer order the mantle of night had fully fallen, and the
+location of the other crafts could only be told by the tiny, swaying
+lights, or the hum of voices.
+
+Jake's boat was loaded less deeply than the remainder of the little
+fleet. In addition to himself and the two boys, there were but three
+sailors on board, and the stock of provisions was correspondingly small.
+As a natural consequence she rode higher out of the water, and although
+built on the same model as the others, the engineer insisted she was by
+far the fastest sailing craft.
+
+An hour had not elapsed before it was possible to test her quality in
+this respect.
+
+The breeze which Mr. Walters predicted came up from the east, and as its
+first influence was felt Jake shouted in a tone of relief:
+
+"We're in luck this time, lads. Here's what will shove us along in the
+right direction, an' we can count on striking land without too much
+work. Lash a couple of coats to the oars, an' set them up close by the
+forward thwart; you'll find a chance there to make 'em fast."
+
+This apology for a sail was soon gotten in place, and, small as was the
+surface presented to the wind, the little boat surged ahead, rippling
+the water musically under her bow.
+
+Jake held the rudder lines, the boys sitting either side of him on the
+bottom of the boat where they could stretch out at full length in case
+they felt inclined to sleep, and after they had listened to the swish of
+the sea under the stern for some time Neal asked as he raised his head
+to look over the side:
+
+"Where are the others?"
+
+"Considerable distance astern. I knew this one could show them her
+heels."
+
+"But the orders were that we must not separate," Neal exclaimed in
+alarm.
+
+"That is true; but how can we help ourselves just now? We can't shorten
+sail, because there would be nothing left, and we're bound to run ahead
+of the waves, small as they are, or be swamped."
+
+"But suppose we never see them again?"
+
+"Don't worry about that; we're all headin' in the same direction, an'
+have only got to wait till they overtake us after land is sighted."
+
+Although Jake spoke in a positive tone Teddy and Neal were far from
+feeling comfortable in mind; but, as he had said, nothing different
+could be done, and each tried to hide his fears from the other.
+
+The weight of the wind increased as the night advanced, and by the words
+of caution which the sailors uttered from time to time, the boys knew
+that those who should best understand such matters were anxious
+regarding the outcome of this night run.
+
+Now and then a small quantity of water would dash over the side; but it
+was quickly bailed out, and, as one of the men said, "did more good than
+harm, for it gave them something to do."
+
+Notwithstanding the gravity of the situation, Neal and Teddy fell asleep
+before midnight, therefore they were unconscious of the fight which
+their companions were making for life. It was necessary the frail craft
+should be kept dead before the wind; otherwise she would have been
+swamped by the following waves, which were now running dangerously high,
+and the skill of the helmsman was all that prevented her from
+destruction.
+
+Not for a single moment during the hours of darkness was it safe to
+relax the vigilance, and the constant strain on one's nerves was more
+fatiguing than the real labor.
+
+Just as the day was breaking Neal awoke, and then he aroused Teddy by
+asking Jake:
+
+"Can you see the other boats?"
+
+"Not yet; but some of them may be in sight at sunrise. It isn't possible
+their lights would show up more than a mile off."
+
+"Isn't the sea running very high?" Teddy asked timidly as he attempted
+to stand erect; but Jake grasped him by the shoulder as he said quickly:
+
+"It isn't safe to move around very much. Lie quiet until the wind dies
+away a bit; we've got more'n we want, and the boat must be kept trimmed
+mighty carefully or there'll be trouble."
+
+It was only necessary for the boys to watch their companions in order to
+learn the dangers which beset them, and, clasping each other's hands,
+they waited in anxious suspense for the rising of the sun to learn if
+the remainder of the party was near.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+ON SHORE.
+
+
+When the first rays of the sun appeared above the horizon the sailors
+searched with their eyes in every direction; but neither land nor a
+craft could be seen.
+
+"I knew we were bound to run away from the rest of the party," Jake
+said, keeping his face turned toward the bow, for the slightest
+carelessness might be fatal to all. "If this wind dies out we can lay
+still till they come up, as they're sure to do before long."
+
+"But suppose the other boats have been swamped?" Neal suggested, with a
+choking sob as he realized that he might never see his father again.
+
+"We won't suppose anything of the kind," Jake replied sharply. "There
+are plenty in the crowd who can handle the boats better than this one
+was handled, and if we rode out the night in safety why shouldn't they
+have done the same?"
+
+"The only chance of our not seein' 'em," one of the sailors said
+thoughtfully, "is, that sailin' slower, they may now be near land that
+we passed in the night without knowin' it. There should 'a been a lot of
+keys within fifty miles of where we abandoned the Sea Dream."
+
+"That's very true, matey," and now Jake spoke in his customary cheerful
+tone, "an' we'll soon be makin' some place where there'll be a chance of
+stretchin' our legs. Overhaul the grub, one of you, an' let's have a
+bite; I feel like a man what's been on a thirty hour watch."
+
+"So you have, for that matter. Even if you ain't a sailor man I'd like
+to see him as could handle a little craft any better. With me at the
+helm she'd have gone to the bottom before midnight."
+
+"I won't kick 'cause you praise me," Jake replied with a laugh; "but
+don't lay it on too thick for fear I might get proud."
+
+"I was only tellin' the truth, an' jest what all of us think. When the
+breeze freshened I made up my mind that the voyage was about ended; but
+here we are yet, an' here we're likely to be a spell longer unless we
+strike another norther."
+
+While the man was speaking he had passed aft two cans of preserved meat,
+some hard bread, and a small jar of pickles, after opening the tins with
+his sheath knife, and every one on board made a hearty meal, the boys
+in particular feeling decidedly cheerful when the repast had been eaten.
+
+"The wind is fallin' off a bit, an' I reckon it'll come dead calm by
+noon," Jake said, after refusing to allow one of the seamen to relieve
+him. "We'll all soon have a chance to bottle up sleep."
+
+"How long do you think it ought to be before we sight the land?" Neal
+asked.
+
+"That's jest what I can't say, lad; but 'cordin' to my way of thinkin'
+we was a good bit below the coast of Cuba when the little yacht went
+down. That norther blew us a good way off our course, an' it's possible
+Mr. Walters might have made a mistake in determinin' the position,
+although it ain't exactly the proper thing for an engineer to set up
+agin a first-class sailin' master."
+
+"It won't take long to find out if this breeze holds, an' that's some
+comfort," one of the sailors replied, and then the three men drew lots
+to see which two should take a watch "below."
+
+During the forenoon there was but little change in the condition of
+affairs. The wind decreased until it was nothing more than a good
+sailing breeze; but the expected calm did not come.
+
+The boat reeled off the knots in fine style, despite the poor apology
+for a sail, and the boys were allowed to change their position, which
+they did by sitting on the after thwart.
+
+About twelve o'clock Jake stretched himself out on the bottom for a nap,
+awakening one of the sleepers that the man at the helm might have
+assistance in case he should require it, and the boys alternately dozed
+or searched the horizon in vain for some signs of the other boats.
+
+Those who were hungry ate whenever it pleased them to do so, and there
+was no lack of either food or water. Teddy would have talked with his
+friend regarding the prospects of reaching home within a reasonable
+length of time; but Neal was so anxious about his father that he could
+speak of nothing else.
+
+Toward the close of the day the wind freshened again, and, in obedience
+to his previous orders, Jake was awakened, the man at the helm saying in
+an apologetic tone:
+
+"I can hold on here a good bit longer; but you wanted to know if there
+was any change, an' there is. It looks to me as if we should have more
+of a breeze than we had last night."
+
+"No signs of land yet?"
+
+"No sir; but the Cuban coast, if that's what we're headin' for, is so
+low that we wouldn't be likely to raise it till we got close on."
+
+Jake ate supper before taking his seat at the helm, and then the boys
+were advised to lie down as on the preceding night.
+
+"You'll be comfortable there, and won't stand so much of a chance of
+gettin' wet."
+
+It was evident that Jake wanted to have them out of the way, and both
+obeyed at once, Teddy saying as he stretched himself out on the hard
+boards:
+
+"It seems as if my bones were coming through the skin, and I'm sore all
+over."
+
+"Things are not nearly as bad as they might be, so we musn't complain,"
+Neal replied philosophically; but at the same time it seemed as if he
+could not remain in that position another night.
+
+Even in face of the danger to which they would be exposed, the occupants
+of the boat welcomed the increase in the weight of the wind since it was
+reasonable to suppose that each mile traversed carried them just so much
+nearer the land, and, with the exception of Neal and Teddy, all were in
+good spirits when the darkness of night covered the ocean.
+
+Owing to the absence of exercise the boys did not sleep well, and when
+the unconsciousness of slumber did come upon them for a few moments at a
+time, it brought in its train dreams so distressing that wakefulness
+with the full knowledge of the dangers which encompassed them, was
+preferable.
+
+It seemed as if twenty hours instead of ten had passed when one of the
+men in the bow cried joyfully:
+
+"If I don't see the loom of land now it's because I never saw such a
+sight before."
+
+"Where away?" Jake asked, straining his eyes in the vain effort to
+discern anything amid the gloom.
+
+"Dead ahead as we are running. It must be somethin' more'n a cay, or it
+wouldn't show up so big."
+
+The gray light of approaching dawn was lifting the mantle of night when
+the man spoke, and, ten minutes later, all saw with reasonable
+distinctness the dark cloud which could be nothing less than land.
+
+Now the roar of surf was heard, and Jake said in a troubled tone:
+
+"I don't see how we are to make it after all, unless we plump her
+straight on, an' that's likely to be a dangerous experiment."
+
+"Why not take in the sail, and work the oars; then you can pick a
+landing place?"
+
+"All right, let go the halyards; but instead of furling the canvas you
+can stow it under one of the thwarts."
+
+This order was given and obeyed cheerily, for all were in the best of
+spirits now that the end of the wearisome journey seemed to be so near
+at hand and in a very short time the boat was moving slowly toward the
+shore, rising and falling gently on the heavy swell.
+
+Each moment it was possible to see more distinctly the coast, and when
+they were thirty yards from a shore strewn with jagged blocks of coral,
+Jake shouted:
+
+"Hold on, boys, it would be worse than folly to attempt to run in there
+while the sea is so high."
+
+"Can't you find a better place?" one of the men asked.
+
+"It appears to be the same all along for a mile or so in either
+direction."
+
+"There's more danger of bein' swamped while runnin' up or down the
+coast, than in makin' a try for it here. Let her go in on the swell, an'
+when the water shoals we can jump over to lighten her so she'll strike
+well up on the shore where there'll be no trouble in savin' everything."
+
+"I don't like the idea," Jake replied. "We can't tell what a fellow
+might meet with, an' to be swung agin one of them rocks would be hard
+lines."
+
+The sailors were determined to make the attempt regardless of his
+warnings, and after a few moments he refused to argue longer.
+
+"You ought to know better than I," he said, "an' its no more'n right you
+should have your own way without any fuss; but the boys an' I will stay
+here till she strikes. That is a better plan than goin' over the side
+when you know nothing about the shore, and besides, I can't see the
+advantage of lightenin' her."
+
+"So she'll strike higher up on the beach, of course, otherwise she'd be
+stove before you could say Jack Robinson."
+
+"Do as you please, an' so will I. Shall I steer her in now?"
+
+The sailors kicked off their boots, and began pulling vigorously at the
+oars while Jake said in a low tone to the boys:
+
+"Be ready to jump the minute she strikes; but not before. Look out for
+the rocks, and take care the swell don't drag you back."
+
+The heavy waves were rolling up on the shore with a roar that rendered
+conversation difficult, and as he glanced ahead at the foaming waters in
+which it did not seem possible the little craft could live for a single
+moment, Teddy pressed Neal's hand as if to say good-by.
+
+Neal gave him one quick, hopeful glance; pointed shoreward to intimate
+that they must watch every motion of the boat in order to be prepared
+when the most favorable time arrived, and, following Jake's example
+both arose from the thwart, standing in a stooping posture in order to
+steady themselves by the rail.
+
+Carried on the crest of an enormous wave the tiny craft hangs as if
+poised in mid-air for an instant, and as the vast body of water is
+dashed forward the three sailors leap into the boiling, swirling foam.
+
+Teddy fancied he heard a muffled cry of agony; but just at that moment
+he could think only of saving his own life, and there was no time to so
+much as glance around.
+
+The boat was shot suddenly forward with the water dashing above the
+stern and sides, and Jake shouted:
+
+"Over with you now!"
+
+At the same instant that the boat struck the boys leaped, and during
+several fearful seconds it was doubtful whether they could hold their
+own against the treacherous under-tow.
+
+By clinging to the sides of the craft, and straining every muscle, the
+attempt was successful, and as the wave receded the little tender lay
+across a sharp piece of coral, almost a total wreck.
+
+"Take hold and shove her further up!" Jake shouted. "Work now as you
+never did before, or we shall lose all our stores!"
+
+During the next half minute the three struggled to the utmost of their
+power, and then the fragments of the boat and the goods which had been
+brought from the Sea Dream were high upon the beach beyond reach of the
+next wave, which swept in with a yet louder roar as if enraged at having
+been deprived of its prey.
+
+Not until this had been done was it possible to look around for the
+sailors, and Teddy cried as he gazed seaward without seeing any living
+creature:
+
+"Where are they?"
+
+Jake watched the boiling waters several seconds before he replied
+mournfully:
+
+"It was as I feared. They either struck some of these jagged rocks as
+they leaped from the boat or the under-tow was so strong that it dragged
+them down."
+
+"Do you mean that all three have been drowned?" Neal cried.
+
+"If they were alive we should see them by this time," and Jake ran along
+the shore hoping they might have succeeded in scrambling out at some
+other point.
+
+Teddy and Neal followed him, and when five minutes passed there could be
+no further doubt.
+
+"If they had waited until the boat struck, as we did, there would have
+been little trouble to get ashore; but now we shall never see them
+again."
+
+The boys could hardly realize that three strong men had been taken from
+this world so quickly, and when finally the fact stood out boldly
+without the slightest possibility of mistake, a feeling of deepest
+depression took possession of all.
+
+Teddy threw himself face downward on the sand and gave way to grief,
+while Neal and Jake stood by his side in silence, for this dreadful
+catastrophe seemed to be a warning of their own fate.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+SUSPENSE.
+
+
+How long they remained on the shore in an apathy of despair not one of
+that party ever knew.
+
+Jake was the first to arouse himself, and, understanding that work is
+the best remedy for mental troubles, he said, with a great effort to
+speak cheerily:
+
+"See here, lads, this will never do if we want to get out of the scrape.
+We've got to stay here till the other boats come along, and it is
+necessary to make some preparations for living. The goods must be stowed
+where they won't be destroyed, an' there's plenty to keep us busy for
+the rest of this day."
+
+"When do you think the other boats should arrive?" Neal asked.
+
+Jake realized fully how slight were the chances that either of the
+crafts would come to that exact spot, even if they were all afloat; but
+he had no idea of adding to his companions' grief, therefore he
+replied:
+
+"It may be forty-eight hours. You see some or all of them might have put
+out a sea anchor when it blew so hard, for they carried heavier loads
+than we did, and while layin' still we hummed right along, consequently
+its difficult tellin' when to expect 'em."
+
+"Of course they are bound to land here?"
+
+Jake hesitated only for an instant before he decided that under the
+circumstances a lie was absolutely necessary, and then replied
+positively:
+
+"Of course. Where else would they come?"
+
+"I was afraid there might have been some little difference in the
+steering."
+
+"We all were obliged to keep dead before the wind, therefore ought to
+come out pretty nigh alike."
+
+This reply appeared to satisfy Neal, and he set about cheering Teddy,
+who finally arose to his feet and signified his willingness to do
+whatever Jake should propose as necessary.
+
+The engineer made many suggestions which he would not have thought of
+had he been alone, or in the company of those who did not need such a
+tonic.
+
+All the goods were first carried from the beach to the edge of the thick
+forest a hundred yards away, and over the collection was constructed a
+shelter to protect it from the dew. The fragments of the boat were
+carefully gathered up and deposited in the same place.
+
+Then a quantity of such pieces of dead branches and decaying wood as
+could be found near at hand was stacked close by the beach, to serve as
+a signal in case a vessel or the boats should heave in sight.
+
+When this had been done it was noon, and Jake set about preparing as
+elaborate a meal as their store of provisions would permit, saying as he
+summoned them to the repast:
+
+"Now boys, I want you to fill yourselves up so's to be ready for hard
+work in case anything is to be done when the others get here. Afterwards
+we'll take a snooze, which is the proper thing to do at the middle of
+the day in a hot climate, and then there must be some exploring, for we
+want to find out if we are really on the island of Cuba."
+
+The boys' hunger was very much greater than their grief, and without
+further urging they did full justice to the meal, Teddy saying as he
+helped himself to the third slice of preserved meat:
+
+"It wouldn't be a bad idea for us to hunt a little while for something
+in the shape of a vegetable, or we shall soon run short of provisions."
+
+"It's the very plan I was thinking of. In these woods we should be able
+to find many things that would help out on the bill of fare; but in case
+that can't be done, you boys must turn hunters. It's mighty lucky you
+have your guns and plenty of ammunition."
+
+This last suggestion pleased the boys wonderfully and if Jake had not
+insisted very strongly that they sleep during the hottest portion of the
+day, both would have started into the forest without delay.
+
+After lying down in the shade slumber came to their eyelids quickly, and
+when he was convinced they were across the border of dreamland, Jake
+arose softly, saying to himself as he stole up the shore:
+
+"This goes ahead of any scrape I ever had the bad luck to fall into, an'
+I'd give all I've got to know exactly where we are, for I'm certain it
+ain't Cuba. If two days pass without our sightin' a sail I must fix up
+some story to make the boys eager to tramp across the country. That'll
+be better than stayin' here where, 'cordin' to my idea, there's mighty
+small chance of our finding anybody who can help us."
+
+He walked along the shore fully two miles; but there was no diversity of
+scene. The coast strewn thickly with coral rocks, and backed by a dense
+forest, was all that could be seen either above or below the place where
+they landed.
+
+Then Jake forced his way through the tangled undergrowth, experiencing
+no slight difficulty in so doing, and the vegetation confirmed his
+belief that the little craft had been carried by the wind to some land
+further south than was at first supposed.
+
+On the water not a sail was in sight, and when Jake returned to the
+place where the rude shelter had been put up he was in even a more
+despondent mood than Teddy and Neal had been.
+
+"I s'pose we must wait here a couple of days to satisfy the boys the
+other boats won't come, an' then it's a case of strikin' across the
+country with good chance of wanderin' around until fever or wild animals
+puts an end to it."
+
+His companions were yet asleep, and he lay down beside them in order to
+prevent any suspicion that he had been spying out the land.
+
+Under other circumstances the monotonous roar of the surf would have
+lulled him to rest; but now his anxiety was so great that, despite all
+efforts, his eyes would persist in staying open very wide, and he spent
+the remainder of the siesta trying in vain to decide what was best to
+do.
+
+Not until late in the afternoon did the boys awaken, and then Neal said
+as he sprang to his feet:
+
+"It won't do for us all to sleep again at the same time. If the boats
+came in sight since we've been lying here it is very probable father
+has missed us, for more than likely they would try for a better place to
+land further up or down the coast."
+
+"You needn't worry about that, lad. I've kept honest watch, and not so
+much as the wing of a sea gull has appeared above the horizon."
+
+Teddy, remembering what Jake had said about hunting, began to clean the
+guns, for both had been thoroughly wetted during the landing, and Neal
+walked slowly along as he looked out over the water intently.
+
+Before going very far he saw the engineer's footprints on the sand, and
+shouted excitedly:
+
+"Some one has been here! Perhaps father arrived before we did."
+
+"There's no such good luck," Jake replied. "While you fellows were
+snoozing I went a long bit in that direction."
+
+"Then it's only a waste of time for me to go over the same ground," and
+Neal retraced his steps, adding when he gained Teddy's side, "I'll do my
+share of that work."
+
+"You spoke too late, for I have finished. Now let's see what can be done
+in the way of hunting; a roasted bird will be a big improvement over
+salt meat, and I count on finding plenty of game."
+
+"All right, provided Jake is willing to stay here alone."
+
+"What is to prevent me from joining the party?"
+
+"Someone must remain in case the boats heave in sight," Neal replied in
+a positive tone, and the engineer said carelessly:
+
+"I didn't think of that; but it'll be all right, I'll keep my eyes
+peeled," and he added to himself, "I wish he wasn't so certain about the
+others coming, an' then the disappointment wouldn't be quite so great."
+
+Jake cautioned the boys against going very far from the beach because of
+the danger of getting lost in the forest, and as they disappeared among
+the underbrush he threw himself upon the ground, unable longer to fight
+against the despair which was rapidly overpowering him.
+
+He understood perfectly well how great would be the danger in attempting
+to make their way through the wooded portion of the country at this
+season of the year, when fever germs lurked in every spot where stagnant
+water was to be found, and knew at the same time how extremely difficult
+it might be to find a place offering any more advantages than did the
+narrow strip of sand on which they had been thrown.
+
+"It wouldn't be quite as bad if I knew where we are," he said to
+himself. "It can't be possible that we're on the coast of South America;
+but if that should prove to be the case we'd make a pretty mess of it by
+trying to cross."
+
+Then came the thought that perhaps it would be better to travel up the
+coast, and as to the advisability of this he studied a long while
+without being able to arrive at any satisfactory conclusion.
+
+Two hours were spent in this profitless speculation, and then the boys
+returned, bringing with them two large hoccos, birds looking not unlike
+wild turkeys.
+
+"We shan't starve while such game as this is to be found," Neal cried
+triumphantly. "I believe we might have shot a dozen by staying longer;
+but there was no sense in doing so just for the sake of killing. It will
+be a hard job to eat all this meat before it spoils."
+
+"How far in did you go?" Jake asked, rising to his feet quickly and
+trying to banish from his face the look of dejection, lest his
+companions should suspect how desperate he believed the situation to be.
+
+"Not more than half a mile," Teddy replied.
+
+"What is the general appearance of the country?"
+
+"The undergrowth is very dense in places, and above here, a little to
+the right, we came upon what seems to be a swamp. It was there we found
+these birds, and something else which is not quite so promising."
+
+As he spoke Teddy pulled up his shirt sleeve, and pointed to several
+black specks on his skin.
+
+"They are ticks, or garrapatas, as the Spaniards call them," Jake
+replied, as he opened his pocket knife. "The sooner you get rid of them
+the better, for they will make what is likely to be a bad sore unless a
+cordial invitation to leave is extended."
+
+"Are you going to cut them out?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+"Not exactly; but you won't get rid of the pests without considerable
+pain, for they have the faculty of crawling under the skin mighty fast."
+
+Jake set about the work in a methodical manner, causing Teddy to cry
+aloud very often as the insects were pulled or dug from the flesh.
+
+Then Neal was called upon to undergo the same operation, and not until
+nearly an hour had passed were the hunters free from the painful pests.
+
+It was now nearly sunset, and all hands set about preparing the hoccos
+for roasting, by first plucking the fowls, removing the intestines, and
+sticking them on a sharpened stake in front of the fire.
+
+It was not an entirely satisfactory method of cooking, for while one
+portion was done brown, another would be hardly warmed through; but, as
+Teddy said, "it went a long way ahead of nothing," and all three worked
+industriously, turning the game or piling on the fuel until, about an
+hour after sunset, the task was completed.
+
+By this time the castaways were decidedly hungry, and the half-cooked
+fowls tasted better than had the most elaborate meals on board the Sea
+Dream.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+ACROSS THE COUNTRY.
+
+
+When, supper having been eaten, preparations were made for the night,
+Neal insisted that one of the party should remain on guard during the
+hours of darkness, in order to watch for the boats, and Jake had no
+slight trouble in convincing him that it was not absolutely necessary.
+
+"We couldn't see their lights half a mile away if they have any hoisted,
+which isn't likely, for the oil must be scarce by this time," the
+engineer said, "and, in case we did sight them, what good would it do?
+We should induce them to land here, and we know how dangerous that is
+even in the daytime. I had rather let them pass without knowing where we
+are, than to be the innocent cause of a second disaster."
+
+After considerable discussion Neal was made to understand that no good
+could come of posting sentinels, and the little party lay down on the
+bed of leaves; but, owing to the suspense concerning the fate of the
+others, neither slept very soundly.
+
+It was hardly light enough to see surrounding objects when Jake began to
+prepare breakfast, and as soon as the sun rose Neal and Teddy paced to
+and fro on the beach gazing seaward; but without seeing that for which
+they sought.
+
+For the first time Neal began to despair concerning his father, and
+returning to the camp he said in a voice choked by sobs:
+
+"I don't believe we shall ever see either of them again. The wind has
+held steady since we landed, and they should have been here a long while
+ago. Our boat couldn't have sailed so much faster than theirs that we
+should arrive twenty-four hours in advance."
+
+"Now put out of your mind the idea that we are not to see all hands some
+time," Jake replied quite sharply. "I'm willing to admit that they may
+not strike here, for I might as well own up to the truth, and say the
+chances are against two boats coming so far and hitting the same spot on
+the coast. That doesn't prove, however, that there has been any further
+disaster."
+
+"Then you do believe that they won't come here?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Why haven't you proposed to make some change?"
+
+"I didn't want to say anything until we were certain the boats wouldn't
+heave in sight. I shouldn't advise making a move yet awhile; but since
+you've broached the subject we may as well talk plainly."
+
+"Do you think we are likely to be taken off by a vessel?"
+
+"The fact that none have passed within our line of vision certainly
+shows that such a chance is slim. I have come to the conclusion that we
+are not on the island of Cuba, and it stands us in hand to try for some
+town or sea-port. We might stay here a month, and then have a craft
+heave in sight when the surf run so high as to prevent a boat landing."
+
+"What do you want to do?"
+
+"Strike straight through the woods. There must be people living here
+somewhere, and the sooner we find them the sooner we'll get home."
+
+"Why not follow along the beach?"
+
+"Because, if this is an island, as it surely must be, we could get
+across quicker than around, and, besides, with all these coral rocks the
+beach is not the best sort of a road for traveling, loaded down as we
+shall be."
+
+Neal was silent for a moment, and Teddy took advantage of the
+opportunity to ask:
+
+"When do you think we ought to make a move?"
+
+"My idea is that we should stay here to-day (our supply of water won't
+last much longer), and start early to-morrow morning. That would be time
+enough to prove whether the boats are coming, and give us a chance to
+get the traps into proper shape for carrying."
+
+"You know best what should be done," Neal said, speaking slowly, "and I
+am ready to do as you propose."
+
+"Now that is what I call sensible talk," Jake replied, in a tone of
+satisfaction. "By buckling right down to work, and putting out of our
+minds all unpleasant thoughts, for it don't do any good to moon over
+what can't be changed, we shall soon get out of this scrape."
+
+Neal remained silent. To leave the coast seemed like deserting his
+father, and although he knew Jake's plan should be carried out, it made
+him sad to think of going where it would be no longer possible to see
+the ocean.
+
+Teddy, however, experienced a sense of relief as soon as it was decided
+to enter the forest in search of human beings. To him the place was
+anything rather than agreeable, for he could never rid himself of the
+feeling that the drowned sailors would soon be washed ashore, and during
+the hours of darkness all kinds of queer fancies came into his mind with
+every unusual sound.
+
+He was eager to discuss with Jake the details of the proposed journey,
+and, Neal listening to the conversation but taking no part in it, the
+matter was arranged to the satisfaction of the engineer and Teddy.
+
+The ammunition and such provisions as had been brought ashore, was
+divided into three portions, one being very much heavier than the
+others, and each tied in such shape as would be most convenient for
+carrying.
+
+So much of the game as would not be needed for immediate consumption was
+wrapped in leaves for the travelers to take with them; but that which
+caused Jake the most anxiety was the fact that the supply of water would
+be exhausted before they started.
+
+"It can't be helped," he said ruefully, "and we may be mighty thirsty
+before finding any; but the case would be worse if we staid here, so
+there is no reason why we need worry very much. In that swamp you spoke
+of we shall surely find what thirsty men can drink on a pinch, and I'm
+positive we'll get along all right."
+
+As if eager to convince himself that there was no great danger to be
+apprehended from the journey through the forest, he continued to talk
+about his plans until both the boys were perfectly familiar with all he
+hoped to gain by the attempt; but of his fears not a word was spoken.
+
+At night all retired early in order to be fresh for the morrow's work,
+and when the first faint flush of another day appeared in the eastern
+sky Jake aroused his companions.
+
+"Turn out, boys," he shouted cheerily. "We must make the most of these
+cool hours, for it will be necessary to halt at noon, and we want to get
+through the forest as quickly as possible."
+
+While speaking he was fastening the heaviest package on his back, and
+after a hurried toilet in the sea Neal and Teddy took up their loads.
+
+It was still quite dark under the towering trees when the journey was
+begun; but each moment the gloom grew less, until, when the sun rose it
+was possible to see the way with but little difficulty.
+
+To travel very rapidly was out of the question. In certain places the
+underbrush was so dense that considerable exertion became necessary in
+order to force a passage, and despite all efforts not more than two
+miles an hour could be made.
+
+At the swamp plenty of cool, clear water was found, and with this Jake
+filled the two bottles, all they had in which to carry a supply of the
+precious liquid.
+
+At noon a long halt was made, and when the sun began to decline the
+weary march was resumed.
+
+By no means the least of the travelers' suffering was caused by thorns,
+and to one who has never had any experience of this sort, a description
+of the various spines and needles which project from the strange plants
+in these vast forests would seem exaggerated.
+
+They are of all sizes and shapes, and in many places actually prevent a
+man from making his way through the foliage even though he be armed with
+a machete. Oftentimes it is absolutely necessary to make a long detour
+in order to avoid the painful obstructions, and before half of this
+day's journey was finished all three of the castaways bore bloody
+evidence of what these natural bristles can do.
+
+The siesta was decidedly abridged, for Jake realized the importance of
+concluding the tramp as quickly as possible, and the afternoon was but
+little more than half ended when, to the intense surprise of all, they
+suddenly arrived at a clearing in the very midst of the forest.
+
+After wandering among the luxuriant vegetation the travelers were almost
+startled at seeing an avenue of banana trees which had evidently been
+planted by the hand of man, and, following it up, the little party were
+yet more surprised at seeing a white man swinging idly in a hammock.
+
+Jake advanced as if unable to believe the evidences of his own senses,
+and said hesitatingly:
+
+"We had no intention of intruding, sir; but followed the line of banana
+trees without the slightest idea of finding a gentleman's home."
+
+"Don't apologize," the stranger replied in good English, and springing
+to his feet as if in alarm. "It is true that I am not in the habit of
+receiving callers in this out-of-the-way place; but those of my own race
+are none the less welcome. Will you walk into the house?"
+
+The boys peered through the foliage where, after some difficulty, they
+saw a small cabin, hardly large enough to be called a dwelling, and Jake
+replied quickly:
+
+"We would prefer to remain here. Having walked since sunrise, you can
+fancy that any place in which to rest our legs without fear of coming in
+contact with a scorpion or a snake is grateful."
+
+"I can't promise that you won't be troubled by such visitors; but you
+are welcome to do as you choose."
+
+Jake threw himself on the ground, asking as he did so:
+
+"Can you tell me how near we are to a sea-port? We have just landed
+from a pleasure yacht which was destroyed by fire, and haven't any idea
+where we are."
+
+"You are now in Yucatan, and probably know perfectly well how near to
+the coast, for----"
+
+"In Yucatan?" Jake repeated in surprise.
+
+"Exactly, and not so very far from the famed Silver City of the Chan
+Santa Cruz Indians."
+
+"That last information doesn't seem to be very important so far as we
+are concerned; but it does surprise me to know we are in this section of
+the country, for our captain was quite positive we should strike the
+coast of Cuba."
+
+"Tell me how such a mistake was made."
+
+"That is exactly what I don't know myself; but it won't take long to
+explain why we are here."
+
+Then Jake told the story of the cruise in the Sea Dream, of the
+unaccountable conflagration, and the fatal landing on the coast,
+concluding by saying:
+
+"As a matter of course we are most anxious to reach some place from
+which we can find a steamer or sailing vessel going to the United
+States. Probably you can give us the proper information, and by that
+means get rid of unexpected and, perhaps, unwelcome visitors."
+
+"But I do not wish to get rid of you," the stranger replied quickly. "On
+the contrary I am more than delighted because you were forced to come
+here, since you can render me a very great service."
+
+"I fail to understand how," Jake replied in perplexity.
+
+"You shall soon know, and I fancy you will be decidedly surprised when I
+give you all the details. First, however, allow me to prepare supper,
+and then it will be singular if I do not tell such a story as will cause
+greater astonishment than you ever experienced before."
+
+With these strange words the young man--he did not appear to be more
+than thirty years old--leaped out of the hammock, and disappeared among
+the shrubbery which so nearly concealed the building.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A STRANGE STORY.
+
+
+The meal, which was partaken of heartily by the weary travelers,
+consisted of eggs and fruit, with plenty of freshly cooked tortillas,
+and as Teddy remarked in a low tone when it was absolutely impossible
+for him to eat any more, "it went way ahead of turkeys roasted on a
+stick."
+
+After his guests had finished this very satisfactory repast, the
+stranger proposed that all adjourn to the banana avenue where he slung
+another hammock that both the boys might lie down, gave Jake a cigar of
+home manufacture, lighted one himself, and, lying upon the ground in an
+attitude of absolute repose, said laughingly:
+
+"Now if you wish to hear the story I promised to tell there is nothing
+to prevent."
+
+"I would certainly like to know how it happens that you are living alone
+in this forest," Jake replied.
+
+"Then I will begin in regular story-book style, for when it is ended I
+intend to make a proposition. My name is Byron Cummings, and the last
+home I had previous to the building of this shanty, was in Baltimore,
+Maryland. Two years ago--it may have been longer, for one does not keep
+a very strict record of time in this country--I visited Merida on a
+pleasure trip, and while there heard the story of the Silver City."
+
+"Is that the name of a town, or do you mean that the precious metal is
+so plentiful there?" Teddy interrupted.
+
+"I refer to a city built by the Chan Santa Cruz Indians which has
+received this name because the ornamentation of the houses is of silver,
+and so profuse as to give it the appearance, at a distance, of being a
+collection of silver buildings. Don't laugh until you hear the whole
+story," he added, as a smile of incredulity passed over Jake's face.
+
+"Any one in Merida, and, in fact the English histories, will tell you
+that this wonderful city is in the vast tract of marshy land situated
+between here and Merida, known as the Black Swamp. It is a fact that no
+white man has ever seen it, since the only approach is across the swamp
+on the south side, and the way so closely guarded that a person must
+have special sources of information in order to get through the
+labyrinth of narrow water courses on the banks of which are sentinels
+ready to salute the visitor with a shower of poisoned arrows.
+
+"It cannot be reached from the east because of the rocks, a few samples
+of which you probably saw on the sea coast. As you doubtless know, the
+Indians hereabout have never been conquered by the whites, and the
+interior is as much an unknown land as it was at the time of the
+conquest.
+
+"Certain of the Chan Santa Cruz Indians visit Merida at certain seasons
+of the year, where they sell, or rather, exchange for goods, gold dust
+and massive golden ornaments, valuing the yellow treasure so lightly,
+and bringing such quantities that there can be no doubt they have access
+to an enormous deposit. Silver they use as we do iron, and I myself have
+seen one of these visitors wearing thick beaten bands of it as a
+protection to his legs, probably because of the thorns."
+
+"If they come into the towns I should think some venturesome fellow
+would follow, to learn the secret of the city in the swamp," Jake
+suggested, and it could plainly be seen that he was growing decidedly
+interested.
+
+"That has often been tried; but, so far as I can learn, no one ever
+succeeded. Twice I tracked three villainous looking old fellows to the
+very edge of the marsh, and both times they disappeared so silently and
+completely as to make it seem as if the earth had opened and swallowed
+them. Then, learning of the many who had failed in the same attempt, I
+formed a plan which must give me the victory, although it has required
+much time."
+
+"What is it?" Jake asked breathlessly.
+
+"I resolved to learn the language, and to that end came here with an
+Indian who knows the habits and customs of these people, he having dealt
+with them for many years, and, what is more, has been within sight of
+the famous city. From him I have gained all the information necessary to
+enable me to penetrate the swamp, and now flatter myself that I can
+speak the dialect of the Chan Santa Cruz tribe as perfectly as a
+native."
+
+"Have you remained here two years doing nothing else but studying how to
+reach the village?" Neal asked.
+
+"Very little beside that. We built the hut, planted these trees for a
+lounging place, and now raise chickens and fruit enough to provide us
+with food."
+
+"Where is the man you speak of?"
+
+"He went to Merida three days ago; but will return by the day after
+to-morrow if no accident has befallen him."
+
+"When are you going to make the attempt to get through the swamp?"
+
+"Very soon if you accept my proposition."
+
+"What have we to do with it?" Jake asked in surprise.
+
+"I will explain. Old Poyor and myself are not strong enough numerically
+to make the attempt alone, for in case the secret of our identity should
+be discovered, nothing could save our lives. With you three as an
+addition to the party, and two armed with good weapons, I would not be
+afraid to travel straight through the city. As a matter of fact the only
+real danger is in approaching the place; but I have studied over that
+portion of the business so long that I do not fear a failure if you can
+be prevailed upon to join us."
+
+"That is out of the question," Neal replied decidedly, speaking quickly,
+as if afraid Jake might agree to the scheme. "You know we must get back
+to our own country as soon as possible, for if father is alive he will
+suffer great anxiety concerning us."
+
+"You are right to make haste; but what if I tell you that by going with
+me no time will be lost?"
+
+"How can that be possible?"
+
+"Because if you were in Merida to-day you could not reach Progresso in
+time to take the steamer which left for the United States this morning.
+If you remain here two weeks more, there will then be ample opportunity
+to get passage on the next vessel which starts. I have a time table,
+and you can see by it that I am telling the truth."
+
+As he ceased speaking Cummings arose, walked leisurely to the house, and
+returned with the article in question, which he handed to Neal.
+
+It was only necessary to glance at it in order to learn that his
+statement was a fact, and when Teddy was also convinced, the host
+continued:
+
+"According to the plan I have formed we should be back in less than ten
+days from the time we begin the journey, and if you agree to the scheme
+it should make us all wealthy."
+
+"But you said the old Indian would not return for three days," Jake
+interrupted.
+
+"Very true; but we shall not wait for him to come here. That which he
+will bring is exactly what we want as an outfit, and we can meet him at
+the only entrance to the swamp where, for more than three months, I have
+had a boat hidden in readiness for the attempt."
+
+Then Cummings gave a more detailed account of the wonderful city as he
+had heard it in Merida and from Poyor, and so well did he tell the story
+that in a short time his guests were in the highest state of excitement.
+
+"Now the question is whether you will join me?" he said in conclusion.
+"Having studied the matter so long I feel warranted in saying that it
+is not an unusually dangerous venture, and, if we are successful, the
+amount of wealth we can carry away must be enormous."
+
+"It wouldn't take me long to decide," Jake replied promptly; "but seeing
+that I am in Mr. Emery's employ I couldn't go contrary to his son's
+orders. As a matter of fact I'm not bound in any way; but it seems to be
+the only square thing to do."
+
+"And what is your idea?" Cummings asked as he looked toward Teddy.
+
+"Since we can't start for home immediately, I don't see why we shouldn't
+spend the time in what will be the jolliest kind of an adventure whether
+there is any gold to be gained or not."
+
+The young man then turned to Neal questioningly, and the latter said
+hesitatingly:
+
+"It isn't fair for Jake to make me decide. He should know better than I
+whether we ought to go with you. If it was possible for us to leave the
+country at once there could be no question, for we must return to the
+United States at the earliest opportunity."
+
+"And since that cannot be done you have no objections to joining us in
+the visit to the Silver City?"
+
+"I don't know. You would not go until to-morrow, so we have a chance to
+discuss the matter among ourselves."
+
+"Very true. I've some work to attend to, and while I am away you will be
+able to talk privately."
+
+Then Cummings arose, went toward the house and when he disappeared from
+view Neal said to Jake:
+
+"Now tell me just what you think of going with him; I mean, what you
+think father would say if we could consult him, not what we would like
+to do."
+
+"Well, if you put it in that way," and now Jake spoke as if weighing
+every word, "I can't see why we shouldn't have a little fun, seein's how
+we're bound to stay here longer than he allows is enough to go to this
+Silver City an' back. It would be a mean kind of a man who'd object to
+our havin' enjoyment after all that's happened."
+
+"Then you believe father would approve of our going with Mr. Cummings?"
+
+Jake was not exactly prepared to say "yes," and at the same time he did
+not wish to reply in the negative after his acquiescence in all the host
+had advanced as reasons why they should accompany him, and after a long
+pause Neal added:
+
+"Of course I want to go, for it can't be possible that there is very
+much danger, and I make this proposition: We must sail on the next
+steamer, and if Mr. Cummings is willing we should desert him, no matter
+what may be the condition of affairs when it is time for us to start for
+the coast, then we are warranted in accepting the proposition."
+
+"That is what I call putting the matter in the proper light," Jake
+replied with considerable emphasis. "On this basis no one can possibly
+find any fault, and we may as well tell him that we have decided to go."
+
+"First explain that we must leave Yucatan on the next steamer which
+starts from Progresso."
+
+"I'll do it, and if he is so certain that we shall be out of the Silver
+City in that time there can be no reason for any fault-finding."
+
+"I think Neal has arranged the business as it should be," Teddy said
+approvingly, and from that moment the castaways believed they were
+committed to the scheme.
+
+Half an hour later, when Cummings returned to learn the result of the
+interview, Jake explained upon what grounds the decision had been
+arrived at, and he expressed himself as perfectly satisfied with the
+arrangement.
+
+"If we can't get into the city during the coming week there is no use
+trying," he said, "and I will undertake to see you on board the next
+steamer which sails. Now it only remains to decide upon the details, and
+at sunrise to-morrow we will begin what I have been preparing for,
+during the past two years."
+
+Since the details consisted only in agreeing upon what amount of luggage
+should be taken with them, but little time was spent in discussion, and
+as the boys retired on this night it was with the knowledge that when
+the sun rose again they would start for the Silver City which every
+traveler in Yucatan admitted had an existence.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE JOURNEY.
+
+
+The boys and Jake had no preparations to make for the journey. The goods
+they had brought from the coast was their only property, and could
+readily be carried as during the tramp to this point.
+
+On the contrary, Cummings found many things which it was necessary
+should be done before departure. Whether successful in the attempt to
+reach the marvelous city or not, he could hardly hope to return to the
+hut where all his preparations had been made, and there was much to be
+done.
+
+After ascertaining that his guests were willing to accompany him he made
+arrangements for their comfort during the night, and then, excusing
+himself on the plea of work, was seen no more until the time for
+departure had come.
+
+Of the three castaways Neal was the only one who had any misgivings
+regarding the proposed detour. It seemed to him as if he was in some way
+abandoning his father by embarking in this enterprise, although how
+anything more could be done to aid those who had taken refuge in the
+boats was beyond his comprehension.
+
+This much was clear in his mind, however: He had agreed to aid in the
+attempt, and when Cummings awakened the little party he arose quickly,
+firmly resolved to do everything in his power to reach the city which,
+as yet, he was not thoroughly convinced existed.
+
+It was still dark when the final preparations for the journey were
+begun, and Cummings' impatience was so great that the sun had but just
+shown himself above the horizon when the morning meal had been eaten,
+and their host was urging them to make haste.
+
+"We must be at the rendezvous not later than this afternoon in order to
+avoid the chance of passing Poyor on the way," he said impatiently,
+"therefore the sooner we start the better."
+
+"We are ready," Jake replied, and, after setting the fowls loose,
+Cummings led the way through the underbrush, finding a path where the
+others would not have believed any existed.
+
+As if to prevent the boys from losing their interest in the search for
+the Silver City, their guide continued to add to the story he had
+already told, and during the long march but little else was talked
+about.
+
+Jake who was as excited as a man well could be, for he had no doubt but
+that they could find large quantities of treasure where there would be
+no difficulties in the matter of carrying it away, plied Cummings with
+questions whenever the conversation lagged, and Neal had but little
+opportunity to speculate upon the fate of his father.
+
+Not until late in the night, when to Neal and Teddy it seemed as if they
+could go no further, did the party halt, and during the last hour of the
+march the utmost silence was maintained.
+
+"It is absolutely necessary to avoid detection in case any of the
+Indians may be in the vicinity," Cummings had said, "and we must move as
+stealthily as if we knew positively they were waiting for us."
+
+From that time no one spoke. The guide crept on at a slow pace, his
+every movement copied by the remainder of the party, and on arriving at
+the rendezvous he motioned the others to lie down, whispering as they
+gathered around him:
+
+"We are near the canoe, and it only remains to watch for Poyor, who
+should be here by morning. I'll stand guard while the others sleep."
+
+There was no thought of putting up anything in the shape of a shelter,
+and the boys stretched themselves on the ground in the midst of a thick
+clump of vegetation, Teddy whispering to Neal:
+
+"If it is necessary to take such precautions as these before we are near
+the city, we may expect pretty rough times before arriving at the
+place."
+
+"That's a fact, and I begin to wish we hadn't started. There is no
+positive assurance we shall get through in time to take the next steamer
+for home, and even Cummings himself can't say whether any of us will
+ever come back."
+
+"Do you want to give up the job now?"
+
+"I'd be ashamed to do that, for it would look as if we were afraid; but
+I'm sorry we agreed to the plan;" and Teddy replied heartily:
+
+"So am I."
+
+Jake had nothing to say; but whether his silence was caused by a desire
+to obey Cummings' instructions to avoid making a noise, or by misgivings
+as to the wisdom of the venture, neither of the boys could guess.
+
+Despite the anxiety of the younger members of the party they soon fell
+asleep, owing to excessive fatigue, and did not arouse to consciousness
+until Jake whispered as he shook them vigorously:
+
+"It's time to start. The Indian has come, an' ain't half as bad a
+lookin' man as I counted on seeing."
+
+The boys sprang to their feet, finding themselves face to face with a
+tall, half naked figure which, in the dim light, looked more like a
+statue of bronze than a human being. He stood scrutinizing them keenly
+for fully a minute, and then, as if satisfied with their appearance,
+turned away to walk swiftly along the edge of the swamp until lost to
+view in the darkness.
+
+"Poyor has just arrived," Cummings said by way of explanation; "and
+according to his belief it is well for us to start at once."
+
+"Where has he gone?" Teddy asked.
+
+"After the canoe; it is but a short distance from here."
+
+"Don't you dare to cook breakfast?"
+
+"Certainly not; the light of a fire would be worse, for us, than the
+report of a gun. Until we arrive at the Silver City it will be a case of
+eating cold food, and perhaps we may be obliged to wait even longer than
+that before having anything very elaborate in the way of a meal."
+
+"If we are only certain of coming back again where it is possible to do
+as we please, I won't grumble about what we are obliged to eat," Neal
+said, with a nervous laugh.
+
+"Don't borrow trouble," Cummings replied quickly; but both the boys
+noticed that he no longer spoke in the same confident tone as before the
+journey was begun. "We shall surely get through without difficulty."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the approach of Poyor, who came down
+the water-way in the canoe more like a ghost than a creature of flesh
+and blood, and Jake, whose head had been turned in the other direction,
+could not suppress a slight exclamation of surprise as the Indian
+suddenly appeared by his side.
+
+The canoe which had been brought thus silently was simply the trunk of a
+tree hollowed out, and about fifteen feet in length. It yet rested
+lightly on the water when the entire party and all the traps were on
+board, and the boys noticed with no slight degree of astonishment, that
+one stroke of the paddle was sufficient to send it sharply in either
+direction.
+
+"Now you have a chance to finish your nap," Cummings whispered as,
+kneeling aft, he began to assist Poyor in propelling the craft.
+
+"Don't you want us to help?" Teddy asked.
+
+"No, there will be nothing you can do until we enter the Silver City."
+
+Tired though the boys were it was literally impossible to close their
+eyes in slumber now, and they remained very wide awake watching the
+coming of a new day.
+
+When the sun had risen they could get some slight idea of the country
+through which they were passing; but of what might be a few yards
+beyond no one could say.
+
+The shores of this particular water-way through the swamp were flat,
+covered with reeds and long grass, with here and there dense tangles of
+trees and vines, and the channel was so narrow that only at rare
+intervals could the paddles be used. The Indian and the white man pushed
+the boat from one bend to another, oftentimes finding it difficult to
+pass the sharp curves, and the boys confidently expected this labor
+would be continued during the entire day, therefore their surprise was
+great when, about an hour after sunrise, the little craft was forced
+under a clump of overhanging foliage as if the journey was at an end.
+
+"What is the matter?" Neal asked in a whisper, and Cummings replied in
+the same cautious tone:
+
+"Nothing. It would be in the highest degree dangerous to travel very far
+now that it is light."
+
+"How long are we to stay here?"
+
+"Until the darkness comes again."
+
+"Wouldn't it be safe to go on the bank where we can stretch our legs?"
+
+"We must not leave the boat. It will be only for a few hours, and then
+we shall have plenty of exercise paddling."
+
+Immediately the canoe had been made fast under the mass of vines and
+shrubbery Poyor stretched himself out in the bow as if the task of
+remaining perfectly quiet during an entire day was a very agreeable one,
+and Cummings followed his example.
+
+Jake, who had been sitting amidships, moved toward his friends, and the
+three spent an hour talking of what was now termed by all "a foolish
+venture."
+
+There was nothing left for it, however, but to continue on since they
+were in the swamp, and after a time Neal said petulantly:
+
+"Well make the best of it, and if an opportunity should occur to go to
+Merida there must be no hesitation, whatever Cummings may say."
+
+As if this resolution gave them renewed courage, the boys lay down in
+the most comfortable position possible, after eating a light lunch, and
+until nightfall no sound save that caused by heavy breathing could have
+been heard from the boat.
+
+Then, when darkness came again, Poyor, who had remained almost without
+motion during the entire time of the halt, aroused himself, ate half a
+dozen bananas, and took up the paddle.
+
+The precautions against being discovered by those who might be on the
+watch were now redoubled. Before rounding a bend the Indian waited in a
+listening attitude to assure himself no one was moving in the immediate
+vicinity, and when it became necessary to work the canoe along by aid of
+the foliage the utmost care was exercised to prevent the branches from
+rustling.
+
+As the hours wore on and no attack was made Cummings appeared to be
+highly elated, and Jake's gloomy forebodings were dispelled in the
+thought of the treasure which they might be able to bring away.
+
+Once, about midnight, when they halted a moment for Poyor to
+reconnoiter, Neal whispered to the leader:
+
+"How many nights of this kind of traveling is necessary before we reach
+the city?"
+
+"When we next halt it will be to leave the boat and continue the journey
+on foot. It was the possible difficulties, not the distance, which
+rendered the undertaking formidable."
+
+The Indian returned, stepped into the canoe without speaking, and took
+up the paddle as if to say there was nothing to prevent them from going
+ahead.
+
+From this time until faint streaks of light caused by the approach of
+the sun could be seen in the sky there was no lengthy interruption to
+the advance, and then as the boat was pulled out of the channel into a
+sort of basin or break of the bank which led among the more dense
+portions of the forests, Cummings said to Neal:
+
+"In two hours you shall have a full view of the Silver City, and then
+there can be no doubt as to the truth of what I have told you."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE SILVER CITY.
+
+
+To Neal and Teddy the thought that they were so near the wonderful place
+described by Cummings overshadowed everything else, and the probable
+danger was but a secondary consideration.
+
+Jake was in a perfect fever of excitement, and so great was his desire
+to see the city from which he fully expected to bring away enormous
+amounts of gold that more than once did the leader caution him in an
+impatient tone to remain quiet.
+
+Impassive, apparently unmoved by the fact that the plan which he and his
+white companion had spent so many months in perfecting was about to be
+proven successful, or a failure that might result in the death of all
+concerned, the Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of a
+gigantic cypress tree; but Teddy observed that he was on the alert for
+the slightest unusual sound.
+
+Cummings dealt out some food; but none of the party ate it. Hunger had
+been banished by suspense, anxiety and anticipation.
+
+Gradually the gloom was dispelled, and it became possible to see the
+varied forms of life everywhere around.
+
+The party had halted upon a slight elevation, where they had a limited
+view of that portion of the forest which appeared to be distinct from
+the region of marsh. As the sun arose, and a singularly dazzling light,
+different from anything the boys had ever seen before was reflected on
+the tops of the trees, it seemed as if every branch was laden with birds
+of the most gorgeous plumage flitting here and there like movable jewels
+against a background of green enamel.
+
+Hundreds of monkeys filled the air with an almost incessant chattering
+which drowned all other sounds, and snakes of every color and size
+writhed and wriggled in different directions to greet the grateful heat
+of the sun.
+
+It was a picture most beautiful, and at the same time, because of the
+serpents, terrifying.
+
+Cummings began to make his way up the trunk of the cypress, aided by
+Poyor; but when Jake would have followed, the Indian motioned for him to
+remain with the boys.
+
+[Illustration: The Indian stood silent and motionless at the foot of the
+gigantic Cypress tree, etc.]
+
+One glance appeared to be sufficient for the leader of the party, and as
+he descended he whispered to Neal:
+
+"We have made no mistake. The city can be seen plainly. You and your
+companions may gratify your curiosity, for we shall remain here until
+Poyor comes back."
+
+Then turning to the Indian, Cummings whispered a few words, and the
+former glided through the underbrush, being lost to view almost
+immediately.
+
+By assisting each other the three castaways were soon where such a
+marvelous sight was presented that exclamations of surprise and
+admiration burst from their lips; but, fortunately, the chattering of
+the monkeys would have prevented the outcries from being heard had a
+party of Chan Santa Cruz Indians been at the foot of the tree.
+
+Far to the eastward was a long range of low, rocky mountains, and at the
+north and south spurs or cliffs, all enclosing a beautiful valley in the
+center of which was a city of dazzlingly white buildings.
+
+To look at this collection of houses and temples very long at a time was
+almost impossible because of the peculiar glare which the boys had
+mistaken for the sun's rays.
+
+It was caused by the reflection of the god of day on an edifice in the
+center of the city, the dome-like roof of which was covered with a
+burnished metal substance having the appearance of silver.
+
+The adjoining buildings, composed of white stone having a softness as of
+alabaster, threw this peculiar light in every direction, causing the
+city to stand out amid the green foliage like a huge incandescent mass.
+
+Each house stood in a square by itself, and, judging from the area of
+the city one might have estimated the population at about fifteen
+thousand. The streets were laid out with the utmost precision, and
+composed of what appeared to be fine white sand, while at every
+intersection were monuments of grotesque figures or animals.
+
+At regular intervals were enormous white columns capped with the
+glistening metal, the same as displayed on the dome of the principal
+building and on many of the houses.
+
+After taking in this wonderful picture as a whole the boys gazed at the
+most prominent objects in turn, the central edifice occupying the
+greater share of attention.
+
+That this was a place of worship seemed reasonable to suppose because of
+the crowds of people entering or departing from the opening formed by
+lofty pillars of shimmering metal, and also because of the tiny threads
+of smoke which arose from several apertures in the roof as if from altar
+fires. To confirm the beholders in this belief the faint sound of sweet
+music arose in the air, and instantly the throngs in the streets
+prostrated themselves in adoration of some one of the statues.
+
+The citizens were dressed in flowing garments of white, and all seemed
+intent on worship which was prolonged until after the spectators left
+the tree.
+
+One singular fact was noted by Teddy, and he called Neal's attention to
+it.
+
+Neither on the surrounding hills nor in the city could a single animal
+of any kind be seen. It was as if even the birds from the forest so
+shaped their course as to avoid flying over the dazzling wonderful city
+which was shut out from the rest of the world by the swamp wherein fever
+lurked in its most horrible form.
+
+How long the boys and Jake gazed at this marvelous picture neither of
+them could ever say. They took no heed of the passage of time, and when
+Cummings called softly that it would be well to come down in order to
+gain a little rest before Poyor returned, Teddy noticed with surprise
+that the sun was high in the heavens.
+
+"Well, do you believe now that the Silver City really has an existence?"
+the leader asked when the three stood by his side.
+
+"After that anything seems possible," Neal replied with a sigh as if
+weary of gazing at so much magnificence.
+
+"Save some adjectives expressive of admiration until we are in the city,
+when I fancy you will see very much that is more curious."
+
+"The people don't appear to be so terribly ferocious," Teddy said, "and
+yet you think they would kill us all if our presence was discovered."
+
+"I am positive of it. In a white man they see only one of that race
+which has worked them so much injury, making ruins of many cities, and
+oppressing the rightful owners of the country."
+
+"If that is the case how are we to get in there?" Neal asked.
+
+"Poyor has a plan which I think will be successful; wait until he
+returns, and if the conditions are favorable to the attempt you shall
+soon know."
+
+"But suppose he stays away until a party of Indians take it into their
+heads to come in this direction?"
+
+"There is little danger of our being discovered unless it has been
+suspected we have crossed the swamp, which is hardly probable. Very few
+of the inhabitants ever venture out, and there is no reason why they
+should come to this exact spot. Lie down now, Poyor will be with us by
+nightfall."
+
+It was a simple matter to follow the first portion of this advice; but
+decidedly difficult to close their eyes in slumber after what had been
+seen.
+
+Teddy and Neal, who threw themselves on the ground side by side, could
+not keep their thoughts from the wonderful city, and when both Jake and
+Cummings were apparently wrapped in slumber the former whispered:
+
+"Do you think now that we were foolish to come?"
+
+"No, because it isn't so far in the swamp but that we can get out in a
+short time if anything happens, and a glimpse of that city would repay a
+fellow for considerable trouble."
+
+"But suppose the Indians get hold of us?"
+
+"That is something I reckon Cummings can take care of. If he has made
+such elaborate preparations for entering, when it is so near where he
+was living we can be pretty certain there will be no very grave
+mistake."
+
+"Even if we succeed in reaching the city I can't understand how it will
+be possible to carry away much gold."
+
+"Nor I; but yet you know a small package is valuable, and five persons
+could lug a great deal."
+
+"Do you fancy he brought us simply to carry the treasure for him?"
+
+"He said we would all share alike, so our services wouldn't be of much
+advantage to him, more particularly since he and the Indian could bring
+away a heavier load than all three of us."
+
+In this manner, speculating upon the benefits which might accrue to them
+rather than regarding the great danger to which the entire party was
+exposed, the boys passed the time until late in the afternoon, and then
+Poyor approached so softly that he stood in their midst before any one
+had heard even a rustling among the leaves.
+
+On seeing the man Cummings sprang up eagerly, asked a question in the
+Indian dialect, and the reply was given at great length, Poyor using
+more gestures than the boys had ever fancied were at his command.
+
+That his report was in the highest degree interesting to Cummings there
+could be no doubt, for the latter listened intently, interrupting him
+only to ask some question, and not until nearly half an hour had passed
+was any explanation made to the others.
+
+Then Cummings said with a slight show of triumph:
+
+"Poyor has just come from the city, and there is no suspicion that we
+have passed the line of sentinels."
+
+"If he did that what is to prevent us from doing the same?" Jake asked
+as the leader paused for an instant.
+
+"Nothing except our skins are white, and he can readily pass himself off
+for a Chan Santa Cruz. He speaks the language, resembles them in
+features, and could make his way around the town with but little
+trouble; but on that point no great amount of time need be spent. Here
+is the plan which I wish to carry into effect: Poyor has found a vacant
+building on the outskirts of the place which he has bargained for,
+representing himself as one of the sentinels recently released from duty
+on the eastern side. In that character no person will be likely to
+wonder why he is without acquaintances, for the watchmen often remain
+away from the city one or two years, entering only when it is necessary
+to procure provisions."
+
+"Is he to go on alone?" Jake asked.
+
+"Certainly not. At a late hour to-night we will accompany him, and all
+our hopes of success depend upon gaining this building without being
+discovered."
+
+"How long are we to stay there?"
+
+"A week if necessary."
+
+"A week!" Teddy and Neal cried in concert.
+
+"Yes, and I hope we shall be able to remain concealed in the house
+during that time, otherwise it may go hard with us."
+
+"But what do you expect to do shut up in a building, for of course we
+must keep out of sight?" and Jake's face expressed the utmost surprise
+and apprehension.
+
+"That is exactly what you shall learn when we arrive there. Since I have
+proven that the Silver City really has an existence, the least that can
+be done is to aid in carrying out my programme without too much
+discussion."
+
+"You won't have any reason to complain because I don't obey orders,"
+Jake replied quickly.
+
+"Then I will soon show you what we expect to do providing our plans work
+without a hitch during the next ten hours. Let's get these traps into a
+more convenient shape for carrying, in order that we may be ready for
+the last stage of our journey when Poyor gives the word."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+IN THE CITY.
+
+
+The boys and Jake were decidedly perplexed and not a little worried in
+regard to the outline of work as given by Cummings. They failed to
+understand how it could be to their advantage to go into the city if it
+should be necessary to remain hidden all the time, or in what way they
+would derive any benefit from the visit.
+
+Although the leader of the party knew from the expression of their faces
+that they were dissatisfied with the general outlook, he did not
+volunteer any information, thinking, perhaps, that it was unnecessary to
+do so since they were where it was impossible to withdraw from the
+enterprise.
+
+Neither Teddy nor Neal believed the party would be exposed to any
+extraordinary danger. The only idea in their minds was as to whether it
+would be possible for them to get out of the swamp in time to take the
+next steamer which left Progresso for the United States, and both
+believed it would be a great misfortune to miss the first opportunity of
+reaching home.
+
+"We can stand it for one week," Neal said in a whisper: "but what I am
+afraid of is that it won't be possible to leave the city at the end of
+that time," and Teddy replied in the same cautious tones:
+
+"It is for us to see that such a contingency does not arise. Jake will
+do as we say, and if Cummings refuses to leave at a date sufficiently
+early for us to reach Progresso, we must force him to act as has been
+promised."
+
+"What shall we do in case he refuses?"
+
+"We are three out of a party of five, and should be able to arrange
+matters to our own liking."
+
+Neal was perfectly contented with such a view of the case, and he felt
+well satisfied that nothing could prevent them from doing as they
+wished; but unfortunately, he failed to take into consideration the very
+important fact that while it might be a simple matter to enter the city,
+they could not be certain of leaving it at will.
+
+"We can do as we please by standing firm to our determination of going
+away in time to take passage on the steamer," he said; "therefore we'll
+see the adventure through to that point, and if Cummings fails in his
+purpose of bringing away a large amount of gold we will have had such an
+experience as can be talked about when we get home."
+
+As for Jake, a glimpse of the glistening walls of the city had literally
+intoxicated him, and his one and only desire was to reach that point
+where he could satisfy himself by the sense of touch as well as sight.
+
+As the time drew near for the final move in the bold scheme Cummings
+became greatly agitated. It was as if all the blood had left his face,
+and his eyes were open wide and staring as he gazed into vacancy.
+
+"Are you sick?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+The young man shook his head.
+
+"I suppose I'm acting like a fool; but can't prevent my nerves from
+getting the best of me just at this time. After laboring two years for
+one thing, and then being so near a successful completion of the work,
+is enough to make any fellow excited."
+
+Teddy was on the point of saying he fancied that fear of the ultimate
+result might have some share in this alleged nervous attack; but,
+fortunately, he checked himself in time, and turned to watch Poyor who
+was hiding the boat beneath an ingeniously constructed screen of leaves.
+
+Night came slowly; the twittering of the birds and the chattering of the
+monkeys was hushed. Among the dense underbrush the darkness was
+intense, yet the Indian remained motionless in a listening attitude.
+
+Amid profound silence the moments passed until to the boys it seemed as
+if it must have been midnight when Cummings whispered:
+
+"It is time. Poyor shall lead the way, and I will bring up the rear."
+
+Walking in single file, and keeping firm hold of each other's garments
+lest they should be separated, the little party began the last stage of
+the journey.
+
+The Indian went forward as if familiar with all the surroundings, and
+when half an hour had passed he halted only long enough to point ahead
+where, through the foliage, could be seen the city, its buildings
+gleaming ghostly white in the starlight.
+
+The decisive moment had arrived.
+
+If they should be seen by a single person the alarm would be given, for
+the clothing as well as the skin of all the party, save Poyor, would
+proclaim the fact that these newcomers belonged to the hated race, and
+the end could not be long delayed.
+
+Assuring himself that there was no one in sight, Poyor quickened his
+pace, leading the way toward a small building on the outskirts of the
+town, and ten minutes later, the strangers were inside the dwelling;
+but although successful in the undertaking, were virtually prisoners.
+
+The house was very small as compared with the majority of those seen by
+the boys when they gazed from a distance, and had evidently been
+unoccupied a long while.
+
+The one room which comprised the entire lower floor was destitute of
+anything in the way of furniture, and the sides, ceiling and floor were
+formed of the same soft-looking white stone which appeared to be the
+only building material in the city.
+
+Poyor did not give his companions much time in which to inspect this
+portion of the building. With an impatient gesture to the boys who were
+gazing around them in evident disappointment, he led the way up a narrow
+flight of stairs to a sort of attic hardly more than six feet high, and
+with only two narrow slits in the wall to serve as windows.
+
+Here five hammocks had been slung, and on one of them the Indian threw
+himself without a word of rejoicing or comment upon the ease and safety
+with which they had entered the city.
+
+"Now what is to be done?" Neal asked as Cummings started toward the
+stairway.
+
+"I wish to bar the lower door, for it would be exceedingly inconvenient
+if we should have callers."
+
+"It strikes me that there will be very little chance to get gold if we
+are to stay shut up here."
+
+"That's just what has been puzzlin' me ever since I saw the place," Jake
+added. "We're not even in the city, only on the edge, and so far as
+seein' what's goin' on is concerned, the big tree in the swamp would
+have been a better place."
+
+"You may find that we are too near the heart of the town," Cummings
+replied with a grimace. "To-morrow, after Poyor has looked around some,
+we will decide on a plan. You had better go to sleep while there is a
+chance, for no one can say when we may be obliged to beat a hasty
+retreat."
+
+The boys followed this advice for the simple reason that there was
+nothing else to be done. Teddy had looked through the narrow slit in the
+wall; but without being able to see anything of interest, and in this
+city which may have been, and probably was standing when Columbus
+discovered America, the three who had been literally thrown upon the
+coast of Yucatan lay down to sleep.
+
+Owing to the strangeness of their surroundings, and the knowledge of the
+danger which threatened, no one gave himself up to very profound
+slumber.
+
+The silence was so perfect as to be almost oppressive, until half an
+hour before sunrise, when a low strain of sweetest music arose on the
+air, gradually swelling in volume, and finally ending in a wild burst
+which caused Poyor to spring to his feet.
+
+"What is the matter?" Teddy asked, and Cummings replied carelessly:
+
+"Nothing in particular. That music is the summons to prayer, and now is
+the time when the Indian can go through the streets with less danger of
+being discovered."
+
+In another instant Jake and the boys were at the apertures which served
+as windows; but some time elapsed before they could see anything owing
+to the gloom. Then, as day dissipated the darkness, they distinguished
+throngs of white robed figures hurrying from every quarter toward some
+common point, which was probably the temple with its dome of silver.
+
+It was an odd sight to see so many people moving rapidly, but without
+noise, while neither cart nor animal of any kind accompanied them. Here
+and there were men carrying burdens on their backs by aid of a strap
+passed around the forehead, and many women and children literally loaded
+down with flowers.
+
+"I don't see any great show of gold or silver," Teddy said, after gazing
+at the scene some time in silence. "No one appears to wear anything like
+jewelry."
+
+"That may be because such metal is too common here," Jake replied. "What
+bothers me is to make out why Cummings and the Indian are so afraid of
+being discovered. These people don't look as if they'd kill a fly unless
+he made a noise, an' that's what they seem to be scared of."
+
+"Don't make a mistake," Cummings whispered, as he overheard the last
+portion of the conversation. "If it was known that a white man had
+succeeded in entering the city our lives would be taken within the next
+hour."
+
+"You may believe all that; but I'll hold to it that they're the most
+peaceable lot I ever saw, until somethin' comes up to prove the
+contrary," and Jake went toward the street door with Poyor, regardless
+of whether he was seen by the passers-by or not until the Indian said
+sharply:
+
+"Go back; I do not wish to die."
+
+"If you're frightened of course I'll get out of the way," Jake replied
+half angrily; "but before we leave this town I'll show you how much
+reason there is for being afraid."
+
+"And in ten minutes from that time you will cease to live," Poyor
+replied gravely, as he left the building, closing the door carefully
+behind him.
+
+"It will be well to remember what he has said," Cummings added sharply
+as he approached the engineer to bar the door. "These people are
+peaceable until the time comes when religion and all the traditions of
+their race tell that a long remembered wrong should be avenged, and then
+no class can be more implacable. I would not show my face outside of
+this door for as much gold as can be found in Yucatan."
+
+This remark silenced Jake, but he was by no means convinced of its
+truthfulness, as could be told by his whispered remark to Neal:
+
+"They know we will have a chance to lug off a pile of money, an' to
+prevent us from wantin' too much, try to prove that we must stay out of
+sight so's they can get the cream of the bargain."
+
+"Don't do anything foolish," Teddy replied earnestly. "Cummings would
+not have asked us to come with him unless there had been good reason for
+wanting assistance, and it is not possible he has made any mistake
+regarding the nature of the people."
+
+Jake had nothing more to say; but it could readily be seen that he
+believed his own ideas on the subject were correct, and at this moment
+something occurred which demanded his entire attention.
+
+Poyor had but just left the building, and a crowd was gathering in front
+of the door, causing Cummings to say with every sign of fear:
+
+"We shall soon have a chance of learning what these people will do in
+event of finding a white man in the city, for it looks as if we were
+discovered."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE FESTIVAL.
+
+
+It can well be imagined with what anxiety the party in the building
+looked through the narrow apertures at the crowd below.
+
+Even Jake began to fancy he had made a mistake in regard to their
+peaceful dispositions, and Teddy noticed that he examined very carefully
+all the weapons.
+
+Those on the outside were armed chiefly with bows and arrows; but a few
+carried a sort of spear with a tip which looked not unlike glass, and
+Neal whispered to Cummings:
+
+"If they have got nothing but arrows we ought to be able to hold a large
+number in check with our guns."
+
+"Don't make the mistake of despising their weapons, for every one is
+covered with a poison so deadly that a single scratch would be more
+dangerous than a wound from a bullet."
+
+"Do you think they have learned that we are here?"
+
+"I can't explain in any other way the motive for the gathering; but none
+of them appear to be paying very much attention to the building."
+
+As a matter of fact, although there were four to five hundred directly
+in front of the house, hardly one of them glanced toward the openings
+through which the little party were gazing; but the majority appeared to
+be having a most sociable time.
+
+As the moments passed without any evidence that an attack was to be made
+the voluntary prisoners began to grow more comfortable in mind, and
+again Jake proposed that such people were neither able nor inclined to
+inflict much injury upon any one.
+
+Suddenly there was a great commotion among the crowd; the men shouted
+and waved their weapons, danced about in the most grotesque fashion and
+from afar off could be heard the sound of music.
+
+Five minutes later the cause of this sudden change of demeanor became
+apparent.
+
+Down the street from the direction of the forest came several hundred
+women decorated with the most beautiful flowers, and carrying huge
+bouquets or wreaths. They trooped along without any attempt at marching
+in regular order: but on arriving in front of the men they halted
+suddenly in response to sharp strokes on a gong or tongueless bell which
+one of them held high in the air.
+
+The men were now on one side of the street and the women on the other,
+and in this order they stood when twenty persons of both sexes, carrying
+on a broad flower-covered platform a repulsive looking figure apparently
+composed of gold, marched between the ranks and halted.
+
+Instantly every one sank down with bowed head as if in adoration, and
+the invisible music, accompanied by the peals of sweet-toned bells,
+filled the air with melody.
+
+"We were frightened too soon," Cummings said with a sigh of relief. "It
+is a festival of some sort, and this happens to be the place where it is
+to be welcomed to the city. It would be most unfortunate if Poyor should
+take it into his head to come back just at this time."
+
+"He could see the crowd before getting very near and would know enough
+to stay at a distance," Neal replied. "I'd like to know what that statue
+represents."
+
+The golden figure was certainly very odd. Its body was in shape not
+unlike a panther's; but the tail was short, and stuck straight in the
+air. The head might have been formed to represent a monkey, although
+the ears were very long, and the whole was covered with carving to
+represent scales.
+
+"How much do you suppose it weighs?" Teddy asked of Jake, and the
+latter, who had also been trying to compute its value, replied:
+
+"Not an ounce less than a hundred pounds. What a prize that would be if
+we could carry it away!"
+
+"There are many of the same kind in the city." Cummings added, "and we
+should be able to get off with some before a week is ended."
+
+"Then that is the plan you have formed?" Neal said interrogatively.
+
+"Exactly. Poyor is to examine all the statues near by, and decide upon
+such as we can pull down some night, after which it will only be a
+question of reaching our boat. I have no fear of being able to get
+through the swamp providing we have a start of five or six hours."
+
+While this conversation was being carried on the people outside remained
+in the same devout attitude; but just as Cummings ceased speaking there
+was a change in the affairs.
+
+The music grew louder, and the bells were rung more rapidly, and the
+devotees sprang to their feet with shouts and songs, the women throwing
+flowers on the platform until the hideous god was nearly hidden from
+view.
+
+When the tongueless bell was struck three times the crowd gathered
+around the image bearers, and all started toward what the white men
+believed was the temple, chanting in perfect harmony with the music.
+
+The worshipers were soon lost to view; but their voices could be heard
+for ten or fifteen minutes, after which clouds of smoke, probably caused
+by burning incense, arose from the silver-domed building.
+
+"If Poyor is wise he will come now," Cummings said, as he looked
+anxiously out. "The people are so intent upon the worship, or
+installation of a new god, whichever it may be, that he can get into the
+house without being seen."
+
+But there were no signs of the Indian. Strain their eyes as they might
+he did not appear.
+
+The sounds of music died away. The smoke ceased to arise from the
+temple, and the people began to walk the streets intent upon their
+business or pleasure.
+
+"It is strange he is so imprudent," Cummings muttered half to himself.
+"Now the only safe way is to wait until night, if indeed he is yet at
+liberty."
+
+"Do you think anything has happened to him?" Neal asked.
+
+"Of course I can't even guess; but it is very strange he has waited so
+long."
+
+More than that Cummings would not say: but both the boys could plainly
+see he was very anxious, and all grew greatly distressed in mind as the
+hours wore on.
+
+Noon came, and once more the streets were nearly deserted, for the
+inhabitants of the city were indulging in a siesta.
+
+Now Cummings stationed himself at the window, peering out eagerly; but
+all in vain.
+
+Slowly the moments passed. The boys tried to eat; but the terrible
+suspense had spoiled all appetite for food, more especially since it was
+not particularly inviting, and after swallowing a few crumbs Teddy said:
+
+"It's no use, I can't even force it down. Why did we come here, knowing
+at least a portion of the danger?"
+
+"'Cause we were fools," Jake replied philosophically; "but that is no
+reason why we shouldn't have as near to a square meal as is possible,"
+and he began to devour another tortilla.
+
+"We won't despair yet," Cummings said, as he left his post at the window
+and joined the little group in the further corner of the room, "Poyor is
+cautious in the extreme, and may believe it isn't safe to enter the
+house in the daytime under any circumstances."
+
+"Did he say when he would come back?"
+
+"No; it was understood he should return at the first favorable
+opportunity."
+
+"Could you find the way to the boat if we never saw him again?" Teddy
+asked.
+
+"Yes, although we might have some trouble in doing so."
+
+Then another long interval of silence came upon the little party, during
+which each one listened intently for the slightest sound which might
+betoken a visitor.
+
+Finally Jake fell asleep, and so loud was his snoring that it seemed as
+if he must be heard from the street, therefore the boys pinched him when
+there was too great a volume of sound, and at the same time wished they
+could enjoy the same happy unconsciousness of the situation.
+
+Cummings alternately paced to and fro, and stood by the narrow aperture
+overlooking the street, until nightfall, when the citizens walked up and
+down singing or chatting.
+
+It was as if every one was perfectly happy, and this condition of
+affairs caused Cummings to feel less despondent.
+
+"Look," he said to Neal and Teddy, "if Poyor had been discovered the
+people would show some signs of excitement. We have no reason to fear
+yet awhile."
+
+The argument was certainly a good one, and the boys' courage revived
+wonderfully. They made a reasonably hearty supper of tortillas, and when
+the promenaders began to disappear, thus telling that the hour for
+retiring was near at hand, Cummings went downstairs and unbolted the
+door.
+
+Now every second appeared like a minute, and when it seemed as if the
+night must be well nigh spent a slight sound was heard from below.
+
+Jake would have rushed to the stair-case to welcome the Indian; but
+Cummings restrained him. It was not certain who the visitor might be,
+and with bated breath all listened until a low voice said:
+
+"It is Poyor."
+
+The remark was commonplace in the extreme; but no combination of words
+sounded more sweetly to the boys, and they rushed forward to clasp the
+Indian by the hand.
+
+In the dim light it was not possible to see him very clearly; but from
+the imperfect view all understood that something serious had happened.
+He was panting as if just having concluded a long race, and the flowing
+white garments he had put on before leaving in order to resemble the
+inhabitants of the city, were torn and stained with mud.
+
+Cummings spoke to him in the Indian dialect, and he replied gravely,
+the first words causing the white man to utter an exclamation of dismay.
+
+"What is the matter? What has happened?" Teddy asked; but Cummings made
+no reply until Poyor had spoken at considerable length, and then he
+said:
+
+"The worst possible misfortune has befallen us. Our boat has been
+discovered and brought into the city. It is believed we are hiding in
+the swamp, and a number of men are searching there for us."
+
+"Why didn't he come straight back to tell us?" Jake asked angrily. "If
+these people are so fierce as you pretend, it is time we were making our
+escape."
+
+"To have approached this place in the daytime would have been in the
+highest degree dangerous, and, besides, he had a good deal of work to
+do."
+
+"Such as what?"
+
+"It was necessary we should know exactly the strength and whereabouts of
+the searching party. That he has discovered."
+
+"And how much good will it do us while we are shut up in here?"
+
+"Do not cast reproaches in the time of trouble," Cummings replied
+gravely. "We must work together to extricate ourselves from the danger
+into which I have persuaded you to come."
+
+Jake was silenced, and Poyor continued to tell his story, but still
+speaking in his own language.
+
+The boys fancied he was proposing some plan which did not meet with
+Cummings' approbation, for the latter spoke vehemently at times.
+
+While this was going on Teddy whispered to Neal:
+
+"It begins to look as if the sailors who were drowned in the surf were
+more fortunate than the rest of us. They died quickly, and we shall
+probably find out what it means to be tortured."
+
+"Don't speak of such horrible things, Teddy. We are not captured yet,
+and there is no sense in looking trouble in the face."
+
+"It can't be helped sometimes. I've had enough of adventures, and if we
+do live to escape from this place all the gold in the world wouldn't
+tempt me to get into another such scrape."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+A RETREAT.
+
+
+Cummings and Poyor talked together fully half an hour before the former
+volunteered any further information to his white companions, and then he
+said:
+
+"It would be useless for me to disguise the truth in any particular, for
+it is important all should know the absolute facts of the situation. In
+laying my plans for this expedition the only contingency for which I did
+not prepare, was exactly what has happened. I never believed there were
+so many sentinels in the swamp that the boat would be discovered, and
+when we came through without seeing a single one, I felt perfectly safe
+on that score."
+
+"Isn't it possible the Indians will think it is a craft belonging to
+some of their own people?" Neal asked.
+
+"There is no hope of that. She is entirely different in build, and you
+must remember that we left a number of things on board. Those who found
+her came directly to the city, and orders have been given by the chief
+men that the swamp be searched thoroughly. There is no longer any
+possibility that we could go through without being discovered."
+
+"Then we've got no chance of escaping," Jake cried passionately, and
+Cummings replied calmly:
+
+"Who says we haven't? the coast line, where no one would think of
+looking for an enemy, is still open, and what prevents us from trying to
+make our way in that direction?"
+
+"Then you have given up all hope of carrying away any treasure?"
+
+"Under the circumstances I shall be well pleased if we succeed in
+getting away alive. We are now in a position where nothing save escape
+must be thought of, and I am the one who has placed you three in such a
+dangerous situation. Shut your eyes to the fact that so much treasure
+might be gained, and bend all your energies to leaving this section of
+the country. As compared with life gold amounts to very little."
+
+"Then we are to say that the attempt has been a failure," Jake added in
+a tone of reproach.
+
+"Yes, and I take upon myself all the blame. You have spent but little
+time on the enterprise, while to it I have devoted not less than two
+years, therefore you can get some idea of the extent of my
+disappointment as compared with yours."
+
+"We recognize that fully," Neal replied, "and understand that you
+believed the expedition would be successful; but since it has proven to
+be a failure let us decide upon the proper course to be pursued rather
+than spend our time reproaching each other."
+
+"You are talking like a sensible fellow," Cummings said approvingly.
+"Here is the situation in a nut-shell, and Poyor understands English
+sufficiently to follow us in all we say. To go back by the way we came
+is now impossible, and yet we must leave the city before a house to
+house search is made, as I am convinced will be the case when it is
+shown that there are no strangers in the swamp. The only open course is
+toward the east, over the mountains, and the journey can be accomplished
+if we hang together. I am willing to acknowledge that I have led you on
+an unsuccessful search, although that may be of little satisfaction, and
+now my only aim is to release you from the dangers which beset us all."
+
+"We understand that perfectly," Teddy said quickly, "therefore there is
+no reason why the matter should be discussed. We took the same chances
+that you and Poyor did, consequently our interests are identical. Show
+us how to get out of here, and the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may keep all
+their gold and silver so far as I am concerned."
+
+"But how are we to be paid for the time spent?" Jake asked fretfully.
+
+"By saving your own life, which is now in great danger," Neal replied.
+"Give up all idea of making yourself rich by the venture, and think only
+of how we can best get away."
+
+"That is something for Cummings to fix," Jake replied in a sulky tone.
+"I came here for gold, and if that can't be had let those who put up the
+job help us out of the scrape."
+
+"I have already taken upon myself all the blame of the failure, and
+admitted that it came about through an oversight of mine," Cummings said
+sternly. "Now if you will listen to my plan I believe we can get out of
+here alive, which is the one important thing just at this time when
+everything has gone against us."
+
+"What do you propose to do?" Neal asked, with a glance at Jake which
+should have silenced him.
+
+"Strike for the sea-shore. Poyor believes it is yet possible to leave
+the city on the eastern side without danger of meeting the sentinels,
+the majority of whom have been withdrawn to aid in searching the swamp,
+and by moving quickly we can at least be out of this hornets' nest
+before sunrise."
+
+"You are the best judge; we will follow your directions," Teddy said,
+speaking more calmly than one would have fancied was possible in view
+of all the danger. "Tell us what you think is best and we will agree to
+it, for now Neal and I have but one desire, which is to leave the Silver
+City in the shortest possible space of time. We can be of but little
+assistance in case of a regular fight, and according to my way of
+thinking, your greatest mistake has been in accepting such useless
+companions."
+
+"I am perfectly satisfied that so far as you are concerned I have not
+made any error. With twenty well-armed men I should not try to maintain
+my position, for to hold out against an attack would be impossible, and
+the only question now is whether we can escape. Having been here once I
+will come again, and at some time in the future you shall hear that I
+succeeded in bringing away treasure from this same wonderful city."
+
+Then Cummings held a short conversation with Poyor, and when it was
+concluded turned toward Neal and Teddy, as if disdaining to submit any
+plans to Jake, and said:
+
+"My first idea was to make an effort to return by the same way we came;
+but the Indian has persuaded me to the contrary. Are you willing to do
+as we think best?"
+
+"You are as eager to save your own lives as we are ours," Neal replied,
+"and since you are familiar with this country it would be foolish for us
+to offer any advice. Do whatever in the opinion of both is best, and we
+will obey orders."
+
+"Our scheme necessitates an immediate move, for, as yet, no attempt has
+been made to learn if there are any strangers in the city."
+
+"Then you propose to go without making any effort to carry away gold?"
+Jake asked.
+
+"Exactly. The journey has been a failure, through my carelessness as I
+said before, and to load ourselves down with treasure when a long march
+is before us, would be the height of folly."
+
+Jake remained silent, and Neal said:
+
+"Don't waste any more time talking. Let us start at once."
+
+Cummings spoke with Poyor, and the latter replied with the air of one
+who considers himself vanquished, after which the former said:
+
+"We may need all this food. Make it up into bundles, and we will start
+at once. The journey before us is a long and a dangerous one: but, as I
+believe, it is the only way of escape left open."
+
+The boys set about making the small amount of baggage into five parcels
+while Cummings and the Indian were still discussing some point, and when
+the conversation was concluded the former said:
+
+"We will start for the sea coast. There is no immediate hurry, for there
+is yet at least six hours before the inhabitants will be stirring."
+
+"There must be sentinels on the east as well as the west side," Teddy
+suggested.
+
+"True; but if the information brought by Poyor be correct, there will
+not be as strict a watch kept. The Indian believes we should try to
+force a passage through the swamp, fighting in case of a necessity; but
+I prefer that course where the least danger is to be met, even though
+the distance be greater."
+
+Neither Neal nor Teddy cared to discuss the matter: they knew that
+Cummings was the best judge in such a case, and were well content to
+follow his leadership; but Jake did not trust him so implicitly.
+
+"Before we leave here I want to know your plans," he said. "My life as
+well as yours and the others, is in danger, and it is no more than right
+that I have at least a faint idea of what is to be done."
+
+"You are quite right," Cummings replied mildly. "It is my purpose to
+travel toward the east as far as the sea-shore, and from there make our
+way to my hut. So far as I can see it is the only practicable course."
+
+"What does the Indian say?"
+
+"He thinks we can go through the swamp even if we have no boat: but, in
+my opinion, the danger of contracting the fever is too great."
+
+Jake had the appearance of a man who is about to make some protest, and
+Neal whispered to him:
+
+"In such a case as this it is our duty to accept Cummings' view of the
+matter. Do not delay now when we all know that every moment is
+precious."
+
+"Have it your own way, I won't say another word," the engineer replied
+impatiently; "but I think we have followed this man blindly as long as
+we should."
+
+Neal paid no attention to the latter portion of this remark, but said as
+he turned toward the leader:
+
+"It is all right; we are ready."
+
+"Then follow me, and remember that our lives may pay the forfeit if a
+single incautious word is spoken."
+
+Thus speaking he took up one of the packages, looked once more to the
+cartridges in his gun, and started down the stairs, the boys and Jake
+following, while Poyor brought up the rear.
+
+At the outer door he hesitated an instant, much as if to persuade
+himself that it was absolutely necessary to flee from this city to enter
+which he had spent so many days in making preparations, and then,
+throwing it open, he led the way into the deserted streets.
+
+"Our safest plan is to go straight across, rather than try to circle
+around the outskirts where we may meet with sentinels," he said,
+motioning for Poyor to lead the way. "At present no one suspects that we
+are here, consequently the guard will not be particularly on the alert."
+
+"Do as you think best," Neal replied, and then, falling back by the side
+of Teddy, he whispered:
+
+"If it hadn't been for me you wouldn't have gotten into this scrape; in
+case anything happens try not to believe it was my fault."
+
+"There is no possible chance that you can be to blame," Teddy replied
+warmly. "Any one would have accepted the invitation to go yachting, and
+this last part of the cruise is only the result of an accident with
+which you had nothing to do."
+
+Jake did not open his mouth; he acted as if Cummings had done him a
+personal injury in proposing such a trip, and the fact that they were
+obliged to leave without making any effort to carry away the vast amount
+of treasure which he knew to be in the city unguarded, aroused his anger
+in a most unreasonable degree.
+
+Poyor took the lead and conducted the party directly past the enormous
+temple with its ornamentation of silver which shone in the pale rays of
+the moon until the entire structure appeared to be a solid mass of the
+precious metal, and the marvelous sight was too much for Jake, who,
+coming to a sudden halt, said doggedly:
+
+"It may be all right for you boys with rich fathers to turn your backs
+on so much wealth; but I'm goin' to have some part of this treasure, or
+give the Indians a fair chance to kill me."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+DISCOVERED.
+
+
+Cummings was bringing up the rear during this march across the city, and
+when Jake halted he naturally thought it was in obedience to some signal
+made by Poyor, therefore he remained silent until hearing Neal say
+imploringly:
+
+"Go on, Jake. Don't stop now when we have a chance of getting away in
+safety, for what is gold in comparison with life?"
+
+"Have you halted with any idea that it may be possible to carry anything
+off with us?" Cummings asked, speaking in a whisper, and Jake replied in
+the same cautious tone:
+
+"That's the size of it. You brought us here with the promise that we
+could make ourselves rich, and when the first little thing goes wrong
+you run. Now I will do as I please."
+
+"It is nothing less than suicide. We have before us a journey so long
+and difficult that however small a burden you may have to carry, it will
+seem all too heavy."
+
+By this time Poyor turned back to learn the cause of the halt, and when
+it was explained he said gravely:
+
+"Each instant we stand here brings death so much nearer. Even at this
+moment watchful eyes may be upon us, and once we are discovered flight
+will be almost impossible."
+
+The little party stood directly in front of what was evidently the main
+entrance to the temple. It was formed of twenty slender shafts of white
+stone which in the moonlight looked translucent, and each column upheld
+a grotesque figure composed of what appeared to be silver.
+
+"I am goin' to have one of them images, no matter what happens," Jake
+said doggedly. "I don't care how much of a tramp there is before us, and
+the more the thing weighs the better I'll be pleased, for it's the first
+chance I ever had to make myself rich."
+
+"But think of us," Teddy whispered. "We all run the risk of being killed
+because of what you propose to do."
+
+"There's no need of your waitin' here. Go on, an' I'll take care of
+myself. I ain't such a chump as not to be able to find my way out."
+
+"It must be as he says. We can wait no longer," Poyor said peremptorily.
+"Better one should die than all," and, seizing Neal by the shoulder, he
+literally dragged him away.
+
+Cummings did the same by Teddy, and as the boys were thus forced from
+the place they saw Jake trying to make his way up one of the smooth
+shafts.
+
+"It is cruel to leave him when you know he will be killed," Neal said as
+he struggled in vain to release himself from the Indian's grasp.
+
+"He knows the danger, and will not come. We must care for ourselves. Now
+remain quiet; there has been too much noise and too long a delay."
+
+Poyor was walking at a pace so rapid that the boys were forced to run;
+but before they reached the next intersecting street a loud crash was
+heard from the direction of the temple, and Cummings whispered:
+
+"He has toppled over one of the columns, and discovery is now certain.
+He has insured our destruction as well as his own."
+
+The words had hardly been uttered when shouts were heard from different
+portions of the city, and, as if he had sprung from the ground, a man
+appeared directly in their path.
+
+A second's delay would have been fatal. Poyor, releasing his hold of
+Neal, dashed forward with the agility of a cat, and springing upon the
+stranger bore him to the ground.
+
+There was a short, sharp struggle which lasted while one might possibly
+have counted ten, and then the man lay motionless while Poyor, grasping
+Neal by the arm once more, darted on down the street.
+
+Now it seemed as if the entire city had been aroused. On every hand
+could be heard shouts as if of command and cries of surprise and anger.
+The sound of footsteps in the rear told that the pursuit had already
+begun, and it was a race for life with the odds fearfully against the
+fugitives.
+
+"You must run now as you never did before," Cummings said sharply to
+Teddy. "There can be no thought of fatigue until we reach some shelter
+where it will be possible to make a stand."
+
+"I can hold out as long as Neal; but neither of us are a match for
+Poyor."
+
+"He could run all day."
+
+Two moments later, when they were nearing a broad street which Cummings
+fancied led to the woods on the eastern side of the city, Poyor
+slackened his pace to say:
+
+"There is one close behind who must be stopped. Will you do it, or shall
+I?"
+
+"Help Teddy along, while I try it."
+
+As the Indian took Teddy by the arm, thus having a boy on either side of
+him, Cummings unslung the rifle which had been strapped over his
+shoulder, and, wheeling suddenly, raised it at a man who was not more
+than forty yards in the rear.
+
+"Don't shoot! It's me!" a familiar voice cried, and as Cummings turned
+to resume the flight he muttered to himself:
+
+"It's a pity they haven't caught you. But for your folly we could have
+passed through the city unobserved."
+
+Jake no longer believed the Chan Santa Cruz Indians to be such a
+peaceable race. When, as Cummings had suspected, the shaft he was trying
+to climb toppled over, he was able to escape injury by leaping to one
+side, and immediately made an effort to detach the statue which was
+cemented firmly to the stone.
+
+It seemed to him that he had but just begun the task when two men rushed
+from the interior of the temple. Fortunately for him they were unarmed
+or his term of life would have expired at that moment; but as it was one
+of them seized a fragment of the stone as he turned to run, and threw it
+with such accuracy of aim that Jake's cheek was cut from the eye to the
+chin as smoothly as if done with a razor.
+
+With the blood streaming down his face Jake ran for dear life in the
+direction taken by the remainder of the party, and now fully realizing
+the danger he had brought upon them.
+
+"I deserve to be killed," he said to himself, "and if that Poyor don't
+try to even up things with me for this night's job it'll be because he's
+a better Indian than I ever gave him credit for."
+
+When the remainder of the party reached the end of the broad street with
+the welcome shelter of the forest not more than half a mile away, Jake
+was ten or twelve yards in the rear, and three times that distance
+behind him were a dozen men who appeared to be gaining each instant.
+
+Again Poyor spoke to Cummings, and again the latter stopped suddenly and
+wheeled about: but this time there was no warning shout to prevent the
+rifle from being discharged.
+
+There was a loud report, a cry of pain from one of the pursuers, and all
+halted for an instant to aid their wounded companion.
+
+When Cummings turned to continue the flight Jake was by his side, saying
+as they ran:
+
+"If it comes to close quarters I'll drop behind, and make as long a
+fight as I can, which will give the rest a chance to gain on the crowd."
+
+"They would surely kill you. There could be no hope in a hand to hand
+struggle."
+
+"I know that, and it will be no more than I deserve. If I hadn't been
+such a fool you would have got through without turning a hair."
+
+This confession and the proposition to sacrifice himself had the effect
+of dissipating Cummings' anger, and he said decidedly:
+
+"We will stick together and take even chances. No matter what has been
+done one shall not be sacrificed to save the rest unless I, who brought
+you here, am that one."
+
+To carry on any extended conversation and at the same time continue the
+pace was out of the question, and during the next five minutes not a
+word was spoken.
+
+Now there were two dozen pursuers, and the boys had become so nearly
+exhausted that Teddy felt positive that he could not keep on his feet
+long enough to reach the forest.
+
+Poyor, seeing that both the boys had nearly run their race, shouted in
+his own language a few words to Cummings, clasped his panting companions
+by the waist, and, although thus burdened, soon drew away from both the
+white men.
+
+Nearer and nearer come the pursuers.
+
+Once more Cummings halts, discharges his rifle, and then presses
+forward.
+
+Poyor gains the shelter while the others are a hundred yards away, and
+allowing the boys to drop to the ground, he unslings Neal's gun, stands
+at the very edge of the cover where he fires two shots just in time to
+save the remainder of the party.
+
+"We must not stop here," he says as Cummings comes to a halt by his
+side. "Help the boys, and leave me here long enough to hold them in
+check until you have put considerable distance between the crowd and
+yourselves."
+
+Cummings waited only until he had given the Indian his own rifle and
+some cartridges, for it was a more effective weapon than Neal's, and
+then he and Jake did as directed.
+
+Traveling in as nearly a straight line as possible they marched rapidly,
+while behind them could be heard shot after shot, telling that Poyor was
+doing his duty.
+
+"If he can keep that up long enough we shall give them the slip after
+all," Jake said, speaking with difficulty as he gasped for breath.
+
+"There are others to be met. Between here and the coast is a line of
+sentinels who may be more vigilant than those in the swamp."
+
+Now that the pace was slower, and because of the assistance rendered,
+Neal and Teddy were able to make their way unaided, and the former said
+as he pushed Cummings from him:
+
+"I am all right now. You have as much as you can do to take care of
+yourself, and it is not fair to half carry me as you and Poyor have been
+doing."
+
+"It hasn't been such a very hard job; but I'm perfectly willing to give
+it up if you are feeling better."
+
+"We are both in fair condition," Teddy replied, and being relieved of
+the burdens the men were able to travel more rapidly.
+
+During the next ten minutes not a word was spoken, and then Cummings
+said as he halted:
+
+"We'll take a little rest, for I am nearly blown."
+
+All threw themselves on the ground where they lay panting until,
+recovering somewhat, Jake asked:
+
+"How is Poyor to find us in this thicket? He can't follow a trail in the
+darkness."
+
+"He will succeed in doing so as---- Say, are you wounded?"
+
+"One of those fellows cut my cheek open with a rock; but beyond the pain
+I don't reckon there's been any great damage done."
+
+"You are fortunate that it was not inflicted by an arrow or spear. Let
+me try to bandage it, for the loss of blood will tell upon you if we
+continue this gait very long."
+
+With strips torn from Jake's shirt the wound was bound up in an awkward
+fashion, and Cummings said as he finished the work:
+
+"When Poyor comes he will gather a certain leaf which has healing
+properties, and in a short time all the pain will go away; but I fancy
+you'll carry that scar to your grave."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+A HALT.
+
+
+Jake professed to have but little care how long the scar might remain on
+his face providing the wound healed, and they succeeded in escaping from
+the Chan Santa Cruz Indians.
+
+"Nothing that can happen to us during the journey to Merida would be
+half as bad as to fall into their hands," he said with a shudder, "and
+what surprises me most is that I should have thought they were peaceably
+inclined."
+
+"But that is exactly what they are until it comes to dealing with a
+white man," Cummings replied. "You must remember all that the
+people--the natives I mean--have suffered since America was discovered.
+The barbarous treatment they received from the Spaniards is told from
+father to son, and it is a portion of their religious training to work
+all the injury possible to the whites. Read of what the invaders did to
+satisfy their thirst for gold, and then you can no longer wonder why
+these people, the only ones who have kept their city free from the
+conqueror, are so implacable. Remember that Yucatan was once covered
+with populous cities, the ruins of which show even at this late date how
+magnificent they were, how splendid beyond comparison with the one we
+have seen, and you ask yourselves why these Indians do not rise and
+massacre all of the hated color that can be found."
+
+"But you also came hoping to take away their treasure," Neal said,
+smiling at Cummings' vehemence.
+
+"That is true, therefore I have no word of blame when they attempt to
+kill me; but, as a matter of course, I try to save my life even though I
+am to them nothing more than a common robber. In my own eyes, however,
+the case seems different. To procure such goods as I most desired, would
+probably be, by the aid of Poyor, to solve that which scholars have
+studied for so long in vain--the origin of the Aztecs and Toltecs, for I
+believe the Chan Santa Cruz belong to the latter race, and keep fresh
+all their histories and traditions."
+
+"And now that you have failed it would be better to go home with us,"
+Teddy said.
+
+"This attempt has failed; but I shall try again and again until I
+succeed, providing we get out of this scrape alive, which is by no means
+certain, for we have a long and perilous journey before us."
+
+"Which we are not likely to make unless Poyor comes back," Neal added
+grimly. "It surely seems as if he should be here by this time. I haven't
+heard the report of his rifle for a long while."
+
+"Most likely we are too far away for the sound to reach us. We will wait
+half an hour longer, and then I will go back to see if anything has
+happened."
+
+Cummings had hardly ceased speaking before the Indian appeared in their
+midst, having come so softly that no one heard him until he stood before
+them.
+
+"It is not a good watch you keep," he said to Cummings, speaking in
+English.
+
+"We cannot guard against such an approach as yours. Where are the
+enemy?"
+
+"I left them at the edge of the forest. Knowing how we are armed they do
+not dare to follow very close; but when the sun rises a hundred will be
+at our heels."
+
+"Shall we go on now, or will you rest awhile?"
+
+"I am ready. We have no time to lose."
+
+Cummings rose to his feet, the others following his example, and the
+Indian started forward without delay.
+
+"How far are we from the sea-shore?" Cummings asked as the march began.
+
+"More miles than we shall travel for many days. By sunrise every
+sentinel will know we are here, and it will be impossible to break
+through their lines."
+
+"Then how are we to get home?" Teddy asked in alarm.
+
+"He probably hopes to find some place where we can stay in hiding for
+awhile. In this section of the country there are many large caverns in
+which streams of water are invariably found, thus causing the belief
+that a subterranean river flows from the valley to the sea. If we stop
+at one of them until it is decided we have succeeded in escaping, you
+will not be able to take the steamer as intended."
+
+"But we may have to stay two or three weeks."
+
+"Better that than to be captured," Cummings replied, and then he
+relapsed into silence.
+
+During the next two hours the little party pressed steadily forward,
+making their way with difficulty through the tangled foliage, and then
+Neal was forced to ask for another halt.
+
+"I must rest awhile," he said. "My feet are sore, and it seems
+impossible to take another step."
+
+Poyor halted, was about to seat himself, and then, as if suddenly
+remembering something, he said:
+
+"Wait here. I will soon be back."
+
+The white members of the party were too tired even to talk. Throwing
+themselves upon the ground they enjoyed the luxury of rest, and,
+convinced there was no danger to be apprehended from the enemy until
+daylight, Neal and Teddy gave themselves up to the embrace of slumber.
+
+An hour passed before the apparently tireless Poyor returned, and he
+awakened the sleepers by saying:
+
+"I have found that for which I sought. Come with me, and repose until
+labor will seem a pleasure."
+
+"What is it? A cave?" Neal asked sleepily.
+
+"More than that. An underground house where we can live in safety,
+unless the retreat should be discovered."
+
+It was a great exertion to get into traveling trim; but all hands did it
+after a time, and Poyor led the way, although he had probably been there
+but once before, as if following a familiar path.
+
+After about half an hour's rapid walking the Indian halted at an opening
+in the hillside hardly more than large enough for one to go through on
+his hands and knees, and motioned for the others to enter.
+
+Cummings led the way, and while he was doing so Teddy asked Poyor:
+
+"Have you been here often before?"
+
+"This is the first time."
+
+"How could you see a small hole like that while it is so dark?"
+
+"On the line of these caves the earth is always damp. When we halted
+last I could feel that we were on the underground water course, and it
+was only necessary to follow it up. Here we shall find both food and
+drink."
+
+"I don't understand where the food comes in unless we are to live on
+bats," Neal said laughingly, as he in turn entered the aperture.
+
+By the time Teddy was inside Cummings had lighted a branch of what is
+mistakenly called fat wood, and, using this for a torch, it was possible
+to have a reasonably good view of the temporary home.
+
+The boys found themselves standing in an enormous chamber, from which
+led several galleries or smaller rooms, lined with the same soft white
+stone seen in the buildings of the Silver City, and at the further end
+was a narrow stream rising apparently from the solid rock, crossing the
+cavern to the opposite side where it disappeared.
+
+To describe the beauty of this marble chamber fashioned by nature would
+be impossible. Neal and Teddy had but just begun to realize its
+magnificence when they were startled by the whirring of wings and a
+clucking noise such as is made by a barn-yard fowl, and an instant later
+Poyor had knocked over with a piece of rock what looked very much like a
+chicken.
+
+"It is a toh," Cummings said, as he took the prize from the Indian. "At
+the city from which we came so unceremoniously these birds are kept as
+hens, and their eggs are most delicious."
+
+"But how did this one happen to be in here, I wonder?" Teddy muttered.
+
+"The species are found nowhere else but in the caverns. Probably there
+are several hundred here."
+
+Before the torch had burned out the boys had time to examine the odd
+chicken. It was about as large as a bantam, had soft, silky plumage, and
+a tail composed of two feathers which were nothing more than stems up to
+the very tips, where were tassel-like appendages.
+
+"Now if the enemy does not track us here we can live pretty comfortably
+for a few days; but I hope we shan't be obliged to stay any longer.
+Poyor will destroy our trail as soon as it is light, and if they should
+come I fancy we can tire them out, for one man can hold this place
+against a hundred."
+
+"I am going to drink my fill of that water," Jake said, as he groped his
+way toward the rear of the chamber. "It seems as if I hadn't had all I
+needed since we started on this trip."
+
+"Be careful," Cummings shouted quickly. "Don't venture near the stream
+until I get another torch."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"Because in some of these caverns alligators are found, and it is never
+safe to drink from the running water without first making sure that
+there are no saurian guards about."
+
+Cummings went to the entrance for more wood, and when he returned the
+Indian was with him.
+
+"This will cure the wound on your face," the latter said to Jake as he
+held out a branch covered with small, glossy green leaves. "Take off the
+cloth that I may see it."
+
+While Jake obeyed, Cummings was kindling a fresh torch, and as the light
+fell upon the engineer's cheek both the boys uttered exclamations of
+surprise.
+
+It was certainly a terrible looking wound, the dried blood causing it to
+appear even larger than it really was; but Poyor set about dressing it
+with the utmost indifference, perhaps because he thought Jake deserved
+it for having been so stubborn and criminally foolish.
+
+The Indian chewed the leaves to a pulp, and then spread them thickly on
+the wound, after which Cummings replaced the cloth, and Jake declared
+that the pain had subsided instantly.
+
+"I must remember the name of that plant if it can be found in a dried
+state at home," he said, "and there are many times when such a poultice
+would come in mighty handy."
+
+"He has only bound on leaves from a shrub called guaco; but you needn't
+try to remember the name, for they are efficacious only while green. Now
+that the surgeon's duties have been performed we will get some water,
+and then set about cooking breakfast. Poyor, bring in plenty of wood,
+and then try to find another toh."
+
+At the swiftly running stream nothing resembling an alligator was seen,
+and the white members of the party enjoyed to the utmost copious
+draughts of the ice-cold liquid.
+
+Meanwhile the Indian was rapidly obeying Cummings' orders. He built a
+fire near the water, and by the light which the white stones reflected
+in every direction, had but little difficulty in knocking over three
+more of what Teddy persisted in calling "chickens."
+
+Leaving the cave again he soon returned with a lot of clay which he
+pasted over the tohs without removing the feathers or intestines, and
+thus prepared one would have supposed they were nothing more than so
+many balls of mud.
+
+These he put into the fire, piled the wood over and around them, and
+then sat down to wait for the fruits of his labor.
+
+The boys fell asleep before the fowls were cooked: but after a little
+more than an hour Cummings awakened them to get their share of the
+feast.
+
+The now thoroughly baked clay was broken open, and it was found that the
+feathers and skin of the birds had adhered to the covering, leaving the
+white flesh temptingly exposed.
+
+Among the small amount of stores there was salt sufficient for several
+days' consumption, therefore they were not without seasoning for the
+meat, and Jake, Neal and Teddy were quite positive they had never eaten
+anything half so delicious as this odd chicken baked in a most singular
+manner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+CAVE LIFE.
+
+
+When the meal was ended it was nearly daylight and Cummings said as he
+stretched himself out close by the entrance:
+
+"It is necessary that the strictest kind of a watch should be kept every
+moment of the time from now on. I'll take the first trick, Jake shall be
+awakened next, and Poyor, who has done the most work, comes last."
+
+"But what are Teddy and I to do?" Neal asked in surprise. "We are as
+well able to stand guard as any one else."
+
+"I allowed that it would be at least twenty-four hours before you were
+in condition for anything," Cummings replied with a laugh.
+
+"That is where you made a big mistake," Teddy added. "We insist on doing
+our full share."
+
+"Very well, if Poyor is asleep when Jake goes off duty one of you shall
+be called."
+
+It was arranged that they should sleep near the entrance where the
+sentinel could awaken them if necessary, without making a noise, and
+after the weapons were examined once more to make certain they were in
+good working order, all save Cummings made a business of going to sleep.
+
+The Indian did not give any one an opportunity of awakening him. At the
+expiration of an hour, just as Cummings was thinking it time to call
+Jake, he arose and peered cautiously out through the opening.
+
+"Why did you get up so soon?" Cummings asked. "You need rest, and there
+is nothing to prevent your sleeping until noon if you feel so disposed."
+
+"There is much work to be done," he replied gravely. "When the sun rises
+I must examine the trail to make sure it is not too plain."
+
+"It will be another hour before daylight."
+
+"By sitting here I shall be ready to go as soon as it is light."
+
+"I do not think you are giving me the true reason," and Cummings ignited
+a match that he might see the Indian's face.
+
+"You must not do that," he said quickly, as he clasped his hand over the
+tiny flame. "It is unwise so near the entrance."
+
+"You believe then that we are in considerable danger?"
+
+"We shall be until we are outside the Chan Santa Cruz country."
+
+"That is not all you can say. I wish to know exactly your opinion of the
+situation."
+
+"You shall know; but it is not well to explain to the others. Our
+enemies will find us I think, and we may be forced to fight to the end,
+for they will not give up the chase until after many days."
+
+"Do you think it would be unsafe to push on again now we have had rest
+and food?"
+
+"By this time the sentinels know what happened last night, and the
+forest is full of enemies. A poisoned arrow can be sent in the daytime,
+while he who shoots it remains concealed. Before noon we would all be
+dead."
+
+Cummings was silent for a moment, and then he asked in a low tone:
+
+"How far do you think we are from the sea-shore?"
+
+"The distance is not great; but the way so difficult that the journey
+could not be ended in less than five days."
+
+"Then it seems that we are in a tight place whatever course is pursued."
+
+"We can fight longer here than where the trees conceal our foes," was
+the grave reply, and then Poyor crept through the opening into the
+gloomy forest where wild animals and wilder human beings lurked to
+destroy.
+
+After this conversation Cummings was in no mood for sleep, and he
+refrained from awakening Jake.
+
+Seated where he could hear the slightest sound from the outside, he
+reflected upon all the dangers of the situation, and reproached himself
+for having led the boys and the engineer into such peril.
+
+"I would have been culpable if no one but Poyor had accompanied me," he
+said to himself, "and now I am directly responsible for the lives of
+those who but for me, would at this moment be safe in Merida."
+
+There was nothing to be gained by scolding one's self, and he strove
+with very poor success to put such thoughts from his mind until the sun
+rose, partially lighting up the gloomy recesses of the forest, and
+sending tiny rays of light through the narrow aperture.
+
+The three sleepers breathed regularly and noisily; but the sentinel
+disturbed them not.
+
+The minutes passed slowly until two hours had elapsed, and then a slight
+rustling of leaves near the entrance caused Cummings to seize the rifle
+more firmly and peer out.
+
+It was Poyor returning, and he appeared weary like one who has run a
+long race.
+
+"Have you seen anything?" Cummings asked anxiously.
+
+"There were four Indians about a mile south from here. They came from
+the city last night, and are searching. It was possible to hear them
+talk. The sentinels near the coast have been doubled in number, and
+there is little hope we could pass them."
+
+"It is barely possible they may not find this cave; the entrance is
+small, and almost hidden by the brushes."
+
+"Yet I found it in the night."
+
+"True," Cummings replied gloomily, and as he said nothing more Poyor
+went to the stream to quench his thirst.
+
+While passing by Jake he accidentally brushed the latter's arm with his
+foot, and the engineer was on his feet in an instant, staring around
+stupidly as if believing the enemy was upon him.
+
+"Why didn't you call me to stand my watch?" he asked in a loud tone, and
+Poyor, darting back to his side whispered:
+
+"It is not safe to make any noise. Do not so much as speak aloud."
+
+By this time the boys were aroused, and when the Indian had cautioned
+them in turn all three went to where Cummings was seated.
+
+"Are we going to move, or have you concluded to stay here?" Neal asked.
+
+"We shall be obliged to make this our headquarters for a few days. Poyor
+has seen people from the city in the immediate vicinity, consequently it
+is advisable to keep under cover."
+
+"Do you think we will be able to leave in a week?" Teddy asked
+anxiously, and Cummings replied evasively:
+
+"I hope so."
+
+To Jake, who did not feel so eager to reach home by the next steamer
+that left Progresso, the prospect of remaining in the cave several days
+was agreeable rather than otherwise, and he asked:
+
+"Are we to cook any breakfast this morning?"
+
+"No, because the smoke might be seen. To-night there will be no such
+danger, and the light can be screened from view, therefore it is a case
+of getting along with a cold bite until then. Sleep as much as possible
+in order that you may be ready to do your share of the watching, and
+remember that perfect silence is absolutely necessary."
+
+Then Cummings intimated that the conversation should cease, by turning
+his attention to what might be happening outside, and the three went
+toward the opposite end of the cavern where the Indian had thrown
+himself down for a nap.
+
+Here, after discussing what little they knew regarding the situation,
+they ate a few totopostes, a thin, dry tortilla which will remain sweet
+many days, and then gave themselves up to slumber once more.
+
+To sleep when one does not feel the necessity of such rest is, however,
+not an easy matter to be arranged, and after two or three short naps the
+boys found it impossible to woo the drowsy god.
+
+They walked around the cavern, arousing flocks of tohs; but, owing to
+the dim light, finding nothing worthy of attention, and then they went
+to the entrance where Cummings refused to hold any conversation with
+them because of the possibility that some of the enemy might be lurking
+outside, where it was possible to hear the sound of their voices.
+
+In this restless manner the day was spent, and when night came again
+Poyor ventured out once more.
+
+By this time Cummings felt the necessity of gaining a little rest, and
+he proposed that Neal and Teddy take their turn at standing watch.
+
+"It will not be so tedious if you remain here together," he said, "and
+we will give Jake a job later in the night."
+
+It was really a relief to the boys to have something to occupy their
+time, and as they took his place at the entrance he lay down near at
+hand where they could awaken him without difficulty in case it should
+become necessary.
+
+To repeat all the unimportant incidents of the night would be tedious.
+When Poyor returned from his first trip outside he built a fire near the
+stream, shielded the flame by a screen of boughs that the light might
+not be reflected from the entrance, and then, with the air of one who is
+accustomed to such work, set about catching "chickens" enough to make a
+hearty meal.
+
+Dishing these up in clay he roasted them as before, and Cummings was
+awakened to share in the appetizing meal.
+
+Then the Indian went out again, while Jake was standing watch, and an
+hour later (it was then about two o'clock in the morning), he returned,
+and roused Cummings, saying in his native tongue as he did so:
+
+"Five miles from here is a smaller cave. The sentinels have just
+finished searching it. They will be here in the morning. I have thought
+we might slip past them, by exercising great caution, and it would be
+just so much nearer the coast."
+
+"Do you believe it should be done?" Cummings asked, as he sprang to his
+feet.
+
+"It can do no harm, providing we are not discovered during the march
+through the forest, and we may possibly be able to throw them off the
+scent."
+
+"Then we will start at once. Under such desperate circumstances nothing
+should be neglected which might be of benefit. How much food have we got
+on hand?"
+
+"All that will be needed. It is not difficult to procure provisions in
+this forest."
+
+It surely seemed as if they might better their condition very materially
+by making this change, and, in view of all things, it was the proper
+manoeuvre since by remaining there was no doubt the party would be
+discovered, when a regular siege must necessarily be the result.
+
+There was yet a considerable amount of the roasted tohs on hand. This
+was wrapped in leaves with the remainder of the provisions, and all the
+luggage made up in three packages, for it had been decided that the boys
+should not be called upon to carry any burden.
+
+"It may be that we shall be obliged to move quickly," Poyor said, "and
+it is best they have nothing but their guns."
+
+When everything was in readiness for the start the Indian went outside
+once more to reconnoiter, and on his return the final preparations were
+made.
+
+He, Cummings and Jake fastened the bundles to their backs; Neal and
+Teddy were cautioned to take plenty of cartridges from the general
+store, and then, Poyor leading the way, they emerged from the cave.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+A CHANGE OF BASE.
+
+
+Although the boys did not know the full extent of the danger, they could
+understand something of the anxiety felt by both Cummings and Poyor when
+the shelter of the cave had been left behind.
+
+The latter moved with the utmost caution, taking half a dozen steps and
+then stopping to listen; halting whenever the foliage rustled more than
+he fancied was usual and otherwise acting as if believing the enemy had
+completely surrounded them.
+
+Under such circumstances the advance was necessarily slow, and at least
+an hour was consumed in traveling less than a mile.
+
+Teddy was on the point of protesting against such excessive precaution
+when the sound of voices caused all the party to crouch low among the
+bushes, hiding themselves in the foliage just as four Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians came to a halt not more than twenty feet away.
+
+It was not difficult to distinguish the form of each one even amid the
+gloom, and from their manoeuvers Teddy and Neal were confident that
+they had halted for the remainder of the night.
+
+It would have been impossible to hold any conversation, however guarded,
+without the certainty of being heard while these men were so near, and
+the fugitives remained motionless, hardly daring to breathe, until it
+seemed as if some change of position must be made regardless of the
+consequences.
+
+Each one with the possible exception of Poyor, was so cramped as to be
+in great pain: but all knew that the slightest unusual noise among the
+foliage would have attracted attention.
+
+Of course Cummings' party was more than a match for the Indians; but in
+addition to his disinclination to begin a fight, was the chance that
+there might be others in the immediate vicinity who would join in the
+battle, thus reducing the odds which appeared to be in favor of the
+white men.
+
+It was in the highest degree important, also, that they remain hidden,
+for once the Indians got a glimpse of the party it would be a simple
+matter to track them to the next hiding place.
+
+There was another and a very weighty reason why both Cummings and Poyor
+wished to avoid an encounter in the forest, even though their weapons
+were much superior to those carried by the Chan Santa Cruz so far as
+rapid work was concerned. Unless struck in some vital part, the chances
+are in favor of recovery from a bullet wound; but let the skin be
+punctured ever so slightly by arrows poisoned with the venom of the
+snake known as the nahuyaca and death is certain to follow.
+
+With all this in mind it is little wonder that the fugitives suffered
+considerable pain before making any attempt to change positions, and
+that they would be forced to remain exactly where the halt had been
+made, until morning, seemed positive.
+
+Poyor was well content to stay there as long as the men carried on a
+conversation, for he was thus enabled to get some valuable information
+concerning their proposed movements, and not a word escaped him.
+
+Three hours elapsed before the pursuers gave any sign of leaving the
+place, and then a peculiar sound as of a night bird calling to its mate,
+caused them to start to their feet.
+
+It was evidently a signal from another party of pursuers, for these men
+answered it by a similar cry, and it was repeated several times by those
+in the distance.
+
+A moment later the Indians had started, and as they disappeared Neal
+whispered to Teddy:
+
+"I never realized before how much comfort there is in the ability to
+move whenever a fellow feels so disposed."
+
+"If I'd been obliged to keep still ten minutes longer I believe my legs
+would have dropped off," Teddy replied with a sigh of relief.
+
+There was no time to say anything more; Poyor had begun the advance, and
+the little party moved slowly and silently through the gloomy forest
+until the Indian halted in front of an opening slightly larger than the
+one leading to the cave they had just left.
+
+Jake did not wait to be told that the journey had come to an end; but at
+once crawled through, followed by Cummings with the materials for making
+a torch, and in a few moments the boys were also inside.
+
+Poyor did not accompany them; he wanted to assure himself that they had
+not been discovered, and proposed to stand guard among the trees until
+this had been accomplished.
+
+The cavern was not more than half as large as the one first visited; but
+was formed of the same peculiar stone. Here also was a stream across one
+corner, the bottom of which sloped gently up to the shore of fine white
+sand, and, so far as could be ascertained, it did not afford a home for
+disagreeable monsters in the shape of alligators.
+
+There was plenty of evidence near the entrance to show that in addition
+to searching the cave the Indians had made a long halt. Fragments of
+totopostes were scattered around, and a small pile of fine shavings told
+where one of them had repaired an arrow.
+
+The only objection which could be found in this new refuge was that it
+had not been taken possession of by tohs. Cummings searched everywhere
+in vain for the "chickens," and the troubled look on his face spoke
+plainly of his disappointment in failing to find a supply of food close
+at hand.
+
+"If we should be discovered and besieged it will be a case of short
+rations," he said as the little party returned to the opening to wait
+for Poyor.
+
+"Don't you suppose there are fish in the stream?" Teddy asked.
+
+"I never heard that there were; but even if it was stocked with them we
+should be none the better off since there are neither hooks nor lines
+here."
+
+"Neal and I have got plenty of both, so what's to hinder our finding
+out? A fresh fish wouldn't taste badly."
+
+"Very well. I'll stay here on guard, and----"
+
+He was interrupted by the arrival of Poyor, who had crept through the
+short passage without making sufficient sound to be heard by those who
+were supposed to be watching, and, speaking in English, he said to
+Cummings:
+
+"I do not think there is any one near here, and now I wish to go further
+on to learn where the next line of sentinels is posted. We may be able
+to change our quarters again, and if every move takes us nearer the
+coast we shall be gaining just so much every time. You must keep a
+better watch, however, for if I can surprise you, so can others."
+
+"I will take it upon myself to see that no one else is able to do the
+same thing," Cummings replied with a laugh. "When you are outside in the
+vicinity I always feel secure; for the best Chan Santa Cruz that ever
+lived couldn't pass without your knowledge. Did you hear anything of
+importance while we were hiding so near that party?"
+
+"From what they said it is positive fully a hundred men have been sent
+from the city to search for us, and with the sentinels there must be
+double that number between here and the coast."
+
+"It would seem as if with so many they ought to run us to the ground
+finally," Cummings said musingly. "Where were those fellows going?"
+
+"They had been following the wet track examining the caves, and began
+near the range of hills which forms the east boundary of their country.
+One of the party believed we had doubled back in order to cross the
+swamp, and if we can remain hidden it may not be long before all the
+searchers will be sent in that direction."
+
+"Did they make any talk about what would be done with us in case they
+run us down?" Jake asked.
+
+"All are to be taken to the city alive, if possible, and it is not hard
+to say what would be our fate there."
+
+"What do they do with their captives?" Jake continued, as if this not
+very cheerful subject fascinated him.
+
+"A white man would be sacrificed in the temple before the gods, and the
+death stroke would not be delivered until much torture had been
+inflicted."
+
+"Don't talk of such horrible things," Teddy interrupted nervously. "It
+can do us no good to learn all the terrible particulars. I want to keep
+my mind on the one idea of escape."
+
+"That is where you are right," Cummings replied approvingly. "We shall
+be worth any number of dead men for some time to come, and won't discuss
+even the possibility of capture. When are you going to start, Poyor?"
+
+"When I have bound more guaco leaves on this man's wound," was the
+answer, and now the boys noticed that he had brought a fresh supply of
+the wonderful shrub.
+
+After preparing it as before the bandage was removed, and by the light
+of a splinter of fat wood which Cummings fired with a match, it could be
+seen that the edges of the gash had already united.
+
+"To-morrow there will be no reason for keeping it tied up."
+
+"That is to say, the wound will be healed, and you'll have a souvenir of
+the Silver City which can never be lost," Cummings added.
+
+"I won't complain, for I came out of the scrape much better than I
+deserved," the engineer replied with a laugh.
+
+Poyor was now ready to go on the scout, and he delayed only long enough
+to say:
+
+"There must be no talking while I am away, for one who speaks cannot
+listen, and if the enemy should come here again his approach will be
+like that of a serpent."
+
+"You shan't have any cause to complain," Cummings replied, and an
+instant later the Indian had left the cave.
+
+Teddy now thought the time had come when he should settle the question
+of whether there were any fish in the stream, and after gaining
+Cummings' permission to make the attempt he and Neal brought out the
+lines and flies which had been saved from the wreck of the Sea Dream.
+
+"We shall need bait," he whispered. "If there were a million fish there
+they couldn't see a fly in the dark, and, besides, if this river runs
+underground entirely not one of them knows anything about insects."
+
+"A piece of roasted toh will be the very best we could have," and Neal
+soon brought out some of the toughest portions of the remnants left from
+the last meal.
+
+Cummings would not listen to their proposition that a fire be lighted,
+therefore it was necessary to work in the dark, and they experienced
+considerable difficulty in beginning the task.
+
+Then, while Jake sat near by deeply interested in the experiment, the
+boys moved their lines to and fro, forced to wade quite a distance into
+the water, and ten minutes passed before there was any sign that their
+efforts would be rewarded by success.
+
+"I've got a bite," Teddy whispered excitedly. "By the way he pulled it
+must have been a big fel---- Hello, he's taken hook and all!"
+
+"Tie on another quick while I try to catch him," and Neal ventured
+further into the water, throwing the line as far as possible toward the
+other side.
+
+The thought came into Jake's mind that, while no alligators had been
+seen when they first entered it was by no means certain one or more
+would not follow down the course of the stream, and he was on the point
+of warning Neal not to venture too far from the edge of the shore, when
+there was a mighty splash, a cry of fear and pain from the fisherman,
+and the engineer shouted regardless of the fact that the enemy might be
+close at hand:
+
+"Help! An alligator has got Neal!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+A DESPERATE STRUGGLE.
+
+
+There was no necessity for the outcry. The splashing of the water told
+Cummings what had happened even before Jake had time to shout, and he
+started forward at full speed, carrying with him the materials for
+torches.
+
+When Jake and Teddy were in a condition to understand anything, for the
+sudden attack had bewildered them to a certain extent, Neal was lying
+face downward upon the sand, and being slowly dragged backward.
+
+The alligator had evidently snapped at his leg, and, missing his aim,
+had caught the boy's trousers rather than the flesh. Instead of
+releasing his hold for a better grip, he was trying to drag Neal into
+deeper water, and once there the struggle would have been quickly ended.
+
+Neal had dug his hands into the sand, straining every muscle to prevent
+being pulled into the stream; but despite all efforts the monster was
+rapidly getting the best of him.
+
+Cummings lost no time after arriving on the scene of action. The boys'
+cries had guided him to the exact spot, and he waited only long enough
+to kindle a blaze before joining in the fight.
+
+"Teddy, go back to the entrance, get one of the guns, and be sure that
+no one comes through, for we are likely to make so much noise here that
+if any of the enemy are in the vicinity we shall be discovered. Jake,
+you are to hold the torch, and take good care that it burns brightly."
+
+Cummings was armed with nothing but his hunting knife and by this time
+the alligator had dragged fully half of Neal's body into the water.
+There seemed to be but little hope that the boy could be rescued before
+serious injury had been inflicted.
+
+Pulling off his coat and belt Cummings leaped boldly on the back of the
+saurian monster, burying the blade of his knife in the alligator's eye
+at the same time, and then ensued a most terrific struggle.
+
+Instead of releasing his hold on Neal the reptile held firm, and put
+forth every effort to sink in the deeper water to dislodge the more
+formidable antagonist who was striking beneath the surface with his
+weapon in the hope of hitting some vulnerable spot.
+
+Jake stood on the bank holding the torch high above his head to prevent
+it from being extinguished by the showers which were sent up by the
+lashing of the monster's tail, and powerless to aid in the fight for
+life.
+
+Slowly but surely Neal was being pulled from the shore. With only the
+sand to clutch he could retard, not check the saurian's movements, and
+work as he might, it seemed impossible for Cummings to strike a fatal
+blow.
+
+"Drop your torch and seize the boy by the arms," the latter shouted as
+he saw that the battle was going against him. "At this rate I shall soon
+be where it will be out of the question to prolong the struggle."
+
+Jake did as he was commanded, and in the darkness the remainder of the
+terrible fight was waged.
+
+The engineer pulled until to Neal it seemed as if his arms would be torn
+from their sockets, and the alligator retained his hold as he struggled
+to throw off Cummings.
+
+The noise of the combat sounded almost deafening to Teddy, who was doing
+his best to listen for any unusual disturbance among the foliage
+outside, and he felt confident that if the enemy was anywhere in the
+vicinity the secret of their hiding place would soon be discovered.
+
+The struggle lasted only five minutes; but Neal would have said an hour
+had passed since he was first seized, and then Cummings won the victory
+by slipping from the alligator's back regardless of the rapidly moving
+tail, and stabbing him under the fore leg.
+
+Even then it appeared as if the victory was to be purchased at a great
+cost, for, in order to avoid being killed by the monster's dying
+struggles, Cummings was forced to release his hold, and the current
+carried him rapidly toward the channel formed by the waters through the
+rock.
+
+"Light the torch!" he shouted, putting forth all his strength in order
+to breast the tide. "I'm in the middle of the stream, and likely to be
+carried through the wall."
+
+Jake had pulled Neal high up out of the water the instant the
+alligator's hold was released, and at this appeal he dropped him
+suddenly, groping around for the bundle of wood so hurriedly cast aside.
+
+It was several seconds before he could find it, and then much valuable
+time was lost in trying to ignite the fuel made damp by the spray which
+had been thrown up. It seemed to him that never had he been so clumsy,
+and the anxiety to move quickly only served to retard his efforts.
+
+Finally, after what to Teddy appeared to be a very long while, the fat
+wood was ignited, and then it could be seen that Cummings was in a most
+dangerous position. He was not more than six feet from the aperture
+through which the water raced with redoubled force because the opening
+was several inches lower than the surface, and swam as if nearly
+exhausted.
+
+Jake was the only one who could render any assistance just at this
+moment, and he proved to be equal to the occasion.
+
+Seizing one of the guns he waded into the water to his waist, and
+succeeded in extending the weapon sufficiently for Cummings to grasp the
+end of the barrel.
+
+"Hold on for grim death; I've got to drop the torch!" he shouted,
+suiting the action to the words, and Teddy could see no more because the
+light was suddenly extinguished.
+
+Now the sentinel forgot that the enemy might creep upon them and running
+forward he cried:
+
+"Don't give in, Jake; I'll help you."
+
+Before he could reach the stream the work was accomplished. Jake pulled
+Cummings on the bank by the side of Neal, and proceeded to relight the
+torch, a difficult matter since the matches in his pocket had been
+spoiled by the action of the water.
+
+In this last work Teddy was able to render some assistance, and the
+flame had but just sprung up from the wood when Cummings said hurriedly:
+
+"Extinguish that light. If we haven't advertised our whereabouts to the
+Indians already there is no reason for taking foolish risks. We'll
+attend to matters here, Teddy, and you get back to the entrance."
+
+This command was obeyed at once, and the sentinel heard only a faint
+sound from the direction of the stream until his companions rejoined
+him, none the worse for the battle except in the respect of being
+decidedly wet.
+
+"Have you heard anything suspicious?" Cummings asked anxiously.
+
+"Not the slightest noise. If there had been any Indians in the vicinity
+they would surely have made an attempt to enter when all hands was
+raising such an uproar."
+
+Cummings crept through the short tunnel and investigated in the
+immediate vicinity of the opening before he could believe they had been
+so fortunate, and when he returned Jake said:
+
+"I thought you wouldn't find anything. If those imps had had the
+slightest inkling of where we are it wouldn't have been necessary to
+wait so long as this before the fact was made known."
+
+"It was better to be sure. Poyor was so careful to caution us about a
+noise that I was afraid he knew some of them were lurking near by. It is
+all right, however, and we can congratulate ourselves on a fortunate
+escape from more than one danger."
+
+The weather was so warm that no one felt any serious effects from the
+involuntary bath. A portion of the wet clothing was taken off and hung
+on the guns set in the sand as stakes, to dry, and since their fears
+regarding the proximity of the Indians had been partially set at rest by
+Cummings' survey, there was a general disposition to talk of something
+foreign to the struggle through which they had just passed.
+
+"You have said very much about the poisoned arrows which the Chan Santa
+Cruz Indians use," Neal began, "and I would like to know how they manage
+to render them so deadly."
+
+"It is by no means a difficult matter, and as Poyor's people use very
+nearly the same method of increasing the death-dealing power of their
+weapons, I can describe the process exactly," Cummings replied, speaking
+in a whisper, regardless of the Indian's remark that "he who talks
+cannot listen." "You have heard me say many times that the nahuyaca is
+the most venomous of serpents, and instead of being content with a
+single bite, as is the case with snakes in general, he strikes many
+times with almost incredible rapidity. When the Indians wish to prepare
+the poison for their arrows or spears they first get the liver of a
+tapir, or some other animal as large, and then hunt for the species of
+serpent I have spoken of. Once found he is pinned to the ground with a
+forked stick in such a manner that he can use his head freely; but yet
+be unable to escape, and the liver, fastened to a long pole, is held
+where he can strike at it.
+
+"When the snake refuses longer to bite he is killed, and the liver
+placed where it will decompose without any of the moisture being lost.
+You can imagine what a mixture it is when thus prepared, and in it the
+weapons are dipped.
+
+"It is said that the venom retains its deadly properties for many weeks,
+and, in fact, I know of a native who came very near losing his life by
+being scratched with an old arrow that must have been poisoned nearly a
+year previous."
+
+"I should think they might make a mistake when shooting game, and use a
+doctored arrow rather than one of the ordinary kind," Teddy said.
+
+"That could only result from sheer carelessness. The point of a poisoned
+weapon is covered with a reddish brown substance which cannot be
+mistaken, and, for greater security, the feathers used for the tip are
+invariably green. A Central American Indian never takes a green shafted
+arrow, nor a spear on which is painted a band of the same color, when he
+goes out to procure food."
+
+"Then if we happen to meet these fellows who are hunting for us, we are
+likely to come out second best even though they have only bows with
+which to shoot," Jake suggested grimly, and, evading a direct answer,
+Cummings replied:
+
+"We will hope that we shan't get near enough to let any such thing as
+that trouble us."
+
+Then the conversation gradually ceased. Neal and Teddy, after learning
+that Cummings intended to remain on watch until Poyor returned, lay down
+together, where for at least the hundredth time they discussed the
+chances of reaching home within a reasonable number of days, and,
+hopeful though both tried to appear, neither could bring himself to set
+any definite day for the end of the dangerous journey which might never
+be finished.
+
+"There is so much certain," Neal said decidedly after a short pause,
+"once we get out of this section of the country we'll go to the nearest
+sea-port and wait there for a steamer or a vessel, without ever setting
+our feet outside the town. There'll be no more delays if we get clear of
+this scrape."
+
+"You can count me in on that, and now I'm going to sleep. It seems as if
+a week had passed since we started from the last cavern."
+
+Jake had already taken advantage of the opportunity to indulge in
+slumber, and soon Cummings was the only one on the alert; anxiety kept
+his eyes very wide open, for he believed Poyor should have returned some
+time before.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+A LONG HALT.
+
+
+When the morning dawned Poyor was still absent and Cummings' anxiety had
+become intense.
+
+It hardly seemed possible the Indian would go very far from the cave of
+his own free will, and that he had been captured by the enemy appeared
+more than probable.
+
+Neither Jake nor the boys awakened until after the sun had risen, and,
+as a matter of course, the first inquiry of each was concerning the man
+upon whom all depended so entirely.
+
+Before Cummings could give words to the fears which had haunted him
+during the night the entrance to the cave was darkened, and Teddy cried
+joyfully:
+
+"Here he is, and I hope we are to make another move pretty soon, for
+after last night's adventure this isn't the most pleasant place I ever
+saw in which to spend any length of time."
+
+It could easily be seen from the Indian's general appearance that he
+brought no bad news, and without waiting to be questioned he went
+toward the stream to quench his thirst.
+
+A sharp cry from both the boys caused him to halt very suddenly, and
+when Cummings told the story of the adventure with the alligator he
+said:
+
+"You should not have made such an attempt except when a fire was
+burning, and even then to wade into the water was wrong. I will get what
+can be used for both drinking and fishing."
+
+Again he left the cave, returning ten minutes later with what looked
+like a slender bamboo, save that there were no joints in it. Through the
+middle of the pole, running the entire length, was a small hole hardly
+larger than is to be found in a reed, and with this while standing five
+or six feet from the stream he drank at leisure, keeping his eyes fixed
+upon the surface of the water to guard against an attack.
+
+Having thus quenched his thirst he returned to where Cummings was on
+guard and told the story of his wanderings.
+
+He had followed straight along the line of moisture, finding cave after
+cave but none of them as well adapted to their purpose as was this one,
+and had seen none of the enemy until five or six miles had been
+traversed, when a strong cordon of sentinels was discovered.
+
+The men were stationed not more than twenty feet apart, and, as nearly
+as he could judge, had been ordered to remain and prevent the fugitives
+from leaving the country by way of the coast. From what he already knew
+concerning the people, he understood the number of men on duty at this
+particular point had been largely increased, therefore the natural
+inference was that there were two distinct bodies engaged in trying to
+capture the white men. One whose duty it was to guard the boarder so
+thoroughly that it would be impossible to escape, while the other
+scoured the forest and swamp.
+
+"We must stay here several days," he said in conclusion. "After a time
+the men will grow careless, and then we may be able to make our way
+through the lines; but now it is impossible."
+
+Until this moment Neal and Teddy had hoped there might yet be a chance
+for them to reach Progresso in time to take passage on the steamer as
+first agreed upon; but now they were in despair. Poyor spoke so
+positively that there could be no doubt the journey to the coast would
+be a long one, in case they ever succeeded in making it, and the
+thoughts of the loved ones at home who were probably mourning them as
+dead caused them to be more gloomy than on the night of the flight, when
+it did not seem possible any of the party would escape alive.
+
+Cummings, who had no care as to when he reached the coast, and Jake, to
+whom time was no particular object, received the news calmly. A week
+more or less made but little difference to them, and after a short pause
+Cummings said:
+
+"If you will stay on guard, Jake, I'll find out if it is possible to
+catch any fish. The food supply is an important matter which should be
+settled at once, for we must not depend upon what can be gotten in the
+forest, since no one can say how soon we may be besieged."
+
+Poyor lay down to sleep as if perfectly indifferent to the experiment,
+and the boys followed Cummings. To watch him fish was better than
+remaining quiet thinking over their troubles.
+
+The reflection of the sun from the outside had so far dispelled the
+gloom that it was possible to distinguish surrounding objects with
+reasonable distinctness, and Cummings stood by the bank of the stream as
+he tied one end of Teddy's line to the pole Poyor had used for drinking
+purposes, while, with the last remaining fragments of roasted toh, began
+the work.
+
+In the most perfect silence the boys watched him for ten minutes, and
+Teddy said:
+
+"I guess you'll have to give it up as a bad job. There's nothing but
+alligators in the stream, and what they most want is another chance to
+get hold of Neal's trousers."
+
+"It was lucky for me that they didn't get hold of my ankle as well. I
+don't understand how I escaped so easily, for----"
+
+"Here's the first one," Cummings said triumphantly, as he swung on shore
+a fish weighing about three pounds. "If we find many such there won't be
+any danger of suffering from hunger."
+
+The boys seized the flapping evidence of Cummings' skill as an angler,
+and hurried to the entrance in order to examine it more closely.
+
+In shape it was similar to a brook trout; but instead of being spotted
+had black scales as large as one's thumb nail, and not until it had been
+scrutinized carefully was anything seen to betoken the presence of
+organs of sight. Then Jake pointed out two slight depressions near the
+end of the upper jaw, which were protected and nearly covered by a
+cartilaginous substance extending entirely across the head something
+after the fashion of a hood.
+
+"I don't wonder he had to try a long while before catching this fellow,"
+Teddy said with a laugh. "A fish that has such poor apologies for eyes
+can't be expected to see bait very quickly."
+
+"It isn't likely they can see anything, and if these small specks are
+eyes they've probably only been put on as ornaments."
+
+At this point Jake, regardless of the fact that he should have been
+listening intently at the aperture, began what was evidently about to be
+a long dissertation on the subject of a fish being able to smell while
+in the water, and to prevent him from neglecting his duties as sentinel,
+the boys went back to the stream, arriving there just as Cummings landed
+a second prize.
+
+At the end of an hour four fish, aggregating in weight not less than ten
+pounds, were on the bank, and it was decided that no more should be
+caught.
+
+"We've got food enough to last us during twenty-four hours," Cummings
+said, "and it would be a waste of time to fish any longer."
+
+"When are we to cook them?" Teddy asked.
+
+"That is a job which must be left for Poyor. He can do it better than
+either of us, and, since there are none of the enemy in the immediate
+vicinity, I fancy we may count on having these for the next meal."
+
+Then Cummings took his turn at sleeping, after impressing on the minds
+of the boys and Jake that a strict watch should be kept by all
+regardless of the news brought by the Indian, and during the two hours
+which followed before there was any change in the condition of affairs,
+little else was done save to discuss the situation.
+
+They talked of the loved ones at home; of the probable whereabouts of
+those who had left the burning yacht in their company, and of the
+chances that they would soon reach the coast, until Jake changed the
+subject by saying abruptly:
+
+"We'll soon be blind if the Indian don't find a hidin' place where the
+sunlight penetrates once in awhile. I begin to feel a good deal like a
+bat already, an' have a big mind to slip out for a walk."
+
+"Don't so much as think of it," Teddy cried in alarm. "It isn't certain
+that the enemy are not close by, and the risk is too great."
+
+"I can't see it in that light," Jake replied in his old obstinate
+manner. "Perhaps Poyor has had more experience in these woods than I
+have; but I'll bet considerable that I can get around as well as he
+does."
+
+"Do you remember what happened the last time you believed Cummings and
+Poyor were mistaken or ignorant?" Neal asked meaningly.
+
+"What has that got to do with my going where I can use my eyes a bit?"
+
+"Very much, considering the fact that Cummings thinks it is dangerous
+even for him to venture out. You are safe so long as the Indians do not
+get a glimpse of you, and it would be endangering the lives of all hands
+if you tried such a foolish experiment that can be of no especial
+benefit in case it is made successfully."
+
+Jake did not reply; but from his manner Neal believed he intended to
+leave the cave at the first favorable opportunity, and resolved to keep
+a close watch upon him.
+
+Nothing more was said on the subject because at this moment Poyor arose,
+and going to the stream for a drink of water, saw the fish on the bank.
+
+"Hungry?" he asked, coming toward the entrance.
+
+"I wouldn't object to something warm," Teddy replied with a laugh; "but
+I suppose it isn't safe to build a fire till after dark."
+
+"We can have one now," the Indian said, as he began to crawl through the
+passage.
+
+"There," Jake said triumphantly, as Poyor disappeared, "you can see how
+much danger there would be in our taking a stroll. Yesterday he wouldn't
+let a fellow whisper, and now we're to cook as if such a tribe as the
+Chan Santa Cruz had never existed."
+
+"That doesn't make the slightest difference so far as we are concerned.
+He could go in safety where you'd be certain to get into trouble."
+
+Again the engineer was silenced but not convinced and Neal's fears that
+some dangerously foolish move might be made by him, were increased.
+
+When Poyor returned he brought with him a small quantity of wood, more
+mud, and a bundle of green leaves.
+
+At the further end of the cave he built a fire; encased the fish as he
+previously had the "chickens," piled the embers over them, and then, in
+the canteen brought by Cummings, he steeped the leaves.
+
+Breakfast or dinner, whichever it might be called was ready in half an
+hour, and when Poyor set the repast before them, where all could be on
+the alert while eating, Teddy exclaimed:
+
+"Those leaves must have been from a tea plant; it seems quite like being
+on the yacht again to smell that."
+
+"You'll be disappointed when you taste of the beverage," Cummings, who
+had just been awakened by the Indian, said, as he approached his
+companions. "He has made an infusion of pimientillo leaves, a drink of
+which the natives of Yucatan are very fond."
+
+Teddy was pleased rather than otherwise with the flavor, which was as of
+tea mixed with cloves, and drank so much that Poyor was forced to brew
+another canteen full in order to satisfy his own desires.
+
+The fish were pronounced delicious, and although Cummings thought he had
+caught considerably more than could be consumed in one meal, there was
+very little left when the hunger of all had been appeased.
+
+It was now nearly noon, when every native of the country believes a
+siesta is necessary, however important business he may have on hand, and
+Poyor stretched himself once more out on the sand, Cummings advising the
+boys and Jake to do the same thing.
+
+"I slept so long that I couldn't close my eyes now if I tried, so you
+had better take advantage of the opportunity."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+JAKE'S VENTURE.
+
+
+The boys followed Cummings' advice; but owing to the fact that they had
+taken no exercise the slumber was neither prolonged nor refreshing.
+
+When they awakened Poyor and Jake were yet asleep, and they went softly
+to where Cummings was keeping most vigilant watch.
+
+"Had enough of it?" he asked with a smile.
+
+"Yes: we are not feeling so comfortable in mind that we can sleep at
+will, and just now a little goes a great way," Neal replied.
+
+"Don't make the mistake of dwelling upon your troubles. By putting them
+from your mind you are in better condition to meet what may come, and
+besides, fretting never did mend matters."
+
+"I'll admit that the advice is good; but it is not every one who can
+follow it."
+
+"Why not? Have you tried by looking for something else with which to
+occupy your attention?"
+
+"Shut up here as we are it would be pretty hard work to think of
+anything except our own situation."
+
+"I'm not so certain of that. Suppose we try by speaking of the country
+on whose shores you were cast by the waves?"
+
+"It was formerly an independent republic; but now forms one of the
+Mexican states," Teddy replied promptly.
+
+"I'll admit that to be true; but it is a small fund of information for a
+schoolboy to have regarding a country which was probably the most
+powerful on the hemisphere hundreds of years before Columbus crossed the
+ocean. Here have been found the ruins of forty-four large cities; the
+remains of enormous artificial lakes, paved roads, and, in fact, all the
+evidences of a high state of civilization which existed before Europe
+could boast of the slightest form of government."
+
+"You may be certain that I shall study about it with more interest in
+case we are so fortunate as to be able to go to school again," Teddy
+replied. "Tell us about the people who lived here when it was so great."
+
+"I wish I could," Cummings said with a sigh. "If it had been possible
+for us to have taken from the Silver City any records, or sculptured
+figures, or plates of a historical nature, I might have succeeded in
+solving that which the student can speak of only as a mystery. Before
+the Conquest it was known as Maya--that is to say, the territory now
+called Yucatan, and the Chan Santa Cruz yet speak the Maya language. It
+is only certain that for many centuries there was here an important
+feudal monarchy, which doubtless arose after the Toltec overthrow of the
+very ancient kingdom of Xibalba."
+
+"Cortez was the first white man to come into this country," Neal said
+half questioningly.
+
+"Not by any manner of means. In the year 1502 Ferdinand Columbus, driven
+by adverse currents out of his southerly course, sighted a group of
+islands off Honduras, and captured a huge canoe, which is described as
+having been as wide as a galley and eighty feet long, formed of the
+trunk of a single tree. In the middle was an awning of palm leaves, not
+unlike those of Venetian gondolas, under which were the women, children
+and goods. The canoe was propelled by twenty-five Indians who wore
+cotton coverlets and tunics without sleeves, dyed various colors and
+curiously worked. The women wrapped themselves in large mantles of
+similar material.
+
+"The men wore long swords, with channels each side of the blade, edged
+with sharp flints that cut the body as well as steel. They had copper
+hatchets for chopping wood, belts of the same material, and crucibles
+in which to melt it. For provisions they carried roots and grain, a sort
+of wine made from maize, and great quantities of almonds. This is a
+fragment of the history of Yucatan, simply a suggestion of what can be
+found by study, and some day when you have nothing to do, ask Poyor to
+tell you of his people's traditions."
+
+Cummings had succeeded in interesting the boys despite Neal's assertion
+that it would be impossible to think of anything but their own
+condition, and Teddy asked, hoping to hear more about the country:
+
+"How large is Yucatan?"
+
+"I question if even the officials know. It is set down as containing
+76,560 square kilometres, with 302,315 inhabitants; but the last figures
+can be only guess-work, since regarding the unconquerable tribes of the
+interior, such as we are now trying to escape from, all is conjecture."
+
+This concluded the conversation so far as Cummings was concerned, for
+Poyor had awakened and joined the party, and there was very much to be
+discussed with him relative to what move should be made, when a
+sufficient time had elapsed.
+
+In order that the boys might understand all which was said, the two men
+spoke only in English, and when the consultation was brought to a close
+the former had a very clear idea of the condition of affairs.
+
+"It is safe to venture out in search of food," Poyor said, when Cummings
+intimated by his silence that there was no further topic which he wished
+to discuss, "and I will go for a short time."
+
+"Why not take one of the boys with you?" the leader of the expedition
+asked. "It is dull work for them here, and a little exercise will be
+beneficial."
+
+"Not yet," the Indian replied quickly. "Too broad a trail would surely
+attract the attention of the enemy, and we must not run such a risk."
+
+"Very well, we will do a little fishing in order to have something
+hearty for supper in case you are not successful."
+
+Then the Indian went cautiously out through the narrow passage, and he
+had but just disappeared when Jake awakened.
+
+"What's goin' on?" he asked with a yawn. "Has Poyor left us again?"
+
+"He thought it might be possible to get some game near by, and proposes
+to make the attempt," Cummings replied carelessly. "Now that you are
+awake stand watch awhile, for the boys and I are going to catch a few
+more fish."
+
+Jake seated himself by the entrance, and Cummings led the way to the
+stream, never fancying for a single moment that the sentinel might
+desert his post.
+
+The second effort to draw food from the water was more successful than
+the first. Cummings had hardly dropped the line before the bait was
+seized, and he landed a fairly good sized fish, after which he proposed
+that Teddy should try his hand at the work.
+
+"I don't want to monopolize all the fun," he said laughingly, "therefore
+you boys had better take turns until we get enough for supper. To-night
+we'll ask Poyor to cut another pole, and then both can enjoy the sport
+at the same time."
+
+The fish were smaller than those previously taken and half an hour
+elapsed before there were enough on the shore to make up what Cummings
+believed was sufficient for a hearty meal.
+
+Then the three walked slowly toward the entrance to relieve Jake; but,
+to the surprise of all, he was not there.
+
+"It is my fault," Neal cried while Cummings was looking around in the
+belief that the sentinel had gone to another portion of the cave and
+would soon be back. "I knew from what was said this forenoon that he had
+an idea of venturing out, and made up my mind to watch him closely; but
+the history lesson and the fishing caused me to forget it entirely."
+
+"Do you mean that he has had an idea of leaving us?" Cummings asked in
+astonishment.
+
+"No; he simply proposed to take a walk. He thinks it is as safe for him
+as for Poyor."
+
+"But I, who surely understand the woods better than he, would not dare
+to attempt it."
+
+"You know what he has done."
+
+"If he does not lose his own life ours may be sacrificed," Cummings said
+passionately. "The Indian can go through the undergrowth without leaving
+any sign of his passage: but for Jake to do so is simply to set up a
+guide-board by which the enemy can find us."
+
+"I should have told you at once," Neal said in self reproach.
+
+"You are not to be blamed in the slightest; but if I could get my hands
+on him at this moment he would regret most sincerely ever having such a
+thought in his head."
+
+"What will be the result?" Teddy asked in distress.
+
+"If he succeeds in finding his way back, which I doubt very much, we
+will be forced to make a change regardless of the consequences, and if
+he is captured it becomes a case of our putting the greatest possible
+distance between this cave and ourselves," Cummings replied bitterly.
+
+"I might go out and try to find him," Neal suggested, and his companion
+put an end to any such idea by saying impatiently:
+
+"Your efforts to aid him would only result in making our own position
+just so much the worse. We must wait until Poyor comes back, and learn
+what he has to say in regard to the affair."
+
+"But it seems cruel to let him run into danger without saying a word."
+
+"It is not half as bad as it is for him to jeopardize all our lives. He
+did the same thing once before, and the consequence was that instead of
+making back tracks to my shanty, as could easily have been done, we are
+forced to skulk around two or three weeks with no certainty of escaping
+even at the end of that time."
+
+Both Neal and Teddy understood that it would be useless to say anything
+more in Jake's favor, and as a matter of fact, they felt quite as bitter
+toward him as did Cummings, for it was not difficult to see what might
+be the result of his foolish excursion.
+
+In silence the little party waited until the Indian returned bringing
+the carcass of a tapir, a small quantity of alligator pears, and two
+so-called cabbages cut from palm trees.
+
+"It is not difficult to get all the food that may be needed provided we
+can keep the fact of our being here a secret," he said in a tone which
+showed how greatly he was pleased by his success.
+
+"And that we shall not be able to do many hours longer except by some
+piece of rare good luck," Cummings said bitterly. "Jake went out a long
+while ago, and is now, I presume, roaming around in order to give the
+enemy an opportunity of looking at him."
+
+"Went out?" the Indian repeated in surprise. "Do you mean that he has
+left the cave?"
+
+"That is exactly the size of it."
+
+"Why did he do such a foolish thing?"
+
+"Because he was too much of a baby or an idiot to stay in hiding until
+the danger had passed. He claimed that exercise was necessary."
+
+"He will get all he needs," Poyor said half to himself, as he allowed
+the supply of provisions to fall unheeded from his hands. "We also must
+leave this place."
+
+"Do you mean that we should go at once?" Cummings asked as if he had
+been expecting such a remark.
+
+"When the night has come we will start, and with but little hope of
+breaking through the line of sentinels."
+
+"Are we not to wait for Jake?" Neal interrupted.
+
+"If he does not return before we are ready there will be little chance
+of ever seeing him again," was the grim reply as Poyor paced to and fro,
+evidently so disturbed that it was impossible for him to remain in one
+position.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+A HURRIED DEPARTURE.
+
+
+Neal and Teddy were in a state of the most painful suspense from the
+moment Poyor returned until the time for their departure arrived.
+
+The one hope was that Jake would succeed in finding his way back, for
+the thought that he might be captured was terrible, and they sat near
+the entrance listening intently to every sound.
+
+"You're bound to be disappointed if you count on hearing him," Cummings
+said bitterly.
+
+"But there is a chance that the Indians are some distance from here,"
+Teddy replied. "Poyor didn't find any until he reached the line of
+sentinels."
+
+"I am not saying that he is necessarily captured yet; but it would be
+little short of a miracle if he found his way back after going any
+distance from this cave. I wouldn't dare to make the attempt."
+
+"But are we to go away without trying to find the poor fellow?" Neal
+asked in a tone of distress.
+
+"It would be useless to search, and we are now in too much danger to
+waste any time," Cummings said sternly. "Our one chance of escape was
+to give the enemy the idea that we had succeeded in getting out of the
+country, and he has destroyed it. Now this portion of the forest will be
+filled with Indians, and in twenty-four hours from the moment he or his
+trail is seen, we shall be discovered. We cannot aid him, and I doubt
+whether I would be willing to do so if it was possible, for a man of
+average common sense who will act as he has done deserves punishment."
+
+The boys made no reply. Each instant their companion's anger against
+Jake increased, and it was not well to rouse him by further
+conversation.
+
+Near the bank of the stream Poyor had built a fire and was cooking a
+portion of the tapir and the fish, for in the hurried flight which was
+soon to be begun there might not be an opportunity to prepare food.
+
+The Indian had unpacked the bundles in order to discard everything not
+absolutely necessary, and was tying each compactly when the boys
+approached.
+
+"Why are you making only three packages?" Neal asked. "Teddy and I want
+to do our full share of the work, and it isn't right for you and
+Cummings to lug everything."
+
+"You will be forced to do more than an equal share because that which
+Jake carried must now be divided between us," Poyor replied grimly. "The
+fourth load is to be made up of the provisions."
+
+"Are you going straight for the coast, and try to force your way through
+the line of sentinels?"
+
+"That cannot be done. We must now ascend the mountain range on the north
+of the forest."
+
+"But by so doing the journey will be made much longer, won't it?"
+
+"Very much."
+
+"Then why not try to fight through?"
+
+"Because it is impossible. Not one of us would live to see the ocean."
+
+There was not much comfort to be derived from such a conversation, and
+again the boys went to the entrance where Cummings was examining
+carefully all the weapons.
+
+"You must carry plenty of cartridges where they can be gotten at
+quickly," he said, as they came up. "It is impossible to say what may
+happen, and no precaution should be neglected. The guns are in good
+order, and with them we may succeed in holding the enemy at such a
+distance that their arrows cannot be used."
+
+"We have filled our pockets," Neal replied, and throwing himself upon
+the ground, he watched Cummings and Poyor at their work.
+
+Ten minutes later the Indian came to the entrance and said as he began
+to crawl through the narrow passage:
+
+"I will make one effort to find him who has caused us so much trouble."
+
+"Don't spend any time on such a fool," Cummings cried fiercely. "He knew
+the danger, and if he chooses to run into it, jeopardizing our lives at
+the same moment, nothing too bad can happen to him."
+
+"He may be near at hand. I will make a search," Poyor replied as he rose
+to his feet on the outside, and Neal whispered to Teddy:
+
+"If Jake can be found matters won't seem quite so hard, for it will be
+terrible to think of him wandering around until captured, and we running
+away from him."
+
+Teddy nodded his head; but did not dare trust himself to speak. He had
+been thinking of home until the tears were so very near his eyelids that
+he feared they would overflow.
+
+During the next half hour not a word was spoken by either of the little
+party, and then Poyor returned alone.
+
+There was no necessity of questioning him, and Neal covered his face
+with his hands to hide the distress he knew must be pictured there, for
+there was no longer any hope the engineer would accompany them on their
+rapid and most dangerous flight. By this time the meat was cooked, and
+the Indian brought a generous supply to the entrance; but no one had any
+particular desire for food.
+
+"You must take some," Cummings said, when Neal and Teddy turned away.
+"We may not have an opportunity to eat again for many hours, and it is
+necessary to be prepared for a long tramp."
+
+The boys managed to swallow a small quantity after considerable effort,
+when the final preparations were made, and by the time they were
+completed the sun had set.
+
+Night had not fully settled down when Poyor gave the signal for the
+start, and one by one the fugitives crept from the cave, pushing their
+bundles before them, since the passage was not sufficiently large to
+admit of their walking upright.
+
+"Strap the pack on firmly," Cummings said in a whisper, when they were
+in the open air. "We may be obliged to run, in which case there must be
+no chance of losing our baggage. You boys follow Poyor, and I will bring
+up the rear."
+
+The Indian was waiting for them to get into proper marching order, and
+instantly this had been done he started at a rapid pace.
+
+As they left the cave it seemed to Neal and Teddy that Jake had really
+been abandoned, and, regardless of what he had done, they felt that it
+was cruel to hurry away so soon.
+
+"It could have done no harm to wait until morning," Neal said in a
+whisper, when they halted a short distance from the starting point while
+Poyor went ahead to reconnoiter.
+
+"And by that time we might have found ourselves besieged. It would have
+been a delay of twenty-four hours, for all our traveling must be done in
+the night," Cummings replied. "We have taken the only course he left
+open to us, and we won't discuss the matter any more."
+
+The march was resumed after a short delay, and not until two hours had
+passed did the Indian so much as slacken his pace.
+
+They had arrived where the forest is less dense; but the undergrowth
+more tangled, and Poyor signified by gestures that the boys would be
+allowed a short time of rest.
+
+Teddy was about to ask if he could take off the pack, for the cords were
+cutting into his flesh in a painful manner; but the Indian checked him
+with a quick motion of the hand.
+
+The party were now near where it was supposed a line of sentinels was
+stationed, and, holding his finger to his lips, Cummings gave them to
+understand that the utmost silence must be preserved.
+
+Again Poyor went forward alone, and the tired boys sat with their backs
+against a tree thinking only of Jake and his possible fate.
+
+The silence was so profound as to be almost alarming. Here and there
+amid the foliage could be seen countless fire-flies; but not even the
+rustling of the leaves broke the stillness, and it did not require any
+very great stretch of the imagination to fancy that the enemy were
+lurking close at hand awaiting an opportunity to spring upon them.
+
+Once a rat-like tuza ran past within a few inches of Teddy's feet, and
+as the boy leaped up in affright, fancying the vengeful Indians had
+discovered him, it was with difficulty he repressed a cry of alarm.
+
+With so many horrible things to think of it was a decided relief when
+Poyor came gliding noiselessly back to announce that the journey could
+be continued, and once more the little party picked their way over
+fallen and decaying timber, or through thickets where thorns tore both
+clothing and flesh.
+
+After a time they reached ascending ground, showing that they were on
+the foot hills of the range, and the advance became more laborious,
+until, shortly before sunrise, Neal declared that he could go no
+farther.
+
+"We must stop," he whispered to Poyor. "I have held out as long as
+possible, and could not keep on half a mile more if the enemy were in
+close pursuit."
+
+The Indian nodded his head to signify that the halt should be made, and
+a few moments later he turned aside into a small ravine or cut on the
+side of the hill.
+
+Here he threw down his burden, and the boys followed the example, paying
+no attention to the advantages or disadvantages of the spot as a refuge
+during the day which was so near at hand.
+
+Lying at full length on the ground, heeding not that deadly reptiles
+might be close at hand, Neal and Teddy fell asleep almost immediately,
+and Poyor proposed that Cummings should also seek repose.
+
+"I will watch," he said, "and when the sun rises we can decide whether
+it is safe to stay here."
+
+Although the white man was weary he would not admit that the Indian
+could bear more fatigue, and insisted on keeping awake until it was
+learned if they should be warranted in remaining.
+
+In perfect silence the two stood guard over the sleeping boys, and when
+the morning came the important question was soon settled.
+
+The place of refuge to which chance had brought them was admirable both
+for purposes of defense and for hiding. It was a deep, narrow cut
+extending thirty feet into what appeared to be a mass of sandstone, and
+at the entrance was not more than ten feet wide, while over the top the
+foliage grew so luxuriantly as to completely conceal them from the view
+of any one who might be above.
+
+In front the trees were small, and it was possible to see forty or fifty
+yards down the side of the hill, therefore the enemy could not approach
+unobserved save from the top.
+
+"It is good," Poyor said approvingly. "We can remain here until night."
+
+"But why have we not met the sentinels which you believe to be so
+numerous?"
+
+"They are further on. At the end of the next march we shall be in their
+midst."
+
+"And then comes the most difficult portion of our journey. But we won't
+search for trouble," Cummings added after a short pause. "Let us have
+breakfast, and then one shall stand guard while the others sleep."
+
+Poyor unpacked the provisions, awakened Neal and Teddy, and with a view
+before them which, under other circumstances, would have called forth
+expressions of the most lively admiration, the little party made a
+hearty meal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+JAKE.
+
+
+It was only natural that on awakening Neal and Teddy should first think
+of the engineer and his possible fate; but the other two members of the
+party were so incensed against him that neither cared to speak on the
+subject.
+
+They asked concerning their location, and were told all that Cummings
+and Poyor knew, and when the very satisfactory meal was brought to a
+close the former said as if inviting a discussion:
+
+"We have sufficient food to last us three days if there is no game
+picked up on the way; but our supply of water threatens to run short
+very soon unless we can manage to refill the canteens. Are we likely to
+find a stream among these hills, Poyor?"
+
+"When we descend into the valley there will be no lack of plenty to
+drink; but on beginning the ascent of the mountains we must be careful
+not to use too much."
+
+"How long shall we probably be on the range providing every thing works
+smoothly?"
+
+"Three days--perhaps four."
+
+"But we can only carry water enough for two days at the best."
+
+"Then each one must take but half as much as he needs."
+
+"Of course that would settle the matter; but it is going to be pretty
+tough to travel in heat without all we want to drink."
+
+"Better that than to fall into the hands of the Chan Santa Cruz," Poyor
+replied gravely.
+
+"I am willing to admit it; but at the same time I believe we can hit
+upon some plan of carrying all that may be needed."
+
+"We may find the water pitchers in the forest, and by means of them
+replenish the supply."
+
+"That is figuring upon a possibility, and we are by no means certain of
+getting what we want."
+
+"There is plenty of time to think the matter over, for, unless we are
+discovered, it will be necessary to stay here until night. Will you
+sleep now?"
+
+"You need rest more than I," Cummings replied. "Lie down while I stand
+guard."
+
+The Indian did not hesitate; it made very little difference who remained
+on watch providing the utmost vigilance was maintained, and he
+stretched himself on the ground at the farther end of the ravine where
+he could be sheltered from the rays of the sun.
+
+The boys seated themselves by Cummings' side where the best view of the
+surrounding country could be had; but the latter was in no mood for
+further conversation, and the three remained silent for an hour or more,
+when Teddy asked:
+
+"How long before you intend to call Poyor?"
+
+"There is plenty of time," Cummings replied carelessly. "We have all day
+before us, and when I am tired he shall take his turn."
+
+"Why can't we do something? If you lie down now it will be gaining just
+so much more sleep, and surely both of us can keep watch as well as
+either you or he."
+
+"That is a good idea, and I'll take advantage of the offer. Call me if
+you see the slightest thing suspicious, or hear any sound not made by
+the birds. I don't fancy we shall be troubled; but at the same time no
+one knows what may happen."
+
+"We'll take good care; you shall be told if anything larger than a rat
+comes in view," Teddy replied, "so don't lose time that might be spent
+in sleep."
+
+Cummings followed this advice at once, and in a few moments his heavy
+breathing told that he had crossed over into slumberland.
+
+During the next hour nothing was seen or heard by the sentinels, who sat
+just within the shadow cast by the rock gazing intently down the hill,
+and then Teddy whispered excitedly as he pointed to a clump of bushes
+near where the trees were thickest:
+
+"Look in that direction. Can't you see the foliage is moving to and fro
+more than should be the case on a calm day like this?"
+
+Neal followed with his eyes Teddy's finger, and after a close scrutiny
+said:
+
+"I see what you mean: but there is probably some animal among the
+bushes. At all events we shan't be a great while finding out, and it
+isn't well to call Cummings until we are positive something is wrong."
+
+During five minutes the boys watched intently, and then there could be
+no question but that the leader should be awakened. They had seen a man,
+or at least a portion of one, as the foliage was parted gently to admit
+of his looking out, and Neal said as he raised his gun:
+
+"Call Cummings. I won't fire until he gives the word unless that fellow
+comes too near."
+
+Believing that they were about to be attacked, Teddy shook the leader of
+the party vigorously as he whispered:
+
+"They've found out where we are, and one is just getting ready to make a
+rush."
+
+This information was well calculated to arouse Poyor as well as the
+white man, and they ran with all speed toward the entrance to the ravine
+where Neal was making ready to shoot.
+
+"He has shown himself twice since Teddy went to call you," the boy said,
+"and I know exactly where to fire if you believe it ought to be done."
+
+"Do you think he knows we are here?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied:
+
+"He has been looking out from among the bushes as if suspicious that
+there was something wrong in this quarter; but I don't fancy he has seen
+us."
+
+"Then do not fire. It is of the greatest importance that we should
+remain concealed, and to discharge a weapon now would only be to bring
+down a crowd upon us. Get back to the farther end of the ravine while
+Poyor and I find out what is going on."
+
+The boys did as they were bidden, taking their station where it was
+possible to see all the men were doing, and after ten minutes both were
+surprised by hearing Cummings say in a tone of relief:
+
+"It is only that idiot, and he evidently mistakes us for enemies. The
+best thing we can do is to let him stay where he is, for then he can't
+get us into another scrape."
+
+"It's Jake!" Teddy cried. "I thought that arm didn't look like an
+Indian's!"
+
+"It will be worse than wicked if Cummings don't let him know who we are.
+Of course he's hunting for us, and we _must_ call to him."
+
+As Neal spoke he stepped forward, and was about to cry out when Cummings
+prevented him.
+
+"Let the fool alone," the latter said. "If he joins us we shall never be
+able to pass the sentinels."
+
+"You can't mean to let him wander off by himself."
+
+"Better that than give him another chance to bring the enemy down upon
+us."
+
+"But I won't allow it," Neal cried angrily. "It is true he has been
+worse than foolish twice----"
+
+"And the third time he'll succeed in bringing all hands up with a sharp
+turn. We are where very little is needed to put us in the power of the
+enemy, and we cannot afford to take such chances as he appears to
+delight in."
+
+"Then Teddy and I will leave you, and run all the risk with him, which
+is nothing more than fair, considering the fact that he is one of our
+party."
+
+From the look on Cummings' face it was evident he intended to make an
+angry reply; but before he could speak Poyor said:
+
+"The boys are right. It is not good to desert a friend, no matter what
+he has done."
+
+"Very well," Cummings said impatiently. "Call him in, and during the
+remainder of this journey, if we live to finish it, I will see that he
+does not have a chance to work any more mischief."
+
+Neal did not delay. Stepping out from the ravine he shouted:
+
+"Jake! Jake, come in here!"
+
+Although the engineer was so far away the cry of mingled surprise and
+joy which burst from his lips could be heard distinctly, and in the
+shortest possible space of time he was in the ravine shaking the boys'
+hands vigorously.
+
+"What are you up to here?" he asked. "Looking for me?"
+
+"Indeed we were doing nothing of the kind," Cummings said angrily.
+"After you so kindly did all you could to tell the Indians where we had
+located it was necessary to make a quick move, and if I had had my way
+you would never have known how near we were."
+
+"I don't suppose it will do any good to say that I am sorry?" Jake
+suggested meekly.
+
+"Not a bit, for this is the second time you have done all the mischief
+possible. By this last performance it has been necessary to take a
+course nearly three times as long as the one we intended to travel, and
+no one can say what you won't do before we are out of the scrape."
+
+"I pledge my word to obey orders. The experience I have had during the
+past twenty-four hours has taught me that I can't afford to take any
+more chances while we are in this heathenish country."
+
+"It is a grave question whether we shall be able to get clear, and now
+that you have come we must make another change, running all the risks of
+traveling in the daytime, for the enemy can follow up on your trail as
+readily as if you had set sign-boards all the way."
+
+Jake understood that it would do no good to make any reply while
+Cummings was in such a rage, and he very wisely retreated to the further
+end of the ravine where he whispered to Teddy:
+
+"Can't you give me a bite to eat? I'm just about starved."
+
+"Haven't you had anything since leaving the cave?"
+
+"Not a mouthful, and only one drink of water."
+
+"Where have you been?"
+
+"Walkin' all the time. When I went away it was only with the intention
+of travelin' a short distance. It didn't seem as if I had gone a
+quarter of a mile before I turned to go back, an' I've been tryin' to
+get there ever since."
+
+"Didn't you sleep any last night?"
+
+"Not a wink. I wanted to; but some kind of a big animal came prowlin'
+around the tree I'd chosen as my sleepin' apartment, and after that I
+couldn't so much as shut my eyes without takin' the chances of fallin'
+off the branch."
+
+"Did you meet any one?"
+
+"No."
+
+"But how came you over here so far?"
+
+"It seems as if I'd had time to go across the whole country since I saw
+you last. Say, give me some water and a mouthful of anything that's
+eatable, an' then I'll get a little sleep before tacklin' Cummings
+again. I suppose its a case of goin' way down on my marrow bones before
+he'll forget what I've done."
+
+"I fancy you are right in that respect," Teddy said gravely, as he
+overhauled the stores to procure the food, "and he can't be blamed, for
+you have put us in a very bad position without even the poor excuse of
+having tried to benefit the party."
+
+"From this out I won't so much as yip," Jake replied earnestly, as he
+made a vigorous attack on the roast tapir. "Getting lost in such a
+forest as this is enough to make a fellow's hair turn white."
+
+"If it will prevent you from playing the fool any more I shall be
+satisfied," Cummings, who had come up unperceived, said emphatically.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+ON THE RANGE.
+
+
+Although it was nearly noon, the time when the natives of Yucatan
+believe a siesta is absolutely necessary, Cummings insisted that the
+flight should be continued without further delay.
+
+"It would not be surprising if the Chan Santa Cruz sentinels had seen
+that idiotic Jake, and followed him in order to learn where we were
+hiding," he said when Neal asked why they had left the ravine during the
+hottest portion of the day. "If the Indians should besiege us here, it
+would only be a few hours before surrender must be made, because of lack
+of water, therefore we can render our position no worse, and may succeed
+in bettering it by going now."
+
+Poyor evidently looked at the matter in the same light, for he made no
+protest; but began at once to prepare for the tramp.
+
+Jake, after eating a hearty meal, had stretched out at the further end
+of the hiding place, and was just giving himself up to the luxury of
+slumber when Teddy aroused him by saying:
+
+"Come, what are you lying here for? We are ready to start, and there's a
+good deal of satisfaction in knowing that this time you'll have to carry
+your share of the load."
+
+"But I've got to have a nap first. Just think how long it's been since
+I've had a chance to close my eyes."
+
+"You'll have to wait awhile. Both Cummings and Poyor believe it is
+absolutely necessary for us to make a quick move, and if you're not
+ready they will go away alone."
+
+Jake began to protest; but Teddy cut him short by saying:
+
+"It won't do any good to kick. They are angry because we were forced to
+leave the cave, and won't spend much time coaxing."
+
+"Hurry along," Cummings shouted impatiently. "We must be well up on the
+range before sunset."
+
+These words spoken in an imperative tone caused Jake to spring to his
+feet very nimbly, and as he neared the entrance Poyor pushed one of the
+packages toward him as he said:
+
+"We carried all last night, and it would be only right to give you a
+double load."
+
+"I'd have to take it if you did," Jake replied; but as if to prevent any
+different distribution of the burdens, he tied this one on quickly,
+saying when it was fastened firmly to his back, "Now I'm ready to tramp
+as long as you do; but it would have suited me better if I'd had time
+for a nap."
+
+"It will serve you right if you don't get a chance to sleep for a week,"
+Cummings replied sharply. "Go on, Poyor leads the way as before, and see
+to it that you keep close at his heels."
+
+The fugitives soon learned that however difficult it might be to travel
+through the tangled underbrush of the forest, it was as nothing compared
+to clambering over the ledges of green or white rock which formed the
+base of the range.
+
+Here there was nothing to shield them from the fervent rays of the sun,
+and so intense was the heat that it seemed as if they were walking over
+the top of a furnace.
+
+The only relief from the excessive warmth was when they came upon a deep
+fissure in the rocks where was a pool of water, with the most gorgeous
+flowers around the margin. Everywhere else the soil was sandy, covered
+in places with pebbles and burning gravel. In front of them were the
+mountains, bare and sterile, on which the least experienced of the party
+knew no drop of water could be found.
+
+As a matter of course both Cummings and Poyor kept strict watch over
+the surrounding country lest the enemy should be creeping upon them
+unawares; but when, late in the afternoon, a short halt was called,
+nothing suspicious had been seen.
+
+"I don't understand how you could have wandered around twenty-four hours
+without being discovered by some of the sentinels," Cummings said to
+Jake, when they were reclining on the side of the mountain in the shadow
+cast by an overhanging rock, where a full view of the valley beneath
+could be had.
+
+"Perhaps they have given over lookin' for us," the engineer suggested.
+
+"There's no chance of that. Every square foot of the country will be
+searched, and sooner or later they'll come across our trail."
+
+"How long will it take us to get over the range?" Neal asked.
+
+"It is impossible to say: but we must keep moving nearly all the time,
+for the small amount of water we have with us now is the last that'll be
+seen until we are on the other side."
+
+"I feel as if I could drink the entire supply, and then want more,"
+Teddy said, the knowledge that they were cut off from all means of
+adding to the store making him thirsty.
+
+"I reckon every one in the party feels much the same way," Cummings
+replied grimly. "If it was possible to find a stream now and then the
+journey across the range would not be such a dangerous one."
+
+With the exception of the suggestion he made when they first halted,
+Jake did not join in the conversation. His eyes had closed in slumber
+almost instantly after lying down, and during half an hour he was
+allowed to sleep uninterruptedly.
+
+Then Poyor awakened him, and the weary march was resumed, the advance
+becoming more difficult each moment as they climbed higher up on the
+range.
+
+About two hours before nightfall the sun was hidden from view by dense
+masses of dark clouds, and the boys hailed with joy this relief from the
+burning heat.
+
+"If we could only have it like this all the time!" Neal exclaimed.
+
+"Better the sun than the clouds," Cummings said in a tone of anxiety,
+and Poyor increased his pace, no longer searching with his eyes for the
+enemy; but casting quick glances from side to side as if hunting for
+some particular object.
+
+A south wind came up, and the boys were trudging along right merrily,
+despite their fatigue, when it was as if a solid sheet of water
+descended upon them.
+
+There had been no warning drops to give notice of the coming storm; but
+the rain literally fell in torrents, drenching the fugitives at the
+first downpour.
+
+It was now impossible to see twenty feet in either direction. The
+driving rain and the white clouds which completely enveloped the
+mountain shut out everything from view.
+
+The enemy might have crept close upon them without being aware of the
+fact.
+
+There was no place in which to shelter themselves, and the boys had a
+thorough illustration of what a tropical rain-storm may be during the
+time Poyor was hunting for such a place as would serve to shield them
+from the flood.
+
+Not until half an hour had passed did they make a halt, and then the
+Indian led them under an overhanging ledge, in front of which was a
+sheer descent of eighty feet or more to the valley beneath.
+
+"Here we can wait until the worst of the gale has blown over," he said,
+as he threw down his burden and prepared to enjoy a long rest. "It is
+not likely we shall be able to move to-night, and there is no fear the
+enemy will come upon us while the storm rages."
+
+"We shall at least be where the canteens can be filled," Cummings
+replied in a tone of content, "and by gaining a fresh supply of water
+the journey will be robbed of half its dangers, consequently a wetting
+is of but little consequence."
+
+To have seen the mountain at this moment one would hardly have thought
+that the party could have suffered from thirst. Every crevice of the
+rocks was now a stream, and by reaching out in a dozen different
+directions a quantity of the precious liquid could be obtained.
+
+The only thing to cause alarm was the fact that this storm was but the
+beginning of the summer season, during which rain might be expected each
+day, and thus the danger of fever while crossing the low lands would be
+greatly increased.
+
+"The sentinels will certainly keep under cover during such weather as
+this," Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "and we may be able to
+get over the range without a hand to hand fight, as I had anticipated."
+
+Under such climatic conditions the meat would not keep sweet many hours,
+and Poyor set the entire stock before his companions, saying as he did
+so:
+
+"What cannot be eaten must be thrown away, therefore he is fortunate who
+can now swallow enough to prevent the pangs of hunger from being felt
+during the next forty-eight hours."
+
+"But we certainly won't be forced to stay here that length of time,"
+Neal replied. "It can't rain all the day and night."
+
+"It is safe to count on a long storm," Cummings added. "This is the
+beginning of the bad season, and there will be a certain amount of water
+fall each day."
+
+"Did you take the fact into consideration when you made ready to visit
+the Silver City?" Neal asked.
+
+"Of course, and if there had been nothing to prevent the carrying out of
+my plans we would have been clear of the swamp by this time, or so near
+the edge that but a few hours traveling must have taken us through."
+
+It was worse than useless to talk of what might have been, and the
+little party settled down to make themselves as comfortable as possible
+under the circumstances.
+
+Overhead the rock sheltered them from the rain; but now that every
+crevice had been turned into a stream it was difficult to protect one's
+self from the innumerable tiny crevices through which the water was
+pouring, and each member of the party lay down in turn only to find
+himself literally flooded out before it was possible to gain any rest.
+
+The night had come, and the air, so warm a few hours previous, was
+uncomfortably cold.
+
+Jake proposed that a fire be built, providing he could find a sufficient
+quantity of dry wood; but both Cummings and Poyor decided against it in
+a very emphatic manner.
+
+"Although we have been traveling for the past six or eight hours where
+any one in the valley might see us, we are not so insane as to build a
+beacon here that our pursuers may be guided to this halting place."
+
+Cummings spoke in a petulant tone, and fearing that he might add
+something regarding the fact that if Jake had behaved himself all would
+now be in the cave, Teddy hastened to say:
+
+"If we can't build a fire why not spend the time walking, for it will be
+impossible to sleep with this rain beating down upon us?"
+
+"It would take a better man than Poyor to lead the way in the darkness
+and storm. Here we must stay, at least until morning, and then unless
+the rain has ceased falling, it will be a case of going hungry awhile."
+
+Finding that there was to be no change in the condition of affairs, Jake
+had crawled into the further end of the shelter where, with the water
+dripping down upon him he was trying his best to sleep, and Neal curled
+up beside him.
+
+Poyor, regardless of the weather, remained just outside the rock as if
+on guard, while Cummings, a few paces behind him, sat upon a fragment of
+stone listening intently, and Teddy wisely concluded to find a resting
+place somewhere, for he was so weary that repose seemed absolutely
+necessary, more especially since there could be no doubt but that the
+journey would be continued immediately the storm cleared away.
+
+Selecting a spot where some portion of his body could be kept dry, he
+lay down, and, regardless of all discomforts was soon oblivious to
+everything around him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+THE PURSUIT.
+
+
+During this night of discomforts the boys and Jake succeeded in gaining
+more rest than one would have thought possible under the circumstances.
+
+The temperature had fallen so much that, in comparison with the heat of
+the day, it was positively cold; but by lying close together and
+covering themselves with half a dozen enormous leaves from a vine which
+encircled the rock, they managed to pass the long hours without positive
+pain.
+
+Whenever Neal, who awakened very often, opened his eyes he saw Cummings
+and Poyor standing near at hand like statues, and the natural
+supposition was that they did not seek repose even to the slight extent
+of sitting down.
+
+Once he called to the white man, proposing to do his share of the
+watching; but the offer was positively declined.
+
+"I could not rest even if I should lie down," he replied in a whisper.
+"There are too many chances that the Chan Santa Cruz Indians may creep
+upon us under cover of this mist, and both Poyor and myself are needed.
+Sleep if you can, so that we may be prepared for a hard tramp
+to-morrow."
+
+As it proved, however, these excessive precautions were useless. The
+rain continued to fall steadily and in great volume until daybreak, and
+then all hands prepared for another tramp, for each one was so
+completely drenched that a little water more or less could not make much
+difference.
+
+The breakfast was by no means a hearty one. The moisture had spoiled the
+roast tapir, and even the remaining totopostes were so damp as to be
+decidedly unpleasant to the sight as well as the taste.
+
+Jake shut his eyes and ate a small quantity: but neither Neal nor Teddy
+could force the food down, and, in view of the fact that there was
+little likelihood of finding any game on the summit of the mountain, it
+seemed reasonably certain they would be forced to fast a long while.
+
+The burdens, soaked with water, had increased in weight very materially,
+and again Poyor overhauled them in order to throw away yet more of the
+load.
+
+All the fishing tackle, two extra suits of clothes belonging to the
+boys, the spoiled provisions and, in fact, nearly everything except the
+ammunition and weapons, was left behind when the ascent of the mountain
+was continued.
+
+It was not yet time for the sun to rise; but the gray light of coming
+day served to show the way, and Poyor strode on in advance at a pace
+which would have soon winded the boys had Cummings not ordered him to
+proceed more slowly.
+
+"We must keep on without a halt until noon," he said, "and it would be
+bad policy to use a portion of the party up before the journey has
+fairly begun."
+
+Even at the best pace possible the progress was by no means rapid, owing
+to the obstructions in the path. Here it was necessary to make a long
+detour that an overhanging ledge might be avoided, and there they were
+literally forced to scramble among boulders of every size at imminent
+risk of breaking limbs or being precipitated to the valley below.
+
+Before half an hour had passed the rain ceased falling as rapidly as it
+had begun, and as the sun appeared the clouds at the foot of the
+mountain were dispersed.
+
+Poyor halted and turned to look toward the valley.
+
+Almost at the same instant a loud shout was heard and Cummings uttered
+an exclamation of dismay, as a party of at least a hundred Indians burst
+into view about a mile below.
+
+"They halted rather than run the risk of passing us during the storm,"
+he said half to himself. "Inasmuch as the slowest of that crowd can
+travel two yards to our one we are likely to be overhauled in a very
+short time."
+
+"It is the end," Poyor said gravely. "There is little chance of escape,
+and none of running from them."
+
+"Do you propose that we shall stand and fight?" Cummings asked.
+
+"There is nothing else to be done."
+
+"But we have no show against them."
+
+"As much as to run."
+
+"Here in the open they can soon surround us."
+
+"We will be able to throw up a line of these rocks before they get here,
+and because it is in the open we can hold them back a few hours."
+
+There was plenty of material near at hand with which to make a shelter
+sufficient to protect them from the poisoned arrows, and after a few
+seconds' hesitation Cummings saw that Poyor's plan was the only one
+which could be carried into execution.
+
+"Set to work lively, boys," he shouted, as he began to throw up the
+smaller boulders in a circle. "Everything depends on our getting a fort
+ready before they come within shooting distance."
+
+There was no necessity of urging the boys or Jake to labor
+industriously. They could see the enemy and hear their yells of triumph
+at having tracked the game so successfully, therefore not a second was
+wasted.
+
+It seemed as if Poyor had the strength of a dozen men in his arms. He
+lifted huge boulders which the remainder of the party together could
+hardly have moved from their resting place; flung the smaller ones
+around as if they were nothing more than pebbles, and when the circle
+had been raised four feet high, set about digging away the sand from the
+center in order to increase the depth.
+
+The preparations were not yet completed when the foremost of the
+pursuers came in view from beneath a ledge about forty yards away, and
+he said to Cummings:
+
+"Three guns are enough to hold them back while Jake and I finish the
+work here. Do not hesitate to shoot, for they will stop at nothing when
+the time comes that we can hold out no longer."
+
+"Teddy, you sit there," Cummings said, as he pointed to an aperture in
+the wall which had been left as a loop-hole. "Neal, you're stationed
+next to him, and I'll hold this place. Now work lively, and pick off
+every one of those yelling villains that comes within range."
+
+He discharged both barrels of his weapon in rapid succession as he
+ceased speaking, and the two leaders disappeared immediately; but
+whether they had been hit by the leaden messengers, or only frightened,
+no one could say.
+
+Teddy raised his gun as a third man pressed forward, and, as he
+afterward confessed, closed his eyes while pulling the trigger, for to
+fire deliberately at a human being was something inexpressibly terrible.
+
+Even if he did not hit the mark the bullet must have gone so near the
+man as to frighten him, for when Neal discharged his weapon at a fourth
+Indian the entire party beat a retreat, disappearing behind the ledge.
+
+"They can't send an arrow from that distance with any accuracy of aim,"
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction, "therefore we may count on
+keeping them back until night, at all events."
+
+"And then what?" Teddy asked with a shudder.
+
+"That is something we won't talk about yet awhile," was the grave reply.
+"We've got at least twelve hours before us, providing they don't catch
+us napping, and at such a time as this it is a much longer lease of life
+than I expected."
+
+Teddy and Neal looked at each other in silence. The situation must
+indeed be desperate if Cummings could count on remaining at liberty only
+one day, and then----
+
+In fancy Teddy could see them led back to the Silver City as prisoners.
+He almost heard the strains of music while they were marched into the
+temple amid the slender, silver-tipped columns, with the throng of
+people following to witness the torture and final stroke which should
+relieve them from suffering.
+
+"What is the matter?" Neal whispered. "You have turned as white as a
+ghost."
+
+"I was thinking of what will happen when those murderers get us in their
+power."
+
+"Don't do anything of the kind; it is too terrible. I will die here
+fighting rather than be taken prisoner."
+
+"And is that all the hope we have left?"
+
+"To be killed here? Perhaps not; but it is far preferable to the torture
+Poyor and Cummings say is sure to be our portion in case of capture."
+
+Neal's face was also pale; but there was a certain look of determination
+about it which told he had made up his mind for the worst, and would
+struggle manfully to the end.
+
+Jake on the contrary, was nearly paralyzed with fear. He understood now
+if never before all the trouble he had brought upon his companions,
+first by making their presence in the city known, and, lastly, by
+betraying the whereabouts of the party when he ventured out of the
+cave. That the Indians would not be turned from their purpose he
+realized fully, and there could be no mistaking the desperate condition
+in which he had placed all hands.
+
+He was supposed to be aiding Poyor; but, as a matter of fact he could do
+little more than look out over the fortifications, fearing each moment
+that the enemy would make a sudden dash.
+
+The particular thought in the minds of all was as to what might be done
+in the way of replenishing the larder, for now the siege had really
+begun the question of how food could be procured was a serious matter,
+more especially since no one had eaten what would be worthy the name of
+breakfast.
+
+Neither Cummings nor Poyor feared a direct assault. In their opinion it
+was only a question of holding the enemy in check, and to this alone did
+they pay any attention.
+
+Cummings watched over the line of rocks, and at the slightest show of a
+living target discharged his weapon; but, so far as could be
+ascertained, without inflicting any injury upon those who were ready to
+deal out death at the first opportunity.
+
+"It is only a question of holding back until the night comes, when they
+can ascend the mountain, and, being above us, be able to shoot us down
+without exposing themselves," Teddy said as he sat by the aperture
+watching for a sight of the enemy.
+
+"We will wait until sunset before we give up entirely," Neal replied, in
+a tone that showed he had lost all hope. "Then, unless Poyor can devise
+some plan for escape, we shall have to stand a hand to hand fight which
+can result in but one way."
+
+"You admit that we can't escape?" Teddy replied interrogatively. "Five
+against a hundred won't be able to stand very long."
+
+"We can at least hold our own a few hours, and when the end comes we
+will be found fighting."
+
+This was poor consolation for a fellow who hoped his friend might see
+some better way out of the difficulty, and Teddy settled back to watch
+for an opportunity to discharge his weapon with effect; but feeling that
+it was vain labor so far as the ultimate result was concerned.
+
+During the forenoon, while every crevice in the rocks was running with
+water, Poyor filled the canteens, and when this work was done he
+insisted that Jake should continue to aid him in lowering the level
+behind the line of rocks; but the engineer was, to use his own words,
+"completely played out," and the necessary work was neglected until he
+could gain a certain amount of rest, which, under the circumstances,
+every other number of the party was willing to forego for a time.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+AT BAY.
+
+
+When the Indian had scraped the sand away to the solid rock, thereby
+deepening the enclosure at least twelve inches, he ceased work, and,
+seating himself by Cummings' side, prepared to do his share of the
+watching.
+
+By this time the assailants had become convinced that it was useless to
+expose themselves to the murderous fire which could not be returned with
+any possibility of injuring the white men, and they remained under
+cover.
+
+"I believe we might sneak away from them," Neal said, after looking
+fifteen or twenty minutes at the ledge beneath which the enemy had taken
+refuge, without seeing so much as a man's head. "They think we will
+shoot them down, and might keep under cover while we were escaping."
+
+"Then you believe they do not know what we are about?" Cummings asked
+grimly.
+
+"How can it be possible if no one comes out to reconnoiter?"
+
+"Look down the valley."
+
+Following with their eyes the direction of Cummings' outstretched finger
+the boys saw a party of Indians far down the mountain side out of range,
+traveling rapidly in the opposite direction.
+
+"They are running away!" Teddy cried gleefully. "Our guns were too much
+for them."
+
+"Do you believe there are as many in that crowd as we saw coming up the
+mountain?"
+
+Teddy gazed again, and this time the look of joy and relief faded from
+his face.
+
+"No," he replied slowly, "only about half as many."
+
+"And the remainder are under the ledge ready to come out at the first
+good opportunity."
+
+"But what are those fellows doing?"
+
+"Going out of range where every movement we make can be seen without
+risk of being shot at, and when the night comes they will circle around
+us."
+
+That this supposition was correct could be seen a few moments later when
+the party halted in full view, and disposed of themselves in such places
+as the bushes afforded any shade from the sun's hot rays.
+
+"They are taking things mighty easy," Neal said after a long pause,
+during which he watched the enemy intently.
+
+"What is to prevent?" Cummings replied. "Time is of no especial object
+to them providing we can be captured finally, and just now we are
+situated very much like rats in a trap."
+
+"I wonder what would be the result if one of us should show himself?"
+Teddy said musingly.
+
+"You shall soon see. Poyor, walk a short distance up the mountain, and
+let the boys learn how well we are watched."
+
+The Indian did as he was requested, and had hardly left the
+fortification when those in the valley made a series of signals to the
+men above, and instantly Cummings had another opportunity to empty his
+weapon at a living target as several men sprang out from beneath the
+ledge.
+
+"Now you have some slight idea of what the result would be if we should
+attempt to run away," he said while re-loading the gun.
+
+"But what is to be gained by staying here if you are certain we shall be
+surrounded? Wouldn't it be better to have the fight out when it is
+possible to see what we are doing?"
+
+"Yes, decidedly; but I prefer to wait longer. While there's life there's
+hope, and before sunset something may happen to give us the advantage."
+
+Poyor came back leisurely, and as he re-entered the circle of rocks
+those in the valley settled down contentedly once more.
+
+During this conversation Jake had been sleeping soundly; but now the sun
+shone full upon him, and the heat was so great that he was forced to
+change his position, saying as he did so:
+
+"In a couple of hours more we shall be roasted to a turn."
+
+"That isn't the worst that may befall us," Cummings replied, evidently
+pleased at an opportunity to increase the engineer's fears.
+
+"But it seems as if we might make a try for some game. I'm very nearly
+starved."
+
+"You are at liberty to do as you please, because it is not possible to
+work us any further injury. According to your belief the Chan Santa Cruz
+Indians are such peaceable fellows that they might allow you to hunt in
+the valley awhile."
+
+"What's the use of roughing into me now? I know I've made a fool of
+myself twice; but I'm in the same hole with the rest."
+
+"That doesn't make our situation any the more bearable, and when we
+think how it was brought about it is only natural to feel sore. Even now
+you insist on taking rest when the others are working."
+
+"But I traveled steadily for twenty-four hours, and haven't had half as
+much sleep as the remainder of the party."
+
+"What about last night?"
+
+Jake made no reply. He considered himself abused because Cummings
+persisted in talking about what had been done, when he believed the
+matter should be dropped after the fault was acknowledged.
+
+Another hour passed. The sun was directly overhead, and the heat seemed
+excessive. There was no longer any shadow cast by the rocks, and the
+sand was so hot as to be painful to the touch.
+
+"There is no reason why you boys should remain on guard," Cummings
+finally said. "The Indians will not make a move before afternoon, and it
+is equally certain we shall not get a chance to shoot at those under the
+ledge."
+
+"We may as well sit here, for no fellow could sleep in this oven," Teddy
+replied; but Poyor showed what might be done, by lying down near the
+front wall and closing his eyes.
+
+At the end of two hours there was no further change in the condition of
+affairs. Poyor continued to sleep, the boys and Cummings remained on
+guard, and Jake sat leaning his head against the rocks while the
+perspiration ran down his face in tiny streams.
+
+Then, as on the previous evening, the clouds began to gather, and
+Cummings said in a tone of satisfaction as he gazed toward the sky:
+
+"There's evidently no danger that we shall suffer from thirst, for
+another storm is coming up, and while it lasts we may see some chance of
+giving those fellows the slip."
+
+"But you didn't dare to travel last night when it was raining," Teddy
+said.
+
+"Very true; but that was at a time when we were not positive the enemy
+were so near. Now they are close at our heels we shall be warranted in
+running many risks which, twenty-four hours ago, would have been most
+imprudent."
+
+In a very short time the sun was hidden from view; a cooling wind blew
+across the mountain, and every member of the sad visaged party
+experienced a wonderful sense of relief.
+
+Poyor arose to his feet like one refreshed, and Jake bestirred himself
+sufficiently to propose that he relieve Neal or Teddy a short while.
+
+"You can sleep now that the sun doesn't shine," he said, "and I promise
+to keep strict watch."
+
+After some hesitation Teddy accepted the offer while he paced to and fro
+to rest his cramped and aching limbs, and Poyor consulted with Cummings
+relative to an attempt at flight when the storm should come.
+
+His idea was that they could not be any worse off by making one effort
+to reach the summit of the range, even if the desired result was not
+attained, and after considerable discussion the white man agreed to the
+plan.
+
+"It is barely possible that we may get on all right, and the situation
+is so desperate that almost any change must be for the better," he said.
+"We will wait half an hour or so, and then start if the enemy have made
+no move meanwhile."
+
+The threatened storm was not long delayed.
+
+In less than an hour it was upon them in all its fury, and Cummings said
+sharply as he pressed nearer the front of the fortification:
+
+"Now we need all the eyes in the party. Keep a sharp watch, and fire at
+the first moving thing you see."
+
+On this occasion thunder and lightning accompanied the wind and rain,
+and by the glare of the flashes it was possible to see as if at
+noon-day.
+
+Never before had the boys witnessed such a terrible tempest. The entire
+heavens seemed ablaze at times, and the peals which echoed and re-echoed
+from one point to another appeared to shake the mountain.
+
+The wind was so powerful that even Poyor could not stand against it, and
+Cummings said in a tone of deepest disappointment:
+
+"Unless we choose to venture into the valley again flight is out of the
+question. We must stay here and take what the Indians care to give us
+when the storm clears away."
+
+He had hardly ceased speaking when a flash of lightning nearly blinded
+them; the earth shook most decidedly before the thunder peal came, and
+then it was as if all nature was in convulsion.
+
+The rocks forming the fortification were precipitated down the mountain;
+the little party were hurled violently forward, and then intense
+darkness and the most profound silence ensued.
+
+Teddy reached out his hand to touch Neal; but the latter was not near
+him.
+
+"Neal! Neal!" he shouted again and again, and several moments elapsed
+before he heard, as if far away, an answering cry.
+
+"Where are you, Teddy?"
+
+"Here, on the side of the hill. Come this way."
+
+"I can't. I'm nearly buried in the sand."
+
+From the direction of the voice Teddy knew his friend had been thrown
+quite a distance down the hill, and he cried:
+
+"Keep on shouting so I can find you."
+
+"Don't move! Wait for another flash of lightning!"
+
+It was Cummings who had spoken, and an instant later Jake was heard
+begging for help.
+
+[Illustration: The little party were hurled violently forward, and then
+intense darkness ensued.]
+
+"All the rocks of the fort must be on top of me. Will somebody help pull
+them away."
+
+The rain was yet falling in torrents: but the electrical disturbance had
+ceased entirely.
+
+That something terrible had occurred all knew; but what it was no one
+could say.
+
+When Jake implored some one to aid him the second time, Poyor cried:
+
+"Let each remain motionless. I will find the engineer. The earth has
+opened here, and I am on the brink of a chasm."
+
+This order was obeyed, and the boys knew by the sound of the Indian's
+voice that he was making his way toward Jake.
+
+At the end of ten minutes he shouted:
+
+"There has been no harm done here. We will come to you."
+
+The boys spoke from time to time to guide him, regardless of the fact
+that they might also be calling the enemy, and after what seemed to be a
+very long while the party were re-united at the spot where Neal was, as
+he had said, nearly buried in the sand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+THE CATASTROPHE.
+
+
+To extricate Neal from his disagreeable position was a long, but not a
+difficult operation.
+
+It appeared as if the earth Poyor had dug up from the middle of the
+fortification was all heaped above him in such a manner that he could do
+nothing in his own behalf, and it was only necessary to dig this away.
+
+"What could have happened to upset things so thoroughly?" he asked,
+staggering to his feet, and being obliged to sit down very suddenly lest
+the wind should blow him down.
+
+"As near as I can guess there has been a land slide," Cummings replied.
+"I believe it began at the ledge under which the Indians were hidden,
+and how far it extends no one can so much as guess until it is possible
+to get a view of the country."
+
+"Are you not afraid of an attack?" Teddy asked.
+
+"Not while this storm is raging. Stand up for a moment, and then you can
+see whether those fellows would make much headway trying to reach us."
+
+The wind was blowing furiously, and the rain falling in great volume.
+Now and then the little party cowering close together for mutual
+protection, would be struck by a perfect shower of pebbles and wet sand
+with such force that, had they been in a standing position, all would
+have been overthrown, and it really required considerable exertion to
+remain in one spot.
+
+The ammunition, or rather, the greater portion of it, had been left near
+the front wall of the fort, and the chances were that it was destroyed
+by the water or scattered beyond finding.
+
+Teddy was the first to think of this misfortune, and he said in a tone
+of despair:
+
+"There's little hope now that we can hold the enemy in check even for an
+hour, in case they should make an attack, for I don't believe we have
+twenty cartridges left."
+
+"And but two guns, for I lost mine when I was blown down the side of the
+mountain," Neal added.
+
+"Don't make the mistake of searching for trouble," Cummings interrupted.
+"It is sufficient to know that we are alive and uninjured. The Indians
+will not bother us for some time."
+
+Not until considerably past midnight did the rain cease falling; but the
+wind storm still continued, and Poyor said, speaking for the first time
+since the party were united:
+
+"It will not be possible to leave here until sunrise. Those who can
+sleep should try to do so, for we may have a hard day's work before us
+to-morrow."
+
+"I should as soon think of sleeping during a battle," Teddy replied with
+a shudder. "The suspense is worse than actual danger."
+
+"What can you be afraid of just now?" Jake asked.
+
+"At this particular moment, nothing: but I feel positive that when the
+sun rises we shall find ourselves surrounded by the Indians."
+
+This was not a pleasant subject of conversation, and it was dropped as
+if by mutual consent.
+
+The wind seemed icy cold, and the fugitives nestled closer together for
+protection against the blast, counting the slowly passing moments until
+heralds of the coming dawn appeared in the sky.
+
+Before it was sufficiently light to distinguish surrounding objects the
+wind lulled, and, standing erect each looked anxiously down the side of
+the mountain, waiting impatiently for the rising of the sun.
+
+As the misty clouds which veiled the top of the range drifted away, an
+exclamation of astonishment burst from the lips of all.
+
+Where, a few hours previous, had been a band of men eager to capture or
+slay the white strangers, was now only a yawning chasm.
+
+Beginning at the ledge of rocks it appeared as if a giant hand had rent
+the side of the mountain apart, throwing the huge mass of earth into the
+valley, uprooting or crushing trees, and making desolate for many
+hundred yards what had been a perfect garden of trees, flowers and
+shrubs.
+
+"Why, there must have been an earthquake!" Jake exclaimed when the first
+burst of astonishment passed away.
+
+"Hardly as bad as that," Cummings replied. "I fancy the lightning struck
+the ledge, and then a regular land slide followed."
+
+"Do you suppose the Indians are buried under that pile of earth and
+rocks?"
+
+"Unless they understood what damage might be done by such storms they
+must be, and it stands us in hand to get away from this spot before
+others can arrive."
+
+"It is terrible to think of so many being killed," Teddy said
+mournfully, and Jake asked sharply:
+
+"Are you sorry we've got a chance for escape?"
+
+"Certainly not; but no matter who they were, one can't help feeling
+shocked at such a catastrophe."
+
+"It is not well for us to stay here," Poyor said before any reply could
+be made. "While looking at what we believe to be the grave of the Chan
+Santa Cruz army, they may be climbing the mountain to cut us off."
+
+"You are right, Poyor. Boys, look around for the ammunition and Neal's
+gun, and whether we find anything or not we must be on our journey in
+five minutes."
+
+Cummings led in the search, which resulted in nothing, for even the
+boulders which formed the fort were hidden from view by the sand and
+gravel, and then Poyor advanced on the way upward once more.
+
+Although it seemed certain the enemy had been destroyed the Indian did
+not neglect any precaution. He traveled further in advance than usual
+and from time to time cast searching glances toward the valley where, in
+all probability, so many lay dead.
+
+Now every member of the party were suffering for food. It was thirty-six
+hours since they had satisfied their hunger, and during the greater
+portion of this time a large amount of labor had been performed.
+
+"I believe I could eat an iguana, and that's the most disagreeable
+looking reptile I've ever seen," Teddy whispered to Neal, and the latter
+replied gravely:
+
+"It doesn't seem right to complain about being hungry after escaping
+from such a terrible situation; but at the same time I'm willing to
+confess that almost anything would taste mighty good just now."
+
+The travelers were nearing the summit of the mountain where not so much
+as a blade of grass could be seen, and there was nothing for it but to
+endure hunger, as they were forced to, the heat, which, as the day
+advanced, seemed almost insupportable.
+
+It was about noon when the little party stood on the highest point of
+land, and, looking over a long stretch of valley and plain covered with
+verdure of the deepest green, saw the blue waters of the Caribbean sea,
+the crests of the waves sparkling in the sunlight like jewels set in
+sapphire-colored enamel.
+
+Never had the ocean seemed so beautiful and friendly as now, after the
+long, dangerous tramp, and the boys forgot all privations and
+discomforts as they gazed at the broad expanse of water.
+
+"If the Sea Dream was afloat and anchored off there how quickly we could
+get home," Teddy cried.
+
+"Even allowing that nothing happens to prevent our traveling ten hours a
+day, it will be a week before you can stand on the shore of the sea,"
+Cummings replied, glancing backward as if regretting that he was about
+to descend the range which would separate him from the wonders and
+wealth of the Silver City.
+
+"At least, we have nothing more to fear from the Indians, and there is
+now good reason to believe we shall get home at some time, which is more
+than either of us could have said truthfully last night."
+
+"We can't have that satisfaction," and Cummings turned to resume the
+march. "The Chan Santa Cruz frequently go to the coast, and there are
+plenty living near by who may try to make matters disagreeable for us.
+But we must not stand here speculating; it is necessary to gain the
+forest below before finding anything for supper, and I'm free to confess
+that either fish or meat will be very acceptable."
+
+The thought of food caused all to forget their fatigue, and the descent
+was begun, the progress being as easy and rapid as it had previously
+been slow and difficult.
+
+The afternoon was not more than half spent when they reached the fringe
+of bushes marking the forest line, and an hour later the little party
+were shielded from the rays of the sun by the wide spreading branches
+of enormous trees.
+
+Now the advance was more of a hunting excursion than the ending of a
+day's journey, and each member of the band searched among the foliage
+for something eatable.
+
+Poyor was the one who finally succeeded in replenishing the larder, and
+he did it in a right royal manner.
+
+While Neal and Teddy were looking for a bird which the latter declared
+he had caught a glimpse of among the leaves, the Indian started off at
+full speed, returning in a short time with two armadilloes.
+
+"Good for you!" Cummings shouted joyfully. "We'll have a first-class
+supper now, with plenty to spare for breakfast. How did you manage to
+get both?"
+
+"An Indian is a better hunter than the white man," Poyor said with a
+smile as he set about building a fire.
+
+"Do you intend to eat those horrid looking things?" Teddy asked in
+surprise.
+
+"Indeed I do, and after you get a taste of the old fellow's flesh,
+roasted in his own shell, you'll say it goes ahead of everything except
+a morsel of fat from the back of Mr. Armadillo."
+
+A small spring bubbled out of the ground beneath a huge logwood tree,
+giving rise to what would probably be a large stream by the time it
+reached the coast, and here it was proposed to spend the night.
+
+To protect themselves from possible visits from wild beasts Cummings set
+about collecting fuel for camp-fires, and in this work the others
+assisted while the Indian played the part of cook.
+
+While his game was being roasted Poyor searched the forest in the
+immediate vicinity, and succeeded in finding a quantity of yellowish
+green fruit which Cummings explained to his companions were mangoes.
+
+"I thought it was necessary to cultivate mangoes," Teddy said in
+surprise.
+
+"Not here, although it was originally introduced from India; but it took
+so kindly to the soil that one finds the fruit even in the heart of the
+primitive forest. Except for the odor of turpentine, I think it the most
+pleasing of all that nature has bestowed."
+
+Just at that moment the boys were more interested in what Poyor was
+doing than regarding the fruits of Yucatan, and instantly he pulled the
+first armadillo from the fire they were ready to be served.
+
+During ten minutes after receiving his share of the meat on a broad
+leaf, every member of the party ate ravenously, and then Jake said with
+a sigh of content, as he helped himself to another generous portion:
+
+"I declare it is almost worth while going without grub in order to know
+how good it tastes."
+
+"I'd rather eat less at a time, and have my meals more regularly," Teddy
+said with a laugh, as he made an attack upon a pile of mangoes.
+
+Then Cummings began to discuss with Poyor the best course to pursue
+while journeying to the coast, and the others listened in silence, for
+upon the decision arrived at might depend all their chances of ever
+reaching home again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+A FIERCE CONFLICT.
+
+
+That Poyor believed the more serious danger was over, the boys
+understood from the fact that camp-fires were to be kept burning during
+the night, something which would never have been allowed had he feared
+an attack from the Chan Santa Cruz.
+
+Then again, the Indian no longer refused to converse lest the duty of
+the sentinel should be neglected; but talked readily and at considerable
+length with Cummings regarding the course to be pursued.
+
+He also indulged in the luxury of a smoke, something he had not done
+since leaving the white man's hut, and, taking their cue from him, the
+remainder of the party gave themselves up to absolute repose both of
+body and mind, therefore because of these reasons if for no other, this
+particular halting place was afterward remembered as the most pleasant
+they knew during the long, fruitless journey.
+
+When Cummings and Poyor finally decided upon the line of march for the
+following day, the twilight was rapidly deepening into the gloom of
+night, and the latter lighted the fires, thus making a circle of flame
+completely around the party.
+
+"Is it really necessary to have such a blaze, or are you indulging in it
+simply because it has been so long since we dared allow our whereabouts
+to be known?" Teddy asked, as he sat with his chin on his knees gazing
+at the burning wood.
+
+"We are guarding against brute enemies. It is said that jaguars are
+plenty in this section, and there can be no question but snakes abound.
+These embers, which require only labor to keep alive, will do very much
+toward saving our small stock of ammunition."
+
+Jake did not appear disposed to join in any conversation since dinner.
+He had thrown himself on the ground near the foot of a gigantic tree,
+and, from the expression on his face, Neal fancied he was regretting
+that they had not succeeded in bringing away any treasure from the
+Silver City.
+
+"What are you thinking of?" he asked.
+
+"Only figgerin' out what a 'royal excursion this would 'a been if I'd
+got that image I tried so hard for."
+
+"If you had succeeded in carrying it outside the city we should not be
+here now," Cummings said gravely. "With that lump of silver added to
+our load I fancy we would be prisoners at this moment if they allowed
+us to live so long."
+
+"I reckoned you'd take the disappointment harder, after spendin' so much
+time gettin' ready for the trip."
+
+"Of what use would it be for me to complain? In view of all that has
+happened we have been remarkably fortunate in getting away alive, and
+consequently there is very much to be thankful for."
+
+"Do you think that if I'd obeyed orders right up to the handle anything
+more could have been done?"
+
+"Not in the matter of carrying away treasure, for all hope fled the
+moment our boat was discovered. You simply caused us additional
+hardships, and have put an end to my visiting the place again for many
+months."
+
+"What?" Teddy cried in surprise. "Are you still thinking of entering the
+city again?"
+
+"I am, most certainly. It shall be my life work to discover the history
+of these people, and tell to the world the meaning of the inscriptions
+on the monuments of Copan. This failure has simply been a misfortune,
+not anything which will prevent my continuing the labor."
+
+"Do you count on asking others to go with you?"
+
+"No," Cummings replied, with a meaning glance toward Jake. "If I ever
+succeed the honor will be divided among Poyor and myself alone."
+
+Then, as on the day when he first broached the subject, he reviewed all
+that is known to the white race concerning the buried cities of Central
+America and of the descendants of that mighty race of people whose once
+high state of civilization cannot be questioned. When he concluded Jake
+indulged in but one remark before composing himself for slumber:
+
+"It don't make any difference to me whether the inscriptions can ever be
+read or not; but a fellow feels sore to think that he had a chance of
+scoopin' in enough to set himself up in great shape, an' was prevented
+when the precious metal was under his very fingers."
+
+"Have you any particular reason for going to Progresso?" Neal asked
+after a pause.
+
+"I have most decidedly. Since getting you in a scrape which nearly cost
+your lives, it is only right I should see you homeward bound."
+
+"Couldn't we find our way alone?"
+
+"That would be impossible even for me. Poyor is the only guide, and when
+he has done his work you sail on the steamer, while he and I return to
+the little hut, there to wait for another opportunity of getting inside
+the Silver City."
+
+After this Cummings appeared disinclined to talk any more, and the boys
+lay down near Jake for the slumber which both needed so badly.
+
+Although their eyelids were heavy with sleep, it was not possible to
+lose consciousness immediately. Now their safety was in a measure
+assured, the thoughts of Cummings' great disappointment, and the lost
+opportunity of making themselves famous, came to mind more forcibly than
+ever before, causing both to remain awake after all save Poyor were
+breathing heavily.
+
+"This won't do," Teddy said half to himself. "The mysteries of the
+Silver City are not to be solved by us, and the sooner we go to sleep
+the better condition we shall be in for to-morrow's tramp."
+
+Before Neal could reply the Indian stole softly toward them and
+whispered:
+
+"If you would see the father of serpents, sit up and look toward the
+spring; but make no noise."
+
+The boys did as they were directed and could distinguish by the glare of
+the camp-fires the largest snake either had ever seen.
+
+It was a boa, moving lazily toward the water course as if conscious that
+its own wonderful strength was sufficient to enable it to cope
+successfully with all enemies.
+
+Before it was possible to form any estimate as to the serpent's size
+another stranger appeared on the scene, causing Poyor to raise his gun
+ready to shoot.
+
+This visitor was a jaguar, who had evidently come out for a drink, and
+the unusual light prevented him from seeing the boa. He moved warily
+forward, ready to meet an attack, and probably trying to make up his
+mind whether or not this was a favorable opportunity to get a
+particularly good supper, when the boa darted upon him.
+
+Taken by surprise from the rear, the snake had one complete turn around
+the animal's body before there was any show of resistance, and then
+ensued a most thrilling conflict.
+
+The boys could see that the boa's tail was fastened firmly around a
+tree, thus giving him a purchase such as the jaguar would have
+difficulty in overcoming.
+
+Using both claws and teeth the animal defended himself bravely for ten
+minutes, and then it could be seen that the rapidly tightening folds of
+the serpent were hampering his movements. He no longer struggled so
+desperately; but uttered shrill cries of alarm which were responded to
+from a distance.
+
+"His mate is coming," Poyor whispered. "Now we shall see a royal
+battle."
+
+It was as he had said. A few moments later another jaguar appeared, and
+the boys could understand that the boa was making haste to crush the
+first victim before meeting the second enemy.
+
+It was possible to see the muscles of the serpents' tail stand out as
+the pressure was increased, and then could be plainly heard the breaking
+bones while the victim uttered wild screams of agony.
+
+The female jaguar had but just come into view when her mate was killed,
+and she darted at the serpent with a yell of rage which was answered by
+an angry hiss.
+
+Whether the boa was taken at a disadvantage in the beginning of the
+fight, or had become so weary with its previous exertions as to render
+it incapable of putting forth all its powers could not be told; but
+certain it is that the second battle was short.
+
+The beast caught it by the neck at the third attempt, and the lashing of
+the monster's tail told that he was beaten.
+
+"He killed one jaguar easily; but this last beast will soon finish him,"
+Teddy whispered, and almost before the words had been uttered the battle
+was virtually at an end.
+
+Having relinquished its hold of the tree, and unable to encircle the
+animal's body with its deadly folds, the boa's strength was useless, and
+from that time on only the snarling of the jaguar and the threshing of
+the serpent could be heard until the fight came to an end.
+
+"What are you going to do?" Neal asked as Poyor raised his weapon when
+the silence told that the conflict had been decided in favor of the
+weaker party.
+
+"Kill the beast. There are too many of her kind already, and I shall be
+doing a favor to those who come after us by reducing the number."
+
+"Don't shoot; she has proved her right to live, if the theory of the
+survival of the fittest be correct, and after such a battle it would be
+cowardly to kill her."
+
+"If, on the morrow, you should find yourself suddenly seized by her,
+there would not be so much pity in your heart," Poyor replied, and
+before Neal could make any reply the animal had vanished in the thicket.
+
+"There is no longer any question of what should be done," the Indian
+said regretfully, after a pause, as he lowered his weapon. "There is a
+fine skin for those who care to save it."
+
+"It can lay there for all I care," Teddy replied with a laugh. "Fur in
+this kind of weather isn't pleasant even to think of. Perhaps in the
+morning Cummings will fancy it worth his while to carry the hide away."
+
+"The ants will have devoured it before the sun rises, and since it has
+no value for you it is well to go to sleep. One of the white men can
+call you when it is time to stand your share of the watch."
+
+"Is guard to be kept all night?"
+
+"It would be unsafe for all to sleep. If the jaguars had not met the
+serpent what would have been the result to those whose eyes were closed
+in slumber?"
+
+"There is no necessity of saying anything more," Neal replied with a
+laugh. "We will be ready when our turn comes."
+
+Then, as soon as they could compose themselves sufficiently, the boys
+surrendered to the demand of slumber, and Cummings must have stood their
+watch himself, since they were not awakened until another day had come.
+
+Breakfast was already cooked. On a number of gigantic leaves the Indian
+had spread such food as he could procure: Mangoes without stint; a
+roasted bird shaped not unlike a goose, and several small, white cones
+which tasted like radishes.
+
+Except for such articles as bread or vegetables, it was a meal which
+would have tempted an epicure and to it all hands did full justice.
+
+When their hunger had been satisfied, Cummings said as he shouldered one
+of the two remaining guns and took up a greater portion of the
+cartridges:
+
+"It is time we were moving. We can travel reasonably slow, in order that
+no one may become exhausted; but not an hour must be lost. The way
+before us is long, even after we reach the sea-shore, and each day
+wasted is just so much delay in reaching our destination."
+
+"Now that we are really homeward bound you will have no reason to
+complain because our powers of endurance are too slight," Neal replied,
+as he took up the remaining weapon, and the march was immediately
+begun.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+A WELCOME CHANGE.
+
+
+While they were on the mountain where no shade could be found the boys
+thought that it would be a wonderful relief to gain the shelter of the
+forest; but after traveling an hour they realized that the heat was
+nearly as great in one place as another.
+
+Among the trees the rays of the sun did not beat directly down upon
+them; but to balance this every breath of wind was shut out, and the
+atmosphere seemed stifling.
+
+The perspiration rolled from their faces in streams, and so great was
+the humidity that it seemed as if it would be a positive relief to be in
+the sunlight.
+
+"I reckon you've got a better opinion of mountain travel by this time,"
+Cummings said laughingly, as Neal involuntarily halted. "In such a
+climate the shade of the trees is a positive discomfort."
+
+"We can stand it," Teddy replied bravely. "Every step takes us just so
+much nearer the coast, and one glimpse of the sea will repay us for all
+our exertions."
+
+It seemed as if even Poyor was affected by the heat. He no longer strode
+forward at such a rapid pace; but lagged from time to time as badly as
+either member of the party.
+
+Cummings urged first one and then another on until about eleven o'clock
+in the forenoon, and then he said, coming to a full stop by the side of
+the stream they had been following:
+
+"We can now afford to indulge in a siesta, and shall probably travel all
+the better for frequent halts. Later in the day one of us will do a
+little hunting, and the march need not come to an end until it is no
+longer light enough for us to see the way."
+
+To this very welcome proposition no one had any objections to offer, and
+in the shortest possible space of time only the sentinel, which on this
+occasion proved to be Teddy, was left awake.
+
+It was dull work sitting there listening to the droning of the insects;
+but no member of the party could have kept watch more conscientiously
+than did he, and when it seemed impossible to hold his eyes open any
+longer he paced to and fro to prevent them from closing.
+
+With the exception of the usual noises of the forest, it was as if all
+nature slumbered, and he had just begun to think that standing watch was
+a useless precaution when an unusual rustling among the foliage caused
+him to start in surprise.
+
+His first thought was that the Chan Santa Cruz had followed them over
+the range; but an instant later this was shown to be a mistake, as four
+copper-colored men, bearing no resemblance to the inhabitants of the
+Silver City, however, passed through the forest a short distance away
+without apparently being aware of the proximity of the white party.
+
+To arouse Poyor was but the work of an instant, for it was only
+necessary to touch him gently on the shoulder when he sprang to his
+feet.
+
+"There are some men over there," Teddy whispered as he pointed in the
+direction taken by the strangers.
+
+The Indian started through the underbrush as noiselessly as a serpent,
+and as he disappeared the boy awakened Cummings.
+
+"Were they armed?" the latter asked, after the short story had been
+told.
+
+"I didn't notice. My only idea was to arouse you and Poyor, and there
+wasn't much time for an examination."
+
+"It can't be that they have followed us over the range," Cummings said,
+half to himself, as he seized his weapon and made sure it was loaded.
+"It won't do any harm to be prepared, therefore you had best get the
+others on their feet; we may have to trust to our legs."
+
+It was not an easy matter to awaken the remainder of the party without
+causing an outcry; but by first covering the mouth of each with his hand
+Teddy finally succeeded, and then stood on the alert with them as
+Cummings made his way in the direction taken by Poyor to assist in the
+investigation.
+
+One, two, three minutes of suspense followed, and then came a cry which
+set all their fears at rest. It was the salutation of friends, and an
+instant later Cummings shouted:
+
+"Do not fear; we have found acquaintances."
+
+"It is time something of the kind was discovered," Jake said in a tone
+of relief. "I was beginning to think we should never meet one again."
+
+"They looked like Indians," Teddy said doubtfully, and Neal added:
+
+"I fancy we can take Cummings' word for it. Here they are, and it will
+soon be possible to know why they were so foolish as to come into this
+part of the country where wild beasts are not the least of the dangers
+to be encountered."
+
+The strangers appeared, escorted by Poyor and the white man, and the
+latter said as they came into the opening selected as a halting place:
+
+"These are acquaintances of ours from Merida, who have visited this
+section of the country in search of bird skins, which find a ready sale
+among your people. They have a canoe, and report that a dozen miles
+below here the stream widens until it can be navigated by reasonably
+large crafts."
+
+"Since we haven't so much as the smallest kind of a boat I can't see how
+that information will be of any use to us," Neal replied laughingly.
+
+"It won't take long for me to explain. I propose to hire them to carry
+us to the sea-shore, and thus save just so much labor of traveling on
+foot."
+
+"Is their canoe large enough?"
+
+"It will carry a dozen."
+
+"Then our troubles are indeed over," Teddy cried joyously; but Cummings
+dampened his ardor somewhat when he added:
+
+"There will then remain the journey around the coast, and with such a
+load it would not be safe to put to sea in their craft. But let us enjoy
+the blessings which come to us," he added, on observing how quickly his
+companions' countenances fell. "Half a loaf is decidedly better than no
+bread at all, and when a tramp of six days can be set aside we have good
+cause to feel pleased."
+
+The strangers had not waited to be welcomed by the other members of the
+party. Without stopping to be invited they began preparations for
+cooking on rather an extensive scale, using the contents of their well
+filled game bags, and the savory odor which soon arose brought Jake to a
+full realization of the good fortune that had come to them.
+
+"With those fellows to hunt the game it will be a regular feast from
+here to the coast," he said approvingly, "and I think this is the first
+piece of good luck we've had since leaving the Sea Dream."
+
+The newcomers could not speak the English language, consequently all the
+conversation on the part of the fugitives was carried on by Cummings and
+Poyor; but these two interpreted such portions as they thought might be
+of interest to the boys.
+
+From the middle of what is known as the "dry season" until the period of
+almost incessant rains is well advanced, these hunters spend their time
+on one or another of the streams leading from the coast, and they
+consider themselves well paid when a year's work nets each an hundred
+dollars.
+
+"That is really a large amount of money to them," Cummings explained
+when Neal suggested that hunting was not a very profitable employment.
+"One quarter of the sum will serve to purchase the absolute necessities
+of life in a country where fruit can be had for the labor of gathering,
+and in ten years they can well afford to retire from business, or become
+landed proprietors by leasing logwood cuttings, sub-letting the land to
+those who will pay fifteen cents a hundred pounds for all that can be
+gathered."
+
+The strangers were quite as satisfactory cooks as Poyor, and when the
+dinner had been spread on the leaves each member of Cummings' party was
+ready to do it full justice.
+
+After the meal a short time was spent by the men in smoking, and at
+about four o'clock in the afternoon the journey was resumed.
+
+Feeling secure because of numbers, and the reports made by the newcomers
+that there was no one in the immediate vicinity the boys were allowed to
+follow their own inclinations as to the line of march, and each strayed
+here or there as he pleased until the coming of night forced them to
+keep together because of the danger to be apprehended from wild animals.
+
+It was late in the evening when they arrived at the hunters' camp; but
+Cummings did not propose to remain there even for one night.
+
+He insisted that they could travel by water as well during the hours of
+darkness, while it would be no more labor for one to guide the canoe,
+allowing her to drift with the current, than to stand watch.
+
+The strangers used every argument to induce him to defer the beginning
+of the journey until morning; but he was determined, and after some
+controversy the men made the canoe ready.
+
+Neal, Teddy and Jake were stationed amidships, where thanks to the
+generous size of the craft, they could stretch out at full length
+whenever the fancy seized them. Poyor was seated in the bow, Cummings on
+the stern thwart, and the owners of the boat where they could use the
+paddles to advantage.
+
+Of this first night's journeying the boys knew very little. The stream
+was narrow, and lined on either bank with trees so that at times even
+the heavens were obscured by foliage, therefore they could perceive
+nothing save the dark wall on either side.
+
+From the movements of the helmsman it was possible to understand when
+the canoe was rounding a bend, or being pulled from the bank; but that
+was all, and, weary of watching without being able to see anything, the
+boys soon gave themselves up to slumber.
+
+When they awakened the little craft was moored to the bank at a point
+where the stream formed a basin; a fire was burning brightly, and over
+it Poyor bent in a suggestive attitude.
+
+"Well, this is the kind of traveling that suits me," Teddy cried,
+springing to his feet and arousing his companions. "While we were
+sleeping the boat drifted steadily on, and, at this rate, when we arrive
+at the coast all hands ought to be in good condition for a long tramp."
+
+"Where's Cummings?" Neal asked, as he in turn arose from the bottom of
+the canoe.
+
+"Gone for game," the Indian replied.
+
+"Oh, we're not to have breakfast until it is shot," he added laughingly.
+
+"It makes no difference what they find, for there are twenty fat fish
+roasting in the coals, and you may eat at any time."
+
+"Is there a chance of meeting with an alligator or a crocodile in this
+stream?"
+
+"Not here."
+
+"Then I'm going to have a bath," and Neal began to undress, Teddy and
+Jake quickly following his example.
+
+During half an hour they had most glorious sport swimming, and then the
+return of the hunters literally laden down with game warned them that it
+was time to prepare for the morning meal.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+THE SEA.
+
+
+After breakfast the voyage was resumed.
+
+The owners of the canoe urged that the party remain in camp until the
+following day, in order as they said, that all hands might be the better
+fitted for the journey; but Cummings decided against such delay in a
+very emphatic manner.
+
+"It is of the greatest importance to these boys that we reach the coast
+at the earliest possible moment," he said, "and there is no good reason
+for halting any longer than is necessary for the purpose of cooking.
+With such a large crew each one can get all the rest he needs, and yet
+not be obliged to do a great amount of labor."
+
+Very unwillingly the Indians took their seats in the boat, and during
+the day the boys saw very much to interest them.
+
+Among the trees were monkeys in regular droves, and the more mischievous
+appeared to think it great sport to follow the craft and pelt the
+occupants with fruit.
+
+Next to these long tailed brutes, black squirrels were the most
+numerous, and had the party been on a hunting excursion it would have
+been possible to load the canoe to the water's edge with this species of
+game.
+
+Now and then a sleek jaguar showed himself. Again a drove of peccaries
+peered out from among the underbrush, and more than once Cummings was
+forced to exert all his authority to prevent the Indians from stopping
+to bag an incautious tapir which had come to the stream for water.
+
+The animals seen on this day's journey were few, however, as compared
+with the birds.
+
+There were times when it seemed as if the channel was literally blocked
+with them, and as the boat advanced they dived under the surface or flew
+with harsh, discordant cries past the travelers' heads.
+
+There were tantales with hard, crooked beaks, white heron, the
+spoon-bill with pink plumage, long necked flamingoes with flaming wings,
+cranes on their stilt-like legs, and teal and ducks in greatest variety.
+
+Only once did Cummings allow any shooting to be done, and then it was to
+bring down a jacana that the boys might see the long spur, sharp as
+steel, which nature has placed under the wing, thus rendering him a
+formidable antagonist even to the boa.
+
+For the noon-day meal there was plenty of provisions left from
+breakfast, and while the canoe was being borne along by the current at
+the rate of three or four miles per hour, the little party regaled
+themselves with meat or fruit as fancy dictated.
+
+When the sun was within an hour of sinking behind the trees the word to
+halt was given, and that they had covered a long distance since morning
+could be told from the alligators and the turtles which were so numerous
+as to often render navigation dangerous.
+
+"You will indulge in no more baths this side of Progresso," Cummings
+said, as the boys leaped ashore just as the long snout of an alligator
+appeared at the very edge of the water, its owner waiting in the hope
+that by falling overboard some of the boatmen would provide him with a
+supper. "The presence of these fellows shows that we are nearing the
+coast, and if they will give us half a chance you shall know the taste
+of fresh water turtle, which is much finer than that of their cousins
+from the sea."
+
+It would have been a very agile alligator who could have stopped Poyor
+in his search for a toothsome morsel, and in a short time two, known as
+hicoteas, were roasting in the midst of a roaring fire.
+
+"While a fellow is traveling in this manner he can't complain of the
+bill of fare," Jake said, in a tone of most perfect content, as he
+helped himself to another portion of the turtle. "With a different kind
+of food at each meal, and all of the primest quality, we ought to grow
+fat."
+
+"More especially since you are not obliged to exert yourself in the
+slightest," Teddy added with a laugh.
+
+"There's a good deal in that also, though I never refuse to do my share
+of the work."
+
+"Except when you feel very tired."
+
+"Well a man must take care of himself, and there are times when it
+becomes absolutely necessary to rest. Say, if we had some of those
+silver images here it wouldn't be a very hard job to carry them, eh?"
+
+"Now don't get back to that subject," Neal said impatiently. "If you are
+so eager to have two or three stop here with Cummings, and make one of
+the party when he tries the venture again."
+
+Jake did not appear inclined to trust his precious body in such a
+dangerous place again, and, the command to go on board the canoe having
+been given, the conversation was brought to an abrupt close.
+
+All night the little craft drifted with the current, more than once
+striking with considerable force the back of a sleeping alligator, and
+neither the boys nor Jake were called upon to stand watch.
+
+Neal offered to do his share of the work; but Cummings would not listen
+to the proposition.
+
+"With six men on board the time of duty for each one is short, and we
+have an opportunity to get more sleep than is really needed. Besides,
+you are not sufficiently acquainted with such sailing to be a very
+valuable assistant at the helm."
+
+When the boys awakened on the second morning the character of their
+surroundings had changed entirely. Instead of being on a narrow,
+swiftly-running stream, they were in a broad lagoon with innumerable
+water-ways leading in every direction, and it had become necessary to
+use the paddles.
+
+"Where are we?" Neal asked in surprise.
+
+"Within less than a day's journey from the sea," Cummings replied. "The
+stream led into this lagoon, and if these Indians know the true course,
+as they claim to do, we shall start direct for Progresso in the morning,
+in good condition for a long tramp."
+
+A short stop was made at a spot where a few trees broke the monotony of
+the scene, and here a second meal of turtle was prepared, Cummings
+saying as the boys began the repast:
+
+"Our water supply is now limited, for that by which we are surrounded
+is brackish if not absolutely salt. I intend to take the greater portion
+of what the men have on board, when we start up the coast, and every
+drop will be needed before the journey is finally ended."
+
+"When did they take it on board?" Teddy asked in surprise, as he learned
+by examination that all the gourds had been filled.
+
+"While you were asleep."
+
+"We can't carry one of these big things."
+
+"By tying a rope of vines around the necks of two I guarantee to get
+along without much trouble, for they will grow lighter every hour."
+
+"Will the journey be a hard one?"
+
+"You mean up the coast? Yes, it will, and what is bound to make it
+particularly bad is the glare of the sun as reflected from the water."
+
+"It can't be any worse than climbing the range, knowing the Indians were
+close behind," Teddy said with evident satisfaction.
+
+"You are right, my boy, and we shall have the pleasure of knowing that
+each step taken is one the less, without any fear of being obliged to
+double back in order to escape enemies."
+
+During nearly the entire day the boys strained their eyes trying to get
+a glimpse of the sea; but not until late in the afternoon was this
+possible.
+
+Then, as the canoe rounded a point, the vast expanse of water lay spread
+out before them, and was greeted with three rousing cheers.
+
+"It begins to look now as if there was some chance of our getting home,"
+Teddy cried excitedly. "We are at least where a vessel can be signaled
+in case anything should prevent us from walking and----"
+
+"Don't flatter yourself that we shall see many sailing crafts within
+hailing distance," Cummings interrupted. "At this point the water is so
+shallow that only the smallest boats venture inshore."
+
+"Never mind, we can see the ocean while tramping along, and know that
+somewhere on it is the steamer which will carry us home."
+
+When the voyage was resumed all hands worked at the paddles, for it was
+quite important, according to Cummings' belief, that they should get out
+of the lagoon before sunset, and the canoe sped on, dashing the spray in
+the air with her bow as if rejoicing that the journey was so nearly
+ended.
+
+There were yet two hours of daylight remaining when the party reached
+the mouth of the narrow channel they had been threading, and to the left
+was the coast, piled high with rocks.
+
+Only through the inlet leading to the lagoon could a landing be effected
+from a vessel, and it was at this point that the hunters had been set
+ashore by the craft on which they had come from Progresso.
+
+There was yet a small supply of provisions on the canoe, and these the
+Indians willingly shared with their passengers. The water gourds were
+divided between the two parties, and, having been paid a good price for
+their labor, by Cummings, the four men departed, not wishing to spend
+the night where fever lurked.
+
+"We don't particularly need rest," Cummings said, when the fugitives
+from the Silver City were alone again; "but it would be foolish to begin
+the last portion of our journey so late at night. We'll carry our
+belongings up the shore a bit, and then camp."
+
+The crooked necks of the water gourds afforded a good handle by which to
+carry them, and, each taking a portion of their sadly depleted outfit,
+the little party followed the leader about a hundred yards from the
+place at which they had landed, to where the huge rocks gave promise of
+a partial shelter.
+
+Now the time had come when both food and water must be husbanded with
+care, and instead of setting out the entire amount for each to
+thoroughly satisfy himself, Cummings divided so much as he thought would
+be sufficient for the meal, giving every one an equal share.
+
+"It is to be short rations for awhile," he said cheerfully. "That will
+be better than to fill ourselves up now, and suffer afterward."
+
+No one could take any exception to this very reasonable precaution, and
+the meal was eaten in the merriest possible fashion.
+
+Then there was nothing to do but wait until morning, when the march was
+to be resumed, and Neal and Teddy occupied their time speculating as to
+what the loved ones at home were doing just at that particular moment.
+
+It was not a remarkably pleasant thing to do, considering how great a
+distance separated them, and when they grew weary of thus making
+themselves mentally uncomfortable, Teddy asked:
+
+"How long do you suppose it will take us to reach Progresso?"
+
+"I hope to be there in about a week."
+
+"And you feel positive there is no chance of hailing a vessel?"
+
+"Just a chance: nothing more. The possibilities are so slight that it
+wouldn't pay to spend any time waiting for a craft to heave in sight."
+
+"What would you do if one should come along to-morrow morning?"
+
+"Try to attract the attention of those on board, of course; but there'll
+be no such good fortune as that, so the best thing we can do is to lie
+down now, for we have a hard day's work before us."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII.
+
+A HAPPY SURPRISE.
+
+
+The monotonous roar of the surf should have lulled the boys to sleep
+very shortly after they lay down on the sand where a number of boulders
+formed a partial shelter; but instead of doing so it appeared to have
+the opposite effect.
+
+For a long while after Cummings and Jake were wrapped in slumber they
+talked of the journey which lay before them, and speculated with heavy
+hearts as to the fate of those who had left the burning yacht in their
+company.
+
+This was a topic of conversation seldom brought up since the day they
+first saw the Silver City, because their peril had been so great as to
+overshadow everything else. Now, however, when it seemed as if they were
+very near home, the fear that but one boat of the four had lived to
+reach the land came to both with painful intensity, and fully half the
+night was spent in trying to persuade themselves that it was well with
+the remainder of the Sea Dream's crew.
+
+When they did finally sink into slumber Poyor was sitting bolt upright
+with his back against a huge block of coral-like rock, looking out over
+the water, and in the morning when Neal opened his eyes the Indian was
+in the same position.
+
+"Have you seen a vessel?" the boy asked.
+
+"There is one," was the calm reply, and Neal sprang to his feet in the
+greatest excitement to see a small, schooner-rigged craft with all sail
+set moving slowly through the water on a parallel line with the coast,
+about three miles away.
+
+In another instant he had awakened the remainder of the party by
+shouting vigorously, as if believing it possible that those on board
+could hear his voice.
+
+"What's the matter?" Cummings asked: but before the question could be
+answered he also saw the craft.
+
+"It looks as if she was bound in our direction, and we had better try to
+attract attention; but you'll never do it by shouting, my boy."
+
+"What shall we do?"
+
+"Build a fire, of course," Jake replied. "They have got plenty of time
+to send a boat ashore, for it is nearly calm, and in another hour there
+won't be so much as a breath of wind."
+
+Before he had ceased speaking Neal and Teddy were running back toward
+the line of trees for wood, and in a short time a cloud of smoke was
+ascending from the shore at the very edge of the water.
+
+While the others continued to bring fuel Poyor sprinkled the flames with
+a bough wet in the sea in order to prevent them from burning too freely,
+and there was no interruption in the work until a flag was raised on the
+schooner's main-mast to signify that the signal would be answered.
+
+"We're in great luck," Cummings said, as he seated himself on one of the
+boulders, for it was no longer necessary to keep the fire burning. "No
+matter where she is bound I don't fancy we shall have much trouble in
+persuading them to put into Progresso, and the tramp up the shore which
+all have been dreading can be avoided."
+
+As a matter of course the entire party were in the best of spirits, and
+to Neal and Teddy the little craft had a particularly friendly look.
+
+The schooner had been headed for the shore when the smoke first began to
+ascend; but the wind was so light that she hardly moved through the
+water, and, after a few moments, the watchers could see that a boat was
+being lowered.
+
+"That dashes some of my hopes," Cummings said with a laugh.
+
+"What do you mean?" Neal asked.
+
+"I thought there might be just a chance that she hailed from Progresso,
+and we should have no trouble in persuading them to do as we wished."
+
+"Why do you think that isn't the case?"
+
+"Because you couldn't find a crew of natives who would willingly row so
+far; the majority would wait for a breeze a week before voluntarily
+performing so much labor."
+
+The boys watched the boat as she approached slowly, and when she neared
+the shore both they and Jake started in surprise, scrutinized her more
+intently, and then looking at each other as if in fear.
+
+"What is the matter?" Cummings asked, and Neal replied slowly:
+
+"The man who is steering resembles Mr. Walters, the sailing master of
+the Sea Dream, that is all."
+
+"It _is_ him!" Teddy cried excitedly. "I am certain of it now; but how
+did he get here in that schooner?"
+
+As a matter of course the question could not be answered by his
+companions, and all waited with the liveliest signs of impatience until
+the gentleman was within hailing distance, and then Neal shouted:
+
+"Is that really you, Mr. Walters?"
+
+"To the best of my knowledge it is," was the laughing reply. "Are you
+all well?"
+
+"In first-class condition. Where is father?"
+
+"On board the schooner. I will give the signal to let him know the crew
+of the yacht have all been saved."
+
+As he spoke he discharged a revolver, and the waving of the flag told
+that the good news was understood.
+
+"Not all, Mr. Walters, the three sailors in our boat were drowned while
+trying to land on this coast."
+
+"It is too late now to rectify the mistake. I hoped when I saw so many
+that there had been no disaster."
+
+By this time the little craft had been rowed around the point of the
+lagoon where it was possible to effect a landing without danger of being
+swamped, and the sailing master leaped ashore to welcome by hearty
+handshakes those whom he had feared were dead.
+
+Cummings and Poyor were introduced, and then Neal asked:
+
+"Where did you get the schooner?"
+
+"Chartered her to hunt for you; but Mr. Emery shall tell the story. Will
+you come aboard now?"
+
+"You are to go with us," Neal said, turning quickly toward Cummings.
+
+"I hardly know what to do. It would probably be wisest for Poyor and I
+to begin the homeward march since there is no longer any necessity of
+going to Progresso."
+
+"But you must see my father. Time is not so precious just now but that
+you can afford to spend another day in our company."
+
+"It shall be as you say," Cummings replied laughingly. "I hesitated only
+because the sooner our long tramp comes to an end the more comfortable I
+shall feel in mind."
+
+Jake and Teddy had already clambered into the boat; the others followed,
+and the little craft, loaded down nearly to the water's edge, was rowed
+out toward the schooner.
+
+It is not necessary to make any attempt at trying to describe the
+reception the castaways met with from the remainder of the yacht's crew,
+nor the manner in which Poyor and Cummings were welcomed.
+
+After the heartiest greetings had been exchanged Mr. Emery and the
+sailing master asked for an account of the landing and subsequent
+wanderings, and it is safe to say that they were treated to a wilder
+story than they had ever dreamed of hearing.
+
+Mr. Walters was at first disposed to look upon it as a "yarn;" but the
+souvenir which Jake carried on his face was evidence that could not be
+doubted, and Cummings soon convinced the skeptical sailing master that
+the Chan Santa Cruz really had an existence.
+
+"That is an adventure I would like to have," he finally said in a tone
+of enthusiasm. "I can't understand why it shouldn't be possible to hit
+upon some hiding place within half a mile of the city, and on a stormy
+night, for instance, lug away precious metal enough to make ourselves
+rich."
+
+"That and more can be done if one has patience and discretion."
+
+"Now we're where there's little doubt about gettin' home you may rap at
+me as often as you please," Jake said with a hearty laugh. "I admit
+having acted like a fool; but so long as nothing serious came of it,
+except the cut on my own cheek, it isn't a hanging matter."
+
+"I haven't a relative in this world," Mr. Walters continued, "and now
+the Sea Dream has gone down would be obliged to look around for a job,
+therefore if you'll accept me as a comrade I'll stay here instead of
+going back to the states."
+
+"Do you really mean to enter upon such a wild venture?" Mr. Emery asked
+in surprise.
+
+"Most certainly. What is to prevent?"
+
+"Nothing that I know of; but it seems little less than suicide to go
+there after the Indians have been so thoroughly aroused."
+
+"We shall not make the attempt for several months, perhaps a year,"
+Cummings added.
+
+"Where would you propose to stop? Here?"
+
+"How far do you intend to go in this schooner?"
+
+"To the nearest port where we can find a steamer bound for the United
+States."
+
+"That is Progresso, and if you have no objections Poyor and I will
+accompany you there. We need some supplies from Merida, and if Mr.
+Walters is of the same mind when we arrive I shall be more than pleased
+to have him go with us."
+
+"The vessel is at your disposal. We will land you at any point, and I
+yet have sufficient money with me to pay Walters' wages and make him a
+slight advance if he needs it."
+
+"Very little will be required if he joins Poyor and myself. The cost of
+living in this country is small, for nature provides bountifully."
+
+The captain of the schooner, a full-blooded negro, was told to head his
+craft for Progresso as soon as the wind should spring up again, and then
+Mr. Emery asked many questions concerning the city the boys had seen,
+while their answers only made the sailing master more eager to remain
+with Cummings.
+
+"This is hardly fair," Neal finally said. "All the time we have been
+telling you of our adventures, and not one word have we heard regarding
+your movements. I would like to know where the three boats we out-sailed
+went to on the night after leaving the yacht, and where this schooner
+was found?"
+
+"It is not a long story," Mr. Emery replied. "When you disappeared in
+the darkness we continued on the same course, and succeeded in keeping
+the three boats well together. At sunrise your craft was not in sight.
+We held on all that day and the next, finally arriving at Cozumel where
+we stayed three days in the hope you would appear. Then this schooner
+touched at the island, and I chartered her to search for you. We have
+been cruising up and down the coast ever since, for it seemed positive
+your boat reached the land in this immediate vicinity."
+
+"How long would you have stayed here?"
+
+"Not many days more, for we had begun to believe you were picked up by a
+vessel. Knowing Jake could handle a small craft better, perhaps than any
+other member of the crew, and also that she was the most seaworthy of
+the four tenders, it did not seem reasonable she had foundered while the
+others went through in safety."
+
+"Then we came out just in time."
+
+"Yes, for I had no idea you could be so far up this way, and we should
+have left the locality as soon as the wind would permit."
+
+Jake wanted to ask the sailing master how it happened that he had made
+such a mistake in his reckoning; but it was a delicate question, and he
+thought it best to wait until Mr. Walters had left them, when Neal's
+father could probably give the desired explanation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII.
+
+HOMEWARD BOUND.
+
+
+One can readily fancy what a feeling of perfect content had come over
+the boys after finding themselves once more with nearly all the crew of
+the Sea Dream.
+
+There was no longer anything to cause anxiety; the vengeful Indians had
+been left far behind, and the fear of an attack was among the things of
+the past.
+
+"I used to think it would be mighty nice to go into some such place as
+we have just left," Neal said to Teddy, while the two were sitting under
+the awning aft, some distance from their companions; "but now we know
+what the reality is like, I've had enough."
+
+"I suppose our story would sound pretty fair if it was put into a book;
+but whoever wrote it couldn't be all the time telling about how hungry
+and tired we were, how the mosquitoes and flies nearly ate us up, how
+thoroughly we were frightened the greater portion of the time, nor how
+disagreeable it is to be where there's precious little chance for a
+fellow to keep clean."
+
+"That is why adventures seem so nice when you read about them, for all
+the trifling things which serve to make a person uncomfortable in both
+body and mind are omitted."
+
+"Yes," Teddy said very emphatically, "one day would be enough for any
+fellow I know, and the idea of going where there is likely to be plenty
+of chance for adventure will never again have any fascination for me."
+
+In this strain the boys talked until dinner was served on deck, which
+was not a particularly well cooked meal, after which the conversation
+became general.
+
+The re-united party spoke chiefly of Mr. Walters' determination to
+remain with Cummings, and while listening to it Jake forgot all else
+save the wonderful sights he had seen in the famous city.
+
+"I have a good mind to stay with you," he finally said. "The idea that I
+have been where silver could be had for the labor of carrying it away,
+and didn't get any, makes me angry with myself. Now that Mr. Walters has
+concluded to try his hand at it I believe I'll do the same thing."
+
+Poyor looked up quickly, shook his head very decidedly, and Cummings
+said emphatically:
+
+"Then it will be necessary for you to go alone; I've been there once
+with you, and it was only by the rarest good fortune that we succeeded
+in coming away alive, therefore I'm not disposed to try the same
+dangerous experiment again."
+
+"I suppose you think I would make a fool of myself once more?"
+
+"I am positive of it. When your opinion chanced to be at variance with
+ours you would go straight on without giving the slightest heed to the
+consequences. It is best for you to stay with the boys."
+
+Jake had nothing more to say; but later in the day he told Neal and
+Teddy privately that he believed he would venture into the swamp alone.
+
+"I could do it as well as Poyor can. They want to make out that it is a
+very dangerous venture."
+
+"You thought the same on the night when that beautiful scar was
+presented, and also when you wandered away from the cave, unable to find
+your way back," Neal replied with a laugh.
+
+Then Jake had a desperate fit of the sulks from which he did not recover
+until the schooner was standing up the coast under the influence of the
+strong night breeze.
+
+The voyage to Progresso from this time on occupied but a few hours. The
+clumsy looking vessel proved to be a good sailor, and on the following
+afternoon she had dropped anchor in the harbor, twenty-four hours before
+the next steamer was advertised to leave.
+
+There was yet plenty of chance to bid good-by to those who intended to
+remain behind, and the last moments were spent together rather than
+visit the quaint town, for no one could say whether they would meet
+again.
+
+Jake made no further preparation to join the treasure seekers, and Neal
+felt positive that if they had allowed him to make one of the party his
+courage would have failed him at the last minute.
+
+Not until a late hour in the night was there any attempt to break up the
+gathering. Each felt a certain repugnance to so doing, and if Mr. Emery
+had not finally insisted on retiring all might have remained under the
+awning until morning.
+
+"It is good-by as well as good-night," Cummings said as he arose. "We do
+not care to stay here very long for fear some of the Chan Santa Cruz may
+recognize us, and by daybreak I propose to be on our way to Merida, from
+which point we shall return to the hut where we first saw the
+castaways."
+
+"We can at least count on hearing from you," Mr. Emery said. "The boys
+will be eager to learn how your venture succeeded."
+
+"It is not convenient to post a letter where a journey of fifty miles on
+foot is necessary to reach a mailing place; but you shall hear from us
+at the first favorable opportunity."
+
+With Jake, Cummings and Poyor spent but little time; neither had any
+especial love for him after all that had happened; but with the boys the
+Indian was almost affectionate.
+
+"If the gods will listen to Poyor's prayer your lives shall be free from
+clouds," he said gravely, and laying his hands on their heads he went
+through a certain ceremony as if blessing them, after which he did not
+speak again.
+
+If good wishes were of any avail both Walters and Cummings should have
+succeeded in their attempt to carry away treasure from the Silver City;
+but whether they have yet been able to do so neither Neal nor Teddy
+know, for not a word has been heard from them since that parting in the
+harbor at Progresso.
+
+The trip home was as uneventful as is usually the case when one travels
+on a steam vessel, and at about the time when the Sea Dream should have
+arrived the castaways landed in New York before the news of the yacht's
+destruction had been learned.
+
+As a consequence neither Teddy's parents nor Neal's mother had been
+anxious concerning them, and the home coming was a very tame affair, as
+compared with what both had been through.
+
+Even at this late day the boys are speculating as to whether the white
+men and the Indian ever succeeded in their desires, and both believe the
+news will soon come that Cummings has been able to read the inscriptions
+on the monuments at Copan by the aid of his researches in the Silver
+City.
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Search for the Silver City, by James Otis
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SEARCH FOR THE SILVER CITY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21268.txt or 21268.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/6/21268/
+
+Produced by Jana Srna, Suzanne Shell and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/21268.zip b/21268.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6001e49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21268.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21c2e3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #21268 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21268)